diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-0.txt | 8774 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 130812 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 732845 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h/36377-h.htm | 13607 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h/images/i001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 187897 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h/images/i002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 100961 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h/images/i003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 22555 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h/images/i004.jpg | bin | 0 -> 101107 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h/images/i005.jpg | bin | 0 -> 99980 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377-h/images/i006.jpg | bin | 0 -> 101776 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377.txt | 8770 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36377.zip | bin | 0 -> 129240 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
15 files changed, 31167 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/36377-0.txt b/36377-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..710bd35 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8774 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Dave Porter on Cave Island, by Edward Stratemeyer + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Dave Porter on Cave Island + A Schoolboy's Mysterious Mission + +Author: Edward Stratemeyer + +Illustrator: Richard Boehm + +Release Date: July 3, 2011 [EBook #36377] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank, David Edwards and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + + + + +[Illustration: “Empty!” murmured Dave sadly. “Empty!”—_Page 217._] + + + + + Dave Porter Series + + DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND + + OR + + A SCHOOLBOY’S MYSTERIOUS MISSION + + BY + + EDWARD STRATEMEYER + + Author of “Dave Porter at Oak Hall,” “Dave Porter in the South Seas,” + “The Gun Club Boys of Lakeport,” “Old Glory Series,” + “Pan-American Series,” etc. + + _ILLUSTRATED BY H. RICHARD BOEHM_ + + + BOSTON + LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. + + + + + Published, March, 1912 + Copyright, 1912, by Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co. + + _All Rights Reserved_ + + Dave Porter on Cave Island + + Norwood Press + Berwick and Smith Co. + Norwood, Mass. + U. S. A. + + + + + PREFACE + +“Dave Porter on Cave Island” is a complete story in itself but forms the +eighth volume in a line issued under the general title of “Dave Porter +Series.” + +The opening tale of this series, called “Dave Porter at Oak Hall,” +related the adventures of a wide-awake lad at a typical boarding school +of to-day. This was followed by “Dave Porter in the South Seas,” whither +our hero had gone to find his father, and then by “Dave Porter’s Return +to School.” + +From Oak Hall, Dave journeyed to Norway, as related in “Dave Porter in +the Far North.” On his return to this country he once more attended +school, as told of in “Dave Porter and His Classmates.” Dave made a host +of friends and likewise a few enemies, and some of the latter plotted to +do him much harm. + +When vacation came once more, Dave received an invitation to visit a +home in the far west, and what he did on that trip has been set forth in +“Dave Porter at Star Ranch.” Then, when vacation days were at an end, he +came back to Oak Hall, as related in the seventh volume of this series, +entitled, “Dave Porter and His Rivals.” + +In the present book we find Dave again at school. But the Christmas +holidays are at hand and the lad returns home. Here a most mysterious +and unlooked-for happening occurs, and Dave’s great benefactor, Mr. +Wadsworth, is on the verge of ruin because of it. Dave gets a clew to +the mystery, and, with his chums, resolves to investigate. He takes a +long journey and has a number of stirring adventures, the particulars of +which are given in the pages that follow. + +When I started this line of books I trusted that Dave might please the +boys, but I did not imagine that so many thousands of boys and girls all +over the land would clamor as they have for more concerning the doings +of my hero. I thank all for their appreciation of my efforts to please +them, and I sincerely trust that the reading of this new volume will be +a benefit to them. + + Edward Stratemeyer. + _February_ 1, 1912. + + + + + CONTENTS + + CHAPTER PAGE + I. The Schoolboy Chums 1 + II. A Glimpse at the Past 16 + III. What Dave Had to Tell 18 + IV. The Schoolboy Hunters 28 + V. A Tramp Through the Snow 38 + VI. Good-by to Oak Hall 48 + VII. Nat Poole’s Revelation 58 + VIII. A Merry Christmas 63 + IX. Nat Poole Gets Caught 78 + X. What Happened at the Jewelry Works 88 + XI. Looking for the Robbers 98 + XII. The Telltale Cigarette Box 108 + XIII. Dark Days 118 + XIV. Off for the South 128 + XV. Something About White Mice 138 + XVI. Picking up the Trail 147 + XVII. Meeting Old Friends 157 + XVIII. Off for Barbados 167 + XIX. The Missing Ship 177 + XX. Landing on Cave Island 187 + XXI. Into a Cave and Out 197 + XXII. The Hurricane 207 + XXIII. A Strange Discovery 217 + XXIV. Jasniff and Merwell 227 + XXV. Link Merwell’s Story 237 + XXVI. The Column of Smoke 247 + XXVII. Behind the Curtain of Vines 257 + XXVIII. In Which the Enemy Sails Away 267 + XXIX. A Chase on the Ocean 277 + XXX. Homeward Bound—Conclusion 287 + + + + +DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND + + + + +CHAPTER I—THE SCHOOLBOY CHUMS + + +“Come on, fellows, if you are going! It’s a good six-mile skate to +Squirrel Island, and we’ve got to hustle if we want to get there in time +for lunch.” + +“Wait till I fix my right skate, Dave,” returned Phil Lawrence. “I don’t +want to lose it on the way.” + +“Say, that puts me in mind of a story,” came from another of the group +of schoolboys who were adjusting their skates. “Once a man asked for a +pair of skates for——” + +“Stow it, Shadow!” interrupted Dave Porter. “We haven’t any time now to +listen to stories. You can tell them while we are resting up at the +island.” + +“Shadow can tell stories while we put away the lunch,” observed Roger +Morr, with a grin. + +“Not much!” cried the lad mentioned. “I guess that skate will make me as +hungry as anybody—and the stories will keep.” + +“I thought Ben Basswood was going, too?” came from another of the +schoolboys. + +“Here he comes, Lazy,” answered Dave, and as he spoke he pointed to a +path across the snow-covered campus, along which another boy was +hurrying, skates in hand. + +“Co-couldn’t get here an-any so-sooner!” panted Ben, as he dropped on a +bench to adjust his skates. “Old Haskers made me do some extra work in +Latin! Wow, but don’t I love that man!” + +“We all do,” answered Phil. “We are going to get up a testimonial to +him. A silver-mounted——” + +“Slice of punk, with an ancient lemon on top,” finished Dave. “It’s just +what he’s been waiting for.” And at this sally there was a general +laugh. + +“Well, I’m ready,” went on Phil, as he arose from the bench. “Say, but +isn’t it just a glorious day for the outing?” he added, casting his eyes +around and drawing in a deep breath of the pure, cold air. + +“It couldn’t be better, Phil,” answered Dave. “And we ought to have a +fine time at the island, bringing down rabbits and squirrels. Old Jerry +Lusk told me that hunting was never better.” + +“What’s the matter with having some of the rabbits and squirrels for +lunch?” asked Sam Day. + +“Perhaps we can cook them, Sam,” returned Dave. “But we had better +depend on the lunch hamper for something to eat. By the way, we’ll have +to take turns carrying the hamper. It is rather heavy.” + +“Chip Macklin and I are going to carry it first,” said a tall, strong +youth named Gus Plum. “It’s not so very heavy, although it is filled +with good things.” + +“Don’t lose it, on your life!” cried Phil. + +“Lose it!” echoed Roger Morr. “Banish the thought! We’ll form a guard +around Gus and Chip, so they can’t get away with it on the sly.” + +“Not so much as a doughnut must be eaten until we reach the island and +start a campfire,” said Dave. “Those are orders from headquarters,” he +added, with a grand flourish. + +“Orders accepted, admiral!” cried Gus, and made a bow so profound that +his skates went from under him, sending him to his knees. This caused a +wild laugh, and the powerfully-built youth got up in a hurry, looking +rather sheepish. + +“I’m ready now,” said Ben, as he left the bench and settled his skating +cap on his head. “Come on, let’s get away before old Haskers calls us +back for something or other. He just loves to spoil a fellow’s outing.” + +“There he is at one of the windows!” cried Roger, pointing back to the +school building. “I really believe he is beckoning to us!” + +“Don’t look,” cautioned Dave. “He’ll want us to go back, to put away +some books, or clean our desks, or something. Doctor Clay said we could +take this outing, and I’m not going to let any teacher spoil it. +Forward!” and away from the shore he skated, with his chums around him. +They had scarcely covered a distance of a dozen yards when a window was +thrown up hastily, and Job Haskers thrust his head through the opening. + +“Boys! boys!” called out the Oak Hall teacher. “Wait a minute! I want to +know where you are going, and if all of you have finished studying.” + +“Don’t look back, and don’t answer!” said Roger, in a hoarse whisper. + +“Give the school yell!” suggested Phil. + +“Just the thing!” returned Sam Day. “Now then, all together!” And an +instant later through the clear, wintry air, rang the well-known Oak +Hall slogan: + + “Baseball! + Football! + Oak Hall + Has the call! + Biff! Boom! Bang! Whoop!” + +Three times the boys gave the cry, and by that time they had skated far +up the river and out of sight of the window at which the teacher was +standing. Job Haskers looked after them glumly, and then closed the +window with a bang. + +“They must have heard me—I don’t see how they could help it,” he +muttered to himself. “Such disrespect! I’ll make them toe the mark for +it when they get back! Bah! Doctor Clay is altogether too easy with the +boys. If I were running this school I’d make them mind!” And the teacher +shut his teeth grimly. He was a man who thought that the boys ought to +spend all their time in studying. The hours devoted to outdoor exercise +he considered practically wasted. He was too short-sighted to realize +that, in order to have a perfectly sound mind, one must likewise have a +sound body. + +“He’ll have it in for us when we get back,” murmured Chip Macklin. “My! +how he does love to stop a fellow’s fun!” + +“Don’t worry,” chimed in Roger. “Sufficient unto the hour is the lecture +thereof. Let us enjoy this outing while it lasts, and let come what will +when we get back.” + +“Which puts me in mind of another story,” broke in Shadow Hamilton. “A +fellow used to eat too much, and he had to take his medicine regularly, +to keep from getting indigestion. So once—wow!” And Shadow broke off +short, for Phil had suddenly put out his foot, sending the story-teller +of Oak Hall sprawling. + +“So he had to take his medicine,” repeated Dave, gravely. + +“Did the medicine agree with him?” asked Roger, innocently. + +“He took it lying down, didn’t he?” questioned Gus. + +“I’ll ‘medicine’ you!” roared Shadow, as he scrambled to his feet. Then +he made a wild dash after the youth who had tripped him up, but Phil had +skated on ahead and he took good care that Shadow did not catch him. “I +won’t tell you another story for a year!” the story-teller growled, +after the chase was at an end. + +“Phew! Shadow says he is going to reform!” murmured Ben. + +“Let it pass, Shadow!” cried Dave, not wishing the story-teller to take +the matter too seriously. “You can tell all the stories you please +around the campfire. But just now let us push on as fast as we can. I +want a chance to do some rabbit and squirrel hunting, and you know we’ve +got to be back on time, or we’ll have trouble with Doctor Clay as well +as with old Haskers.” + +“Yes, and I want to take some pictures before it gets too dark,” said +Sam, who had his camera along. + +“Do you know what Horsehair told me?” came from Roger. “He said we were +fixing for another snowstorm.” + +“It doesn’t look so now,” returned Dave. “But Horsehair generally hits +it on the weather, so maybe we’ll catch it before we get back.” + +“Wonder if we’ll meet any of the Rockville cadets?” remarked Phil, as he +and Dave forged to the front, they knowing the way up the river better +than did some of the others. + +“It is possible, Phil. All of them have guns, and I should think they +would like to go hunting.” + +“I guess most of their firearms are rifles, not fowling-pieces.” + +“Not more than half—I learned that from Mallory, when we played hockey. +He said they had some shotguns just for hunting and camping out +purposes.” + +“Well, those chaps have a holiday to-day, the same as we have, so some +of them may be up around Squirrel Island. But I’d rather not meet them,” +and Dave’s face became serious. + +“Humph! If those military academy fellows try to play any tricks on us I +reckon we can give ’em as good as they send,” growled Phil. + +“To be sure we can, Phil. But I’d rather keep out of trouble to-day and +have some good, clean sport. I haven’t been hunting this season and I’m +just itching to draw a bead on a fat bunny, or squirrel, or some +partridges. You know, I used to go hunting in the woods around +Crumville, when I was home.” + +“Why, of course! Didn’t Roger and I go along once? But we didn’t get +much that trip, although we did get into a lively row with Nat Poole.” + +“Oh, yes, I remember now. I wish——” And then Dave Porter came to a +sudden silence. + +“What is it, Dave?” and Phil looked closely at his chum. + +“Oh, not much,” was the evasive answer. + +“But I know something is worrying you,” insisted the shipowner’s son. +“I’ve noticed it for several days, and Roger noticed it, too.” + +“Roger?” + +“Yes. He came to me yesterday and said that he was sure you had +something on your mind. Now, maybe it is none of our business, Dave. But +if I and Roger can help you in any way, you know we’ll be only too glad +to do it.” Phil spoke in a low but earnest voice. + +“Hi, what’s doing in the front rank?” cried a cheery voice at this +juncture, and Roger Morr skated swiftly up beside Dave and Phil. + +“I’m glad you came,” said Phil, and he looked at the senator’s son in a +peculiar fashion. “I was just speaking to Dave about how we had noticed +something was wrong, and how we were willing to help him, if he needed +us.” + +“Sure, we’ll help you every time, Dave; you know that,” returned Roger, +quickly. + +“I don’t know that I need any help,” answered Dave, slowly. “The fact of +the matter is, I don’t know what can be done.” + +“Then something is wrong?” cried both of his chums. + +“Yes, if you must know. I was going to keep it to myself, for I didn’t +think it would do any good to tell about it. I’ll tell you, but I don’t +want it to go any further, unless it becomes necessary to speak.” + +“Before you tell us, let me make a guess about this,” said Phil. “Some +of your old enemies are trying to make trouble for you, is that right?” + +“Yes.” + +“And those enemies are Link Merwell and Nick Jasniff,” cried Roger. + +“Yes, again,” answered Dave. + +“What are they up to now, Dave?” The eager question came from Phil. + +“They are up to a number of things,” was the grave response of Dave +Porter. “They are evidently going to do their best to disgrace my family +and myself, and ruin us.” + + + + +CHAPTER II—A GLIMPSE AT THE PAST + + +“Disgrace you and ruin you!” cried Roger, in amazement. + +“That is what it looks like,” answered Dave. “I can account for their +actions in no other way.” + +“Tell us just what is going on,” urged Phil. “You know you can trust us +to keep it a secret.” + +“I will tell you everything,” answered Dave. “But first let us skate up +a little faster, so that the others won’t catch a word of what is said.” +And with that he struck out more rapidly than ever, and his two chums +did likewise. + +To those who have read the former volumes of this series, Dave Porter +will need no introduction. For the benefit of others let me state that +my hero had had a varied career, starting when he was but a child of a +few years. At that time he had been found wandering along the railroad +tracks near the town of Crumville. As nobody claimed him, he was placed +in a local poorhouse and later bound out to a broken-down college +professor, Caspar Potts, who had taken up farming for his health. + +Professor Potts was in the grasp of a miserly money-lender of Crumville +named Aaron Poole, who had a son Nat, who could not get along at all +with Dave. Mr. Poole was about to foreclose a mortgage on the +professor’s place and sell him out when something occurred that was the +means of changing the whole course of the professor’s own life and that +of the youth who lived with him. + +On the outskirts of Crumville lived Mr. Oliver Wadsworth, a wealthy +manufacturer, with his wife and daughter Jessie. One day the gasoline +tank of an automobile took fire and little Jessie was in danger of being +burned to death. Dave rushed to her assistance and beat out the flames, +and thus saved her. For this Mr. Wadsworth was very grateful. He made +some inquiries concerning Caspar Potts and Dave, and learning that +Professor Potts had been one of his former college instructors, he made +the old gentleman come and live with him. + +“Dave shall go to boarding school and get a good education,” said Mr. +Wadsworth. And how Dave went has been told in detail in the first volume +of this series, entitled “Dave Porter at Oak Hall.” With Dave went Ben +Basswood, his one boy friend in Crumville. + +At Oak Hall, a fine seat of learning, located on the Leming River, in +one of our eastern states, Dave made a number of warm friends, including +Phil Lawrence, the son of a rich shipowner; Roger Morr, whose father was +a United States senator; Maurice Hamilton, usually called Shadow, who +was noted for his sleep-walking and the stories he loved to tell; Sam +Day, known throughout the school as Lazy, why nobody could tell, since +Sam at times was unusually active, and a score of others, some of whom +have already been introduced. He also made, in those days, one enemy, +Gus Plum. But Gus had since reformed, and was now as good a friend as +any of the rest. + +What troubled Dave most of all in those days was the question of his +identity. How he started to find out who he was has been related in my +second volume, called “Dave Porter in the South Seas.” There he did not +meet his father, as he had hoped, but he did meet his uncle, Dunston +Porter, and learned much concerning his father, David Breslow Porter, +and also his sister Laura, then traveling in Europe. + +When Dave came back to Oak Hall, as related in “Dave Porter’s Return to +School,” he met many of his friends and succeeded in making himself more +popular than ever. But some lads were jealous of our hero’s success, and +two of them, Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell, did what they could to get +Dave into trouble, being aided in part by Nat Poole, the son of the +miserly money-lender, who had followed Dave to the school. The plots +against Dave were exposed, and in sheer fright Nick Jasniff ran away and +went to Europe. + +Dave had been expecting right along to meet his father and his sister, +and when they did not return to this country, and did not send word, he +grew anxious, and started out to find them, as related in detail in +“Dave Porter in the Far North.” It was in Norway that Dave first saw his +parent, a meeting as strange as it was affecting. + +After his trip to the Land of the Midnight Sun, our hero returned once +again to school, as related in “Dave Porter and His Classmates.” Jasniff +had not returned, but Link Merwell was still at hand, and likewise the +lordly Nat Poole, and they did what they could to make our hero’s life +miserable. In the end Merwell did something that was particularly +despicable and this caused Dave to take the law into his own hands and +he gave the bully the thrashing that he well deserved. Merwell wanted to +retaliate in some manner, but in the midst of his plotting, word of his +wrongdoings reached the head of the school and he was ordered to pack up +and leave, which he did in great rage. + +While Dave was off hunting for his father and his sister, Laura Porter +had been visiting her friend, Belle Endicott, at Mr. Endicott’s ranch in +the far west. Belle was anxious to meet her girl chum’s newly-found +brother, and this led to a visit to the ranch, as told of in “Dave +Porter at Star Ranch.” Here Dave again met Link Merwell, and proved that +the latter had been aiding some horse-thieves in their wicked work. Mr. +Merwell had to settle a heavy bill because of his son’s actions, and +then, for a short space of time, Link disappeared. + +With the coming of fall, Dave and his chums returned to Oak Hall, as +related in the volume preceding this, called “Dave Porter and His +Rivals.” As his chief enemies had left the school, he did not anticipate +much trouble, yet trouble came in a manner somewhat out of the ordinary. +Nat Poole joined a group of students who had come to Oak Hall from +another school, and the crowd did what it could to get Dave and his +friends off the football eleven. Then, when Dave had once more fought +his way to the front, came word that Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell were +again “after his scalp,” as Roger expressed it. Jasniff and Merwell were +then attending a rival institution of learning known as Rockville +Military Academy. + +“Be careful, or they’ll play you some dirty trick, Dave,” said Phil, +warningly. + +“I’ve got my eyes open,” replied Dave. + +In a rather unusual manner Dave had become acquainted with a man named +Hooker Montgomery, a fake doctor, who traveled around the country +selling medicines that he made himself. This man asked Dave to call on +him, and when the youth did so he was suddenly seized from behind, made +a prisoner, and carried off in a sleigh and then in an automobile. At +first he did not know what to make of it, but at last learned that he +was being held, for some purpose, by Merwell, Jasniff, Montgomery, and +the fourth man, a mere tool. He watched his chance, and, at length, +escaped, much to his enemies’ chagrin. + +“Have them all arrested,” was the advice of Dave’s chums, but this was +not easy, since all of the evil-doers had disappeared. Then, one day, +while on a sleigh-ride to a distant town, the boys fell in with Hooker +Montgomery. The fake doctor was practically “down and out,” as he +himself expressed it, and said he would do anything for Dave, provided +he was not prosecuted. + +“It was all a plot gotten up by those two, Jasniff and Merwell,” said +Hooker Montgomery. “They promised me some money if I would help them, +but I never got a cent.” Then he said that Jasniff and Merwell were in +town. + +“We’ll locate them,” said Dave, but this was not accomplished until +later, when the pair of rascals were encountered at a railroad office. +Our hero and his chums tried to stop Jasniff and Merwell, but the +rascals rushed through a crowd and got aboard a train; and that was the +last seen of them for the time being. The boys might have gone after the +pair, but they had an important hockey game to play, and when they +administered a stinging defeat to Oak Hall’s ancient rival, Rockville +Academy, Dave, for the time being, forgot that he had an enemy in the +world. + +“Two weeks more of the grind, boys!” cried Dave, on the following +Monday. “And then home for the holidays.” + +“Right you are,” answered Phil. “But, oh, those two weeks!” + +On Wednesday one of Dave’s chums celebrated his birthday, and among the +presents received was a very fine double-barreled shotgun. This lad +immediately wanted to go hunting; and the result was that the boys +applied to Doctor Clay for permission to go to Squirrel Island, up the +river, on a hunting expedition, the following Saturday. There was just +sufficient snow on the ground to make rabbit and squirrel tracking good, +and the boys were told that they might remain away all day. Six of them +had guns and two had revolvers, and they carried in addition a +good-sized hamper of provisions for lunch. + +“Now, boys, be careful and don’t shoot yourselves or anybody else,” said +Doctor Clay, with a smile, when Dave, Roger, and Phil left the school +building. “Don’t fire at anything until you are certain of what it is. +Every hunting season somebody is killed through the sheer carelessness +of somebody else.” + +“We’ll be careful,” answered Dave. + +“Do you think you’ll get any game?” And the doctor continued to smile. + +“I hope to bring you at least a brace of rabbits or squirrels, Doctor.” + +“Well, I wish you luck. And don’t stay too late,” returned the head of +the school, and then with a pleasant nod he dismissed them. + +Dave, Roger, and Phil were the first at the place of meeting, but they +were quickly joined by all the others except Ben. + +“I’ll tell you what, Phil,” said the senator’s son, when he had a chance +to talk to Phil alone. “Something is wrong with Dave. He isn’t himself +at all. Can’t you see it?” + +“Of course I can, Roger,” was the reply of the shipowner’s son. “If I +get a chance to speak to him about it, I am going to do so. But I’ve got +to be careful—I don’t want to hurt his feelings.” + +“When you do speak, give me the sign, so I can hear what he has to say, +too,” went on Roger, and to this Phil agreed. Then came the start up the +river, and a little later Phil broached the subject, and Dave made the +dismaying announcement that Jasniff and Merwell were doing their best to +bring disgrace to himself and his family and ruin them. + + + + +CHAPTER III—WHAT DAVE HAD TO TELL + + +“It’s rather a long story, and I scarcely know how to begin,” said Dave, +after he, Phil, and Roger had skated ahead and to the right, where the +others were not likely to overhear the conversation. “But, to begin +with, Jasniff and Merwell have been to Crumville since they left here in +such a hurry, and—I have some reason to believe—they have been here in +town, too.” + +“Here!” cried the shipowner’s son. + +“Yes.” + +“Why didn’t you tell us of this before?” asked Roger. + +“I didn’t know of it until lately, and I didn’t want to worry you over +my private affairs.” + +“But what have they done?” demanded Phil, impatiently. + +“As I said before, Phil, I hardly know how to begin to tell you. But to +plunge right in. In the first place, when they were in Crumville they +followed my sister Laura and Jessie Wadsworth to a concert by a college +glee club. They forced their attentions on the two girls, and gave +outsiders an impression that they had come as escorts. The girls were so +upset over it that Laura wrote me that Jessie was actually sick. Two +days after that, when the girls were out walking one evening, Jasniff +and Merwell followed them, and right on the main street, near the +post-office, they came up and commenced to talk and Merwell said to +Laura, loud enough for half a dozen folks to hear: ’You’ve got to keep +your word—you can’t go back on us like that.’ And Jasniff added: ‘Yes, +you girls were glad enough to let us give you a good time before, down +at the Rainbow.’ The Rainbow is a ten-cent moving-picture place, and a +low one at that. Of course there wasn’t a word of truth in it, but +Merwell and Jasniff gave folks the impression that Laura and Jessie had +been going out with them, and you know how such reports spread in a +small town like Crumville.” + +“The hounds!” exclaimed the senator’s son, wrathfully. “They should have +been run out of town!” + +“Why didn’t the girls tell your folks?” asked Phil. + +“They did, as soon as they got home, and my father, Uncle Dunston, and +Mr. Wadsworth went out to look for Merwell and Jasniff, but they were +not to be found. But that was only the beginning. The next day an old +lady came to the house with a letter she had picked up in the +post-office. It was addressed to Link Merwell and had my sister’s name +signed to it, and stated that she was sorry they had quarreled and +wouldn’t he please forgive her and take her to the dance as promised? Of +course the whole thing was a forgery, and it was dropped in the +post-office just to make talk. I suppose Merwell thought some chatterbox +would pick it up and spread the news.” + +“But what is his game?” queried the shipowner’s son. “I don’t see how he +is going to gain anything by such actions.” + +“He wants to ruin our reputations, just as he and Jasniff have ruined +their own. But I haven’t told you all yet. A day later my father heard +of another letter being found, in which Laura and Jessie promised to go +off on a joy-ride in an auto with Merwell and Jasniff. Then Merwell and +Jasniff appeared in Crumville with a stunning touring car, and they had +two girls with them, loudly dressed and heavily veiled, and the whole +four tooted horns, and sang, and behaved in anything but a becoming +fashion. A good many folks thought the veiled girls must be Laura and +Jessie, and you can imagine how my sister and her friend felt when they +heard of it.” + +“Those chaps ought to be arrested,” murmured Phil. + +“And tarred and feathered,” added the senator’s son. + +“After that, my father and Mr. Wadsworth got after them so sharply that +they left Crumville. That was only a few days ago. The very next day +came a lot of goods to the house, delivered by a large city department +store. The folks hadn’t ordered the goods and didn’t know what to make +of it. They investigated, and learned that a young woman calling herself +Laura Porter had selected the things and had them sent out. Then came +other goods for Mr. Wadsworth, said to have been bought by Jessie. It +was an awful mix-up, and it hasn’t been straightened out yet.” + +“It’s the limit!” muttered the senator’s son. “I’ll wager your dad and +Mr. Wadsworth would like to wring those chaps’ necks!” + +“Wait, you haven’t heard it all yet,” went on Dave, with a sickly smile. +“Yesterday I received a notice from the express company here to call for +a package on which eighteen dollars was due. I was expecting some things +that I am going to take home for Christmas presents, although they were +to come to fifteen dollars and a half. I paid for the package, thinking +I had made a mistake in footing up my purchases, and when I got it home +I found out it wasn’t what I had bought at all, but a lot of junk nobody +can use. Then my own package came in by the next express, and, of +course, I had to pay again. I sent a telegram to the city about the +first package and they answered that David Porter had purchased the same +and had it sent C. O. D. Then two other packages came, one calling for +six dollars and the other for twenty-four dollars. But I refused to have +anything to do with them, and said I could easily prove that I hadn’t +been to the city to order them. But it is going to cause a lot of +trouble.” + +“I believe you,” returned the senator’s son. + +“Anything more, Dave?” queried Phil. + +“Yes. Last night, if you will remember, an old man came to see me. He +said that two young men had sent him to me, saying that we wanted a man +in Crumville to take care of a certain young lady who was slightly out +of her mind. He said he had once worked in an asylum and knew he could +give satisfaction, even if he was getting old. It was another of Merwell +and Jasniff’s mean tricks, and I had quite a time explaining to the old +man and getting him to go away. He said he had spent two dollars and a +quarter in car-fare to come to see me, and I felt so sorry for him that +I gave him five dollars to help him along.” + +“Dave, where is this going to end?” cried Roger. + +“That is just what I want to know,” returned Dave. “Perhaps by the time +we get back to Oak Hall there will be more packages waiting for me—or +potatoes, or a horse, or something like that.” + +“You could have Merwell and Jasniff arrested for this,” was Phil’s +comment. + +“Yes, if I could catch them. But they know enough to keep shady. But +that isn’t all. Yesterday I got a letter, or rather a note. It was +postmarked from Rocky Run, about fifteen miles from here. Inside of the +envelope was a card on which was written: ‘We’ll never let up until we +have ruined you.’” + +“Was it signed?” asked the senator’s son. + +“Oh, no. But I am sure it came from Merwell and Jasniff.” + +“They are certainly sore,” was Phil’s comment. + +“Traveling around must cost them money. Where do they get the cash?” +asked Roger. + +“From Mr. Merwell most likely,” answered Dave. “He got a good price when +he sold his ranch, and he seldom denies Link anything.” + +“Have you any idea who the girls were who were in the auto in +Crumville?” + +“Not exactly, but I think they must have been some of the girls Nat +Poole goes with. When Jasniff and Merwell were there with Nat, I saw the +whole crowd out with some girls from the cotton mills. They were nice +enough girls in their way, but they were very boisterous and not the +kind Laura and Jessie care to pick for company. I suppose those girls +played their part thinking it was nothing but a good joke. One had a hat +on with feathers such as Jessie wears and the other wore a coat and veil +like Laura’s. I guess a good many who saw them riding in the auto and +cutting up like wild Indians thought they were Laura and Jessie.” And +Dave heaved a deep sigh. + +“And what are you going to do, Dave?” asked Phil, after a short silence, +during which the three chums continued to skate in advance of their +friends. + +“What can I do? We are trying to locate the rascals, and when we do +we’ll make them stop. But in the meantime——” + +“They may cause you no end of trouble,” finished the senator’s son. + +“I don’t care so much for myself as I do for Laura and Jessie, and for +Mr. and Mrs. Wadsworth. I hate to see them suffer because of my trouble +with those rascals. I don’t see why Merwell and Jasniff can’t fight it +out with me alone.” + +“You forget one thing, Dave,” returned Phil. “Merwell was once sweet on +your sister. I suppose it made him furious to be turned down by her.” + +“Well, then, why does he annoy Jessie? She never harmed him, or Jasniff +either.” + +“Huh! As if you didn’t know why!” replied Roger, with something like a +chuckle. “Don’t they both know that Jessie is the very apple of your +eye, and that anything that brings trouble to her will cut you to the +heart? Of course they know that, Dave, and you can rest assured that +they will try to hurt you quite as much through Jessie as they’ll try to +hurt you direct.” + +“Perhaps, Roger. If I was sure——” + +“Low bridge!” shouted Phil at that instant, as a bend of the river was +gained, and then the whole crowd of students swept under the lowhanging +branches of a number of trees. Those ahead had to go slowly and pick the +way with care. + +“How much farther have we to go?” called out Sam Day. + +“Only a couple of miles,” replied Dave. He turned to Phil and Roger. +“That’s about all,” he whispered. “Keep it to yourselves.” + +“We will,” they replied. + +“Somebody else going to carry this hamper?” cried Chip Macklin. “It’s +getting rather heavy.” + +“I’ll carry one end,” said Ben Basswood. + +“And I’ll take the other,” added Phil. “Dave, you and Roger go ahead and +bring down a couple of deer, and a bear, and one or two tigers, or +something like that,” he continued, with a grin, for he wanted to get +Dave’s mind off of his troubles. + +“Nothing but an elephant for mine,” answered Dave, with a forced laugh. +“I don’t want to waste my powder.” + +“As the society belle said when she left the mark of her cheek on the +gent’s shoulder,” remarked Buster Beggs, the fat lad of the group. + +“Say, that puts me in mind of another story,” came from Shadow. “Once on +a time a Dutchman heard that a certain lady was a society belle. He +wanted to tell his friend about it, but he couldn’t think of the right +word. ‘Ach, she is von great lady,’ he said. ‘She is a society +ding-dong!’” + +“Wow!” + +“There’s a ringer for Shadow!” + +“Shadow, you want to frame that joke and hang it in the woodshed.” + +“Put it down in moth-balls until next summer, Shadow.” + +“Oh, say, speaking about moth-balls puts me in mind of another story. A +man——” + +“Was it a young man, Shadow?” asked Dave, calmly. + +“Maybe it was a very old man,” suggested Phil. + +“Was he clean-shaven or did he have a beard?” queried Roger. + +“Never mind if he was young or old, or clean-shaven or not,” cried the +story-teller. “This man——” + +“Was he an American or a foreigner?” demanded Gus Plum. “That is +something we have simply got to know.” + +“And if he was knock-kneed,” put in Sam. “I hate love stories about +knock-kneed men. They aren’t a bit romantic.” + +“Who said anything about a love story about a knock-kneed man?” burst +out Shadow. “I said——” + +But what Shadow was going to say was drowned out in the sudden report of +a shotgun,—a report so close at hand that it made nearly every student +present stop in alarm. + + + + +CHAPTER IV—THE SCHOOLBOY HUNTERS + + +“Dave, what did you shoot at?” + +It was Phil who asked the question, for he had been the only one to see +Dave raise his shotgun, take quick aim, and fire into the brushwood +lining the river at that point. + +“I shot at a rabbit, and I think I hit him,” was the reply. “I’ll soon +know.” And Dave skated toward the shore, less than twenty yards away. He +poked into the bushes with the barrel of his gun and soon brought forth +a fat, white rabbit which he held up with satisfaction. + +“Hurrah!” cried the senator’s son. “First prize goes to Dave! He’s a +fine one, too,” he added, as the students gathered around to inspect the +game. + +“Thought you said you wouldn’t shoot anything less than an elephant,” +grunted Buster. + +“The elephant will come later,” answered Dave, with a smile. + +“I’d like to get a couple like that,” said Gus Plum, wistfully. + +“Maybe that will be the total for the day,” was Sam’s comment. He had +gone wild-turkey shooting once and gotten a shot at the start and then +nothing more, so he was inclined to be skeptical. + +“Oh, we’ll get more, if we are careful and keep our eyes open,” declared +Dave. “I saw the track of the rabbit in the snow yonder and that made me +look for him.” + +Dave’s success put all the students on the alert, and they spread out on +either side of the stream, eager to sight more game. + +Less than two minutes later came the crack of Gus Plum’s shotgun, +followed almost immediately by a shot from Buster Beggs’ pistol. Then a +gray rabbit went scampering across the river in front of the boys and +several fired simultaneously. + +“I got him! I got him!” shouted Gus, and ran to the shore, to bring out +a medium-sized rabbit. + +“And we’ve got another!” cried Sam. “But I don’t know whether Shadow, +Ben, or I killed him.” + +“I guess we all had a hand in it,” said Ben. “We all fired at about the +same time.” + +“What did you get, Buster?” questioned Chip Macklin. + +“I—I guess I didn’t get anything,” faltered the fat youth. “I thought I +saw a squirrel, but I see now that it is only a tree root sticking out +of the snow.” + +“Great Scott, Buster! Don’t shoot down the trees!” cried Phil, in mock +dismay. “They might fall on us, you know!” And a laugh arose at the +would-be hunter’s expense. + +On the students skated, and before long reached a point where the river +was parted by a long, narrow strip of land known as Squirrel Island, +because squirrels were supposed to abound there. + +As they reached the lower end of the island Dave held up his hand as a +warning. + +“I think I saw some partridges ahead,” he said, in a low voice. “If they +are there we don’t want to disturb them. Put down the hamper and take +off your skates, and we’ll try to bag them.” + +His chums were not slow in complying with his commands, and soon the +crowd was making its way toward the center of the island, where grew a +dense clump of cedars. They had to work their way through the brushwood. + +“Ouch!” exclaimed Shadow, presently. + +“What’s the trouble?” whispered Roger. + +“Scratched my hand on a bramble bush,” was the reply. “But it isn’t +much.” + +“Be careful of your guns,” cautioned Dave. “Don’t let a trigger get +caught in a bush or you may have an accident.” + +“There they are!” cried Ben, in a strained voice. “My, what a lot of +’em!” + +He pointed ahead, and to one side of the tall cedars they saw a covey of +partridges, at least twenty in number, resting on the ground. + +“All together!” said Dave, in a low, steady voice. “Fire as you stand, +those on the right to the right, those on the left to the left, and +those in the center for the middle of the flock. I’ll count. Ready? One, +two, three!” + +Crack! bang! crack! bang! went the shotguns and pistols. Then came a +rushing, rattling, roaring sound, and up into the air went what was left +of the covey, one partridge, being badly wounded, flying in a circle and +then directly for Roger’s head. He struck it with his gun barrel and +then caught it in his hands, quickly putting it out of its misery. The +other boys continued to bang away, but soon the escaping game was beyond +their reach. + +“A pretty good haul!” cried Dave, as he and his chums moved forward. +“Three here and the one Roger has makes four. Boys, we won’t go back +empty-handed.” + +“Who hit and who missed?” questioned Sam. + +“That would be a hard question to answer,” returned Phil. “Better let +the credit go to the whole crowd,” and so it was decided. + +“Well, there isn’t much use in looking for any more game around here,” +said Dave. “Those volleys of shots will make them lay low for some +time.” + +“Let’s go into camp and get lunch,” suggested Buster. “I’m as hungry as +a bear.” + +“Were you ever anything else?” questioned Ben, with a grin, for the +stout youth’s constant desire to eat was well known. + +They tramped to the south shore of the island, and there, in a nook that +was sheltered from the north wind, they went into temporary camp, +cutting down some brushwood and heavier fuel and building a fire. Over +the flames they arranged a stick, from which they hung a kettle filled +with water obtained by chopping a hole through the ice of the river. + +“Now, when the water boils, we can have some coffee,” said Roger, who +was getting out the tin cups. “And we can roast those potatoes while the +water boils,” he added. + +“What about some rabbit pot-pie, or roast partridge?” asked Buster. + +“Oh, let us take all the game back to the school!” exclaimed Ben. “Just +to show the fellows what we got, you know.” + +“That’s the talk!” cried Gus. “If we don’t, maybe they won’t believe we +were so lucky.” + +“Yes, let us take it all back,” chimed in Chip Macklin. + +All but Buster were willing to keep the game. He heaved a deep sigh. + +“All right, if we must,” he said mournfully. “But it makes my mouth +water, just the same!” And he eyed the plump rabbits and fat partridges +wistfully. + +Inside of half an hour the lunch was under way. Around the roaring +campfire sat the students, some on convenient rocks and others on a +fallen tree that chanced to be handy. They had brought with them several +kinds of sandwiches, besides hard-boiled eggs, crackers, cheese, some +cake, and the coffee, with a small bottle of cream and some sugar. They +also had some potatoes for roasting, and though these got partly burned, +all declared them “fine” or “elegant,”—which shows what outdoor air will +do for one’s appetite. + +They took their time, and during the meal Shadow was allowed to tell as +many stories as he pleased, much to his satisfaction. It was Dave who +was the first to get up. + +“Might as well be moving,” he said, after consulting his watch. “We’ll +have to start on the return inside of two hours, and that won’t give us +much time for hunting.” + +“Wait, I want just one more picture!” cried Sam, who had been busy +before with his camera. “Now all look as happy as if to-morrow were +Christmas!” And as the others grinned over the joke, click! went the +shutter of the box, and the picture was snapped. + +“Now, Sam, let me take you, with a gun in one hand and the partridges in +the other!” cried Dave. “If it turns out well, we can have it enlarged +for our dormitory.” And a minute later another picture was added to the +roll of films. + +“Why not leave the things here and come back for them?” suggested Roger. +“No use in toting the hamper and game everywhere.” + +“We can hang the game in a tree,” added Ben. + +All agreed to this, and so the hamper and the game were hung up on the +limbs of a near-by walnut tree along with their skates and some other +things. Then the fire was kicked out, so that it might not start a +conflagration in the woods, and the students prepared to continue their +hunt. + +“I guess we may as well tramp to the upper end of the island first,” +said Dave, in answer to a question from his companions. “Then, if we +have time, we can beat up one shore and then the other. By that time it +will be getting dark and time to turn back to the Hall.” + +“Say, wait a minute!” cried Ben, suddenly. + +“What’s wrong, Ben?” asked several. + +“Why, I—er—I thought I saw somebody over in the woods yonder, looking at +us,” and the Crumville lad pointed to the trees in question. All gazed +steadily in the direction but saw nothing unusual. + +“Maybe it was a rabbit, or a bear, or something like that,” suggested +Buster. “If it’s a bear we had better look out,” he added, nervously. + +“We’ll soon find out,” said Dave. “Come on,” and he walked forward +toward the woods. But he found nothing and soon rejoined his companions. + +“I must have been mistaken,” said Ben. “Come on, if we are to do any +hunting.” And off he stalked, and one by one the others followed. + +Evidently the shots at the partridges had scared much of the game away, +for at the upper end of the island they started up nothing but two +squirrels and a few wild pigeons. Then they came down the north shore +and there bagged two rabbits. They also saw a wild turkey, but it got +away before anybody could take aim at it. + +“See, it has started to snow!” cried the senator’s son, presently, and +he was right. At first the flakes were few, but inside of five minutes +it was snowing steadily. + +“We may as well start for the Hall,” said Dave. “This storm looks as if +it might last for some time.” + +They left the shore and soon reached the edge of the island. By this +time the snowflakes were coming down so thickly that the boys could see +but little around them. The sky was now growing quite dark. + +“I don’t like this,” was Phil’s comment. “We’ll have no fun of it +getting back to school, especially if the snow gets so deep that we +can’t skate on the ice.” + +“Say, this puts me in mind of a story,” commenced Shadow. “Once two boys +were caught in a storm and——” + +“We haven’t any time for yarns now, Shadow!” cried Dave. “It’s back to +the camping place as fast as we can get there, and then off for school, +unless we want to be snowed in along the route!” + +All started across the island, which, at that point, was not over +seventy-five yards wide. They came out at a spot just above where they +had stopped for lunch. Soon all of them stood close to where lay the +remains of the campfire, now covered with the fast-falling snow. + +“Hello! What does this mean?” + +“Where is the hamper?” + +“Where is the game?” + +“What has become of the skates?” + +“Where is that overcoat I left on the tree?” + +These and several other questions were asked in rapid succession. Then +the Oak Hall students looked at each other in blank dismay. + +And not without good reason. For everything left at the camping spot +when they had continued the hunt—game, hamper, skates, an overcoat, a +sweater, and some other things of lesser importance—all had disappeared! + + + + +CHAPTER V—A TRAMP THROUGH THE SNOW + + +“What do you make of this, Dave?” + +“I don’t know what to make of it, Roger—excepting that somebody has +taken our things.” + +“Do you think it’s a joke, or just plain stealing?” demanded Ben. + +“That remains to be found out,” replied Ben. “One thing is certain, the +things didn’t walk off by themselves.” + +“Footprints of two persons!” exclaimed Gus, who had been scanning the +snow-covered ground in the vicinity of the trees and bushes. + +“Where do they lead to?” asked Dave, eagerly. + +“Here they are—you can follow them as easily as I can,” was the reply, +and the heavy-set youth pointed out the tracks in the snow. They led all +around the trees and bushes and then in the direction of the river. Here +there were a jumble of tracks and further on the marks of skate runners. + +“Stopped to put on their skates,” remarked the senator’s son. + +“And they have skated off with all our things!” grumbled Buster Beggs. +“What are we going to do?” + +“Say, that puts me in mind of a story,” came quickly from Shadow. “Once +two boys were out skating and——” + +“For the sake of the mummies of Egypt, let up on the story-telling, +Shadow!” burst out Phil. “Don’t you realize what this loss means to us? +It’s bad enough to lose the hamper and clothing, but what are we to do +in this snowstorm, with night coming on, and so far from Oak Hall +without skates?” + +“Humph! I guess we’ll have to walk,” grumbled the story-teller of the +school. “But that will take time, and if this storm keeps up——” + +“We’ll be snowed under!” finished Chip Macklin. + +“Well, no use in staying here,” came from two of the students. + +“That is just what I say,” said Dave. “Those skate marks lead down the +river and that is the way we want to go. By following them we’ll be +getting nearer to the Hall and at the same time closer to the fellows +who took our things.” + +“We’ll never catch those fellows,” grumbled Ben. “They can skate five +times as fast as we can walk.” + +“Never mind, we’ll go after ’em anyway,” replied Gus. “And if we catch +’em——” He did not finish in words but brought his right fist down hard +into his left palm, which left no doubt as to how he intended to treat +the thieves. + +“Maybe it’s a trick, of some of the Rockville cadets,” suggested Buster, +when the crowd were on their way down the river. + +“Say, don’t you remember my saying I thought I saw somebody near the +camp, just before we went away?” burst out Ben. “You all thought I was +mistaken.” + +“Well, I reckon you were not mistaken,” answered Dave. “It’s a great +pity we didn’t investigate more before leaving.” + +“No use in crying over spilt milk,” said Sam. + +“Which puts me in mind of a sto——” commenced Shadow, and then suddenly +stopped talking and commenced to whistle to himself. + +“Say, boys, if anybody should ask you, you can tell him it is snowing +some,” puffed Buster, who was struggling to keep up with those in front. +“If it wasn’t that we were on the river, it would be easy to lose our +way.” + +“That’s true,” replied Dave. “The snow seems to be coming down heavier +every minute.” + +“Yes, and the wind is coming up,” added Roger. “We’ll have a hard time +of it reaching the Hall. We’ll never do it by supper-time.” + +“Then where are we going to get something to eat?” demanded Buster. “I’m +not going without my supper just because I can’t get back.” + +“Perhaps we can get something at some farmhouse,” suggested Phil. + +“I’ve got an idea!” cried Dave. “Why can’t we get some farmer to hook up +a carriage or a sleigh and take us to the Hall that way?” + +“Hurrah, just the cheese!” cried Ben, who did not relish walking such a +distance. “The thing is, though, to find the farmer,” he continued +soberly. + +“Keep your eyes open for lights,” suggested Dave, and this was done. + +A quarter of a mile more was covered, the students hugging the north +shore of the stream, as that afforded the most shelter from the rising +wind. Then Roger gave a cry. + +“I think I saw a light through the snow! Just look that way, fellows, +and see if I am right.” + +All gazed in the direction indicated, and presently three of the boys +made out a glimmer, as if it came from a lantern being swung to and fro. +Then the light disappeared. + +“Perhaps it’s some farmer going out to care for his cattle,” said Dave. +“Let us walk over and see,” and this was done. + +Dave was correct in his surmise, and soon the boys approached a big +cow-shed, through a window of which they saw the faint rays of a +lantern. Just as they did this they heard a voice cry out in wonder. + +“What be you fellers a-doin’ in my cow-shed?” + +“Oh, we just came in to rest out of the storm,” was the answer, in a +voice that sounded strangely familiar to Dave. “We are not going to hurt +your shed any, or the cattle either.” + +“It’s Mallory, of Rockville!” whispered Dave to his fellow students, +naming the cadet who was the star hockey player of the military academy +team. + +“And Bazen and Holt are with him,” added Phil, gazing through a +partly-open doorway, and naming two other Rockville cadets. + +“Hello, who’s out there?” cried the owner of the cow-shed, and, lantern +in hand, he turned to survey the newcomers. + +“Why, it’s Mr. Opper!” cried Sam. “Don’t you remember me? I called last +summer, to see some of your young lady boarders.” + +“Oh, yes, I remember you,” replied Homer Opper. “You hired my dappled +mare for a ride.” + +“That’s it, Mr. Opper. Say, that mare could go.” + +“Go? Ain’t no hossflesh in these parts kin beat her,” cried the farmer +proudly. “She won the prize at the last county fair, she did! But wot +brung ye here, sech a night as this?” added Homer Opper curiously. + +“Hello, Porter, old man!” cried Mallory, rising from a box on which he +had been seated and shaking hands. “Caught in the storm, too, eh?” + +“Yes,” answered Dave. He gazed curiously at the Rockville cadet and his +companions. “Been up the river?” + +“Not any further than this.” + +“Hunting?” + +“No, skating. We would be going back, only Holt broke one of his skates +and that delayed us. Been out hunting, eh? Any luck?” + +“Some—good and bad. We shot some rabbits, squirrels, and partridges, and +we likewise had our hamper, our skates, an overcoat, and some other +things stolen.” + +“Stolen!” cried Homer Opper. “By gum, thet’s tough luck! Who tuk the +things?” + +“That is what we want to find out,” and as Dave spoke he looked sharply +at Mallory and the other Rockville cadets. + +“Not guilty,” came promptly from Bazen. “Honest Injun, Porter, if you +think we touched your things, you are on the wrong track; isn’t that so, +fellows?” + +“It is,” came promptly from Mallory and Holt. Then suddenly the star +hockey player of Rockville Academy let out a long, low whistle of +surprise. + +“You know something?” demanded Dave. + +“Maybe I do,” was Mallory’s slow answer. “Yes, I am sure I do,” he +added. “You can put the puzzle together yourself if you wish, +Porter—because, you see, I hate to accuse anybody.” + +“What do you know?” + +“I know this: Less than an hour ago we met two fellows on the river, one +with a hamper and the other with a bundle that looked as if it was done +up in an overcoat turned inside out. We came on the fellows rather +suddenly, at a turn where there were some bushes.” + +“Our stuff, as sure as you’re a foot high!” cried Phil. + +“Who were the fellows, do you know?” demanded the senator’s son. + +At this question Mallory looked at Holt and Bazen. + +“I wasn’t exactly sure, but——” He hesitated to go on. + +“I was sure enough,” chimed in Holt. “They were those chaps who came to +our school from Oak Hall and then ran away—Jasniff and Merwell. How +about it, Tom?” + +“I think they were Jasniff and Merwell,” answered Tom Bazen. “To be +sure, as soon as they saw us, they skated away as fast as they could, +and kept their faces hidden. But if they weren’t Jasniff and Merwell +they were pretty good doubles.” + +“Jasniff and Merwell,” murmured Dave, and his heart sank a little. Here +was more underhanded work of his old enemies. + +The farmer and the Rockville cadets were anxious to hear the particulars +of the happening, and the Oak Hall lads told of what had occurred. + +“I know those chaps,” said Homer Opper. “They stayed here one night last +summer. But they cut up so the boarders didn’t like it, so my wife told +’em she didn’t have no room for ’em, an’ they left. They ought to be +locked up.” + +“They will be locked up, if we can lay hands on them,” replied Phil. + +“They must have followed us to Squirrel Island, and spied on us,” said +Shadow. “Ben, you were right about seeing somebody. It must have been +either Merwell or Jasniff.” + +“Have you any idea where they went?” asked the shipowner’s son. + +“No, they skated away behind an island and that’s the last we saw of +them,” answered Mallory. + +“Yes, and I reckon it’s the last we’ll hear of our things,” returned +Buster, mournfully. “But come on, let us see about getting back,” he +continued. “It’s ‘most time for supper now.” + +“Mr. Opper, can you take us back to Oak Hall?” asked Dave. “We’ll pay +you for your trouble.” + +The farmer looked at the students and rubbed his chin reflectively. Then +he gazed out at the storm and the snow-covered ground. + +“Might hook up my big sleigh and do it,” he said. “But it would be quite +a job.” + +“What would it be worth?” asked Ben. + +“Oh, I dunno—three or four dollars, at least. It’s a tough night to be +out in—an’ I’d have to drive back, or put up at the town all night.” + +“Supposing we gave you fifty cents apiece,” suggested Roger. + +“And we’ll go along—as far as Rockville, at the same price—if you’ll +have us,” added Mallory, quickly. + +“Why, yes, Mallory, and welcome,” answered Dave cordially. “That is, if +the turnout will hold us all.” + +“Sure it will,” answered Homer Opper. “An’ if ye all go an’ pay fifty +cents each,”—he counted them mentally as he spoke—“I’ll hook up my four +hosses an’ git ye there in jig time.” + +“Then it’s a go,” answered Dave, after his chums and the Rockville +cadets had nodded their approval. + +“And do hurry,” called out Buster, as the farmer moved away to prepare +for the journey. “We don’t want to miss our suppers.” + +“Ye ain’t goin’ to miss nuthin’,” called the farmer. + +Inside of fifteen minutes he came around to the cow-shed with a big, low +sleigh, to which were attached four fine-looking horses. The sleigh +contained two lanterns and a quantity of wraps and robes. + +“Don’t want ye to catch cold, when we’re a-drivin’ fast,” chuckled Homer +Opper. “Now pile right in, an’ we’ll be movin’.” + +The boys needed no second invitation, and soon all were aboard—Dave and +Roger on the front seat with the driver and the others behind, including +the Rockville cadets. Then came a crack of the whip, and away through +the swirling snow moved the big sleigh, bound for the two schools. + + + + +CHAPTER VI—GOOD-BY TO OAK HALL + + +“Where in the world have you boys been? Why didn’t you come back in time +for supper? Don’t you know it is against the rules to stay away like +this?” + +Thus it was that Job Haskers, the second assistant teacher of Oak Hall, +greeted Dave and his chums as they came in, after leaving the big sleigh +and settling with Homer Opper. + +“We are sorry that we couldn’t get here before, Mr. Haskers,” answered +Dave. “But something unusual happened and we were delayed.” + +“I’ll not accept any excuses!” snapped the teacher, who had not +forgotten how the boys had hurried away without listening to his call +from the window. “I think I’ll send you to bed supperless. It is no more +than you deserve.” + +“Supperless!” gasped Buster, in dismay. “Oh, Mr. Haskers, we don’t +deserve such treatment, really we don’t!” + +“We have been robbed—that is what delayed us,” declared Phil. “I guess +we had better report to Doctor Clay, or Mr. Dale,” he went on, +significantly. + +“You can report to me,” answered Job Haskers, with increased severity. +“There is no need to bother the doctor, and Mr. Dale has gone away for +over Sunday.” + +“Well, boys, back again!” cried a cheery voice from an upper landing, +and then Doctor Clay came down, wearing his gown and slippers. “A wild +storm to be out in. I am glad you got back safely.” + +“They are late—and you said you gave them no permission to be out after +hours,” said Job Haskers, tartly. + +“Hum! Did I?” mused the kindly head of the school. “Well, when it storms +like this it, of course, makes some difference.” + +“We would have been back in time only we were robbed of our skates and +some other things,” answered Dave. “We had to walk a long distance +through the storm, and we’d not be here yet if we hadn’t managed to hire +a farmer to bring us in his sleigh.” + +“Robbed!” echoed Doctor Clay, catching at the word. “How was that?” And +he listened with keen interest to what the boys had to tell. Even Job +Haskers became curious, and said no more about penalizing them for being +late. + +“And you are sure the fellows were Merwell and Jasniff?” asked the +assistant teacher. + +“All I know on that point is what Mallory and his chums had to say,” +answered Dave. + +“I think it would be like that pair to follow you up,” said Doctor Clay, +with a grave shake of his head. “They are two very bad boys,—worse, +Porter, than you can imagine,” and he looked knowingly at Job Haskers as +he spoke. “Now go in to supper, and after that, you, Porter, Morr, and +Lawrence, may come to my study and talk the matter over further.” + +Wondering what else had happened to upset the head of the school, Dave +followed his chums to the dining-hall. Here a late supper awaited the +crowd, to which, it is perhaps needless to state, all did full justice. + +“Do you think we can track Jasniff and Merwell?” asked the senator’s +son, during the course of the repast. + +“I don’t,” answered Dave frankly. “For they will do their best to keep +out of our way.” + +A little later found Dave, Phil, and Roger in the doctor’s private +study, a sort of library connected with his regular office. The head of +Oak Hall was reading a German historical work, but laid the volume down +as they filed in. + +“Sit down, boys,” said Doctor Clay, pleasantly, and when they were +seated, he added: “Now kindly tell me all you know about Merwell and +Jasniff.” + +“Do you want to know everything, Doctor?” asked Dave, in some surprise. + +“Yes,—and later on, I’ll tell you why.” + +“All right,” answered the youth from Crumville, and he told of the many +things that had happened, both at the school and at home—not forgetting +about the auto ride in which Laura and Jessie were supposed to have +participated. + +“It all fits in!” cried Doctor Clay, drawing a deep sigh. He tapped the +table with the tips of his fingers. “I wonder where it will end?” he +mused, half to himself. + +“You said that Merwell and Jasniff were worse than we imagined,” +suggested Dave, to draw the doctor out. + +“So I did, Porter. I will tell you boys something, but please do not let +it go any further. Since Jasniff and Merwell became pupils at Rockville +Military Academy and since they ran away from that institution they have +been doing everything they could think of to annoy me. They have sent +farmers here with produce that I never ordered, and have had publishers +send me schoolbooks that I did not want. Worse than that, they have +circulated reports to my scholars’ parents that this school was running +down, that it was in debt, and that some pupils were getting sick +because the sewerage system was out of order. Some of the parents have +written to me, and two were on the point of taking their boys away, +thinking the reports were true. Fortunately I was able to prove the +reports false, and the boys remained here. But I do not know how far +these slanders are being circulated and what the effect will be in the +future.” + +“And you are sure they come from Merwell and Jasniff?” questioned Phil. + +“I am sure at least one letter was written by Merwell, and one farmer +who brought a load of cabbages here said they were ordered by two young +men who looked like Merwell and Jasniff.” + +“Oh, nobody else would do it!” cried Roger. “Merwell and Jasniff are +guilty, not the least doubt of it! The question is: How can we catch +them?” + +“Yes, that is the question,” said Doctor Clay. “I have notified the +local authorities to be on the watch for them, and now I think I shall +hire a private detective.” + +“Do it, Doctor,” said Dave eagerly. “I will pay half the expense. I know +that my father will approve of such a course.” And so the matter rested. +The private detective came to Oak Hall two days later, and after +interviewing the doctor and the boys, said he would do his best to run +down Link Merwell and Nick Jasniff. + +It snowed hard for a day and a night and when it cleared off the boys +had considerable fun snowballing each other and in coasting down a long +hill leading to the river. Pop Swingly, the janitor, came in for his +full share of the snow-balling and so did Jackson Lemond, usually called +Horsehair, the Hall carryall driver. Horsehair was caught coming from +the barn, and half a dozen snowballs hit him at the same time. + +“Hi, you, stop!” he spluttered, as one snowball took him in the chin and +another in the ear. “Want to smother me? Let up, I say!” And he tried to +run away. + +“These are early Christmas presents, Horsehair!” sang out Ben, merrily, +and let the driver have another, this time in the cap. + +“And something to remember us by, when we are gone,” added Gus, hitting +him in the arm. Then the driver escaped. He felt sore, and vowed he +would square up. + +“Maybe he’ll report us,” said Ben, after the excitement was over. + +“Not he,” declared Gus. “He’s not that kind. But he’ll lay for us,—just +you wait and see.” And Gus was right. About half an hour later he and +Ben were told that somebody wanted to see them at the boathouse. They +started for the building, walking past the gymnasium, and as they did +so, down on their heads came a perfect avalanche of snow, sent from the +sloping roof above. When they clawed their way out of the mass and +looked up they saw Horsehair standing on the roof, snow-shovel in hand, +grinning at them. + +“Thought I’d give ye some more snow fer snowballs,” he chuckled. “Here +ye are!” And down came another avalanche, sending the boys flat a second +time. When they scrambled up they ran off with all speed, the merry +laughter of the carryall driver ringing in their ears. + +At last came the final session of the school, with the usual exercises, +in which Dave and his chums participated. Nearly all of the boys were +going home for the holidays, including Dave, Phil, Roger, and Ben. Dave +and Ben were, of course, going direct to Crumville, and it was arranged +that Phil and the senator’s son should come there later, to visit our +hero and his family and the Wadsworths. Nat Poole was also going home, +and would be on the same train with Dave and Ben. + +“I wish he wasn’t going with us,” said Ben. “I’m getting so I can’t bear +Nat at all.” + +“Well, he isn’t quite as bad as he was when he chummed with Merwell and +Jasniff,” answered our hero. “I think their badness rather scared Nat. +He is mean and all that, but he isn’t a criminal.” + +“Well, I think some meanness is a crime,” retorted Ben. + +The boys had purchased gifts for Doctor Clay, Mr. Dale, and some of the +others, and even Job Haskers had been remembered. Some of the students +had wanted to ignore the tyrannical teacher, but Dave and his chums had +voted down this proposition. + +“Let us treat them all alike,” said Dave. “Perhaps Mr. Haskers thinks he +is doing right.” + +“Yes, and if we leave him out in the cold he may be more hard-hearted +than ever,” added Gus, with a certain amount of worldly wisdom. + +Dave carried a suit-case and also a big bundle, the latter filled with +Christmas presents for the folks at home. Ben was similarly loaded down, +and so were the others. + +“Good-by, everybody!” cried our hero, as he entered the carryall sleigh. +“Take good care of the school until we come back!” + +“Good-by!” was the answer. “Don’t eat too much turkey while you are +gone!” And then, as the sleigh rolled away from the school grounds, the +lads to leave commenced to sing the favorite school song, sung to the +tune of “Auld Lang Syne”: + + “Oak Hall we never shall forget, + No matter where we roam; + It is the very best of schools, + To us it’s just like home! + Then give three cheers, and let them ring + Throughout this world so wide, + To let the people know that we + Elect to here abide!” + +“That’s the stuff!” cried Roger, and then commenced to toot loudly on a +tin horn he carried, and many others made a din. + +At the depot the boys had to wait a little while. But presently the +train came along and they got aboard. Dave and Ben found a seat near the +middle of the car and Nat Poole sat close by them. He acted as if he +wanted to talk, but the others gave him little encouragement. + +“Nat has something on his mind, I’ll wager a cookie,” whispered Ben to +Dave. + +“Well, if he has, he need not bother us with it,” was Dave’s reply. “I +am done with him—I told him that some time ago.” + +The train rolled on and when near the Junction, where the boys had to +change to the main line, a couple in front of Ben and Dave got up, +leaving the seat vacant. At once Nat Poole took the seat, at first, +however, turning it over, so that he might face the other Oak Hall +students. + +“I want to talk to you, Dave Porter,” he said, in a low and somewhat +ugly voice. “I want you to give an account of yourself.” + +“Give an account of myself?” queried Dave, in some astonishment, for he +had not expected such an opening from Nat. “What do you mean?” + +“You know well enough what I mean,” cried the other boy, and now it was +plainly to be seen that his anger was rising. “You can blacken your own +character all you please but I won’t have you blackening mine! If you +don’t confess to what you’ve done, and straighten matters out, as soon +as we get to Crumville, I am going to ask my father to have you +arrested!” + + + + +CHAPTER VII—NAT POOLE’S REVELATION + + +Both Dave and Ben stared in astonishment at the son of the money-lender +of Crumville. Nat was highly indignant, but the reason for this was a +complete mystery to the other lads. + +“Blacken your character?” repeated Dave. “Nat, what are you talking +about?” + +“You know well enough.” + +“I do not.” + +“And I say you do!” blustered the bully. “You can’t crawl out of it. +I’ve followed the thing up and I’ve got the evidence against you, and +against Roger Morr, too. I was going to speak to Doctor Clay about it, +but I know he’d side with you and smooth it over—he always does. But if +I tell my father, you’ll find you have a different man to deal with!” + +Nat spoke in a high-pitched voice that drew the attention of half a +dozen men and women in the car. Ben was greatly annoyed. + +“Say, Nat, don’t make a public exhibition of yourself,” he said, in a +low tone. “If you’ve got anything against Dave, why don’t you wait until +we are alone?” + +“I don’t have to wait,” answered Nat, as loudly as ever. “I am going to +settle this thing right now.” + +Fortunately the train rolled up to the Junction depot at this moment and +everybody, including the boys, left the car. Several gazed curiously at +Dave and Nat, and, seeing this, Ben led the others to the end of the +platform. Here there was a freight room, just then deserted. + +“Come on in here, and then, Nat, you can spout all you please,” said +Ben. + +“You ain’t going to catch me in a corner!” cried the bully, in some +alarm. + +“It isn’t that, Nat. I don’t want you to make a fool of yourself in +front of the whole crowd. See how everybody is staring at you.” + +“Humph! Let them stare,” muttered the bully; yet he followed Ben and +Dave into the freight room, and Ben stood at the doorway, so that no +outsiders might come in. One boy tried to get in, thinking possibly to +see a fight, but Ben told him to “fly on, son,” and the lad promptly +disappeared. + +“Now then, Nat, tell me what you are driving at,” said Dave, as calmly +as he could, for he saw that the money-lender’s son was growing more +enraged every minute. + +“I don’t have to tell you, Dave Porter; you know all about it.” + +“I tell you I don’t—I haven’t the least idea what you are driving at.” + +“Maybe you’ll deny that you were at Leesburgh last week.” + +“Leesburgh?” + +“Yes, Leesburgh, at Sampson’s Hotel, and at the Arcade moving-picture +and vaudeville show,” and as he uttered the words Nat fairly glared into +the face of our hero. + +“I haven’t been near Leesburgh for several months—not since a crowd of +us went there to a football game.” + +“Humph! You expect me to believe that?” + +“Believe it or not, it is true.” + +“You can’t pull the wool over my eyes, Dave Porter! I know you were at +Leesburgh last week Wednesday, you and Roger Morr. And I know you went +to Sampson’s Hotel and registered in my name and then cut up like a +rowdy there, in the pool-room, and got thrown out, and I know you and +Roger Morr went to the Arcade and made a fuss there, and got thrown out +again, but not until you had given my name and the name of Gus Plum. Gus +may forgive you for it, and think it only a joke. But I’ll not do it, I +can tell you that! You have got to write a letter to the owner of that +hotel and to the theater manager and explain things, and you and Roger +Morr have got to beg my pardon. And if you don’t, as I said before, I’ll +tell my father and get him to have you arrested.” And now Nat was so +excited he moved from one foot to the other and shook his fist in the +air. + +To the bully’s surprise Dave did not get excited. On the contrary, our +hero’s face showed something that was akin to a faint smile. Ben saw it +and wondered at it. + +“Say, you needn’t laugh at me!” howled Nat, noting the look. “Before I +get through with you, you’ll find it no laughing matter.” + +“I am not laughing at you, Nat.” + +“Well, do you admit that what I’ve said is true?” + +“No; on the contrary, I say it is false, every word of it. Did you say +this happened last Wednesday?” + +“I did.” + +“Both Roger Morr and I were at the school all day Wednesday. During the +day I attended all my classes, and after school I went to my room, along +with Polly Vane, Luke Watson, and Sam Day, and the three of us wrote on +the essays we had to hand in Thursday. After supper we went down to the +gym for about half an hour, and then went back to our dormitory. And, +come to think of it, you saw us there,” added Dave suddenly. + +“I saw you?” + +“You certainly did. You came to the door and asked Luke Watson for a +Latin book; don’t you remember? Luke got it out of his bureau. We were +all at the big table. Sam Day flipped a button at you and it hit you in +the chin.” + +At these unexpected words the face of the money-lender’s son fell. + +“Was that—er—was that Wednesday?” he faltered. + +“It certainly was, for we had to hand the essays in Thursday and we were +all working like beavers on them.” + +“Nat, what Dave says is absolutely true—I know he wasn’t near Leesburgh +last week, for I was with him every day and every evening,” said Ben. + +“But I got the word from some fellows in Leesburgh. They followed you +from the hotel to the show and talked to you afterwards, and they said +you told them your name was Porter, and the other chap said his name was +Morr. They said you gave the names of Poole and Plum just to keep your +real identity hidden.” + +“Well, I am not guilty, Nat; I give you my word of honor on it.” + +“But—but—if you aren’t guilty how is it those fellows got your name and +that of Morr?” asked the money-lender’s son, not knowing what else to +say. + +“I think I can explain it, Nat. The same fellows who did that are +annoying me in other ways. But I’ll not explain unless you will give me +your word of honor to keep it a secret, at least for the present.” + +“A secret, why?” + +“Because I don’t want the thing talked about in public. The more you +talk about such things the worse off you are. Let me tell you that I +have suffered more than you have, and other folks have suffered too.” + +“Do you mean to say that some other fellows did this and gave my name +and Plum’s first and yours and Morr’s afterwards?” asked Nat, curiously. + +“Exactly.” + +“Why?” + +“For a twofold reason; first to blacken your character and that of Plum, +and, secondly, to cause trouble between all of us.” + +“What fellows would be mean enough to do that?” + +“Two fellows who used to be your friends, but who have had to run away, +to keep from being arrested.” + +“Say, you don’t mean Link Merwell and Nick Jasniff!” burst out the +money-lender’s son. + +“Those are the chaps I do mean, Nat.” + +“But I thought they had left these parts. They were in Crumville, I +know,” and now the bully looked knowingly at our hero. + +“You have heard the reports from home then?” asked Dave, and he felt his +face burn. + +“Sure.” + +“Nat, those reports are all false—as false as this report of your doings +at Leesburgh. They are gotten up by Jasniff and Merwell solely to injure +my friends and my family and me. My sister and Jessie Wadsworth would +refuse to even recognize those fellows, much less go auto-riding with +them. Let me tell you something.” And in as few words as possible our +hero related how things had been sent to him and his friends without +being ordered by them, and of the other trouble Jasniff and Merwell were +causing. The money-lender’s son was incredulous at first, but gradually +his face relaxed. + +“And is all that really so?” he asked, at last. + +“Every word is absolutely true,” answered Dave. + +“Then Nick and Link ought to be in jail!” burst out Nat. “It’s an +outrage to let them do such things. Why don’t you have ’em locked +up—that is what I’d do!” + +“We’ve got to catch them first.” + +“Do you mean to say you are trying to do that?” + +“We are.” + +“Well, you catch ’em, and if you want me to appear against ’em, I’ll do +it—and I’ll catch ’em myself if I can.” + +There was a pause, and Nat started for the doorway of the freight room. +But Ben still barred the way. + +“Nat, don’t you think you were rather hasty in accusing Dave?” he asked, +bluntly. + +“Well—er—maybe I was,” answered the money-lender’s son, growing a bit +red. + +“Oh, let it pass,” said Dave. “I might have been worked up myself, if I +had been in Nat’s place.” + +“Here comes the train—we don’t want to miss it,” cried the +money-lender’s son, and he showed that he was glad to close the +interview. “Remember, if you catch those fellows, I’ll testify against +’em!” he called over his shoulder as he pushed through the doorway. + +“The same old Nat, never willing to acknowledge himself in the wrong,” +was Ben’s comment, as he and Dave ran for the car steps. The other boy +had lost himself in the waiting crowd and got into another car, and they +did not see him again until Crumville was reached, and even then he did +not speak to them. + +The snow was coming down lightly when Dave and Ben alighted, baggage and +bundles in hand, for they had not risked checking anything in such a +crowd. Ben’s father was on hand to greet him, and close at hand stood +the Wadsworth family sleigh, with Laura and Jessie on the rear seat. The +driver came to take the suit-case and Dave’s bundle, grinning a welcome +as he did so. + +“There’s Dave!” cried Jessie, as soon as he appeared. “Isn’t he growing +tall!” she added. + +“Yes,” answered the sister. “Dave!” she called. + +“Here we are again!” he cried with a bright smile, and shook hands. “I +brought you a snowstorm for a change.” + +“I like snow for Christmas,” answered Jessie. She was blushing, for Dave +had given her hand an extra tight squeeze. + +“How are the folks?” + +“All very well,” answered Laura. “What have you in that big bundle?” + +“Oh, that’s a secret, sis,” he returned. + +“Christmas presents!” cried the sister. “Jessie, let us open the bundle +right away.” And she made a playful reach for it. + +“Not to-day—that belongs to Santa Claus!” cried the brother, holding the +bundle out of reach. “My, but this town looks good to me!” he added, as +he looked around and waved his hand to Mr. Basswood. Then Ben took a +moment to run up and greet the girls. + +“You must come over, Ben,” said Laura. + +“Why, yes, by all means,” added Jessie, and Ben said he would. Then he +rejoined his father, and Dave got into the sleigh, being careful to keep +his big bundle on his lap, where the girls could not “poke a hole into +it to peek,” as he put it. There was a flourish of the whip, and the +elegant turnout, with its well-matched black horses, started in the +direction of the Wadsworth mansion. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII—A MERRY CHRISTMAS + + +As my old readers know, the Wadsworth family and the Porters all lived +together, for when Dave found his folks and brought them to Crumville, +the rich jewelry manufacturer and his wife could not bear to think of +separating from the boy who had saved their daughter from being burned +to death. They loved Dave almost as a son, and it was their proposal +that the Porters make the big mansion their home. As Dave’s father was a +widower and his brother Dunston was a bachelor, they readily agreed to +this, provided they were allowed to share the expenses. With the two +families was old Caspar Potts, who spent most of his time in the +library, cataloguing the books, keeping track of the magazines, and +writing a volume on South American history. + +With a merry jingling of the bells, the family sleigh drove into the +spacious grounds. As it rounded the driveway and came to a halt at the +front piazza the door opened and Dave’s father came out, followed by +Dunston Porter. + +“Hello, Dad!” cried the son, joyously, and made a flying leap from the +sleigh. “How are you?” And then he shook hands with his parent and with +his uncle—that same uncle whom he so strongly resembled,—a resemblance +that had been the means of bringing the pair together. + +“Dave, my son!” said Mr. Porter, as he smiled a welcome. + +“Getting bigger every day, Davy!” was Uncle Dunston’s comment. “Before +you know it, you’ll be taller than I am!” And he gave his nephew a +hand-clasp that made Dave wince. + +“Oh, he’s getting awfully tall, I said so as soon as I saw him,” +remarked Jessie, as she, too, alighted, followed by Laura. By this time +Dave was in the hallway, giving Mrs. Wadsworth a big hug and a kiss. +When he had first known her, Dave had been a little afraid of Mrs. +Wadsworth, she was such a lady, but now this was past and he treated her +as she loved to be treated, just as if he were her son. + +“Aren’t you glad I’ve returned to torment you?” he said, as he gave her +another squeeze. + +“Very glad, Dave, very glad indeed!” she answered, beaming on him. “I +don’t mind the way you torment me in the least,” and then she hurried +off, to make sure that the dinner ordered in honor of Dave’s home-coming +should be properly served. + +In the library doorway stood Caspar Potts, his hair now as white as +snow. He came forward and laid two trembling white hands in those of +Dave. + +“Dave, my boy Dave!” he murmured, and his watery eyes fairly glistened. + +“Yes, Professor, your boy, always your boy!” answered Dave, readily, for +he loved the old instructor from the bottom of his heart. “And how is +the history getting on?” + +“Fairly well, Dave. I have nine chapters finished.” + +“Good! Some day, when it is finished, I’ll find a publisher for you; and +then you’ll be famous.” + +“I don’t know about that, Dave. But I like to write on the book—and the +research work is very pleasant, especially in such pleasant +surroundings,” murmured the old gentleman. + +Mr. Wadsworth was away at his office, but presently he came back, and +greeted Dave warmly, and asked about the school and his chums. Then, as +the girls went off to get ready for dinner, the men folks and Dave went +into the library. + +“Have you heard anything more of those two young rascals, Merwell and +Jasniff?” questioned Mr. Porter. + +“Yes, but not in the way I’d like,” answered Dave, and told of what Nat +Poole had had to say and of what had occurred at Squirrel Island. “Have +you heard anything here?” he added. + +“Did the girls tell you anything?” asked his father. + +“Not a word—they didn’t have a chance, for we didn’t want to talk before +Peter.” Peter was the driver of the sleigh. + +“I see.” Mr. Porter mused for a moment and looked at Mr. Wadsworth. + +“Those good-for-nothing boys have done a number of mean things,” said +the jewelry manufacturer. “They have circulated many reports, about you +and your family, and about me and my family. They must be very bitter, +to act in such a fashion. If I could catch them, I’d like to wring their +necks!” And Oliver Wadsworth showed his excitement by pacing up and down +the library. + +“Did you get your affairs with the department stores fixed up?” + +“Yes, but not without considerable trouble.” + +“Have Jasniff and Merwell shown themselves in Crumville lately?” + +“Yes, three days ago they followed your sister Laura and Jessie to a +church fair the girls attended. They acted in such a rude fashion that +both of the girls ran all the way home. All of us went out to look for +them, but we didn’t find them.” + +“Oh, if I had only been at that fair!” murmured Dave. + +“What could you have done against two of them?” asked his uncle. + +“I don’t know, but I would have made it warm for them—and maybe handed +them over to the police.” + +“I have cautioned the girls to be on their guard,” said David Porter. +“And you must be on your guard, Dave. It is not wise to take chances +with such fellows as Jasniff and Merwell.” + +“I’ll keep my eyes open for them,” answered the son. + +Dave ran up to his room, and put his big bundle away in a corner of the +clothing closet. Then he dressed for dinner. As he came out he met +Jessie, who stood on the landing with a white carnation in her hand. + +“It’s for your buttonhole,” she said. “It’s the largest in the +conservatory.” And she adjusted it skillfully. He watched her in +silence, and when she had finished he caught her by both hands. + +“Jessie, I’m so glad to be back—so glad to be with you again!” he half +whispered. + +“Are you really, Dave?” she returned, and her eyes were shining like +stars. + +“You know I am; don’t you?” he pleaded. + +“Yes,” she answered, in a low voice. And then, as Laura appeared, she +added hastily, but tenderly, “I’m glad, too!” + +It was a large and happy gathering around the dining-room table, with +Mr. Wadsworth at the head, and Jessie on one side of Dave and Laura on +the other. Professor Potts asked the blessing, and then followed an hour +of good cheer. In honor of Dave’s home-coming the meal was an elaborate +one, and everybody enjoyed it thoroughly. As nobody wished to put a +damper on the occasion, nothing was said about their enemies. Dave told +some funny stories about Oak Hall happenings, and had the girls +shrieking with laughter, and Dunston Porter related a tale or two about +his travels, for he still loved to roam as of yore. + +The next day—the day before Christmas—it snowed heavily. But the young +folks did not mind this and went out several times, to do the last of +their shopping. Late in the afternoon, Peter brought in some holly +wreaths and a little Christmas tree. The wreaths were placed in the +windows, each with a big bow of red ribbon attached, and the tree was +decorated with candies and candles and placed on the table in the +living-room. + +All the young folks had surprises for their parents and for Professor +Potts. There was a set of South American maps for the old professor, a +new rifle for Dunston Porter, a set of cyclopedias for Mr. Wadsworth, a +cane for Dave’s father, and a beautiful chocolate urn for the lady of +the house. + +“Merry Christmas!” was the cry that went the rounds the next morning, +and then such a handshaking and such a gift-giving and receiving! Dave +had a new pocketbook for Laura, with her monogram in silver, and a +cardcase for Mrs. Wadsworth. For Jessie he had a string of pearls, and +numerous gifts for the others in the mansion. From Laura he received a +fine book on hunting and camping out, something he had long desired, +while Mrs. Wadsworth gave him some silk handkerchiefs. From his father +came a new suit-case, one with a traveler’s outfit included, and from +his uncle he received some pictures, to hang in his den. Mr. Wadsworth +gave him a beautiful stickpin, one he said had been made at his own +works. + +But the gift Dave prized most of all was a little locket that Jessie +gave him for his watchchain. It was of gold, set with tiny diamonds, and +his monogram was on the back. The locket opened and had a place in it +for two pictures. + +“You must put Laura’s picture in there,” said Jessie, “Laura’s and your +father’s.” + +“No, I have them already—in my watch case,” he answered, and then, as +nobody was near, he went on in a whisper, “I want your picture in this, +Jessie.” + +“Oh!” she murmured. + +“Your picture on one side, and a lock of your hair on the other. Without +those I won’t consider the gift complete.” + +“Oh, Dave, don’t be silly!” + +“I’m not silly—I mean it, Jessie. You’ll give them to me, won’t you, +before I go back to Oak Hall?” + +“Maybe. I’ll see how you behave!” was the answer, and then just as Dave +started to catch her by the arm, she ran away to join Laura. But she +threw him a smile from over her shoulder that meant a great deal to him. + +In the afternoon, Ben came over, with his young lady cousin, and all the +young folks went sleigh-riding. The evening was spent at the Wadsworth +mansion in playing games and in singing favorite songs. Altogether it +was a Christmas to be long remembered. + +During the fall Mr. Wadsworth had been busy, building an addition to his +jewelry works, and on the day after Christmas Dave went over to the +place with his uncle, to look around. The addition covered a plot nearly +a hundred feet square and was two stories high. + +“It will give us a new office and several new departments,” said the +rich manufacturer, as he showed them around. “When everything is +finished I shall have one of the most up-to-date jewelry works in this +part of the country.” + +“Are you going to move the old office furniture into this new place?” +asked Dave, noticing some old chairs and desks. + +“For the present we’ll have to. The new furniture won’t be here until +early in January.” + +“What about your safes?” asked Dave. He remembered the big but +old-fashioned safes that had adorned the old office. + +“We are to have new ones in about sixty days. I wanted them at once, but +the safe company was too busy to rush the order. I wish now that I had +those safes,” went on the manufacturer, in a lower voice, so that even +the clerks near by might not hear. + +“Why, anything unusual?” questioned Dunston Porter, curiously. + +“I took that order to reset the Carwith diamonds, that’s all.” + +“Oh, then you got it, didn’t you?” went on Dave’s uncle. “Were they +willing to pay the price?” + +“I told them they would have to or I wouldn’t touch the job.” + +“What do you suppose the diamonds are worth?” + +“They were bought for sixty thousand dollars. At the present value of +such gems, I should say at least seventy-five thousand dollars.” + +“Phew! And the settings are to cost eight thousand dollars. That makes a +pretty valuable lot of jewelry, I’m thinking,” was Dunston Porter’s +comment. + +“You are right, and that is why I wish I had those new safes,” added +Oliver Wadsworth. + +“Can’t you keep the diamonds in some safe deposit vault?” + +“There is no very good safe deposit place in Crumville. Besides, I must +have the gems here, if my workmen are to set them properly. Of course, +I’ll keep them in the old safes when they are not in the workshop.” + +“I should think you’d want a watchman around with such diamonds in the +place,” remarked Dave. + +“I have a watchman—old Tony Wells, who is as honest as they make ’em. +But, Dave, I don’t want you to mention the diamonds to anybody. The fact +that I have this order is being kept a secret,” went on Mr. Wadsworth, +anxiously. + +“I’ll not say a word to anybody,” answered our hero. + +“Don’t do it—for I am anxious enough about the jewels as it is. I shall +be glad when the order is finished and the gems are out of my keeping. I +don’t want any outsider to know I have them.” + + + + +CHAPTER IX—NAT POOLE GETS CAUGHT + + +In the middle of the week came Phil and Roger, in the midst of another +snowstorm that was so heavy it threatened to stall the train in which +they arrived. Dave went to the station to meet them. + +“Say, what do you think?” burst out Phil, while shaking hands. + +“We saw Jasniff and Merwell!” finished the senator’s son. + +“You did!” ejaculated Dave. “Where?” + +“On our train. We walked through the cars at Melton, to see if we knew +anybody aboard, and there were the pair in the smoker, smoking +cigarettes, as big as life.” + +“Did you speak to them?” + +“Didn’t get the chance. The car was crowded, and before we could get to +Jasniff and Merwell they saw us, ran down the aisle the other way, and +got off.” + +“Is that so? Evidently they must know we are on their track,” said Dave, +shaking his head gravely. + +“I wish we could have collared ’em,” went on the shipowner’s son. “I’d +like to punch their heads.” + +“Don’t do it, Phil. If you ever catch them, call an officer and have +them locked up. A thrashing is wasted on such rascals.” + +“Do you know some more about them?” questioned Roger, quickly. + +“I do.” And then Dave related what Nat Poole had had to say, and also +told about how Laura and Jessie had been scared when attending the +church fair. + +“You are right, they ought to be locked up,” was Roger’s comment. + +“By the way, did you hear the news from Oak Hall?” went on Phil, as they +drove off towards the Wadsworth mansion. + +“What news?” + +“Somehow or other, the storm lifted off two of the skylights from the +roof of the main building and the snow got in the garret and there the +heat from the chimney must have melted it, for it ran down—the water +did—through the floor and loosened the plaster in several of the +dormitories, including ours. I understand all of the plaster has got to +come down.” + +“What a muss!” + +“Yes, and it is going to take several weeks to fix it up—they couldn’t +get any masons right away.” + +“Then where will we sleep when we go back?” + +“I don’t know. I understand from Shadow that the doctor was thinking of +keeping the school closed until about the first of February.” + +“Say, that will give us quite a holiday!” exclaimed Dave. + +“For which all of us will be profoundly sorry,” responded Phil, making a +sober face and winking one eye. + +The girls greeted the newcomers with sincere pleasure. + +“What a pity Belle Endicott isn’t here,” sighed Laura. + +“So it is,” answered Jessie. “We’ll have to do what we can to make up +for her absence.” + +Two days later it cleared off, and the young folks enjoyed a long +sleigh-ride. Then they went skating, and on New Year’s Eve attended a +party given at Ben Basswood’s house. Besides our friends, Ben had +invited Sam Day and Buster Beggs, and also a number of girls; and all +enjoyed themselves hugely until after midnight. When the clock struck +twelve, the boys and girls went outside and tooted horns and rang a big +dinner-bell, and wished each other and everybody else “A Happy New +Year!” + +The celebration on the front piazza was at its height when suddenly came +a shower of snowballs from a near street corner. One snowball hit Dave +in the shoulder and another landed directly on Jessie’s neck, causing +the girl to cry out in mingled pain and alarm. + +“Hi! who’s throwing snowballs!” exclaimed Roger, and then came another +volley, and he was hit, and also Laura and one of the other girls. At +once the girls fled into the house. + +“Some rowdies, I suppose,” said Phil. “I’ve half a mind to go after +them.” + +“We can’t without our hats and coats,” answered Dave. + +Just then came another shower of snowballs and Dave was hit again. This +was too much for him, and despite the fact that he was bare-headed and +wore a fine party suit, he leaped down on the sidewalk and started for +the corner. Phil and Roger came after him. Ben rushed into the hallway, +to catch up two of his father’s canes and his chums’ hats, and then he +followed. + +Those who had thrown the snowballs had not dreamed of being attacked, +and it was not until Dave was almost on them that they started to run. +There were three boys—two rather rough-looking characters. The third was +well dressed, in a fur cap and overcoat lined with fur. + +“Nat Poole!” cried Dave, when he got close to the well-dressed youth. +“So this is your game, eh? Because Ben didn’t see fit to invite you to +his party, you think it smart to throw snowballs at the girls!” + +As he spoke Dave ran closer and suddenly gave the money-lender’s son a +shove that sent him backwards in the snow. + +“Hi, you let me alone!” burst out Nat, in alarm. “It ain’t fair to knock +me down!” + +By this time Dave’s chums had reached the scene, and seeing Nat down +they gave their attention to the two others. They saw that they were +roughs who hung around the railroad station and the saloons of +Crumville. Without waiting, Ben threw a cane to Roger and sailed in, and +the senator’s son followed. Both of the roughs received several severe +blows and were then glad enough to slink away in the darkness. + +When Nat got up he was thoroughly angry. He had hired the roughs to help +him and now they had deserted the cause. He glared at Dave. + +“You let me alone, Dave Porter!” he cried. + +“Not just yet, Nat,” replied our hero, and catching up a handful of +loose snow, he forced it down inside of the other’s collar. Then the +other lads pitched in, too, and soon Nat found himself down once more +and all but covered with snow, which got down his neck, in his ears and +nose, and even into his mouth. + +“Now then, don’t you dare to throw snowballs at the girls again!” said +Dave sternly. “It was a cowardly thing to do, and you know it.” + +“If you do it again, we’ll land on you ten times harder than we did just +now,” added Ben. + +“And don’t you get any more of those roughs to take a hand,” continued +Dave. “If you do, they’ll find themselves in the lock-up, and you’ll be +there to keep them company.” + +“You just wait!” muttered Nat, wrathfully. “I’ll fix you yet—you see if +I don’t!” And then he turned and hurried away, but not in the direction +his companions had taken. He wanted to escape them if possible, for he +had promised each a dollar for aiding him and he was now in no humor to +hand over the money. But at another corner the roughs caught up to him +and made him pay up, and this added to his disgust. + +When Dave and the others got back to the house they were considerably +“roughed up,” as Roger expressed it. But they had vanquished the enemy +and were correspondingly happy. They found that the girls had not been +much hurt, for which everybody was thankful. + +“Maybe they’ll lay for you when you go home,” whispered Ben to Dave, +when he got the chance. + +“I don’t think they will,” answered Dave. “But we’ll be on our guard.” + +“Why not take a cane or two with you?” + +“We can do that.” + +When it came time to go home the girls were somewhat timid, and Jessie +said she could telephone for the sleigh. But, as it was a bright, starry +night, the boys said they would rather walk, and Laura said the same. + +In spite of their watchfulness, the boys were full of fun, and soon had +the girls laughing. And if, under those bright stars, Dave said some +rather sentimental things to Jessie, for whom he had such a tender +regard, who can blame him? + +On the day following New Year’s came word from Oak Hall that the school +would not open for its next term until the first Monday in February. + +“Say, that suits me down to the ground!” cried Phil. + +“Well, I’m not shedding any tears,” answered Roger. “I know what I’d +like to do—take a trip somewhere.” + +“I don’t know where you’d go in this winter weather,” said Dave. + +“Oh, some warm climate—Bermuda, or some place like that.” + +Another day slipped by, and Dave was asked by his father to go to one of +the near-by cities on an errand of importance. He had to go to a +lawyer’s office and to several banks, and the errand took all day. For +company he took Roger with him, and the boys did not get back to +Crumville until about eleven o’clock at night. + +“Guess they thought we weren’t coming at all,” said Dave, when he found +no sleigh awaiting him. “Well, we can walk.” + +“Of course we can walk,” answered the senator’s son. “I’ll be glad to +stretch my legs after such a long ride.” + +“Let us take a short cut,” went on Dave, as they left the depot. “I know +a path that leads almost directly to our place.” + +“All right, if the snow isn’t too deep, Dave.” + +“It can’t be deep on the path, for many of the men who work at the +Wadsworth jewelry place use it. It runs right past the Wadsworth works.” + +“Go ahead then.” + +They took to the path, which led past the freight depot and then along a +high board fence. They turned a corner of the fence, and crossed a +vacant lot, and then came up to one corner of the jewelry works, at a +point where the new addition was located. + +“Now, here we are at the works,” said Dave. “It’s not very much further +to the house.” + +“Pretty quiet around here, this time of night,” remarked Roger, as he +paused to catch his breath, for they had been walking fast. “There +doesn’t seem to be a soul in sight.” + +“There is usually a watchman around, old Tony Wells, an army veteran. I +suppose he is inside somewhere.” + +“There’s his lantern!” cried the senator’s son, as a flash of light +shone from one of the windows. Hardly had he spoken when the light +disappeared, leaving the building as black as before. + +“It must be a lonely job, guarding such a place,” said our hero, as he +and his chum resumed their walk. “But I suppose it suits Tony Wells, and +he is glad to get the money it brings in.” + +“They must have a lot of valuable jewelry there, Dave.” + +“Oh, yes, they have. But it is all locked up in the safes at night.” +Dave thought of the Carwith diamonds, but remembered his promise not to +mention them to anybody. + +As the boys turned another corner they came face to face with a fat man, +who was struggling along through the snow carrying two heavy bundles. + +“Hello!” cried Dave. “How are you, Mr. Rowell?” + +“Bless me if it isn’t Dave Porter!” cried Amos Rowell, who was a local +druggist. “Out rather late, aren’t you?” + +“Yes.” + +“So am I. Had to visit some sick folks and I’m carrying home some of +their washing. Goodnight!” and the druggist turned down one road and +Dave and Roger took the other. + +Inside of five minutes more our hero and his chum were at the entrance +to the Wadsworth mansion. Just as they were mounting the steps, and Dave +was feeling in his pocket for his key, a strange rumble reached their +ears. + +“What was that?” asked the senator’s son. + +“I don’t know,” returned Dave, in some alarm. “It sounded to me as if it +came from the direction of the jewelry works!” + + + + +CHAPTER X—WHAT HAPPENED AT THE JEWELRY WORKS + + +“The jewelry works?” repeated Roger. + +“Yes. What did it sound like to you?” + +“Why, like a blast of some kind. Maybe it was at the railroad.” + +“They don’t work on the railroad at night—especially in this cold +weather, Roger. No, it was something else.” + +Both boys halted on the piazza and listened. But not another sound out +of the ordinary reached their ears. + +“Might as well go in—it’s getting pretty cold,” said the senator’s son. + +Dave unlocked the door and they entered the mansion. A dim light was +burning in the hallway. While they were taking off their caps and coats +Dave’s father appeared at the head of the stairs. + +“Got back safely, did you?” he questioned. + +“Yes, dad; and everything in the city was all right,” answered the son. +“I’ll bring the package up to you.” + +“Never mind—I’ll come down and put it in the safe,” answered Mr. Porter. +“By the way,” he went on, “what was that strange noise I just heard?” + +“That is what we were wondering,” said Roger. “It sounded like a blast +of dynamite to me.” + +“Maybe something blew up at the powder works at Fenwood,” suggested +Dave. The works in question were fifteen miles away. + +“If it did, we’ll hear about it in the morning,” returned Mr. Porter, as +he took the package Dave gave him and disappeared into the library, +turning on the electric light as he did so. + +The boys went upstairs and started to undress. Phil had been asleep, but +roused up at their entrance. The boys occupied a large chamber, with two +double beds in it, for they loved to be together, as at school. + +“Listen to that!” cried Dave, as he was unlacing a shoe. + +“It’s the telephone downstairs!” cried Phil. “My, but it’s ringing to +beat the band!” he added, as the bell continued to sound its call. + +The boys heard Mr. Porter leave the library and go to the telephone, +which was on a table in an alcove. He took down the receiver. + +“Yes! yes!” the boys heard him say. Then followed a pause. “You don’t +mean it! When, just now? Was that the noise we heard? Where did they go +to? Wait, I’ll call Mr. Wadsworth. What’s that? Hurry!” Then followed +another pause. “Cut off!” they heard Mr. Porter mutter. + +“Something is wrong!” murmured Dave. + +Mr. Porter came bounding up the stairs two steps at a time. Dave and the +other boys met him in the hallway. + +“What is it, Dad?” asked the son. + +“Robbers—at the jewelry works!” panted David Porter. “I must notify Mr. +Wadsworth!” And he ran to a near-by door and pounded on it. + +“What is it?” came sleepily from the rich manufacturer. He had heard +nothing of the telephone call, being down deep in the covers because of +the cold. + +“Mr. Wadsworth, get up, get up instantly!” cried Mr. Porter. “You are +wanted at the jewelry works. I just got something of a message from your +watchman. Some robbers have blown open your safes and they attacked the +man, but he got away long enough to telephone. But then they attacked +him again, while he was talking to me! We’ll have to get down there at +once!” + +“Roger, did you hear that?” gasped Dave. “That’s the noise we heard!” + +“Yes, and they attacked the watchman,” responded the senator’s son. + +“I’m going back there,” went on Dave. “The others will have to stop and +dress. Maybe we can catch those rascals.” + +“Yes, and save the watchman, Dave!” + +By this time Mr. Wadsworth had appeared, in a bath-robe, and Dunston +Porter also showed himself. Dave slipped on his shoe again and fairly +threw himself into his coat, and Roger also rearranged his toilet. + +“Wait—I’ll go with you!” cried Phil. + +“Can’t wait, Phil—every second is precious!” answered our hero. “You can +follow with the men.” + +“Take the gun, or a pistol—you may need it,” urged the shipowner’s son, +as he started to dress. + +In a corner stood Dave’s double-barreled shotgun, loaded. He took it up. +Roger looked around the room, saw a baseball bat in another corner, and +took that. Then the boys ran out into the hallway, where the electric +lights were now turned on full. The whole house was in a hubbub. + +“We are dressed and we’ll go right down to the works,” said Dave. “I +heard what father said, Mr. Wadsworth. We’ll help Tony Wells, if we +can.” And before anybody could stop him, he was out of the house, with +Roger at his heels. + +“Be careful, Dave!” shouted his uncle after him. “Those robbers may be +desperate characters.” + +“All right, Uncle Dunston, I’ll watch out.” + +“If you chance to see a policeman, take him along. I’ll come as soon as +I can get some clothing on.” + +Tired though they were, the two boys ran all the distance to the jewelry +works. When they got there they found everything as dark and as silent +as before. They had met nobody. + +“How are you going to get in?” asked Roger, as they came to a halt +before the main door. + +Dave tried the door, to find it locked. “Let us walk around. The thieves +may be in hiding somewhere,” he suggested. + +They made the circuit of the works, once falling into a hole filled with +snow. Nothing unusual met their eyes, and each gazed questioningly at +the other. + +“It can’t be a joke, can it?” suggested Roger. “Nat Poole might——” + +“No, I’m sure it was no joke,” broke in our hero. “Wait, I’ll try that +little side-door. I think that is the one the watchman generally uses.” + +He ran to the door in question and pushed upon it. It gave way, and with +caution he entered the building. All was so dark he could see absolutely +nothing. + +“I guess we’ll have to make a light,” he said, as his chum followed him. +“Wait till I see if I have some matches.” + +“Here are some,” answered Roger. “Wait, I’ll strike a light. You keep +hold of that gun—and be ready to use it, if you have to!” + +The senator’s son struck one of the matches and held it aloft. By its +faint rays the boys were able to see some distance into the workshop +into which the doorway opened. Only machines and work-benches met their +gaze. On a nail hung a lantern. + +“We’ll light this,” said Dave, taking the lantern down. “You can carry +it, and I’ll keep the gun handy.” + +With lantern and gun held out before them, and with their hearts beating +wildly, the two youths walked cautiously through the workshop. They had +to pass through two rooms before they reached the entrance to the +offices. The light cast curious shadows on the walls and the machinery, +and more than once the lads fancied they saw something moving. But each +alarm proved false. + +“Why not call the watchman?” suggested Roger, just before entering the +offices. + +They raised their voices and then raised them again. But no answer came +back. + +“Would he telephone from the office?” asked the senator’s son. + +“I suppose so—although there is another ’phone in the shipping-room.” + +The boys had now entered one of the new offices. Just beyond was the old +office, with the two old safes, standing side by side. + +“Look!” cried Roger, in dismay. + +There was no need to utter the cry, for Dave was himself staring at the +scene before him. The old office was in dire confusion, chairs and desks +being cast in various directions. All of the windows were broken out and +through these the chill night air was entering. + +But what interested the boys most of all was the appearance of the two +old safes. The door to each had been blown asunder and lay in a twisted +mass on the floor. On top of the doors lay a number of boxes and drawers +that belonged in the safes. Mingling with the wreckage were pieces of +gold and silver plate, and also gold and silver knives, forks, and +spoons. + +“Here is where that explosion came from,” said Dave. “What a pity it +didn’t happen when we were in front of the works! We might have caught +the rascals red-handed!” + +“Listen! I hear somebody now!” exclaimed Roger. “Maybe they are coming +back.” + +“No, that is my father who is calling!” replied our hero. “I’ll let him +in.” + +He ran to the office door, and finding a key in the lock, opened it. +Roger swung the lantern, and soon Dave’s father and his uncle came up, +followed by Mr. Wadsworth, who, being somewhat portly, could not run so +fast, and had to be assisted by Phil. + +“What have they done?” gasped the manufacturer. “Tell me quickly! Did +they blow open the safes?” He was so agitated that he could scarcely +speak. + +The boys did not reply, for there was no need. Mr. Wadsworth gave one +look and then sank down on a desk, too overcome to make another move. + +“Did you see anything of the robbers, Dave?” asked his father. + +“Not a thing.” + +“And where is the watchman?” + +“I don’t know.” + +“Strange, he must be somewhere around. He told me of the robbery and +then he said that they were coming after him. Then the message was +suddenly cut off.” + +“It looks like foul play to me,” said Dunston Porter, seriously. “We had +better light up and investigate thoroughly.” + +He walked to a switchboard on the wall and began to experiment. +Presently the electric lights in the offices flashed up and then some of +those in the workshops were turned on. + +By this time Oliver Wadsworth was in front of one of the shattered +safes. An inner door, somewhat bent, was swung shut. With trembling +fingers the manufacturer pulled the door open and felt into the +compartment beyond. + +“Gone! gone!” the others heard him mutter hoarsely. “Gone!” + +“What is it?” asked Mr. Porter. + +“The casket—the Carwith casket is gone!” And Mr. Wadsworth looked ready +to faint as he spoke. + +“Were the jewels in it?” questioned Mr. Porter. + +“Yes! yes!” + +“All of them?” queried Dave. + +“Yes, every one. I placed them in the casket myself before we locked up +for the day.” + +“Maybe the casket is on the floor, under the doors,” suggested Dave; but +he had little hope of such being the case. + +All started a search, lasting for several minutes. But it was useless, +the casket with its precious jewelry had disappeared. Oliver Wadsworth +tottered to a chair that Phil placed for him and sank heavily upon it. + +[Illustration: “THE CASKET—THE CARWITH CASKET IS GONE!”—Page 96.] + +“Gone!” he muttered, in a strained voice. “Gone! And if I cannot recover +it, I shall be ruined!” + + + + +CHAPTER XI—LOOKING FOR THE ROBBERS + + +All in the offices listened with interest to Oliver Wadsworth’s words. + +“The jewels were probably what the rascals were after,” was Mr. Porter’s +comment. “Evidently they did not touch any of the gold plate or +silverware.” + +“That shows they must have known the jewels were here,” said Dunston +Porter. + +“Couldn’t they find out about them from the workmen?” questioned Dave. + +“I suppose so—although it is a rule of the works for the men to keep +silent regarding precious stones. No one but myself and the general +manager are supposed to know just what we have on hand.” + +“We must get busy and see if we cannot follow the robbers!” cried David +Porter. “No use in wasting time here now. Let us scatter in all +directions. One can go to the railroad station and the others to the +roads leading out of town. We may pick up some clew.” + +“The police, we’ll have to notify them!” said Roger. + +“Yes! yes! Call the police up on the telephone!” ejaculated Mr. +Wadsworth, starting to his feet. + +Dave ran to the end of the office, where a telephone rested on a stand. +The shock of the explosion had severed the wires. + +“It’s out of commission,” he said. “I’ll have to use the one in the +shipping-room.” + +He left the offices, and made his way through two of the workrooms. Phil +went with him and so did Roger. + +“This will be a terrible blow for Mr. Wadsworth,” was the comment of the +shipowner’s son. + +“He said if he didn’t get the jewels back it would ruin him,” added +Roger. + +“Oh, we must get them back!” cried Dave. “Why, they are worth a +fortune!” + +In the shipping-room all was dark, and the boys had to first light a +match and then turn on the electric illumination. The telephone was near +by. + +“Ruined!” cried our hero, as he beheld the wrenched-away receiver and +transmitter. + +“Here is where they must have caught the watchman while he was +telephoning to Mr. Wadsworth!” said Phil. + +“That must be it, Phil. We’ll have to go to the police station, or find +another telephone.” + +The boys rushed back to the offices and told of what they had +discovered. Then Phil and Roger volunteered to run to the police +station, over a quarter of a mile away. + +“If you’ll do that, I’ll go to the railroad station,” said Dave. “I may +be able to pick up some clew. The twelve-fifteen train is almost due and +those rascals may try to board it. If I see anybody that looks +suspicious, I’ll have him detained.” + +“Don’t get into trouble!” called his father after him. + +“I’ll try to take care of myself, Dad,” he answered. + +Dave ran the whole distance to the depot. As he went along he kept his +eyes wide open for a possible appearance of the robbers, peering down +side-streets and alleyways, and into vacant lots. But he saw nobody +until close to the station and then he received a sudden hail from in +front of a coal office. + +“Hi, you! Where are you going in such a hurry?” And a man in a dark blue +uniform stepped into view, night-stick in hand. + +“Just the man I want to see!” cried our hero. “I guess you know me, Mr. +Anderson. Come on down to the depot, quick! We must get there before the +train comes in!” + +“Why, it’s Dave Porter!” exclaimed the policeman. “What’s the row, +Dave?” + +“Mr. Wadsworth’s jewelry works has been robbed. They have just gone to +notify headquarters. I thought maybe the robbers might try to get away +on the train. We want to stop any suspicious characters.” + +“The jewelry works robbed? You don’t say! All right, I’ll go right +along. Hope we can catch ’em!” And Officer Anderson swung up beside +Dave, and both continued on a dog-trot to the depot. + +Nobody but the station master was in sight. Dave and the policeman +thought it best to keep out of sight. + +“You stay at one end and I’ll stay at the other,” said the officer. “If +you see anybody suspicious, whistle twice and I’ll come on the +double-quick.” + +At last they heard the train coming. Nobody had appeared, but presently +Dave caught sight of a burly figure sneaking beside several empty +freight cars on a side-track. He gave the signal for aid and then +sneaked after the man. By this time the train had rolled into the little +station. + +Only a well-known young man of Crumville alighted, accompanied by an +elderly lady, his mother. There were no passengers to get aboard, and +the conductor swung his lantern for the engineer to go ahead again. + +At that moment the burly fellow near the freight cars made a dive for +the trucks of a baggage car, with the evident intention of stealing a +ride. He had almost reached the trucks when Dave came up behind him and +hauled him back. + +“Not so fast!” said our hero, firmly. “I want to talk to you.” + +“Hey, you let me alone!” growled the burly fellow. He was ragged and +unshaven and evidently a tramp. + +“Where did you come from?” went on Dave, and he continued to hold the +man, while the train moved off. + +“Wot business is that o’ yours?” was the sulky return. “Wot did yer make +me miss that train for?” + +“You’ll find out in a minute or two,” answered our hero, and just then +Officer Anderson came running up. + +“Got somebody, have you?” he panted. + +“I guess he is only a tramp,” was Dave’s reply. “But we may as well hold +him and see what he has got to say.” + +“It’s Applejack Joe,” said the policeman, as he eyed the prisoner. “We +warned him out of town this morning. What was he going to do, steal a +ride?” + +“I think so. I caught him making for the trucks of a baggage car.” + +“That’s Joe’s favorite way of riding,” chuckled the policeman. + +“I can’t see why that young feller had to stop me,” growled the tramp. +“You folks wants me to git out, an’ when I start yer hold me back.” + +“Why didn’t you go this morning, if you were told to go?” asked Dave. + +“Say, I don’t move as swift as some folks. Wot’s the use? Take yer time, +is my motter.” + +“Where have you been for the last three or four hours?” asked the +policeman. + +“Where have I been? It won’t do you no good to know, cap’n.” + +“Well, you tell us, just the same,” said Dave. “I want to know if you +have seen any other men sneaking around town to-night. If you have, it +may pay you to tell me about it.” + +“Provided we can land on those other chaps,” put in the officer. + +“Oh, I see; somethin’ wrong, hey?” And the tramp leered unpleasantly. +“Want to pull me into it, mebbe.” + +“You are pulled in already,” answered Officer Anderson. + +“Oh, don’t arrest me, an’ I’ll tell you everything I know!” pleaded +Applejack Joe. He had once been in the Crumville jail in winter and +found it very cold and uninviting, and he wanted no more of it. + +“What do you know?” questioned Dave. “Answer quick. There has been a big +robbery here, and if you can help us to catch the men maybe you’ll get a +reward.” + +“Reward? Say, I’m your huckleberry, young man. Wot do I know?” The tramp +rubbed his unshaven chin. “Yes, that’s them, I’m sure of it,” he +murmured, half to himself. + +“Who?” demanded Dave, impatiently. + +“Them two fellers I see down at Casterbury’s stock-farm this afternoon. +They had a bag wot looked suspicious to me, an’, say; did they use +dynamite, or somethin’ like that?” + +“They did!” + +“Then that’s them! Cos why? Cos when they walked past where I was +hidin’, I heard one of ’em say, ‘Be careful o’ that, we don’t want it to +go off an’ git blowed up.’” + +“Two men?” came from the policeman. “Did you know them?” + +The tramp shook his head. + +“Never set eyes on ’em before. But I see ’em after that, down back of +that jewelry works over there,” and he threw up his hand in the +direction of Mr. Wadsworth’s place. “Say, is that the place they +robbed?” he continued, with some show of interest. + +“Yes,” answered Dave. “Now tell me how those fellows looked.” + +“I can’t tell yer that, exactly, fer my eyesight ain’t none too good, I +git so much smoke an’ cinders in ’em from the railroad. But they was +kinder young fellers, I think, and putty good educated—not common +fellers like me. Somethin’ like yerself. An’ they was dressed putty +good, long overcoats, and soft hats wot was pulled down over their +faces.” + +“Did you hear them speak any names?” asked Officer Anderson. + +“Nary a name.” + +“Have you seen the two men during the last hour or so?” asked Dave. + +“No, ain’t see ’em since I spotted ’em back of the jewelry factory. That +was about seven, or maybe eight o’clock.” + +“Did they go into the works then?” + +“No, they just stood by the back fence talkin’. I thought they had +somethin’ to do with that new buildin’ going up there, so I didn’t think +nuthin’ more about it.” + +“I see. Well, Joe, I guess you had better come with us for the present,” +went on Dave. “We’ll want your testimony.” + +“It ain’t fair to arrest me!” whined the tramp. + +“We won’t call it arrest,” went on Dave, before the policeman could +speak. “You’ll be detained, that’s all, and I’ll see that you don’t lose +anything by it.” + +“All right then, if that’s the way you’re goin’ to put it,” answered +Applejack Joe resignedly. “But I hope you’ll see to it that I gits +something to eat an’ a warm place to sleep.” + +“I’ll remember,” returned our hero. + +There seemed nothing now to do but to return to the jewelry works and +this Dave did, taking the tramp and the officer with him. When they +arrived they found the chief of police there, with two officers. The +chief was questioning Mr. Wadsworth and the distracted manufacturer was +telling what he knew about the crime that had been committed. + +The arrival of those from the depot, and what the tramp had to tell, put +a new face on the matter. One of the officers said he had seen the two +strangers with the tool-bag, but had put them down for traveling +salesmen visiting Crumville on business. + +“They are undoubtedly the guilty parties,” said the chief. “The only +question is: Where did they go to?” + +“Well, they didn’t take that twelve-fifteen train,” answered Dave. + +“Then they either got out of town by the use of a horse or an auto, or +else they are here yet,” said Mr. Wadsworth. “Oh, catch them! Catch them +if you can! I must get those jewels back! I’ll give a big reward for +their safe return.” + +“Have you heard from Phil or Roger yet?” + +“No, Dave.” + +“They may bring in some word.” + +“Let us hope so,” groaned the manufacturer. + +“What became of the watchman?” + +“That is a mystery. Perhaps they carried him off and threw him into the +river, or something like that!” + +“Oh, they wouldn’t be as rascally as all that!” returned Dave, in +horror. + +“Perhaps. Some robbers are very desperate characters.” + +At that moment came a cry from one of the workrooms, where one of the +officers had gone to take a look around. + +“What is it, Carr?” called the chief of police. + +“Here’s poor Tony Wells,” was the answer. “He’s in bad shape. Better +somebody run for a doctor at once!” + + + + +CHAPTER XII—THE TELLTALE CIGARETTE BOX + + +The watchman was indeed in bad shape. He had been found thrown under a +workbench, and just returning to consciousness. He had a cut over his +left ear and another on his forehead, from which the blood had flowed +freely. + +“Must have struck him with a club, or an iron bar,” was the opinion of +the chief, as the injured man was carried into the office and placed on +some chair cushions. Here his wounds were washed and bound up, while one +officer ran to get a doctor who lived not a great distance off. + +It was some little time before Tony Wells, who was nearly seventy years +of age, opened his eyes to stare around him. + +“Don’t—don’t hit me again!” he murmured. “I—I didn’t touch you!” + +“It’s all right, Tony!” said the chief. “Those fellows are gone. You’re +among friends.” + +“They—knocked me down!” gasped the old watchman. “I—I—tried to +telephone—after the explosion, but—but——” He could not go on, and +suddenly relapsed again into unconsciousness. + +“Poor fellow!” said Mr. Wadsworth, tenderly. “We must do what we can for +him.” + +“Is anything missing besides the jewels?” asked Dave, while they were +waiting for the doctor to come, and waiting to hear from the others who +had gone out. + +“No, Dave. But that is enough. If they are not recovered, I shall be +ruined.” + +“Can they hold you responsible for the loss?” + +“Yes, for when I took the jewels to re-set I guaranteed the safe return +of each jewel. I had to do that because they were afraid some workmen +might try to substitute other jewels not so good—which is sometimes +done.” + +“And you said they were worth seventy-five thousand dollars?” + +“All of that.” + +“Those robbers certainly made a haul.” + +“It drives me crazy to think about it,” groaned Oliver Wadsworth. + +“Perhaps the others who went out will catch them,” answered our hero, +hopefully. + +Soon the doctor arrived and took charge of old Tony Wells, whom he knew +well. As Wells was a widower, living alone, the doctor said he would +take the old man to his own home, where he could have constant +attention. + +“He is already in a fever,” said the physician. “We had better not try +to question him at present. It will only excite him the more.” And a +little later the sufferer was placed on a litter and carried to the +doctor’s residence. + +By this time the news was circulating that the Wadsworth jewelry works +had been robbed, and many persons spent the rest of the night looking +for the two young men who were supposed to be guilty of the crime. +Oliver Wadsworth and an officer remained at the offices, guarding the +wrecked place and looking for clews of the evildoers. But nothing in the +way of evidence against the robbers was brought to light, excepting that +they had used several drills and some dynamite on the two old safes, +probably blowing them up simultaneously. They had taken the tool-bag +with its contents with them and also another small valise, belonging to +one of Mr. Wadsworth’s traveling salesmen. + +“I can’t understand why Tony Wells didn’t discover them when they first +came in,” said Dave. + +“Maybe he did and they made him a prisoner,” suggested Mr. Wadsworth. +“Tony was very faithful—the best watchman I ever had.” + +Daylight came at last and still the search for the two robbers was kept +up. In the meantime, telegrams and telephone messages had been sent in +all directions. To stimulate the searchers Mr. Wadsworth offered a +reward of one thousand dollars for the recovery of the jewels and this +reward was later on increased to five thousand dollars. + +When Tony Wells was well enough to tell his story he said he had been +going the rounds of the works when he suddenly found himself confronted +by two masked men. He had started to cry out and run for help when the +men had seized him and thrown him down and bound him fast to a +work-bench. Then the men had gone to the offices, and later on had come +the explosion. He knew they were blowing open the safes and did what he +could to free himself. At last he managed to get free, but found himself +too weak to run for help. He had dragged himself to the telephone in the +shipping-room and was sending his message to Mr. Wadsworth when the +masked men had again appeared and knocked him down. That was all he +remembered until the time he was found, as already described. + +“You did not see the faces of the two men?” asked Oliver Wadsworth. + +“No, sir, they were all covered with black masks. But I think the +fellows was rather young-like,” answered the old watchman. “Both of ’em +was about the size of Dave Porter,—but neither of ’em was Dave,—I know +that by the voices,” he went on, hastily. + +“No, Dave was at home with me,” said Oliver Wadsworth. “But he and one +of his friends passed the works just before the explosion.” + +The news of the robbery had upset the Wadsworth household completely. +Mrs. Wadsworth was as much distressed as her husband, and Jessie was as +pale as if seriously ill. + +“Oh, Dave, supposing the jewels are not recovered!” said Jessie, when +they met in the hallway. “It will ruin father,—I heard him tell mamma +so!” + +“We are going to get them back—we’ve simply got to do it,” Dave replied. + +“But how? Nobody seems to know what has become of the robbers.” + +“Oh, just wait, Jessie. We are sure to get some trace of them sooner or +later.” + +“What makes you so hopeful, Dave?” and now the girl suddenly clutched +his arm. “Have you a clew?” + +“I think so, but I am not sure. I am going to talk to your father about +it, and then I am going to take another look around Crumville and around +the offices.” + +Dave’s father and his Uncle Dunston had been out all day, and so had +Phil and Roger and Ben, and a score of others, including the officers of +the law. But nothing had been seen or heard of the mysterious men with +the tool-bag. Another tramp had been rounded up, but he knew absolutely +nothing of the crime and was let go again. + +Oliver Wadsworth’s face was white and drawn and he looked as if he had +suddenly grown five years older. He had a long, private conversation +with Dave’s father and Dunston Porter, and all three men looked very +grave when the conference came to an end. + +There was good cause for this seriousness. The new addition to the +jewelry works had placed Mr. Wadsworth in debt. The Porters had lent him +twenty thousand dollars, and, just then, could lend him no more, having +a number of obligations of their own to meet. + +The Carwith jewels were the property of Mr. and Mrs. Ridgeway Osgood +Carwith, of Fifth Avenue, New York City. The Carwiths were now on a trip +around the world, but were expected home some time in the spring. Mr. +Wadsworth had agreed to re-set the jewels according to designs already +accepted by the millionaire and his wife, and had guaranteed the safe +return of the jewels, re-set as specified, not later than the first of +the following May. As the millionaire was a strict business man he had +demanded a bond for the safe return of his property, and this bond had +been given by Mr. Wadsworth, indorsed by David Breslow Porter and +Dunston Porter. + +Thus it will readily be seen that the millionaire and his wife were +amply secured. If they did not get the jewels back they would demand the +payment of the bond, worth seventy-five thousand dollars, and Mr. +Wadsworth and the Porters would have to make good. + +On the second day after the robbery, Dave, Roger, and Phil went down to +the jewelry works and began a close investigation on their own account. +Dave had mentioned something to his chums that had caused them to open +their eyes in astonishment. + +An hour was spent around the offices, and then Phil picked up an empty +cigarette case. He took it to Dave and Roger and both looked at it with +keen interest. + +“I guess that is another clew,” said our hero. “Let us look around some +more.” + +“I’m going for the train now,” said the senator’s son, a little later. +“And as soon as I find Hooker Montgomery I’ll let you know.” + +“Yes, and make him come here, whether he wants to or not,” cried Dave. + +“You leave that to me,” answered Roger, grimly. + +Oliver Wadsworth had been interviewing a private detective, and soon the +man left, stating he thought he could lay his hands on the guilty +parties. + +“I’ll look for Tom Basnett,” said the detective. “This looks like one of +his jobs.” + +“I don’t care whose job it is—I want the jewels back,” said Mr. +Wadsworth, wearily. He had not slept since the crime had been committed. + +“Mr. Wadsworth, Phil and I would like to talk to you in private,” said +Dave, when he could get the chance. + +“You have some clew, Dave?” + +“Well, I want to tell you something, and then you can judge for +yourself.” + +“Very well, come with me,” answered the manufacturer, and led the way to +a little side-room, used by the salesmen for exhibiting wares to +possible customers. + +“I want to tell you all about something that happened early in the +winter, while I was at Oak Hall,” said Dave. And then he told of how he +had called on the fake doctor, Hooker Montgomery, and how he had been +attacked from behind and made a prisoner, and carried off to a house in +the woods, the particulars of which have already been set down in “Dave +Porter and His Rivals.” + +“The fellows who carried me off were the doctor and the driver, who was +only a tool, and two fellows who have caused me a lot of trouble in the +past, Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell,” went on our hero. “When I got away +I tried to follow up Jasniff and Merwell, but they got away from me, and +so did the driver get away. But one day I found Hooker Montgomery, and +by threatening to have him arrested I made him confess to the truth, +which was that Jasniff and Merwell had hired him to help get me in their +power. At first they told Montgomery it was only a schoolboy trick, and +he said he believed them, but, later on, it leaked out that Jasniff and +Merwell had another motive in making me a prisoner.” + +“And that motive——?” began Oliver Wadsworth, with deep interest. + +“Doctor Montgomery said that Jasniff and Merwell had in mind to drug me +and take me to some place a good distance from Oak Hall. He said he also +heard them speak of robbing a jewelry works, and I was to be drugged and +left in the factory,—to make it appear as if I had done the deed and as +if the blowing up of a safe had stunned me.” + +“Dave, is this possible!” exclaimed the manufacturer. + +“It is true, Mr. Wadsworth,” said Phil. “I was along and so was Roger at +the time. Montgomery couldn’t give many details, but he said he thought +Jasniff and Merwell were cold-blooded villains and he wanted nothing +more to do with them.” + +“This looks as if those rascals, Jasniff and Merwell, had come here.” + +“I believe they did come,” went on Dave. “And here is one clew we have +already picked up against them.” And he held up the empty cigarette box. + +“What is that? Only a cigarette box. How can that be a clew?” + +“I will tell you. Both Jasniff and Merwell are inveterate cigarette +smokers. I have seen them smoking many times. They smoke a Turkish brand +of cigarettes, having a peculiar blue and gold band around the box. This +is the same kind of a box, and I am convinced that this box was emptied +and thrown away in your offices by Jasniff or Merwell.” + + + + +CHAPTER XIII—DARK DAYS + + +Oliver Wadsworth listened to Dave’s words with deep interest. Then he +shrugged his shoulders. + +“That sounds pretty good, Dave, were it not for one thing. Do you +imagine that two masked fellows, bent on blowing open safes, would stop +to light and smoke cigarettes?” + +“I think Merwell and Jasniff would, Merwell especially. When Link is +nervous the first thing he does is to take out a cigarette and light it. +It’s an almost unconscious habit with him.” + +“This story about what that doctor said interests me most of all,” went +on the manufacturer. “I think we ought to have a talk with him. For all +we know, he may be one of the guilty parties.” + +“No, I don’t think he is that kind. Besides, he was very angry at +Merwell and Jasniff and wanted nothing more to do with them.” + +“The detective who was here thought he had a clew against a professional +bank burglar. Personally, I think this looks more like the work of +professionals than fellows just out of school,” said the manufacturer; +and there, for the time being, the matter rested. + +During the day two more detectives appeared and went over the ground, as +the other officials had done. One thought he saw in the robbery the hand +of a criminal known as Red Andrews. + +“This is just the way Red Andrews would go at a job,” said the +detective. “He was sent up for robbing a private banker some years ago, +and he got out two months ago. He was in New York—I saw him on Fifth +Avenue, not far from the Carwith mansion. He may have heard about the +jewels there. I am going to look for him.” And he departed on a hunt for +Red Andrews. + +It was not until two days later that Roger came back to Crumville. His +face showed his disappointment. + +“Such mean luck!” he exclaimed, when he met Dave, Phil, and Ben. “I went +to four towns, looking for Hooker Montgomery, and at last I found out +that he had left the east several days ago.” + +“Where did he go to?” questioned our hero. + +“The folks I met couldn’t tell exactly, but they thought to visit a rich +aunt in the far west.” + +This was a great disappointment, for they had hoped to learn much more +concerning the plans of Jasniff and Merwell, from the fake doctor. + +“We might send him a letter, to his last residence. Maybe the +post-office authorities will forward it,” suggested Phil. + +“I did that,” answered the senator’s son. “I told him that I wanted to +hear from him at once, and that it would be money in his pocket to write +or to telegraph to me. I didn’t mention your name, Dave, for I thought +he might hear of this robbery and get suspicious.” + +It was ideal weather for skating and sleighing, but none of the young +folks at the Wadsworth mansion felt like going out for fun. All could +see that the older folks were much worried, and consequently, they were +worried, too. + +“Oh, Dave, what if those jewels are never recovered?” said Laura to her +brother, when they were alone. “It will just about ruin Mr. Wadsworth, +Uncle Dunston says.” + +“Let us hope for the best, Laura.” + +“I heard you and the other boys talking about Nick Jasniff and Link +Merwell.” + +“Yes?” + +“Do you really imagine they had something to do with it?” + +“Yes, I think so, and so do Phil, Ben, and Roger. But the detectives and +Mr. Wadsworth think the work was done by professionals. They don’t think +that fellows like Nick and Link would be equal to the job.” + +“But if you think Merwell and Jasniff guilty, why don’t you go after +them and find out?” + +“We don’t know where they are.” + +“Aren’t they with their folks?” + +“No.” + +“Are you sure?” + +“Yes. The Jasniffs are traveling aboard and Mr. Merwell is in +Philadelphia. We sent to Mr. Merwell—through an outsider—and learned +that he didn’t know where Link was just now, said he had written that he +was going on a tour south for the winter. My private opinion is that Mr. +Merwell finds Link hard to manage and is glad to get rid of him.” + +“Do you suppose he did go south?” + +“He might—after this affair here.” + +“They didn’t say what part of the south he went to?” + +“They said Florida. But Florida is pretty big, you know,” and Dave +smiled faintly. + +“Jessie is awfully downcast over this, and so is Mrs. Wadsworth—in fact, +we all are.” + +“I know it, Laura.” Dave drew a long breath. “It’s awfully hard to sit +still and do nothing. I imagine Mr. Wadsworth can’t sleep for thinking +of the affair.” + +“I heard Mrs. Wadsworth talking last night to him. I didn’t mean to +listen, Dave, but before I could get away I heard her say that if it was +necessary she would give up this house to live in and move to a smaller +place! Think of it! Why, her very heart is set on this house and these +fine grounds! And Jessie thinks the world of them, too!” + +“It would be awfully hard if they did have to give them up, Laura.” + +“Dave, can’t father or Uncle Dunston help them, if they need help?” + +“They have helped Mr. Wadsworth already—loaned him twenty thousand +dollars so that he could put that new addition to the works. They also +indorsed his note covering the safe return of the jewels. If those +jewels aren’t gotten back, and Mr. Wadsworth can’t make good on that +note, father and Uncle Dunston will have to pay the money.” + +“All of it?” + +“As much as Mr. Wadsworth can’t pay. And the worst of the whole matter +is, Laura, just at present father and Uncle Dunston have their ready +money tied up in such a manner that they can’t get hold of it excepting +at a great loss. Oh, it certainly is a terrible state of affairs!” And +Dave shook his head, gravely. + +During that week Ben had Shadow Hamilton and Buster Beggs visit him. Of +course, the new arrivals had to hear all about the robbery, and they +came over with Ben to call on the other boys, and on the girls. + +“This is fierce!” was Buster’s comment. “And Ben says you rather suspect +Merwell and Jasniff,” he added, in a whisper. + +“We do, but don’t say anything to any outsiders about it,” answered +Dave. + +“Say, that puts me in mind of a story,” said Shadow. “A little girl +once——” + +“Wow! Cut it out, Shadow!” burst out Phil. + +“Stories don’t go with robberies,” supplemented Roger. + +“Let him tell it,” put in Dave, with a faint smile. “It will relieve his +mind, and I guess I need a little fun to brace me up—I’ve been so +depressed lately.” + +“This isn’t so very much of a story,” went on Shadow, as all looked at +him. “Dave telling Buster not to let outsiders know put me in mind of +it. Once the mother of a little girl told her that her uncle had been +naughty and had been put in prison for it. Said the mother, ‘Now, Lucy, +don’t tell anybody.’ So Lucy went out to play and pretty soon, when she +had all her companions around her she said, ‘What do you think my ma +said? She said that when anybody has an uncle in prison, like my uncle +is, you mustn’t tell anybody. So I’m not going to tell a single +person!’” + +“Well, I guess the boys know what I mean,” said Dave, after a short +laugh. “I want you to keep this to yourselves. Don’t spread it any +further. It may be that I am mistaken, and if so, and Merwell and +Jasniff heard of what I have said, they would come down on me like a ton +of bricks—and I’d not blame them.” + +In the afternoon, urged by Mrs. Wadsworth, the boys went skating, taking +the girls with them. On the ice they met Nat Poole, but the +money-lender’s son did not speak to them, indeed he did his best to keep +out of their way. + +“He hasn’t forgotten New Year’s Eve,” said Ben. “He had better keep his +distance, unless he wants to get into more trouble.” + +“Wonder what he thinks of the robbery?” mused Dave. + +“We might get Buster to pump him,” suggested Phil. “He is on pretty good +terms with Nat,—that is, they are not open enemies.” + +Buster was appealed to and he readily agreed to do the “pumping,” +provided the money-lender’s son had anything to say. He skated off by +himself and then threw himself in Nat’s way, and was gone the best part +of half an hour. + +“Well, did you learn anything?” queried Roger, when the stout youth +returned. + +“I guess I did!” cried Buster. “Say, I think Nat Poole is about as mean +as they make ’em!” he burst out. “And he hasn’t a grain of good, hard +common-sense!” + +“What did he say?” demanded Phil. + +“Oh, he said a lot of things, about the robbery, and about the +Wadsworths and the Porters. First he said he didn’t believe the jewels +were nearly as valuable as Mr. Wadsworth represented them to be, and the +manufacturer was kicking up a big fuss just as a sort of advertisement. +Then he said there was a report that Dave had been seen in front of the +works just a few minutes before the explosion, and that that looked +mighty suspicious to him.” + +“The mean fellow!” muttered Roger. + +“I told him that you and Roger were going to the Wadsworth house at the +time, and were home when the watchman telephoned, but he only tossed his +head as if he didn’t believe a word of it, and said he guessed Dave +could tell something if he was of a mind to talk.” + +“If that isn’t Poole to a T!” cried Phil. + +“If I were you, Dave, I’d punch his head for him,” was Shadow’s advice. + +“That wouldn’t do any good,” said Ben. “You can’t stop Nat from talking +any more than you can stop water from running out of a sieve.” + +“Which puts me in mind of another story,” burst out Shadow, eagerly. +“Once two men——” + +“Oh, Shadow, another?” cried Buster, reproachfully. + +“I know that story—it’s moss-covered with age,” announced Roger. + +“What is it?” demanded the story-teller of Oak Hall. + +“Two men—bet—carry water in a sieve—bet taken—water frozen. Ha! ha! +Shadow, I got you that time.” + +“Well, it’s a good story anyway,” answered Shadow, ruefully. + +“I shan’t attempt to stop Nat unless he makes some direct accusation,” +said Dave, calmly. “What would be the use? It would only make matters +worse.” + +“If you took notice of what he says, some folks would begin to think +there was something in it,” said Phil. “Yes, better drop Nat. He isn’t +worth bothering about, anyway. Just the same, it is mean for him to +speak in this fashion.” + +“He wouldn’t be Nat Poole if he didn’t,” retorted Roger. + +Despite this incident, the boys and girls managed to have a good time on +the ice, and for an hour or two Dave forgot his troubles and those of +his friends. + +“What are you going to do for the rest of the vacation, Dave?” said +Roger, that evening. “You know you promised to come to my home.” + +“Yes, and you promised to visit me, too,” added Phil. “You haven’t been +to our house in a long time.” + +“To tell the truth, I haven’t the heart to go anywhere,” answered Dave, +soberly. “I guess I had better stay here and see if something doesn’t +turn up.” + +“Well, I can’t blame you,” said the senator’s son, and Phil said the +same. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV—OFF FOR THE SOUTH + + +Two days later, when Roger was packing up, getting ready to return home, +he received a letter from Luke Watson that filled him with interest. +Luke had gone to St. Augustine, Florida, to join his folks, who were +spending the winter there. + +“Here’s news!” burst out the senator’s son, as he came rushing to Dave +and Phil with the epistle. “This letter is from Luke Watson, you know +his folks are in Florida. Well, on his way to St. Augustine, Luke +stopped for a day at Jacksonville. Listen to what he says: + +“‘I was walking down one of the main streets of Jacksonville, looking +into the shop windows, when what do you think? I saw Link Merwell and +Nick Jasniff. You could have knocked me over with a feather, for I +hadn’t imagined that they were anywhere near. They were nattily dressed +and each carried a small valise, and they were buying caps and some +other things for a sea voyage. I went into the shop and called to them, +and my! both of them jumped as if they were shot, and Merwell got so +pale I thought he was going to faint. I said “Hello,” but they didn’t +answer to that, and Jasniff at once wanted to know if I was alone. When +I told him I was he seemed mightily relieved, and Merwell looked +relieved, too. They wanted to know what I was doing there and I told +them. Then I asked what they were doing, but I couldn’t get any straight +answer. Merwell started to say something about going to sea, but Jasniff +stopped him short, and said they guessed they would go back to New York, +where they had come from. + +“‘It was awful funny—they positively looked scared to death, and while +they were talking to me they looked over my shoulders, as if on their +guard against somebody. I asked them what they had been doing since they +left Rockville, and they said not much of anything, just traveling +around. They seemed to have plenty of money, for just as I went into the +shop I saw Merwell pay for something from a big roll of greenbacks. + +“‘After I left them, I got a bit curious about the pair, and so I +watched them come from the shop and walk down to one of the docks and go +aboard a big four-masted schooner. I hung around a little and pretty +soon they came from the schooner and went up to one of the big hotels, +and there I lost sight of them. Each had his little valise with him, but +they weren’t big enough for much clothing. My, but they were scared! I +fancy they thought I might pitch into them for the mean things they did +in the past. But I didn’t want to start any row.’” + +“Is that all he says?” demanded Dave, after the senator’s son had +finished. + +“That’s all he says about Merwell and Jasniff and their doings.” + +“Doesn’t he mention the name of that schooner, or the hotel?” asked +Phil. + +“No.” + +“Did you say Luke was going to Jacksonville?” asked our hero. + +“Yes, his whole family are down there.” + +“Then I could telegraph to him and he could give me the name of the +hotel, and of the schooner.” + +“Dave, what do you make out of this?” demanded the senator’s son. + +“I make out of it that Merwell and Jasniff are guilty!” burst out Dave. +“They went from here to Florida, and now they have either gone to sea, +or are going, as soon as that schooner sails. Do you notice what Luke +says about their being scared almost to death when they saw him? They +evidently thought some of us, or the officers of the law, were with +him.” + +“And the little valises!” burst out the shipowner’s son. “Perhaps they +contain the jewels!” + +“Would they be foolish enough to carry them around like that?” +questioned Roger. “Wouldn’t they hide them?” + +“They may be looking for some good hiding-place, or some place where +they can sell them,” answered Dave. “Remember, Jasniff and Merwell are +green at this business—they wouldn’t go at it like professionals. If +they were professionals, they wouldn’t have acted so scared.” + +“That is true. What will you do, tell Mr. Wadsworth of this?” + +“I think I’ll tell my father and my Uncle Dunston first. Mr. Wadsworth +doesn’t place much credit in the story of Merwell and Jasniff’s guilt. +He thinks the detectives are on the right track.” + +“Well, possibly they are,” admitted Phil. “But I must say, this looks +mighty suspicious to me.” + +“I have half a mind to take matters in my own hands and run down to +Jacksonville,” went on our hero. “Who knows but what I might find +Merwell and Jasniff? If I did, I could stop them and make them give an +account of themselves by making that old charge of abduction against +them, and that charge of having used my name.” + +“Say, that’s an idea!” cried Roger. “And say, I’d like to go with you.” + +“So would I,” added Phil. “We might go down in one of my father’s +ships.” + +“Too slow, Phil—the limited express for this trip,” answered Dave. “But +I must talk it over with dad first,” he added. + +“We have got over three weeks before school opens again,” pursued the +senator’s son. “We could go down to Florida and back easily in that +time.” + +Dave’s father had gone to New York on business, but came home that +evening. In the meantime a telegram was sent to Luke Watson, asking for +the name of the hotel, at which Merwell and Jasniff had stopped, and of +the schooner. + +Dave’s father and his uncle listened closely to what he had to tell, and +to the reading of the letter from Luke Watson. They talked the affair +over for an hour with the boys. + +“You may be right, boys,” said Mr. Porter, at last. “And it may be a +good plan to follow those rascals up. But I don’t think I would bother +Mr. Wadsworth about it. He received a telegram from one of the +detectives, and the officer is more sure than ever that he is on the +right track. He caught Red Andrews pawning a fair-sized diamond, and he +thinks the gem is from the Carwith collection.” + +“Can’t he make Red Andrews confess?” asked Dave. + +“Unfortunately the rascal got away when on the way to the +police-station. But the detective feels he can soon round him up again.” + +Dave looked thoughtfully out of the window and tapped the table with his +fingers. + +“You still think Merwell and Jasniff guilty?” remarked his uncle, with a +smile. + +“Yes, Uncle Dunston. After what Hooker Montgomery said, I’ll think them +guilty until somebody proves otherwise.” + +“Then I tell you what I’ll do, boys,” said Dunston Porter. “I’ll take a +trip down to Florida with you and look into this matter. I’d rather be +on the move than sitting still waiting for something to turn up.” + +“Will you go?” cried Dave, eagerly. + +“I will.” + +“When?” + +“As soon as you wish, and we can get train accommodations.” + +“Hadn’t we better wait until we hear from Luke?” suggested Roger. + +“No, let us get off at once!” exclaimed Dave. “If he sends word after we +are gone, it can be forwarded to us.” And so it was arranged. + +Great was the surprise of the Wadsworths and of Laura when the boys and +Dunston Porter announced that they were going to start for Florida the +next morning. + +“Why, Dave?” asked Jessie. “Why are you going in such a hurry?” + +“Oh, I hardly care to tell, Jessie,” he answered. “It may prove only a +wild goose chase.” + +“It is about the missing jewels?” + +“Yes.” + +“Then you are after Merwell and Jasniff.” + +“Yes, but please don’t tell any outsiders.” + +“Oh, Dave, don’t get into any trouble!” cried the girl, as she clung to +him. “They are such bad fellows! You know what they have done to you in +the past!” + +“I am not afraid of them.” + +“Oh, I know how brave you are, Dave! But—but don’t let them harm you—for +my sake, please!” And then the tears came into her eyes and she hid her +face on his arm. + +“There! there! don’t worry!” he said, as he bent over her, and then he +kissed her forehead. “We’ll be back before long,” and he gave her a +little hug. Then the others came in. + +Laura was also worried, but glad that her uncle would be along. She +helped Dave to pack his suit-case. Phil and Roger also packed up, and +sent word home regarding the proposed trip. As my old readers know, all +the boys were well-to-do, so the expenses did not bother them. + +At breakfast time the following morning came a telegram from Luke +Watson. It read as follows: + +“The hotel was the Castor. Think schooner was the _Emma Brown_, or +_Black_, or _Jones_. Common name.” + +“Well, that isn’t very definite, but it is something to work on,” +remarked Dunston Porter. + +Soon the party of four were ready to start. There was a general +hand-shaking and also a few kisses. + +“Well, have a good time, even if you don’t catch those fellows,” said +Mrs. Wadsworth. + +“Keep out of trouble,” warned Laura. + +“Yes, yes, don’t let them harm you,” pleaded timid Jessie. + +“And let us hear from you often,” said Mr. Porter. + +“I don’t know what to say about this,” said Oliver Wadsworth, shaking +his head, slowly. “But if you do get on the track of those jewels, leave +no stone unturned to get them.” + +“Leave that to me, Mr. Wadsworth,” said Dunston Porter. “If we find +those young men have the gems—or had them—we’ll get them back, never +fear.” And he spoke in a tone that showed he meant what he said. + +They went to the depot in the family sleigh. Ben had heard of their +going away and was there to see them off. Soon the train rolled in that +was to carry the travelers to New York City. + +“Good-by!” cried the boys, as they clambered aboard the car. + +“Good-by!” called Ben. “I wish you luck.” And then the girls waved their +hands, and the train moved off, slowly at first and then faster and +faster, until Crumville was left behind. + +“It’s a great trip they are taking,” said Ben, to Laura and Jessie. +“Wish I was going along.” + +“Why didn’t you go?” questioned Laura. + +“Oh, I’ve got some things to do at home,” answered Ben. He did not care +to add that his father did not wish to stand the extra expense. Mr. +Basswood was fairly well-to-do, but thought he was spending enough on +his son by sending him to boarding-school. + +The sleigh was about to drive off when the station agent came running +out, waving a yellow envelope. + +“Is Mr. Wadsworth here?” he questioned, of Jessie. + +“No, Mr. Mack, my father went to business. What is it, a telegram?” + +“Yes,—something very important too.” + +“Then give it to me and I will take it to him at once.” + +“I could send it, but——” + +“Never mind. Here, I will sign for it,” and Jessie did so. Then the whip +cracked and the horses started for the jewelry works on a gallop. + +When Jessie handed the telegram to her father he opened it and read the +contents eagerly. His face lit up. + +“This is good news!” he cried. “Good news! I must go to Boston at once.” + +“Have they found the jewels?” questioned his daughter. + +“The detective thinks he has located them. Yes, I must go at once.” And +Mr. Wadsworth hurried off to prepare for the journey. + + + + +CHAPTER XV—SOMETHING ABOUT WHITE MICE + + +Dunston Porter and the boys were to go to New York City and there +transfer to Jersey City for the train bound South. All had comfortable +seats together. + +“It’s going to be quite a trip,” said Roger, as he settled back to gaze +at the swiftly-moving panorama of fields covered with snow. + +“Yes, and we are going to journey from winter into summer,” added Phil. +“It’s good we remembered that when we packed our suit-cases. At first I +was going to put in nothing but heavy clothing.” + +“I am glad we heard from Luke,” said Dave. “That gives us a little to +work on. I hope the _Emma Brown_, or whatever her name may be, hasn’t +sailed yet.” + +“Won’t Merwell and Jasniff be surprised if we do locate them?” said the +senator’s son. “I suppose they think we are at home.” + +The car was only half-filled with passengers, so the boys and Dunston +Porter had plenty of room, and they moved around from one seat to +another. So the time passed quickly enough, until they rolled into the +Grand Central Station, in New York. + +“Well, little old New York looks as busy as ever,” was Phil’s comment, +as they stepped out on the street. “Are we to transfer to Jersey City at +once?” + +“Yes,” answered Dunston Porter. “We’ll take the subway and the river +tube, and get there in no time.” + +Riding through the tube under the Hudson River was a new experience for +the lads and they rather enjoyed it. The train of steel cars rushed +along at a good rate of speed, and almost before they knew it, they were +in New Jersey and being hoisted up in an elevator to the train-shed. + +“Coast Line Express!” was the cry at one of the numerous gates to the +tracks, and thither the party hurried. Willing porters took their +baggage, and a minute later they found themselves in an elegant Pullman +car. Dunston Porter had telegraphed ahead for sleeping accommodations, +and they had two double seats opposite each other, directly in the +middle of the car. + +“All aboard!” sang out the conductor, about ten minutes later, and then +the long train rolled slowly from the big train-shed, and the trip to +Florida could be said to have fairly begun. + +“Do we go by the way of Philadelphia and Washington?” asked Phil, who +had not taken the time to study the route. + +“Yes,” answered Dunston Porter. “Here is a time-table. That will show +you the whole route and tell you just when we get to each place.” + +“Will we have to make any changes?” asked Roger. + +“None whatever.” + +Soon the train had left Jersey City behind and a little later it stopped +at Newark, and then sped on towards Philadelphia. By this time it had +grown too dark to see the landscape and the boys and Dunston Porter +retired. + +On and on through the long night rolled the train, keeping fairly close +to the Atlantic sea-coast. With nothing to do, the boys did not arise +until late in the morning. They found Dave’s uncle in the lavatory ahead +of them, indulging in the luxury of a shave with a safety razor. + +“Well, how are you feeling?” asked Dunston Porter. + +“Fine!” cried Dave. + +“Couldn’t feel better,” added the senator’s son. + +“Ready for a big breakfast?” + +“I am,” answered Phil, promptly. “Gracious, but traveling makes me +hungry!” + +They had to wait a little before they could get seats together in the +dining-car and they amused themselves by gazing at the settlements +through which they were passing. Here and there were numerous cabins, +with hordes of colored children playing about. + +“This is the Southland, true enough,” observed Dave. “Just see how happy +those pickaninnies seem to be!” + +“Yes, one would almost envy their care-free dispositions,” answered +Dunston Porter. “Their manner shows that it doesn’t take money to make +one happy.” + +They had passed through Richmond and were now on their way to Emporia. +It was growing steadily warmer, and by noon all were glad enough to +leave the car and go out on the observation platform at the end of the +train. + +The next stop was at Fayetteville and after that came Charleston. Long +before this the snow had disappeared and the fields looked as green as +in the fall at home. + +“We’ll be at Jacksonville when you wake up in the morning,” said Dunston +Porter, as they turned into their berths the second night on the train. + +“Good! We can’t get there any too quick for me!” answered Dave. + +“You mustn’t expect too much, Dave. You may be bitterly disappointed,” +remarked his uncle, gravely. + +“Oh, we’ve just got to catch Merwell and Jasniff, Uncle Dunston!” + +“Yes, but they may not be guilty. You’ll have to go slow about accusing +them.” + +“Well, I want to catch them and question them anyway. I can have them +detained on the old charge, you know—that is, if they try to get away +from me.” + +Dave and Phil slept on one side of the car, with Dunston Porter and +Roger on the other. As the steam heat was still turned on, it was +uncomfortably warm, and as a consequence Dave was rather restless. He +tumbled and tossed in his berth, which was the upper one, and wished +that the night were over and that they were in Jacksonville. + +“Oh, pshaw! I really must get some sleep!” he told himself. “If I don’t, +I’ll be as sleepy as an owl to-morrow and not fit to hunt up those +rascals. Yes, I must go to sleep,” and he did what he could to settle +himself. + +He had just closed his eyes when a peculiar noise below him made him +start up. Phil was thrashing around wildly. + +“What’s the matter, Phil?” he asked, in a low tone. + +“Something is in my berth, some animal, or something!” answered the +shipowner’s son. “I can’t go to sleep for it. Every time I lie down it +begins to move.” + +“Maybe it’s a rat.” + +“Whoever heard of a rat in a sleeping-car?” snorted Phil. + +“Perhaps you were dreaming. I didn’t hear anything,” went on Dave. + +“No, I wasn’t dreaming—I heard it as plain as day.” + +“Better go to bed and forget it, Phil,” and then Dave lay down again. +The shipowner’s son grumbled a little under his breath, then turned off +his electric light, and sank on his pillow once more. + +Dave remained quiet for several minutes and then sat bolt upright and +gave a low cry. There was no mistake about it, something had moved over +his feet and given him a slight nip in the toe. + +“Phil!” he called, softly. “Did you do that? Come, no fooling now. This +is no place for jokes.” + +“Do what?” + +“Pinch me in the toe.” + +“I haven’t touched your toe. How can I from the lower berth?” + +“Well, something nipped me.” + +“Maybe it’s you who are dreaming this trip, Dave,” returned the +shipowner’s son, with pardonable sarcasm. + +Dave did not reply, for just then he felt something moving in the +blanket. He made a clutch for it. A little squeak followed. + +“I’ve got it, Phil!” + +“What is it?” + +“I don’t know yet—it’s in the blanket.” + +“Oh, what a noise!” came from the berth beyond. “Cannot you young men be +quiet?” It was a woman who was speaking. She was an elderly person and +Dave had noticed, during the day, that she was rather sour-looking. + +“Sorry, madam, but I’ve just caught something in my berth,” answered +Dave. “I’ll turn up the light and see what it is,” he added, as he held +on to the object in the blanket with one hand and turned on the electric +illumination with the other. + +The cries and talking had awakened half a dozen people and the sleepy +porter came down the aisle to find out what was wrong. + +“It’s a mouse—a white mouse!” cried Dave, as the little creature was +uncovered. + +“Wot’s dat, a mouse!” exclaimed the porter. “Nebber heard of sech a +t’ing! How did he git yeah?” + +“Don’t ask me,” replied Dave. “Ugh! he nipped me in the toe, too!” + +“Here’s another one!” roared Phil. “Ran right across my arm! Take that, +you little imp!” he added, and bang! one of his shoes hit the woodwork +of the car. + +“A mouse!” shrieked the elderly woman. “Did you say a mouse, young man?” + +“I did—and there is more than one, too,” answered Dave, for he had felt +another movement at his feet. He lost no time in scrambling up, and Phil +followed. + +By this time the whole sleeping-car was in an uproar. Everybody who +heard the word “mouse” felt certain one of the creatures must be in his +or her berth. + +“Porter! porter! save me!” screamed the elderly lady. “Oh, mice, just +think of it!” And wrapping her dressing-gown around her, she leaped from +her berth and sped for the ladies’ room. Others also got up, including +Dunston Porter and Roger. + +“What am I going to do with this fellow?” asked Dave, as he held the +mouse up in his vest. + +“Better throw it out of a window,” suggested his uncle. “Mice in a +sleeper! This is certainly the limit!” he muttered. “The railroad +company better get a new system of cleaning.” + +“Mice!” screamed a young lady. “Oh, I shall die!” she shrieked, and +looked ready to faint. + +“Shoot ’em, why don’t you?” suggested a fat man, who came forth from his +berth wearing a blanket, Indian fashion. + +By this time Phil had caught one of the creatures. Both he and Dave +started for the rear of the car, to throw the mice off the train. + +“Stop! stop! I beg of you, don’t kill those mice!” came suddenly from a +tall, thin young man who had been sleeping in a berth at the end of the +car. Dave had noticed him during the day and had put him down as a +preacher or actor. + +“Why not?” asked our hero. + +“They are mine, that’s why,” said the man. “I would not have them killed +for a thousand dollars!” + +“Say, wot yo’-all talkin’ about?” demanded the porter. “Dem mice yours?” + +“Yes! yes! Oh, please do not kill them!” pleaded the tall, thin man. +“They won’t hurt anybody, really they won’t.” + +“Say, are them white mice educated?” demanded the fat man. + +“Indeed they are—I educated them myself,” answered the other man. “I +spent months in doing it, too. They are the best-educated white mice in +the United States,” he added, proudly. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI—PICKING UP THE TRAIL + + +The announcement that the mice that had been caught in the car were +educated filled the boys with interest, but it did not lessen their +indignation nor that of the other passengers. + +“The idea of mice on the train, even if they are educated!” shrilled the +elderly lady. + +“It’s outrageous!” stormed another lady. “I never heard of such a thing +in all my life!” + +“Say, you must take this for a cattle train!” remarked the fat man, +bluntly. “If you do, you’ve got another guess coming.” + +“Oh, my dear, sweet mice,” said the tall, slim man, as he took the +animal from Dave and also the one that Phil was holding. “That is King +Hal and this one is President Tom! They are both highly educated. They +can——” + +“Say, howsoeber did yo’-all git dem trash in dis cah!” demanded the +porter. + +“I—er—I had them in a cage in my—er—in my suit-case,” the owner of the +mice answered, and now his voice faltered. “I really didn’t think they +would get out.” + +“We don’t allow no mice in de sleepin’-cahs!” stormed the porter. “Dogs, +an’ cats, an’ parrots, an’ mice goes in de baggage-cah.” + +“Are there any more of them loose?” asked one of the ladies. + +“I will see!” cried the tall, slim man. “I forgot about that! Oh, I hope +they are safe! If they are not, what shall I do? I have an engagement in +Jacksonville, and another in St. Augustine, to fill.” + +“Do you show ’em on the stage?” snorted the fat man. + +“To be sure. Haven’t you heard of me, Professor Richard De Haven, the +world-famous trainer of mice, rats, and cats? I have exhibited my mice +in all the countries of the world, and——” + +“Never mind that just now,” interrupted Dunston Porter. “Go and see if +the others are safe, otherwise we’ll have to round up your live-stock +before we go to sleep again.” + +“Oh, I shall never sleep another wink in this car!” sighed a lady. + +“I shall!” snorted the fat man, “or else get the price of my berth out +of that chap, or the railroad company!” + +Professor De Haven ran to his berth and dragged forth a dress-suit-case. +A moment later he uttered a genuine howl of dismay. + +“They are all gone!” + +“How many?” queried Dave, who had followed him. + +“Sixteen of them, not counting the two I have here now! O dear, what +shall I do?” And the professor wrung his hands in despair. + +“Sixteen mice at large!” shrieked one of the ladies. “Oh, stop the +train! I want to get off!” + +“Can’t stop no train now,” answered the porter. “We’se got to jest catch +dem mice somehow, but I dunno how it’s gwine to be done,” he went on, +scratching his woolly head in perplexity. + +“I’ve got a shotgun along,” suggested the fat man. “Might go gunning +with that.” + +“I’ll get my cane,” said another man. + +“I guess the ladies better retire to the next car,” suggested a third +passenger. + +“Yes, yes, let us go, at once!” cried the elderly lady. “Porter, can I +get a berth there?” + +“Sorry, missus, but I dun reckon all de berths on dis yeah train am +tooken.” + +“See here!” cried Dave, to Professor De Haven. “If the mice are +educated, can’t you call them to you in some way?” + +“To be sure!” cried the professor, struck by the idea. “Why did I not +think of that myself? I was too upset to think of anything. Yes, I can +whistle for them.” + +“Whistle for ’em?” snorted the fat man. + +“Yes, yes! I always whistle when I feed them. Please be quiet. I shall +have to whistle loudly, for the train makes such a noise and it may be +some of my dear pets may not hear me!” + +“Humph! Then you better whistle for all you’re worth!” returned the man +of weight. + +Walking slowly up and down the sleeping-car Professor De Haven commenced +to whistle in a clear, steady trill. He kept this up for fully a minute +and by that time several white mice had shown themselves. They were +somewhat scared, but gradually they came to him and ran up on his +shoulders. + +“Well, doesn’t that beat the Dutch!” whispered Roger, half in +admiration. + +“I shouldn’t have been so scared if I had known they were educated,” +returned Phil. + +“Hush!” said Dave. “Give him a chance to gather them all in.” + +Placing the captured mice in their cage, the professor moved up and down +the car once more, opening the berth curtains as he did so. He continued +to emit that same clear trill, and soon his shoulders were full of the +white mice. + +“Only one is missing, little General Pinky,” he announced. + +“Spit, spat, spow! Where did Pinky go?” murmured Phil. + +“Ha! I have him! Dear little Pinky!” cried the professor, as the mouse +dropped onto his shoulder from an upper berth. “Now I have them all, +ladies and gentlemen,” he announced. “You can go to sleep without alarm. +I shall take good care that they do not get away again.” + +“I dun reckon I’se gwine to take care of dat!” put in the porter. “Dem +mice am gwine into de baggage-cah dis minit!” + +“But, my dear fellow——” broke in the professor. + +“I ain’t a-gwine to argy de question, mistah. Da is gwine in de +baggage-cah!” And the porter reached out and caught hold of the cage +containing the mice. + +“Then I shall go with them,” answered the professor, resignedly. + +“Suit yo’ self, sah.” + +“But they wouldn’t hurt a flea!” + +“Can’t help it, sah, it’s de baggage-cah fo’ dis collection of wild +animals,” answered the porter, striding off with the cage in his hands, +while the professor followed. + +“Talk about something happening!” burst out Roger, when the excitement +was over. “This was the funniest experience I ever had.” + +“I am sure I don’t see anything funny about it!” snapped the elderly +lady, who overheard the remark. “I think that man ought to be +prosecuted!” + +“He didn’t expect his mice to get loose,” said Dunston Porter. “Just the +same, he had no right to bring them in here. As the porter said, all +animals must go in the baggage-car.” + +“Wonder if he’ll come back,” mused Phil. + +“I doubt it,” answered Dave. “Well, now I’m going to try to get a little +sleep,” he added, as he climbed back into his berth. The others followed +suit, and presently one after another dropped into slumber. It may be +added here that Professor De Haven did not show himself again while on +the train, he being afraid of the indignation of those who had been +disturbed by his educated mice. + +Early the following morning found our friends in the city of +Jacksonville, which, as my readers must know, is located on the St. +John’s River. They did not wait for breakfast but hurried at once in the +direction of the Hotel Castor, once a leading hostelry of the city, but +which had seen its best day. + +“Quite a town,” remarked the senator’s son, as they passed along. + +“Jacksonville is now the main city of Florida,” replied Dunston Porter. +“It is a great shipping center, and is also well-known as a winter +resort.” + +“How balmy the weather is!” was Phil’s comment. “Just like spring at +home!” + +Dave’s uncle had been in Jacksonville several times and knew the way +well. Soon they reached the hotel, and with his heart beating loudly, +Dave hurried up to the desk and asked the clerk if Link Merwell and Nick +Jasniff were stopping there. + +“Never heard of them,” replied the clerk, after thinking a moment. + +“I have photographs, perhaps you can tell them from that,” went on Dave, +and he drew from his pocket two photographs, taken at different times at +Oak Hall. Each showed a group of students, and in one group was Merwell +and in the other Jasniff. + +The clerk looked at the pictures closely. + +“What is this, some joke?” he asked, suspiciously. + +“No, it is a matter of great importance,” answered Dave. “We must find +those two young men if we possibly can.” + +“Well, if they are the pair who were here some days ago, you are too +late. But their names weren’t what you said.” + +“What did they call themselves?” asked Dunston Porter. + +“John Leeds and Samuel Cross,” answered the clerk. “They had Room 87, +and were here two days.” + +“Do you know where they went to?” asked Phil. + +“I do not.” + +“Can you tell me anything at all about them?” went on Dave. “It is very +important, indeed.” + +“I might as well tell you,” put in Mr. Porter, in a low voice. “They +were a pair of criminals.” + +“You don’t say! Well, do you know, I didn’t much like their looks,” +returned the clerk. “And come to think of it, one acted rather +scared-like, the fellow calling himself Leeds—this one,” and he pointed +to the picture of Link Merwell. + +“And you haven’t any idea where they went to?” + +“Not the slightest. They simply paid their bill and went away.” + +“Did they have any trunks sent off?” asked Roger. “We might find the +expressman,” he explained, to the others. + +“No, they had nothing but hand baggage.” + +“What—can you remember that?” questioned Dave. + +“Yes, each had a suit-case and a small valise,—kind of a tool-bag +affair.” + +“Better look for that schooner, Dave,” said his uncle, in a low voice, +and in a few minutes more they left the hotel, telling the clerk that +they might be back. + +“Shall we get breakfast now?” questioned the senator’s son. He was +beginning to grow hungry. + +“You can get something to eat if you wish, Roger,” answered Dave. “I am +going to try to locate that schooner first.” + +“No, I’ll wait too, then,” said Roger. + +The shipping along the St. John’s River at Jacksonville is rather +extensive. But Dunston Porter knew his business and went direct to one +of the offices where he knew he could find out all about the ships going +out under charter and otherwise. + +“We want to find out about a schooner named the _Emma Brown_, or +_Black_, or _Jones_, or some common name like that,” said Dave’s uncle, +to the elderly man in charge. “She was in this harbor several days ago. +I don’t know if she has sailed or not.” + +“_Emma Brown_, eh?” mused the shipping-clerk. “Never heard of such a +schooner.” + +“Maybe she was the _Emma Black_, or _Emma Jones_,” suggested Dave. + +“No schooner by that name here,—at least not for the past month or two. +We had an _Emma Blackney_ here about six weeks ago. But she sailed for +Nova Scotia.” + +“Well, try to think of some ship that might be named something like what +we said,” pleaded Dave. “This is very important.” + +“A ship that might have sailed from here in the past two or three days,” +added Roger. + +The elderly shipping-clerk leaned back in his chair and ran his hand +through his hair, thoughtfully. + +“Maybe you’re looking for the _Emma Brower_,” he said. “But she isn’t a +schooner, she’s a bark. She left this port yesterday morning.” + +“Bound for where?” asked Dave, eagerly. + +“Bound for Barbados.” + +“Where is that?” questioned Phil. “I’ve heard of the place, but I can’t +just locate it.” + +“It’s an island of the British West Indies,” answered Dunston Porter. +“It lies about five hundred miles southeast of Porto Rico.” + +“If that’s the case, then good-by to Merwell and Jasniff,” murmured +Phil. “We’ll never catch them in the wide world.” + + + + +CHAPTER XVII—MEETING OLD FRIENDS + + +“They may have gone on some other vessel,” remarked Roger, after a +pause. “Let us find out what other ships have left here during the past +few days.” + +“Say,” said Phil, to the elderly shipping-clerk. “Maybe you know my +father or some of the captains working for him. His name is Lawrence, of +the Lawrence Lines.” + +“Indeed!” cried the shipping-clerk. “Well, of course I know him! Are you +Phil Lawrence?” he questioned, eagerly. + +“I am.” + +“Now isn’t that strange!” The man put out his hand. “I don’t suppose you +know me. My name is Sam Castner. I was once a supercargo for your +father, on the _Arvinus_. You took a trip in her with your mother, when +you were about ten years old,—down to Tampa and back, from +Philadelphia.” + +“That’s right, so I did!” cried the shipowner’s son. “I remember you +now. We went fishing together.” + +“So we did, Mr. Lawrence. My, how you’ve grown since then!” added the +former supercargo, as he gazed at Phil’s tall and well-built form. + +“Mr. Castner, we are in a hurry, and maybe you can help us a good deal,” +went on Phil. “We are after two fellows who we think sailed in that +schooner, or bark, or some vessel that left here within the past two +days. They were young fellows, not much older than us boys. Will you aid +us in getting on their track?” + +“Sure I will,” was the ready answer. “What do you know about ’em?” + +“All we know is that they went under the names of Leeds and Cross,” +answered Dave. “But those are not their right names.” + +“And that they are supposed to have sailed on the ship known by a common +name—_Emma_ something or other,” put in Roger. + +“I can soon find out who sailed on the _Emma Brower_” answered Sam +Castner. “Come with me to the next shipping office.” + +He called another clerk to take charge, and accompanied the party to the +next shipping office. On the way he was introduced to Dave and the +others. + +“One of your father’s vessels is in this harbor now,” he said to Phil. + +“What ship is that?” + +“The _Golden Eagle_, Captain Sanders.” + +“Captain Sanders!” cried Dave. “Do you mean Bob Sanders, who used to +sail on the _Stormy Petrel_ with Captain Marshall?” + +“The same, Mr. Porter. Then you know him?” + +“Indeed I do!” returned Dave. “Why, I sailed with him in the South +Seas!” + +“Well, he’s here.” + +“We’ll have to try to see him before we leave,” said Phil. “He was a +nice fellow.” + +At the second shipping office further inquiries were made concerning the +sailing of the _Emma Brower_. It was learned that the bark had carried +not more than half a cargo for Barbados and eight passengers. The names +of Merwell, Jasniff, Leeds, or Cross did not appear on the passenger +list. + +“Did anybody here see those passengers?” asked Dunston Porter. + +“I did,” returned a young clerk. “I was aboard just before she sailed, +and I saw all of them.” + +“Were there two young fellows, chums?” asked Dave. + +“There were, two tall chaps, a bit older than you.” + +“Did they look like these fellows?” and now our hero brought out the +photographs he had used before. + +“They certainly did!” cried the clerk. “I remember this fellow +distinctly,” and he pointed to Jasniff’s picture, taken just before that +individual had run away from Oak Hall. + +“Then they sailed, just as we feared!” returned Dave, and there was +something like a groan in his voice. + +“Wonder if they took the jewels,” murmured Roger. + +“Most likely, Roger,” answered Dunston Porter. + +“But what would they do with them in such an out-of-the-way place as +Barbados?” + +“I rather imagine their plan is to keep quiet for a while, until this +affair blows over. Then they’ll either return to the United States, or +take a British vessel for England. Barbados is an English possession, +you must remember, and a regular line of steamers sail from there to +England.” + +“I wonder if we couldn’t charter a steam tug and go after the bark?” +mused Dave. + +“It might be done,” returned his uncle. “But I doubt if we could catch +the bark, or even locate her. She has too much of a start.” + +“Was the bark going to stop at any ports along the way?” asked Phil. + +“She was not,” answered the young shipping-clerk. + +“Then there is nothing to do but to sail for Barbados after them!” cried +Dave. + +“Sail after them—that far!” ejaculated the senator’s son. + +“Yes, Roger. Of course you haven’t got to go, or Phil either. But I +think my uncle and I ought to go after ’em. Don’t you think so, Uncle +Dunston?” + +“I don’t know—perhaps,” was the slow reply. “We had better make a few +more inquiries first, Dave.” + +“Oh, yes, let us find out all we can about Merwell and Jasniff.” + +They left the shipping office and walked back to the hotel. Here they +had a late breakfast and then commenced to make diligent inquiries +concerning all the movements of Merwell and Jasniff. They soon learned +that the pair had had plenty of money to spend, and that they had bought +many things for the trip to Barbados, even taking along an extra supply +of the Turkish cigarettes that came in the boxes with bands of blue and +gold. + +“I think that that proves my clew of the cigarette box is correct,” said +Dave. + +They visited the local pawnbrokers, and from one of them learned that +Merwell had pawned two diamonds for two hundred and fifty dollars. The +rascal had told the pawnbroker that the gems were the property of a rich +lady who was awaiting a remittance from France. + +“Do these diamonds belong to the Carwith collection?” asked Roger. + +“That remains to be found out,” answered Dunston Porter, and then he +told the pawnbroker to be sure and not let the gems go out of his +possession until a further investigation could be made. The man grumbled +somewhat, but when Dave’s uncle spoke about calling in the officers of +the law, he subsided. + +“Very well, I’ll keep them,” he said. “And if anything is wrong, I’ll do +what the law requires, even if I lose by it.” + +“Let us visit the _Golden Eagle_ and see Bob Sanders,” said Phil, late +in the afternoon. “Perhaps he knows something about the _Emma Brower_, +and her trip.” + +The others were willing, and sundown found them aboard the vessel +belonging to Phil’s father. Hardly had they stepped on deck when a +grizzled old tar, with white hair, rushed up to Dave. + +“If it ain’t Dave Porter!” he burst out. “Yes, sir, Dave, wot I haven’t +seen in a year o’ Sundays! How be you, my boy?” And he caught the youth +by both hands. + +“Billy Dill!” exclaimed our hero, as his face lit up with pleasure. +“Where in the world did you drop from? I thought you had given up the +sea.” + +Billy Dill, as my old readers will remember, was the tar who aided Dave +in locating his Uncle Dunston. As related in “Dave Porter in the South +Seas,” Billy Dill had traveled with our hero to that portion of the +globe, in the _Stormy Petrel_, of which Bob Sanders was, at the time, +second mate. On returning home, the old tar had been placed in a +sanitarium and then a sailors’ home, and Dave had imagined he was still +in the latter retreat. + +“Couldn’t give up the sea, Dave,” replied the old sailor. “I tried my +best, but it wasn’t no use. So I goes to Phil’s old man, an’ I says, +says I, ‘Give me a berth an’ anything I’m wuth,’ an’ he says, says he, +‘How would ye like to sail with Cap’n Sanders, wot sailed with you to +the South Seas?’ ‘Fust-rate,’ says I; an’ here I be, an’ likes it very +much.” + +“Well, I’m glad to see you looking so well,” answered Dave. + +“It’s the sea air done it, lad. When I was ashore I jest knowed I wanted +sea air. No more homes ashore fer Billy Dill, not much!” And the old tar +shook his head with conviction. + +A few minutes later, while the old sailor was shaking hands with the +others, and asking and answering questions, the captain of the ship came +up. + +“Very glad indeed to see you again,” said Captain Sanders, with a broad +smile. He looked closely at the boys. “Grown some since I saw you last.” + +“And you have advanced, too,” answered Dave, with a grin. “Let me +congratulate you on becoming a captain, Mr. Sanders.” + +“It’s all through the kindness of Mr. Lawrence and Captain Marshall. If +it wasn’t for them, I shouldn’t be in this berth.” + +“How is Captain Marshall?” asked our hero. The man mentioned was the +commander of the ship in which Dave had sailed to the South Seas. + +“First-rate, the last I heard of him. He sailed from San Francisco to +Manila ten days ago.” + +“Captain Sanders, what port are you bound for next?” questioned Phil, +after greetings had been exchanged all around and a number of other +questions had been asked. + +“No port as yet, Phil. I’m waiting for orders.” + +“Have you any idea where you may go to?” + +“Something was said about a cargo for Porto Rico. But nothing was +settled. I’ll know in a couple of days, I think.” + +“Do any of our ships ever sail to Barbados?” + +“Not very often. I could have had a cargo for that port from here, but +the firm didn’t take it, and it went to the _Emma Brower_.” + +“The very ship we are after!” murmured Dave. + +“Could you get another cargo for Barbados, do you think?” + +“I don’t know—maybe. Why?” + +“We want to go there!” + +“You do! That isn’t much of a place.” + +“But we have a reason for wanting to go,” went on Phil. And then, +knowing he could trust Captain Sanders, he told the story of the stolen +gems and the search for Merwell and Jasniff. + +“Humph! that’s a queer yarn,” mused the captain of the _Golden Eagle_. +“Supposing I got a cargo for that port—you’d go along?” + +“I would,” answered the shipowner’s son, promptly. “That is, if dad +would let me—and I’m sure he would.” + +“So would I go,” added Dave. + +“I’d have to go—to look after the others,” said Dunston Porter, with a +smile. + +“Well, you can’t leave me in the cold,” came from Roger. “If the rest +went, I’d go too.” + +“Come down to the cabin and talk it over,” said Captain Sanders, and led +the way across the deck and down the companionway. + +Once below they were invited to remain to supper and did so. While at +the meal the boys and Dunston Porter told all they knew concerning the +case against Merwell and Jasniff, and the captain told what he knew +about the _Emma Brower_ and her commander. + +“I am going to telegraph to my father about this,” said Phil, a little +later. “If this vessel can get a cargo for Barbados she might as well +sail for that port as anywhere.” + +“Well, I’m willing,” answered Captain Sanders. “When will you send word +to him?” + +“Right away—I’ll send him a telegram at once.” + +“I hope it turns out all right,” said Dave. “I feel it is my duty to get +after Merwell and Jasniff, and do it as soon as possible.” + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII—OFF FOR BARBADOS + + +The next three days were busy ones for the boys and Dunston Porter. +Telegrams were sent back and forth between Phil and his father, and also +between Dave and Mr. Wadsworth. + +“Here is news!” cried our hero, after receiving one of the messages. +“Just listen to this.” And he read the following, from the jewelry +manufacturer: + + “Clew in Boston proved to be false, also clew in New York. Hope you + are on the right track and get gems. Spare no expense if you feel + you are right.” + +“And here is a telegram from my dad,” said Phil. “He tells us—Captain +Sanders and myself—to use our own judgment.” + +“Can you get a cargo for Barbados, Phil?” asked Roger. + +“We can get a half-cargo.” + +“At once?” + +“Yes, that is, inside of two days.” + +“Then by all means take it, Phil!” cried Dave. “I know Mr. Wadsworth +will stand the extra expense. And if he won’t, I know my father will.” + +“Where is your Uncle Dunston?” questioned the shipowner’s son. + +“He’s out on a little business trip. He got a telegram from New York +that upset him somewhat. I hope it isn’t anything serious,” added +Dave, soberly. + +The boys rushed off to talk the matter over with Captain Sanders. They +found the master of the vessel at the shipping office, talking over +the matter of a cargo for Barbados. + +“Four men want to take passage with us, if we go,” said the captain. +“That will help pay for the trip, since they are willing to pay good +passage money.” + +“We want you to take that half-cargo,” said Phil, and explained +matters. + +“All right, if you say so,” answered Captain Sanders. “But you had +better speak to Mr. Porter about it first.” + +Half an hour later Dunston Porter came driving up in a cab. He was +plainly excited. + +“I’ve got to go to New York at once,” he said. “I must look after some +valuable investments in Wall Street. Do you think you boys can get +along alone?” + +“I think we can, Uncle Dunston,” answered Dave. “You know we are used +to taking care of ourselves,” and he smiled faintly. + +“Then go ahead and do as you think best.” + +“We want Captain Sanders to start for Barbados as soon as he can,” +went on our hero, and told of the telegrams received. + +A general talk followed, lasting until Dunston Porter had to ride away +to catch the train for New York. + +“You must be right, and Merwell and Jasniff must be guilty,” he said. +“And if they are, spare no expense in catching them. I think the +quicker you start for Barbados the better. And as soon as you arrive +do your best to locate the rascals and have the authorities arrest +them. And above all things, keep your eyes open for the jewels, for we +need them much more than we need to catch Merwell and Jasniff. To +catch the rascals and miss the gems will do us no good.” + +“I understand, Uncle Dunston,” answered Dave. “And if the jewels are +anywhere around we’ll locate them.” + +“Then good-by and good luck!” finished Dunston Porter, and in a minute +more he was off. + +As soon as he was gone the boys and Captain Sanders commenced +preparations for the trip to Barbados. An extra number of longshoremen +were engaged, so that the half-cargo to be taken along could be gotten +aboard quickly, and the boys spent their time in buying such things as +they needed for the trip. + +“They tell me it is pretty warm down there,” said Roger. “So we had +better buy some thin suits.” + +“And we had better go armed,” added Phil. “No telling what trouble we +may run into, in trying to corner Merwell and Jasniff. Merwell is no +great fighter, but Jasniff is a brute.” + +“Yes, I’ll take no chances with Jasniff,” answered Dave. He had not +forgotten his quarrel at Oak Hall with that bully, and how Jasniff had +attacked him with an Indian club, as related in detail in “Dave +Porter’s Return to School.” + +At last all was in readiness for the trip, and the boys and the other +passengers, four burly Englishmen, went aboard. Fortunately, the +_Golden Eagle_ was well provided with staterooms, so there was but +little crowding. Dave had a small room to himself and next to him were +his chums, with Captain Sanders and the first mate opposite. Billy +Dill was, of course, in the forecastle with the other sailors. + +“It’s grand to have you along ag’in,” he said, to Dave and Phil. +“Seems like old times, when we sailed the Pacific.” + +“So it does,” answered our hero. + +“Only ye ain’t a-lookin’ for no uncle this trip, be you?” And the old +tar chuckled. + +“No, Billy, we are looking for somebody quite different—two rascals +who ran away with a lot of diamonds.” + +“Mackerel an’ codfish! Ye don’t tell me, Dave! Your diamonds?” + +“No, but some diamonds that were left with a close friend of mine. If +they are not recovered, my friend will be almost ruined.” + +“Jumpin’ dogfish! Then I hope you catch them lubbers! If so be I can +help ye any, don’t be afeered to call on me,” added the old sailor, +earnestly. + +“All right; I’ll remember that,” replied Dave. + +Early the next day the _Golden Eagle_ slipped down the St. John’s +River and past the jetties and the lighthouse into the Atlantic Ocean. +It was warm and clear, with a good wind blowing from the west, an +ideal day for the departure. The boys remained on deck, watching the +scenery of the winding stream and then the fading shoreline, and then +went below to arrange their belongings, for the trip to Barbados would +occupy some time. + +“I hope we don’t get seasick,” remarked the senator’s son. + +“Well, if we do, we’ll have to stand it,” replied Phil. “But don’t +let’s think about it.” + +“What I am wishing, is that we’ll have good weather and a quick +passage,” remarked Dave. “We can’t get to Barbados any too quick for +me.” + +“I was looking up the place in the shipping-guide,” went on Roger. +“It’s not much of an island, only twenty-one miles long by fifteen +wide. The whole population is only about two hundred thousand, mostly +English.” + +“The smaller the population the easier it will be to find Merwell and +Jasniff,” was the comment of the shipowner’s son. + +“Well, there may be a good many hiding-places on an island twenty-one +miles long by fifteen miles wide,” added Dave, with a grin. + +“Oh, we’ll rake the island with a fine-tooth comb, if we have to,” +cried Roger. + +“Roger, was your father quite willing to let you go on the trip?” + +“Yes. He and mother are now in Washington, you know, and as the school +is closed, I’d either have to go to the Capital, or stay with you. And +I told him I’d much rather be with you and Phil.” + +“And we are glad to have you with us!” cried Phil, and Dave nodded, to +show that he felt the same way about it. + +“What do you think about the other passengers?” asked Phil, in a lower +voice, so that nobody else might hear. + +“I don’t think I’ll like them very much,” replied the senator’s son. +“That man named Geswick is very loud and dictatorial.” + +“Yes, and the chap named Pardell is little better,” returned Dave. + +“What line are they in, Phil, did you hear?” + +“Oh, they are traveling, that’s all. They came to this country from +London, and they are going back by the way of Barbados.” + +“They seem to have some money.” + +“Yes, but Captain Sanders told me that they hang on to it pretty +well—more so than he at first expected they would.” + +The first day passed rapidly and the _Golden Eagle_ made good headway. +The boys spent most of the time on deck, amusing themselves as best +they could. They talked to Captain Sanders and his mate, and also +visited with Billy Dill. Occasionally they conversed with the four +Englishmen, but they noticed that the Britishers were inclined to keep +to themselves. + +“I guess it is just as well, too,” said Dave to his chums. “They are +not our sort at all.” + +“Unless I miss my guess, they have had some sort of quarrel among +themselves,” remarked Phil. “They were disputing over something early +this morning and again just before dinner.” + +Several days passed, and the boys commenced to feel quite at home on +the ship. None of them had been seasick, for which all were thankful. + +“The weather has been in our favor,” said Captain Sanders. “If it +keeps on like this, we’ll make Barbados in record time.” + +“Billy Dill said he smelt a storm,” returned Dave. + +“Hum! Is that so?” mused the captain. “Well, he’s a pretty good +weather-sharp, I must confess. I’ll take another look at the glass,” +and he walked off to do so. + +The storm came up during the night, and Dave was awakened to find +himself rolling from one side of his berth to the other. He arose, and +as he did so he heard an exclamation from Roger. + +“What is it, Roger?” he called out. + +“I—I guess I’m seasick!” answered the senator’s son. “Gracious, how +this old tub rolls!” + +“Don’t call the _Golden Eagle_ a tub!” returned Phil. “Say, can I do +anything for you?” he went on sympathetically. + +“Yes, tell Captain Sanders to keep the boat from rocking.” + +“Better lie down again, Roger,” said Dave, entering the stateroom. +“It’s a little better than standing up.” + +“Oh, I—I guess I’m not so very ba-badly off,” gasped the sufferer. +“But I do wish the storm was over.” + +“We all wish that.” + +But, instead of clearing away, the storm increased in violence, and by +nine o’clock in the morning the wind was blowing close to a gale. Both +the captain and the mate were on deck, and the former advised the boys +and the other passengers to remain below. Two of the Englishmen were +very seasick and found all manner of fault because of the storm. + +“I’d never have come on this treasure hunt had I known I was to be so +sick!” groaned one. + +“What bloody luck!” said the other sick man. “All the pirates’ gold in +the world is not worth it!” + +“Stow it!” cried the man named Geswick. “You know you weren’t to +mention what we were after.” + +“Nobody can hear us, in this storm,” replied the first man who had +spoken. + +“Those boys might hear,” put in the fellow named Pardell. + +“Oh, well, they are only boys. Besides, they’d not dare to follow us +up to Cave Island——” + +“Hush, I tell you!” cried Geswick, savagely. “Do learn to keep your +tongue quiet.” And then the men continued to talk in whispers. + +Dave had been passing the staterooms of the Englishmen during this +conversation and he could not help but hear what was said. When he +rejoined his chums he told them of the talk. + +“They must be on the hunt after pirates’ gold,” said Phil. “Well, they +are not the first to do that kind of searching. Party after party has +sailed down here for the same purpose.” + +“Yes, and each party has been unsuccessful, so far as I know,” +answered Dave. + +“Perhaps they have some extra-good clew,” suggested Roger, trying to +forget his seasickness. + +“Perhaps,” returned Dave. “Well, if they can find any pirates’ gold on +any of these islands they are welcome to it, so far as I am concerned. +All I want to get hold of are the Carwith jewels.” + + + + +CHAPTER XIX—THE MISSING SHIP + + +“How much longer do you think this storm will last?” + +It was Dave who asked this question, of Captain Sanders, when the +latter came down to get a bite for breakfast. To get a regular meal, +with the vessel pitching and tossing wildly, was out of the question. + +“I don’t know, Dave,” was the grave answer. “I am hoping the wind will +die down by sunset. But the storm may last several days.” + +“Are we in any danger?” questioned Phil. + +“There is always danger during a storm,” answered the master of the +_Golden Eagle_. “But I hope to weather this blow without much +trouble.” + +“Can we be of any assistance?” went on our hero. + +“No, boys. There is nothing you can do but keep yourselves from +falling overboard. How is Roger?” + +“A little better.” + +“I heard that two of those Englishmen are pretty sick,” went on +Captain Sanders, with a faint smile. + +“They are.” + +“It’s queer to me that they sailed with us. It’s not such a pleasant +voyage.” + +“I overheard a little of their talk,” answered Dave, and, knowing he +could trust the captain, he related what had been said. + +“Pirates’ gold, eh?” muttered the master of the ship. “Most of those +yarns are fairy-stories. I’ve known expedition after expedition to be +fitted out, to search for treasures said to be hidden by the old-time +buccaneers, but I never saw a man yet who got even a smell of a +treasure. Where were they going for it, Dave?” + +“I don’t know. I think one of them mentioned Cave Island. Is there +such a place?” + +“There may be, although I never heard of it. Many of the islands in +this part of the globe, being of volcanic origin, contain caves.” + +“They must expect to get to Cave Island from Barbados.” + +“More than likely,” answered the captain, and then hurried on deck +again. + +The storm continued for the remainder of the day, but by nightfall the +wind commenced to die down, and by midnight the clouds had passed and +the stars were shining brightly. In the morning the big sun came out +of the sea to the east like a globe of fire. + +“Now we are going to have some warm weather,” remarked Billy Dill, and +the old tar was right. As the sun mounted in the heavens it grew +positively hot, until the boys had to go to their staterooms and don +thinner clothing. With the departure of the storm, Roger’s seasickness +left him, but the two Englishmen remained slightly unwell for some +time longer. + +“Phew! how warm it is!” remarked Phil. “And just think of it!—up at +home they are having snow and ice!” + +With the passing of the storm, the boys settled down as before. They +saw but little of the Englishmen, especially of the pair who were +sick. But one day something happened which came close to causing a +crisis. + +The boys were seated on the rear deck, talking over matters in +general, when a strong puff of wind caused a sheet of paper to blow +from somewhere ahead towards Dave. He reached out and caught the sheet +just as it was about to go overboard. + +“Hello, what’s this?” he cried, as he looked the sheet over. “Must be +some sort of a chart.” + +“It is,” answered Roger, gazing at the paper. “See, here is a spot +marked Barbados, and another marked Cave Island, a little to the +eastward.” + +“Why, look what it says, up here!” cried Phil. “’_Map of the Don +Amorandos Treasure, buried in 1715_.’ Say, do you think those +Englishmen——” + +“Hi, you! Give me that map!” bawled a voice from near by, and with a +very red face, the Englishman named Geswick bore down on the boys. +“How dare you look at this?” he went on, as he snatched the sheet out +of their hands and folded it up. + +“We wanted to see what it was and whom it belonged to,” answered Dave, +as calmly as he could. + +“You had no right to look at it,” stormed Andrew Geswick. “That is +private property.” + +“Then why did you let it fall in our hands?” asked Phil. + +“If it hadn’t been for Dave, it would have gone overboard,” put in +Roger. + +“Humph!” The man fell back a little. “Well, I am thankful for that. +But you boys had no right to look at it,” he grumbled. + +“Why, it’s only a chart, isn’t it?” asked the senator’s son, +curiously. + +“Never mind what it is!” answered Andrew Geswick, sharply. “Did you +read what was on it?” he demanded, an instant later. + +“We saw it was a chart,” answered Dave, and looked knowingly at his +chums, to make them keep silent. + +“It—er—it belongs to Mr. Pardell and he is very particular about it,” +went on the Englishman. And then without another word he walked away. + +“My, isn’t he sweet!” muttered Phil. + +“Just as sweet as a can of sour milk,” answered the senator’s son. +“Dave, I guess you wish you had allowed that map to blow overboard.” + +“Not exactly that, Roger. But he might have been a little more +thankful for saving something that he thinks so valuable.” + +“Do you think there is anything in this treasure idea?” questioned +Phil, after a pause. + +“No, Phil. That is, there may be some lost treasure, secreted by the +pirates and buccaneers of old, but I doubt if anybody will ever find +it—excepting by accident.” + +“If there was a treasure on this Cave Island, we might hunt for it,” +went on the shipowner’s son. + +“Phil, don’t let that bee get into your bonnet!” cried Roger. “Many a +man has gone crazy looking for pirates’ gold. Better drop it, and +think of how we are to round up Merwell and Jasniff.” + +“Well, I’d like to go to Cave Island anyway,” said Phil. “We might——” +And then he stopped short, as he saw Geswick and Pardell near by. The +Englishmen had been listening to part of the conversation. + +“So you’d like to go to Cave Island, would you?” cried Andrew Geswick, +his face red with rage. “You take my advice and keep away from that +place!” + +“Say, do you own that island?” demanded Phil, getting angry because of +the other’s dictatorial manner. + +“No, we don’t own the island. But we——” Andrew Geswick stopped short +as his companion plucked him by the sleeve. “Never mind, you keep away +from it, that’s all,” he growled. + +“We’ll go there if we want to,” called out Phil. + +“If you do you may get into trouble,” called back Pardell. Then he and +his companion disappeared in the direction of the cabin. + +“They are touchy enough,” was Roger’s comment. “Phil, you had better +drop Cave Island after this.” + +“I’ll talk about it as much as I please,” grumbled the shipowner’s +son. “Those fellows make me tired. They act as if they owned the +earth!” + +Sunday was a quiet day on shipboard. The Englishmen did not show +themselves excepting at meals, and the boys were content to leave them +severely alone. They told Captain Sanders of the chart and of the talk +that had occurred. + +“Let them alone, lads,” said the commander of the _Golden Eagle_. +“I’ll venture to say that sooner or later they’ll find out they are on +a wild goose chase.” + +“The only one that seems to be anyway nice is the fellow named Giles +Borden,” said Dave. “He is rather quiet. The other fellow, Rumney, is +almost as bad as Geswick and Pardell.” + +“So I’ve noticed, Dave. And the queer part of it is, Borden paid for +the passages. He appears to be the only one with money.” + +“Maybe he is backing the expedition,” suggested Roger. + +“I’m sorry for him if he is,” answered the captain. + +The Bahama Islands had been passed, and now they were in the vicinity +of Porto Rico. Then commenced the trip southward, through the Lesser +Antilles. + +“This is the spot for active volcanoes,” observed Phil. “Don’t you +remember how the Island of Martinique suffered?” + +“Oh, don’t speak of volcanoes!” cried Roger. “I have no use for +them—or for earthquakes either.” + +“There must be hundreds of islands around here,” observed Dave. “The +charts are full of them.” + +“That must make navigation difficult,” came from Phil. + +“Oh, I reckon Captain Sanders knows what he is about.” + +“Wonder how soon we’ll run into the harbor at Bridgetown?” mused the +shipowner’s son, the place he mentioned being the main seaport of +Barbados. + +“Inside of three days, I hope, Phil,” answered our hero. + +“Merwell and Jasniff must be there by this time.” + +“It’s more than likely—unless something happened to delay them,” +returned Dave. + +At last came the day when they sighted Barbados and ran into the +harbor of Bridgetown. The place was a picturesque one, but the boys +had just then no time to view the scenery or the shipping. As soon as +it could be accomplished, they went ashore, and Captain Sanders went +with them, leaving his vessel in charge of the first mate. + +“You may have trouble with those two rascals, if you find them,” said +the commander of the _Golden Eagle_. “I’ll be on deck to help you all +I can.” + +“Shall we go to the hotel first?” questioned Roger. + +“Might as well,” answered Phil. “They’d strike for the hotel first +thing, after a sea trip like that. Maybe they were both seasick.” + +“I hope they were—it would serve them right,” growled the senator’s +son. + +Dave and the captain were willing, and a little later walked into the +Royal George Hotel. Here the boys looked at the register, but found no +names that they could recognize. Then Dave brought out his photographs +of Merwell and Jasniff and showed them to the hotel proprietor and his +clerk. + +“Nobody here that looks like either of them,” said the proprietor, +while his clerk also shook his head. + +“They came in on the _Emma Brower_,” said Captain Sanders. + +“The _Emma Brower_!” cried the hotel man. “Is she in?” + +“Why, I suppose so,” and now the commander of the _Golden Eagle_ +showed his surprise. + +“She wasn’t in last night, and the agents were a bit worried about +her. I know the agents personally, you see.” + +“Then maybe she isn’t in yet!” cried Dave. “Let us go down to the +docks and find out about this.” + +They lost no time in visiting the docks and the shipping offices. +There they learned that nothing had been heard of the _Emma Brower_ +since the vessel had left Jacksonville. + +“We must have passed her on the way!” cried Dave, to Captain Sanders. +“Could we do that?” + +“Perhaps, since we only had half a cargo, Dave. Besides, maybe that +vessel was damaged by the storm.” + +“I wonder how soon she will get in?” mused Roger. + +At this the captain shrugged his shoulders. + +“It is impossible to say. I’ve known a ship to be a week and sometimes +nearly a month overdue. And I’ve known a ship to drop out altogether,” +he added, soberly. + +“Oh, don’t say you think she has gone down!” cried Dave, in alarm. + +“Let us hope not, Dave.” + +The day passed, and also the next and the next. The cargo of the +_Golden Eagle_ was unloaded, and the Englishmen, who had been +passengers, left for parts unknown. As each day slipped by, Dave grew +more serious. What if the _Emma Brower_ had gone down, carrying +Merwell, Jasniff, and the Carwith jewels with her? + + + + +CHAPTER XX—LANDING ON CAVE ISLAND + + +At the end of a week Dave was more worried than ever. Each day he and +his chums went down to the shipping offices and each day returned to +the hotel disappointed. Not a word had been heard concerning the +missing vessel and those on board. + +The _Golden Eagle_ was all ready to sail on her return trip to the +United States, but Phil told Captain Sanders to wait. + +“Perhaps we’ll hear to-day,” he said, and this was repeated day after +day. + +It was very warm and the boys were glad they had brought along some +thin clothing. They scarcely knew what to do with themselves, and Dave +was particularly sober. + +“I suppose Mr. Wadsworth and the rest are waiting to hear from me,” he +said to his chums. “But what is the use of sending a message when I +haven’t anything to say?” + +Another Sunday passed, and on Monday the boys visited the _Golden +Eagle_, and then went with Captain Sanders to the nearest shipping +office. + +“Something is going on!” cried the senator’s son, as he noticed an +unusual crowd congregated. “Must be news of some sort.” + +“Let us find out what it is!” returned our hero, quickly. + +“The _Emma Brower_ has been heard from,” said a man, standing near. +“That’s the vessel that was missing, don’t you know,” he added. + +“What of her?” asked Dave. + +“Went down in that terrible storm we had about ten days ago.” + +“Down!” gasped all of the boys, while Captain Sanders looked the +concern he felt. + +“So they say. I do not know the particulars,” went on the man as he +walked away. + +It did not take the boys and the captain long to get into the shipping +office and there they learned as many of the particulars as were +known. A tramp steamer from Porto Rico had come in bringing word that +she had sighted portions of a wreck while out at sea, and an +investigation proved the same to belong to the _Emma Brower_. A +portion of a small boat had been picked up, but nothing had been seen +of sailors or passengers. + +“Where was this?” questioned Dave, when he could get the chance. + +“The captain of the steamer says about two miles west of Cave Island.” + +“Cave Island!” cried Phil. “Why, that is where those Englishmen were +going to hunt for that pirates’ treasure.” + +“Two miles from Cave Island,” mused our hero. “If the _Emma Brower_ +went down, perhaps those in some of the small boats got to that +place.” + +“Perhaps,” answered Captain Sanders. + +The boys and the captain remained at the shipping office for an hour, +getting all the details possible concerning the wreck, including the +exact latitude and longitude where the vessel was supposed to have +gone down. + +“Let us sail for that spot and see if we can discover anything,” +suggested Dave, as the party came away. “We may find some of those in +the small boats.” + +“Just what I was going to suggest,” said Phil. + +“Well, it’s up to you, Phil, to say what we shall do,” answered +Captain Sanders. “Your father sent me word that I was to look to you +for orders—that is, within reasonable limits,—and I know you won’t be +unreasonable.” + +“Well, we want to get back to the United States, anyway,” said Roger. +“And this would be on our way.” + +“How soon can you get ready for the trip?” asked our hero, of the +master of the _Golden Eagle_. + +“We are all provisioned, so it won’t take but a few hours,” was the +reply. + +“Then let us sail to-day.” + +“You don’t want to wait for more word?” asked Roger. + +“No, Roger; I don’t think it will do any good,” answered our hero. + +The matter was discussed at the hotel, and a little later the boys +paid their bill and had their baggage taken to the ship. In the +meantime Captain Sanders had prepared for the trip, and two hours +later the _Golden Eagle_ was moving out of the harbor of Bridgetown. + +“How long will it take us to run to that spot where they think the +ship went down?” asked Phil. + +“Not more than a day and a half—it depends somewhat on the wind,” +answered Captain Sanders. + +The boys tried to settle themselves, but this was impossible. Dave +could not keep still, and paced the deck by the hour, or scanned the +bosom of the ocean with the marine glasses Captain Sanders loaned him. + +Only once came a thrill of excitement. A bit of wreckage was sighted +and the ship sailed toward it. It was a yardarm, and to it were lashed +a cask and several boxes, one of the latter bearing the name _Emma +Brower_. Not a sign of a human being could be seen. + +“If a man was on that wreckage the storm tore him loose,” said Captain +Sanders. + +“How terrible!” whispered Roger. + +“And think of it, it may have been Merwell, or Jasniff, or both of +them!” returned Phil. + +On the following day they reached the latitude and longitude as given +by the captain of the tramp steamer. In that vicinity they saw some +smaller wreckage, but nothing of importance. + +“Cave Island is two miles east of here,” said Captain Sanders. + +“Any other islands around?” asked Dave. + +“Nothing within fifteen or twenty miles.” + +“Then, if the crew and passengers took to the small boats, wouldn’t +they be likely to steer for Cave Island?” + +“I think so,—that is, if the storm let ’em do so. It might be the wind +would force ’em the other way. But I think it would be a wise move to +sail for Cave Island and take a look around. The one trouble is, so I +learned at Barbados, the island hasn’t any sort of harbor. We’ll have +to lay-to outside and go ashore in a small boat.” + +“Perhaps it won’t be necessary to go ashore,” said Roger. + +“Oh, it can be done easily enough.” + +The bow of the _Golden Eagle_ was turned eastward. They ran slowly, +all hands keeping their eyes open for more signs of the wreck. + +Presently they came in sight of the reef outside of Cave Island. It +formed a large horseshoe, and beyond was the island itself, long, low, +and irregular, the shore fringed with tropical trees and bushes and +the center rocky and barren. + +“This ain’t no easy place to land,” said Billy Dill to Dave, as the +sails were lowered and the ship was brought about. “If them critters +from the wreck got here in their small boats in the dark they must +have had a fierce time o’ it!” + +“I don’t see a sign of a boat anywhere,” said Dave, as he swept the +reef and the shore with the glasses. “And not a sign of a human being +either,” he added, with a sinking heart. + +“That’s queer, too, lad, if they came here. Fust thing I’d think +about, if I was wrecked, would be to put up a signal o’ distress.” + +It was growing dark, yet Dave and his chums were anxious to go ashore, +to see if they could discover anything concerning those who had been +wrecked, so Captain Sanders ordered out the largest of the small +boats. + +“I’ll go with you,” he said. “And we can take Billy Dill and Smiley.” + +“We had better take some things along—in case we remain ashore all +night,” said Dave. + +“To be sure. And we’ll go armed, lad—no telling what may turn up.” + +“Any wild animals here?” questioned the senator’s son. + +“I don’t know, but I don’t think so—that is, not large ones. You’ll +find rabbits maybe, and any number of birds.” + +Soon the small boat was ready to go ashore. Billy Dill and the other +sailor, Smiley, were at the oars, while Captain Sanders was in the +stern, to steer and give directions. + +“If it starts to blow better move off a bit,” said the captain to the +mate. “No use in taking chances around these reefs.” + +“I’ll watch out,” was the answer. “I know just what a blow down here +means, and I’ll keep her off.” + +“Do you think we’ll have another storm?” asked Dave. + +“Can’t tell about that, lad. Sometimes a storm comes up pretty quick +in these parts.” + +Soon the small boat was close to the breakers. The water boiled and +foamed on every side, and it must be confessed that Roger was somewhat +scared. Dave and Phil did not mind, although wishing it was over. + +“To starboard, hard!” shouted the captain, when the first of the +breakers was encountered. “Now ease off, lads! Lively now, and hard! +Starboard again! Keep it up! There, straight ahead! Bend to it, bend I +tell you! A little more to starboard—not too much! There, now we are +out of it!” And in a moment more the small boat was out of the +breakers and riding into a tiny cove, where there was a stretch of +sand, dotted with palms. The two sailors were all but exhausted and +glad enough to rest up and allow the boat to drift ashore. + +“So this is Cave Island?” remarked Dave, as he hopped out on the sand, +followed by his chums. “Well, it doesn’t look much different from the +other islands in this portion of the globe.” + +After everybody had alighted, the small boat was pulled up on the sand +and tied to a palm tree. + +“What’s to do next?” asked the shipowner’s son, as he looked +inquiringly at Dave. “This is your expedition, Dave.” + +“How big around do you suppose this island is, Captain?” asked our +hero. + +“Four or five miles at least.” + +“Then we could walk completely around it in a couple of hours, that +is, if we found it wasn’t too rough in spots.” + +“You won’t find it smooth like this all around, lad.” + +[Illustration: “TO STARBOARD, HARD!” SHOUTED THE CAPTAIN.] + +“Some of us might walk in one direction and some in the other,” +suggested Roger. “Then, if either party discovered anything, it could +signal to the other by firing a pistol or a gun.” For both sorts of +weapons had been brought along. + +“Whatever you wish to do to-day must be done quickly,” said Captain +Sanders. “It will soon be night, and, as you know, darkness comes on +quickly in this part of the world.” + +The matter was discussed for a few minutes, and then it was decided to +leave the sailors in charge of the boat, while Captain Sanders and +Phil walked up the shore and Dave and Roger traveled in the opposite +direction. + +For fully a quarter of a mile Dave and the senator’s son found it an +easy matter to push along, for the sandy shore was smooth and offered +no barrier to their advance. But then they came to a series of rocks, +jutting out into the ocean, and here progress was more difficult. + +“We’ll not get around this island to-night,” remarked the senator’s +son, after climbing over a particularly sharp line of rocks. “This +takes a fellow’s wind.” + +“Look!” cried our hero, as he pointed to a spot between the rocks. +“What do you make that out to be, Roger?” + +“It’s the wreck of a rowboat!” cried the other. + +“Just what I thought. Let us go down and look it over.” + +With care, so as not to sprain an ankle, the two chums climbed down to +the split in the rocks. By this time it was growing dark, and in the +hollow they could not see clearly. + +It was the remains of a rowboat which they had discovered. The small +craft was split from end to end, so as to be utterly useless. Near it +lay a broken oar and a broken-open box that had contained provisions +of some sort. + +“That boat is from the _Emma Brower_!” cried Dave, after an +investigation. “And that proves that some of the people from the +wrecked ship came to this island!” + +“Yes, but are they alive, Dave, or were they drowned?” questioned +Roger. + +“That remains to be found out, Roger. I sincerely hope they are +alive.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXI—INTO A CAVE AND OUT + + +“Let us look around for footprints, Roger,” said Dave, as the pair +scrambled up the rocks once more. “If any persons landed from that +smashed rowboat they’d have to walk in some direction, and the ground +is soft back of here.” + +“The trouble is, it is growing so dark,” returned the senator’s son. +“In a little while we won’t be able to find our way back. We should +have brought a lantern along.” + +“I’ve got something almost as good,” answered our hero, and took from +his pocket a little electric flashlight—one of the kind that emits a +tiny flash of light when the button at the end is pressed. + +“Good enough! That’s first-rate!” + +The pair were soon down from the rocks. Under the palm trees it was +now dark, and Dave used the electric flashlight to advantage. + +“Here are footprints!” he cried, presently. “Six pairs! That shows +that at least a half dozen persons came ashore in that boat. Those six +may have been carrying others.” + +“Shall we set up a shout?” + +“I don’t know, Roger. If Merwell and Jasniff were around I’d like to +surprise them. If they discovered us first, and they had the jewels, +they’d surely hide the gems and then say they didn’t have them.” + +“I believe that, Dave. Well, let us follow the footsteps and see where +they lead to.” + +“Another thing. Do you remember those Englishmen? They may be on this +island, and if so, I’d rather steer clear of them.” + +“So would I, they were so disagreeable—all but that one chap, Borden.” + +The trail led among the palm trees and then up a rise of ground where +grew a number of bushes. Here the boys had to proceed more slowly, for +fear of missing the way. + +“It’s queer that they should call this spot Cave Island,” observed the +senator’s son. “We haven’t seen anything that looks like a cave.” + +“The caves may be on the other side of the island,” answered Dave. +“Look out, Roger, there is a split in the rocks! Let us jump over to +yonder bushes.” + +Dave placed the flashlight in his pocket and made the leap he had +mentioned, and his chum came after him. + +A most astonishing thing followed. The bushes where they landed gave +way, and down they rolled on some smooth rocks. They tried to stay +their progress, but this was impossible, and they continued to roll +for several minutes. Then Dave bumped into some sort of barrier and +Roger landed beside him. + +“For gracious sake, what’s this?” gasped Roger, when he felt able to +speak. The breath had been all but knocked out of him. + +“I guess we have found one of the caves,” answered Dave, grimly. +“Phew, but that was some roll, wasn’t it!” + +“We must be down near the center of the earth,” murmured the senator’s +son. + +“Not quite as bad as that. But we came down some distance, I admit.” + +“Flash that light around, Dave, and let us see where we are.” + +“I will if the light hasn’t been smashed,” replied our hero. “I rolled +over it half a dozen times.” + +He brought out the little flashlight and tried it. Fortunately, it was +still in working order. As the rays fell around the lads, they stared +at each other, blankly. + +“What do you make of this, Dave?” + +“Looks as if it was cut out of the solid rock, Roger.” + +“It certainly is some cave. Wonder where it leads to?” + +“We might follow the opening and find out.” + +“Excuse me, I’d rather climb out the way we came in.” + +“It certainly doesn’t look very inviting.” + +The two boys found themselves in an irregular opening of the rocks, +fifty feet wide and perhaps twice that in length. On one side was the +smooth slope down which they had come; on the other a dark hole that +looked as if it might lead to some bottomless pit. A jagged rock in +the center of the underground chamber had been the means of stopping +them from dropping to the unknown depths below them. + +“We were lucky to hit this rock,” said Dave, with something like a +shiver. “If we hadn’t——” He did not finish. + +“Let us get out. It gives me the creeps to stay here,” returned his +chum. + +“All right, Roger, I’m willing. But it is going to be hard work +crawling back, those rocks are so smooth.” + +“We’ve got to get back!” + +“I can’t hold the light and climb too. And if I place it on the rocks +it may roll away and go down into that hole,” went on our hero. + +“Oh, put it in your pocket again and we’ll try to climb back in the +dark. We know the direction.” + +Dave did as his chum suggested, and then commenced a climb that +neither of the lads ever forgot. The rocks were so smooth in spots +that at times to get a foothold was next to impossible. Once Roger +slid back several feet and would have gone to the bottom had not Dave +caught and held him. + +“Take it slowly, Roger,” was our hero’s advice. “If you go to the +bottom, you may be killed!” + +“I’ll hang—on!” gasped the other. “But I wi-wish I was +out—of—th-this!” + +“Well, I wish the same.” + +It took fully a quarter of an hour longer to get out of the rocky +cave, and when the boys reached the surface of the earth they were so +exhausted they could do little but sit on the ground and pant for +breath. + +“It’s Cave Island right enough,” was the comment of the senator’s son. +“But excuse me from tumbling into any more such openings!” + +“I guess the best thing we can do is to go back to the boat,” said +Dave. “We can’t discover much in this darkness. We can start out again +early in the morning.” + +“All right, back to the boat it is,” and the pair set out on the +return along the sandy shore. + +“I see a light!” cried Dave, after about half the distance to where +the rowboat had been left was covered. And he pointed to a spot +inland, among the trees. + +“Maybe it’s a camp of some sort,” replied Roger. “It seems to be quite +a distance away.” + +“Shall we go and see what it is?” + +“Hadn’t we better get the others first, Dave?” + +“All right, if you think best.” + +So they continued on the way to where the rowboat had been left. They +came up to find that Captain Sanders and Phil had not yet returned. +Smiley was snoring on the sand, while Billy Dill sat near by on guard. + +“Find anybody?” queried the old tar, eagerly. + +“We found one of the caves, and we saw a light at a distance,” +answered Dave. “We want to investigate that light, as soon as the +others get back.” + +Dave and Roger sat down, to rest and to wait, and thus another +half-hour went by. With nothing else to do, Billy Dill took a nap, and +the boys allowed the old sailor to slumber on. + +“It’s queer the captain and Phil don’t return,” remarked Roger, +presently. “They must have gone much further than we did.” + +“Maybe they fell into one of those caves, Roger.” + +“Oh, I trust not!” + +Another half-hour went by and still the others did not put in an +appearance. By this time Dave was getting worried. + +“Let us take a walk along the shore and look for them,” he said, and +Roger agreed, and they started off. + +They had covered less than a quarter of a mile when they came in sight +of a campfire, well-hidden between the rough rocks back from the +water’s edge. Around the campfire were huddled the forms of several +men, evidently sailors. + +“Perhaps those men are from the _Emma Brower_,” said Dave, in a low +tone. + +“I don’t see anything of Captain Sanders and Phil,” remarked the +senator’s son. + +“No. And yet they must have seen this campfire, if they came this way. +What can it mean, Dave?” + +“I don’t know.” + +“Shall we go up to the campfire and talk to those fellows?” + +“I don’t see why not. I am not afraid of them.” + +“Do you see anybody that looks like Jasniff or Merwell?” + +“No, those fellows are all plain sailors, by their outfits.” + +Dave continued to advance and Roger followed, and neither halted until +he was within the glow of the campfire. Then Dave called out: + +“Hello, messmates!” + +At this cry the four sailors around the fire sprang to their feet. At +a glance Dave and Roger saw that they were in tatters, and that they +looked hungry and careworn. + +“Hello, yourself!” answered one of the tars, stepping towards the +boys. “Who are you?” + +“Passengers from the _Golden Eagle_,” answered Dave. + +“Oh, some more of that crowd, eh?” cried the tar. + +“Then you’ve seen the others,—the captain and a young fellow like +ourselves?” queried Roger. + +“Yes, they were here only a short while ago.” + +“They said they’d be back, and take us aboard an’ git us something to +eat,” put in a second of the sailors. + +“An’ we need that grub putty bad, we do,” added a third. + +“Ain’t had no decent meal since we got wrecked,” came from the fourth. +“A few fish an’ birds, an’ that’s all.” + +“You are from the _Emma Brower_?” questioned Dave, eagerly. + +“You’ve struck it, messmate. She went down in the storm an’ we come +putty nigh goin’ down with her.” + +“Well, you shall have all you want to eat in a little while. Tell me +where the others of our crowd went.” + +“They went after the two chaps as ran away.” + +“Ran away?” cried Dave. “From where?” + +“From here.” + +“They must have been Jasniff and Merwell!” murmured Roger. + +“Who were those fellows?” asked our hero. + +“Two passengers from the bark. They came ashore with us, and they +stayed with us until your captain and the other young fellow come +along. Then they up anchors and away like the old Nick was after ’em,” +explained the tar who had first spoken. + +“Were they young fellows like ourselves?” + +“Yes,—a bit older, maybe. Named Ford and Smith.” + +“They must have been Jasniff and Merwell,” said Dave, to his chum. + +“I wonder if they managed to save the jewels,” whispered the senator’s +son. + +“Did they have any baggage?” asked Dave of the sailors. + +“Baggage? Not much! We didn’t have no time for baggage when the ship +went down. It was every man fer himself. The cap’n got off in one boat +with some o’ the passengers, an’ the mate got off with some of the +crew in another boat, an’ we got off by ourselves. It was blowin’ big +guns, I can tell ye, an’ it looks like we would be swamped most every +minit. I knowed about this island an’ I steered in this direction as +well as I could, an’ by sheer good luck we struck the shore—an’ here +we are.” + +“What became of the other boats?” + +“Ain’t seen nuthin’ of ’em yet.” + +“Is that your boat was split in two, between the rocks in that +direction?” and Dave pointed to where such a craft had been found by +him and Roger. + +“That’s her, messmate. Putty badly used up, eh?” + +“And you are quite sure those two passengers had no baggage?” went on +our hero, after a pause. + +“Nary a thing, messmate, excepting wot they wore. It wasn’t no time to +think o’ baggage, it was a time to think o’ what to do to save your +life!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXII—THE HURRICANE + + +“What direction did those fellows who ran away take?” asked Dave. + +“That’s the way they went,” answered one of the sailors, pointing to +some heavy undergrowth behind the camping-out spot. + +“Where does that lead to, do you know?” asked the senator’s son. + +“Leads to a spring o’ fresh water an’ half a dozen big caves,” was the +reply. + +“Caves?” queried Dave. “Then perhaps the fellows, who ran away, took +to one of the caves.” + +“Like as not, messmate. Them two chaps have been explorin’ them caves +ever since we came ashore.” + +“Let us walk back and have a look,” suggested our hero. “We may be +able to give Phil and Captain Sanders some assistance.” + +Without further delay, the two boys left the camp of the castaways and +hurried along a small trail through the bushes. They soon came to a +rocky depression in the midst of which was a tiny spring. + +“That water looks good,” exclaimed Dave. “Let us get a drink.” + +“Perhaps it is poisonous, Dave.” + +“If it was, I think those sailors would have warned us.” + +They found the water fairly cold and of a good flavor, and each drank +his fill. Then Dave flashed the electric light around. Ahead they made +out a series of rocks, with here and there a gloomy opening, leading +to unknown depths. + +“This is Cave Island and no mistake,” was our hero’s comment. “The +place seems to be fairly honeycombed.” + +“Be careful that you don’t go into a hole and drop out of sight,” +warned his chum. + +They walked to the entrance of one of the caves and peered in. All was +dark and silent. Then they went to the next cave. Here they caught a +glimmer of light. + +“Somebody is moving in here!” exclaimed Dave. “A man with a torch!” + +They waited, and presently saw that two persons were approaching +slowly, having to pick their way over the uneven rocks. + +“They are the captain and Phil,” cried Roger, and set up a faint call. + +“Hello! Who is that?” answered the captain of the _Golden Eagle_. + +“Dave and Roger!” cried Phil. “Oh, say,” he added, eagerly, “we’ve +seen Jasniff and Merwell!” + +“So we suspected,” answered Dave. “But you didn’t catch them?” + +“No, they got away from us,” returned Captain Sanders. + +“In this cave?” queried Roger. + +“Yes.” + +“But if they are in here, we can get them sooner or later,” put in +Dave. + +“No, my lad. There are several openings to these caves. We found one +at the far end, and I reckon those rascals got away through it.” + +“Did you speak to them at all?” asked our hero. + +“Didn’t get time,” answered Phil. “The minute they saw us they ran +like frightened deer.” + +“Did they have any baggage, Phil?” + +“Not that I could see. I rather fancied Jasniff had a small bundle +under his coat, but I may have been mistaken.” + +“The sailors said they came ashore without baggage. Perhaps the jewels +went down with the bark.” + +“Oh, I think they’d make an effort to save such costly gems—anybody +would.” + +“Not if they were thoroughly scared,” broke in Captain Sanders. “A +person who is thoroughly scared forgets everything but to save his +life.” + +“Then you haven’t any idea where they went to?” + +“No, lad. But I don’t think they’ll get off this island in a hurry.” + +There was nothing to do but to return to where the four sailors were +encamped. Then the whole party proceeded to where Billy Dill and +Smiley had been left. + +“I don’t think it will be safe to try to get through those breakers in +the darkness,” said Captain Sanders. “We may as well make ourselves +comfortable until morning. We have plenty of grub on hand, so you +fellows shall have your fill,” he went on, to the castaways. + +The sailors were glad enough to build another campfire, close to the +landing-place, and here they were served with all the food and drink +they wanted, which put them in good humor. They related the +particulars of how the _Emma Brower_ had gone down, and of how one +boat after another had put off in the storm. It had been a time of +great excitement, such as none of them were liable to ever forget. + +The boys were worn out from their exertions and willing enough to +rest. They fixed up some beds of boughs and were soon in the land of +dreams. The sailors rested also, each, however, taking an hour at +watching, by orders of Captain Sanders. + +It was about five o’clock in the morning when Dave awoke, to find the +wind blowing furiously. Two of the sailors were busy stamping out the +campfire, for the burning brands were flying in all directions, +threatening to set fire to the undergrowth. + +“What’s this?” he asked of Captain Sanders. + +“No telling, lad,” was the grave reply. “Looks like a pretty big +blow.” + +“More like a hurricane!” snorted old Billy Dill. “The wind is growin’ +wuss each minit!” + +“Draw that boat up into the bushes and fasten it well,” ordered the +captain. “We don’t want to have it stove in or floated off by the +breakers.” And the rowboat was carried to a place of safety. + +“Where is the ship?” asked Roger. + +“Slipped away when the blow came up,” answered the captain. “An’ I +hope the mate knows enough to keep away,” he added, gravely. + +Soon it started to rain, first a few scattering drops and then a +perfect deluge. The castaways spoke of a cave that was near by, and +all hurried in that direction, taking the stores from the boat with +them. + +“How long will this last, do you think?” asked Phil, of the master of +the _Golden Eagle_. + +“No telling. Maybe only to-day, maybe several days.” + +“If it last several days, we’ll have a time of it getting food,” broke +in the senator’s son. + +“We’ll watch out for fish and turtles,” said Billy Dill. “Nothin’ like +turtles when you are good an’ hungry.” + +“That’s true,” answered Dave. He had not forgotten the big turtle the +old tar had managed to catch down on one of the islands in the South +Seas. + +Soon it was raining so hard that but little could be seen beyond the +entrance to the cave. The wind moaned and shrieked throughout the +cavern, which happened to have several entrances. Once it became so +strong that it almost lifted the boys from their feet. The rain drove +in at times, and they had to get into a split in the rocks to keep +dry. + +“Hark! what was that?” cried Roger, during a lull in the wind. + +“I heard thunder; that’s all,” answered Phil. + +“I think a tree must have been struck by lightning,” answered Captain +Sanders. “The lightning is getting pretty fierce,” he added, as a +brilliant illumination filled the cavern. + +“Wonder where Jasniff and Merwell are?” whispered Phil, to his chums, +“I’ll wager this storm scares ’em half to death.” + +“Yes, and those four Englishmen,” added Dave. “Don’t forget that they +were coming to this island.” + +Slowly the hours of the morning dragged by. There was no let-up in the +hurricane, for such it really proved to be. The wind blew strongly all +the time, but occasionally would come a heavy blast that fairly made +the island tremble. The lightning had died away somewhat, but now and +then would come a great flash, followed by a crash and rumble that +would echo and reëcho among the rocks. + +“Just look at the ocean!” cried Dave, as he and his chums walked to +one corner of the entrance to gaze out. + +“The waves seem to be mountain-high,” returned Phil. “You wouldn’t +think it possible a ship could live on such a sea.” + +“Well, it is mighty dangerous, Phil; you know that as well as I do.” + +“I hope the _Golden Eagle_ weathers the storm.” + +“We all hope that.” + +Dinner was a rather scanty meal, cooked with great difficulty in a +hollow of the rocks. The smoke from the fire rolled and swirled in all +directions, nearly blinding everybody. But the repast was better than +nothing, and nobody grumbled. + +By nightfall the rain ceased. But the wind was almost as strong as +ever, and when those in the cave ventured outside they had to be on +guard, for fear a flying tree-branch would come down on their heads. + +Captain Sanders was much worried over the safety of his vessel, but he +did not let on to the boys, since it would have done no good. But the +lads understood, and they, too, were more or less alarmed, remembering +the fate that had overtaken the _Emma Brower_ in a storm that had been +no worse than the present one. + +With so much rain driving in, the cave was a damp place, and the boys +were glad enough to go outside. They looked for wood that might be +easily dried, and after much difficulty, succeeded in starting up a +new campfire, around which the whole crowd gathered. + +“I’m goin’ to try my luck along shore,” said Billy Dill, and started +off with Dave, Phil, and Roger, to see if any fish or turtles could be +located. They found the shore strewn with wreckage. + +“Oh, Billy, can this be from our ship?” exclaimed Phil, in alarm. + +“I don’t think so, lad. Looks to me like it had been in the water some +days. I reckon it’s from the _Emma Brower_, or some other craft.” + +In the wreckage they found the remains of several boxes and barrels. +But the contents had become water-soaked or had sunk to the bottom of +the sea; so there was nothing in the shape of food for them. They also +came across the mainmast of the bark, with some of the stays still +dragging around it. + +“That will do for a pole, in case we wish to hoist a flag,” suggested +the senator’s son. + +They found neither fish nor turtles, and at last had to return to the +campfire disappointed. There was next to nothing to eat for supper. + +“Well, better luck in the morning,” said Captain Sanders, with an air +of cheerfulness he did not feel. “As soon as this wind dies down our +ship will come back, and then we’ll have all we want to eat.” + +It was a long, dreary night that followed, and the boys were glad to +behold the sun come up brightly in the morning. Dave was the first up, +but his chums quickly followed, and all went down to the beach, to +look for fish and also to see if the _Golden Eagle_ was anywhere in +sight. + +This time they had better luck, so far as food was concerned. In a +hollow they found over a score of fish that had been cast from the +ocean by the breakers, and they also found a fine turtle that was +pinned down by a fallen tree. + +“That’s a new way to catch a turtle,” remarked Dave. “It’s a regular +trap.” + +“Turtle soup, yum! yum!” murmured Phil. + +“And broiled fish,—all you want, too!” added Roger, smacking his lips. + +When they got back to the camp they found that the fire had been +renewed, and soon the appetizing odor of broiling fish filled the air. +Then Captain Sanders and one of the castaway sailors came in from a +walk in another direction, carrying an airtight canister, which, on +being opened, was found to contain fancy crackers. + +“There is a good deal of wreckage down on the beach,” said the +captain. “We’ll inspect it after breakfast.” + +Having eaten their fill of the fish and the crackers, and leaving +Billy Dill and some of the others busy making turtle soup, the boys +and Captain Sanders took another walk along the beach, to look over +the wreckage and also see if they could sight the _Golden Eagle_, or +locate Jasniff or Merwell. + +“I hope we can find those two fellows,” said Dave. “I can stand this +suspense no longer. I must know what has become of those jewels!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII—A STRANGE DISCOVERY + + +A half-mile was covered when, on turning a point of rocks, the boys +and the captain came to a sandy cove. Here was more of the wreckage, +and the whole party ran down to the beach to investigate. + +Boxes, barrels, and bits of timber were strewn from one end of the +cove to the other, and in the mass were a number of things of more or +less value—timber, food, and some clothing. There was also a trunk, +but it was open and empty. + +“Look!” cried Dave, suddenly, and pointed to a small, black leather +case, that rested on some of the wreckage. + +“What is it?” queried Phil and Roger, in a breath. + +Dave did not reply, for he was crawling over the wreckage with care. +Soon he reached the spot where the black leather case rested, caught +on a nail, and he picked it up. The clasp was undone and the case fell +open, revealing the interior, which was lined with white plush. + +“Empty!” murmured Dave, sadly. “Empty!” There was a groan in his voice +as he uttered the word. + +“What is it, Dave?” asked the senator’s son, although he and Phil +guessed the truth. + +“It’s the Carwith jewel-case,” was the answer. “The very case that Mr. +Carwith left with Mr. Wadsworth!” + +“Are you certain?” demanded Phil. + +“Yes, for here is the name, ‘Ridgewood Osgood Carwith,’ stamped in +gold on the top.” + +“And empty,” murmured the captain. “This looks bad,” and he shook his +head, thoughtfully. + +“Maybe Jasniff and Merwell took the jewels from the case,” suggested +Roger, hopefully. + +“It is possible, Roger. But—but—I am afraid the jewels are at the +bottom of the ocean,” answered Dave, and his face showed how downcast +he felt. + +“They might have taken the jewels and divided them between +themselves,” said Phil. “Maybe they put them in money-belts, or +something like that. They might think that the sailors would rob them, +if they saw the case.” + +“It’s possible, Phil, and I hope you are right,” answered our hero. +But in his heart he was still afraid that the gems had gone to the +bottom of the Atlantic. + +“I think we had better climb to the top of yonder rise and take a look +around the island,” said the captain. “For all we know, the _Golden +Eagle_ may be on the other side. I sincerely hope she has weathered +the storm.” + +Placing the jewel-case in a safe place between the rocks, the party +commenced to climb the rise of ground the captain had pointed out. +This was no easy task, since the rocks were rough and there were many +openings, leading to the caves below. + +“We don’t want another tumble,” remarked Roger to Dave. + +“Hardly, Roger; once was enough.” + +The sun had come out strongly, consequently the water was drying away +rapidly. It was very warm, and the boys were glad that they had donned +thin clothing on leaving the ship. + +At last they reached the top of the rise and from that elevation were +able to see all but the southern end of Cave Island, which was hidden +by a growth of palms. + +Not a ship of any kind was in sight, much to the captain’s +disappointment. + +“Must have had to sail away a good many miles,” said Dave. + +“Either that, lad, or else the storm caused more or less trouble.” + +From the elevation, all took a good look at every part of the island +that could be seen. They saw several other rocky elevations and the +entrances to caves innumerable. + +“Tell you one thing,” remarked Phil. “If there was any truth in that +story of a pirates’ treasure, the pirates would have plenty of places +where to hide the hoard.” + +“Humph! I don’t believe in the treasure and never will,” returned +Roger. “If the treasure was ever here, you can make up your mind that +somebody got hold of it long before this.” + +“If those Englishmen came here, it is queer that we don’t see some +trace of them,” said Captain Sanders. + +“Maybe they are like Jasniff and Merwell, keeping out of sight,” +ventured Dave. + +“That may be true.” + +“I think I see some figures moving down near the shore over there,” +continued Roger, after another look around. “But they are so far off I +am not sure. They may be animals.” + +“They look like two men to me,” exclaimed Dave, after a long look. +“What if they should be Jasniff and Merwell! Oh, let us walk there and +make sure!” + +“That’s a good, stiff walk,” answered Captain Sanders. “We can’t go +from here very well—unless we want to climb over some rough rocks. It +would be better to go down and follow the shore.” + +“Then let us do that. It won’t do us any good to go back to where we +left the others, now the ship isn’t in sight.” + +But the captain demurred, and finally it was agreed to return to camp +and start out for the other side of the island directly after dinner. + +“Turtle soup for all hands!” announced Billy Dill, proudly. “Best ever +made, too.” + +“It certainly smells good,” answered Dave. + +The turtle soup proved both palatable and nourishing, and, eaten with +crackers, made a good meal. + +“We’ll take some crackers and fish along,” said the captain, to the +boys, when they were preparing to leave the camp again. “For there is +no telling how soon we’ll get back. It may take us longer than we +think to reach the other side of this island.” + +“I’ve got a knapsack,” said one of the castaway sailors. “You can take +that along, filled,” and so it was arranged. Dave carried his gun and +the captain had a pistol. + +“If there is any game, we’ll have a try for it,” said Dave. “Even a +few plump birds would make fine eating.” + +“Yes, or a rabbit or hare,” added Roger. + +The party walked along the shore as far as they could go and then, +coming to what appeared to be an old trail, took to that. + +“What do you make of this path?” said Dave. “I had an idea the island +was uninhabited.” + +“It is supposed to be,” answered Captain Sanders. “But there is no +reason why somebody shouldn’t live here.” + +Presently they came to a fine spring of water. Near by lay an old +rusty cup, and a little further on a broken bucket. + +“Somebody has been here and that recently,” was Dave’s comment. “I +hope we are on the trail of Merwell and Jasniff.” + +They walked on a little further and then, of a sudden, Captain Sanders +halted the boys and pointed up into one of the trees. + +“Wild pigeons!” exclaimed Dave. “And hundreds of them! Shall I give +them a couple of barrels, captain?” + +“Might as well, lad. Wild pigeons are good eating, especially when you +are hungry. Get as many of ’em as you can.” + +Dave approached a little closer and took aim with care. Bang! went the +shotgun, and a wild fluttering and flying followed. Bang! went the +second barrel of the weapon, and then, as the smoke cleared away, the +boys and the captain saw seven of the pigeons come down to the ground. +Several others fluttered around and Phil caught one and wrung its +neck, and Roger laid another low with a stick he had picked up. + +“Fine shots, both of them,” declared Captain Sanders. “Now load up +again, Dave, so as to be ready for anything else that shows up.” + +“I am afraid I have scared the rest of the game,” declared our hero, +and so it proved, for after that they saw nothing but some small +birds. + +They passed through a thick woods and then came rather unexpectedly to +a wall of rocks, all of a hundred feet in height. At the base of the +wall was an opening leading into a broad cave. Near the entrance was +the remains of a campfire. + +“Somebody has been here and that recently!” cried Phil, as he examined +the embers. + +“Must be Merwell and Jasniff!” cried Dave. “For if they were strangers +they would come out and see what the shooting meant.” + +“Shall we go into the cave, or continue on the way to the shore?” +questioned the senator’s son. + +“Oh, let us take a peep into the cave first,” cried Phil. “It looks as +if it was inhabited.” + +The others were willing, and lighting a firebrand that was handy, they +entered the cavern. In front they found the opening to be broad and +low, but in the rear the ceiling was much higher and there were +several passageways leading in as many different directions. + +“What an island!” murmured Roger. “Why, one could spend a year in +visiting all the caves!” + +“It’s like a great, big sponge!” returned Phil. “Holes everywhere!” + +“Take care that you don’t slip down into some opening!” warned Captain +Sanders. + +In one of the passages they came across the remains of a meal and also +some empty bottles. Then Dave saw some bits of paper strewn over the +rocky floor. + +“What are they, Phil?” he asked, and then both commenced to pick the +pieces up. Roger helped, while the captain held the firebrand. + +“Well, of all things!” cried the shipowner’s son. “Now what do you +make of this?” + +“The chart!” cried Dave. + +“Yes!” + +“What chart?” queried the master of the _Golden Eagle_. + +“The treasure chart those four Englishmen had,” answered Dave. “Now +what made them come here with it and tear it to pieces?” + +“Hum!” mused the captain. “One of two things would make ’em do that, +lad. Either they got the treasure and had no further use for the map, +or else they found the whole thing was a fake and in their rage they +tore the map to shreds.” + +“They must have gotten the gold!” murmured Roger and Phil. + +“No, I think they got fooled,” said Dave. + +“The question is, if those Britishers were here, where did they go +to?” asked the captain. + +“Let us call,” suggested Dave. “They may be in some part of this cave +where they couldn’t hear the shots from my gun.” + +All called out several times, and listened intently for a reply. + +“Hark! I hear something!” cried Roger. “Listen!” + +They strained their ears, and from what appeared to be a great +distance they heard a human voice. But what was said they could not +make out. + +“Too many echoes here,” declared the captain. “A fellow can’t tell +where the cry comes from.” + +“Well, let us investigate,” said our hero. + +They moved forward and backward, up one passageway and down another, +calling and listening. At times the voice seemed to be quite close, +then it sounded further off than ever. + +“This sure is a mystery!” declared Phil. “What do you make of it, +Dave?” + +“I am beginning to think the call came from somewhere overhead,” +answered our hero. “Captain, see if you can flash a light on those +rocks to the left of our heads.” + +Captain Sanders did as requested, and presently all in the party saw +another passageway, leading up from a series of rocks that formed +something of a natural stairway. Up this they went, Dave leading the +van. Then they came to a small opening between two rocks. + +“Help! help!” came in a half-smothered voice. “Help, please. Don’t +leave me here in the dark any longer!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV—JASNIFF AND MERWELL + + +“It’s a man!” + +“One of the Englishmen!” + +“You are right, lads,” came from Captain Sanders. “And see, he is +bound hands and feet to the rocks!” + +What the master of the _Golden Eagle_ said was true, and as the +firebrand was flashed on the scene, the chums could do little but +stare in astonishment. + +Lying on his back between the rocks was the Englishman named Giles +Borden. Hands and feet were bound with a strong cord, which ran around +a projection of the rocks in such a manner that the prisoner could +scarcely move. + +“Who tied you up?” questioned Dave, as he and Phil set to work to +liberate the prisoner. + +“Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney,” groaned the prisoner. “Oh, if only I +had my hands on them!” + +“Why did they do it?” asked Captain Sanders. + +“They wanted to rob me—and they did rob me!” answered Giles Borden. +“Oh, help me out of this wretched hole and give me a drink of water! I +am dying from thirst!” + +Not without difficulty the man was freed of the rope and helped to get +out from between the rocks. Then Dave and Roger half carried him down +to the cave proper. The crowd had a canteen of water and the man +drank, eagerly. + +“So your friends robbed you?” said Captain Sanders, curiously. + +“Do not call them friends of mine!” returned Giles Borden. “They are +not friends—they are vipers, wolves! Oh, if ever I meet them again at +home I’ll soon have them in prison, or know the reason why!” + +“Hadn’t you better tell us all about it?” went on the master of the +_Golden Eagle_. + +“Wait a minute!” cried Dave. “Do you suppose those men are anywhere +near here?” + +“I don’t know. They said they would be back, but they did not come.” + +“They may have seen us and skipped out,” ventured the senator’s son. + +“More than likely,” groaned Giles Borden. “Now that they have my money +they won’t want to stay here. They’ll take passage on that ship as +soon as she comes in and leave me to shift for myself.” + +“Tell us your story, so we can understand what you are talking about,” +said Captain Sanders. + +In a disconnected manner the Englishman related his tale, pausing +occasionally to take another drink of water. He said he was from +London and had met Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney less than six months +before. They had come to him with the story of a wonderful pirates’ +treasure said to be hidden on Cave Island, and had asked him to +finance an expedition in search of it. + +“I had just fallen heir to five thousand pounds through the death of +my father,” he went on, “and I was anxious to get the treasure, so I +consented to pay the expenses of the trip, taking the three men along. +They had the chart that you saw on shipboard and some other +particulars, and they made me bring along a thousand pounds extra, +stating that we might have to pay some natives well to get them to +show us where the particular cave we were seeking was located.” + +Then had followed the trip to Florida and the one to Barbados. At the +latter island a schooner had been chartered to take them to Cave +Island, where they were landed on the eastern shore. The schooner was +to come back for the Englishmen a week later. + +“As soon as the treasure hunt began I suspected that I was being +hoaxed,” continued Giles Borden. “For all I knew, we were alone on the +island. We found several huts, but they were all deserted. We visited +a score of caves, but saw nothing that looked like a treasure. Then, +one afternoon, Geswick asked me about the extra thousand pounds I was +carrying. I grew suspicious and tried to hide the money between the +rocks. The three caught me at it and pounced on the money like a pack +of wolves. Then, when I remonstrated, they laughed at me, and told me +to keep quiet, that they were going to run matters to suit +themselves.” + +“They must have intended to rob you from the start,” said Dave. + +“You are right, and I was a fool to trust them. As soon as they had my +money, one of them, Rumney, tore up the chart and threw the pieces in +my face. That angered me so greatly that I struck him with my fist, +knocking him down. Then the three leaped on me and made me a prisoner, +binding me with the rope. I tried my best to get away, but could not. +That was at night. In the morning they went off, saying they would +come back later and give me something to eat. But that is the last I +have seen or heard of them.” + +“If we hadn’t found you, you might have starved to death,” murmured +Captain Sanders. “They ought to be punished heavily for this—and for +robbing you!” + +The Englishman was glad enough to get something to eat, and then said +he felt much stronger. + +“But what brings you to this island?” he questioned, while partaking +of the food. + +“We are after a pair of criminals,” answered Dave, as the others +looked at him, not knowing what to say. “Two young fellows who ran +away with some valuable jewels. I suppose you saw nothing of them.” + +“No, as I said before, we saw nobody.” + +“They are on this island.” + +“Then I hope you catch them. And I hope you’ll aid me in catching +those other scamps.” + +“We’ll certainly do that,” answered Captain Sanders. + +A little later the whole party left the cave, and Giles Borden pointed +out a number of other caves he had visited. + +“The island is full of them,” declared the Englishman. “And one has to +be careful, for fear of falling into a hole at every step.” + +The middle of the afternoon found the party once more at the water’s +edge. They had seen no trace of Jasniff and Merwell, or of the +rascally Englishmen. All were tired out and content to rest for a +little while. + +“Looks like a wild goose chase, doesn’t it, Dave?” remarked Roger. + +“Oh, you mustn’t grow discouraged so quickly, Roger,” was Dave’s +answer. “Unless Jasniff and Merwell have a chance to leave this island +we’ll be sure to locate them, sooner or later. What I am worried about +mostly is the question: Have they the jewels or did the gems go to the +bottom of the ocean?” + +“Yes, that’s the most important question of all.” + +“It will be poor consolation to catch Jasniff and Merwell and not get +the jewels,” put in Phil. “I reckon, Dave, you’d rather have it the +other way around—get the jewels and miss Jasniff and Merwell.” + +“Indeed, yes, Phil.” + +“In case we don’t——” began the senator’s son, and then stopped short. +He had seen Captain Sanders leap up and start inland. + +“What did you see, Captain?” asked Dave. + +“I saw somebody looking at us, from behind yonder trees!” cried the +master of the _Golden Eagle_. + +“One of the Englishmen?” queried Phil. + +“No, it was somebody younger—looked a little like that picture of Link +Merwell!” + +“Come on—after them!” cried Dave, and started on a run in the +direction the captain indicated. + +All were soon on the way, climbing over some rough rocks at first and +then crashing through the heavy undergrowth. Then they entered a +forest of tropical trees and vines. + +“I see them!” exclaimed Dave, after several hundred feet had been +covered. “Jasniff and Merwell as sure as you live! Stop! Stop, I tell +you!” he called out. + +“You keep back, Dave Porter!” yelled Nick Jasniff in return. “Keep +back, or it will be the worse for you!” + +“Jasniff, you had better surrender!” cried Roger. + +“We’ll be sure to get you sooner or later!” added Phil. + +“You’ll never catch me!” answered the other. “Now keep back, or maybe +somebody will get shot.” + +“Do you think he’ll shoot?” asked Captain Sanders, in some alarm, +while Giles Borden stopped short. + +“Possibly,” answered Dave. “But I am going after him anyway,” he added +sturdily. “I came here to catch those rascals and I am going to do +it.” + +“And I am with you,” said Phil, promptly. + +“Scare ’em with your gun, Dave,” suggested the senator’s son. + +“I will,” was our hero’s reply, and he brought the weapon to the +front. “I’ve got a gun, Jasniff!” he called out. “You had better stop! +And you had better stop too, Merwell!” + +“Don’t yo-you shoot at us!” screamed Link Merwell, in sudden terror. +And then he ran with all speed for the nearest trees and dove out of +sight. The next instant Jasniff disappeared, likewise. + +Dave was now thoroughly aroused, and he resolved to do his best to run +the rascals down and corner them. Shifting his shotgun once more to +his back, he ran on in the direction the pair had taken, and Roger, +Phil, and the captain and the Englishman followed. + +Listening occasionally, they could hear Jasniff and Merwell crashing +through the undergrowth and at the same time calling to each other. +Evidently they had become separated and were trying to get together +again. + +As they advanced into the forest, Dave caught sight of Merwell. He was +behind a low fringe of bushes and an instant later disappeared. + +“Stop, Merwell!” he called out. “It won’t do you any good to run. We +are bound to catch you, sooner or later.” + +“Yo-you let me alone, Dave Porter!” spluttered Merwell. He was almost +out of breath, so violent had been his exertions. + +Dave kept on and soon reached the low bushes. Then he saw Merwell +again, this time leaping for some brushwood between two tall rocks. + +“I’ve got you now!” he said, sharply. “You may as well give in!” + +“Oh, Porter, please let me——” commenced Link Merwell, and then Dave’s +hand caught him by the shoulder and whirled him about. + +As this happened something else occurred that filled both pursued and +pursuer with alarm. The grass and brushwood under their feet began to +give way. Then of a sudden Link Merwell sank from sight, and Dave +disappeared after him! + +In the meanwhile Phil and the others kept on in the direction Nick +Jasniff had taken. Twice they caught sight of the former bully of Oak +Hall, but each time he was further away than before. + +“You’ll not catch me!” cried Jasniff. “You might as well give up +trying.” Then he dove into another section of the forest and they saw +no more of him. + +“What has become of Dave?” asked Phil, when he and Roger came +together, a little later. + +“I thought he was with you, Phil.” + +“And I thought he was with you.” + +“He went after that other chap,” put in Captain Sanders. “Perhaps he +caught him. They were over in that direction,” and the captain pointed +with his hand. + +All proceeded in the direction indicated. But they did not catch sight +of either Dave or Merwell. + +“Well, this is strange, to say the least,” remarked Phil, after they +had called out several times. “What do you make of it, Roger?” + +“I’m sure I don’t know, Phil. They can’t have gotten so far away but +what they could hear us call.” + +“Maybe they fell into one of the caves,” suggested Captain Sanders. + +“If they have, we had better hunt for Dave at once,” returned Roger. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV—LINK MERWELL’S STORY + + +Down and down and still down went Dave, with Link Merwell in front of +him. Daylight was left behind with a suddenness that was appalling. +The brushwood scratched our hero’s face and he could not repress a cry +of alarm. Merwell screamed loud and long and an echo came back that +was weird and ghostlike. Then came a mighty splash, and both boys went +into the water over their heads. + +Dave was a good swimmer, and as soon as he entered the water he struck +out to save himself. He came up in almost utter darkness, so he had to +go it blindly, not knowing in what direction to turn. Then he heard a +wild spluttering and knew the sounds came from his enemy. + +“Merwell!” + +“Oh, Porter! Sa-save me, please!” gasped Link Merwell. + +“Why don’t you swim?—that is what I am doing.” + +“I—I—struck my head on a rock! Oh, save me!” And then came a gasp, and +the scamp disappeared under the surface. + +Dave was close by and knew the direction by the noise. Taking a few +strokes, he bumped into Merwell, who promptly tried to catch his +would-be rescuer by the throat. But our hero was on guard and turned +him around. + +“Keep quiet, or I’ll let go!” he ordered, as he began to tread water. +As Merwell obeyed, Dave struck out to where he saw a faint streak of +light. He made out a shelving rock, and after some difficulty, reached +this. Here the water was only up to his waist, and he waded along, +half carrying his enemy, until they reached another series of rocks, +where both crawled up to a spot that was dry. From somewhere overhead +came a faint streak of light, testifying to the fact that there was an +opening beyond, even if it could not be seen. + +“Oh, my head!” murmured Link Merwell, and put up one hand to a lump +that was rising on his forehead. + +“I got struck myself,” said Dave. “But it didn’t amount to much. I +told you to stop. If you had done so, we wouldn’t have gotten into +this pickle.” + +“Whe-where are we?” asked Merwell, and there was a shiver in his tone. + +“Down at the bottom of that hole.” Dave tried to pierce the darkness. +“Looks like some underground river to me.” + +“The water is salt.” + +“Then this place must connect with the ocean.” Dave drew a deep +breath. “Merwell, tell me truthfully, what did you do with those +jewels?” he questioned, eagerly. Even in that time of peril he could +not forget the mission that had brought him to Cave Island. + +“Who—who said I had the jewels?” faltered the other. + +“I know you and Jasniff took them—it is useless for you to deny it.” + +“How do you know that?” + +“Never mind now. Answer my question. Have you the jewels, or did you +give them to Jasniff?” + +“I didn’t give Nick anything.” + +“Then you have them.” + +“How do you know?” + +“I am not here to answer questions, Link Merwell. I want to know what +you did with the jewels.” Dave’s voice grew stern. “Answer me at +once!” And he caught Merwell by the arm. + +“Don’t—don’t shove me into the water!” cried the scamp, in alarm, +although Dave had no intention of doing as he imagined. “I—I—we—er—we +divided the jewels between us. But Nick got the best of them.” + +“And what did you do with your share?” + +“I’ll—er—I’ll tell you when we get out of this hole.” + +“You’ll tell me right now, Merwell!” And again Dave caught the culprit +by the arm. + +“I—I put my share of the jewels in my money-belt,” he faltered. + +“Have you it on now?” + +“Yes. But Nick has the best of the jewels—I got only the little ones,” +went on Link Merwell, half-angrily. It was easy to surmise that he and +Jasniff had not gotten along well together. + +“How is it Jasniff got the best of them?” + +“He had the jewel-case when we were about to leave the bark during the +storm. Everybody was excited, and he said we couldn’t carry the +case—that it wouldn’t be safe, for we might drop it and all of the +jewels would be lost. He said we had better divide them and put them +in our belts. We had bought belts for that purpose in Jacksonville. So +we took the jewels out of the case and threw the box away. I thought I +had my share, but after we got to this island, and I had a chance to +look, I saw he had the lion’s share, about three-quarters, in fact, +and all the big ones.” + +“And he has them now?” + +“Yes,—that is, he did have them just before we saw you.” + +“Did you sell or pawn any of the jewels?” + +“Only a few small ones. We were afraid to offer the big ones, so soon +after the—well, you know,” and Link Merwell stopped short, looking +everything but happy. + +“You mean so soon after the robbery,” said Dave, bluntly. + +“Yes.” + +“Link, whatever—but never mind that now,” continued our hero, hastily. +“Hand over the money-belt.” + +“What, now?” + +“Yes, at once. I’ll not trust you to carry those jewels a minute +longer.” + +“Can’t you wait till we get out of this wretched hole?” + +“I might, but I am not going to. Hand it over and be careful that none +of the jewels are lost. Your father may have to pay for the others.” + +With fingers that trembled from fear and chilliness, Link Merwell +slipped his hands under the light clothing he wore and took off the +money-belt that encircled his waist. + +“There is some money there that belongs to me,” he began, +hesitatingly. + +“You’ll get back what is yours, never fear,” answered Dave, and took +the belt. He saw to it that it was tightly closed, then fastened it +around his own waist. + +“Remember, Nick has the best of the jewels,” went on Merwell, rather +spitefully. + +“I am not likely to forget it,” answered Dave, grimly. “Now, the +sooner we get out of this hole the better.” + +Merwell was just as anxious to see daylight, even if he was to be held +a prisoner, and together the boys hunted around for some exit from the +underground watercourse. But the only way out seemed to be far +overhead, and to climb up the smooth, sloping rocks proved impossible. + +“Oh, what shall we do?” groaned Merwell, after they had attempted to +climb up and had failed. “We are caught like rats in a trap!” + +“Perhaps we’ll have to swim for it,” answered Dave. “This water is +very salt, which proves it comes from the ocean. Moreover, it is +gradually going down, showing it is affected by the tide. Let us +follow the stream for a short distance and see where it leads to.” + +Merwell demurred, but he did not want to remain behind alone in the +semi-darkness, so he followed Dave, and both waded and swam a distance +of several hundred feet. Here the underground river made a turn around +the rocks, and both boys were delighted to see a streak of sunlight +resting on the water. + +“An opening of some sort!” cried our hero. “Come on!” And he swam on +boldly and Merwell followed as quickly as he could. + +Soon the pair reached a break in the cave. On either side were walls +of rocks, uneven and covered with scanty bushes and immense trailing +vines. The opening was about a hundred feet in length, and beyond it +the stream of salty water plunged into another cavern, undoubtedly on +its way to the ocean. + +“Well, we are out of the cave in one way but not in another,” observed +Dave, as he stood on the dry rocks and gazed about. “It’s going to be +a stiff climb to get out of here.” + +“Ca-can’t you wait till I—I get my breath,” panted Merwell. + +“Yes, for I want to get my own breath back. Perhaps we’ll have to go +through that next cave to get out,” he continued, after a pause. + +“Oh, I hope not! I hate it underground!” And Merwell shivered. +“Besides, it’s cold,” he went on, to cover up the tremor in his voice. + +“Yes, it is cold,” returned Dave, shortly. + +He sat down to rest, and Merwell followed suit. On all sides were the +rocky walls and trailing vines, while at their feet ran the silent, +mysterious stream of salty water. + +Dave looked at the walls and the stream, and then looked at Merwell. +The face of the other youth was a study. He was downcast to the last +degree. + +“Link, what made you do it?” he asked, in a voice that was not +unkindly. + +“I didn’t do it—that is, it wasn’t my plan!” burst out the culprit, +passionately. “Oh, I know they’ll hold me for it, just the same as +they’ll hold Nick, if they catch him! But I’ll tell you honestly, +Dave, it wasn’t any of my planning. I’m bad, and I know it, but I am +not as bad as that. It was Nick who got the whole thing up. You know +how mad he has been at you ever since he had to leave Oak Hall. Well, +it was his plan to make you a prisoner first and then make it look as +if you had robbed the jewelry works. You ask Doctor Montgomery if that +isn’t so. Well, the first part of the plan fell through, for you got +away. Then he got me to go to Crumville, and found out where we could +get the dynamite. I got scared then and wanted to back out, but he +said if I did he’d throw all the blame on me, and so I stuck to him. I +wish I hadn’t done it,” concluded Merwell, bitterly. + +“Did you go direct to Jacksonville after the robbery?” + +“No, we went to Washington first and there we pawned one diamond for +sixty dollars. Then we went to Jacksonville. There we met Luke Watson, +and both of us got scared to death. We had paid for our passage on the +_Emma Brower_, and we kept out of sight till the bark sailed. After +the storm we landed here with those four sailors, and were waiting to +sight some passing ship when you and your crowd turned up.” + +“What were you going to do at Barbados?” + +“Keep quiet until this affair blew over and then take some English +vessel for England. There, Jasniff said, he could get a certain +pawnbroker to take the jewels and give us a good price for them. +You’ll remember, he was in England some time.” + +“Yes, I met him there. But, Link, didn’t you realize what a crime you +were committing?” went on Dave, earnestly. + +“I did—after it was too late. Many a time I wanted to back out, but +Nick wouldn’t let me. We had a quarrel in Washington, and another in +Jacksonville, and on the ship I came close to exposing him to the +captain. I think I should have done it, only the hurricane came up, +and then we had to hustle to save our lives.” + +A silence followed, for each of the boys was busy with his thoughts. +Dave felt sorry for his former schoolmate, but he knew Merwell +thoroughly, and knew that the fellow was more sorry because he was +caught than because he had committed a great wrong. He belonged to the +class of persons who are willing to repent when it is too late. + +The day was drawing to a close, and already the sunlight had +disappeared beyond the high rocks. With a deep sigh Dave arose to his +feet and stretched himself, and Merwell followed suit. + +“What are you going to do?” asked the former bully of Oak Hall. + +“I am going to try to climb up those rocks.” + +“They are terribly steep!” + +“I know it, but those vines look strong and we can use them as ropes, +Link. But you need not try it, if you don’t want to.” + +“Oh, if you try, so will I, Dave.” + +After that but little was said, both lads saving their breath for the +task before them. Dave went up first, testing each vine with care as +he advanced. Twice he slipped back, and once Merwell came to his aid +and held him. It was a little thing to do, but it pleased our hero, +and his face showed it. + +At last they were out of the hollow and each threw himself on the +ground to rest. Then Dave walked to a near-by hill and gazed in every +direction. Not a human being was in sight anywhere. + +“Well, we’ve got to find them somehow,” he said to Merwell. “Come +ahead.” And side by side they set off through the forest in the +fast-gathering darkness. + +[Illustration: Dave went up first, testing each vine with care.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI—THE COLUMN OF SMOKE + + +“Well, we are lost, that is all there is to it. And I am so dead tired +I can’t walk another step.” And thus speaking, Link Merwell sank down +on a tree-root to rest. + +He and Dave had been plunging along through the forest and across +several clearings for the larger part of an hour. They had found what +looked to be a trail, but it had suddenly come to an end in front of a +small cave that looked to be the lair of some wild animal, and they +had gone on once more. Now the darkness of the tropics shut out the +surrounding landscape. + +Link Merwell certainly looked the picture of misery. His clothing was +much tattered and still wet, and his forehead was swollen from contact +with the rocks. One of his shoes was so cut that his bare foot was +exposed. + +“It looks as if we were lost,” replied Dave. “In this darkness it will +be difficult to go much further. But I had hoped, by keeping in a +straight line, that, sooner or later, we’d reach the shore of the +island.” + +“I reckon we didn’t walk in a straight line—most folks that get lost +in a woods don’t.” + +“You are right in that, but I kept as straight as I could, Link. +However, that is neither here nor there. If we have got to stay here +all night we may as well try to make ourselves comfortable. But I wish +the others knew I was safe.” + +“Can’t you fire your gun? It ought to be dry by now.” + +“I’ll try it.” + +Dave sat down and commenced to work over the fowling-piece. In a few +minutes he tried it. Bang! went the gun, the shot echoing far and wide +through the forest and among the rocks. Then both boys listened for a +reply. + +“Nothing doing,” muttered Merwell, after a minute of utter silence. + +“I am sure the others would fire a shot in return if they heard that,” +said Dave. “We must be further from them than I expected. Well, I +don’t see what we can do excepting to try to make ourselves +comfortable. We might climb one of these tall palms and take a look +around.” + +“Yes, that’s it!” exclaimed the other youth, eagerly. “Why didn’t we +think of that before? But it will be hard work climbing one of those +trees,” went on Merwell, gazing up at the straight trunk with the +first of the limbs many feet above their heads. + +“I’ll do it native fashion,” answered Dave. + +He had seen the natives of the South Sea Islands climb tall trees by +means of a vine-rope cast about the waist and the tree-trunk. +Selecting several strong vines, he twisted them into a rope, and then +passed the same around a tree-trunk and to the back of his waist. Then +he took off his shoes and stockings and placed his bare feet against +the tree. By “hiking” the rope a few inches at a time, he was able to +“walk up the tree” with comparative ease. + +As soon as the branches were reached, Dave discarded the rope and went +up as far as the strength of the tree would permit. He was now close +enough to the top to get a good look around, and he cast his eyes +about eagerly, hoping to catch sight of some of his friends, or their +campfire. + +“See anything?” called up Merwell, eagerly. + +“Not yet,” answered Dave, and then he turned around in the tree-top. +He now made out the rolling sea. + +“I see a light!” he cried. + +“A campfire?” queried the youth below. + +“No, it is on the water. I think it must be a light on a ship.” + +“What kind of a ship?” + +“A sailing vessel of some sort,” answered Dave, and he wondered if it +could be the _Golden Eagle_, coming back after the storm. + +“Maybe it’s the ship that was coming back for those Englishmen,” went +on Merwell, for Dave had told him about the men. He heaved a +mountainous sigh as he realized how affairs had turned against him. +For a moment he thought of running away and trying to find Jasniff, +but then the darkness and loneliness of the forest appalled him. He +felt that he would rather be a prisoner than be alone in such a spot. + +Dave watched the waving light for some time, as it rose and fell on +the bosom of the ocean, but could learn nothing concerning the craft +that showed it. Then he continued to look around the island. No +campfire was to be located, and finally he rejoined Merwell. + +“The light on that ship was all I saw,” he said. “Perhaps it might pay +to walk down to the shore in that direction. But it is a long +distance, and in the darkness we might fall into another of the +caves.” + +“Let us stay here,” answered Merwell. + +“It will probably be as well. We can build a campfire and dry our +clothing and then go to bed.” + +“Wish I had something to eat,” grumbled the lad who had been caught. + +“So do I, Link. But we haven’t anything, so we’ll have to make the +best of it. Try to find some firewood. Luckily I have a waterproof +matchsafe along and it is full of matches,” added our hero. + +Fate was kinder to them than they had expected, for in hunting for +firewood, Merwell found a hole containing what they took to be native +hares. He killed two of the creatures, and at once set to work to +clean and skin them. Then, when Dave had started the fire, the game +was broiled while the boys had their clothing drying. + +“Not much of a meal, but better than nothing,” said Merwell, and our +hero agreed with him. They found some water in a hollow of the rocks, +left there by the hurricane, and had a drink, after which both lay +down to rest. + +“Don’t you think we ought to stand guard?” asked the big youth. + +“Oh, I don’t know,” replied Dave. “I am dead tired and so are you, and +I don’t think anybody will come to harm us,—and there are no large +wild beasts on the island. I guess we can take a chance,” and as soon +as their clothing was dry, both turned in, on beds of vines and moss. + +In the morning Merwell was the first to stir, and when Dave awoke he +found the campfire burning merrily. The big youth was nowhere to be +seen. + +“Can he have run away?” mused our hero, and quickly felt to learn if +the money-belt with the jewels was safe. It was still in its place and +he breathed a sigh of relief. Then he gave a call. + +“Coming!” came from a distance, and in a few minutes Merwell put in an +appearance, bringing with him some berries and fruits. + +“One of those sailors who came ashore with me told me about these,” he +said. “The berries we can eat raw and they are very good. The fruit we +can slice up and toast. They make a pretty decent meal,” and so it +proved, and both youths ate their fill. Then Dave announced his +intention of climbing the tree again and having another look around. + +“That ship is at the south end of the island,” he announced. “It is +not the _Golden Eagle_, but a much smaller craft. Most likely it is +the vessel the Englishmen engaged. If it is, those three rascals will +have a chance to get away before Giles Borden can catch them and make +them give up the money they took from him.” + +“Oh, Dave, do you think——” And then Merwell stopped short. + +“What were you going to say, Link?” + +“I was thinking if it would be possible for Nick to go away with those +Englishmen.” + +“Why, yes, if he chanced to meet them, and they were willing to have +him. But would he go and leave you behind?” + +“He might, especially if he found out I was captured, or that I had +let you have what jewels I was carrying.” + +“If he went with those Englishmen he would be foolish to let them know +about the jewels, for they would rob him, just as they robbed Giles +Borden,” continued our hero, and then he realized that here was a new +peril to face. If the Englishmen got their hands on the jewels it +might be next to impossible to recover the gems, especially if the +rascals managed to get away from Cave Island. + +Presently our hero saw a column of smoke arising in another portion of +the island. He watched it for several minutes and then gave a cry of +satisfaction. + +“I know where they are!” + +“You mean your crowd?” queried Merwell. + +“Yes. Phil is signaling to me, by means of a column of smoke such as +some Indians out west use. We learned the trick when we were at Star +Ranch. Come on, we’ll soon be with them. It isn’t very far.” + +Dave had come down from his high perch in a hurry, and in a very short +time was ready to leave the spot. Merwell gave a deep sigh, for he did +not relish confronting his former schoolmates. + +“It’s tough luck, but I suppose I’ve got to stand it,” he murmured, as +he followed Dave, after the fire had been extinguished. “When a fellow +makes a fool of himself he’s got to take the consequences.” And this +remark was so true that Dave did not dispute it. + +On they went through the forest and then over a rocky hill. Three +times they came close to falling into the treacherous holes in which +the island abounded, and the last time poor Merwell got a fall that +almost sprained his ankle. + +“We’ll rest a bit and you can bathe the ankle,” said Dave, kindly, and +got some water from a nearby pool. + +“I don’t wonder nobody is living on this island,” grumbled the injured +one. “I suppose the natives around here are too afraid of falling into +some of those holes.” + +“They are afraid of the caves and also afraid of volcanoes,” answered +Dave. “The mate of the _Golden Eagle_ told me that. Sometimes the +volcanoes break out here without warning and cover the rocks with hot +ashes.” + +“Is that so? Well, I hope no volcano breaks out while I am here.” + +At last the boys reached a small rise of ground and at a distance saw +the column of smoke, plainly. Dave put on extra speed and soon saw +Phil, Giles Borden, and several sailors—the survivors from the +ill-fated _Emma Brower_. + +“Phil!” + +“Dave! At last!” cried the shipowner’s son, joyfully. “Are you hurt?” + +“Not a bit of it. How are you?” + +“All right, although I had several tumbles while hunting for you. You +disappeared in the strangest fashion.” + +“I fell into a cave,—went down with Link Merwell.” + +“Oh!” Phil gave a start. “Who is that in the bushes? Merwell, as sure +as I’m alive!” + +“Yes, Phil. And what do you think? I’ve got part of the jewels—Link +had them in his money-belt.” + +“Good enough! I was so afraid they had been lost out of that +jewel-case. Did you make Merwell a prisoner?” + +“Well, in a way. He might have run away a dozen times, but I guess he +didn’t want to be alone. Besides, he has quarreled with Jasniff. I’ll +tell you all about it later,” went on Dave, in a lower tone. + +Merwell had halted and now he came shuffling into the temporary camp. +He nodded sheepishly to the shipowner’s son and to the sailors. + +“Got ye, did they?” said one of the tars, with a sneer. + +“Yes,” answered the culprit, meekly. + +“Humph! You’re a fine Dick to run away and steal jewels!” muttered the +sailor, and turned his back on the youth. + +“Where are Roger and Captain Sanders and the others?” questioned Dave. + +“Gone after you, and after Jasniff and those three rascally +Englishmen,” answered Phil. “I said I’d stay here and try that trick +with a column of smoke. I thought you might remember and look for it.” + +“It was a good thing to do, Phil,” answered our hero, “for it brought +us straight to this spot.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII—BEHIND THE CURTAIN OF VINES + + +An hour went by and during that time Dave drew Phil to one side and +related the particulars concerning the doings of Merwell and Jasniff, +according to the story told by the former of the two evil-disposed +youths. + +“I think Link feels pretty sore,” he continued. “So there won’t be any +use in rubbing it in.” + +“What do you intend to do with him, Dave?” + +“I don’t know yet. We’ll talk it over later on. The thing to do now is +to locate Jasniff and get the rest of the jewels. Don’t forget that he +has the finest of the diamonds. That is one thing that made Link +sore—Jasniff taking the lion’s share.” + +“Well, that was the way Jasniff always did, even at school. Now you’ve +got back I’m willing to start the search for him any time you say,” +continued the shipowner’s son. + +“We’ll wait a while and see if Roger and Captain Sanders return,” +answered our hero. + +He was glad to rest, and threw himself on a bed of moss the sailors +had collected. Merwell sat against a tree, tired out, but too much +worried to sleep. Evidently he was trying to decide on what to do next +and wondering how he was to get out of the awful situation in which he +found himself. + +Presently a shout was heard, and Roger burst into view, followed an +instant later by Billy Dill. + +“Hello, Dave!” cried the senator’s son. “Got back, have you?” And then +he stared at Merwell. “Oh, are you here, too?” + +“Yes,” returned the big youth, and that was all he could say. + +“Dave, did you get the jewels Merwell had?” went on Roger. + +“Yes. But, Roger, how did you know——” + +“There is no time to talk it over now, Dave,” interrupted the +senator’s son, quickly. “We have got to act, and that at once! That +is, if you want to get back the rest of the jewels.” + +“Why, what do you mean?” demanded Dave and Phil in a breath, and even +Merwell was all attention. + +“Do you remember those Englishmen, the fellows who robbed Mr. Borden? +Well, we traced them to their camp, and what do you think? They met +Jasniff in some way, and he is friendly with them.” + +“Did he tell them about the jewels?” demanded our hero. + +“No, he was cute enough to keep the story of the jewels to +himself,—that is, we didn’t hear him tell them anything about the +gems. But he said he wanted to get away from the island as quickly as +possible, and without being seen by any of us, and he offered the +Englishmen a thousand dollars in diamonds if they’d help him. They +agreed to it, and all hands are waiting for some ship to come here and +take them off.” + +“The ship I saw last night!” cried Dave, and told of the light on the +ocean. + +“It must be that ship!” exclaimed Phil. + +“They’ll get away sure, unless you can stop ’em,” put in Merwell, and +he seemed to be almost as interested as anybody. It galled him +exceedingly to think that his companion in crime might escape. + +“Roger, how did you learn this?” asked Dave. + +“In a queer kind of a way. Billy Dill got on the trail of the three +Englishmen first and we followed them to one of the caves. Then one of +the Englishmen went away and after a while he came back with Jasniff, +and all hands went to another cave, close to the shore. We got into +one part of the cave and overheard what the crowd said, through a +crack in the rocks. We might have confronted Jasniff and demanded the +jewels, but we saw that the Englishmen were all armed and they looked +to be in an ugly mood, and Captain Sanders wanted no bloodshed if it +could be avoided. So then Billy Dill and I said we would come back +here and get Phil and the sailors.” + +“I should think you’d do your best to capture Jasniff,” said Merwell. + +“Do you want him captured?” asked Roger, sharply. + +“Why not? He didn’t treat me fairly—and he planned the robbery in the +first place.” + +“Well, if you want him taken you had better help us,” put in Phil. + +“Say, Dave, if I help you catch Jasniff and get the rest of the jewels +back, will you—er—will you let me go?” faltered Link Merwell, +anxiously. + +“I don’t know—I’ll see about it, Link,” answered Dave, and that was as +far as he would commit himself, for he remembered that this case was +for Mr. Wadsworth and the authorities to settle. + +“I’ll help you all I can—just to get square with Nick!” muttered the +big youth. “I’ll show him that he isn’t the only frog in the puddle.” + +“The sooner we go the better,” went on the senator’s son. + +“I am ready now,” returned Dave. “I’ll not rest easy until Jasniff is +caught and the rest of those jewels are recovered.” + +A few words more were exchanged, and then it was decided that the +whole party should follow Roger and Billy Dill to the spot from whence +they had come. + +“Borden is very anxious to have the three Englishmen held,” said the +senator’s son. + +“I suppose he wants to get back his money,” returned Dave. “I don’t +blame him.” + +The path was through the forest and then along a rocky ridge. Here +walking was very uncertain, and Roger warned the others to be careful. + +“An’ if ye ain’t careful ye’ll go into a hole to Kingdom Come!” put in +Billy Dill. + +When the ridge was left behind they came to another patch of timber, +and then walked through a small cave with a large opening at either +end. In the center of this cave was a hole, at the bottom of which +flowed an underground river. + +“If ever an island was rightly named, this is the one,” observed Phil. +“It is caves from one end to the other.” + +“Listen! I thought I heard voices!” exclaimed Dave, suddenly, and held +up his hand for silence. + +All listened closely and heard a faint murmur, coming from a distance. + +“Sounds to me as if it was underground,” whispered Phil. + +“Yes, but from what direction?” asked Roger. + +“I think it comes from over yonder,” answered Dave. “Let us go there +and make sure.” + +They walked on, soon coming to a spot where a place between the rocks +was covered with a matting of long vines, much intertwined. + +“Keep quiet!” suddenly exclaimed our hero. “I know where they +are—behind those vines. There must be a cave there, and the vines make +a curtain for the entrance.” + +“Who is it?” asked Merwell. + +“I don’t know yet. Wait, all of you remain here, behind the rocks, +while I investigate.” + +As silently as possible, Dave crawled forward, keeping close to the +rocks on one side of the cave’s entrance. Soon he was up to the +curtain of vines, and cautiously he thrust his hand forward, making a +small opening. + +At first our hero could see little, but as his eyes became accustomed +to the gloom, he made out two forms lying on couches of vines, +smoking. The forms were those of the two Englishmen, Pardell and +Rumney. + +“Well, Geswick ought to be coming back,” Dave heard Rumney say. “He +said he wouldn’t waste any time.” + +“Maybe he had some trouble with that young fellow,” returned Pardell. +“Say, do you know he’s a queer stick? Where did he get those diamonds +he offered for his passage?” + +“I don’t know, but I rather think he stole them.” + +“Then perhaps he has more of the jewels.” + +“Just what I was thinking—and Geswick thought the same.” + +“If he has many of them——” The man paused suggestively. + +“We might relieve him, eh?” returned the other. + +“Why not? We cleaned out Borden. Two jobs of that sort are no worse +than one.” + +There was a period of silence, and Dave moved back as quietly as +possible to where he had left his companions. + +“Rumney and Pardell are there, in a long cave,” he whispered. “They +are waiting for Geswick and, I think, Jasniff.” + +“But where are Captain Sanders and Smiley?” asked the shipowner’s son. + +“I don’t know. Perhaps they are watching Jasniff and Geswick—or maybe +they have captured those rascals.” + +“Oh, let me get at Pardell and Rumney!” cried Giles Borden. “I’ll +teach them to rob me!” And he started forward, flourishing a heavy +stick he had picked up. + +“Wait! wait!” returned Dave, and caught him by the arm. “Don’t go yet. +Let us lie low until Geswick comes, and maybe Jasniff. We may be able +to capture all of them.” + +“Can we handle so many?” asked Roger. + +“I think so. Anyway we can try. Remember, Captain Sanders and Smiley +may be following Geswick and Jasniff, and if they are, they’ll come to +our aid.” + +“I’ll wait, but it’s a hard thing to do, don’t you know,” grumbled the +Englishman who had been robbed. + +“We had better set a guard, so that we are not surprised,” advised +Phil. “Supposing we scatter around the rocks and in the vines?” + +This was agreed upon, and it was also agreed that Dave should give a +whistle when he wanted an attack made. + +After this came a long period of waiting. All remained silent, until, +of a sudden, everybody was startled by a distant cannon shot. + +“What in the world can that mean?” cried Phil, who lay close to our +hero. + +“It’s a shot from a ship’s cannon, and it came from the direction of +the shore!” returned Dave. “It may be some sort of a signal.” + +“Do you suppose it’s a summons to Pardell and Rumney?” + +“It may be. Wait, I’ll look into the cave again and see what they are +doing.” + +Losing no time, our hero crawled forward once more to the position he +had before occupied. Then he pushed the vines aside and looked into +the long cave. + +He could not suppress a cry of consternation. The two Englishmen had +vanished! + +“They are gone!” he called to his companions. + +“Gone!” repeated Phil and Roger. + +“Don’t tell me that!” fairly shrieked Giles Borden. “I must catch them +and get back my money!” + +“Where did they go to?” asked Billy Dill, as he pushed through the +curtain of vines. + +“They must have left the cave by some other opening,” answered Dave. +“Come on, we’ll soon find out!” And into the cave he rushed, his chums +and the others in the crowd following. + +“I see another opening!” cried Merwell, a minute later. “Look!” And he +pointed down a passageway to the right. + +“That’s the way they must have gone!” exclaimed Giles Borden. “After +them, all of you! If I get back my money, I’ll reward you well!” And +on he sped, with Merwell close at his heels and the others following. + +“I don’t know if we are on the right track or not,” said Dave, to Phil +and Roger. “This cave may have other openings.” + +Hardly had he spoken when there came a yell from Giles Borden, +followed by a cry from Link Merwell. Both had fallen into a small hole +that was filled with water. Each was much shaken up, but unhurt. + +“It’s a broken neck somebody will get if we are not careful,” said one +of the sailors. “I’d rather be on the deck of a ship any day than on +an island like this.” + +Soon they were out in the open once more. They were on a rise of +ground, and not a great distance away they could see the shore and the +rolling ocean. + +“A ship!” cried Roger. + +“But not the _Golden Eagle_!” returned Dave. “It must be the vessel +that was to stop for the Englishmen.” + +“It is! It is!” bawled Giles Borden. “And look, there they are on the +shore, ready to embark, all of them!” + +“Yes, and Jasniff is with them!” added Dave, Phil, and Roger in a +breath. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII—IN WHICH THE ENEMY SAILS AWAY + + +It was a startling discovery, and for the moment Dave and the others +did not know what to do. + +“Do you see anything of Captain Sanders, or Smiley?” questioned our +hero. + +“Not a thing,” returned the senator’s son. “It’s strange, too.” + +“Oh, cannot we stop them in some manner?” pleaded Giles Borden. + +“Come on—we’ll do what we can!” cried Phil. + +“That’s the talk!” put in old Billy Dill. “Oh, for a gatling gun that +we might train on ’em!” he added. + +All were calculating the distance to the shore. Between them and the +water was a slight hollow, overgrown with brushwood and vines. How +long would it take to find a path through that hollow? + +“No use in staying here,” was Dave’s comment. “We’ll get there +somehow. But keep out of sight, if you can. We don’t want them to +discover us until the last minute.” All moved forward toward the +hollow. By walking well over to the left they managed to keep a +distant row of palms between themselves and those who were at the +water’s edge. + +But progress was slow, as all soon discovered. The hollow was a +treacherous one, full of soft spots and pitfalls. Less than a hundred +feet had been covered when two of the sailors went down up to their +waists, and a second later Roger followed. + +“Hold on, Roger! I’ll help you!” cried Dave, and he and Phil ran to +their chum’s assistance. They did not dare to go near the soft spot +and so all they could do was to throw the senator’s son a stout vine +for use as a rope, and then haul him out by sheer strength. In the +meantime the others went to the rescue of the two sailors, and they +were hauled out in similar fashion. + +“This island certainly is the limit!” gasped Roger, when he was on +firm ground once more. “I wouldn’t live here if they made me a present +of the whole thing!” + +“That’s right,” returned Phil. “Because, if you lived here, you might +some day find yourself buried before your time!” And this quaint way +of expressing it made all of the boys grin in spite of their +excitement. + +Beyond the hollow another difficulty confronted them. Here were some +sharp rocks, with deep cuts between. They had to climb over the rocks +with extreme care and do not a little jumping, all of which consumed +much valuable time. + +“They’ll be off before we can reach them!” groaned Dave. “Oh, do +hurry, fellows!” + +“I’m coming as fast as I can!” answered Phil. + +“So am I,” added Roger. + +“You ought to shoot at them, if they won’t stop,” put in Merwell. + +“I’ll do what I can,” answered our hero. He was wondering how far the +present situation would justify the use of firearms. + +At last the rocks were left behind, and the crowd found themselves in +the fringe of palm trees lining the sandy shore. + +“Do you see them?” queried Phil, who was getting winded from his +exertions. + +“No, I don’t,” returned Dave. He had looked up and down the sandy +strip in vain for a sight of the Englishmen and Jasniff. + +Beyond the beach was the reef with the ever-present breakers and far +beyond this the ship they, had before sighted. The schooner lay-to +with all sails lowered. + +“There they are!” suddenly shouted Billy Dill. “Too late, boys, too +late!” + +“Where? where?” came in a shout from the lads and from Giles Borden. + +“Look out there, by the reef. Don’t you see the small boat in the +breakers?” went on the old sailor, pointing with his bronzed hand. + +All gazed in the direction he indicated, and Dave and Giles Borden +could not repress a groan of dismay. For, riding the swells of the +ocean, could be seen a small boat, manned by two sailors. In the boat +sat four passengers. + +“That’s Jasniff, I am sure of it!” cried Phil. + +“And those three men are the fellows who robbed me!” muttered Giles +Borden. “Oh, what luck! Ten minutes too late!” + +“Can’t we follow them in some way?” asked Roger. + +“I don’t see how,” answered Dave. “Our rowboat is on the other side of +the island. Besides, even if we had a boat, I don’t believe we could +catch them before the schooner got underway. Oh, isn’t it a shame!” +And Dave fairly ground his teeth in helpless dismay. + +“If we had a cannon!” murmured old Billy Dill. “A shot across the bow +o’ that craft would make the cap’n take warnin’, I’m thinkin’!” + +“Do you suppose any other boat is handy?” asked the Englishman. + +“We might look,” returned the senator’s son. + +All were about to run out on the beach when Dave suddenly called a +halt. + +“Don’t do it,” he said. “If we can’t follow them, it will be best for +the present not to show ourselves.” + +“How’s that?” demanded Giles Borden. “It’s a bloody shame to let them +go in this fashion.” + +“If they see us, they’ll know we are after them and they’ll sail away +as fast as possible,” went on our hero. “If they don’t see us, they +may take their time in getting away, and that will give us so much +better chance to catch them.” + +“Dave is right!” cried the senator’s son. And the others agreed with +him, and all kept concealed behind the row of palms and the brushwood +and rocks. From that point they watched the small boat gradually +approach the schooner until it was alongside. Then a rope ladder was +lowered and the passengers mounted to the deck, after which the +rowboat was drawn up on the davits. + +“What ship is that?” asked Phil. + +“She is named the _Aurora_,” answered Giles Borden. + +“The _Aurora_!” exclaimed Billy Dill. “Do ye mean the _Aurora_, Cap’n +Jack Hunker?” + +“Yes, that’s the captain’s name.” + +“Why, I know him!” went on the old tar. “Sailed with him once, in the +_Peter Cass_,—afore he took command o’ the _Aurora_. Say, Dave, he +used to be a putty good man. I can’t see how he would stand in with +sech fellers as Jasniff an’ them thievin’ Britishers.” + +“Perhaps he doesn’t know what scoundrels they are,” returned our hero. + +“Oh, they haven’t told him the truth, depend upon that,” said Giles +Borden. “They have fixed up some story to pull the wool over his eyes. +Most likely they’ll tell him that I am the rascal of the party and +that is why I am to be left behind.” + +“If the captain of the _Aurora_ is all right, it may pay to signal to +him,” mused Dave. “I wish I had known of this before.” + +“See! see! they are hoisting the sails!” cried Phil. + +“If you are going to signal to the schooner, you had better do it +pretty quick,” advised Roger. + +“I think I will. It can’t hurt much—they are going to sail away, +anyhow. Come on.” + +All ran out on the sandy beach, and Dave discharged his shotgun twice +as a signal. The others waved tree-branches and brushwood, and Phil +even lit some of the latter, to make a smudge. + +But if the signals were seen, no attention was paid to them. Those on +the schooner continued to hoist the sails, and presently the _Aurora_ +turned away, leaving Cave Island behind. + +As the schooner moved off Dave’s heart sank within him. On board of +the craft was Jasniff, and the rascal had the larger portion of the +Carwith jewels in his possession. + +“It’s a shame!” burst out Phil. “Oh, why didn’t we get hold of Jasniff +when you collared Link!” + +“Where is your own ship?” asked Merwell. “Why don’t you find her and +follow that crowd?” He felt as sour as ever over the thought that he +had been captured while his companion in crime had escaped. + +“I wish the _Golden Eagle_ would come in,” answered Dave. “I can’t +understand what is keeping her, unless she suffered from that storm +and had to lay to for repairs.” + +“And where do you suppose Captain Sanders and Smiley are?” put in +Roger. + +“I don’t know. They may have fallen into one of the caves, or they may +have been made prisoners by those who have sailed away.” + +“Prisoners? I never thought of that!” exclaimed Giles Borden. “Yes, it +would be just like Geswick and those other scoundrels to treat them in +that fashion.” + +“Well, it won’t do us any good to remain here,” went on our hero. “We +may as well scatter and see if we can’t locate the captain and the +others.” + +This was considered good advice and tired as the crowd was, all went +on the hunt, some up the shore and some down, and the others inland. + +Dave and Roger walked down the shore, why neither could exactly tell. +They passed the palms and brushwood, and leaving the sand, commenced +to climb over some rocks. Then Dave began to shout. + +At first no reply came to his calls, but presently he heard a groan, +coming from behind the rocks. + +“Let us see what it means!” he exclaimed to the senator’s son, and +they hurried in the direction of the sound with all speed. + +Back of the rocks was a grove of plantains, and in the center was the +remains of a thatched hut, evidently built by natives years before. On +the ground in front of this hut lay Captain Sanders and the sailor, +Smiley. Each had his head bound up and each was nursing a bruised +ankle. + +“Captain Sanders!” cried Dave, in astonishment. + +“Dave Porter!” returned the commander of the _Golden Eagle_, joyfully. +“My, but I am glad you have come!” + +“You are hurt?” + +“Yes. Those scoundrels attacked us from behind and knocked us +senseless.” + +“You mean those three Englishmen?” + +“Yes, and that fellow Jasniff was with them.” + +“But your ankles are hurt, too?” went on Dave. + +“We hurt them when we fell into one of the beastly caves, or holes. We +were following Jasniff and the Englishmen, and also looking for you +and the others. Then those rascals got behind us in some way, and the +first thing I knew I got a whack behind the ear that knocked me +unconscious.” + +“And I got the same,” said Smiley. “Oh, I wish I had my hands on those +villains!” + +“They have sailed away,” said Roger. + +“Away!” cried the captain. “How?” + +In a few brief words our hero and his chum told of the advance to the +beach and of what they and the others had witnessed. Captain Sanders +shook his head, soberly. + +“That’s too bad,” he said. “They’ve got a good start and it will be +hard to follow them.” + +“How can we follow them, when the _Golden Eagle_ isn’t here?” said +Dave. + +“But she is here—on the other side of the island.” + +“Oh, are you sure?” cried our hero. + +“Yes. I saw her coming in,—when we were on one of the hills. She was +minus her foretopmast, which shows she must have suffered some in that +hurricane.” + +“If that’s the case, let us get to her with all possible speed, go +aboard, and follow the _Aurora_,” returned Dave. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX—A CHASE ON THE OCEAN + + +It took the best part of the afternoon and evening to get the whole +party together again, and send word to the mate of the _Golden Eagle_ +to bring the vessel around to that side of Cave Island. And while this +was being done the hurts Captain Sanders and Smiley had received were +cared for as well as the means at hand permitted. + +The captain and the wounded sailor had a long story to tell, of how +they had followed the three rascally Englishmen and Nick Jasniff, and +how the latter had made a compact with the others, so that they would +take him with them when they left the island. + +“The Englishmen were a bit afraid of the captain of the _Aurora_,” +said Captain Sanders, “and we overheard them discuss the situation. +They knew the captain would want to know what had become of the fourth +man he had left here. At last they resolved to try a trick, but they +weren’t sure it would work. But evidently it did, for the schooner has +sailed.” + +“What was that trick?” asked Dave. + +“It seems that when Mr. Borden was on the _Aurora_ he had a headache +from the sun and wore smoked glasses. Is that right, sir?” + +“It is,” answered Giles Borden. “The glare on the waves was beastly, +and I wore the smoked glasses all day long.” + +“Well, the rascals planned to have Jasniff impersonate Mr. Borden. One +of them, Geswick, exchanged coats and caps with him, and lent him a +pair of smoked glasses, and he was to tie up his cheeks and pretend to +be suffering from toothache, and keep to his stateroom as much as +possible during the trip.” + +“Oh, what a thing to do—impersonate me!” roared Giles Borden, in a +rage. “Just wait till I confront him!” + +“Yes, you’ll have to wait,” put in Phil, dryly. + +“Did you find out where they were going to sail to?” asked Dave, +eagerly. + +“To San Juan, on the island of Porto Rico. But they may make some +stops on the way.” + +“San Juan,” mused Roger. “That’s a good many miles from here. Perhaps +the _Golden Eagle_ can catch the _Aurora_ before she gets there.” + +“If they went to San Juan direct I’d advise waiting till they got in +that harbor before I’d do anything,” said Captain Sanders. + +“Why?” asked the boys. + +“Because it is one thing to stop them on the high seas and another to +stop them in United States waters. Remember, Porto Rico is now a part +of Uncle Sam’s domain.” + +“Yes, I’d rather go at them there than on the high seas,” answered +Dave. “But they mustn’t get away again, no matter where we have to +tackle them,” he added, determinedly. + +It was impossible to transfer those ashore to the _Golden Eagle_ +during the darkness, because of the danger in the breakers, so they +had to wait until daylight before departing. + +Among those to go were, of course, the sailors who had come ashore +from the wreck of the _Emma Brower_. Captain Sanders told them they +could remain on the island if they wished, but they set up an +immediate protest. + +“It’s not a fit place for any man,” said one of the tars. “There is +very little game and not much fruit, and one is continually in danger +of falling into a hole or a cave. I’ll go to Porto Rico gladly, and so +will my mates, and we’ll work our passage, if you’re willing.” + +“All right,” said Captain Sanders. “But you’ll not have much to do, as +we have about all the hands we need.” + +When aboard the ship, the captain and the boys listened to the story +the mate had to tell. Then they learned that the storm had blown the +_Golden Eagle_ many miles from Cave Island, and in trying to avoid +some of the keys of another island, the vessel had lost the top of one +of the masts and the rudder had been damaged. This had necessitated +much delay, which accounted for the non-appearance of the vessel when +expected. + +While making repairs, the vessel had been passed by a tramp steamer +bound for Trinidad. The captain of the steamer had asked if he could +be of assistance, and after being told no, had given the information +that he had picked up three rowboat loads of passengers and crew from +the ill-fated _Emma Brower_. It may be mentioned here that another +boat load from the same vessel managed to reach another island in that +vicinity, and in the end it was learned that the going down of the +bark was unattended with the loss of a single life. + +With so many on board, the accommodations on the _Golden Eagle_ were +somewhat crowded. The sailors went with Billy Dill into the +forecastle, while Giles Borden was asked to share Captain Sanders’ +stateroom. What to do with Link Merwell became a question. In one +sense he was a prisoner, yet Dave hated to treat him as such. + +“There is the extra pantry,” said Captain Sanders. “We can clean that +out and put in a cot, and he can use that,” and so it was arranged, +much to the relief of all of the boys. The pantry had a grating, +opening on the main passageway, so it made a fairly comfortable +stateroom, although rather hot. + +“Well, I suppose I’ve got to take my medicine, when we get back,” +grumbled Link Merwell, when given his quarters. + +“What else could you expect?” returned Dave. “If this was my affair +alone, Link, I might let you go, now you have given up the jewels. But +what is to be done is for Mr. Wadsworth and the authorities to say.” + +Merwell had confessed that he and Jasniff had taken the skates and +other things at Squirrel Island, and told where they had been left, in +a barn along the river, and how they might be recovered. He had also +admitted impersonating Dave on several occasions and ordering goods in +our hero’s name, and doing other mean things of which he had been +suspected, and said he was heartily sorry for his actions. + +Soon the _Golden Eagle_ was ready for the departure from Cave Island. +As the sails were hoisted the boys gathered on deck to take a last +look at the remarkable spot. + +“It is really and truly Cave Island,” declared Dave. “I don’t believe +any other place in the world is so full of caves and holes!” + +“I am glad the volcanoes didn’t get busy while we were there,” +remarked the shipowner’s son. + +“So am I,” added Roger. “The caves and holes were bad enough, without +adding other perils.” + +“Dave, do you think we’ll catch that schooner?” went on Phil, after a +pause, during which the boys watched the ship drawing away from the +island. + +“I sincerely hope so,” was the serious reply. “If we don’t, and +Jasniff gets away, this mission down here will have proved almost a +failure.” + +“Then you think Jasniff has the most of the jewels?” + +“Yes. If you’ll remember, the jewels that were taken were valued at +about seventy-five thousand dollars. Well, I have looked at the jewels +I got from Link, and so has Mr. Borden, who knows something about +gems, and we have come to the conclusion that those Link turned over +to me are not worth over fifteen thousand dollars. That means that +Jasniff has about sixty thousand dollars’ worth.” + +“Isn’t that like Jasniff!” cried the senator’s son. “Always wanted the +big end of everything! It’s a wonder he and Link didn’t quarrel +before.” + +“They did quarrel, and Link wanted to leave him several times, but +didn’t dare, for Jasniff threatened to expose him. In one way, I am +sorry for Link,—but, of course, he had no right to commit such a +deed.” + +After Cave Island was left in the distance, Captain Sanders had a long +conference with Giles Borden concerning the Englishmen who had robbed +him. Later a general talk took place between the pair and the boys. + +“I am afraid we’ll have to trust to luck to catch the _Aurora_ or +locate her,” said the captain, finally. “She may go to San Juan and +she may go elsewhere.” + +“If we pass any other vessels, can’t we ask if they saw the schooner?” +ventured Dave. + +“Certainly.” + +The day went by and also the next. Link Merwell kept to himself, only +speaking when addressed. He felt his position keenly, and would no +doubt have given a great deal if he could have cleared himself. He was +learning that the way of the transgressor is hard. + +On the third day, early in the morning, they passed a big barkentine +bound for South American ports. Greetings were exchanged, and Captain +Sanders asked concerning the _Aurora_. + +“Yes, we met her,” was the reply. “Yesterday, about two bells in the +afternoon watch.” + +“Did she say where she was bound?” + +“Bound for San Juan, Porto Rico.” + +“Direct?” + +“Yes. She was going to stop elsewhere, but the captain allowed he’d +make straight for San Juan,” added the captain of the barkentine, +through the megaphone he was using. Then, after a few words more, the +two vessels separated. + +“It’s San Juan sure!” cried Dave. “From what Mr. Borden and Billy Dill +say of Captain Hunker he would not tell a falsehood. I guess the best +thing we can do is to sail for that port.” + +“I think so myself,” returned Captain Sanders. + +The chase was now a definite one, and Dave felt much relieved. He +wondered if they would be able to overtake the _Aurora_ before Porto +Rico was reached. + +“We can do that with ease,” answered Captain Sanders when questioned. +“But even so, she may not stick to just the course we take, and we may +pass her in the night. So don’t worry if we don’t see or hear anything +before San Juan is reached.” + +“I’ll try not to worry,” answered our hero. Yet he could not help it, +for so much depended on the successful outcome of his mission. He knew +that those at home must be in deep distress, and he could picture the +anxiety of Mr. Wadsworth and his wife and Jessie, and also the anxiety +of his own folks. + +“Oh, we’ve got to catch Jasniff and get back those jewels!” he told +himself. “We’ve simply got to do it! I won’t give up, if I have to +follow him around the world!” + +It had been warm, but now the weather changed and a strong breeze made +living far more comfortable. The breeze was favorable to sailing, and +the _Golden Eagle_ plowed the deep at a good rate of speed. Many of +the islands of the Lesser Antilles were passed, and some truly +dangerous reefs, and then the course was straight for the harbor of +San Juan, on the northeastern coast of Porto Rico. + +They had seen nothing so far of the _Aurora_, but on the afternoon of +the last day out they were passed by a freight steamer from the south +and received word that the schooner was not far away and making for +San Juan. + +“I guess we had better go right in and get the authorities to take +hold,” said Captain Sanders. “This is no matter for us to handle, now +we are in United States waters once more.” + +Dave agreed; and as soon as possible they entered the harbor and went +ashore. It was an easy matter to notify the harbor police, and inside +of two hours half a dozen officers of the law were detailed to make +the necessary arrests. Dave and Giles Borden and Captain Sanders went +with them, leaving Phil, Roger, and the others aboard the _Golden +Eagle_. + +The patrol boat of the harbor police had to remain on the watch all +night and half the next morning before the _Aurora_ was sighted. + +“There she is!” cried Dave, at last, and Giles Borden echoed the +words. Then the patrol boat lost no time in steaming alongside of the +schooner. + +“Hello, what’s wanted?” demanded Captain Hunker, as he saw the +officers of the law. + +“We’ll come aboard, captain,” said the officer in charge. + +“What’s the matter?” + +“We are after four of your passengers.” + +At that moment somebody appeared near the rail, to learn what the +shouting meant. It was Nick Jasniff. He gazed at the officers of the +law and then at Dave. As he recognized our hero his face fell and he +looked totally dumfounded. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX—HOMEWARD BOUND—CONCLUSION + + +“Jasniff, I want to see you!” shouted Dave. + +“What do you want of me, Dave Porter?” returned the big youth, as +boldly as he could. + +“You know well enough.” + +“Humph! You think you’ve got me, don’t you?” sneered Nick Jasniff, and +then he left the rail of the vessel and disappeared down a +companionway. + +By this time the officers of the law were boarding the _Aurora_, +accompanied by Giles Borden and Captain Sanders. + +“Where are those bloody rascals who robbed me?” exclaimed the +Englishman, excitedly. “Just let me get my hands on them!” + +“I don’t understand this!” returned the captain of the schooner, in +surprise. “You’ll have to explain.” + +“You have three Englishmen aboard here—fellows you took to Cave Island +when I was with them.” + +“Say, you’re that fourth man!” gasped Captain Hunker. “But that other +chap,—the fellow with smoked glasses, who had his face tied up——” He +did not know how to go on. + +“He impersonated me, the villain! But I am after the others, for they +robbed me of over a thousand pounds, don’t you know!” + +“Where are your passengers?” demanded the officer in charge of those +from the patrol boat, sternly. + +“If they are not on deck they must be below,—they had no chance to +leave the ship,” answered Captain Hunker. “This gets me!” he went on, +weakly. “I thought they acted rather strange, but I supposed they were +nothing but a crowd of weak-minded critters hunting for pirates’ +gold.” + +At that moment Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney came on deck, having heard +the tramping of feet overhead and wondering what it meant. Almost +before he could speak, Giles Borden had Geswick by the throat and was +shaking him violently. + +“Will rob me, and leave me a prisoner in that cave!” he roared. “I’ll +teach you a lesson! Give me my money, you bloody scoundrel!” And then +he banged Andrew Geswick’s head against a mast. + +“Ho, let up!” yelled the criminal. “Let up, I say!” And he tried to +squirm away. But it was useless, and in a minute more one of the +officers of the law handcuffed him, and Pardell and Rumney were also +secured. + +“Now I want my money!” stormed Giles Borden. “Every shilling of it!” + +“I haven’t any of it,” replied Rumney. “Geswick and Pardell have it +all.” Rumney had had a quarrel with his fellows, just as Merwell had +quarreled with Jasniff. + +“Just you wait, Rumney; we’ll fix you for going back on us,” growled +Andrew Geswick. But this threat did him little good. In the end he and +Pardell had to hand over every penny taken from Giles Borden, and then +they were marched off to jail, to await a hearing before the +authorities. + +In the meantime Dave had run across the deck and followed Jasniff down +the companionway. He was afraid that the evil-minded youth might hide +the stolen jewels or throw them overboard. + +When he got below he looked around, but could see nothing of the other +boy. He ran along a passageway, peering into one stateroom after +another, and also into the cabin and the pantry. Then he heard +something like a cover drop near by and hurried in that direction. + +Jasniff was in a corner stateroom on his hands and knees. Beside him +was a flat steamer trunk, which was closed. It was the lid of this +trunk that Dave had heard drop. + +“Jasniff, come out of that!” ordered Dave, sternly. “Come right out +and hand over those jewels.” + +“Say, Dave Porter, you think you are smart, don’t you?” sneered the +big youth, as he got up on his feet. + +“Never mind what I think. I want those jewels, every one of them, and +I am going to have them.” + +“I haven’t any jewels.” + +“I know better.” + +“All right then, you can search me if you want to—and search my +baggage, too,” went on Jasniff, and held out his arms as if willing to +have the investigation begin on the spot. + +“If you haven’t the jewels on your person, you have hidden them,” went +on Dave. “Bring them out, right away.” + +“Not much, Porter, I am not that kind of a fool.” Jasniff lowered his +voice to a whisper. “To outsiders I won’t acknowledge I have the +jewels, but if you’ll fix it so I go clear, I’ll see to it that old +Wadsworth gets the gems back.” + +“I’ll fix nothing, Jasniff, and you’ll hand over every jewel, and do +it right now!” cried Dave, and now he was so angry that he leaped on +the criminal and threw him backward over the trunk. + +But if Dave was strong, so was Jasniff, and, as of old, the rascal +thought nothing of playing a foul trick. Around and around the +stateroom went both boys, with first Dave on top and then his +opponent. Then suddenly Jasniff pulled himself away and caught up a +water pitcher that was on a stand. + +“I’ll fix you!” he roared, in the same tone of voice he had employed +when he had once attacked Dave in the Oak Hall gymnasium, and he +brought the heavy pitcher down straight for Dave’s head. + +Had the blow landed as intended, our hero would have been knocked +senseless and perhaps seriously hurt. But quick as the bully was, Dave +was quicker, and leaped to one side. Then he let out with his fist, +landing on Jasniff’s jaw,—a blow that sent the fellow crashing over +into a corner. As Jasniff came up, Dave hit him again, and this time +he went down all but knocked out. + +“Dave!” called a voice from the doorway at that moment, and Captain +Sanders appeared. “Having a tussle, eh? Want any help?” + +“May be,” panted our hero. “He attacked me with the water-pitcher!” +And he pointed to the fragments of chinaware that lay on the floor. + +“Do-don’t h-hit me again!” spluttered Nick Jasniff. + +“Will you hand over the jewels and behave yourself?” + +“I—I haven’t got the jewels,” and now Jasniff arose unsteadily to his +feet. + +“Perhaps he’s hidden them,” suggested the captain of the _Golden +Eagle_. “It would be like him to do it.” + +“I’ll search him first and then look around the room. Where are those +officers?” + +“They have their hands full just now with those Englishmen. But I’ll +call them if you wish it.” + +“No, just see that he doesn’t get away,” answered Dave. + +A rapid search of Jasniff’s clothing told our hero that the rascal did +not have the gems on his person. Then Dave looked into the steamer +trunk. + +“Are they there?” inquired Captain Sanders. + +“No.” + +“You’ll never get them from me,” growled Jasniff, and gave Dave a look +that was full of the keenest hatred. “I’ll go to prison for life +before I’ll give them up, now!” + +“Watch him carefully,” said Dave to the captain, and got down on his +hands and knees in front of the berth in the room. + +“Nothing under there!” cried Jasniff, but his voice had a trace of +anxiety in it. + +Dave felt around, but found nothing unusual. Then he lit a match and +continued his search. Soon he saw where a board of the side wall had +been pried loose and then shoved back into place. He pulled on the +board and it came out, revealing a small compartment between two +upright posts. In the compartment was something wrapped in a bandanna +handkerchief. He pulled it out and crawled from under the berth. + +“I think I’ve found it,” he said, in a voice he tried in vain to +steady. Then he untied the handkerchief and brought to light a money +belt, exactly like that taken from Link Merwell. He placed it on the +steamer trunk and opened it with care. The sight that met his gaze was +a dazzling one. The money-belt contained all that Jasniff had carried +of the Carwith jewels. + +“My, but that’s a sight!” murmured Captain Sanders. + +“Going to return them, I suppose,” sneered Nick Jasniff. “You’re a big +fool to do it! I’d keep them, and have a good time on the proceeds.” + +“I am not built that way,” answered Dave, shortly. “I’ll put this +around my waist, with the other,” he added, and lost no time in +adjusting the second money-belt. It wasn’t particularly comfortable to +wear those two belts, yet Dave felt a tremendous satisfaction in so +doing. + +Jasniff was made to march on deck, and there he was handcuffed like +the other prisoners. He no longer pretended to have a toothache, but +he did have a jaw-ache, from Dave’s blow. + +The most surprised man was Captain Hunker, and he readily told his +story of how the Englishmen had hired him to take them to Cave Island +and then call for them later. When Jasniff had appeared, with the +smoked glasses and the bandage on his face, he had pitied the fellow +but had not paid much attention to him. When Dave had fired his gun +from the shore, Geswick had explained that other fortune hunters were +on the island but that they wanted nothing to do with the crowd, so +the master of the _Aurora_ had gone off without investigating. + +Inside of an hour all of the interested parties had gone ashore, and +the three rascally Englishmen and Nick Jasniff were marched off by the +officers of the law. Roger and Phil appeared and wanted to know the +particulars of the capture. + +“And what are you going to do next, Dave?” asked the senator’s son. + +“Get back to Crumville with the jewels, just as soon as I can get +away. But I’ve got to arrange it with the police first.” + +“Aren’t you going to send word ahead?” asked Phil. + +“Of course. I’ll send a cablegram to-day.” + +“Won’t they be surprised and glad to get it!” murmured Roger. + +“And maybe I’m not glad to be able to take the jewels back with me!” +answered Dave, his eyes glistening. + +An officer had been sent to take charge of Link Merwell, who had been +left on board the _Golden Eagle_. An hour later came word that Merwell +could not be found. He had left the vessel in some mysterious manner, +dressing himself in one of Dave’s best suits before going. A little +later Dave learned that Merwell had left San Juan for the interior of +Porto Rico. The officers of the law said they would look for him. + +The cablegram to Mr. Wadsworth was sent, and soon a reply came back. +Then came nearly a week of waiting for a steamer that would take the +boys to New York. In the meantime matters were arranged with the +authorities so that they could get away, and take the jewels with +them. A detective accompanied them, to make certain that the jewels +would be properly delivered, for the whole case was now in the hands +of the law. Giles Borden remained in San Juan, to press his charge +against his fellow countrymen. Captain Sanders remained in the harbor, +to await orders from Phil’s father. + +“Sorry to part with you boys,” said the captain, as he shook hands. +“Hope you’ll sail with me again some day.” + +“An’ sail with me, too,” put in old Billy Dill, who was present, and +as much interested as anybody. + +“But not on such a mission as this has been,” returned Dave. + +“Nor to such a place as Cave Island,” added Roger. + +“For caves and pitfalls that island certainly was the limit,” was +Phil’s comment. + +The voyage to New York proved to be uneventful, and all of the lads +were glad when it was over. Arriving in the metropolis, they lost no +time in getting a train for Crumville, the detective going with them, +and Dave carrying the precious jewels. + +And then what a home-coming followed! All the Wadsworths and the +Porters were at the depot to meet them, and everybody was brimming +over with good feeling. Mrs. Wadsworth fairly hugged Dave, and Laura +kissed him over and over again, and even Jessie could not resist the +temptation to rush into his arms. + +“Oh, Dave, to think you really got the jewels!” said Jessie. “Oh, I’m +so glad! What a hero you are!” And she gave him a look that touched +him to the bottom of the heart. + +And then came Mr. Wadsworth, his voice shaking with emotion, and then +Dave’s father, and Uncle Dunston. + +“One lad out of a million!” murmured the manufacturer. “Mr. Porter, +you can well be proud of Dave!” + +“And I am proud of him,” replied the parent, heartily. + +“We are all proud,” added Dunston Porter. + +In the excitement it must not be supposed that Phil and Roger were +forgotten. While Dave related his story to the men, and delivered the +jewels to Mr. Wadsworth, his chums had to tell about all that had +occurred, to Mrs. Wadsworth and the girls. And the questions that were +asked and answered would fill a chapter and more. + +“And what will they do to Jasniff?” asked Laura. + +“Undoubtedly put him in prison for a number of years,” answered the +senator’s son. “And he deserves it.” + +“What a misspent life!” sighed Mrs. Wadsworth. + +“And what about Link Merwell?” asked Jessie. + +“I don’t know what they’ll do to him. Perhaps they won’t catch him,” +said Phil. + +“If they don’t, I hope he turns over a new leaf and makes a real man +of himself,” said Laura. + +Dave had gone to the jewelry works with the men, and soon Phil and +Roger followed. Here the jewels were examined with care, being checked +off on a list,—the duplicate of a receipt Oliver Wadsworth had given +to the owner of the gems. + +“Four stones are missing,” announced the manufacturer. “And they are +worth less than a thousand dollars. Dave, you certainly did well.” + +“We can get back at least two of those stones,” answered Dave. “The +pawnbrokers will have to give them up.” + +“Then the loss will be less than five hundred dollars—a mere trifle +alongside of what it might have been. Dave, I’ll not offer you a +reward, for I know you won’t take it. But I thank you, my boy, I thank +you most heartily!” And Mr. Wadsworth caught Dave by both hands, while +tears of emotion stood in his eyes. + +“It saved us all from a tight place, if not ruin,” added Dunston +Porter. + +“How is that old watchman?” asked our hero, to change the subject. + +“You mean the man who was hurt?” asked his father. “He is about as +well as ever.” + +“And have you heard from Hooker Montgomery?” + +“Not a word, and we sha’n’t need to, now.” + +“Any word from Oak Hall?” asked Roger. + +“Yes, the place opened again last week.” + +“Then I suppose we’ll have to get back once more,” said Phil. “Well, +we’ve had a long enough vacation,—if you can call it such,” he added, +with a grin. + +“And such adventures!” murmured Roger. “We’ll never see such strenuous +times again, eh, Dave?” + +“There is no telling, we may,” answered Dave. There were still many +adventures ahead, and what they were will be related in the next +volume of this series, to be entitled, “Dave Porter and the Runaways; +or, Last Days at Oak Hall,” in which we shall meet our hero and his +chums and enemies once more. + +“If we are to go back to Oak Hall so soon, let us have all the fun we +can,” said Dave, after the matter of the jewels had been settled; and +the next day he and his chums and the girls went out for a grand +sleighride, for it was still winter at home, even though it had been +like summer on Cave Island. + +“Dave, are you glad to be back?” asked Jessie, while they were gliding +over the snow. + +“Yes, I am,” he answered. “And doubly glad to be here, at your side,” +he added, in a lower voice. + +“Oh, Dave, I was so afraid while you were away!” + +“Of what?” + +“That those bad boys would harm you! Oh, please be careful in the +future, for my sake.” + +“All right, Jessie, I’ll be careful,” he answered, and then, under the +big robe, he gave her little hand a tight squeeze, and I don’t know +but that Jessie gave him a squeeze in return. To her Dave was the +finest boy in all the world. + +“Let’s have a song!” cried out Phil, from the seat in front. + +“Right you are!” returned Dave. “What shall it be?” + +“Oh, anything!” came from the girls in concert; and then they started +to sing one familiar song after another; and while they are singing +let us say good-by and take our leave. + + + THE END + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Dave Porter on Cave Island, by Edward Stratemeyer + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 36377-0.txt or 36377-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/7/36377/ + +Produced by Roger Frank, David Edwards and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/36377-0.zip b/36377-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cbcefce --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-0.zip diff --git a/36377-h.zip b/36377-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f06fea1 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h.zip diff --git a/36377-h/36377-h.htm b/36377-h/36377-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fe24da1 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h/36377-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,13607 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" > +<head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> + <meta content="Dave Porter of Cave Island" name="DC.Title"/> + <meta content="Edward Stratemeyer" name="DC.Creator"/> + <meta content="en" name="DC.Language"/> + <meta content="1912" name="DC.Created"/> + <meta name="generator" content="ppgen (1.13) generated Jun 11, 2011 10:24 PM" /> + <title>Dave Porter of Cave Island</title> + <style type="text/css"> + body {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%;} + p {margin-top:1ex; margin-bottom:0; text-align:justify;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size:x-small; text-align:right; text-indent:0; + position:absolute; right:2%; padding:1px 3px; font-style:normal; + font-variant:normal; font-weight:normal; text-decoration:none; + background-color:inherit; border:1px solid #eee;} + .pncolor {color:silver;} + h1 {text-align:center; font-weight:normal;} + h2 {text-align:left; font-weight:normal;} + h1 {font-size:1.4em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;} + h2 {font-size:1.2em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;} + hr.pb {margin:30px 0; width:100%; border:none; border-top:thin dashed silver; clear:both;} + .sc {font-variant: small-caps;} + .center {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;} + .larger {font-size:larger;} + .smaller {font-size:smaller;} + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + table.c {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + .caption {font-size: 80%;} + .sc {font-variant:small-caps} + div.center>:first-child {margin: .5em auto 0 auto;text-align:center;} + div.center p {margin: 0 auto; text-align:center;} + </style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's Dave Porter on Cave Island, by Edward Stratemeyer + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Dave Porter on Cave Island + A Schoolboy's Mysterious Mission + +Author: Edward Stratemeyer + +Illustrator: Richard Boehm + +Release Date: July 3, 2011 [EBook #36377] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank, David Edwards and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + + + + + +</pre> + +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i001' id='i001'></a> +<img src='images/i001.jpg' alt='' title=''/><br /> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i002' id='i002'></a> +<img src="images/i002.jpg" alt="“Empty!” murmured Dave sadly. “Empty!”—Page 217." title=""/><br /> +<span class='caption'>“Empty!” murmured Dave sadly. “Empty!”—<em>Page 217.</em></span> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>Dave Porter Series</span></p> +<p> </p> +<p><span style='font-size:1.4em;font-weight:bold;'>DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND</span></p> +<p> </p> +<p>OR</p> +<p> </p> +<p>A SCHOOLBOY’S MYSTERIOUS MISSION</p> +<p> </p> +<p>BY</p> +<p> </p> +<p>EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> +<p> </p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>Author of “Dave Porter at Oak Hall,” “Dave Porter in the South Seas,”</span></p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>“The Gun Club Boys of Lakeport,” “Old Glory Series,”</span></p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>“Pan-American Series,” etc.</span></p> +<p> </p> +<p><em>ILLUSTRATED BY H. RICHARD BOEHM</em></p> +</div> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i003' id='i003'></a> +<img src='images/i003.jpg' alt='' title=''/><br /> +</div> +<div class='center'> +<p>BOSTON</p> +<p>LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO.</p> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p>Published, March, 1912</p> +<p><span class='sc'>Copyright, 1912, by Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co.</span></p> +<p> </p> +<p><em>All Rights Reserved</em></p> +<p> </p> +<p>Dave Porter on Cave Island</p> +<p> </p> +<p>Norwood Press</p> +<p>Berwick and Smith Co.</p> +<p>Norwood, Mass.</p> +<p>U. S. A.</p> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p><span style='font-size:larger;'>PREFACE</span></p> +</div> +<p> +<span class='sc'>“Dave Porter on Cave Island”</span> is a complete +story in itself but forms the eighth volume +in a line issued under the general title of “Dave +Porter Series.” +</p> +<p> +The opening tale of this series, called “Dave +Porter at Oak Hall,” related the adventures of +a wide-awake lad at a typical boarding school +of to-day. This was followed by “Dave Porter +in the South Seas,” whither our hero had gone to +find his father, and then by “Dave Porter’s Return +to School.” +</p> +<p> +From Oak Hall, Dave journeyed to Norway, +as related in “Dave Porter in the Far North.” +On his return to this country he once more attended +school, as told of in “Dave Porter and +His Classmates.” Dave made a host of friends +and likewise a few enemies, and some of the latter +plotted to do him much harm. +</p> +<p> +When vacation came once more, Dave received +an invitation to visit a home in the far west, and +what he did on that trip has been set forth in +“Dave Porter at Star Ranch.” Then, when vacation +days were at an end, he came back to Oak +Hall, as related in the seventh volume of this +series, entitled, “Dave Porter and His Rivals.” +</p> +<p> +In the present book we find Dave again at +school. But the Christmas holidays are at hand +and the lad returns home. Here a most mysterious +and unlooked-for happening occurs, and +Dave’s great benefactor, Mr. Wadsworth, is on +the verge of ruin because of it. Dave gets a clew +to the mystery, and, with his chums, resolves to +investigate. He takes a long journey and has a +number of stirring adventures, the particulars of +which are given in the pages that follow. +</p> +<p> +When I started this line of books I trusted that +Dave might please the boys, but I did not imagine +that so many thousands of boys and girls all over +the land would clamor as they have for more +concerning the doings of my hero. I thank all +for their appreciation of my efforts to please them, +and I sincerely trust that the reading of this new +volume will be a benefit to them. +</p> +<p style='text-align:right; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0;'><span class='sc'>Edward Stratemeyer.</span></p> +<p style='text-align:right; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0;'><em>February</em> 1, 1912.</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p><span style='font-size:larger;'>CONTENTS</span></p> +</div> +<table class='c' summary=''> +<tr><td style='font-size:smaller'>CHAPTER</td><td></td><td style='font-size:smaller'>PAGE</td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>I.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The Schoolboy Chums</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chI'>1</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>II.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>A Glimpse at the Past</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chII'>16</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>III.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>What Dave Had to Tell</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chIII'>18</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>IV.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The Schoolboy Hunters</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chIV'>28</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>V.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>A Tramp Through the Snow</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chV'>38</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>VI.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Good-by to Oak Hall</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chVI'>48</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>VII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Nat Poole’s Revelation</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chVII'>58</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>VIII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>A Merry Christmas</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chVIII'>63</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>IX.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Nat Poole Gets Caught</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chIX'>78</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>X.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>What Happened at the Jewelry Works</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chX'>88</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XI.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Looking for the Robbers</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXI'>98</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The Telltale Cigarette Box</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXII'>108</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XIII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Dark Days</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXIII'>118</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XIV.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Off for the South</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXIV'>128</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XV.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Something About White Mice</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXV'>138</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XVI.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Picking up the Trail</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXVI'>147</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XVII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Meeting Old Friends</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXVII'>157</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XVIII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Off for Barbados</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXVIII'>167</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XIX.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The Missing Ship</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXIX'>177</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XX.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Landing on Cave Island</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXX'>187</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXI.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Into a Cave and Out</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXI'>197</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The Hurricane</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXII'>207</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXIII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>A Strange Discovery</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXIII'>217</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXIV.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Jasniff and Merwell</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXIV'>227</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXV.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Link Merwell’s Story</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXV'>237</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXVI.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The Column of Smoke</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXVI'>247</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXVII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Behind the Curtain of Vines</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXVII'>257</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXVIII.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>In Which the Enemy Sails Away</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXVIII'>267</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXIX.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>A Chase on the Ocean</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXIX'>277</a></td></tr> +<tr><td valign='top' style='text-align:right; padding-right:1em;'>XXX.</td><td valign='top' style='text-align:left; padding-right:3em;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Homeward Bound—Conclusion</span></td><td valign='top' style='text-align:right;'><a href='#chXXX'>287</a></td></tr> +</table> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_1'></a>1</span>DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND</h2> +<h2><a name='chI' id='chI'></a>CHAPTER I—THE SCHOOLBOY CHUMS</h2> +<p> +“Come on, fellows, if you are going! It’s a +good six-mile skate to Squirrel Island, and we’ve +got to hustle if we want to get there in time +for lunch.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait till I fix my right skate, Dave,” returned +Phil Lawrence. “I don’t want to lose it on the +way.” +</p> +<p> +“Say, that puts me in mind of a story,” came +from another of the group of schoolboys who +were adjusting their skates. “Once a man asked +for a pair of skates for——” +</p> +<p> +“Stow it, Shadow!” interrupted Dave Porter. +“We haven’t any time now to listen to stories. +You can tell them while we are resting up at the +island.” +</p> +<p> +“Shadow can tell stories while we put away +the lunch,” observed Roger Morr, with a grin. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_2'></a>2</span> +</p> +<p> +“Not much!” cried the lad mentioned. “I +guess that skate will make me as hungry as anybody—and +the stories will keep.” +</p> +<p> +“I thought Ben Basswood was going, too?” +came from another of the schoolboys. +</p> +<p> +“Here he comes, Lazy,” answered Dave, and +as he spoke he pointed to a path across the snow-covered +campus, along which another boy was hurrying, +skates in hand. +</p> +<p> +“Co-couldn’t get here an-any so-sooner!” +panted Ben, as he dropped on a bench to adjust +his skates. “Old Haskers made me do some +extra work in Latin! Wow, but don’t I love that +man!” +</p> +<p> +“We all do,” answered Phil. “We are going +to get up a testimonial to him. A silver-mounted——” +</p> +<p> +“Slice of punk, with an ancient lemon on top,” +finished Dave. “It’s just what he’s been waiting +for.” And at this sally there was a general laugh. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’m ready,” went on Phil, as he arose +from the bench. “Say, but isn’t it just a glorious +day for the outing?” he added, casting his eyes +around and drawing in a deep breath of the pure, +cold air. +</p> +<p> +“It couldn’t be better, Phil,” answered Dave. +“And we ought to have a fine time at the island, +bringing down rabbits and squirrels. Old Jerry +Lusk told me that hunting was never better.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_3'></a>3</span> +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter with having some of the +rabbits and squirrels for lunch?” asked Sam Day. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps we can cook them, Sam,” returned +Dave. “But we had better depend on the lunch +hamper for something to eat. By the way, we’ll +have to take turns carrying the hamper. It is +rather heavy.” +</p> +<p> +“Chip Macklin and I are going to carry it +first,” said a tall, strong youth named Gus Plum. +“It’s not so very heavy, although it is filled with +good things.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t lose it, on your life!” cried Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Lose it!” echoed Roger Morr. “Banish the +thought! We’ll form a guard around Gus and +Chip, so they can’t get away with it on the sly.” +</p> +<p> +“Not so much as a doughnut must be eaten +until we reach the island and start a campfire,” +said Dave. “Those are orders from headquarters,” +he added, with a grand flourish. +</p> +<p> +“Orders accepted, admiral!” cried Gus, and +made a bow so profound that his skates went +from under him, sending him to his knees. This +caused a wild laugh, and the powerfully-built +youth got up in a hurry, looking rather sheepish. +</p> +<p> +“I’m ready now,” said Ben, as he left the +bench and settled his skating cap on his head. +“Come on, let’s get away before old Haskers +calls us back for something or other. He just +loves to spoil a fellow’s outing.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_4'></a>4</span> +</p> +<p> +“There he is at one of the windows!” cried +Roger, pointing back to the school building. “I +really believe he is beckoning to us!” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t look,” cautioned Dave. “He’ll want +us to go back, to put away some books, or clean +our desks, or something. Doctor Clay said we +could take this outing, and I’m not going to let +any teacher spoil it. Forward!” and away from +the shore he skated, with his chums around him. +They had scarcely covered a distance of a dozen +yards when a window was thrown up hastily, and +Job Haskers thrust his head through the opening. +</p> +<p> +“Boys! boys!” called out the Oak Hall teacher. +“Wait a minute! I want to know where you are +going, and if all of you have finished studying.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t look back, and don’t answer!” said +Roger, in a hoarse whisper. +</p> +<p> +“Give the school yell!” suggested Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Just the thing!” returned Sam Day. “Now +then, all together!” And an instant later through +the clear, wintry air, rang the well-known Oak +Hall slogan: +</p> +<p> + “Baseball!<br /> + Football!<br /> + Oak Hall<br /> + Has the call!<br /> + Biff! Boom! Bang! Whoop!”<br /> +</p> +<p> +Three times the boys gave the cry, and by that +time they had skated far up the river and out of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_5'></a>5</span> +sight of the window at which the teacher was +standing. Job Haskers looked after them glumly, +and then closed the window with a bang. +</p> +<p> +“They must have heard me—I don’t see how +they could help it,” he muttered to himself. +“Such disrespect! I’ll make them toe the mark +for it when they get back! Bah! Doctor Clay +is altogether too easy with the boys. If I were +running this school I’d make them mind!” And +the teacher shut his teeth grimly. He was a +man who thought that the boys ought to spend +all their time in studying. The hours devoted to +outdoor exercise he considered practically wasted. +He was too short-sighted to realize that, in order +to have a perfectly sound mind, one must likewise +have a sound body. +</p> +<p> +“He’ll have it in for us when we get back,” +murmured Chip Macklin. “My! how he does +love to stop a fellow’s fun!” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t worry,” chimed in Roger. “Sufficient +unto the hour is the lecture thereof. Let us enjoy +this outing while it lasts, and let come what will +when we get back.” +</p> +<p> +“Which puts me in mind of another story,” +broke in Shadow Hamilton. “A fellow used to +eat too much, and he had to take his medicine +regularly, to keep from getting indigestion. So +once—wow!” And Shadow broke off short, for +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_6'></a>6</span> +Phil had suddenly put out his foot, sending the +story-teller of Oak Hall sprawling. +</p> +<p> +“So he had to take his medicine,” repeated +Dave, gravely. +</p> +<p> +“Did the medicine agree with him?” asked +Roger, innocently. +</p> +<p> +“He took it lying down, didn’t he?” questioned +Gus. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll ‘medicine’ you!” roared Shadow, as he +scrambled to his feet. Then he made a wild dash +after the youth who had tripped him up, but Phil +had skated on ahead and he took good care that +Shadow did not catch him. “I won’t tell you another +story for a year!” the story-teller growled, +after the chase was at an end. +</p> +<p> +“Phew! Shadow says he is going to reform!” +murmured Ben. +</p> +<p> +“Let it pass, Shadow!” cried Dave, not wishing +the story-teller to take the matter too seriously. +“You can tell all the stories you please around +the campfire. But just now let us push on as fast +as we can. I want a chance to do some rabbit +and squirrel hunting, and you know we’ve got to +be back on time, or we’ll have trouble with Doctor +Clay as well as with old Haskers.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and I want to take some pictures before +it gets too dark,” said Sam, who had his camera +along. +</p> +<p> +“Do you know what Horsehair told me?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_7'></a>7</span> +came from Roger. “He said we were fixing for +another snowstorm.” +</p> +<p> +“It doesn’t look so now,” returned Dave. +“But Horsehair generally hits it on the weather, +so maybe we’ll catch it before we get back.” +</p> +<p> +“Wonder if we’ll meet any of the Rockville +cadets?” remarked Phil, as he and Dave forged +to the front, they knowing the way up the river +better than did some of the others. +</p> +<p> +“It is possible, Phil. All of them have guns, +and I should think they would like to go hunting.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess most of their firearms are rifles, not +fowling-pieces.” +</p> +<p> +“Not more than half—I learned that from +Mallory, when we played hockey. He said they +had some shotguns just for hunting and camping out +purposes.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, those chaps have a holiday to-day, the +same as we have, so some of them may be up +around Squirrel Island. But I’d rather not meet +them,” and Dave’s face became serious. +</p> +<p> +“Humph! If those military academy fellows +try to play any tricks on us I reckon we can give +’em as good as they send,” growled Phil. +</p> +<p> +“To be sure we can, Phil. But I’d rather keep +out of trouble to-day and have some good, clean +sport. I haven’t been hunting this season and I’m +just itching to draw a bead on a fat bunny, or +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_8'></a>8</span> +squirrel, or some partridges. You know, I used +to go hunting in the woods around Crumville, +when I was home.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, of course! Didn’t Roger and I go +along once? But we didn’t get much that trip, +although we did get into a lively row with Nat +Poole.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, yes, I remember now. I wish——” +And then Dave Porter came to a sudden +silence. +</p> +<p> +“What is it, Dave?” and Phil looked closely +at his chum. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, not much,” was the evasive answer. +</p> +<p> +“But I know something is worrying you,” insisted +the shipowner’s son. “I’ve noticed it for +several days, and Roger noticed it, too.” +</p> +<p> +“Roger?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes. He came to me yesterday and said that +he was sure you had something on your mind. +Now, maybe it is none of our business, Dave. +But if I and Roger can help you in any way, you +know we’ll be only too glad to do it.” Phil +spoke in a low but earnest voice. +</p> +<p> +“Hi, what’s doing in the front rank?” cried +a cheery voice at this juncture, and Roger Morr +skated swiftly up beside Dave and Phil. +</p> +<p> +“I’m glad you came,” said Phil, and he looked +at the senator’s son in a peculiar fashion. “I +was just speaking to Dave about how we had +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_9'></a>9</span> +noticed something was wrong, and how we were +willing to help him, if he needed us.” +</p> +<p> +“Sure, we’ll help you every time, Dave; you +know that,” returned Roger, quickly. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know that I need any help,” answered +Dave, slowly. “The fact of the matter is, I don’t +know what can be done.” +</p> +<p> +“Then something is wrong?” cried both of his +chums. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, if you must know. I was going to keep +it to myself, for I didn’t think it would do any +good to tell about it. I’ll tell you, but I don’t want +it to go any further, unless it becomes necessary +to speak.” +</p> +<p> +“Before you tell us, let me make a guess about +this,” said Phil. “Some of your old enemies are +trying to make trouble for you, is that right?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“And those enemies are Link Merwell and +Nick Jasniff,” cried Roger. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, again,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p> +“What are they up to now, Dave?” The +eager question came from Phil. +</p> +<p> +“They are up to a number of things,” was the +grave response of Dave Porter. “They are evidently +going to do their best to disgrace my +family and myself, and ruin us.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_10'></a>10</span><a name='chII' id='chII'></a>CHAPTER II—A GLIMPSE AT THE PAST</h2> +<p> +“Disgrace you and ruin you!” cried Roger, +in amazement. +</p> +<p> +“That is what it looks like,” answered Dave. +“I can account for their actions in no other way.” +</p> +<p> +“Tell us just what is going on,” urged Phil. +“You know you can trust us to keep it a secret.” +</p> +<p> +“I will tell you everything,” answered Dave. +“But first let us skate up a little faster, so that +the others won’t catch a word of what is said.” +And with that he struck out more rapidly than +ever, and his two chums did likewise. +</p> +<p> +To those who have read the former volumes +of this series, Dave Porter will need no introduction. +For the benefit of others let me state +that my hero had had a varied career, starting +when he was but a child of a few years. At that +time he had been found wandering along the railroad +tracks near the town of Crumville. As nobody +claimed him, he was placed in a local poorhouse +and later bound out to a broken-down college +professor, Caspar Potts, who had taken up +farming for his health. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_11'></a>11</span> +</p> +<p> +Professor Potts was in the grasp of a miserly +money-lender of Crumville named Aaron Poole, +who had a son Nat, who could not get along at +all with Dave. Mr. Poole was about to foreclose +a mortgage on the professor’s place and sell him +out when something occurred that was the means +of changing the whole course of the professor’s +own life and that of the youth who lived with him. +</p> +<p> +On the outskirts of Crumville lived Mr. Oliver +Wadsworth, a wealthy manufacturer, with his wife +and daughter Jessie. One day the gasoline tank +of an automobile took fire and little Jessie was in +danger of being burned to death. Dave rushed +to her assistance and beat out the flames, and thus +saved her. For this Mr. Wadsworth was very +grateful. He made some inquiries concerning +Caspar Potts and Dave, and learning that Professor +Potts had been one of his former college +instructors, he made the old gentleman come and +live with him. +</p> +<p> +“Dave shall go to boarding school and get a +good education,” said Mr. Wadsworth. And how +Dave went has been told in detail in the first volume +of this series, entitled “Dave Porter at Oak +Hall.” With Dave went Ben Basswood, his one +boy friend in Crumville. +</p> +<p> +At Oak Hall, a fine seat of learning, located on +the Leming River, in one of our eastern states, +Dave made a number of warm friends, including +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_12'></a>12</span> +Phil Lawrence, the son of a rich shipowner; Roger +Morr, whose father was a United States senator; +Maurice Hamilton, usually called Shadow, who +was noted for his sleep-walking and the stories he +loved to tell; Sam Day, known throughout the +school as Lazy, why nobody could tell, since Sam +at times was unusually active, and a score of others, +some of whom have already been introduced. He +also made, in those days, one enemy, Gus Plum. +But Gus had since reformed, and was now as good +a friend as any of the rest. +</p> +<p> +What troubled Dave most of all in those days +was the question of his identity. How he started +to find out who he was has been related in my +second volume, called “Dave Porter in the South +Seas.” There he did not meet his father, as he +had hoped, but he did meet his uncle, Dunston +Porter, and learned much concerning his father, +David Breslow Porter, and also his sister Laura, +then traveling in Europe. +</p> +<p> +When Dave came back to Oak Hall, as related +in “Dave Porter’s Return to School,” he met +many of his friends and succeeded in making himself +more popular than ever. But some lads were +jealous of our hero’s success, and two of them, +Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell, did what they +could to get Dave into trouble, being aided in part +by Nat Poole, the son of the miserly money-lender, +who had followed Dave to the school. The plots +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_13'></a>13</span> +against Dave were exposed, and in sheer fright +Nick Jasniff ran away and went to Europe. +</p> +<p> +Dave had been expecting right along to meet +his father and his sister, and when they did not +return to this country, and did not send word, he +grew anxious, and started out to find them, as +related in detail in “Dave Porter in the Far +North.” It was in Norway that Dave first +saw his parent, a meeting as strange as it was +affecting. +</p> +<p> +After his trip to the Land of the Midnight +Sun, our hero returned once again to school, as +related in “Dave Porter and His Classmates.” +Jasniff had not returned, but Link Merwell was +still at hand, and likewise the lordly Nat Poole, +and they did what they could to make our hero’s +life miserable. In the end Merwell did something +that was particularly despicable and this caused +Dave to take the law into his own hands and he +gave the bully the thrashing that he well deserved. +Merwell wanted to retaliate in some manner, but +in the midst of his plotting, word of his wrongdoings +reached the head of the school and he was +ordered to pack up and leave, which he did in great +rage. +</p> +<p> +While Dave was off hunting for his father and +his sister, Laura Porter had been visiting her +friend, Belle Endicott, at Mr. Endicott’s ranch +in the far west. Belle was anxious to meet her +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_14'></a>14</span> +girl chum’s newly-found brother, and this led to a +visit to the ranch, as told of in “Dave Porter at +Star Ranch.” Here Dave again met Link Merwell, +and proved that the latter had been aiding +some horse-thieves in their wicked work. Mr. +Merwell had to settle a heavy bill because of his +son’s actions, and then, for a short space of time, +Link disappeared. +</p> +<p> +With the coming of fall, Dave and his chums +returned to Oak Hall, as related in the volume +preceding this, called “Dave Porter and His +Rivals.” As his chief enemies had left the school, +he did not anticipate much trouble, yet trouble came +in a manner somewhat out of the ordinary. Nat +Poole joined a group of students who had come +to Oak Hall from another school, and the crowd +did what it could to get Dave and his friends off +the football eleven. Then, when Dave had once +more fought his way to the front, came word that +Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell were again “after +his scalp,” as Roger expressed it. Jasniff and +Merwell were then attending a rival institution of +learning known as Rockville Military Academy. +</p> +<p> +“Be careful, or they’ll play you some dirty +trick, Dave,” said Phil, warningly. +</p> +<p> +“I’ve got my eyes open,” replied Dave. +</p> +<p> +In a rather unusual manner Dave had become +acquainted with a man named Hooker Montgomery, +a fake doctor, who traveled around the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_15'></a>15</span> +country selling medicines that he made himself. +This man asked Dave to call on him, and when the +youth did so he was suddenly seized from behind, +made a prisoner, and carried off in a sleigh and +then in an automobile. At first he did not know +what to make of it, but at last learned that he was +being held, for some purpose, by Merwell, Jasniff, +Montgomery, and the fourth man, a mere tool. +He watched his chance, and, at length, escaped, +much to his enemies’ chagrin. +</p> +<p> +“Have them all arrested,” was the advice of +Dave’s chums, but this was not easy, since all of +the evil-doers had disappeared. Then, one day, +while on a sleigh-ride to a distant town, the boys +fell in with Hooker Montgomery. The fake doctor +was practically “down and out,” as he himself +expressed it, and said he would do anything for +Dave, provided he was not prosecuted. +</p> +<p> +“It was all a plot gotten up by those two, Jasniff +and Merwell,” said Hooker Montgomery. +“They promised me some money if I would help +them, but I never got a cent.” Then he said that +Jasniff and Merwell were in town. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll locate them,” said Dave, but this was +not accomplished until later, when the pair of +rascals were encountered at a railroad office. Our +hero and his chums tried to stop Jasniff and Merwell, +but the rascals rushed through a crowd and +got aboard a train; and that was the last seen of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_16'></a>16</span> +them for the time being. The boys might have +gone after the pair, but they had an important +hockey game to play, and when they administered +a stinging defeat to Oak Hall’s ancient rival, +Rockville Academy, Dave, for the time being, forgot +that he had an enemy in the world. +</p> +<p> +“Two weeks more of the grind, boys!” cried +Dave, on the following Monday. “And then +home for the holidays.” +</p> +<p> +“Right you are,” answered Phil. “But, oh, +those two weeks!” +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday one of Dave’s chums celebrated +his birthday, and among the presents received was +a very fine double-barreled shotgun. This lad +immediately wanted to go hunting; and the result +was that the boys applied to Doctor Clay for permission +to go to Squirrel Island, up the river, on +a hunting expedition, the following Saturday. +There was just sufficient snow on the ground to +make rabbit and squirrel tracking good, and the +boys were told that they might remain away all +day. Six of them had guns and two had revolvers, +and they carried in addition a good-sized hamper +of provisions for lunch. +</p> +<p> +“Now, boys, be careful and don’t shoot yourselves +or anybody else,” said Doctor Clay, with a +smile, when Dave, Roger, and Phil left the school +building. “Don’t fire at anything until you are +certain of what it is. Every hunting season somebody +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_17'></a>17</span> +is killed through the sheer carelessness of +somebody else.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll be careful,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Do you think you’ll get any game?” And +the doctor continued to smile. +</p> +<p> +“I hope to bring you at least a brace of rabbits +or squirrels, Doctor.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I wish you luck. And don’t stay too +late,” returned the head of the school, and then +with a pleasant nod he dismissed them. +</p> +<p> +Dave, Roger, and Phil were the first at the place +of meeting, but they were quickly joined by all +the others except Ben. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll tell you what, Phil,” said the senator’s son, +when he had a chance to talk to Phil alone. +“Something is wrong with Dave. He isn’t himself +at all. Can’t you see it?” +</p> +<p> +“Of course I can, Roger,” was the reply of the +shipowner’s son. “If I get a chance to speak to +him about it, I am going to do so. But I’ve got +to be careful—I don’t want to hurt his feelings.” +</p> +<p> +“When you do speak, give me the sign, so I +can hear what he has to say, too,” went on Roger, +and to this Phil agreed. Then came the start up +the river, and a little later Phil broached the subject, +and Dave made the dismaying announcement +that Jasniff and Merwell were doing their best +to bring disgrace to himself and his family and +ruin them. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_18'></a>18</span><a name='chIII' id='chIII'></a>CHAPTER III—WHAT DAVE HAD TO TELL</h2> +<p> +“It’s rather a long story, and I scarcely know +how to begin,” said Dave, after he, Phil, and +Roger had skated ahead and to the right, where +the others were not likely to overhear the conversation. +“But, to begin with, Jasniff and Merwell +have been to Crumville since they left here +in such a hurry, and—I have some reason to believe—they +have been here in town, too.” +</p> +<p> +“Here!” cried the shipowner’s son. +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“Why didn’t you tell us of this before?” asked +Roger. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t know of it until lately, and I didn’t +want to worry you over my private affairs.” +</p> +<p> +“But what have they done?” demanded Phil, +impatiently. +</p> +<p> +“As I said before, Phil, I hardly know how +to begin to tell you. But to plunge right in. In +the first place, when they were in Crumville they +followed my sister Laura and Jessie Wadsworth +to a concert by a college glee club. They forced +their attentions on the two girls, and gave outsiders +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_19'></a>19</span> +an impression that they had come as escorts. +The girls were so upset over it that Laura wrote +me that Jessie was actually sick. Two days after +that, when the girls were out walking one evening, +Jasniff and Merwell followed them, and right on +the main street, near the post-office, they came up +and commenced to talk and Merwell said to Laura, +loud enough for half a dozen folks to hear: +’You’ve got to keep your word—you can’t go back +on us like that.’ And Jasniff added: ‘Yes, you +girls were glad enough to let us give you a good +time before, down at the Rainbow.’ The Rainbow +is a ten-cent moving-picture place, and a low +one at that. Of course there wasn’t a word of +truth in it, but Merwell and Jasniff gave folks the +impression that Laura and Jessie had been going +out with them, and you know how such reports +spread in a small town like Crumville.” +</p> +<p> +“The hounds!” exclaimed the senator’s son, +wrathfully. “They should have been run out of +town!” +</p> +<p> +“Why didn’t the girls tell your folks?” asked +Phil. +</p> +<p> +“They did, as soon as they got home, and my +father, Uncle Dunston, and Mr. Wadsworth went +out to look for Merwell and Jasniff, but they were +not to be found. But that was only the beginning. +The next day an old lady came to the house with +a letter she had picked up in the post-office. It +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_20'></a>20</span> +was addressed to Link Merwell and had my sister’s +name signed to it, and stated that she was sorry +they had quarreled and wouldn’t he please forgive +her and take her to the dance as promised? Of +course the whole thing was a forgery, and it was +dropped in the post-office just to make talk. I +suppose Merwell thought some chatterbox would +pick it up and spread the news.” +</p> +<p> +“But what is his game?” queried the shipowner’s +son. “I don’t see how he is going to +gain anything by such actions.” +</p> +<p> +“He wants to ruin our reputations, just as he +and Jasniff have ruined their own. But I haven’t +told you all yet. A day later my father heard of +another letter being found, in which Laura and +Jessie promised to go off on a joy-ride in an auto +with Merwell and Jasniff. Then Merwell and Jasniff +appeared in Crumville with a stunning touring +car, and they had two girls with them, loudly +dressed and heavily veiled, and the whole four +tooted horns, and sang, and behaved in anything +but a becoming fashion. A good many folks +thought the veiled girls must be Laura and Jessie, +and you can imagine how my sister and her friend +felt when they heard of it.” +</p> +<p> +“Those chaps ought to be arrested,” murmured +Phil. +</p> +<p> +“And tarred and feathered,” added the senator’s +son. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_21'></a>21</span> +</p> +<p> +“After that, my father and Mr. Wadsworth +got after them so sharply that they left Crumville. +That was only a few days ago. The very next +day came a lot of goods to the house, delivered by +a large city department store. The folks hadn’t +ordered the goods and didn’t know what to make +of it. They investigated, and learned that a young +woman calling herself Laura Porter had selected +the things and had them sent out. Then came +other goods for Mr. Wadsworth, said to have +been bought by Jessie. It was an awful mix-up, +and it hasn’t been straightened out yet.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s the limit!” muttered the senator’s son. +“I’ll wager your dad and Mr. Wadsworth would +like to wring those chaps’ necks!” +</p> +<p> +“Wait, you haven’t heard it all yet,” went on +Dave, with a sickly smile. “Yesterday I received +a notice from the express company here to call +for a package on which eighteen dollars was due. +I was expecting some things that I am going to +take home for Christmas presents, although they +were to come to fifteen dollars and a half. I paid +for the package, thinking I had made a mistake +in footing up my purchases, and when I got it +home I found out it wasn’t what I had bought +at all, but a lot of junk nobody can use. Then +my own package came in by the next express, and, +of course, I had to pay again. I sent a telegram +to the city about the first package and they answered +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_22'></a>22</span> +that David Porter had purchased the same +and had it sent C. O. D. Then two other packages +came, one calling for six dollars and the +other for twenty-four dollars. But I refused to +have anything to do with them, and said I could +easily prove that I hadn’t been to the city to +order them. But it is going to cause a lot of +trouble.” +</p> +<p> +“I believe you,” returned the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“Anything more, Dave?” queried Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Yes. Last night, if you will remember, an +old man came to see me. He said that two young +men had sent him to me, saying that we wanted +a man in Crumville to take care of a certain +young lady who was slightly out of her mind. He +said he had once worked in an asylum and knew +he could give satisfaction, even if he was getting +old. It was another of Merwell and Jasniff’s +mean tricks, and I had quite a time explaining to +the old man and getting him to go away. He +said he had spent two dollars and a quarter in +car-fare to come to see me, and I felt so sorry +for him that I gave him five dollars to help him +along.” +</p> +<p> +“Dave, where is this going to end?” cried +Roger. +</p> +<p> +“That is just what I want to know,” returned +Dave. “Perhaps by the time we get back to +Oak Hall there will be more packages waiting +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_23'></a>23</span> +for me—or potatoes, or a horse, or something +like that.” +</p> +<p> +“You could have Merwell and Jasniff arrested +for this,” was Phil’s comment. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, if I could catch them. But they know +enough to keep shady. But that isn’t all. Yesterday +I got a letter, or rather a note. It was +postmarked from Rocky Run, about fifteen miles +from here. Inside of the envelope was a card +on which was written: ‘We’ll never let up until +we have ruined you.’” +</p> +<p> +“Was it signed?” asked the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, no. But I am sure it came from Merwell +and Jasniff.” +</p> +<p> +“They are certainly sore,” was Phil’s comment. +</p> +<p> +“Traveling around must cost them money. +Where do they get the cash?” asked Roger. +</p> +<p> +“From Mr. Merwell most likely,” answered +Dave. “He got a good price when he sold his +ranch, and he seldom denies Link anything.” +</p> +<p> +“Have you any idea who the girls were who +were in the auto in Crumville?” +</p> +<p> +“Not exactly, but I think they must have been +some of the girls Nat Poole goes with. When +Jasniff and Merwell were there with Nat, I saw +the whole crowd out with some girls from the +cotton mills. They were nice enough girls in their +way, but they were very boisterous and not the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_24'></a>24</span> +kind Laura and Jessie care to pick for company. +I suppose those girls played their part thinking +it was nothing but a good joke. One had a hat +on with feathers such as Jessie wears and the +other wore a coat and veil like Laura’s. I guess +a good many who saw them riding in the auto +and cutting up like wild Indians thought they +were Laura and Jessie.” And Dave heaved a +deep sigh. +</p> +<p> +“And what are you going to do, Dave?” +asked Phil, after a short silence, during which the +three chums continued to skate in advance of +their friends. +</p> +<p> +“What can I do? We are trying to locate the +rascals, and when we do we’ll make them stop. +But in the meantime——” +</p> +<p> +“They may cause you no end of trouble,” finished +the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t care so much for myself as I do for +Laura and Jessie, and for Mr. and Mrs. Wadsworth. +I hate to see them suffer because of my +trouble with those rascals. I don’t see why Merwell +and Jasniff can’t fight it out with me alone.” +</p> +<p> +“You forget one thing, Dave,” returned Phil. +“Merwell was once sweet on your sister. I suppose +it made him furious to be turned down by +her.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, then, why does he annoy Jessie? She +never harmed him, or Jasniff either.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_25'></a>25</span> +</p> +<p> +“Huh! As if you didn’t know why!” replied +Roger, with something like a chuckle. “Don’t +they both know that Jessie is the very apple of +your eye, and that anything that brings trouble +to her will cut you to the heart? Of course they +know that, Dave, and you can rest assured that +they will try to hurt you quite as much through +Jessie as they’ll try to hurt you direct.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps, Roger. If I was sure——” +</p> +<p> +“Low bridge!” shouted Phil at that instant, +as a bend of the river was gained, and then the +whole crowd of students swept under the lowhanging +branches of a number of trees. Those +ahead had to go slowly and pick the way with +care. +</p> +<p> +“How much farther have we to go?” called +out Sam Day. +</p> +<p> +“Only a couple of miles,” replied Dave. He +turned to Phil and Roger. “That’s about all,” +he whispered. “Keep it to yourselves.” +</p> +<p> +“We will,” they replied. +</p> +<p> +“Somebody else going to carry this hamper?” +cried Chip Macklin. “It’s getting rather +heavy.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll carry one end,” said Ben Basswood. +</p> +<p> +“And I’ll take the other,” added Phil. “Dave, +you and Roger go ahead and bring down a couple +of deer, and a bear, and one or two tigers, or +something like that,” he continued, with a grin, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_26'></a>26</span> +for he wanted to get Dave’s mind off of his +troubles. +</p> +<p> +“Nothing but an elephant for mine,” answered +Dave, with a forced laugh. “I don’t want to +waste my powder.” +</p> +<p> +“As the society belle said when she left the +mark of her cheek on the gent’s shoulder,” remarked +Buster Beggs, the fat lad of the group. +</p> +<p> +“Say, that puts me in mind of another story,” +came from Shadow. “Once on a time a Dutchman +heard that a certain lady was a society belle. +He wanted to tell his friend about it, but he +couldn’t think of the right word. ‘Ach, she is +von great lady,’ he said. ‘She is a society ding-dong!’” +</p> +<p> +“Wow!” +</p> +<p> +“There’s a ringer for Shadow!” +</p> +<p> +“Shadow, you want to frame that joke and +hang it in the woodshed.” +</p> +<p> +“Put it down in moth-balls until next summer, +Shadow.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, say, speaking about moth-balls puts me +in mind of another story. A man——” +</p> +<p> +“Was it a young man, Shadow?” asked Dave, +calmly. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe it was a very old man,” suggested +Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Was he clean-shaven or did he have a +beard?” queried Roger. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_27'></a>27</span> +</p> +<p> +“Never mind if he was young or old, or clean-shaven +or not,” cried the story-teller. “This +man——” +</p> +<p> +“Was he an American or a foreigner?” demanded +Gus Plum. “That is something we have +simply got to know.” +</p> +<p> +“And if he was knock-kneed,” put in Sam. “I +hate love stories about knock-kneed men. They +aren’t a bit romantic.” +</p> +<p> +“Who said anything about a love story about +a knock-kneed man?” burst out Shadow. “I +said——” +</p> +<p> +But what Shadow was going to say was drowned +out in the sudden report of a shotgun,—a report +so close at hand that it made nearly every student +present stop in alarm. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_28'></a>28</span><a name='chIV' id='chIV'></a>CHAPTER IV—THE SCHOOLBOY HUNTERS</h2> +<p> +“Dave, what did you shoot at?” +</p> +<p> +It was Phil who asked the question, for he +had been the only one to see Dave raise his shotgun, +take quick aim, and fire into the brushwood +lining the river at that point. +</p> +<p> +“I shot at a rabbit, and I think I hit him,” +was the reply. “I’ll soon know.” And Dave +skated toward the shore, less than twenty yards +away. He poked into the bushes with the barrel +of his gun and soon brought forth a fat, white +rabbit which he held up with satisfaction. +</p> +<p> +“Hurrah!” cried the senator’s son. “First +prize goes to Dave! He’s a fine one, too,” he +added, as the students gathered around to inspect +the game. +</p> +<p> +“Thought you said you wouldn’t shoot anything +less than an elephant,” grunted Buster. +</p> +<p> +“The elephant will come later,” answered +Dave, with a smile. +</p> +<p> +“I’d like to get a couple like that,” said Gus +Plum, wistfully. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe that will be the total for the day,” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_29'></a>29</span> +was Sam’s comment. He had gone wild-turkey +shooting once and gotten a shot at the start and +then nothing more, so he was inclined to be skeptical. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we’ll get more, if we are careful and +keep our eyes open,” declared Dave. “I saw the +track of the rabbit in the snow yonder and that +made me look for him.” +</p> +<p> +Dave’s success put all the students on the alert, +and they spread out on either side of the stream, +eager to sight more game. +</p> +<p> +Less than two minutes later came the crack of +Gus Plum’s shotgun, followed almost immediately +by a shot from Buster Beggs’ pistol. Then a +gray rabbit went scampering across the river in +front of the boys and several fired simultaneously. +</p> +<p> +“I got him! I got him!” shouted Gus, and +ran to the shore, to bring out a medium-sized +rabbit. +</p> +<p> +“And we’ve got another!” cried Sam. “But +I don’t know whether Shadow, Ben, or I killed +him.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess we all had a hand in it,” said Ben. +“We all fired at about the same time.” +</p> +<p> +“What did you get, Buster?” questioned Chip +Macklin. +</p> +<p> +“I—I guess I didn’t get anything,” faltered +the fat youth. “I thought I saw a squirrel, but +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_30'></a>30</span> +I see now that it is only a tree root sticking out +of the snow.” +</p> +<p> +“Great Scott, Buster! Don’t shoot down the +trees!” cried Phil, in mock dismay. “They +might fall on us, you know!” And a laugh +arose at the would-be hunter’s expense. +</p> +<p> +On the students skated, and before long reached +a point where the river was parted by a long, +narrow strip of land known as Squirrel Island, +because squirrels were supposed to abound +there. +</p> +<p> +As they reached the lower end of the island +Dave held up his hand as a warning. +</p> +<p> +“I think I saw some partridges ahead,” he said, +in a low voice. “If they are there we don’t want +to disturb them. Put down the hamper and take +off your skates, and we’ll try to bag them.” +</p> +<p> +His chums were not slow in complying with +his commands, and soon the crowd was making +its way toward the center of the island, where +grew a dense clump of cedars. They had to work +their way through the brushwood. +</p> +<p> +“Ouch!” exclaimed Shadow, presently. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the trouble?” whispered Roger. +</p> +<p> +“Scratched my hand on a bramble bush,” was +the reply. “But it isn’t much.” +</p> +<p> +“Be careful of your guns,” cautioned Dave. +“Don’t let a trigger get caught in a bush or you +may have an accident.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_31'></a>31</span> +</p> +<p> +“There they are!” cried Ben, in a strained +voice. “My, what a lot of ’em!” +</p> +<p> +He pointed ahead, and to one side of the tall +cedars they saw a covey of partridges, at least +twenty in number, resting on the ground. +</p> +<p> +“All together!” said Dave, in a low, steady +voice. “Fire as you stand, those on the right to +the right, those on the left to the left, and those +in the center for the middle of the flock. I’ll +count. Ready? One, two, three!” +</p> +<p> +Crack! bang! crack! bang! went the shotguns +and pistols. Then came a rushing, rattling, roaring +sound, and up into the air went what was left +of the covey, one partridge, being badly wounded, +flying in a circle and then directly for Roger’s +head. He struck it with his gun barrel and then +caught it in his hands, quickly putting it out of +its misery. The other boys continued to bang +away, but soon the escaping game was beyond their +reach. +</p> +<p> +“A pretty good haul!” cried Dave, as he and +his chums moved forward. “Three here and the +one Roger has makes four. Boys, we won’t go +back empty-handed.” +</p> +<p> +“Who hit and who missed?” questioned Sam. +</p> +<p> +“That would be a hard question to answer,” +returned Phil. “Better let the credit go to the +whole crowd,” and so it was decided. +</p> +<p> +“Well, there isn’t much use in looking for +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_32'></a>32</span> +any more game around here,” said Dave. “Those +volleys of shots will make them lay low for some +time.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s go into camp and get lunch,” suggested +Buster. “I’m as hungry as a bear.” +</p> +<p> +“Were you ever anything else?” questioned +Ben, with a grin, for the stout youth’s constant +desire to eat was well known. +</p> +<p> +They tramped to the south shore of the island, +and there, in a nook that was sheltered from the +north wind, they went into temporary camp, cutting +down some brushwood and heavier fuel and +building a fire. Over the flames they arranged a +stick, from which they hung a kettle filled with +water obtained by chopping a hole through the +ice of the river. +</p> +<p> +“Now, when the water boils, we can have some +coffee,” said Roger, who was getting out the tin +cups. “And we can roast those potatoes while +the water boils,” he added. +</p> +<p> +“What about some rabbit pot-pie, or roast +partridge?” asked Buster. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, let us take all the game back to the +school!” exclaimed Ben. “Just to show the fellows +what we got, you know.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s the talk!” cried Gus. “If we don’t, +maybe they won’t believe we were so lucky.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, let us take it all back,” chimed in Chip +Macklin. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_33'></a>33</span> +</p> +<p> +All but Buster were willing to keep the game. +He heaved a deep sigh. +</p> +<p> +“All right, if we must,” he said mournfully. +“But it makes my mouth water, just the same!” +And he eyed the plump rabbits and fat partridges +wistfully. +</p> +<p> +Inside of half an hour the lunch was under +way. Around the roaring campfire sat the students, +some on convenient rocks and others on a +fallen tree that chanced to be handy. They had +brought with them several kinds of sandwiches, +besides hard-boiled eggs, crackers, cheese, some +cake, and the coffee, with a small bottle of cream +and some sugar. They also had some potatoes +for roasting, and though these got partly burned, +all declared them “fine” or “elegant,”—which +shows what outdoor air will do for one’s appetite. +</p> +<p> +They took their time, and during the meal +Shadow was allowed to tell as many stories as +he pleased, much to his satisfaction. It was Dave +who was the first to get up. +</p> +<p> +“Might as well be moving,” he said, after consulting +his watch. “We’ll have to start on the +return inside of two hours, and that won’t give +us much time for hunting.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait, I want just one more picture!” cried +Sam, who had been busy before with his camera. +“Now all look as happy as if to-morrow were +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_34'></a>34</span> +Christmas!” And as the others grinned over the +joke, click! went the shutter of the box, and the +picture was snapped. +</p> +<p> +“Now, Sam, let me take you, with a gun in one +hand and the partridges in the other!” cried +Dave. “If it turns out well, we can have it enlarged +for our dormitory.” And a minute later +another picture was added to the roll of films. +</p> +<p> +“Why not leave the things here and come back +for them?” suggested Roger. “No use in toting +the hamper and game everywhere.” +</p> +<p> +“We can hang the game in a tree,” added Ben. +</p> +<p> +All agreed to this, and so the hamper and the +game were hung up on the limbs of a near-by walnut +tree along with their skates and some other +things. Then the fire was kicked out, so that it +might not start a conflagration in the woods, and +the students prepared to continue their hunt. +</p> +<p> +“I guess we may as well tramp to the upper +end of the island first,” said Dave, in answer to +a question from his companions. “Then, if we +have time, we can beat up one shore and then +the other. By that time it will be getting dark +and time to turn back to the Hall.” +</p> +<p> +“Say, wait a minute!” cried Ben, suddenly. +</p> +<p> +“What’s wrong, Ben?” asked several. +</p> +<p> +“Why, I—er—I thought I saw somebody over +in the woods yonder, looking at us,” and the +Crumville lad pointed to the trees in question. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_35'></a>35</span> +All gazed steadily in the direction but saw nothing +unusual. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe it was a rabbit, or a bear, or something +like that,” suggested Buster. “If it’s a bear we +had better look out,” he added, nervously. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll soon find out,” said Dave. “Come on,” +and he walked forward toward the woods. But +he found nothing and soon rejoined his companions. +</p> +<p> +“I must have been mistaken,” said Ben. +“Come on, if we are to do any hunting.” And +off he stalked, and one by one the others followed. +</p> +<p> +Evidently the shots at the partridges had scared +much of the game away, for at the upper end of +the island they started up nothing but two squirrels +and a few wild pigeons. Then they came +down the north shore and there bagged two rabbits. +They also saw a wild turkey, but it got +away before anybody could take aim at it. +</p> +<p> +“See, it has started to snow!” cried the senator’s +son, presently, and he was right. At first +the flakes were few, but inside of five minutes it +was snowing steadily. +</p> +<p> +“We may as well start for the Hall,” said +Dave. “This storm looks as if it might last for +some time.” +</p> +<p> +They left the shore and soon reached the edge +of the island. By this time the snowflakes were +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_36'></a>36</span> +coming down so thickly that the boys could see +but little around them. The sky was now growing +quite dark. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t like this,” was Phil’s comment. +“We’ll have no fun of it getting back to school, +especially if the snow gets so deep that we can’t +skate on the ice.” +</p> +<p> +“Say, this puts me in mind of a story,” commenced +Shadow. “Once two boys were caught +in a storm and——” +</p> +<p> +“We haven’t any time for yarns now, +Shadow!” cried Dave. “It’s back to the camping +place as fast as we can get there, and then off for +school, unless we want to be snowed in along the +route!” +</p> +<p> +All started across the island, which, at that +point, was not over seventy-five yards wide. They +came out at a spot just above where they had +stopped for lunch. Soon all of them stood close +to where lay the remains of the campfire, now +covered with the fast-falling snow. +</p> +<p> +“Hello! What does this mean?” +</p> +<p> +“Where is the hamper?” +</p> +<p> +“Where is the game?” +</p> +<p> +“What has become of the skates?” +</p> +<p> +“Where is that overcoat I left on the tree?” +</p> +<p> +These and several other questions were asked in +rapid succession. Then the Oak Hall students +looked at each other in blank dismay. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_37'></a>37</span> +</p> +<p> +And not without good reason. For everything +left at the camping spot when they had continued +the hunt—game, hamper, skates, an overcoat, a +sweater, and some other things of lesser importance—all +had disappeared! +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_38'></a>38</span><a name='chV' id='chV'></a>CHAPTER V—A TRAMP THROUGH THE SNOW</h2> +<p> +“What do you make of this, Dave?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know what to make of it, Roger—excepting +that somebody has taken our things.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you think it’s a joke, or just plain stealing?” +demanded Ben. +</p> +<p> +“That remains to be found out,” replied Ben. +“One thing is certain, the things didn’t walk off +by themselves.” +</p> +<p> +“Footprints of two persons!” exclaimed Gus, +who had been scanning the snow-covered ground +in the vicinity of the trees and bushes. +</p> +<p> +“Where do they lead to?” asked Dave, +eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“Here they are—you can follow them as easily +as I can,” was the reply, and the heavy-set youth +pointed out the tracks in the snow. They led all +around the trees and bushes and then in the direction +of the river. Here there were a jumble of +tracks and further on the marks of skate runners. +</p> +<p> +“Stopped to put on their skates,” remarked the +senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“And they have skated off with all our things!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_39'></a>39</span> +grumbled Buster Beggs. “What are we going to +do?” +</p> +<p> +“Say, that puts me in mind of a story,” came +quickly from Shadow. “Once two boys were +out skating and——” +</p> +<p> +“For the sake of the mummies of Egypt, let +up on the story-telling, Shadow!” burst out Phil. +“Don’t you realize what this loss means to us? +It’s bad enough to lose the hamper and clothing, +but what are we to do in this snowstorm, with +night coming on, and so far from Oak Hall without +skates?” +</p> +<p> +“Humph! I guess we’ll have to walk,” grumbled +the story-teller of the school. “But that will +take time, and if this storm keeps up——” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll be snowed under!” finished Chip +Macklin. +</p> +<p> +“Well, no use in staying here,” came from two +of the students. +</p> +<p> +“That is just what I say,” said Dave. “Those +skate marks lead down the river and that is the +way we want to go. By following them we’ll be +getting nearer to the Hall and at the same time +closer to the fellows who took our things.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll never catch those fellows,” grumbled +Ben. “They can skate five times as fast as we +can walk.” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind, we’ll go after ’em anyway,” replied +Gus. “And if we catch ’em——” He did +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_40'></a>40</span> +not finish in words but brought his right fist down +hard into his left palm, which left no doubt as +to how he intended to treat the thieves. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe it’s a trick, of some of the Rockville +cadets,” suggested Buster, when the crowd were +on their way down the river. +</p> +<p> +“Say, don’t you remember my saying I thought +I saw somebody near the camp, just before we went +away?” burst out Ben. “You all thought I was +mistaken.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I reckon you were not mistaken,” answered +Dave. “It’s a great pity we didn’t investigate +more before leaving.” +</p> +<p> +“No use in crying over spilt milk,” said Sam. +</p> +<p> +“Which puts me in mind of a sto——” commenced +Shadow, and then suddenly stopped talking +and commenced to whistle to himself. +</p> +<p> +“Say, boys, if anybody should ask you, you +can tell him it is snowing some,” puffed Buster, +who was struggling to keep up with those in front. +“If it wasn’t that we were on the river, it would +be easy to lose our way.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s true,” replied Dave. “The snow +seems to be coming down heavier every +minute.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and the wind is coming up,” added +Roger. “We’ll have a hard time of it reaching +the Hall. We’ll never do it by supper-time.” +</p> +<p> +“Then where are we going to get something +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_41'></a>41</span> +to eat?” demanded Buster. “I’m not going +without my supper just because I can’t get +back.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps we can get something at some farmhouse,” +suggested Phil. +</p> +<p> +“I’ve got an idea!” cried Dave. “Why can’t +we get some farmer to hook up a carriage or a +sleigh and take us to the Hall that way?” +</p> +<p> +“Hurrah, just the cheese!” cried Ben, who +did not relish walking such a distance. “The +thing is, though, to find the farmer,” he continued +soberly. +</p> +<p> +“Keep your eyes open for lights,” suggested +Dave, and this was done. +</p> +<p> +A quarter of a mile more was covered, the students +hugging the north shore of the stream, as +that afforded the most shelter from the rising +wind. Then Roger gave a cry. +</p> +<p> +“I think I saw a light through the snow! Just +look that way, fellows, and see if I am right.” +</p> +<p> +All gazed in the direction indicated, and presently +three of the boys made out a glimmer, as if +it came from a lantern being swung to and fro. +Then the light disappeared. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps it’s some farmer going out to care +for his cattle,” said Dave. “Let us walk over +and see,” and this was done. +</p> +<p> +Dave was correct in his surmise, and soon the +boys approached a big cow-shed, through a window of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_42'></a>42</span> +which they saw the faint rays of a lantern. +Just as they did this they heard a voice cry out +in wonder. +</p> +<p> +“What be you fellers a-doin’ in my cow-shed?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we just came in to rest out of the storm,” +was the answer, in a voice that sounded strangely +familiar to Dave. “We are not going to hurt +your shed any, or the cattle either.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s Mallory, of Rockville!” whispered Dave +to his fellow students, naming the cadet who was +the star hockey player of the military academy +team. +</p> +<p> +“And Bazen and Holt are with him,” added +Phil, gazing through a partly-open doorway, and +naming two other Rockville cadets. +</p> +<p> +“Hello, who’s out there?” cried the owner of +the cow-shed, and, lantern in hand, he turned to +survey the newcomers. +</p> +<p> +“Why, it’s Mr. Opper!” cried Sam. “Don’t +you remember me? I called last summer, to see +some of your young lady boarders.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, yes, I remember you,” replied Homer +Opper. “You hired my dappled mare for a +ride.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s it, Mr. Opper. Say, that mare could +go.” +</p> +<p> +“Go? Ain’t no hossflesh in these parts kin +beat her,” cried the farmer proudly. “She won +the prize at the last county fair, she did! But +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_43'></a>43</span> +wot brung ye here, sech a night as this?” added +Homer Opper curiously. +</p> +<p> +“Hello, Porter, old man!” cried Mallory, +rising from a box on which he had been seated +and shaking hands. “Caught in the storm, too, +eh?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” answered Dave. He gazed curiously at +the Rockville cadet and his companions. “Been +up the river?” +</p> +<p> +“Not any further than this.” +</p> +<p> +“Hunting?” +</p> +<p> +“No, skating. We would be going back, only +Holt broke one of his skates and that delayed us. +Been out hunting, eh? Any luck?” +</p> +<p> +“Some—good and bad. We shot some rabbits, +squirrels, and partridges, and we likewise +had our hamper, our skates, an overcoat, and some +other things stolen.” +</p> +<p> +“Stolen!” cried Homer Opper. “By gum, +thet’s tough luck! Who tuk the things?” +</p> +<p> +“That is what we want to find out,” and as +Dave spoke he looked sharply at Mallory and the +other Rockville cadets. +</p> +<p> +“Not guilty,” came promptly from Bazen. +“Honest Injun, Porter, if you think we touched +your things, you are on the wrong track; isn’t +that so, fellows?” +</p> +<p> +“It is,” came promptly from Mallory and Holt. +Then suddenly the star hockey player of Rockville +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_44'></a>44</span> +Academy let out a long, low whistle of surprise. +</p> +<p> +“You know something?” demanded Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe I do,” was Mallory’s slow answer. +“Yes, I am sure I do,” he added. “You can +put the puzzle together yourself if you wish, Porter—because, +you see, I hate to accuse anybody.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you know?” +</p> +<p> +“I know this: Less than an hour ago we met +two fellows on the river, one with a hamper and +the other with a bundle that looked as if it was +done up in an overcoat turned inside out. We +came on the fellows rather suddenly, at a turn +where there were some bushes.” +</p> +<p> +“Our stuff, as sure as you’re a foot high!” +cried Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Who were the fellows, do you know?” demanded +the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +At this question Mallory looked at Holt and +Bazen. +</p> +<p> +“I wasn’t exactly sure, but——” He hesitated +to go on. +</p> +<p> +“I was sure enough,” chimed in Holt. “They +were those chaps who came to our school from +Oak Hall and then ran away—Jasniff and Merwell. +How about it, Tom?” +</p> +<p> +“I think they were Jasniff and Merwell,” answered +Tom Bazen. “To be sure, as soon as they +saw us, they skated away as fast as they could, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_45'></a>45</span> +and kept their faces hidden. But if they weren’t +Jasniff and Merwell they were pretty good +doubles.” +</p> +<p> +“Jasniff and Merwell,” murmured Dave, and +his heart sank a little. Here was more underhanded +work of his old enemies. +</p> +<p> +The farmer and the Rockville cadets were anxious +to hear the particulars of the happening, and +the Oak Hall lads told of what had occurred. +</p> +<p> +“I know those chaps,” said Homer Opper. +“They stayed here one night last summer. But +they cut up so the boarders didn’t like it, so my +wife told ’em she didn’t have no room for ’em, +an’ they left. They ought to be locked up.” +</p> +<p> +“They will be locked up, if we can lay hands +on them,” replied Phil. +</p> +<p> +“They must have followed us to Squirrel Island, +and spied on us,” said Shadow. “Ben, you were +right about seeing somebody. It must have been +either Merwell or Jasniff.” +</p> +<p> +“Have you any idea where they went?” asked +the shipowner’s son. +</p> +<p> +“No, they skated away behind an island and +that’s the last we saw of them,” answered Mallory. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and I reckon it’s the last we’ll hear of +our things,” returned Buster, mournfully. “But +come on, let us see about getting back,” he continued. +“It’s ‘most time for supper now.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_46'></a>46</span> +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Opper, can you take us back to Oak +Hall?” asked Dave. “We’ll pay you for your +trouble.” +</p> +<p> +The farmer looked at the students and rubbed +his chin reflectively. Then he gazed out at the +storm and the snow-covered ground. +</p> +<p> +“Might hook up my big sleigh and do it,” he +said. “But it would be quite a job.” +</p> +<p> +“What would it be worth?” asked Ben. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I dunno—three or four dollars, at +least. It’s a tough night to be out in—an’ I’d +have to drive back, or put up at the town all +night.” +</p> +<p> +“Supposing we gave you fifty cents apiece,” +suggested Roger. +</p> +<p> +“And we’ll go along—as far as Rockville, at +the same price—if you’ll have us,” added Mallory, +quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Why, yes, Mallory, and welcome,” answered +Dave cordially. “That is, if the turnout will +hold us all.” +</p> +<p> +“Sure it will,” answered Homer Opper. “An’ +if ye all go an’ pay fifty cents each,”—he counted +them mentally as he spoke—“I’ll hook up my +four hosses an’ git ye there in jig time.” +</p> +<p> +“Then it’s a go,” answered Dave, after his +chums and the Rockville cadets had nodded their +approval. +</p> +<p> +“And do hurry,” called out Buster, as the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_47'></a>47</span> +farmer moved away to prepare for the journey. +“We don’t want to miss our suppers.” +</p> +<p> +“Ye ain’t goin’ to miss nuthin’,” called the +farmer. +</p> +<p> +Inside of fifteen minutes he came around to the +cow-shed with a big, low sleigh, to which were +attached four fine-looking horses. The sleigh contained +two lanterns and a quantity of wraps and +robes. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t want ye to catch cold, when we’re +a-drivin’ fast,” chuckled Homer Opper. “Now +pile right in, an’ we’ll be movin’.” +</p> +<p> +The boys needed no second invitation, and soon +all were aboard—Dave and Roger on the front +seat with the driver and the others behind, including +the Rockville cadets. Then came a crack +of the whip, and away through the swirling snow +moved the big sleigh, bound for the two schools. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_48'></a>48</span><a name='chVI' id='chVI'></a>CHAPTER VI—GOOD-BY TO OAK HALL</h2> +<p> +“Where in the world have you boys been? +Why didn’t you come back in time for supper? +Don’t you know it is against the rules to stay +away like this?” +</p> +<p> +Thus it was that Job Haskers, the second assistant +teacher of Oak Hall, greeted Dave and his +chums as they came in, after leaving the big sleigh +and settling with Homer Opper. +</p> +<p> +“We are sorry that we couldn’t get here before, +Mr. Haskers,” answered Dave. “But +something unusual happened and we were delayed.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll not accept any excuses!” snapped the +teacher, who had not forgotten how the boys had +hurried away without listening to his call from the +window. “I think I’ll send you to bed supperless. +It is no more than you deserve.” +</p> +<p> +“Supperless!” gasped Buster, in dismay. +“Oh, Mr. Haskers, we don’t deserve such treatment, +really we don’t!” +</p> +<p> +“We have been robbed—that is what delayed +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_49'></a>49</span> +us,” declared Phil. “I guess we had better report +to Doctor Clay, or Mr. Dale,” he went on, +significantly. +</p> +<p> +“You can report to me,” answered Job Haskers, +with increased severity. “There is no need +to bother the doctor, and Mr. Dale has gone +away for over Sunday.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, boys, back again!” cried a cheery voice +from an upper landing, and then Doctor Clay came +down, wearing his gown and slippers. “A wild +storm to be out in. I am glad you got back +safely.” +</p> +<p> +“They are late—and you said you gave them +no permission to be out after hours,” said Job +Haskers, tartly. +</p> +<p> +“Hum! Did I?” mused the kindly head of +the school. “Well, when it storms like this it, of +course, makes some difference.” +</p> +<p> +“We would have been back in time only we +were robbed of our skates and some other things,” +answered Dave. “We had to walk a long distance +through the storm, and we’d not be here yet +if we hadn’t managed to hire a farmer to bring +us in his sleigh.” +</p> +<p> +“Robbed!” echoed Doctor Clay, catching at +the word. “How was that?” And he listened +with keen interest to what the boys had to tell. +Even Job Haskers became curious, and said no +more about penalizing them for being late. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_50'></a>50</span> +</p> +<p> +“And you are sure the fellows were Merwell +and Jasniff?” asked the assistant teacher. +</p> +<p> +“All I know on that point is what Mallory and +his chums had to say,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p> +“I think it would be like that pair to follow +you up,” said Doctor Clay, with a grave shake +of his head. “They are two very bad boys,—worse, +Porter, than you can imagine,” and he +looked knowingly at Job Haskers as he spoke. +“Now go in to supper, and after that, you, Porter, +Morr, and Lawrence, may come to my study +and talk the matter over further.” +</p> +<p> +Wondering what else had happened to upset +the head of the school, Dave followed his chums +to the dining-hall. Here a late supper awaited +the crowd, to which, it is perhaps needless to state, +all did full justice. +</p> +<p> +“Do you think we can track Jasniff and Merwell?” +asked the senator’s son, during the course +of the repast. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t,” answered Dave frankly. “For they +will do their best to keep out of our way.” +</p> +<p> +A little later found Dave, Phil, and Roger in +the doctor’s private study, a sort of library connected +with his regular office. The head of Oak +Hall was reading a German historical work, but +laid the volume down as they filed in. +</p> +<p> +“Sit down, boys,” said Doctor Clay, pleasantly, +and when they were seated, he added: “Now +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_51'></a>51</span> +kindly tell me all you know about Merwell and +Jasniff.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you want to know everything, Doctor?” asked Dave, +in some surprise. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,—and later on, I’ll tell you why.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” answered the youth from Crumville, +and he told of the many things that had +happened, both at the school and at home—not +forgetting about the auto ride in which Laura and +Jessie were supposed to have participated. +</p> +<p> +“It all fits in!” cried Doctor Clay, drawing a +deep sigh. He tapped the table with the tips of +his fingers. “I wonder where it will end?” he +mused, half to himself. +</p> +<p> +“You said that Merwell and Jasniff were worse +than we imagined,” suggested Dave, to draw the +doctor out. +</p> +<p> +“So I did, Porter. I will tell you boys something, +but please do not let it go any further. +Since Jasniff and Merwell became pupils at Rockville +Military Academy and since they ran away +from that institution they have been doing everything +they could think of to annoy me. They +have sent farmers here with produce that I never +ordered, and have had publishers send me schoolbooks +that I did not want. Worse than that, they +have circulated reports to my scholars’ parents that +this school was running down, that it was in debt, +and that some pupils were getting sick because +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_52'></a>52</span> +the sewerage system was out of order. Some of +the parents have written to me, and two were on +the point of taking their boys away, thinking the +reports were true. Fortunately I was able to prove +the reports false, and the boys remained here. +But I do not know how far these slanders are being +circulated and what the effect will be in the future.” +</p> +<p> +“And you are sure they come from Merwell +and Jasniff?” questioned Phil. +</p> +<p> +“I am sure at least one letter was written by +Merwell, and one farmer who brought a load of +cabbages here said they were ordered by two young +men who looked like Merwell and Jasniff.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, nobody else would do it!” cried Roger. +“Merwell and Jasniff are guilty, not the least +doubt of it! The question is: How can we catch +them?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, that is the question,” said Doctor Clay. +“I have notified the local authorities to be on the +watch for them, and now I think I shall hire a +private detective.” +</p> +<p> +“Do it, Doctor,” said Dave eagerly. “I will +pay half the expense. I know that my father will +approve of such a course.” And so the matter +rested. The private detective came to Oak Hall +two days later, and after interviewing the doctor +and the boys, said he would do his best to run +down Link Merwell and Nick Jasniff. +</p> +<p> +It snowed hard for a day and a night and when +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_53'></a>53</span> +it cleared off the boys had considerable fun snowballing +each other and in coasting down a long +hill leading to the river. Pop Swingly, the janitor, +came in for his full share of the snow-balling and +so did Jackson Lemond, usually called Horsehair, +the Hall carryall driver. Horsehair was caught +coming from the barn, and half a dozen snowballs +hit him at the same time. +</p> +<p> +“Hi, you, stop!” he spluttered, as one snowball +took him in the chin and another in the ear. +“Want to smother me? Let up, I say!” And +he tried to run away. +</p> +<p> +“These are early Christmas presents, Horsehair!” +sang out Ben, merrily, and let the driver +have another, this time in the cap. +</p> +<p> +“And something to remember us by, when we +are gone,” added Gus, hitting him in the arm. +Then the driver escaped. He felt sore, and vowed +he would square up. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe he’ll report us,” said Ben, after the +excitement was over. +</p> +<p> +“Not he,” declared Gus. “He’s not that kind. +But he’ll lay for us,—just you wait and see.” And +Gus was right. About half an hour later he and +Ben were told that somebody wanted to see them +at the boathouse. They started for the building, +walking past the gymnasium, and as they did so, +down on their heads came a perfect avalanche of +snow, sent from the sloping roof above. When +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_54'></a>54</span> +they clawed their way out of the mass and looked +up they saw Horsehair standing on the roof, snow-shovel +in hand, grinning at them. +</p> +<p> +“Thought I’d give ye some more snow fer +snowballs,” he chuckled. “Here ye are!” And +down came another avalanche, sending the boys +flat a second time. When they scrambled up they +ran off with all speed, the merry laughter of the +carryall driver ringing in their ears. +</p> +<p> +At last came the final session of the school, +with the usual exercises, in which Dave and his +chums participated. Nearly all of the boys were +going home for the holidays, including Dave, +Phil, Roger, and Ben. Dave and Ben were, of +course, going direct to Crumville, and it was arranged +that Phil and the senator’s son should come +there later, to visit our hero and his family and +the Wadsworths. Nat Poole was also going home, +and would be on the same train with Dave and Ben. +</p> +<p> +“I wish he wasn’t going with us,” said Ben. +“I’m getting so I can’t bear Nat at all.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, he isn’t quite as bad as he was when +he chummed with Merwell and Jasniff,” answered +our hero. “I think their badness rather scared +Nat. He is mean and all that, but he isn’t a +criminal.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I think some meanness is a crime,” retorted +Ben. +</p> +<p> +The boys had purchased gifts for Doctor Clay, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_55'></a>55</span> +Mr. Dale, and some of the others, and even Job +Haskers had been remembered. Some of the students +had wanted to ignore the tyrannical teacher, +but Dave and his chums had voted down this proposition. +</p> +<p> +“Let us treat them all alike,” said Dave. +“Perhaps Mr. Haskers thinks he is doing right.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and if we leave him out in the cold he +may be more hard-hearted than ever,” added Gus, +with a certain amount of worldly wisdom. +</p> +<p> +Dave carried a suit-case and also a big bundle, +the latter filled with Christmas presents for the +folks at home. Ben was similarly loaded down, +and so were the others. +</p> +<p> +“Good-by, everybody!” cried our hero, as he +entered the carryall sleigh. “Take good care of +the school until we come back!” +</p> +<p> +“Good-by!” was the answer. “Don’t eat too +much turkey while you are gone!” And then, as +the sleigh rolled away from the school grounds, +the lads to leave commenced to sing the favorite +school song, sung to the tune of “Auld Lang +Syne”: +</p> +<p> + “Oak Hall we never shall forget,<br /> + No matter where we roam;<br /> + It is the very best of schools,<br /> + To us it’s just like home!<br /> + Then give three cheers, and let them ring<br /> + Throughout this world so wide,<br /> + To let the people know that we<br /> + Elect to here abide!”<br /> +</p> +<div><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_56'></a>56</span></div> +<p> +“That’s the stuff!” cried Roger, and then commenced +to toot loudly on a tin horn he carried, +and many others made a din. +</p> +<p> +At the depot the boys had to wait a little while. +But presently the train came along and they got +aboard. Dave and Ben found a seat near the +middle of the car and Nat Poole sat close by them. +He acted as if he wanted to talk, but the others +gave him little encouragement. +</p> +<p> +“Nat has something on his mind, I’ll wager a +cookie,” whispered Ben to Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Well, if he has, he need not bother us with +it,” was Dave’s reply. “I am done with him—I +told him that some time ago.” +</p> +<p> +The train rolled on and when near the Junction, +where the boys had to change to the main line, a +couple in front of Ben and Dave got up, leaving +the seat vacant. At once Nat Poole took the +seat, at first, however, turning it over, so that he +might face the other Oak Hall students. +</p> +<p> +“I want to talk to you, Dave Porter,” he said, +in a low and somewhat ugly voice. “I want you +to give an account of yourself.” +</p> +<p> +“Give an account of myself?” queried Dave, +in some astonishment, for he had not expected +such an opening from Nat. “What do you +mean?” +</p> +<p> +“You know well enough what I mean,” +cried the other boy, and now it was plainly +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_57'></a>57</span> +to be seen that his anger was rising. “You can +blacken your own character all you please but I +won’t have you blackening mine! If you don’t +confess to what you’ve done, and straighten matters +out, as soon as we get to Crumville, I am +going to ask my father to have you arrested!” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_58'></a>58</span><a name='chVII' id='chVII'></a>CHAPTER VII—NAT POOLE’S REVELATION</h2> +<p> +Both Dave and Ben stared in astonishment +at the son of the money-lender of Crumville. Nat +was highly indignant, but the reason for this was +a complete mystery to the other lads. +</p> +<p> +“Blacken your character?” repeated Dave. +“Nat, what are you talking about?” +</p> +<p> +“You know well enough.” +</p> +<p> +“I do not.” +</p> +<p> +“And I say you do!” blustered the bully. +“You can’t crawl out of it. I’ve followed the +thing up and I’ve got the evidence against you, +and against Roger Morr, too. I was going to +speak to Doctor Clay about it, but I know he’d +side with you and smooth it over—he always does. +But if I tell my father, you’ll find you have a different +man to deal with!” +</p> +<p> +Nat spoke in a high-pitched voice that drew +the attention of half a dozen men and women +in the car. Ben was greatly annoyed. +</p> +<p> +“Say, Nat, don’t make a public exhibition of +yourself,” he said, in a low tone. “If you’ve got +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_59'></a>59</span> +anything against Dave, why don’t you wait until +we are alone?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t have to wait,” answered Nat, as +loudly as ever. “I am going to settle this thing +right now.” +</p> +<p> +Fortunately the train rolled up to the Junction +depot at this moment and everybody, including +the boys, left the car. Several gazed curiously at +Dave and Nat, and, seeing this, Ben led the others +to the end of the platform. Here there was a +freight room, just then deserted. +</p> +<p> +“Come on in here, and then, Nat, you can +spout all you please,” said Ben. +</p> +<p> +“You ain’t going to catch me in a corner!” +cried the bully, in some alarm. +</p> +<p> +“It isn’t that, Nat. I don’t want you to make +a fool of yourself in front of the whole crowd. +See how everybody is staring at you.” +</p> +<p> +“Humph! Let them stare,” muttered the +bully; yet he followed Ben and Dave into the +freight room, and Ben stood at the doorway, so +that no outsiders might come in. One boy tried +to get in, thinking possibly to see a fight, but Ben +told him to “fly on, son,” and the lad promptly +disappeared. +</p> +<p> +“Now then, Nat, tell me what you are driving +at,” said Dave, as calmly as he could, for he saw +that the money-lender’s son was growing more +enraged every minute. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_60'></a>60</span> +</p> +<p> +“I don’t have to tell you, Dave Porter; you +know all about it.” +</p> +<p> +“I tell you I don’t—I haven’t the least idea +what you are driving at.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe you’ll deny that you were at Leesburgh +last week.” +</p> +<p> +“Leesburgh?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, Leesburgh, at Sampson’s Hotel, and at +the Arcade moving-picture and vaudeville show,” +and as he uttered the words Nat fairly glared into +the face of our hero. +</p> +<p> +“I haven’t been near Leesburgh for several +months—not since a crowd of us went there to a +football game.” +</p> +<p> +“Humph! You expect me to believe that?” +</p> +<p> +“Believe it or not, it is true.” +</p> +<p> +“You can’t pull the wool over my eyes, Dave +Porter! I know you were at Leesburgh last +week Wednesday, you and Roger Morr. And I +know you went to Sampson’s Hotel and registered +in my name and then cut up like a rowdy there, +in the pool-room, and got thrown out, and I know +you and Roger Morr went to the Arcade and made +a fuss there, and got thrown out again, but not +until you had given my name and the name of +Gus Plum. Gus may forgive you for it, and +think it only a joke. But I’ll not do it, I can tell +you that! You have got to write a letter to the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_61'></a>61</span> +owner of that hotel and to the theater manager +and explain things, and you and Roger Morr +have got to beg my pardon. And if you don’t, +as I said before, I’ll tell my father and get him +to have you arrested.” And now Nat was so +excited he moved from one foot to the other and +shook his fist in the air. +</p> +<p> +To the bully’s surprise Dave did not get excited. +On the contrary, our hero’s face showed +something that was akin to a faint smile. Ben +saw it and wondered at it. +</p> +<p> +“Say, you needn’t laugh at me!” howled Nat, +noting the look. “Before I get through with you, +you’ll find it no laughing matter.” +</p> +<p> +“I am not laughing at you, Nat.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, do you admit that what I’ve said is +true?” +</p> +<p> +“No; on the contrary, I say it is false, every +word of it. Did you say this happened last +Wednesday?” +</p> +<p> +“I did.” +</p> +<p> +“Both Roger Morr and I were at the school +all day Wednesday. During the day I attended +all my classes, and after school I went to my +room, along with Polly Vane, Luke Watson, and +Sam Day, and the three of us wrote on the essays +we had to hand in Thursday. After supper we +went down to the gym for about half an hour, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_62'></a>62</span> +and then went back to our dormitory. And, come +to think of it, you saw us there,” added Dave suddenly. +</p> +<p> +“I saw you?” +</p> +<p> +“You certainly did. You came to the door and +asked Luke Watson for a Latin book; don’t you +remember? Luke got it out of his bureau. We +were all at the big table. Sam Day flipped a button +at you and it hit you in the chin.” +</p> +<p> +At these unexpected words the face of the +money-lender’s son fell. +</p> +<p> +“Was that—er—was that Wednesday?” he +faltered. +</p> +<p> +“It certainly was, for we had to hand the +essays in Thursday and we were all working like +beavers on them.” +</p> +<p> +“Nat, what Dave says is absolutely true—I +know he wasn’t near Leesburgh last week, for I +was with him every day and every evening,” said +Ben. +</p> +<p> +“But I got the word from some fellows in +Leesburgh. They followed you from the hotel to +the show and talked to you afterwards, and they +said you told them your name was Porter, and the +other chap said his name was Morr. They said +you gave the names of Poole and Plum just to +keep your real identity hidden.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I am not guilty, Nat; I give you my +word of honor on it.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_63'></a>63</span> +</p> +<p> +“But—but—if you aren’t guilty how is it those +fellows got your name and that of Morr?” asked +the money-lender’s son, not knowing what else to +say. +</p> +<p> +“I think I can explain it, Nat. The same fellows +who did that are annoying me in other ways. +But I’ll not explain unless you will give me your +word of honor to keep it a secret, at least for the +present.” +</p> +<p> +“A secret, why?” +</p> +<p> +“Because I don’t want the thing talked about +in public. The more you talk about such things +the worse off you are. Let me tell you that I have +suffered more than you have, and other folks have +suffered too.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you mean to say that some other fellows +did this and gave my name and Plum’s first and +yours and Morr’s afterwards?” asked Nat, +curiously. +</p> +<p> +“Exactly.” +</p> +<p> +“Why?” +</p> +<p> +“For a twofold reason; first to blacken your +character and that of Plum, and, secondly, to +cause trouble between all of us.” +</p> +<p> +“What fellows would be mean enough to do +that?” +</p> +<p> +“Two fellows who used to be your friends, +but who have had to run away, to keep from +being arrested.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_64'></a>64</span> +</p> +<p> +“Say, you don’t mean Link Merwell and Nick +Jasniff!” burst out the money-lender’s son. +</p> +<p> +“Those are the chaps I do mean, Nat.” +</p> +<p> +“But I thought they had left these parts. +They were in Crumville, I know,” and now the +bully looked knowingly at our hero. +</p> +<p> +“You have heard the reports from home +then?” asked Dave, and he felt his face +burn. +</p> +<p> +“Sure.” +</p> +<p> +“Nat, those reports are all false—as false as +this report of your doings at Leesburgh. They +are gotten up by Jasniff and Merwell solely to injure +my friends and my family and me. My sister +and Jessie Wadsworth would refuse to even +recognize those fellows, much less go auto-riding +with them. Let me tell you something.” And in +as few words as possible our hero related how +things had been sent to him and his friends without +being ordered by them, and of the other +trouble Jasniff and Merwell were causing. The +money-lender’s son was incredulous at first, but +gradually his face relaxed. +</p> +<p> +“And is all that really so?” he asked, at +last. +</p> +<p> +“Every word is absolutely true,” answered +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Then Nick and Link ought to be in jail!” +burst out Nat. “It’s an outrage to let them do +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_65'></a>65</span> +such things. Why don’t you have ’em locked up—that +is what I’d do!” +</p> +<p> +“We’ve got to catch them first.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you mean to say you are trying to do +that?” +</p> +<p> +“We are.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, you catch ’em, and if you want me to +appear against ’em, I’ll do it—and I’ll catch ’em +myself if I can.” +</p> +<p> +There was a pause, and Nat started for the +doorway of the freight room. But Ben still barred +the way. +</p> +<p> +“Nat, don’t you think you were rather hasty +in accusing Dave?” he asked, bluntly. +</p> +<p> +“Well—er—maybe I was,” answered the +money-lender’s son, growing a bit red. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, let it pass,” said Dave. “I might have +been worked up myself, if I had been in Nat’s +place.” +</p> +<p> +“Here comes the train—we don’t want to miss +it,” cried the money-lender’s son, and he showed +that he was glad to close the interview. “Remember, +if you catch those fellows, I’ll testify +against ’em!” he called over his shoulder as he +pushed through the doorway. +</p> +<p> +“The same old Nat, never willing to acknowledge +himself in the wrong,” was Ben’s comment, +as he and Dave ran for the car steps. The other +boy had lost himself in the waiting crowd and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_66'></a>66</span> +got into another car, and they did not see him +again until Crumville was reached, and even then +he did not speak to them. +</p> +<p> +The snow was coming down lightly when Dave +and Ben alighted, baggage and bundles in hand, +for they had not risked checking anything in such +a crowd. Ben’s father was on hand to greet him, +and close at hand stood the Wadsworth family +sleigh, with Laura and Jessie on the rear seat. +The driver came to take the suit-case and Dave’s +bundle, grinning a welcome as he did so. +</p> +<p> +“There’s Dave!” cried Jessie, as soon as he +appeared. “Isn’t he growing tall!” she added. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” answered the sister. “Dave!” she +called. +</p> +<p> +“Here we are again!” he cried with a bright +smile, and shook hands. “I brought you a snowstorm +for a change.” +</p> +<p> +“I like snow for Christmas,” answered Jessie. +She was blushing, for Dave had given her hand +an extra tight squeeze. +</p> +<p> +“How are the folks?” +</p> +<p> +“All very well,” answered Laura. “What +have you in that big bundle?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, that’s a secret, sis,” he returned. +</p> +<p> +“Christmas presents!” cried the sister. “Jessie, +let us open the bundle right away.” And she +made a playful reach for it. +</p> +<p> +“Not to-day—that belongs to Santa Claus!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_67'></a>67</span> +cried the brother, holding the bundle out of reach. +“My, but this town looks good to me!” he added, +as he looked around and waved his hand to Mr. +Basswood. Then Ben took a moment to run up +and greet the girls. +</p> +<p> +“You must come over, Ben,” said Laura. +</p> +<p> +“Why, yes, by all means,” added Jessie, and +Ben said he would. Then he rejoined his father, +and Dave got into the sleigh, being careful to keep +his big bundle on his lap, where the girls could +not “poke a hole into it to peek,” as he put it. +There was a flourish of the whip, and the elegant +turnout, with its well-matched black horses, started +in the direction of the Wadsworth mansion. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_68'></a>68</span><a name='chVIII' id='chVIII'></a>CHAPTER VIII—A MERRY CHRISTMAS</h2> +<p> +As my old readers know, the Wadsworth family +and the Porters all lived together, for when +Dave found his folks and brought them to Crumville, +the rich jewelry manufacturer and his wife +could not bear to think of separating from the +boy who had saved their daughter from being +burned to death. They loved Dave almost as a +son, and it was their proposal that the Porters +make the big mansion their home. As Dave’s +father was a widower and his brother Dunston +was a bachelor, they readily agreed to this, provided +they were allowed to share the expenses. +With the two families was old Caspar Potts, who +spent most of his time in the library, cataloguing +the books, keeping track of the magazines, and +writing a volume on South American history. +</p> +<p> +With a merry jingling of the bells, the family +sleigh drove into the spacious grounds. As it +rounded the driveway and came to a halt at the +front piazza the door opened and Dave’s father +came out, followed by Dunston Porter. +</p> +<p> +“Hello, Dad!” cried the son, joyously, and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_69'></a>69</span> +made a flying leap from the sleigh. “How are +you?” And then he shook hands with his parent +and with his uncle—that same uncle whom he so +strongly resembled,—a resemblance that had been +the means of bringing the pair together. +</p> +<p> +“Dave, my son!” said Mr. Porter, as he +smiled a welcome. +</p> +<p> +“Getting bigger every day, Davy!” was Uncle +Dunston’s comment. “Before you know it, you’ll +be taller than I am!” And he gave his nephew +a hand-clasp that made Dave wince. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, he’s getting awfully tall, I said so as soon +as I saw him,” remarked Jessie, as she, too, +alighted, followed by Laura. By this time Dave +was in the hallway, giving Mrs. Wadsworth a +big hug and a kiss. When he had first known her, +Dave had been a little afraid of Mrs. Wadsworth, +she was such a lady, but now this was past +and he treated her as she loved to be treated, just +as if he were her son. +</p> +<p> +“Aren’t you glad I’ve returned to torment +you?” he said, as he gave her another squeeze. +</p> +<p> +“Very glad, Dave, very glad indeed!” she +answered, beaming on him. “I don’t mind the +way you torment me in the least,” and then she +hurried off, to make sure that the dinner ordered +in honor of Dave’s home-coming should be properly +served. +</p> +<p> +In the library doorway stood Caspar Potts, his +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_70'></a>70</span> +hair now as white as snow. He came forward +and laid two trembling white hands in those of +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Dave, my boy Dave!” he murmured, and his +watery eyes fairly glistened. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, Professor, your boy, always your boy!” +answered Dave, readily, for he loved the old +instructor from the bottom of his heart. “And +how is the history getting on?” +</p> +<p> +“Fairly well, Dave. I have nine chapters finished.” +</p> +<p> +“Good! Some day, when it is finished, I’ll +find a publisher for you; and then you’ll be +famous.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know about that, Dave. But I like +to write on the book—and the research work is +very pleasant, especially in such pleasant surroundings,” +murmured the old gentleman. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Wadsworth was away at his office, but +presently he came back, and greeted Dave warmly, +and asked about the school and his chums. Then, +as the girls went off to get ready for dinner, the +men folks and Dave went into the library. +</p> +<p> +“Have you heard anything more of those two +young rascals, Merwell and Jasniff?” questioned +Mr. Porter. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, but not in the way I’d like,” answered +Dave, and told of what Nat Poole had had to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_71'></a>71</span> +say and of what had occurred at Squirrel Island. +“Have you heard anything here?” he added. +</p> +<p> +“Did the girls tell you anything?” asked his +father. +</p> +<p> +“Not a word—they didn’t have a chance, for +we didn’t want to talk before Peter.” Peter was +the driver of the sleigh. +</p> +<p> +“I see.” Mr. Porter mused for a moment and +looked at Mr. Wadsworth. +</p> +<p> +“Those good-for-nothing boys have done a +number of mean things,” said the jewelry manufacturer. +“They have circulated many reports, +about you and your family, and about me and my +family. They must be very bitter, to act in such +a fashion. If I could catch them, I’d like to wring +their necks!” And Oliver Wadsworth showed +his excitement by pacing up and down the library. +</p> +<p> +“Did you get your affairs with the department +stores fixed up?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, but not without considerable trouble.” +</p> +<p> +“Have Jasniff and Merwell shown themselves +in Crumville lately?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, three days ago they followed your sister +Laura and Jessie to a church fair the girls attended. +They acted in such a rude fashion that +both of the girls ran all the way home. All of +us went out to look for them, but we didn’t find +them.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_72'></a>72</span> +</p> +<p> +“Oh, if I had only been at that fair!” murmured +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“What could you have done against two of +them?” asked his uncle. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know, but I would have made it warm +for them—and maybe handed them over to the +police.” +</p> +<p> +“I have cautioned the girls to be on their +guard,” said David Porter. “And you must be on +your guard, Dave. It is not wise to take chances +with such fellows as Jasniff and Merwell.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll keep my eyes open for them,” answered +the son. +</p> +<p> +Dave ran up to his room, and put his big bundle +away in a corner of the clothing closet. Then +he dressed for dinner. As he came out he met +Jessie, who stood on the landing with a white +carnation in her hand. +</p> +<p> +“It’s for your buttonhole,” she said. “It’s +the largest in the conservatory.” And she adjusted +it skillfully. He watched her in silence, +and when she had finished he caught her by both +hands. +</p> +<p> +“Jessie, I’m so glad to be back—so glad to +be with you again!” he half whispered. +</p> +<p> +“Are you really, Dave?” she returned, and +her eyes were shining like stars. +</p> +<p> +“You know I am; don’t you?” he pleaded. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” she answered, in a low voice. And then, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_73'></a>73</span> +as Laura appeared, she added hastily, but tenderly, +“I’m glad, too!” +</p> +<p> +It was a large and happy gathering around the +dining-room table, with Mr. Wadsworth at the +head, and Jessie on one side of Dave and Laura +on the other. Professor Potts asked the blessing, +and then followed an hour of good cheer. In +honor of Dave’s home-coming the meal was an +elaborate one, and everybody enjoyed it thoroughly. +As nobody wished to put a damper on +the occasion, nothing was said about their enemies. +Dave told some funny stories about Oak Hall +happenings, and had the girls shrieking with +laughter, and Dunston Porter related a tale or +two about his travels, for he still loved to roam +as of yore. +</p> +<p> +The next day—the day before Christmas—it +snowed heavily. But the young folks did not mind +this and went out several times, to do the last of +their shopping. Late in the afternoon, Peter +brought in some holly wreaths and a little Christmas +tree. The wreaths were placed in the windows, +each with a big bow of red ribbon attached, +and the tree was decorated with candies and candles +and placed on the table in the living-room. +</p> +<p> +All the young folks had surprises for their +parents and for Professor Potts. There was a set +of South American maps for the old professor, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_74'></a>74</span> +a new rifle for Dunston Porter, a set of cyclopedias +for Mr. Wadsworth, a cane for Dave’s +father, and a beautiful chocolate urn for the lady +of the house. +</p> +<p> +“Merry Christmas!” was the cry that went +the rounds the next morning, and then such a +handshaking and such a gift-giving and receiving! +Dave had a new pocketbook for Laura, with her +monogram in silver, and a cardcase for Mrs. +Wadsworth. For Jessie he had a string of pearls, +and numerous gifts for the others in the mansion. +From Laura he received a fine book on hunting +and camping out, something he had long desired, +while Mrs. Wadsworth gave him some silk handkerchiefs. +From his father came a new suit-case, +one with a traveler’s outfit included, and from his +uncle he received some pictures, to hang in his +den. Mr. Wadsworth gave him a beautiful stickpin, +one he said had been made at his own +works. +</p> +<p> +But the gift Dave prized most of all was a little +locket that Jessie gave him for his watchchain. +It was of gold, set with tiny diamonds, and his +monogram was on the back. The locket opened +and had a place in it for two pictures. +</p> +<p> +“You must put Laura’s picture in there,” said +Jessie, “Laura’s and your father’s.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I have them already—in my watch case,” +he answered, and then, as nobody was near, he +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_75'></a>75</span> +went on in a whisper, “I want your picture in +this, Jessie.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh!” she murmured. +</p> +<p> +“Your picture on one side, and a lock of your +hair on the other. Without those I won’t consider +the gift complete.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Dave, don’t be silly!” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not silly—I mean it, Jessie. You’ll give +them to me, won’t you, before I go back to Oak +Hall?” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe. I’ll see how you behave!” was the +answer, and then just as Dave started to catch her +by the arm, she ran away to join Laura. But +she threw him a smile from over her shoulder that +meant a great deal to him. +</p> +<p> +In the afternoon, Ben came over, with his young +lady cousin, and all the young folks went sleigh-riding. +The evening was spent at the Wadsworth +mansion in playing games and in singing favorite +songs. Altogether it was a Christmas to be long +remembered. +</p> +<p> +During the fall Mr. Wadsworth had been busy, +building an addition to his jewelry works, and on +the day after Christmas Dave went over to the +place with his uncle, to look around. The addition +covered a plot nearly a hundred feet square +and was two stories high. +</p> +<p> +“It will give us a new office and several new +departments,” said the rich manufacturer, as he +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_76'></a>76</span> +showed them around. “When everything is +finished I shall have one of the most up-to-date +jewelry works in this part of the country.” +</p> +<p> +“Are you going to move the old office furniture +into this new place?” asked Dave, noticing some +old chairs and desks. +</p> +<p> +“For the present we’ll have to. The new furniture +won’t be here until early in January.” +</p> +<p> +“What about your safes?” asked Dave. He +remembered the big but old-fashioned safes that +had adorned the old office. +</p> +<p> +“We are to have new ones in about sixty days. +I wanted them at once, but the safe company was +too busy to rush the order. I wish now that I +had those safes,” went on the manufacturer, in a +lower voice, so that even the clerks near by might +not hear. +</p> +<p> +“Why, anything unusual?” questioned Dunston +Porter, curiously. +</p> +<p> +“I took that order to reset the Carwith diamonds, +that’s all.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, then you got it, didn’t you?” went on +Dave’s uncle. “Were they willing to pay the +price?” +</p> +<p> +“I told them they would have to or I wouldn’t +touch the job.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose the diamonds are +worth?” +</p> +<p> +“They were bought for sixty thousand dollars. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_77'></a>77</span> +At the present value of such gems, I should say +at least seventy-five thousand dollars.” +</p> +<p> +“Phew! And the settings are to cost eight +thousand dollars. That makes a pretty valuable +lot of jewelry, I’m thinking,” was Dunston Porter’s +comment. +</p> +<p> +“You are right, and that is why I wish I had +those new safes,” added Oliver Wadsworth. +</p> +<p> +“Can’t you keep the diamonds in some safe +deposit vault?” +</p> +<p> +“There is no very good safe deposit place in +Crumville. Besides, I must have the gems here, +if my workmen are to set them properly. Of +course, I’ll keep them in the old safes when they +are not in the workshop.” +</p> +<p> +“I should think you’d want a watchman around +with such diamonds in the place,” remarked Dave. +</p> +<p> +“I have a watchman—old Tony Wells, who is +as honest as they make ’em. But, Dave, I don’t +want you to mention the diamonds to anybody. +The fact that I have this order is being kept a +secret,” went on Mr. Wadsworth, anxiously. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll not say a word to anybody,” answered +our hero. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t do it—for I am anxious enough about +the jewels as it is. I shall be glad when the order +is finished and the gems are out of my keeping. +I don’t want any outsider to know I have them.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_78'></a>78</span><a name='chIX' id='chIX'></a>CHAPTER IX—NAT POOLE GETS CAUGHT</h2> +<p> +In the middle of the week came Phil and +Roger, in the midst of another snowstorm that +was so heavy it threatened to stall the train in +which they arrived. Dave went to the station to +meet them. +</p> +<p> +“Say, what do you think?” burst out Phil, +while shaking hands. +</p> +<p> +“We saw Jasniff and Merwell!” finished the +senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“You did!” ejaculated Dave. “Where?” +</p> +<p> +“On our train. We walked through the cars +at Melton, to see if we knew anybody aboard, and +there were the pair in the smoker, smoking cigarettes, +as big as life.” +</p> +<p> +“Did you speak to them?” +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t get the chance. The car was crowded, +and before we could get to Jasniff and Merwell +they saw us, ran down the aisle the other way, +and got off.” +</p> +<p> +“Is that so? Evidently they must know we +are on their track,” said Dave, shaking his head +gravely. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_79'></a>79</span> +</p> +<p> +“I wish we could have collared ’em,” went on +the shipowner’s son. “I’d like to punch their +heads.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t do it, Phil. If you ever catch them, +call an officer and have them locked up. A thrashing +is wasted on such rascals.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know some more about them?” questioned +Roger, quickly. +</p> +<p> +“I do.” And then Dave related what Nat +Poole had had to say, and also told about how +Laura and Jessie had been scared when attending +the church fair. +</p> +<p> +“You are right, they ought to be locked up,” +was Roger’s comment. +</p> +<p> +“By the way, did you hear the news from Oak +Hall?” went on Phil, as they drove off towards +the Wadsworth mansion. +</p> +<p> +“What news?” +</p> +<p> +“Somehow or other, the storm lifted off two +of the skylights from the roof of the main building +and the snow got in the garret and there the +heat from the chimney must have melted it, for it +ran down—the water did—through the floor and +loosened the plaster in several of the dormitories, +including ours. I understand all of the plaster has +got to come down.” +</p> +<p> +“What a muss!” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and it is going to take several weeks to fix +it up—they couldn’t get any masons right away.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_80'></a>80</span> +</p> +<p> +“Then where will we sleep when we go +back?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. I understand from Shadow +that the doctor was thinking of keeping the school +closed until about the first of February.” +</p> +<p> +“Say, that will give us quite a holiday!” exclaimed +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“For which all of us will be profoundly sorry,” +responded Phil, making a sober face and winking +one eye. +</p> +<p> +The girls greeted the newcomers with sincere +pleasure. +</p> +<p> +“What a pity Belle Endicott isn’t here,” sighed +Laura. +</p> +<p> +“So it is,” answered Jessie. “We’ll have to +do what we can to make up for her absence.” +</p> +<p> +Two days later it cleared off, and the young +folks enjoyed a long sleigh-ride. Then they went +skating, and on New Year’s Eve attended a party +given at Ben Basswood’s house. Besides our +friends, Ben had invited Sam Day and Buster +Beggs, and also a number of girls; and all enjoyed +themselves hugely until after midnight. When +the clock struck twelve, the boys and girls went +outside and tooted horns and rang a big dinner-bell, +and wished each other and everybody else “A +Happy New Year!” +</p> +<p> +The celebration on the front piazza was at its +height when suddenly came a shower of snowballs from +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_81'></a>81</span> +a near street corner. One snowball +hit Dave in the shoulder and another landed +directly on Jessie’s neck, causing the girl to cry +out in mingled pain and alarm. +</p> +<p> +“Hi! who’s throwing snowballs!” exclaimed +Roger, and then came another volley, and he was +hit, and also Laura and one of the other girls. +At once the girls fled into the house. +</p> +<p> +“Some rowdies, I suppose,” said Phil. “I’ve +half a mind to go after them.” +</p> +<p> +“We can’t without our hats and coats,” answered +Dave. +</p> +<p> +Just then came another shower of snowballs +and Dave was hit again. This was too much for +him, and despite the fact that he was bare-headed +and wore a fine party suit, he leaped down on the +sidewalk and started for the corner. Phil and +Roger came after him. Ben rushed into the hallway, +to catch up two of his father’s canes and +his chums’ hats, and then he followed. +</p> +<p> +Those who had thrown the snowballs had not +dreamed of being attacked, and it was not until +Dave was almost on them that they started to run. +There were three boys—two rather rough-looking +characters. The third was well dressed, in a fur +cap and overcoat lined with fur. +</p> +<p> +“Nat Poole!” cried Dave, when he got close +to the well-dressed youth. “So this is your game, +eh? Because Ben didn’t see fit to invite you to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_82'></a>82</span> +his party, you think it smart to throw snowballs +at the girls!” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke Dave ran closer and suddenly gave +the money-lender’s son a shove that sent him backwards +in the snow. +</p> +<p> +“Hi, you let me alone!” burst out Nat, in +alarm. “It ain’t fair to knock me down!” +</p> +<p> +By this time Dave’s chums had reached the +scene, and seeing Nat down they gave their attention +to the two others. They saw that they were +roughs who hung around the railroad station and +the saloons of Crumville. Without waiting, Ben +threw a cane to Roger and sailed in, and the senator’s +son followed. Both of the roughs received +several severe blows and were then glad enough +to slink away in the darkness. +</p> +<p> +When Nat got up he was thoroughly angry. +He had hired the roughs to help him and now they +had deserted the cause. He glared at Dave. +</p> +<p> +“You let me alone, Dave Porter!” he +cried. +</p> +<p> +“Not just yet, Nat,” replied our hero, and +catching up a handful of loose snow, he forced it +down inside of the other’s collar. Then the other +lads pitched in, too, and soon Nat found himself +down once more and all but covered with snow, +which got down his neck, in his ears and nose, +and even into his mouth. +</p> +<p> +“Now then, don’t you dare to throw snowballs +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_83'></a>83</span> +at the girls again!” said Dave sternly. “It was +a cowardly thing to do, and you know it.” +</p> +<p> +“If you do it again, we’ll land on you ten +times harder than we did just now,” added Ben. +</p> +<p> +“And don’t you get any more of those roughs +to take a hand,” continued Dave. “If you do, +they’ll find themselves in the lock-up, and you’ll +be there to keep them company.” +</p> +<p> +“You just wait!” muttered Nat, wrathfully. +“I’ll fix you yet—you see if I don’t!” And then +he turned and hurried away, but not in the direction +his companions had taken. He wanted to +escape them if possible, for he had promised each +a dollar for aiding him and he was now in no +humor to hand over the money. But at another +corner the roughs caught up to him and made him +pay up, and this added to his disgust. +</p> +<p> +When Dave and the others got back to the +house they were considerably “roughed up,” as +Roger expressed it. But they had vanquished the +enemy and were correspondingly happy. They +found that the girls had not been much hurt, for +which everybody was thankful. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe they’ll lay for you when you go +home,” whispered Ben to Dave, when he got the +chance. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think they will,” answered Dave. +“But we’ll be on our guard.” +</p> +<p> +“Why not take a cane or two with you?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_84'></a>84</span> +</p> +<p> +“We can do that.” +</p> +<p> +When it came time to go home the girls were +somewhat timid, and Jessie said she could telephone +for the sleigh. But, as it was a bright, +starry night, the boys said they would rather walk, +and Laura said the same. +</p> +<p> +In spite of their watchfulness, the boys were +full of fun, and soon had the girls laughing. And +if, under those bright stars, Dave said some rather +sentimental things to Jessie, for whom he had +such a tender regard, who can blame him? +</p> +<p> +On the day following New Year’s came word +from Oak Hall that the school would not open +for its next term until the first Monday in +February. +</p> +<p> +“Say, that suits me down to the ground!” +cried Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’m not shedding any tears,” answered +Roger. “I know what I’d like to do—take a +trip somewhere.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know where you’d go in this winter +weather,” said Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, some warm climate—Bermuda, or some +place like that.” +</p> +<p> +Another day slipped by, and Dave was asked +by his father to go to one of the near-by cities on +an errand of importance. He had to go to a +lawyer’s office and to several banks, and the errand +took all day. For company he took Roger with +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_85'></a>85</span> +him, and the boys did not get back to Crumville +until about eleven o’clock at night. +</p> +<p> +“Guess they thought we weren’t coming at all,” +said Dave, when he found no sleigh awaiting him. +“Well, we can walk.” +</p> +<p> +“Of course we can walk,” answered the senator’s +son. “I’ll be glad to stretch my legs after +such a long ride.” +</p> +<p> +“Let us take a short cut,” went on Dave, as +they left the depot. “I know a path that leads +almost directly to our place.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, if the snow isn’t too deep, Dave.” +</p> +<p> +“It can’t be deep on the path, for many of the +men who work at the Wadsworth jewelry place +use it. It runs right past the Wadsworth works.” +</p> +<p> +“Go ahead then.” +</p> +<p> +They took to the path, which led past the +freight depot and then along a high board fence. +They turned a corner of the fence, and crossed +a vacant lot, and then came up to one corner of +the jewelry works, at a point where the new addition +was located. +</p> +<p> +“Now, here we are at the works,” said Dave. +“It’s not very much further to the house.” +</p> +<p> +“Pretty quiet around here, this time of night,” +remarked Roger, as he paused to catch his breath, +for they had been walking fast. “There doesn’t +seem to be a soul in sight.” +</p> +<p> +“There is usually a watchman around, old +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_86'></a>86</span> +Tony Wells, an army veteran. I suppose he is +inside somewhere.” +</p> +<p> +“There’s his lantern!” cried the senator’s son, +as a flash of light shone from one of the windows. +Hardly had he spoken when the light disappeared, +leaving the building as black as before. +</p> +<p> +“It must be a lonely job, guarding such a +place,” said our hero, as he and his chum resumed +their walk. “But I suppose it suits Tony Wells, +and he is glad to get the money it brings +in.” +</p> +<p> +“They must have a lot of valuable jewelry +there, Dave.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, yes, they have. But it is all locked up +in the safes at night.” Dave thought of the Carwith +diamonds, but remembered his promise not +to mention them to anybody. +</p> +<p> +As the boys turned another corner they came +face to face with a fat man, who was struggling +along through the snow carrying two heavy bundles. +</p> +<p> +“Hello!” cried Dave. “How are you, Mr. +Rowell?” +</p> +<p> +“Bless me if it isn’t Dave Porter!” cried Amos +Rowell, who was a local druggist. “Out rather +late, aren’t you?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“So am I. Had to visit some sick folks and +I’m carrying home some of their washing. Goodnight!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_87'></a>87</span> +and the druggist turned down one road +and Dave and Roger took the other. +</p> +<p> +Inside of five minutes more our hero and his +chum were at the entrance to the Wadsworth +mansion. Just as they were mounting the steps, +and Dave was feeling in his pocket for his key, +a strange rumble reached their ears. +</p> +<p> +“What was that?” asked the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” returned Dave, in some +alarm. “It sounded to me as if it came from +the direction of the jewelry works!” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_88'></a>88</span><a name='chX' id='chX'></a>CHAPTER X—WHAT HAPPENED AT THE JEWELRY WORKS</h2> +<p> +“The jewelry works?” repeated Roger. +</p> +<p> +“Yes. What did it sound like to you?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, like a blast of some kind. Maybe it +was at the railroad.” +</p> +<p> +“They don’t work on the railroad at night—especially +in this cold weather, Roger. No, it +was something else.” +</p> +<p> +Both boys halted on the piazza and listened. +But not another sound out of the ordinary reached +their ears. +</p> +<p> +“Might as well go in—it’s getting pretty cold,” +said the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +Dave unlocked the door and they entered the +mansion. A dim light was burning in the hallway. +While they were taking off their caps and +coats Dave’s father appeared at the head of the +stairs. +</p> +<p> +“Got back safely, did you?” he questioned. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, dad; and everything in the city was all +right,” answered the son. “I’ll bring the package +up to you.” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind—I’ll come down and put it in +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_89'></a>89</span> +the safe,” answered Mr. Porter. “By the way,” +he went on, “what was that strange noise I just +heard?” +</p> +<p> +“That is what we were wondering,” said +Roger. “It sounded like a blast of dynamite to +me.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe something blew up at the powder +works at Fenwood,” suggested Dave. The works +in question were fifteen miles away. +</p> +<p> +“If it did, we’ll hear about it in the morning,” +returned Mr. Porter, as he took the package Dave +gave him and disappeared into the library, turning +on the electric light as he did so. +</p> +<p> +The boys went upstairs and started to undress. +Phil had been asleep, but roused up at their entrance. +The boys occupied a large chamber, with +two double beds in it, for they loved to be together, +as at school. +</p> +<p> +“Listen to that!” cried Dave, as he was unlacing +a shoe. +</p> +<p> +“It’s the telephone downstairs!” cried Phil. +“My, but it’s ringing to beat the band!” he +added, as the bell continued to sound its +call. +</p> +<p> +The boys heard Mr. Porter leave the library +and go to the telephone, which was on a table +in an alcove. He took down the receiver. +</p> +<p> +“Yes! yes!” the boys heard him say. Then +followed a pause. “You don’t mean it! When, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_90'></a>90</span> +just now? Was that the noise we heard? Where +did they go to? Wait, I’ll call Mr. Wadsworth. +What’s that? Hurry!” Then followed another +pause. “Cut off!” they heard Mr. Porter mutter. +</p> +<p> +“Something is wrong!” murmured Dave. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Porter came bounding up the stairs two +steps at a time. Dave and the other boys met him +in the hallway. +</p> +<p> +“What is it, Dad?” asked the son. +</p> +<p> +“Robbers—at the jewelry works!” panted +David Porter. “I must notify Mr. Wadsworth!” +And he ran to a near-by door and +pounded on it. +</p> +<p> +“What is it?” came sleepily from the rich +manufacturer. He had heard nothing of the telephone +call, being down deep in the covers because +of the cold. +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Wadsworth, get up, get up instantly!” +cried Mr. Porter. “You are wanted at the +jewelry works. I just got something of a message +from your watchman. Some robbers have +blown open your safes and they attacked the man, +but he got away long enough to telephone. But +then they attacked him again, while he was talking +to me! We’ll have to get down there at +once!” +</p> +<p> +“Roger, did you hear that?” gasped Dave. +“That’s the noise we heard!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_91'></a>91</span> +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and they attacked the watchman,” responded +the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“I’m going back there,” went on Dave. “The +others will have to stop and dress. Maybe we +can catch those rascals.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and save the watchman, Dave!” +</p> +<p> +By this time Mr. Wadsworth had appeared, +in a bath-robe, and Dunston Porter also showed +himself. Dave slipped on his shoe again and +fairly threw himself into his coat, and Roger +also rearranged his toilet. +</p> +<p> +“Wait—I’ll go with you!” cried Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Can’t wait, Phil—every second is precious!” +answered our hero. “You can follow with the +men.” +</p> +<p> +“Take the gun, or a pistol—you may need it,” +urged the shipowner’s son, as he started to dress. +</p> +<p> +In a corner stood Dave’s double-barreled shotgun, +loaded. He took it up. Roger looked +around the room, saw a baseball bat in another +corner, and took that. Then the boys ran out into +the hallway, where the electric lights were now +turned on full. The whole house was in a hubbub. +</p> +<p> +“We are dressed and we’ll go right down to +the works,” said Dave. “I heard what father +said, Mr. Wadsworth. We’ll help Tony Wells, +if we can.” And before anybody could stop him, +he was out of the house, with Roger at his heels. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_92'></a>92</span> +</p> +<p> +“Be careful, Dave!” shouted his uncle after +him. “Those robbers may be desperate characters.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, Uncle Dunston, I’ll watch out.” +</p> +<p> +“If you chance to see a policeman, take him +along. I’ll come as soon as I can get some clothing +on.” +</p> +<p> +Tired though they were, the two boys ran all +the distance to the jewelry works. When they got +there they found everything as dark and as silent +as before. They had met nobody. +</p> +<p> +“How are you going to get in?” asked Roger, +as they came to a halt before the main door. +</p> +<p> +Dave tried the door, to find it locked. “Let +us walk around. The thieves may be in hiding +somewhere,” he suggested. +</p> +<p> +They made the circuit of the works, once falling +into a hole filled with snow. Nothing unusual +met their eyes, and each gazed questioningly at +the other. +</p> +<p> +“It can’t be a joke, can it?” suggested Roger. +“Nat Poole might——” +</p> +<p> +“No, I’m sure it was no joke,” broke in our +hero. “Wait, I’ll try that little side-door. I +think that is the one the watchman generally +uses.” +</p> +<p> +He ran to the door in question and pushed upon +it. It gave way, and with caution he entered the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_93'></a>93</span> +building. All was so dark he could see absolutely +nothing. +</p> +<p> +“I guess we’ll have to make a light,” he said, +as his chum followed him. “Wait till I see if +I have some matches.” +</p> +<p> +“Here are some,” answered Roger. “Wait, +I’ll strike a light. You keep hold of that gun—and +be ready to use it, if you have to!” +</p> +<p> +The senator’s son struck one of the matches and +held it aloft. By its faint rays the boys were +able to see some distance into the workshop into +which the doorway opened. Only machines and +work-benches met their gaze. On a nail hung a +lantern. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll light this,” said Dave, taking the +lantern down. “You can carry it, and I’ll keep +the gun handy.” +</p> +<p> +With lantern and gun held out before them, +and with their hearts beating wildly, the two +youths walked cautiously through the workshop. +They had to pass through two rooms before they +reached the entrance to the offices. The light +cast curious shadows on the walls and the machinery, +and more than once the lads fancied they +saw something moving. But each alarm proved +false. +</p> +<p> +“Why not call the watchman?” suggested +Roger, just before entering the offices. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_94'></a>94</span> +</p> +<p> +They raised their voices and then raised them +again. But no answer came back. +</p> +<p> +“Would he telephone from the office?” asked +the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“I suppose so—although there is another ’phone +in the shipping-room.” +</p> +<p> +The boys had now entered one of the new +offices. Just beyond was the old office, with the +two old safes, standing side by side. +</p> +<p> +“Look!” cried Roger, in dismay. +</p> +<p> +There was no need to utter the cry, for Dave +was himself staring at the scene before him. The +old office was in dire confusion, chairs and desks +being cast in various directions. All of the windows +were broken out and through these the chill +night air was entering. +</p> +<p> +But what interested the boys most of all was +the appearance of the two old safes. The door +to each had been blown asunder and lay in a +twisted mass on the floor. On top of the doors +lay a number of boxes and drawers that belonged +in the safes. Mingling with the wreckage were +pieces of gold and silver plate, and also gold and +silver knives, forks, and spoons. +</p> +<p> +“Here is where that explosion came from,” +said Dave. “What a pity it didn’t happen when +we were in front of the works! We might have +caught the rascals red-handed!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_95'></a>95</span> +</p> +<p> +“Listen! I hear somebody now!” exclaimed +Roger. “Maybe they are coming back.” +</p> +<p> +“No, that is my father who is calling!” replied +our hero. “I’ll let him in.” +</p> +<p> +He ran to the office door, and finding a key in +the lock, opened it. Roger swung the lantern, and +soon Dave’s father and his uncle came up, followed +by Mr. Wadsworth, who, being somewhat +portly, could not run so fast, and had to be +assisted by Phil. +</p> +<p> +“What have they done?” gasped the manufacturer. +“Tell me quickly! Did they blow open +the safes?” He was so agitated that he could +scarcely speak. +</p> +<p> +The boys did not reply, for there was no need. +Mr. Wadsworth gave one look and then sank +down on a desk, too overcome to make another +move. +</p> +<p> +“Did you see anything of the robbers, Dave?” +asked his father. +</p> +<p> +“Not a thing.” +</p> +<p> +“And where is the watchman?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know.” +</p> +<p> +“Strange, he must be somewhere around. He +told me of the robbery and then he said that they +were coming after him. Then the message was +suddenly cut off.” +</p> +<p> +“It looks like foul play to me,” said Dunston +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_96'></a>96</span> +Porter, seriously. “We had better light up and +investigate thoroughly.” +</p> +<p> +He walked to a switchboard on the wall and +began to experiment. Presently the electric lights +in the offices flashed up and then some of those +in the workshops were turned on. +</p> +<p> +By this time Oliver Wadsworth was in front of +one of the shattered safes. An inner door, somewhat +bent, was swung shut. With trembling fingers +the manufacturer pulled the door open and +felt into the compartment beyond. +</p> +<p> +“Gone! gone!” the others heard him mutter +hoarsely. “Gone!” +</p> +<p> +“What is it?” asked Mr. Porter. +</p> +<p> +“The casket—the Carwith casket is gone!” +And Mr. Wadsworth looked ready to faint as he +spoke. +</p> +<p> +“Were the jewels in it?” questioned Mr. Porter. +</p> +<p> +“Yes! yes!” +</p> +<p> +“All of them?” queried Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, every one. I placed them in the casket +myself before we locked up for the day.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe the casket is on the floor, under the +doors,” suggested Dave; but he had little hope +of such being the case. +</p> +<p> +All started a search, lasting for several minutes. +But it was useless, the casket with its precious +jewelry had disappeared. Oliver Wadsworth +tottered to a chair that Phil placed for him and +sank heavily upon it. +</p> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i004' id='i004'></a> +<img src="images/i004.jpg" alt="“THE CASKET—THE CARWITH CASKET IS GONE!”—Page 96." title=""/><br /> +<span class='caption'>“THE CASKET—THE CARWITH CASKET IS GONE!”—Page 96.</span> +</div> +<div><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_97'></a>97</span></div> +<p> +“Gone!” he muttered, in a strained voice. +“Gone! And if I cannot recover it, I shall be +ruined!” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_98'></a>98</span><a name='chXI' id='chXI'></a>CHAPTER XI—LOOKING FOR THE ROBBERS</h2> +<p> +All in the offices listened with interest to Oliver +Wadsworth’s words. +</p> +<p> +“The jewels were probably what the rascals +were after,” was Mr. Porter’s comment. “Evidently +they did not touch any of the gold plate +or silverware.” +</p> +<p> +“That shows they must have known the jewels +were here,” said Dunston Porter. +</p> +<p> +“Couldn’t they find out about them from the +workmen?” questioned Dave. +</p> +<p> +“I suppose so—although it is a rule of the +works for the men to keep silent regarding +precious stones. No one but myself and the general +manager are supposed to know just what we +have on hand.” +</p> +<p> +“We must get busy and see if we cannot follow +the robbers!” cried David Porter. “No use in +wasting time here now. Let us scatter in all +directions. One can go to the railroad station and +the others to the roads leading out of town. We +may pick up some clew.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_99'></a>99</span> +</p> +<p> +“The police, we’ll have to notify them!” said +Roger. +</p> +<p> +“Yes! yes! Call the police up on the telephone!” +ejaculated Mr. Wadsworth, starting to +his feet. +</p> +<p> +Dave ran to the end of the office, where a +telephone rested on a stand. The shock of the +explosion had severed the wires. +</p> +<p> +“It’s out of commission,” he said. “I’ll have +to use the one in the shipping-room.” +</p> +<p> +He left the offices, and made his way through +two of the workrooms. Phil went with him and +so did Roger. +</p> +<p> +“This will be a terrible blow for Mr. Wadsworth,” +was the comment of the shipowner’s +son. +</p> +<p> +“He said if he didn’t get the jewels back it +would ruin him,” added Roger. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we must get them back!” cried Dave. +“Why, they are worth a fortune!” +</p> +<p> +In the shipping-room all was dark, and the +boys had to first light a match and then turn on +the electric illumination. The telephone was near +by. +</p> +<p> +“Ruined!” cried our hero, as he beheld the +wrenched-away receiver and transmitter. +</p> +<p> +“Here is where they must have caught the +watchman while he was telephoning to Mr. Wadsworth!” +said Phil. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_100'></a>100</span> +</p> +<p> +“That must be it, Phil. We’ll have to go +to the police station, or find another telephone.” +</p> +<p> +The boys rushed back to the offices and told of +what they had discovered. Then Phil and Roger +volunteered to run to the police station, over a +quarter of a mile away. +</p> +<p> +“If you’ll do that, I’ll go to the railroad station,” +said Dave. “I may be able to pick up +some clew. The twelve-fifteen train is almost due +and those rascals may try to board it. If I see anybody +that looks suspicious, I’ll have him detained.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t get into trouble!” called his father +after him. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll try to take care of myself, Dad,” he answered. +</p> +<p> +Dave ran the whole distance to the depot. As +he went along he kept his eyes wide open for a +possible appearance of the robbers, peering down +side-streets and alleyways, and into vacant lots. +But he saw nobody until close to the station and +then he received a sudden hail from in front of +a coal office. +</p> +<p> +“Hi, you! Where are you going in such a +hurry?” And a man in a dark blue uniform +stepped into view, night-stick in hand. +</p> +<p> +“Just the man I want to see!” cried our hero. +“I guess you know me, Mr. Anderson. Come +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_101'></a>101</span> +on down to the depot, quick! We must get there +before the train comes in!” +</p> +<p> +“Why, it’s Dave Porter!” exclaimed the policeman. +“What’s the row, Dave?” +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Wadsworth’s jewelry works has been +robbed. They have just gone to notify headquarters. +I thought maybe the robbers might try +to get away on the train. We want to stop any +suspicious characters.” +</p> +<p> +“The jewelry works robbed? You don’t say! +All right, I’ll go right along. Hope we can catch +’em!” And Officer Anderson swung up beside +Dave, and both continued on a dog-trot to the +depot. +</p> +<p> +Nobody but the station master was in sight. +Dave and the policeman thought it best to keep +out of sight. +</p> +<p> +“You stay at one end and I’ll stay at the other,” +said the officer. “If you see anybody suspicious, +whistle twice and I’ll come on the double-quick.” +</p> +<p> +At last they heard the train coming. Nobody +had appeared, but presently Dave caught sight of +a burly figure sneaking beside several empty +freight cars on a side-track. He gave the signal +for aid and then sneaked after the man. By this +time the train had rolled into the little station. +</p> +<p> +Only a well-known young man of Crumville +alighted, accompanied by an elderly lady, his +mother. There were no passengers to get aboard, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_102'></a>102</span> +and the conductor swung his lantern for the engineer +to go ahead again. +</p> +<p> +At that moment the burly fellow near the freight +cars made a dive for the trucks of a baggage car, +with the evident intention of stealing a ride. He +had almost reached the trucks when Dave came +up behind him and hauled him back. +</p> +<p> +“Not so fast!” said our hero, firmly. “I +want to talk to you.” +</p> +<p> +“Hey, you let me alone!” growled the burly +fellow. He was ragged and unshaven and evidently +a tramp. +</p> +<p> +“Where did you come from?” went on Dave, +and he continued to hold the man, while the train +moved off. +</p> +<p> +“Wot business is that o’ yours?” was the +sulky return. “Wot did yer make me miss that +train for?” +</p> +<p> +“You’ll find out in a minute or two,” answered +our hero, and just then Officer Anderson came running +up. +</p> +<p> +“Got somebody, have you?” he panted. +</p> +<p> +“I guess he is only a tramp,” was Dave’s reply. +“But we may as well hold him and see what he +has got to say.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s Applejack Joe,” said the policeman, as he +eyed the prisoner. “We warned him out of town +this morning. What was he going to do, steal +a ride?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_103'></a>103</span> +</p> +<p> +“I think so. I caught him making for the +trucks of a baggage car.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s Joe’s favorite way of riding,” chuckled +the policeman. +</p> +<p> +“I can’t see why that young feller had to stop +me,” growled the tramp. “You folks wants me +to git out, an’ when I start yer hold me back.” +</p> +<p> +“Why didn’t you go this morning, if you were +told to go?” asked Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Say, I don’t move as swift as some folks. +Wot’s the use? Take yer time, is my motter.” +</p> +<p> +“Where have you been for the last three or +four hours?” asked the policeman. +</p> +<p> +“Where have I been? It won’t do you no +good to know, cap’n.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, you tell us, just the same,” said Dave. +“I want to know if you have seen any other men +sneaking around town to-night. If you have, it +may pay you to tell me about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Provided we can land on those other chaps,” +put in the officer. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I see; somethin’ wrong, hey?” And the +tramp leered unpleasantly. “Want to pull me +into it, mebbe.” +</p> +<p> +“You are pulled in already,” answered Officer +Anderson. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, don’t arrest me, an’ I’ll tell you everything +I know!” pleaded Applejack Joe. He had +once been in the Crumville jail in winter and found +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_104'></a>104</span> +it very cold and uninviting, and he wanted no more +of it. +</p> +<p> +“What do you know?” questioned Dave. +“Answer quick. There has been a big robbery +here, and if you can help us to catch the men maybe +you’ll get a reward.” +</p> +<p> +“Reward? Say, I’m your huckleberry, young +man. Wot do I know?” The tramp rubbed his +unshaven chin. “Yes, that’s them, I’m sure of +it,” he murmured, half to himself. +</p> +<p> +“Who?” demanded Dave, impatiently. +</p> +<p> +“Them two fellers I see down at Casterbury’s +stock-farm this afternoon. They had a bag wot +looked suspicious to me, an’, say; did they use +dynamite, or somethin’ like that?” +</p> +<p> +“They did!” +</p> +<p> +“Then that’s them! Cos why? Cos when they +walked past where I was hidin’, I heard one of ’em +say, ‘Be careful o’ that, we don’t want it to go +off an’ git blowed up.’” +</p> +<p> +“Two men?” came from the policeman. +“Did you know them?” +</p> +<p> +The tramp shook his head. +</p> +<p> +“Never set eyes on ’em before. But I see ’em +after that, down back of that jewelry works over +there,” and he threw up his hand in the direction +of Mr. Wadsworth’s place. “Say, is that +the place they robbed?” he continued, with some +show of interest. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_105'></a>105</span> +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” answered Dave. “Now tell me how +those fellows looked.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t tell yer that, exactly, fer my eyesight +ain’t none too good, I git so much smoke an’ cinders +in ’em from the railroad. But they was +kinder young fellers, I think, and putty good educated—not +common fellers like me. Somethin’ +like yerself. An’ they was dressed putty good, +long overcoats, and soft hats wot was pulled down +over their faces.” +</p> +<p> +“Did you hear them speak any names?” asked +Officer Anderson. +</p> +<p> +“Nary a name.” +</p> +<p> +“Have you seen the two men during the last +hour or so?” asked Dave. +</p> +<p> +“No, ain’t see ’em since I spotted ’em back +of the jewelry factory. That was about seven, +or maybe eight o’clock.” +</p> +<p> +“Did they go into the works then?” +</p> +<p> +“No, they just stood by the back fence talkin’. +I thought they had somethin’ to do with that new +buildin’ going up there, so I didn’t think nuthin’ +more about it.” +</p> +<p> +“I see. Well, Joe, I guess you had better come +with us for the present,” went on Dave. “We’ll +want your testimony.” +</p> +<p> +“It ain’t fair to arrest me!” whined the tramp. +</p> +<p> +“We won’t call it arrest,” went on Dave, before +the policeman could speak. “You’ll be detained, that’s +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_106'></a>106</span> +all, and I’ll see that you don’t lose +anything by it.” +</p> +<p> +“All right then, if that’s the way you’re goin’ +to put it,” answered Applejack Joe resignedly. +“But I hope you’ll see to it that I gits something +to eat an’ a warm place to sleep.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll remember,” returned our hero. +</p> +<p> +There seemed nothing now to do but to return +to the jewelry works and this Dave did, taking +the tramp and the officer with him. When they +arrived they found the chief of police there, with +two officers. The chief was questioning Mr. +Wadsworth and the distracted manufacturer was +telling what he knew about the crime that had +been committed. +</p> +<p> +The arrival of those from the depot, and what +the tramp had to tell, put a new face on the matter. +One of the officers said he had seen the two +strangers with the tool-bag, but had put them down +for traveling salesmen visiting Crumville on business. +</p> +<p> +“They are undoubtedly the guilty parties,” said +the chief. “The only question is: Where did they +go to?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, they didn’t take that twelve-fifteen +train,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Then they either got out of town by the use +of a horse or an auto, or else they are here yet,” +said Mr. Wadsworth. “Oh, catch them! Catch +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_107'></a>107</span> +them if you can! I must get those jewels back! +I’ll give a big reward for their safe return.” +</p> +<p> +“Have you heard from Phil or Roger yet?” +</p> +<p> +“No, Dave.” +</p> +<p> +“They may bring in some word.” +</p> +<p> +“Let us hope so,” groaned the manufacturer. +</p> +<p> +“What became of the watchman?” +</p> +<p> +“That is a mystery. Perhaps they carried him +off and threw him into the river, or something +like that!” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, they wouldn’t be as rascally as all that!” +returned Dave, in horror. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps. Some robbers are very desperate +characters.” +</p> +<p> +At that moment came a cry from one of the +workrooms, where one of the officers had gone to +take a look around. +</p> +<p> +“What is it, Carr?” called the chief of police. +</p> +<p> +“Here’s poor Tony Wells,” was the answer. +“He’s in bad shape. Better somebody run for +a doctor at once!” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_108'></a>108</span><a name='chXII' id='chXII'></a>CHAPTER XII—THE TELLTALE CIGARETTE BOX</h2> +<p> +The watchman was indeed in bad shape. He +had been found thrown under a workbench, and +just returning to consciousness. He had a cut +over his left ear and another on his forehead, from +which the blood had flowed freely. +</p> +<p> +“Must have struck him with a club, or an +iron bar,” was the opinion of the chief, as the +injured man was carried into the office and placed +on some chair cushions. Here his wounds were +washed and bound up, while one officer ran to +get a doctor who lived not a great distance off. +</p> +<p> +It was some little time before Tony Wells, +who was nearly seventy years of age, opened his +eyes to stare around him. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t—don’t hit me again!” he murmured. +“I—I didn’t touch you!” +</p> +<p> +“It’s all right, Tony!” said the chief. “Those +fellows are gone. You’re among friends.” +</p> +<p> +“They—knocked me down!” gasped the old +watchman. “I—I—tried to telephone—after the +explosion, but—but——” He could not go on, +and suddenly relapsed again into unconsciousness. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_109'></a>109</span> +</p> +<p> +“Poor fellow!” said Mr. Wadsworth, tenderly. +“We must do what we can for him.” +</p> +<p> +“Is anything missing besides the jewels?” +asked Dave, while they were waiting for the doctor +to come, and waiting to hear from the others who +had gone out. +</p> +<p> +“No, Dave. But that is enough. If they are +not recovered, I shall be ruined.” +</p> +<p> +“Can they hold you responsible for the loss?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, for when I took the jewels to re-set I +guaranteed the safe return of each jewel. I had +to do that because they were afraid some workmen +might try to substitute other jewels not so +good—which is sometimes done.” +</p> +<p> +“And you said they were worth seventy-five +thousand dollars?” +</p> +<p> +“All of that.” +</p> +<p> +“Those robbers certainly made a haul.” +</p> +<p> +“It drives me crazy to think about it,” groaned +Oliver Wadsworth. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps the others who went out will catch +them,” answered our hero, hopefully. +</p> +<p> +Soon the doctor arrived and took charge of old +Tony Wells, whom he knew well. As Wells was +a widower, living alone, the doctor said he would +take the old man to his own home, where he +could have constant attention. +</p> +<p> +“He is already in a fever,” said the physician. +“We had better not try to question him at present. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_110'></a>110</span> +It will only excite him the more.” And a +little later the sufferer was placed on a litter and +carried to the doctor’s residence. +</p> +<p> +By this time the news was circulating that the +Wadsworth jewelry works had been robbed, and +many persons spent the rest of the night looking +for the two young men who were supposed to be +guilty of the crime. Oliver Wadsworth and an +officer remained at the offices, guarding the +wrecked place and looking for clews of the evildoers. +But nothing in the way of evidence against +the robbers was brought to light, excepting that +they had used several drills and some dynamite +on the two old safes, probably blowing them up +simultaneously. They had taken the tool-bag with +its contents with them and also another small +valise, belonging to one of Mr. Wadsworth’s +traveling salesmen. +</p> +<p> +“I can’t understand why Tony Wells didn’t discover +them when they first came in,” said +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe he did and they made him a prisoner,” +suggested Mr. Wadsworth. “Tony was very +faithful—the best watchman I ever had.” +</p> +<p> +Daylight came at last and still the search for the +two robbers was kept up. In the meantime, telegrams +and telephone messages had been sent in +all directions. To stimulate the searchers Mr. +Wadsworth offered a reward of one thousand dollars +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_111'></a>111</span> +for the recovery of the jewels and this reward +was later on increased to five thousand dollars. +</p> +<p> +When Tony Wells was well enough to tell his +story he said he had been going the rounds of the +works when he suddenly found himself confronted +by two masked men. He had started to cry out +and run for help when the men had seized him +and thrown him down and bound him fast to a +work-bench. Then the men had gone to the offices, +and later on had come the explosion. He knew +they were blowing open the safes and did what +he could to free himself. At last he managed to +get free, but found himself too weak to run for +help. He had dragged himself to the telephone in +the shipping-room and was sending his message to +Mr. Wadsworth when the masked men had again +appeared and knocked him down. That was all +he remembered until the time he was found, as +already described. +</p> +<p> +“You did not see the faces of the two men?” +asked Oliver Wadsworth. +</p> +<p> +“No, sir, they were all covered with black +masks. But I think the fellows was rather young-like,” +answered the old watchman. “Both of +’em was about the size of Dave Porter,—but +neither of ’em was Dave,—I know that by the +voices,” he went on, hastily. +</p> +<p> +“No, Dave was at home with me,” said Oliver +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_112'></a>112</span> +Wadsworth. “But he and one of his friends +passed the works just before the explosion.” +</p> +<p> +The news of the robbery had upset the Wadsworth +household completely. Mrs. Wadsworth +was as much distressed as her husband, and Jessie +was as pale as if seriously ill. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Dave, supposing the jewels are not recovered!” +said Jessie, when they met in the hallway. +“It will ruin father,—I heard him tell +mamma so!” +</p> +<p> +“We are going to get them back—we’ve simply +got to do it,” Dave replied. +</p> +<p> +“But how? Nobody seems to know what has +become of the robbers.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, just wait, Jessie. We are sure to get +some trace of them sooner or later.” +</p> +<p> +“What makes you so hopeful, Dave?” and +now the girl suddenly clutched his arm. “Have +you a clew?” +</p> +<p> +“I think so, but I am not sure. I am going +to talk to your father about it, and then I am going +to take another look around Crumville and around +the offices.” +</p> +<p> +Dave’s father and his Uncle Dunston had been +out all day, and so had Phil and Roger and Ben, +and a score of others, including the officers of the +law. But nothing had been seen or heard of the +mysterious men with the tool-bag. Another tramp +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_113'></a>113</span> +had been rounded up, but he knew absolutely +nothing of the crime and was let go again. +</p> +<p> +Oliver Wadsworth’s face was white and drawn +and he looked as if he had suddenly grown five +years older. He had a long, private conversation +with Dave’s father and Dunston Porter, and all +three men looked very grave when the conference +came to an end. +</p> +<p> +There was good cause for this seriousness. The +new addition to the jewelry works had placed Mr. +Wadsworth in debt. The Porters had lent him +twenty thousand dollars, and, just then, could lend +him no more, having a number of obligations of +their own to meet. +</p> +<p> +The Carwith jewels were the property of Mr. +and Mrs. Ridgeway Osgood Carwith, of Fifth +Avenue, New York City. The Carwiths were now +on a trip around the world, but were expected +home some time in the spring. Mr. Wadsworth +had agreed to re-set the jewels according to designs +already accepted by the millionaire and his +wife, and had guaranteed the safe return of the +jewels, re-set as specified, not later than the first +of the following May. As the millionaire was a +strict business man he had demanded a bond for +the safe return of his property, and this bond had +been given by Mr. Wadsworth, indorsed by David +Breslow Porter and Dunston Porter. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_114'></a>114</span> +</p> +<p> +Thus it will readily be seen that the millionaire +and his wife were amply secured. If they did not +get the jewels back they would demand the payment +of the bond, worth seventy-five thousand dollars, +and Mr. Wadsworth and the Porters would +have to make good. +</p> +<p> +On the second day after the robbery, Dave, +Roger, and Phil went down to the jewelry works +and began a close investigation on their own account. +Dave had mentioned something to his +chums that had caused them to open their eyes in +astonishment. +</p> +<p> +An hour was spent around the offices, and then +Phil picked up an empty cigarette case. He took +it to Dave and Roger and both looked at it with +keen interest. +</p> +<p> +“I guess that is another clew,” said our hero. +“Let us look around some more.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m going for the train now,” said the senator’s +son, a little later. “And as soon as I find +Hooker Montgomery I’ll let you know.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and make him come here, whether he +wants to or not,” cried Dave. +</p> +<p> +“You leave that to me,” answered Roger, +grimly. +</p> +<p> +Oliver Wadsworth had been interviewing a +private detective, and soon the man left, stating +he thought he could lay his hands on the guilty +parties. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_115'></a>115</span> +</p> +<p> +“I’ll look for Tom Basnett,” said the detective. +“This looks like one of his jobs.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t care whose job it is—I want the jewels +back,” said Mr. Wadsworth, wearily. He had +not slept since the crime had been committed. +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Wadsworth, Phil and I would like to +talk to you in private,” said Dave, when he could +get the chance. +</p> +<p> +“You have some clew, Dave?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I want to tell you something, and then +you can judge for yourself.” +</p> +<p> +“Very well, come with me,” answered the +manufacturer, and led the way to a little side-room, +used by the salesmen for exhibiting wares to possible +customers. +</p> +<p> +“I want to tell you all about something that +happened early in the winter, while I was at Oak +Hall,” said Dave. And then he told of how he +had called on the fake doctor, Hooker Montgomery, +and how he had been attacked from behind +and made a prisoner, and carried off to a +house in the woods, the particulars of which have +already been set down in “Dave Porter and His +Rivals.” +</p> +<p> +“The fellows who carried me off were the doctor +and the driver, who was only a tool, and two +fellows who have caused me a lot of trouble in +the past, Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell,” went +on our hero. “When I got away I tried to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_116'></a>116</span> +follow up Jasniff and Merwell, but they got +away from me, and so did the driver get away. +But one day I found Hooker Montgomery, +and by threatening to have him arrested I made +him confess to the truth, which was that Jasniff +and Merwell had hired him to help get me in +their power. At first they told Montgomery it +was only a schoolboy trick, and he said he believed +them, but, later on, it leaked out that Jasniff and +Merwell had another motive in making me a +prisoner.” +</p> +<p> +“And that motive——?” began Oliver Wadsworth, +with deep interest. +</p> +<p> +“Doctor Montgomery said that Jasniff and +Merwell had in mind to drug me and take me to +some place a good distance from Oak Hall. He +said he also heard them speak of robbing a jewelry +works, and I was to be drugged and left in the +factory,—to make it appear as if I had done the +deed and as if the blowing up of a safe had stunned +me.” +</p> +<p> +“Dave, is this possible!” exclaimed the manufacturer. +</p> +<p> +“It is true, Mr. Wadsworth,” said Phil. “I +was along and so was Roger at the time. Montgomery +couldn’t give many details, but he said +he thought Jasniff and Merwell were cold-blooded +villains and he wanted nothing more to do with +them.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_117'></a>117</span> +</p> +<p> +“This looks as if those rascals, Jasniff and +Merwell, had come here.” +</p> +<p> +“I believe they did come,” went on Dave. +“And here is one clew we have already picked up +against them.” And he held up the empty cigarette +box. +</p> +<p> +“What is that? Only a cigarette box. How +can that be a clew?” +</p> +<p> +“I will tell you. Both Jasniff and Merwell are +inveterate cigarette smokers. I have seen them +smoking many times. They smoke a Turkish +brand of cigarettes, having a peculiar blue and +gold band around the box. This is the same kind +of a box, and I am convinced that this box was +emptied and thrown away in your offices by Jasniff +or Merwell.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_118'></a>118</span><a name='chXIII' id='chXIII'></a>CHAPTER XIII—DARK DAYS</h2> +<p> +Oliver Wadsworth listened to Dave’s words +with deep interest. Then he shrugged his shoulders. +</p> +<p> +“That sounds pretty good, Dave, were it not +for one thing. Do you imagine that two masked +fellows, bent on blowing open safes, would stop +to light and smoke cigarettes?” +</p> +<p> +“I think Merwell and Jasniff would, Merwell +especially. When Link is nervous the first thing +he does is to take out a cigarette and light it. It’s +an almost unconscious habit with him.” +</p> +<p> +“This story about what that doctor said interests +me most of all,” went on the manufacturer. +“I think we ought to have a talk with him. For +all we know, he may be one of the guilty parties.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I don’t think he is that kind. Besides, +he was very angry at Merwell and Jasniff and +wanted nothing more to do with them.” +</p> +<p> +“The detective who was here thought he had +a clew against a professional bank burglar. Personally, +I think this looks more like the work of +professionals than fellows just out of school,” said +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_119'></a>119</span> +the manufacturer; and there, for the time being, +the matter rested. +</p> +<p> +During the day two more detectives appeared +and went over the ground, as the other officials had +done. One thought he saw in the robbery the +hand of a criminal known as Red Andrews. +</p> +<p> +“This is just the way Red Andrews would go +at a job,” said the detective. “He was sent up +for robbing a private banker some years ago, and +he got out two months ago. He was in New York—I +saw him on Fifth Avenue, not far from the +Carwith mansion. He may have heard about the +jewels there. I am going to look for him.” And +he departed on a hunt for Red Andrews. +</p> +<p> +It was not until two days later that Roger came +back to Crumville. His face showed his disappointment. +</p> +<p> +“Such mean luck!” he exclaimed, when he met +Dave, Phil, and Ben. “I went to four towns, +looking for Hooker Montgomery, and at last I +found out that he had left the east several days +ago.” +</p> +<p> +“Where did he go to?” questioned our hero. +</p> +<p> +“The folks I met couldn’t tell exactly, +but they thought to visit a rich aunt in the far +west.” +</p> +<p> +This was a great disappointment, for they had +hoped to learn much more concerning the plans +of Jasniff and Merwell, from the fake doctor. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_120'></a>120</span> +</p> +<p> +“We might send him a letter, to his last residence. +Maybe the post-office authorities will forward +it,” suggested Phil. +</p> +<p> +“I did that,” answered the senator’s son. “I +told him that I wanted to hear from him at once, +and that it would be money in his pocket to write +or to telegraph to me. I didn’t mention your +name, Dave, for I thought he might hear of this +robbery and get suspicious.” +</p> +<p> +It was ideal weather for skating and sleighing, +but none of the young folks at the Wadsworth +mansion felt like going out for fun. All could +see that the older folks were much worried, and +consequently, they were worried, too. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Dave, what if those jewels are never recovered?” +said Laura to her brother, when they +were alone. “It will just about ruin Mr. Wadsworth, +Uncle Dunston says.” +</p> +<p> +“Let us hope for the best, Laura.” +</p> +<p> +“I heard you and the other boys talking about +Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes?” +</p> +<p> +“Do you really imagine they had something +to do with it?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I think so, and so do Phil, Ben, and +Roger. But the detectives and Mr. Wadsworth +think the work was done by professionals. They +don’t think that fellows like Nick and Link would +be equal to the job.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_121'></a>121</span> +</p> +<p> +“But if you think Merwell and Jasniff guilty, +why don’t you go after them and find out?” +</p> +<p> +“We don’t know where they are.” +</p> +<p> +“Aren’t they with their folks?” +</p> +<p> +“No.” +</p> +<p> +“Are you sure?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes. The Jasniffs are traveling aboard and +Mr. Merwell is in Philadelphia. We sent to Mr. +Merwell—through an outsider—and learned that +he didn’t know where Link was just now, said he +had written that he was going on a tour south for +the winter. My private opinion is that Mr. Merwell +finds Link hard to manage and is glad to get +rid of him.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you suppose he did go south?” +</p> +<p> +“He might—after this affair here.” +</p> +<p> +“They didn’t say what part of the south he +went to?” +</p> +<p> +“They said Florida. But Florida is pretty big, +you know,” and Dave smiled faintly. +</p> +<p> +“Jessie is awfully downcast over this, and so +is Mrs. Wadsworth—in fact, we all are.” +</p> +<p> +“I know it, Laura.” Dave drew a long breath. +“It’s awfully hard to sit still and do nothing. +I imagine Mr. Wadsworth can’t sleep for thinking +of the affair.” +</p> +<p> +“I heard Mrs. Wadsworth talking last night +to him. I didn’t mean to listen, Dave, but before +I could get away I heard her say that if it was +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_122'></a>122</span> +necessary she would give up this house to live in +and move to a smaller place! Think of it! Why, +her very heart is set on this house and these fine +grounds! And Jessie thinks the world of them, +too!” +</p> +<p> +“It would be awfully hard if they did have to +give them up, Laura.” +</p> +<p> +“Dave, can’t father or Uncle Dunston help +them, if they need help?” +</p> +<p> +“They have helped Mr. Wadsworth already—loaned +him twenty thousand dollars so that he +could put that new addition to the works. They +also indorsed his note covering the safe return of +the jewels. If those jewels aren’t gotten back, +and Mr. Wadsworth can’t make good on that note, +father and Uncle Dunston will have to pay the +money.” +</p> +<p> +“All of it?” +</p> +<p> +“As much as Mr. Wadsworth can’t pay. And +the worst of the whole matter is, Laura, just at +present father and Uncle Dunston have their +ready money tied up in such a manner that they +can’t get hold of it excepting at a great loss. Oh, +it certainly is a terrible state of affairs!” And +Dave shook his head, gravely. +</p> +<p> +During that week Ben had Shadow Hamilton +and Buster Beggs visit him. Of course, the +new arrivals had to hear all about the robbery, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_123'></a>123</span> +and they came over with Ben to call on the other +boys, and on the girls. +</p> +<p> +“This is fierce!” was Buster’s comment. +“And Ben says you rather suspect Merwell and +Jasniff,” he added, in a whisper. +</p> +<p> +“We do, but don’t say anything to any outsiders +about it,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Say, that puts me in mind of a story,” said +Shadow. “A little girl once——” +</p> +<p> +“Wow! Cut it out, Shadow!” burst out +Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Stories don’t go with robberies,” supplemented +Roger. +</p> +<p> +“Let him tell it,” put in Dave, with a faint +smile. “It will relieve his mind, and I guess I +need a little fun to brace me up—I’ve been so +depressed lately.” +</p> +<p> +“This isn’t so very much of a story,” went on +Shadow, as all looked at him. “Dave telling +Buster not to let outsiders know put me in mind +of it. Once the mother of a little girl told her +that her uncle had been naughty and had been +put in prison for it. Said the mother, ‘Now, +Lucy, don’t tell anybody.’ So Lucy went out to +play and pretty soon, when she had all her companions +around her she said, ‘What do you think +my ma said? She said that when anybody has an +uncle in prison, like my uncle is, you mustn’t tell +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_124'></a>124</span> +anybody. So I’m not going to tell a single person!’” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I guess the boys know what I mean,” +said Dave, after a short laugh. “I want you to +keep this to yourselves. Don’t spread it any +further. It may be that I am mistaken, and if so, +and Merwell and Jasniff heard of what I have +said, they would come down on me like a ton of +bricks—and I’d not blame them.” +</p> +<p> +In the afternoon, urged by Mrs. Wadsworth, +the boys went skating, taking the girls with them. +On the ice they met Nat Poole, but the money-lender’s +son did not speak to them, indeed he did +his best to keep out of their way. +</p> +<p> +“He hasn’t forgotten New Year’s Eve,” said +Ben. “He had better keep his distance, unless +he wants to get into more trouble.” +</p> +<p> +“Wonder what he thinks of the robbery?” +mused Dave. +</p> +<p> +“We might get Buster to pump him,” suggested +Phil. “He is on pretty good terms with +Nat,—that is, they are not open enemies.” +</p> +<p> +Buster was appealed to and he readily agreed to +do the “pumping,” provided the money-lender’s +son had anything to say. He skated off by himself +and then threw himself in Nat’s way, and was +gone the best part of half an hour. +</p> +<p> +“Well, did you learn anything?” queried +Roger, when the stout youth returned. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_125'></a>125</span> +</p> +<p> +“I guess I did!” cried Buster. “Say, I think +Nat Poole is about as mean as they make ’em!” +he burst out. “And he hasn’t a grain of good, +hard common-sense!” +</p> +<p> +“What did he say?” demanded Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, he said a lot of things, about the robbery, +and about the Wadsworths and the Porters. +First he said he didn’t believe the jewels were +nearly as valuable as Mr. Wadsworth represented +them to be, and the manufacturer was kicking up +a big fuss just as a sort of advertisement. Then +he said there was a report that Dave had been +seen in front of the works just a few minutes +before the explosion, and that that looked mighty +suspicious to him.” +</p> +<p> +“The mean fellow!” muttered Roger. +</p> +<p> +“I told him that you and Roger were going +to the Wadsworth house at the time, and were +home when the watchman telephoned, but he only +tossed his head as if he didn’t believe a word of +it, and said he guessed Dave could tell something +if he was of a mind to talk.” +</p> +<p> +“If that isn’t Poole to a T!” cried Phil. +</p> +<p> +“If I were you, Dave, I’d punch his head for +him,” was Shadow’s advice. +</p> +<p> +“That wouldn’t do any good,” said Ben. +“You can’t stop Nat from talking any more than +you can stop water from running out of a +sieve.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_126'></a>126</span> +</p> +<p> +“Which puts me in mind of another story,” +burst out Shadow, eagerly. “Once two men——” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Shadow, another?” cried Buster, reproachfully. +</p> +<p> +“I know that story—it’s moss-covered with +age,” announced Roger. +</p> +<p> +“What is it?” demanded the story-teller of +Oak Hall. +</p> +<p> +“Two men—bet—carry water in a sieve—bet +taken—water frozen. Ha! ha! Shadow, I got you +that time.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, it’s a good story anyway,” answered +Shadow, ruefully. +</p> +<p> +“I shan’t attempt to stop Nat unless he makes +some direct accusation,” said Dave, calmly. +“What would be the use? It would only make +matters worse.” +</p> +<p> +“If you took notice of what he says, some folks +would begin to think there was something in it,” +said Phil. “Yes, better drop Nat. He isn’t +worth bothering about, anyway. Just the same, +it is mean for him to speak in this fashion.” +</p> +<p> +“He wouldn’t be Nat Poole if he didn’t,” retorted +Roger. +</p> +<p> +Despite this incident, the boys and girls managed +to have a good time on the ice, and for an +hour or two Dave forgot his troubles and those of +his friends. +</p> +<p> +“What are you going to do for the rest of the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_127'></a>127</span> +vacation, Dave?” said Roger, that evening. +“You know you promised to come to my home.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and you promised to visit me, too,” added +Phil. “You haven’t been to our house in a long +time.” +</p> +<p> +“To tell the truth, I haven’t the heart to go +anywhere,” answered Dave, soberly. “I guess I +had better stay here and see if something doesn’t +turn up.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I can’t blame you,” said the senator’s +son, and Phil said the same. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_128'></a>128</span><a name='chXIV' id='chXIV'></a>CHAPTER XIV—OFF FOR THE SOUTH</h2> +<p> +Two days later, when Roger was packing up, +getting ready to return home, he received a letter +from Luke Watson that filled him with interest. +Luke had gone to St. Augustine, Florida, to join +his folks, who were spending the winter there. +</p> +<p> +“Here’s news!” burst out the senator’s son, as +he came rushing to Dave and Phil with the epistle. +“This letter is from Luke Watson, you know his +folks are in Florida. Well, on his way to St. +Augustine, Luke stopped for a day at Jacksonville. +Listen to what he says: +</p> +<p> +“‘I was walking down one of the main streets +of Jacksonville, looking into the shop windows, +when what do you think? I saw Link Merwell +and Nick Jasniff. You could have knocked me +over with a feather, for I hadn’t imagined that +they were anywhere near. They were nattily +dressed and each carried a small valise, and they +were buying caps and some other things for a sea +voyage. I went into the shop and called to them, +and my! both of them jumped as if they were shot, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_129'></a>129</span> +and Merwell got so pale I thought he was going +to faint. I said “Hello,” but they didn’t answer +to that, and Jasniff at once wanted to know if I +was alone. When I told him I was he seemed +mightily relieved, and Merwell looked relieved, +too. They wanted to know what I was doing +there and I told them. Then I asked what they +were doing, but I couldn’t get any straight answer. +Merwell started to say something about going to +sea, but Jasniff stopped him short, and said they +guessed they would go back to New York, where +they had come from. +</p> +<p> +“‘It was awful funny—they positively looked +scared to death, and while they were talking to +me they looked over my shoulders, as if on their +guard against somebody. I asked them what +they had been doing since they left Rockville, and +they said not much of anything, just traveling +around. They seemed to have plenty of money, +for just as I went into the shop I saw Merwell pay +for something from a big roll of greenbacks. +</p> +<p> +“‘After I left them, I got a bit curious about +the pair, and so I watched them come from the +shop and walk down to one of the docks and go +aboard a big four-masted schooner. I hung +around a little and pretty soon they came from the +schooner and went up to one of the big hotels, and +there I lost sight of them. Each had his little +valise with him, but they weren’t big enough for +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_130'></a>130</span> +much clothing. My, but they were scared! I +fancy they thought I might pitch into them for +the mean things they did in the past. But I didn’t +want to start any row.’” +</p> +<p> +“Is that all he says?” demanded Dave, after +the senator’s son had finished. +</p> +<p> +“That’s all he says about Merwell and Jasniff +and their doings.” +</p> +<p> +“Doesn’t he mention the name of that schooner, +or the hotel?” asked Phil. +</p> +<p> +“No.” +</p> +<p> +“Did you say Luke was going to Jacksonville?” +asked our hero. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, his whole family are down there.” +</p> +<p> +“Then I could telegraph to him and he could +give me the name of the hotel, and of the +schooner.” +</p> +<p> +“Dave, what do you make out of this?” demanded +the senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“I make out of it that Merwell and Jasniff +are guilty!” burst out Dave. “They went from +here to Florida, and now they have either gone to +sea, or are going, as soon as that schooner sails. +Do you notice what Luke says about their being +scared almost to death when they saw him? They +evidently thought some of us, or the officers of the +law, were with him.” +</p> +<p> +“And the little valises!” burst out the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_131'></a>131</span> +shipowner’s son. “Perhaps they contain the +jewels!” +</p> +<p> +“Would they be foolish enough to carry them +around like that?” questioned Roger. “Wouldn’t +they hide them?” +</p> +<p> +“They may be looking for some good hiding-place, +or some place where they can sell them,” +answered Dave. “Remember, Jasniff and Merwell +are green at this business—they wouldn’t go +at it like professionals. If they were professionals, +they wouldn’t have acted so scared.” +</p> +<p> +“That is true. What will you do, tell Mr. +Wadsworth of this?” +</p> +<p> +“I think I’ll tell my father and my Uncle +Dunston first. Mr. Wadsworth doesn’t place +much credit in the story of Merwell and Jasniff’s +guilt. He thinks the detectives are on the right +track.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, possibly they are,” admitted Phil. +“But I must say, this looks mighty suspicious to +me.” +</p> +<p> +“I have half a mind to take matters in my own +hands and run down to Jacksonville,” went on +our hero. “Who knows but what I might find +Merwell and Jasniff? If I did, I could stop +them and make them give an account of themselves +by making that old charge of abduction +against them, and that charge of having used +my name.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_132'></a>132</span> +</p> +<p> +“Say, that’s an idea!” cried Roger. “And +say, I’d like to go with you.” +</p> +<p> +“So would I,” added Phil. “We might go +down in one of my father’s ships.” +</p> +<p> +“Too slow, Phil—the limited express for this +trip,” answered Dave. “But I must talk it over +with dad first,” he added. +</p> +<p> +“We have got over three weeks before school +opens again,” pursued the senator’s son. “We +could go down to Florida and back easily in that +time.” +</p> +<p> +Dave’s father had gone to New York on business, +but came home that evening. In the meantime +a telegram was sent to Luke Watson, asking +for the name of the hotel, at which Merwell +and Jasniff had stopped, and of the schooner. +</p> +<p> +Dave’s father and his uncle listened closely to +what he had to tell, and to the reading of the letter +from Luke Watson. They talked the affair +over for an hour with the boys. +</p> +<p> +“You may be right, boys,” said Mr. Porter, +at last. “And it may be a good plan to follow +those rascals up. But I don’t think I would bother +Mr. Wadsworth about it. He received a telegram +from one of the detectives, and the officer +is more sure than ever that he is on the right +track. He caught Red Andrews pawning a fair-sized +diamond, and he thinks the gem is from the +Carwith collection.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_133'></a>133</span> +</p> +<p> +“Can’t he make Red Andrews confess?” asked +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Unfortunately the rascal got away when on the +way to the police-station. But the detective feels +he can soon round him up again.” +</p> +<p> +Dave looked thoughtfully out of the window +and tapped the table with his fingers. +</p> +<p> +“You still think Merwell and Jasniff guilty?” +remarked his uncle, with a smile. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, Uncle Dunston. After what Hooker +Montgomery said, I’ll think them guilty until +somebody proves otherwise.” +</p> +<p> +“Then I tell you what I’ll do, boys,” said +Dunston Porter. “I’ll take a trip down to Florida +with you and look into this matter. I’d rather be +on the move than sitting still waiting for something +to turn up.” +</p> +<p> +“Will you go?” cried Dave, eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“I will.” +</p> +<p> +“When?” +</p> +<p> +“As soon as you wish, and we can get train +accommodations.” +</p> +<p> +“Hadn’t we better wait until we hear from +Luke?” suggested Roger. +</p> +<p> +“No, let us get off at once!” exclaimed Dave. +“If he sends word after we are gone, it can be +forwarded to us.” And so it was arranged. +</p> +<p> +Great was the surprise of the Wadsworths and +of Laura when the boys and Dunston Porter announced +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_134'></a>134</span> +that they were going to start for Florida +the next morning. +</p> +<p> +“Why, Dave?” asked Jessie. “Why are you +going in such a hurry?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I hardly care to tell, Jessie,” he answered. +“It may prove only a wild goose chase.” +</p> +<p> +“It is about the missing jewels?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“Then you are after Merwell and Jasniff.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, but please don’t tell any outsiders.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Dave, don’t get into any trouble!” cried +the girl, as she clung to him. “They are such bad +fellows! You know what they have done to you in +the past!” +</p> +<p> +“I am not afraid of them.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I know how brave you are, Dave! But—but +don’t let them harm you—for my sake, +please!” And then the tears came into her eyes +and she hid her face on his arm. +</p> +<p> +“There! there! don’t worry!” he said, as he +bent over her, and then he kissed her forehead. +“We’ll be back before long,” and he gave her a +little hug. Then the others came in. +</p> +<p> +Laura was also worried, but glad that her uncle +would be along. She helped Dave to pack his +suit-case. Phil and Roger also packed up, and +sent word home regarding the proposed trip. As +my old readers know, all the boys were well-to-do, +so the expenses did not bother them. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_135'></a>135</span> +</p> +<p> +At breakfast time the following morning came +a telegram from Luke Watson. It read as follows: +</p> +<p> +“The hotel was the Castor. Think schooner +was the <em>Emma Brown</em>, or <em>Black</em>, or <em>Jones</em>. Common +name.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, that isn’t very definite, but it is something +to work on,” remarked Dunston Porter. +</p> +<p> +Soon the party of four were ready to start. +There was a general hand-shaking and also a few +kisses. +</p> +<p> +“Well, have a good time, even if you don’t +catch those fellows,” said Mrs. Wadsworth. +</p> +<p> +“Keep out of trouble,” warned Laura. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, yes, don’t let them harm you,” pleaded +timid Jessie. +</p> +<p> +“And let us hear from you often,” said Mr. +Porter. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know what to say about this,” said +Oliver Wadsworth, shaking his head, slowly. +“But if you do get on the track of those jewels, +leave no stone unturned to get them.” +</p> +<p> +“Leave that to me, Mr. Wadsworth,” said +Dunston Porter. “If we find those young men +have the gems—or had them—we’ll get them +back, never fear.” And he spoke in a tone that +showed he meant what he said. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_136'></a>136</span> +</p> +<p> +They went to the depot in the family sleigh. +Ben had heard of their going away and was there +to see them off. Soon the train rolled in that was +to carry the travelers to New York City. +</p> +<p> +“Good-by!” cried the boys, as they clambered +aboard the car. +</p> +<p> +“Good-by!” called Ben. “I wish you luck.” +And then the girls waved their hands, and the +train moved off, slowly at first and then faster +and faster, until Crumville was left behind. +</p> +<p> +“It’s a great trip they are taking,” said Ben, +to Laura and Jessie. “Wish I was going along.” +</p> +<p> +“Why didn’t you go?” questioned Laura. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I’ve got some things to do at home,” +answered Ben. He did not care to add that his +father did not wish to stand the extra expense. +Mr. Basswood was fairly well-to-do, but thought +he was spending enough on his son by sending him +to boarding-school. +</p> +<p> +The sleigh was about to drive off when the +station agent came running out, waving a yellow +envelope. +</p> +<p> +“Is Mr. Wadsworth here?” he questioned, of +Jessie. +</p> +<p> +“No, Mr. Mack, my father went to business. +What is it, a telegram?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,—something very important too.” +</p> +<p> +“Then give it to me and I will take it to him +at once.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_137'></a>137</span> +</p> +<p> +“I could send it, but——” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind. Here, I will sign for it,” and +Jessie did so. Then the whip cracked and the +horses started for the jewelry works on a gallop. +</p> +<p> +When Jessie handed the telegram to her father +he opened it and read the contents eagerly. His +face lit up. +</p> +<p> +“This is good news!” he cried. “Good news! +I must go to Boston at once.” +</p> +<p> +“Have they found the jewels?” questioned his +daughter. +</p> +<p> +“The detective thinks he has located them. +Yes, I must go at once.” And Mr. Wadsworth +hurried off to prepare for the journey. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_138'></a>138</span><a name='chXV' id='chXV'></a>CHAPTER XV—SOMETHING ABOUT WHITE MICE</h2> +<p> +Dunston Porter and the boys were to go to +New York City and there transfer to Jersey City +for the train bound South. All had comfortable +seats together. +</p> +<p> +“It’s going to be quite a trip,” said Roger, as +he settled back to gaze at the swiftly-moving panorama +of fields covered with snow. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and we are going to journey from winter +into summer,” added Phil. “It’s good we remembered +that when we packed our suit-cases. At +first I was going to put in nothing but heavy clothing.” +</p> +<p> +“I am glad we heard from Luke,” said Dave. +“That gives us a little to work on. I hope the +<em>Emma Brown</em>, or whatever her name may be, +hasn’t sailed yet.” +</p> +<p> +“Won’t Merwell and Jasniff be surprised if +we do locate them?” said the senator’s son. “I +suppose they think we are at home.” +</p> +<p> +The car was only half-filled with passengers, +so the boys and Dunston Porter had plenty of +room, and they moved around from one seat to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_139'></a>139</span> +another. So the time passed quickly enough, until +they rolled into the Grand Central Station, in +New York. +</p> +<p> +“Well, little old New York looks as busy as +ever,” was Phil’s comment, as they stepped out +on the street. “Are we to transfer to Jersey City +at once?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” answered Dunston Porter. “We’ll take +the subway and the river tube, and get there in +no time.” +</p> +<p> +Riding through the tube under the Hudson +River was a new experience for the lads and they +rather enjoyed it. The train of steel cars rushed +along at a good rate of speed, and almost before +they knew it, they were in New Jersey and being +hoisted up in an elevator to the train-shed. +</p> +<p> +“Coast Line Express!” was the cry at one of +the numerous gates to the tracks, and thither the +party hurried. Willing porters took their baggage, +and a minute later they found themselves in +an elegant Pullman car. Dunston Porter had telegraphed +ahead for sleeping accommodations, and +they had two double seats opposite each other, +directly in the middle of the car. +</p> +<p> +“All aboard!” sang out the conductor, about +ten minutes later, and then the long train rolled +slowly from the big train-shed, and the trip to +Florida could be said to have fairly begun. +</p> +<p> +“Do we go by the way of Philadelphia and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_140'></a>140</span> +Washington?” asked Phil, who had not taken +the time to study the route. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” answered Dunston Porter. “Here is +a time-table. That will show you the whole route +and tell you just when we get to each place.” +</p> +<p> +“Will we have to make any changes?” asked +Roger. +</p> +<p> +“None whatever.” +</p> +<p> +Soon the train had left Jersey City behind and +a little later it stopped at Newark, and then sped +on towards Philadelphia. By this time it had +grown too dark to see the landscape and the boys +and Dunston Porter retired. +</p> +<p> +On and on through the long night rolled the +train, keeping fairly close to the Atlantic sea-coast. +With nothing to do, the boys did not arise until +late in the morning. They found Dave’s uncle in +the lavatory ahead of them, indulging in the luxury +of a shave with a safety razor. +</p> +<p> +“Well, how are you feeling?” asked Dunston +Porter. +</p> +<p> +“Fine!” cried Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Couldn’t feel better,” added the senator’s +son. +</p> +<p> +“Ready for a big breakfast?” +</p> +<p> +“I am,” answered Phil, promptly. “Gracious, +but traveling makes me hungry!” +</p> +<p> +They had to wait a little before they could get +seats together in the dining-car and they amused +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_141'></a>141</span> +themselves by gazing at the settlements through +which they were passing. Here and there were +numerous cabins, with hordes of colored children +playing about. +</p> +<p> +“This is the Southland, true enough,” observed +Dave. “Just see how happy those pickaninnies +seem to be!” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, one would almost envy their care-free +dispositions,” answered Dunston Porter. “Their +manner shows that it doesn’t take money to make +one happy.” +</p> +<p> +They had passed through Richmond and were +now on their way to Emporia. It was growing +steadily warmer, and by noon all were glad +enough to leave the car and go out on the observation +platform at the end of the train. +</p> +<p> +The next stop was at Fayetteville and after that +came Charleston. Long before this the snow had +disappeared and the fields looked as green as in +the fall at home. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll be at Jacksonville when you wake up +in the morning,” said Dunston Porter, as they +turned into their berths the second night on the +train. +</p> +<p> +“Good! We can’t get there any too quick for +me!” answered Dave. +</p> +<p> +“You mustn’t expect too much, Dave. You +may be bitterly disappointed,” remarked his uncle, +gravely. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_142'></a>142</span> +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we’ve just got to catch Merwell and +Jasniff, Uncle Dunston!” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, but they may not be guilty. You’ll have +to go slow about accusing them.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I want to catch them and question them +anyway. I can have them detained on the old +charge, you know—that is, if they try to get +away from me.” +</p> +<p> +Dave and Phil slept on one side of the car, with +Dunston Porter and Roger on the other. As the +steam heat was still turned on, it was uncomfortably +warm, and as a consequence Dave was rather +restless. He tumbled and tossed in his berth, +which was the upper one, and wished that the night +were over and that they were in Jacksonville. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, pshaw! I really must get some sleep!” +he told himself. “If I don’t, I’ll be as sleepy as +an owl to-morrow and not fit to hunt up those +rascals. Yes, I must go to sleep,” and he did what +he could to settle himself. +</p> +<p> +He had just closed his eyes when a peculiar +noise below him made him start up. Phil was +thrashing around wildly. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter, Phil?” he asked, in a +low tone. +</p> +<p> +“Something is in my berth, some animal, or +something!” answered the shipowner’s son. “I +can’t go to sleep for it. Every time I lie down +it begins to move.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_143'></a>143</span> +</p> +<p> +“Maybe it’s a rat.” +</p> +<p> +“Whoever heard of a rat in a sleeping-car?” +snorted Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps you were dreaming. I didn’t hear +anything,” went on Dave. +</p> +<p> +“No, I wasn’t dreaming—I heard it as plain +as day.” +</p> +<p> +“Better go to bed and forget it, Phil,” and +then Dave lay down again. The shipowner’s +son grumbled a little under his breath, then turned +off his electric light, and sank on his pillow once +more. +</p> +<p> +Dave remained quiet for several minutes and +then sat bolt upright and gave a low cry. There +was no mistake about it, something had moved +over his feet and given him a slight nip in the +toe. +</p> +<p> +“Phil!” he called, softly. “Did you do that? +Come, no fooling now. This is no place for +jokes.” +</p> +<p> +“Do what?” +</p> +<p> +“Pinch me in the toe.” +</p> +<p> +“I haven’t touched your toe. How can I from +the lower berth?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, something nipped me.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe it’s you who are dreaming this trip, +Dave,” returned the shipowner’s son, with pardonable +sarcasm. +</p> +<p> +Dave did not reply, for just then he felt something +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_144'></a>144</span> +moving in the blanket. He made a clutch +for it. A little squeak followed. +</p> +<p> +“I’ve got it, Phil!” +</p> +<p> +“What is it?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know yet—it’s in the blanket.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, what a noise!” came from the berth beyond. +“Cannot you young men be quiet?” It +was a woman who was speaking. She was an +elderly person and Dave had noticed, during the +day, that she was rather sour-looking. +</p> +<p> +“Sorry, madam, but I’ve just caught something +in my berth,” answered Dave. “I’ll turn +up the light and see what it is,” he added, as he +held on to the object in the blanket with one hand +and turned on the electric illumination with the +other. +</p> +<p> +The cries and talking had awakened half a +dozen people and the sleepy porter came down +the aisle to find out what was wrong. +</p> +<p> +“It’s a mouse—a white mouse!” cried Dave, as +the little creature was uncovered. +</p> +<p> +“Wot’s dat, a mouse!” exclaimed the porter. +“Nebber heard of sech a t’ing! How did he git +yeah?” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t ask me,” replied Dave. “Ugh! he +nipped me in the toe, too!” +</p> +<p> +“Here’s another one!” roared Phil. “Ran +right across my arm! Take that, you little imp!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_145'></a>145</span> +he added, and bang! one of his shoes hit the woodwork +of the car. +</p> +<p> +“A mouse!” shrieked the elderly woman. +“Did you say a mouse, young man?” +</p> +<p> +“I did—and there is more than one, too,” answered +Dave, for he had felt another movement +at his feet. He lost no time in scrambling up, +and Phil followed. +</p> +<p> +By this time the whole sleeping-car was in an +uproar. Everybody who heard the word “mouse” +felt certain one of the creatures must be in his +or her berth. +</p> +<p> +“Porter! porter! save me!” screamed the +elderly lady. “Oh, mice, just think of it!” And +wrapping her dressing-gown around her, she leaped +from her berth and sped for the ladies’ room. +Others also got up, including Dunston Porter and +Roger. +</p> +<p> +“What am I going to do with this fellow?” +asked Dave, as he held the mouse up in his vest. +</p> +<p> +“Better throw it out of a window,” suggested +his uncle. “Mice in a sleeper! This is certainly +the limit!” he muttered. “The railroad company +better get a new system of cleaning.” +</p> +<p> +“Mice!” screamed a young lady. “Oh, I +shall die!” she shrieked, and looked ready to +faint. +</p> +<p> +“Shoot ’em, why don’t you?” suggested a fat +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_146'></a>146</span> +man, who came forth from his berth wearing a +blanket, Indian fashion. +</p> +<p> +By this time Phil had caught one of the creatures. +Both he and Dave started for the rear of +the car, to throw the mice off the train. +</p> +<p> +“Stop! stop! I beg of you, don’t kill those +mice!” came suddenly from a tall, thin young man +who had been sleeping in a berth at the end of +the car. Dave had noticed him during the day and +had put him down as a preacher or actor. +</p> +<p> +“Why not?” asked our hero. +</p> +<p> +“They are mine, that’s why,” said the man. +“I would not have them killed for a thousand dollars!” +</p> +<p> +“Say, wot yo’-all talkin’ about?” demanded +the porter. “Dem mice yours?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes! yes! Oh, please do not kill them!” +pleaded the tall, thin man. “They won’t hurt +anybody, really they won’t.” +</p> +<p> +“Say, are them white mice educated?” demanded +the fat man. +</p> +<p> +“Indeed they are—I educated them myself,” +answered the other man. “I spent months in +doing it, too. They are the best-educated white +mice in the United States,” he added, proudly. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_147'></a>147</span><a name='chXVI' id='chXVI'></a>CHAPTER XVI—PICKING UP THE TRAIL</h2> +<p> +The announcement that the mice that had been +caught in the car were educated filled the boys +with interest, but it did not lessen their indignation +nor that of the other passengers. +</p> +<p> +“The idea of mice on the train, even if they +are educated!” shrilled the elderly lady. +</p> +<p> +“It’s outrageous!” stormed another lady. “I +never heard of such a thing in all my life!” +</p> +<p> +“Say, you must take this for a cattle train!” +remarked the fat man, bluntly. “If you do, you’ve +got another guess coming.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, my dear, sweet mice,” said the tall, slim +man, as he took the animal from Dave and also +the one that Phil was holding. “That is King +Hal and this one is President Tom! They are +both highly educated. They can——” +</p> +<p> +“Say, howsoeber did yo’-all git dem trash in +dis cah!” demanded the porter. +</p> +<p> +“I—er—I had them in a cage in my—er—in +my suit-case,” the owner of the mice answered, and +now his voice faltered. “I really didn’t think +they would get out.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_148'></a>148</span> +</p> +<p> +“We don’t allow no mice in de sleepin’-cahs!” +stormed the porter. “Dogs, an’ cats, an’ parrots, +an’ mice goes in de baggage-cah.” +</p> +<p> +“Are there any more of them loose?” asked +one of the ladies. +</p> +<p> +“I will see!” cried the tall, slim man. “I +forgot about that! Oh, I hope they are safe! +If they are not, what shall I do? I have an engagement +in Jacksonville, and another in St. +Augustine, to fill.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you show ’em on the stage?” snorted the +fat man. +</p> +<p> +“To be sure. Haven’t you heard of me, Professor +Richard De Haven, the world-famous +trainer of mice, rats, and cats? I have exhibited +my mice in all the countries of the world, and——” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind that just now,” interrupted Dunston +Porter. “Go and see if the others are safe, +otherwise we’ll have to round up your live-stock +before we go to sleep again.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I shall never sleep another wink in this +car!” sighed a lady. +</p> +<p> +“I shall!” snorted the fat man, “or else get the +price of my berth out of that chap, or the railroad +company!” +</p> +<p> +Professor De Haven ran to his berth and +dragged forth a dress-suit-case. A moment later +he uttered a genuine howl of dismay. +</p> +<p> +“They are all gone!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_149'></a>149</span> +</p> +<p> +“How many?” queried Dave, who had followed +him. +</p> +<p> +“Sixteen of them, not counting the two I have +here now! O dear, what shall I do?” And the +professor wrung his hands in despair. +</p> +<p> +“Sixteen mice at large!” shrieked one of the +ladies. “Oh, stop the train! I want to get off!” +</p> +<p> +“Can’t stop no train now,” answered the porter. +“We’se got to jest catch dem mice somehow, +but I dunno how it’s gwine to be done,” he +went on, scratching his woolly head in perplexity. +</p> +<p> +“I’ve got a shotgun along,” suggested the fat +man. “Might go gunning with that.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll get my cane,” said another man. +</p> +<p> +“I guess the ladies better retire to the next +car,” suggested a third passenger. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, yes, let us go, at once!” cried the elderly +lady. “Porter, can I get a berth there?” +</p> +<p> +“Sorry, missus, but I dun reckon all de berths +on dis yeah train am tooken.” +</p> +<p> +“See here!” cried Dave, to Professor De +Haven. “If the mice are educated, can’t you call +them to you in some way?” +</p> +<p> +“To be sure!” cried the professor, struck by the +idea. “Why did I not think of that myself? I +was too upset to think of anything. Yes, I can +whistle for them.” +</p> +<p> +“Whistle for ’em?” snorted the fat man. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, yes! I always whistle when I feed them. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_150'></a>150</span> +Please be quiet. I shall have to whistle loudly, +for the train makes such a noise and it may be +some of my dear pets may not hear me!” +</p> +<p> +“Humph! Then you better whistle for all +you’re worth!” returned the man of weight. +</p> +<p> +Walking slowly up and down the sleeping-car +Professor De Haven commenced to whistle in a +clear, steady trill. He kept this up for fully a +minute and by that time several white mice had +shown themselves. They were somewhat scared, +but gradually they came to him and ran up on his +shoulders. +</p> +<p> +“Well, doesn’t that beat the Dutch!” whispered +Roger, half in admiration. +</p> +<p> +“I shouldn’t have been so scared if I had known +they were educated,” returned Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Hush!” said Dave. “Give him a chance to +gather them all in.” +</p> +<p> +Placing the captured mice in their cage, the professor +moved up and down the car once more, +opening the berth curtains as he did so. He continued +to emit that same clear trill, and soon his +shoulders were full of the white mice. +</p> +<p> +“Only one is missing, little General Pinky,” he +announced. +</p> +<p> +“Spit, spat, spow! Where did Pinky go?” +murmured Phil. +</p> +<p> +“Ha! I have him! Dear little Pinky!” cried +the professor, as the mouse dropped onto his +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_151'></a>151</span> +shoulder from an upper berth. “Now I have +them all, ladies and gentlemen,” he announced. +“You can go to sleep without alarm. I shall take +good care that they do not get away again.” +</p> +<p> +“I dun reckon I’se gwine to take care of dat!” +put in the porter. “Dem mice am gwine into de +baggage-cah dis minit!” +</p> +<p> +“But, my dear fellow——” broke in the professor. +</p> +<p> +“I ain’t a-gwine to argy de question, mistah. +Da is gwine in de baggage-cah!” And the porter +reached out and caught hold of the cage containing +the mice. +</p> +<p> +“Then I shall go with them,” answered the +professor, resignedly. +</p> +<p> +“Suit yo’ self, sah.” +</p> +<p> +“But they wouldn’t hurt a flea!” +</p> +<p> +“Can’t help it, sah, it’s de baggage-cah fo’ dis +collection of wild animals,” answered the porter, +striding off with the cage in his hands, while the +professor followed. +</p> +<p> +“Talk about something happening!” burst out +Roger, when the excitement was over. “This was +the funniest experience I ever had.” +</p> +<p> +“I am sure I don’t see anything funny about +it!” snapped the elderly lady, who overheard the +remark. “I think that man ought to be prosecuted!” +</p> +<p> +“He didn’t expect his mice to get loose,” said +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_152'></a>152</span> +Dunston Porter. “Just the same, he had no right +to bring them in here. As the porter said, all +animals must go in the baggage-car.” +</p> +<p> +“Wonder if he’ll come back,” mused Phil. +</p> +<p> +“I doubt it,” answered Dave. “Well, now I’m +going to try to get a little sleep,” he added, as he +climbed back into his berth. The others followed +suit, and presently one after another dropped into +slumber. It may be added here that Professor +De Haven did not show himself again while on +the train, he being afraid of the indignation of +those who had been disturbed by his educated +mice. +</p> +<p> +Early the following morning found our friends +in the city of Jacksonville, which, as my readers +must know, is located on the St. John’s River. +They did not wait for breakfast but hurried at +once in the direction of the Hotel Castor, once a +leading hostelry of the city, but which had seen +its best day. +</p> +<p> +“Quite a town,” remarked the senator’s son, +as they passed along. +</p> +<p> +“Jacksonville is now the main city of Florida,” +replied Dunston Porter. “It is a great shipping +center, and is also well-known as a winter +resort.” +</p> +<p> +“How balmy the weather is!” was Phil’s comment. +“Just like spring at home!” +</p> +<p> +Dave’s uncle had been in Jacksonville several +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_153'></a>153</span> +times and knew the way well. Soon they reached +the hotel, and with his heart beating loudly, Dave +hurried up to the desk and asked the clerk if Link +Merwell and Nick Jasniff were stopping there. +</p> +<p> +“Never heard of them,” replied the clerk, after +thinking a moment. +</p> +<p> +“I have photographs, perhaps you can tell +them from that,” went on Dave, and he drew from +his pocket two photographs, taken at different +times at Oak Hall. Each showed a group of +students, and in one group was Merwell and in +the other Jasniff. +</p> +<p> +The clerk looked at the pictures closely. +</p> +<p> +“What is this, some joke?” he asked, suspiciously. +</p> +<p> +“No, it is a matter of great importance,” answered +Dave. “We must find those two young +men if we possibly can.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, if they are the pair who were here some +days ago, you are too late. But their names +weren’t what you said.” +</p> +<p> +“What did they call themselves?” asked Dunston +Porter. +</p> +<p> +“John Leeds and Samuel Cross,” answered the +clerk. “They had Room 87, and were here two +days.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know where they went to?” asked +Phil. +</p> +<p> +“I do not.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_154'></a>154</span> +</p> +<p> +“Can you tell me anything at all about them?” +went on Dave. “It is very important, indeed.” +</p> +<p> +“I might as well tell you,” put in Mr. Porter, +in a low voice. “They were a pair of criminals.” +</p> +<p> +“You don’t say! Well, do you know, I didn’t +much like their looks,” returned the clerk. “And +come to think of it, one acted rather scared-like, +the fellow calling himself Leeds—this one,” and +he pointed to the picture of Link Merwell. +</p> +<p> +“And you haven’t any idea where they went +to?” +</p> +<p> +“Not the slightest. They simply paid their +bill and went away.” +</p> +<p> +“Did they have any trunks sent off?” asked +Roger. “We might find the expressman,” he +explained, to the others. +</p> +<p> +“No, they had nothing but hand baggage.” +</p> +<p> +“What—can you remember that?” questioned +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, each had a suit-case and a small valise,—kind +of a tool-bag affair.” +</p> +<p> +“Better look for that schooner, Dave,” said +his uncle, in a low voice, and in a few minutes +more they left the hotel, telling the clerk that +they might be back. +</p> +<p> +“Shall we get breakfast now?” questioned the +senator’s son. He was beginning to grow hungry. +</p> +<p> +“You can get something to eat if you wish, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_155'></a>155</span> +Roger,” answered Dave. “I am going to try to +locate that schooner first.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I’ll wait too, then,” said Roger. +</p> +<p> +The shipping along the St. John’s River at Jacksonville +is rather extensive. But Dunston Porter +knew his business and went direct to one of the +offices where he knew he could find out all about +the ships going out under charter and otherwise. +</p> +<p> +“We want to find out about a schooner named +the <em>Emma Brown</em>, or <em>Black</em>, or <em>Jones</em>, or some +common name like that,” said Dave’s uncle, to the +elderly man in charge. “She was in this harbor +several days ago. I don’t know if she has sailed +or not.” +</p> +<p> +“<em>Emma Brown</em>, eh?” mused the shipping-clerk. +“Never heard of such a schooner.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe she was the <em>Emma Black</em>, or <em>Emma +Jones</em>,” suggested Dave. +</p> +<p> +“No schooner by that name here,—at least +not for the past month or two. We had an <em>Emma +Blackney</em> here about six weeks ago. But she sailed +for Nova Scotia.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, try to think of some ship that might be +named something like what we said,” pleaded +Dave. “This is very important.” +</p> +<p> +“A ship that might have sailed from here in +the past two or three days,” added Roger. +</p> +<p> +The elderly shipping-clerk leaned back in his +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_156'></a>156</span> +chair and ran his hand through his hair, thoughtfully. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe you’re looking for the <em>Emma +Brower</em>,” he said. “But she isn’t a schooner, +she’s a bark. She left this port yesterday morning.” +</p> +<p> +“Bound for where?” asked Dave, eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“Bound for Barbados.” +</p> +<p> +“Where is that?” questioned Phil. “I’ve +heard of the place, but I can’t just locate it.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s an island of the British West Indies,” +answered Dunston Porter. “It lies about five hundred +miles southeast of Porto Rico.” +</p> +<p> +“If that’s the case, then good-by to Merwell +and Jasniff,” murmured Phil. “We’ll never catch +them in the wide world.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_157'></a>157</span><a name='chXVII' id='chXVII'></a>CHAPTER XVII—MEETING OLD FRIENDS</h2> +<p> +“They may have gone on some other vessel,” +remarked Roger, after a pause. “Let us find out +what other ships have left here during the past +few days.” +</p> +<p> +“Say,” said Phil, to the elderly shipping-clerk. +“Maybe you know my father or some of the +captains working for him. His name is Lawrence, +of the Lawrence Lines.” +</p> +<p> +“Indeed!” cried the shipping-clerk. “Well, +of course I know him! Are you Phil Lawrence?” +he questioned, eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“I am.” +</p> +<p> +“Now isn’t that strange!” The man put out +his hand. “I don’t suppose you know me. My +name is Sam Castner. I was once a supercargo +for your father, on the <em>Arvinus</em>. You took a trip +in her with your mother, when you were about ten +years old,—down to Tampa and back, from Philadelphia.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right, so I did!” cried the shipowner’s +son. “I remember you now. We went fishing +together.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_158'></a>158</span> +</p> +<p> +“So we did, Mr. Lawrence. My, how you’ve +grown since then!” added the former supercargo, +as he gazed at Phil’s tall and well-built form. +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Castner, we are in a hurry, and maybe +you can help us a good deal,” went on Phil. “We +are after two fellows who we think sailed in +that schooner, or bark, or some vessel that left +here within the past two days. They were young +fellows, not much older than us boys. Will you +aid us in getting on their track?” +</p> +<p> +“Sure I will,” was the ready answer. “What +do you know about ’em?” +</p> +<p> +“All we know is that they went under the +names of Leeds and Cross,” answered Dave. +“But those are not their right names.” +</p> +<p> +“And that they are supposed to have sailed on +the ship known by a common name—<em>Emma</em> something +or other,” put in Roger. +</p> +<p> +“I can soon find out who sailed on the <em>Emma +Brower</em>” answered Sam Castner. “Come with +me to the next shipping office.” +</p> +<p> +He called another clerk to take charge, and +accompanied the party to the next shipping office. +On the way he was introduced to Dave and the +others. +</p> +<p> +“One of your father’s vessels is in this harbor +now,” he said to Phil. +</p> +<p> +“What ship is that?” +</p> +<p> +“The <em>Golden Eagle</em>, Captain Sanders.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_159'></a>159</span> +</p> +<p> +“Captain Sanders!” cried Dave. “Do you +mean Bob Sanders, who used to sail on the <em>Stormy +Petrel</em> with Captain Marshall?” +</p> +<p> +“The same, Mr. Porter. Then you know +him?” +</p> +<p> +“Indeed I do!” returned Dave. “Why, I +sailed with him in the South Seas!” +</p> +<p> +“Well, he’s here.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have to try to see him before we leave,” +said Phil. “He was a nice fellow.” +</p> +<p> +At the second shipping office further inquiries +were made concerning the sailing of the <em>Emma +Brower</em>. It was learned that the bark had carried +not more than half a cargo for Barbados +and eight passengers. The names of Merwell, +Jasniff, Leeds, or Cross did not appear on the +passenger list. +</p> +<p> +“Did anybody here see those passengers?” +asked Dunston Porter. +</p> +<p> +“I did,” returned a young clerk. “I was +aboard just before she sailed, and I saw all of +them.” +</p> +<p> +“Were there two young fellows, chums?” +asked Dave. +</p> +<p> +“There were, two tall chaps, a bit older than +you.” +</p> +<p> +“Did they look like these fellows?” and now +our hero brought out the photographs he had used +before. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_160'></a>160</span> +</p> +<p> +“They certainly did!” cried the clerk. “I +remember this fellow distinctly,” and he pointed +to Jasniff’s picture, taken just before that individual +had run away from Oak Hall. +</p> +<p> +“Then they sailed, just as we feared!” returned +Dave, and there was something like a groan +in his voice. +</p> +<p> +“Wonder if they took the jewels,” murmured +Roger. +</p> +<p> +“Most likely, Roger,” answered Dunston Porter. +</p> +<p> +“But what would they do with them in such an +out-of-the-way place as Barbados?” +</p> +<p> +“I rather imagine their plan is to keep quiet +for a while, until this affair blows over. Then +they’ll either return to the United States, or take +a British vessel for England. Barbados is an +English possession, you must remember, and a +regular line of steamers sail from there to England.” +</p> +<p> +“I wonder if we couldn’t charter a steam tug +and go after the bark?” mused Dave. +</p> +<p> +“It might be done,” returned his uncle. “But +I doubt if we could catch the bark, or even locate +her. She has too much of a start.” +</p> +<p> +“Was the bark going to stop at any ports +along the way?” asked Phil. +</p> +<p> +“She was not,” answered the young shipping-clerk. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_161'></a>161</span> +</p> +<p> +“Then there is nothing to do but to sail for +Barbados after them!” cried Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Sail after them—that far!” ejaculated the +senator’s son. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, Roger. Of course you haven’t got to go, +or Phil either. But I think my uncle and I ought +to go after ’em. Don’t you think so, Uncle Dunston?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know—perhaps,” was the slow reply. +“We had better make a few more inquiries first, +Dave.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, yes, let us find out all we can about Merwell +and Jasniff.” +</p> +<p> +They left the shipping office and walked back +to the hotel. Here they had a late breakfast and +then commenced to make diligent inquiries concerning +all the movements of Merwell and Jasniff. +They soon learned that the pair had had +plenty of money to spend, and that they had +bought many things for the trip to Barbados, +even taking along an extra supply of the Turkish +cigarettes that came in the boxes with bands of +blue and gold. +</p> +<p> +“I think that that proves my clew of the cigarette +box is correct,” said Dave. +</p> +<p> +They visited the local pawnbrokers, and from +one of them learned that Merwell had pawned +two diamonds for two hundred and fifty dollars. +The rascal had told the pawnbroker that the gems +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_162'></a>162</span> +were the property of a rich lady who was awaiting +a remittance from France. +</p> +<p> +“Do these diamonds belong to the Carwith collection?” +asked Roger. +</p> +<p> +“That remains to be found out,” answered +Dunston Porter, and then he told the pawnbroker +to be sure and not let the gems go out of his +possession until a further investigation could be +made. The man grumbled somewhat, but when +Dave’s uncle spoke about calling in the officers of +the law, he subsided. +</p> +<p> +“Very well, I’ll keep them,” he said. “And if +anything is wrong, I’ll do what the law requires, +even if I lose by it.” +</p> +<p> +“Let us visit the <em>Golden Eagle</em> and see Bob +Sanders,” said Phil, late in the afternoon. “Perhaps +he knows something about the <em>Emma Brower</em>, +and her trip.” +</p> +<p> +The others were willing, and sundown found +them aboard the vessel belonging to Phil’s father. +Hardly had they stepped on deck when a grizzled +old tar, with white hair, rushed up to Dave. +</p> +<p> +“If it ain’t Dave Porter!” he burst out. “Yes, +sir, Dave, wot I haven’t seen in a year o’ Sundays! +How be you, my boy?” And he caught the youth +by both hands. +</p> +<p> +“Billy Dill!” exclaimed our hero, as his face +lit up with pleasure. “Where in the world did +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_163'></a>163</span> +you drop from? I thought you had given up the +sea.” +</p> +<p> +Billy Dill, as my old readers will remember, +was the tar who aided Dave in locating his Uncle +Dunston. As related in “Dave Porter in the +South Seas,” Billy Dill had traveled with our hero +to that portion of the globe, in the <em>Stormy Petrel</em>, +of which Bob Sanders was, at the time, second +mate. On returning home, the old tar had been +placed in a sanitarium and then a sailors’ home, +and Dave had imagined he was still in the latter +retreat. +</p> +<p> +“Couldn’t give up the sea, Dave,” replied the +old sailor. “I tried my best, but it wasn’t no use. +So I goes to Phil’s old man, an’ I says, says I, +‘Give me a berth an’ anything I’m wuth,’ an’ he +says, says he, ‘How would ye like to sail with +Cap’n Sanders, wot sailed with you to the South +Seas?’ ‘Fust-rate,’ says I; an’ here I be, an’ likes +it very much.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’m glad to see you looking so well,” +answered Dave. +</p> +<p> +“It’s the sea air done it, lad. When I was +ashore I jest knowed I wanted sea air. No more +homes ashore fer Billy Dill, not much!” And the +old tar shook his head with conviction. +</p> +<p> +A few minutes later, while the old sailor was +shaking hands with the others, and asking and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_164'></a>164</span> +answering questions, the captain of the ship came +up. +</p> +<p> +“Very glad indeed to see you again,” said +Captain Sanders, with a broad smile. He looked +closely at the boys. “Grown some since I saw you +last.” +</p> +<p> +“And you have advanced, too,” answered Dave, +with a grin. “Let me congratulate you on becoming +a captain, Mr. Sanders.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s all through the kindness of Mr. Lawrence +and Captain Marshall. If it wasn’t for them, I +shouldn’t be in this berth.” +</p> +<p> +“How is Captain Marshall?” asked our hero. +The man mentioned was the commander of the +ship in which Dave had sailed to the South +Seas. +</p> +<p> +“First-rate, the last I heard of him. He sailed +from San Francisco to Manila ten days ago.” +</p> +<p> +“Captain Sanders, what port are you bound +for next?” questioned Phil, after greetings had +been exchanged all around and a number of other +questions had been asked. +</p> +<p> +“No port as yet, Phil. I’m waiting for orders.” +</p> +<p> +“Have you any idea where you may go to?” +</p> +<p> +“Something was said about a cargo for Porto +Rico. But nothing was settled. I’ll know in a +couple of days, I think.” +</p> +<p> +“Do any of our ships ever sail to Barbados?” +</p> +<p> +“Not very often. I could have had a cargo +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_165'></a>165</span> +for that port from here, but the firm didn’t take +it, and it went to the <em>Emma Brower</em>.” +</p> +<p> +“The very ship we are after!” murmured +Dave. +</p> +<p> +“Could you get another cargo for Barbados, +do you think?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know—maybe. Why?” +</p> +<p> +“We want to go there!” +</p> +<p> +“You do! That isn’t much of a place.” +</p> +<p> +“But we have a reason for wanting to go,” +went on Phil. And then, knowing he could trust +Captain Sanders, he told the story of the stolen +gems and the search for Merwell and Jasniff. +</p> +<p> +“Humph! that’s a queer yarn,” mused the captain +of the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. “Supposing I got a +cargo for that port—you’d go along?” +</p> +<p> +“I would,” answered the shipowner’s son, +promptly. “That is, if dad would let me—and +I’m sure he would.” +</p> +<p> +“So would I go,” added Dave. +</p> +<p> +“I’d have to go—to look after the others,” said +Dunston Porter, with a smile. +</p> +<p> +“Well, you can’t leave me in the cold,” came +from Roger. “If the rest went, I’d go too.” +</p> +<p> +“Come down to the cabin and talk it over,” +said Captain Sanders, and led the way across the +deck and down the companionway. +</p> +<p> +Once below they were invited to remain to supper +and did so. While at the meal the boys and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_166'></a>166</span> +Dunston Porter told all they knew concerning the +case against Merwell and Jasniff, and the captain +told what he knew about the <em>Emma Brower</em> and +her commander. +</p> +<p> +“I am going to telegraph to my father about +this,” said Phil, a little later. “If this vessel can +get a cargo for Barbados she might as well sail +for that port as anywhere.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’m willing,” answered Captain Sanders. +“When will you send word to him?” +</p> +<p> +“Right away—I’ll send him a telegram at +once.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope it turns out all right,” said Dave. “I +feel it is my duty to get after Merwell and Jasniff, +and do it as soon as possible.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_167'></a>167</span><a name='chXVIII' id='chXVIII'></a>CHAPTER XVIII—OFF FOR BARBADOS</h2> +<p> +The next three days were busy ones for the +boys and Dunston Porter. Telegrams were sent +back and forth between Phil and his father, and +also between Dave and Mr. Wadsworth. +</p> +<p> +“Here is news!” cried our hero, after receiving +one of the messages. “Just listen to this.” And +he read the following, from the jewelry manufacturer: +</p> +<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 4em;'> +“Clew in Boston proved to be false, also clew +in New York. Hope you are on the right track +and get gems. Spare no expense if you feel you +are right.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And here is a telegram from my dad,” said +Phil. “He tells us—Captain Sanders and myself—to +use our own judgment.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can you get a cargo for Barbados, Phil?” +asked Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We can get a half-cargo.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“At once?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, that is, inside of two days.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_168'></a>168</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then by all means take it, Phil!” cried Dave. +“I know Mr. Wadsworth will stand the extra +expense. And if he won’t, I know my father will.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where is your Uncle Dunston?” questioned +the shipowner’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“He’s out on a little business trip. He got a +telegram from New York that upset him somewhat. +I hope it isn’t anything serious,” added +Dave, soberly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The boys rushed off to talk the matter over with +Captain Sanders. They found the master of the +vessel at the shipping office, talking over the matter +of a cargo for Barbados. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Four men want to take passage with us, if we +go,” said the captain. “That will help pay for +the trip, since they are willing to pay good passage +money.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We want you to take that half-cargo,” said +Phil, and explained matters. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right, if you say so,” answered Captain +Sanders. “But you had better speak to Mr. Porter +about it first.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Half an hour later Dunston Porter came driving +up in a cab. He was plainly excited. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ve got to go to New York at once,” he said. +“I must look after some valuable investments in +Wall Street. Do you think you boys can get along +alone?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think we can, Uncle Dunston,” answered +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_169'></a>169</span> +Dave. “You know we are used to taking care of +ourselves,” and he smiled faintly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then go ahead and do as you think best.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We want Captain Sanders to start for Barbados +as soon as he can,” went on our hero, and +told of the telegrams received. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +A general talk followed, lasting until Dunston +Porter had to ride away to catch the train for New +York. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You must be right, and Merwell and Jasniff +must be guilty,” he said. “And if they are, +spare no expense in catching them. I think the +quicker you start for Barbados the better. And +as soon as you arrive do your best to locate the +rascals and have the authorities arrest them. And +above all things, keep your eyes open for the +jewels, for we need them much more than we need +to catch Merwell and Jasniff. To catch the rascals +and miss the gems will do us no good.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I understand, Uncle Dunston,” answered +Dave. “And if the jewels are anywhere around +we’ll locate them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then good-by and good luck!” finished +Dunston Porter, and in a minute more he was off. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +As soon as he was gone the boys and Captain +Sanders commenced preparations for the trip to +Barbados. An extra number of longshoremen +were engaged, so that the half-cargo to be taken +along could be gotten aboard quickly, and the boys +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_170'></a>170</span> +spent their time in buying such things as they +needed for the trip. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They tell me it is pretty warm down there,” +said Roger. “So we had better buy some thin +suits.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And we had better go armed,” added Phil. +“No telling what trouble we may run into, in +trying to corner Merwell and Jasniff. Merwell +is no great fighter, but Jasniff is a brute.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, I’ll take no chances with Jasniff,” answered +Dave. He had not forgotten his quarrel +at Oak Hall with that bully, and how Jasniff had +attacked him with an Indian club, as related in +detail in “Dave Porter’s Return to School.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At last all was in readiness for the trip, and the +boys and the other passengers, four burly Englishmen, +went aboard. Fortunately, the <em>Golden +Eagle</em> was well provided with staterooms, so there +was but little crowding. Dave had a small room +to himself and next to him were his chums, with +Captain Sanders and the first mate opposite. +Billy Dill was, of course, in the forecastle with +the other sailors. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s grand to have you along ag’in,” he said, +to Dave and Phil. “Seems like old times, when +we sailed the Pacific.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So it does,” answered our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Only ye ain’t a-lookin’ for no uncle this trip, +be you?” And the old tar chuckled. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_171'></a>171</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, Billy, we are looking for somebody quite +different—two rascals who ran away with a lot of +diamonds.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Mackerel an’ codfish! Ye don’t tell me, +Dave! Your diamonds?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, but some diamonds that were left with +a close friend of mine. If they are not recovered, +my friend will be almost ruined.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Jumpin’ dogfish! Then I hope you catch +them lubbers! If so be I can help ye any, don’t +be afeered to call on me,” added the old sailor, +earnestly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right; I’ll remember that,” replied +Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Early the next day the <em>Golden Eagle</em> slipped +down the St. John’s River and past the jetties +and the lighthouse into the Atlantic Ocean. It +was warm and clear, with a good wind blowing +from the west, an ideal day for the departure. +The boys remained on deck, watching the scenery +of the winding stream and then the fading shoreline, +and then went below to arrange their belongings, +for the trip to Barbados would occupy some +time. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I hope we don’t get seasick,” remarked the +senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, if we do, we’ll have to stand it,” replied +Phil. “But don’t let’s think about it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What I am wishing, is that we’ll have good +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_172'></a>172</span> +weather and a quick passage,” remarked Dave. +“We can’t get to Barbados any too quick for me.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I was looking up the place in the shipping-guide,” +went on Roger. “It’s not much of an +island, only twenty-one miles long by fifteen wide. +The whole population is only about two hundred +thousand, mostly English.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The smaller the population the easier it will +be to find Merwell and Jasniff,” was the comment +of the shipowner’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, there may be a good many hiding-places +on an island twenty-one miles long by fifteen +miles wide,” added Dave, with a grin. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, we’ll rake the island with a fine-tooth +comb, if we have to,” cried Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Roger, was your father quite willing to let +you go on the trip?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. He and mother are now in Washington, +you know, and as the school is closed, I’d either +have to go to the Capital, or stay with you. And +I told him I’d much rather be with you and +Phil.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And we are glad to have you with us!” cried +Phil, and Dave nodded, to show that he felt the +same way about it. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What do you think about the other passengers?” +asked Phil, in a lower voice, so that nobody +else might hear. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t think I’ll like them very much,” replied the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_173'></a>173</span> +senator’s son. “That man named Geswick +is very loud and dictatorial.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, and the chap named Pardell is little better,” +returned Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What line are they in, Phil, did you hear?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, they are traveling, that’s all. They came +to this country from London, and they are going +back by the way of Barbados.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They seem to have some money.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, but Captain Sanders told me that they +hang on to it pretty well—more so than he at +first expected they would.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The first day passed rapidly and the <em>Golden +Eagle</em> made good headway. The boys spent most +of the time on deck, amusing themselves as best +they could. They talked to Captain Sanders and +his mate, and also visited with Billy Dill. Occasionally +they conversed with the four Englishmen, +but they noticed that the Britishers were inclined +to keep to themselves. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I guess it is just as well, too,” said Dave to +his chums. “They are not our sort at all.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Unless I miss my guess, they have had some +sort of quarrel among themselves,” remarked +Phil. “They were disputing over something early +this morning and again just before dinner.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Several days passed, and the boys commenced +to feel quite at home on the ship. None of them +had been seasick, for which all were thankful. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_174'></a>174</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The weather has been in our favor,” said +Captain Sanders. “If it keeps on like this, we’ll +make Barbados in record time.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Billy Dill said he smelt a storm,” returned +Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hum! Is that so?” mused the captain. +“Well, he’s a pretty good weather-sharp, I must +confess. I’ll take another look at the glass,” +and he walked off to do so. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The storm came up during the night, and Dave +was awakened to find himself rolling from one +side of his berth to the other. He arose, and as +he did so he heard an exclamation from Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What is it, Roger?” he called out. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I—I guess I’m seasick!” answered the senator’s +son. “Gracious, how this old tub rolls!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Don’t call the <em>Golden Eagle</em> a tub!” returned +Phil. “Say, can I do anything for you?” +he went on sympathetically. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, tell Captain Sanders to keep the boat +from rocking.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Better lie down again, Roger,” said Dave, +entering the stateroom. “It’s a little better than +standing up.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, I—I guess I’m not so very ba-badly +off,” gasped the sufferer. “But I do wish the +storm was over.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We all wish that.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +But, instead of clearing away, the storm increased +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_175'></a>175</span> +in violence, and by nine o’clock in the +morning the wind was blowing close to a gale. +Both the captain and the mate were on deck, and +the former advised the boys and the other passengers +to remain below. Two of the Englishmen +were very seasick and found all manner of fault +because of the storm. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’d never have come on this treasure hunt had +I known I was to be so sick!” groaned one. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What bloody luck!” said the other sick man. +“All the pirates’ gold in the world is not worth +it!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Stow it!” cried the man named Geswick. +“You know you weren’t to mention what we were +after.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Nobody can hear us, in this storm,” replied +the first man who had spoken. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Those boys might hear,” put in the fellow +named Pardell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, well, they are only boys. Besides, they’d +not dare to follow us up to Cave Island——” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hush, I tell you!” cried Geswick, savagely. +“Do learn to keep your tongue quiet.” And then +the men continued to talk in whispers. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave had been passing the staterooms of the +Englishmen during this conversation and he could +not help but hear what was said. When he rejoined +his chums he told them of the talk. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They must be on the hunt after pirates’ gold,” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_176'></a>176</span> +said Phil. “Well, they are not the first to do that +kind of searching. Party after party has sailed +down here for the same purpose.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, and each party has been unsuccessful, so +far as I know,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps they have some extra-good clew,” +suggested Roger, trying to forget his seasickness. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps,” returned Dave. “Well, if they +can find any pirates’ gold on any of these islands +they are welcome to it, so far as I am concerned. +All I want to get hold of are the Carwith jewels.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_177'></a>177</span><a name='chXIX' id='chXIX'></a>CHAPTER XIX—THE MISSING SHIP</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How much longer do you think this storm +will last?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was Dave who asked this question, of Captain +Sanders, when the latter came down to get a +bite for breakfast. To get a regular meal, with +the vessel pitching and tossing wildly, was out of +the question. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know, Dave,” was the grave answer. +“I am hoping the wind will die down by sunset. +But the storm may last several days.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Are we in any danger?” questioned Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There is always danger during a storm,” answered +the master of the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. “But +I hope to weather this blow without much trouble.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can we be of any assistance?” went on our +hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, boys. There is nothing you can do but +keep yourselves from falling overboard. How is +Roger?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“A little better.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I heard that two of those Englishmen are +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_178'></a>178</span> +pretty sick,” went on Captain Sanders, with a faint +smile. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They are.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s queer to me that they sailed with us. +It’s not such a pleasant voyage.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I overheard a little of their talk,” answered +Dave, and, knowing he could trust the captain, +he related what had been said. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Pirates’ gold, eh?” muttered the master of +the ship. “Most of those yarns are fairy-stories. +I’ve known expedition after expedition to be fitted +out, to search for treasures said to be hidden by +the old-time buccaneers, but I never saw a man +yet who got even a smell of a treasure. Where +were they going for it, Dave?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know. I think one of them mentioned +Cave Island. Is there such a place?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There may be, although I never heard of it. +Many of the islands in this part of the globe, +being of volcanic origin, contain caves.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They must expect to get to Cave Island from +Barbados.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“More than likely,” answered the captain, and +then hurried on deck again. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The storm continued for the remainder of the +day, but by nightfall the wind commenced to die +down, and by midnight the clouds had passed and +the stars were shining brightly. In the morning +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_179'></a>179</span> +the big sun came out of the sea to the east like +a globe of fire. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Now we are going to have some warm +weather,” remarked Billy Dill, and the old tar was +right. As the sun mounted in the heavens it grew +positively hot, until the boys had to go to their +staterooms and don thinner clothing. With the +departure of the storm, Roger’s seasickness left +him, but the two Englishmen remained slightly +unwell for some time longer. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Phew! how warm it is!” remarked Phil. +“And just think of it!—up at home they are having +snow and ice!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +With the passing of the storm, the boys settled +down as before. They saw but little of the Englishmen, +especially of the pair who were sick. But +one day something happened which came close to +causing a crisis. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The boys were seated on the rear deck, talking +over matters in general, when a strong puff of +wind caused a sheet of paper to blow from somewhere +ahead towards Dave. He reached out and +caught the sheet just as it was about to go overboard. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hello, what’s this?” he cried, as he looked +the sheet over. “Must be some sort of a chart.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It is,” answered Roger, gazing at the paper. +“See, here is a spot marked Barbados, and another marked +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_180'></a>180</span> +Cave Island, a little to the eastward.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why, look what it says, up here!” cried +Phil. “’<em>Map of the Don Amorandos Treasure, +buried in 1715</em>.’ Say, do you think those Englishmen——” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hi, you! Give me that map!” bawled a +voice from near by, and with a very red face, the +Englishman named Geswick bore down on the +boys. “How dare you look at this?” he went +on, as he snatched the sheet out of their hands +and folded it up. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We wanted to see what it was and whom it +belonged to,” answered Dave, as calmly as he +could. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You had no right to look at it,” stormed Andrew +Geswick. “That is private property.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then why did you let it fall in our hands?” +asked Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If it hadn’t been for Dave, it would have +gone overboard,” put in Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Humph!” The man fell back a little. +“Well, I am thankful for that. But you boys +had no right to look at it,” he grumbled. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why, it’s only a chart, isn’t it?” asked the +senator’s son, curiously. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Never mind what it is!” answered Andrew +Geswick, sharply. “Did you read what was on +it?” he demanded, an instant later. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_181'></a>181</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We saw it was a chart,” answered Dave, and +looked knowingly at his chums, to make them +keep silent. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It—er—it belongs to Mr. Pardell and he is +very particular about it,” went on the Englishman. +And then without another word he walked +away. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“My, isn’t he sweet!” muttered Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Just as sweet as a can of sour milk,” answered +the senator’s son. “Dave, I guess you +wish you had allowed that map to blow overboard.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not exactly that, Roger. But he might have +been a little more thankful for saving something +that he thinks so valuable.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you think there is anything in this treasure +idea?” questioned Phil, after a pause. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, Phil. That is, there may be some lost +treasure, secreted by the pirates and buccaneers of +old, but I doubt if anybody will ever find it—excepting +by accident.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If there was a treasure on this Cave Island, +we might hunt for it,” went on the shipowner’s +son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Phil, don’t let that bee get into your bonnet!” +cried Roger. “Many a man has gone +crazy looking for pirates’ gold. Better drop it, +and think of how we are to round up Merwell and +Jasniff.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_182'></a>182</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, I’d like to go to Cave Island anyway,” +said Phil. “We might——” And then he +stopped short, as he saw Geswick and Pardell +near by. The Englishmen had been listening to +part of the conversation. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So you’d like to go to Cave Island, would +you?” cried Andrew Geswick, his face red with +rage. “You take my advice and keep away from +that place!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Say, do you own that island?” demanded +Phil, getting angry because of the other’s dictatorial +manner. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, we don’t own the island. But we——” +Andrew Geswick stopped short as his companion +plucked him by the sleeve. “Never mind, you +keep away from it, that’s all,” he growled. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll go there if we want to,” called out +Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If you do you may get into trouble,” called +back Pardell. Then he and his companion disappeared +in the direction of the cabin. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They are touchy enough,” was Roger’s comment. +“Phil, you had better drop Cave Island +after this.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll talk about it as much as I please,” grumbled +the shipowner’s son. “Those fellows make +me tired. They act as if they owned the +earth!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_183'></a>183</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Sunday was a quiet day on shipboard. The +Englishmen did not show themselves excepting at +meals, and the boys were content to leave them +severely alone. They told Captain Sanders of the +chart and of the talk that had occurred. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let them alone, lads,” said the commander +of the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. “I’ll venture to say that +sooner or later they’ll find out they are on a wild +goose chase.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The only one that seems to be anyway nice +is the fellow named Giles Borden,” said Dave. +“He is rather quiet. The other fellow, Rumney, +is almost as bad as Geswick and Pardell.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So I’ve noticed, Dave. And the queer part +of it is, Borden paid for the passages. He appears +to be the only one with money.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe he is backing the expedition,” suggested +Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’m sorry for him if he is,” answered the +captain. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The Bahama Islands had been passed, and now +they were in the vicinity of Porto Rico. Then +commenced the trip southward, through the +Lesser Antilles. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“This is the spot for active volcanoes,” observed +Phil. “Don’t you remember how the +Island of Martinique suffered?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, don’t speak of volcanoes!” cried Roger. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_184'></a>184</span> +“I have no use for them—or for earthquakes +either.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There must be hundreds of islands around +here,” observed Dave. “The charts are full of +them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That must make navigation difficult,” came +from Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, I reckon Captain Sanders knows what he +is about.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Wonder how soon we’ll run into the harbor +at Bridgetown?” mused the shipowner’s son, the +place he mentioned being the main seaport of +Barbados. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Inside of three days, I hope, Phil,” answered +our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Merwell and Jasniff must be there by this +time.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s more than likely—unless something happened +to delay them,” returned Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At last came the day when they sighted Barbados +and ran into the harbor of Bridgetown. +The place was a picturesque one, but the boys +had just then no time to view the scenery or the +shipping. As soon as it could be accomplished, +they went ashore, and Captain Sanders went with +them, leaving his vessel in charge of the first +mate. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You may have trouble with those two rascals, +if you find them,” said the commander of the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_185'></a>185</span> +<em>Golden Eagle</em>. “I’ll be on deck to help you all +I can.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Shall we go to the hotel first?” questioned +Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Might as well,” answered Phil. “They’d +strike for the hotel first thing, after a sea trip +like that. Maybe they were both seasick.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I hope they were—it would serve them right,” +growled the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave and the captain were willing, and a little +later walked into the Royal George Hotel. Here +the boys looked at the register, but found no +names that they could recognize. Then Dave +brought out his photographs of Merwell and +Jasniff and showed them to the hotel proprietor +and his clerk. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Nobody here that looks like either of them,” +said the proprietor, while his clerk also shook his +head. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They came in on the <em>Emma Brower</em>,” said +Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The <em>Emma Brower</em>!” cried the hotel man. +“Is she in?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why, I suppose so,” and now the commander +of the <em>Golden Eagle</em> showed his surprise. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“She wasn’t in last night, and the agents were a +bit worried about her. I know the agents personally, +you see.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then maybe she isn’t in yet!” cried Dave. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_186'></a>186</span> +“Let us go down to the docks and find out about +this.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They lost no time in visiting the docks and the +shipping offices. There they learned that nothing +had been heard of the <em>Emma Brower</em> since the +vessel had left Jacksonville. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We must have passed her on the way!” cried +Dave, to Captain Sanders. “Could we do that?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps, since we only had half a cargo, +Dave. Besides, maybe that vessel was damaged +by the storm.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I wonder how soon she will get in?” mused +Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At this the captain shrugged his shoulders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It is impossible to say. I’ve known a ship +to be a week and sometimes nearly a month overdue. +And I’ve known a ship to drop out altogether,” +he added, soberly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, don’t say you think she has gone down!” +cried Dave, in alarm. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us hope not, Dave.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The day passed, and also the next and the next. +The cargo of the <em>Golden Eagle</em> was unloaded, and +the Englishmen, who had been passengers, left +for parts unknown. As each day slipped by, Dave +grew more serious. What if the <em>Emma Brower</em> +had gone down, carrying Merwell, Jasniff, and +the Carwith jewels with her? +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_187'></a>187</span><a name='chXX' id='chXX'></a>CHAPTER XX—LANDING ON CAVE ISLAND</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At the end of a week Dave was more worried +than ever. Each day he and his chums went down +to the shipping offices and each day returned to +the hotel disappointed. Not a word had been +heard concerning the missing vessel and those on +board. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The <em>Golden Eagle</em> was all ready to sail on her +return trip to the United States, but Phil told +Captain Sanders to wait. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps we’ll hear to-day,” he said, and this +was repeated day after day. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was very warm and the boys were glad they +had brought along some thin clothing. They +scarcely knew what to do with themselves, and +Dave was particularly sober. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I suppose Mr. Wadsworth and the rest are +waiting to hear from me,” he said to his chums. +“But what is the use of sending a message when +I haven’t anything to say?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Another Sunday passed, and on Monday the +boys visited the <em>Golden Eagle</em>, and then went with +Captain Sanders to the nearest shipping office. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_188'></a>188</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Something is going on!” cried the senator’s +son, as he noticed an unusual crowd congregated. +“Must be news of some sort.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us find out what it is!” returned our +hero, quickly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The <em>Emma Brower</em> has been heard from,” +said a man, standing near. “That’s the +vessel that was missing, don’t you know,” he +added. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What of her?” asked Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Went down in that terrible storm we had +about ten days ago.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Down!” gasped all of the boys, while Captain +Sanders looked the concern he felt. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So they say. I do not know the particulars,” +went on the man as he walked away. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It did not take the boys and the captain long +to get into the shipping office and there they +learned as many of the particulars as were known. +A tramp steamer from Porto Rico had come in +bringing word that she had sighted portions of a +wreck while out at sea, and an investigation proved +the same to belong to the <em>Emma Brower</em>. A portion +of a small boat had been picked up, but nothing +had been seen of sailors or passengers. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where was this?” questioned Dave, when +he could get the chance. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The captain of the steamer says about two +miles west of Cave Island.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_189'></a>189</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Cave Island!” cried Phil. “Why, that is +where those Englishmen were going to hunt for +that pirates’ treasure.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Two miles from Cave Island,” mused our +hero. “If the <em>Emma Brower</em> went down, perhaps +those in some of the small boats got to that +place.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps,” answered Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The boys and the captain remained at the shipping +office for an hour, getting all the details possible +concerning the wreck, including the exact +latitude and longitude where the vessel was supposed +to have gone down. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us sail for that spot and see if we can +discover anything,” suggested Dave, as the party +came away. “We may find some of those in the +small boats.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Just what I was going to suggest,” said Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, it’s up to you, Phil, to say what we +shall do,” answered Captain Sanders. “Your +father sent me word that I was to look to you for +orders—that is, within reasonable limits,—and I +know you won’t be unreasonable.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, we want to get back to the United +States, anyway,” said Roger. “And this would +be on our way.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How soon can you get ready for the trip?” +asked our hero, of the master of the <em>Golden +Eagle</em>. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_190'></a>190</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We are all provisioned, so it won’t take but +a few hours,” was the reply. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then let us sail to-day.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You don’t want to wait for more word?” +asked Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, Roger; I don’t think it will do any good,” +answered our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The matter was discussed at the hotel, and a +little later the boys paid their bill and had their +baggage taken to the ship. In the meantime Captain +Sanders had prepared for the trip, and two +hours later the <em>Golden Eagle</em> was moving out of +the harbor of Bridgetown. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How long will it take us to run to that spot +where they think the ship went down?” asked +Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not more than a day and a half—it depends +somewhat on the wind,” answered Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The boys tried to settle themselves, but this +was impossible. Dave could not keep still, and +paced the deck by the hour, or scanned the bosom +of the ocean with the marine glasses Captain Sanders +loaned him. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Only once came a thrill of excitement. A bit of +wreckage was sighted and the ship sailed toward +it. It was a yardarm, and to it were lashed a +cask and several boxes, one of the latter bearing +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_191'></a>191</span> +the name <em>Emma Brower</em>. Not a sign of a human +being could be seen. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If a man was on that wreckage the storm +tore him loose,” said Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How terrible!” whispered Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And think of it, it may have been Merwell, +or Jasniff, or both of them!” returned Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +On the following day they reached the latitude +and longitude as given by the captain of the tramp +steamer. In that vicinity they saw some smaller +wreckage, but nothing of importance. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Cave Island is two miles east of here,” said +Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Any other islands around?” asked Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Nothing within fifteen or twenty miles.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then, if the crew and passengers took to the +small boats, wouldn’t they be likely to steer for +Cave Island?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think so,—that is, if the storm let ’em do so. +It might be the wind would force ’em the other +way. But I think it would be a wise move to +sail for Cave Island and take a look around. The +one trouble is, so I learned at Barbados, the island +hasn’t any sort of harbor. We’ll have to lay-to +outside and go ashore in a small boat.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps it won’t be necessary to go ashore,” +said Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, it can be done easily enough.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_192'></a>192</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The bow of the <em>Golden Eagle</em> was turned +eastward. They ran slowly, all hands keeping +their eyes open for more signs of the wreck. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Presently they came in sight of the reef outside +of Cave Island. It formed a large horseshoe, +and beyond was the island itself, long, low, +and irregular, the shore fringed with tropical trees +and bushes and the center rocky and barren. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“This ain’t no easy place to land,” said Billy +Dill to Dave, as the sails were lowered and the +ship was brought about. “If them critters from +the wreck got here in their small boats in the dark +they must have had a fierce time o’ it!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t see a sign of a boat anywhere,” said +Dave, as he swept the reef and the shore with the +glasses. “And not a sign of a human being +either,” he added, with a sinking heart. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s queer, too, lad, if they came here. +Fust thing I’d think about, if I was wrecked, would +be to put up a signal o’ distress.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was growing dark, yet Dave and his chums +were anxious to go ashore, to see if they could +discover anything concerning those who had been +wrecked, so Captain Sanders ordered out the largest +of the small boats. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll go with you,” he said. “And we can take +Billy Dill and Smiley.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We had better take some things along—in +case we remain ashore all night,” said Dave. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_193'></a>193</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“To be sure. And we’ll go armed, lad—no +telling what may turn up.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Any wild animals here?” questioned the +senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know, but I don’t think so—that is, +not large ones. You’ll find rabbits maybe, and +any number of birds.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Soon the small boat was ready to go ashore. +Billy Dill and the other sailor, Smiley, were at +the oars, while Captain Sanders was in the stern, +to steer and give directions. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If it starts to blow better move off a bit,” said +the captain to the mate. “No use in taking +chances around these reefs.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll watch out,” was the answer. “I know +just what a blow down here means, and I’ll keep +her off.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you think we’ll have another storm?” +asked Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can’t tell about that, lad. Sometimes a storm +comes up pretty quick in these parts.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Soon the small boat was close to the breakers. +The water boiled and foamed on every side, and +it must be confessed that Roger was somewhat +scared. Dave and Phil did not mind, although +wishing it was over. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“To starboard, hard!” shouted the captain, +when the first of the breakers was encountered. +“Now ease off, lads! Lively now, and hard! +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_194'></a>194</span> +Starboard again! Keep it up! There, straight +ahead! Bend to it, bend I tell you! A little +more to starboard—not too much! There, now +we are out of it!” And in a moment more the +small boat was out of the breakers and riding into +a tiny cove, where there was a stretch of sand, +dotted with palms. The two sailors were all but +exhausted and glad enough to rest up and allow +the boat to drift ashore. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So this is Cave Island?” remarked Dave, as +he hopped out on the sand, followed by his chums. +“Well, it doesn’t look much different from the +other islands in this portion of the globe.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +After everybody had alighted, the small boat +was pulled up on the sand and tied to a palm +tree. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What’s to do next?” asked the shipowner’s +son, as he looked inquiringly at Dave. “This is +your expedition, Dave.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How big around do you suppose this island +is, Captain?” asked our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Four or five miles at least.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then we could walk completely around it in +a couple of hours, that is, if we found it wasn’t +too rough in spots.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You won’t find it smooth like this all around, +lad.” +</p> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i005' id='i005'></a> +<img src="images/i005.jpg" alt="“TO STARBOARD, HARD!” SHOUTED THE CAPTAIN." title=""/><br /> +<span class='caption'>“TO STARBOARD, HARD!” SHOUTED THE CAPTAIN.</span> +</div> +<div><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_195'></a>195</span></div> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Some of us might walk in one direction and +some in the other,” suggested Roger. “Then, if +either party discovered anything, it could signal +to the other by firing a pistol or a gun.” For both +sorts of weapons had been brought along. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Whatever you wish to do to-day must be done +quickly,” said Captain Sanders. “It will soon be +night, and, as you know, darkness comes on quickly +in this part of the world.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The matter was discussed for a few minutes, +and then it was decided to leave the sailors in +charge of the boat, while Captain Sanders and +Phil walked up the shore and Dave and Roger +traveled in the opposite direction. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +For fully a quarter of a mile Dave and the +senator’s son found it an easy matter to push +along, for the sandy shore was smooth and offered +no barrier to their advance. But then they came +to a series of rocks, jutting out into the ocean, +and here progress was more difficult. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll not get around this island to-night,” +remarked the senator’s son, after climbing over +a particularly sharp line of rocks. “This takes +a fellow’s wind.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Look!” cried our hero, as he pointed to a +spot between the rocks. “What do you make that +out to be, Roger?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s the wreck of a rowboat!” cried the +other. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Just what I thought. Let us go down and +look it over.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_196'></a>196</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +With care, so as not to sprain an ankle, the +two chums climbed down to the split in the rocks. +By this time it was growing dark, and in the +hollow they could not see clearly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was the remains of a rowboat which they had +discovered. The small craft was split from end +to end, so as to be utterly useless. Near it lay +a broken oar and a broken-open box that had +contained provisions of some sort. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That boat is from the <em>Emma Brower</em>!” +cried Dave, after an investigation. “And that +proves that some of the people from the wrecked +ship came to this island!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, but are they alive, Dave, or were they +drowned?” questioned Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That remains to be found out, Roger. I sincerely +hope they are alive.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_197'></a>197</span><a name='chXXI' id='chXXI'></a>CHAPTER XXI—INTO A CAVE AND OUT</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us look around for footprints, Roger,” +said Dave, as the pair scrambled up the rocks +once more. “If any persons landed from that +smashed rowboat they’d have to walk in some direction, +and the ground is soft back of here.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The trouble is, it is growing so dark,” returned +the senator’s son. “In a little while we +won’t be able to find our way back. We should +have brought a lantern along.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ve got something almost as good,” answered +our hero, and took from his pocket a little electric +flashlight—one of the kind that emits a tiny flash +of light when the button at the end is pressed. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Good enough! That’s first-rate!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The pair were soon down from the rocks. Under +the palm trees it was now dark, and Dave used +the electric flashlight to advantage. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Here are footprints!” he cried, presently. +“Six pairs! That shows that at least a half +dozen persons came ashore in that boat. Those +six may have been carrying others.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Shall we set up a shout?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_198'></a>198</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know, Roger. If Merwell and Jasniff +were around I’d like to surprise them. If +they discovered us first, and they had the jewels, +they’d surely hide the gems and then say they +didn’t have them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I believe that, Dave. Well, let us follow the +footsteps and see where they lead to.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Another thing. Do you remember those +Englishmen? They may be on this island, and +if so, I’d rather steer clear of them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So would I, they were so disagreeable—all but +that one chap, Borden.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The trail led among the palm trees and then +up a rise of ground where grew a number of bushes. +Here the boys had to proceed more slowly, for +fear of missing the way. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s queer that they should call this spot Cave +Island,” observed the senator’s son. “We haven’t +seen anything that looks like a cave.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The caves may be on the other side of the +island,” answered Dave. “Look out, Roger, +there is a split in the rocks! Let us jump over to +yonder bushes.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave placed the flashlight in his pocket and +made the leap he had mentioned, and his chum +came after him. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +A most astonishing thing followed. The bushes +where they landed gave way, and down they rolled +on some smooth rocks. They tried to stay their +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_199'></a>199</span> +progress, but this was impossible, and they continued +to roll for several minutes. Then Dave +bumped into some sort of barrier and Roger +landed beside him. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“For gracious sake, what’s this?” gasped +Roger, when he felt able to speak. The breath +had been all but knocked out of him. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I guess we have found one of the caves,” answered +Dave, grimly. “Phew, but that was some +roll, wasn’t it!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We must be down near the center of the +earth,” murmured the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not quite as bad as that. But we came down +some distance, I admit.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Flash that light around, Dave, and let us see +where we are.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I will if the light hasn’t been smashed,” replied +our hero. “I rolled over it half a dozen +times.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +He brought out the little flashlight and tried it. +Fortunately, it was still in working order. As the +rays fell around the lads, they stared at each other, +blankly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What do you make of this, Dave?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Looks as if it was cut out of the solid rock, +Roger.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It certainly is some cave. Wonder where it +leads to?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We might follow the opening and find out.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_200'></a>200</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Excuse me, I’d rather climb out the way we +came in.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It certainly doesn’t look very inviting.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The two boys found themselves in an irregular +opening of the rocks, fifty feet wide and perhaps +twice that in length. On one side was the smooth +slope down which they had come; on the other a +dark hole that looked as if it might lead to some +bottomless pit. A jagged rock in the center of the +underground chamber had been the means of stopping +them from dropping to the unknown depths +below them. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We were lucky to hit this rock,” said Dave, +with something like a shiver. “If we hadn’t——” +He did not finish. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us get out. It gives me the creeps to stay +here,” returned his chum. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right, Roger, I’m willing. But it is going +to be hard work crawling back, those rocks are +so smooth.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ve got to get back!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I can’t hold the light and climb too. And if +I place it on the rocks it may roll away and go +down into that hole,” went on our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, put it in your pocket again and we’ll try +to climb back in the dark. We know the direction.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave did as his chum suggested, and then commenced +a climb that neither of the lads ever forgot. The rocks +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_201'></a>201</span> +were so smooth in spots that at +times to get a foothold was next to impossible. +Once Roger slid back several feet and would have +gone to the bottom had not Dave caught and held +him. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Take it slowly, Roger,” was our hero’s advice. +“If you go to the bottom, you may be +killed!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll hang—on!” gasped the other. “But I +wi-wish I was out—of—th-this!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, I wish the same.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It took fully a quarter of an hour longer to get +out of the rocky cave, and when the boys reached +the surface of the earth they were so exhausted +they could do little but sit on the ground and +pant for breath. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s Cave Island right enough,” was the comment +of the senator’s son. “But excuse me from +tumbling into any more such openings!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I guess the best thing we can do is to go back +to the boat,” said Dave. “We can’t discover +much in this darkness. We can start out again +early in the morning.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right, back to the boat it is,” and the pair +set out on the return along the sandy shore. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I see a light!” cried Dave, after about half the +distance to where the rowboat had been left was +covered. And he pointed to a spot inland, among +the trees. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_202'></a>202</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe it’s a camp of some sort,” replied +Roger. “It seems to be quite a distance away.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Shall we go and see what it is?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hadn’t we better get the others first, Dave?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right, if you think best.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +So they continued on the way to where the +rowboat had been left. They came up to find that +Captain Sanders and Phil had not yet returned. +Smiley was snoring on the sand, while Billy Dill +sat near by on guard. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Find anybody?” queried the old tar, eagerly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We found one of the caves, and we saw a +light at a distance,” answered Dave. “We want +to investigate that light, as soon as the others get +back.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave and Roger sat down, to rest and to wait, +and thus another half-hour went by. With nothing +else to do, Billy Dill took a nap, and the boys +allowed the old sailor to slumber on. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s queer the captain and Phil don’t return,” +remarked Roger, presently. “They must have +gone much further than we did.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe they fell into one of those caves, +Roger.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, I trust not!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Another half-hour went by and still the others +did not put in an appearance. By this time Dave +was getting worried. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us take a walk along the shore and look +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_203'></a>203</span> +for them,” he said, and Roger agreed, and they +started off. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They had covered less than a quarter of a mile +when they came in sight of a campfire, well-hidden +between the rough rocks back from the water’s +edge. Around the campfire were huddled the +forms of several men, evidently sailors. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps those men are from the <em>Emma +Brower</em>,” said Dave, in a low tone. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t see anything of Captain Sanders and +Phil,” remarked the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No. And yet they must have seen this campfire, +if they came this way. What can it mean, +Dave?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Shall we go up to the campfire and talk to +those fellows?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t see why not. I am not afraid of +them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you see anybody that looks like Jasniff or +Merwell?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, those fellows are all plain sailors, by their +outfits.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave continued to advance and Roger followed, +and neither halted until he was within the glow of +the campfire. Then Dave called out: +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hello, messmates!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At this cry the four sailors around the fire +sprang to their feet. At a glance Dave and Roger +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_204'></a>204</span> +saw that they were in tatters, and that they looked +hungry and careworn. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hello, yourself!” answered one of the +tars, stepping towards the boys. “Who are +you?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Passengers from the <em>Golden Eagle</em>,” answered +Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, some more of that crowd, eh?” cried +the tar. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then you’ve seen the others,—the captain and +a young fellow like ourselves?” queried Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, they were here only a short while ago.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They said they’d be back, and take us aboard +an’ git us something to eat,” put in a second of +the sailors. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“An’ we need that grub putty bad, we do,” +added a third. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Ain’t had no decent meal since we got +wrecked,” came from the fourth. “A few fish +an’ birds, an’ that’s all.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You are from the <em>Emma Brower</em>?” questioned +Dave, eagerly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You’ve struck it, messmate. She went down in +the storm an’ we come putty nigh goin’ down with +her.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, you shall have all you want to eat in +a little while. Tell me where the others of our +crowd went.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They went after the two chaps as ran away.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_205'></a>205</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Ran away?” cried Dave. “From where?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“From here.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They must have been Jasniff and Merwell!” +murmured Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Who were those fellows?” asked our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Two passengers from the bark. They came +ashore with us, and they stayed with us until your +captain and the other young fellow come along. +Then they up anchors and away like the old Nick +was after ’em,” explained the tar who had first +spoken. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Were they young fellows like ourselves?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes,—a bit older, maybe. Named Ford and +Smith.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They must have been Jasniff and Merwell,” +said Dave, to his chum. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I wonder if they managed to save the jewels,” +whispered the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did they have any baggage?” asked Dave +of the sailors. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Baggage? Not much! We didn’t have no +time for baggage when the ship went down. It +was every man fer himself. The cap’n got off +in one boat with some o’ the passengers, an’ the +mate got off with some of the crew in another +boat, an’ we got off by ourselves. It was blowin’ +big guns, I can tell ye, an’ it looks like we would +be swamped most every minit. I knowed about +this island an’ I steered in this direction as well +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_206'></a>206</span> +as I could, an’ by sheer good luck we struck the +shore—an’ here we are.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What became of the other boats?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Ain’t seen nuthin’ of ’em yet.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Is that your boat was split in two, between the +rocks in that direction?” and Dave pointed to +where such a craft had been found by him and +Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s her, messmate. Putty badly used up, +eh?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And you are quite sure those two passengers +had no baggage?” went on our hero, after a +pause. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Nary a thing, messmate, excepting wot they +wore. It wasn’t no time to think o’ baggage, it +was a time to think o’ what to do to save your +life!” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_207'></a>207</span><a name='chXXII' id='chXXII'></a>CHAPTER XXII—THE HURRICANE</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What direction did those fellows who ran +away take?” asked Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s the way they went,” answered one of +the sailors, pointing to some heavy undergrowth +behind the camping-out spot. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where does that lead to, do you know?” +asked the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Leads to a spring o’ fresh water an’ half a +dozen big caves,” was the reply. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Caves?” queried Dave. “Then perhaps the +fellows, who ran away, took to one of the caves.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Like as not, messmate. Them two chaps have +been explorin’ them caves ever since we came +ashore.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us walk back and have a look,” suggested +our hero. “We may be able to give Phil and +Captain Sanders some assistance.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Without further delay, the two boys left the +camp of the castaways and hurried along a small +trail through the bushes. They soon came to a +rocky depression in the midst of which was a tiny +spring. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_208'></a>208</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That water looks good,” exclaimed Dave. +“Let us get a drink.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps it is poisonous, Dave.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If it was, I think those sailors would have +warned us.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They found the water fairly cold and of a good +flavor, and each drank his fill. Then Dave flashed +the electric light around. Ahead they made out +a series of rocks, with here and there a gloomy +opening, leading to unknown depths. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“This is Cave Island and no mistake,” was our +hero’s comment. “The place seems to be fairly +honeycombed.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Be careful that you don’t go into a hole and +drop out of sight,” warned his chum. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They walked to the entrance of one of the caves +and peered in. All was dark and silent. Then +they went to the next cave. Here they caught a +glimmer of light. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Somebody is moving in here!” exclaimed +Dave. “A man with a torch!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They waited, and presently saw that two persons +were approaching slowly, having to pick their way +over the uneven rocks. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They are the captain and Phil,” cried Roger, +and set up a faint call. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hello! Who is that?” answered the captain +of the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave and Roger!” cried Phil. “Oh, say,” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_209'></a>209</span> +he added, eagerly, “we’ve seen Jasniff and Merwell!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So we suspected,” answered Dave. “But you +didn’t catch them?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, they got away from us,” returned Captain +Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“In this cave?” queried Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“But if they are in here, we can get them sooner +or later,” put in Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, my lad. There are several openings to +these caves. We found one at the far end, and +I reckon those rascals got away through it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did you speak to them at all?” asked our +hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Didn’t get time,” answered Phil. “The minute +they saw us they ran like frightened deer.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did they have any baggage, Phil?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not that I could see. I rather fancied Jasniff +had a small bundle under his coat, but I may have +been mistaken.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The sailors said they came ashore without +baggage. Perhaps the jewels went down with the +bark.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, I think they’d make an effort to save such +costly gems—anybody would.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not if they were thoroughly scared,” broke +in Captain Sanders. “A person who is thoroughly +scared forgets everything but to save his life.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_210'></a>210</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then you haven’t any idea where they went +to?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, lad. But I don’t think they’ll get off this +island in a hurry.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +There was nothing to do but to return to where +the four sailors were encamped. Then the whole +party proceeded to where Billy Dill and Smiley +had been left. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t think it will be safe to try to get +through those breakers in the darkness,” said Captain +Sanders. “We may as well make ourselves +comfortable until morning. We have plenty of +grub on hand, so you fellows shall have your fill,” +he went on, to the castaways. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The sailors were glad enough to build another +campfire, close to the landing-place, and here they +were served with all the food and drink they +wanted, which put them in good humor. They +related the particulars of how the <em>Emma Brower</em> +had gone down, and of how one boat after another +had put off in the storm. It had been a time of +great excitement, such as none of them were liable +to ever forget. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The boys were worn out from their exertions +and willing enough to rest. They fixed up some +beds of boughs and were soon in the land of +dreams. The sailors rested also, each, however, +taking an hour at watching, by orders of Captain +Sanders. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_211'></a>211</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was about five o’clock in the morning when +Dave awoke, to find the wind blowing furiously. +Two of the sailors were busy stamping out the +campfire, for the burning brands were flying in all +directions, threatening to set fire to the undergrowth. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What’s this?” he asked of Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No telling, lad,” was the grave reply. +“Looks like a pretty big blow.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“More like a hurricane!” snorted old Billy +Dill. “The wind is growin’ wuss each minit!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Draw that boat up into the bushes and fasten +it well,” ordered the captain. “We don’t want +to have it stove in or floated off by the breakers.” +And the rowboat was carried to a place of +safety. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where is the ship?” asked Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Slipped away when the blow came up,” answered +the captain. “An’ I hope the mate knows +enough to keep away,” he added, gravely. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Soon it started to rain, first a few scattering +drops and then a perfect deluge. The castaways +spoke of a cave that was near by, and all hurried +in that direction, taking the stores from the boat +with them. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How long will this last, do you think?” asked +Phil, of the master of the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No telling. Maybe only to-day, maybe several +days.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_212'></a>212</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If it last several days, we’ll have a time of it +getting food,” broke in the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll watch out for fish and turtles,” said +Billy Dill. “Nothin’ like turtles when you are +good an’ hungry.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s true,” answered Dave. He had not +forgotten the big turtle the old tar had managed to +catch down on one of the islands in the South +Seas. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Soon it was raining so hard that but little could +be seen beyond the entrance to the cave. The wind +moaned and shrieked throughout the cavern, +which happened to have several entrances. Once +it became so strong that it almost lifted the boys +from their feet. The rain drove in at times, and +they had to get into a split in the rocks to keep dry. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hark! what was that?” cried Roger, during +a lull in the wind. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I heard thunder; that’s all,” answered Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think a tree must have been struck by lightning,” +answered Captain Sanders. “The lightning +is getting pretty fierce,” he added, as a brilliant +illumination filled the cavern. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Wonder where Jasniff and Merwell are?” +whispered Phil, to his chums, “I’ll wager this +storm scares ’em half to death.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, and those four Englishmen,” added +Dave. “Don’t forget that they were coming to +this island.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_213'></a>213</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Slowly the hours of the morning dragged by. +There was no let-up in the hurricane, for such it +really proved to be. The wind blew strongly all +the time, but occasionally would come a heavy +blast that fairly made the island tremble. The +lightning had died away somewhat, but now and +then would come a great flash, followed by a +crash and rumble that would echo and reëcho +among the rocks. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Just look at the ocean!” cried Dave, as he +and his chums walked to one corner of the entrance +to gaze out. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The waves seem to be mountain-high,” returned +Phil. “You wouldn’t think it possible a +ship could live on such a sea.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, it is mighty dangerous, Phil; you know +that as well as I do.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I hope the <em>Golden Eagle</em> weathers the +storm.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We all hope that.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dinner was a rather scanty meal, cooked with +great difficulty in a hollow of the rocks. The +smoke from the fire rolled and swirled in all directions, +nearly blinding everybody. But the repast +was better than nothing, and nobody grumbled. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +By nightfall the rain ceased. But the wind was +almost as strong as ever, and when those in the +cave ventured outside they had to be on guard, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_214'></a>214</span> +for fear a flying tree-branch would come down on +their heads. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Captain Sanders was much worried over the +safety of his vessel, but he did not let on to the +boys, since it would have done no good. But the +lads understood, and they, too, were more or less +alarmed, remembering the fate that had overtaken +the <em>Emma Brower</em> in a storm that had been no +worse than the present one. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +With so much rain driving in, the cave was a +damp place, and the boys were glad enough to go +outside. They looked for wood that might be +easily dried, and after much difficulty, succeeded +in starting up a new campfire, around which the +whole crowd gathered. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’m goin’ to try my luck along shore,” said +Billy Dill, and started off with Dave, Phil, and +Roger, to see if any fish or turtles could be located. +They found the shore strewn with wreckage. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, Billy, can this be from our ship?” exclaimed +Phil, in alarm. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t think so, lad. Looks to me like it +had been in the water some days. I reckon it’s +from the <em>Emma Brower</em>, or some other craft.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In the wreckage they found the remains of several +boxes and barrels. But the contents had become +water-soaked or had sunk to the bottom of +the sea; so there was nothing in the shape of food +for them. They also came across the mainmast of the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_215'></a>215</span> +bark, with some of the stays still +dragging around it. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That will do for a pole, in case we wish +to hoist a flag,” suggested the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They found neither fish nor turtles, and at last +had to return to the campfire disappointed. There +was next to nothing to eat for supper. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, better luck in the morning,” said Captain +Sanders, with an air of cheerfulness he did +not feel. “As soon as this wind dies down our +ship will come back, and then we’ll have all we +want to eat.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was a long, dreary night that followed, and +the boys were glad to behold the sun come up +brightly in the morning. Dave was the first up, +but his chums quickly followed, and all went down +to the beach, to look for fish and also to see if the +<em>Golden Eagle</em> was anywhere in sight. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +This time they had better luck, so far as food +was concerned. In a hollow they found over a +score of fish that had been cast from the ocean +by the breakers, and they also found a fine turtle +that was pinned down by a fallen tree. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s a new way to catch a turtle,” remarked +Dave. “It’s a regular trap.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Turtle soup, yum! yum!” murmured Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And broiled fish,—all you want, too!” added +Roger, smacking his lips. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +When they got back to the camp they found that +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_216'></a>216</span> +the fire had been renewed, and soon the appetizing +odor of broiling fish filled the air. Then Captain +Sanders and one of the castaway sailors came in +from a walk in another direction, carrying an airtight +canister, which, on being opened, was found +to contain fancy crackers. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There is a good deal of wreckage down on the +beach,” said the captain. “We’ll inspect it after +breakfast.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Having eaten their fill of the fish and the +crackers, and leaving Billy Dill and some of the +others busy making turtle soup, the boys and Captain +Sanders took another walk along the beach, +to look over the wreckage and also see if they +could sight the <em>Golden Eagle</em>, or locate Jasniff +or Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I hope we can find those two fellows,” said +Dave. “I can stand this suspense no longer. I +must know what has become of those jewels!” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_217'></a>217</span><a name='chXXIII' id='chXXIII'></a>CHAPTER XXIII—A STRANGE DISCOVERY</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +A half-mile was covered when, on turning a +point of rocks, the boys and the captain came to +a sandy cove. Here was more of the wreckage, +and the whole party ran down to the beach to +investigate. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Boxes, barrels, and bits of timber were strewn +from one end of the cove to the other, and in the +mass were a number of things of more or less +value—timber, food, and some clothing. There +was also a trunk, but it was open and empty. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Look!” cried Dave, suddenly, and pointed to +a small, black leather case, that rested on some of +the wreckage. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What is it?” queried Phil and Roger, in a +breath. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave did not reply, for he was crawling over +the wreckage with care. Soon he reached the spot +where the black leather case rested, caught on a +nail, and he picked it up. The clasp was undone +and the case fell open, revealing the interior, which +was lined with white plush. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Empty!” murmured Dave, sadly. “Empty!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_218'></a>218</span> +There was a groan in his voice as he uttered +the word. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What is it, Dave?” asked the senator’s son, +although he and Phil guessed the truth. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s the Carwith jewel-case,” was the answer. +“The very case that Mr. Carwith left with Mr. +Wadsworth!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Are you certain?” demanded Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, for here is the name, ‘Ridgewood Osgood +Carwith,’ stamped in gold on the top.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And empty,” murmured the captain. “This +looks bad,” and he shook his head, thoughtfully. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe Jasniff and Merwell took the jewels +from the case,” suggested Roger, hopefully. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It is possible, Roger. But—but—I am afraid +the jewels are at the bottom of the ocean,” answered +Dave, and his face showed how downcast +he felt. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They might have taken the jewels and divided +them between themselves,” said Phil. “Maybe +they put them in money-belts, or something like +that. They might think that the sailors would +rob them, if they saw the case.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s possible, Phil, and I hope you are right,” +answered our hero. But in his heart he was still +afraid that the gems had gone to the bottom of +the Atlantic. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think we had better climb to the top of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_219'></a>219</span> +yonder rise and take a look around the island,” +said the captain. “For all we know, the <em>Golden +Eagle</em> may be on the other side. I sincerely hope +she has weathered the storm.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Placing the jewel-case in a safe place between +the rocks, the party commenced to climb the rise +of ground the captain had pointed out. This was +no easy task, since the rocks were rough and +there were many openings, leading to the caves +below. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We don’t want another tumble,” remarked +Roger to Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hardly, Roger; once was enough.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The sun had come out strongly, consequently +the water was drying away rapidly. It was very +warm, and the boys were glad that they had +donned thin clothing on leaving the ship. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At last they reached the top of the rise and +from that elevation were able to see all but the +southern end of Cave Island, which was hidden by +a growth of palms. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Not a ship of any kind was in sight, much to +the captain’s disappointment. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Must have had to sail away a good many +miles,” said Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Either that, lad, or else the storm caused +more or less trouble.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +From the elevation, all took a good look at +every part of the island that could be seen. They +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_220'></a>220</span> +saw several other rocky elevations and the entrances +to caves innumerable. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Tell you one thing,” remarked Phil. “If +there was any truth in that story of a pirates’ +treasure, the pirates would have plenty of places +where to hide the hoard.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Humph! I don’t believe in the treasure and +never will,” returned Roger. “If the treasure +was ever here, you can make up your mind that +somebody got hold of it long before this.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If those Englishmen came here, it is queer +that we don’t see some trace of them,” said Captain +Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe they are like Jasniff and Merwell, +keeping out of sight,” ventured Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That may be true.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think I see some figures moving down near +the shore over there,” continued Roger, after another +look around. “But they are so far off I +am not sure. They may be animals.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They look like two men to me,” exclaimed +Dave, after a long look. “What if they should +be Jasniff and Merwell! Oh, let us walk there +and make sure!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s a good, stiff walk,” answered Captain +Sanders. “We can’t go from here very well—unless +we want to climb over some rough rocks. +It would be better to go down and follow the +shore.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_221'></a>221</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then let us do that. It won’t do us any good +to go back to where we left the others, now the +ship isn’t in sight.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +But the captain demurred, and finally it was +agreed to return to camp and start out for the +other side of the island directly after dinner. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Turtle soup for all hands!” announced Billy +Dill, proudly. “Best ever made, too.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It certainly smells good,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The turtle soup proved both palatable and +nourishing, and, eaten with crackers, made a good +meal. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll take some crackers and fish along,” +said the captain, to the boys, when they were preparing +to leave the camp again. “For there is +no telling how soon we’ll get back. It may take +us longer than we think to reach the other side +of this island.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ve got a knapsack,” said one of the castaway +sailors. “You can take that along, filled,” +and so it was arranged. Dave carried his gun +and the captain had a pistol. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If there is any game, we’ll have a try for it,” +said Dave. “Even a few plump birds would make +fine eating.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, or a rabbit or hare,” added Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The party walked along the shore as far as they +could go and then, coming to what appeared to +be an old trail, took to that. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_222'></a>222</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What do you make of this path?” said Dave. +“I had an idea the island was uninhabited.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It is supposed to be,” answered Captain Sanders. +“But there is no reason why somebody +shouldn’t live here.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Presently they came to a fine spring of water. +Near by lay an old rusty cup, and a little further +on a broken bucket. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Somebody has been here and that recently,” +was Dave’s comment. “I hope we are on the trail +of Merwell and Jasniff.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They walked on a little further and then, of a +sudden, Captain Sanders halted the boys and +pointed up into one of the trees. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Wild pigeons!” exclaimed Dave. “And +hundreds of them! Shall I give them a couple of +barrels, captain?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Might as well, lad. Wild pigeons are good +eating, especially when you are hungry. Get as +many of ’em as you can.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave approached a little closer and took aim +with care. Bang! went the shotgun, and a wild +fluttering and flying followed. Bang! went the +second barrel of the weapon, and then, as the +smoke cleared away, the boys and the captain saw +seven of the pigeons come down to the ground. +Several others fluttered around and Phil caught +one and wrung its neck, and Roger laid another +low with a stick he had picked up. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_223'></a>223</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Fine shots, both of them,” declared Captain +Sanders. “Now load up again, Dave, so as to be +ready for anything else that shows up.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am afraid I have scared the rest of the +game,” declared our hero, and so it proved, for +after that they saw nothing but some small birds. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They passed through a thick woods and then +came rather unexpectedly to a wall of rocks, all of +a hundred feet in height. At the base of the +wall was an opening leading into a broad cave. +Near the entrance was the remains of a campfire. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Somebody has been here and that recently!” +cried Phil, as he examined the embers. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Must be Merwell and Jasniff!” cried Dave. +“For if they were strangers they would come out +and see what the shooting meant.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Shall we go into the cave, or continue on the +way to the shore?” questioned the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, let us take a peep into the cave first,” +cried Phil. “It looks as if it was inhabited.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The others were willing, and lighting a firebrand +that was handy, they entered the cavern. +In front they found the opening to be broad and +low, but in the rear the ceiling was much higher +and there were several passageways leading in as +many different directions. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What an island!” murmured Roger. “Why, +one could spend a year in visiting all the caves!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_224'></a>224</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s like a great, big sponge!” returned Phil. +“Holes everywhere!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Take care that you don’t slip down into some +opening!” warned Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In one of the passages they came across the remains +of a meal and also some empty bottles. +Then Dave saw some bits of paper strewn over +the rocky floor. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What are they, Phil?” he asked, and then +both commenced to pick the pieces up. Roger +helped, while the captain held the firebrand. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, of all things!” cried the shipowner’s +son. “Now what do you make of this?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The chart!” cried Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What chart?” queried the master of the +<em>Golden Eagle</em>. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The treasure chart those four Englishmen +had,” answered Dave. “Now what made them +come here with it and tear it to pieces?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hum!” mused the captain. “One of two +things would make ’em do that, lad. Either they +got the treasure and had no further use for the +map, or else they found the whole thing was a +fake and in their rage they tore the map to +shreds.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They must have gotten the gold!” murmured +Roger and Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, I think they got fooled,” said Dave. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_225'></a>225</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The question is, if those Britishers were here, +where did they go to?” asked the captain. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us call,” suggested Dave. “They may +be in some part of this cave where they couldn’t +hear the shots from my gun.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All called out several times, and listened intently +for a reply. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hark! I hear something!” cried Roger. +“Listen!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They strained their ears, and from what appeared +to be a great distance they heard a human +voice. But what was said they could not make +out. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Too many echoes here,” declared the captain. +“A fellow can’t tell where the cry comes from.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, let us investigate,” said our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They moved forward and backward, up one +passageway and down another, calling and listening. +At times the voice seemed to be quite close, +then it sounded further off than ever. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“This sure is a mystery!” declared Phil. +“What do you make of it, Dave?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am beginning to think the call came from +somewhere overhead,” answered our hero. “Captain, +see if you can flash a light on those rocks to +the left of our heads.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Captain Sanders did as requested, and presently +all in the party saw another passageway, leading +up from a series of rocks that formed something +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_226'></a>226</span> +of a natural stairway. Up this they went, Dave +leading the van. Then they came to a small opening +between two rocks. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Help! help!” came in a half-smothered voice. +“Help, please. Don’t leave me here in the dark +any longer!” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_227'></a>227</span><a name='chXXIV' id='chXXIV'></a>CHAPTER XXIV—JASNIFF AND MERWELL</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s a man!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“One of the Englishmen!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You are right, lads,” came from Captain +Sanders. “And see, he is bound hands and feet +to the rocks!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +What the master of the <em>Golden Eagle</em> said was +true, and as the firebrand was flashed on the scene, +the chums could do little but stare in astonishment. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Lying on his back between the rocks was the +Englishman named Giles Borden. Hands and +feet were bound with a strong cord, which ran +around a projection of the rocks in such a manner +that the prisoner could scarcely move. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Who tied you up?” questioned Dave, as he +and Phil set to work to liberate the prisoner. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney,” groaned the +prisoner. “Oh, if only I had my hands on them!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why did they do it?” asked Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They wanted to rob me—and they did rob +me!” answered Giles Borden. “Oh, help me +out of this wretched hole and give me a drink of +water! I am dying from thirst!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_228'></a>228</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Not without difficulty the man was freed of the +rope and helped to get out from between the rocks. +Then Dave and Roger half carried him down to +the cave proper. The crowd had a canteen of +water and the man drank, eagerly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So your friends robbed you?” said Captain +Sanders, curiously. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do not call them friends of mine!” returned +Giles Borden. “They are not friends—they are +vipers, wolves! Oh, if ever I meet them again at +home I’ll soon have them in prison, or know the +reason why!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hadn’t you better tell us all about it?” went +on the master of the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Wait a minute!” cried Dave. “Do you suppose +those men are anywhere near here?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know. They said they would be back, +but they did not come.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They may have seen us and skipped out,” +ventured the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“More than likely,” groaned Giles Borden. +“Now that they have my money they won’t want +to stay here. They’ll take passage on that ship as +soon as she comes in and leave me to shift for +myself.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Tell us your story, so we can understand what +you are talking about,” said Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In a disconnected manner the Englishman related +his tale, pausing occasionally to take another +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_229'></a>229</span> +drink of water. He said he was from London +and had met Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney less +than six months before. They had come to him +with the story of a wonderful pirates’ treasure +said to be hidden on Cave Island, and had asked +him to finance an expedition in search of it. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I had just fallen heir to five thousand pounds +through the death of my father,” he went on, “and +I was anxious to get the treasure, so I consented +to pay the expenses of the trip, taking the three +men along. They had the chart that you saw on +shipboard and some other particulars, and they +made me bring along a thousand pounds extra, +stating that we might have to pay some natives +well to get them to show us where the particular +cave we were seeking was located.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Then had followed the trip to Florida and the +one to Barbados. At the latter island a schooner +had been chartered to take them to Cave Island, +where they were landed on the eastern shore. The +schooner was to come back for the Englishmen a +week later. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“As soon as the treasure hunt began I suspected +that I was being hoaxed,” continued Giles Borden. +“For all I knew, we were alone on the island. +We found several huts, but they were all deserted. +We visited a score of caves, but saw nothing that +looked like a treasure. Then, one afternoon, Geswick +asked me about the extra thousand pounds +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_230'></a>230</span> +I was carrying. I grew suspicious and tried to +hide the money between the rocks. The three +caught me at it and pounced on the money like a +pack of wolves. Then, when I remonstrated, they +laughed at me, and told me to keep quiet, that +they were going to run matters to suit themselves.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They must have intended to rob you from the +start,” said Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You are right, and I was a fool to trust them. +As soon as they had my money, one of them, +Rumney, tore up the chart and threw the pieces +in my face. That angered me so greatly that I +struck him with my fist, knocking him down. Then +the three leaped on me and made me a prisoner, +binding me with the rope. I tried my best to get +away, but could not. That was at night. In the +morning they went off, saying they would come +back later and give me something to eat. But +that is the last I have seen or heard of them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If we hadn’t found you, you might have +starved to death,” murmured Captain Sanders. +“They ought to be punished heavily for this—and +for robbing you!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The Englishman was glad enough to get something +to eat, and then said he felt much stronger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“But what brings you to this island?” he questioned, +while partaking of the food. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We are after a pair of criminals,” answered +Dave, as the others looked at him, not knowing +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_231'></a>231</span> +what to say. “Two young fellows who ran away +with some valuable jewels. I suppose you saw +nothing of them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, as I said before, we saw nobody.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They are on this island.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then I hope you catch them. And I hope +you’ll aid me in catching those other scamps.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll certainly do that,” answered Captain +Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +A little later the whole party left the cave, and +Giles Borden pointed out a number of other caves +he had visited. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The island is full of them,” declared the +Englishman. “And one has to be careful, for fear +of falling into a hole at every step.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The middle of the afternoon found the party +once more at the water’s edge. They had seen +no trace of Jasniff and Merwell, or of the rascally +Englishmen. All were tired out and content to +rest for a little while. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Looks like a wild goose chase, doesn’t it, +Dave?” remarked Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, you mustn’t grow discouraged so quickly, +Roger,” was Dave’s answer. “Unless Jasniff and +Merwell have a chance to leave this island we’ll +be sure to locate them, sooner or later. What I +am worried about mostly is the question: Have +they the jewels or did the gems go to the bottom +of the ocean?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_232'></a>232</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, that’s the most important question of all.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It will be poor consolation to catch Jasniff +and Merwell and not get the jewels,” put in Phil. +“I reckon, Dave, you’d rather have it the other +way around—get the jewels and miss Jasniff and +Merwell.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Indeed, yes, Phil.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“In case we don’t——” began the senator’s son, +and then stopped short. He had seen Captain +Sanders leap up and start inland. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What did you see, Captain?” asked Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I saw somebody looking at us, from behind +yonder trees!” cried the master of the <em>Golden +Eagle</em>. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“One of the Englishmen?” queried Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, it was somebody younger—looked a little +like that picture of Link Merwell!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Come on—after them!” cried Dave, and +started on a run in the direction the captain indicated. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All were soon on the way, climbing over some +rough rocks at first and then crashing through +the heavy undergrowth. Then they entered a forest +of tropical trees and vines. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I see them!” exclaimed Dave, after several +hundred feet had been covered. “Jasniff and +Merwell as sure as you live! Stop! Stop, I tell +you!” he called out. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You keep back, Dave Porter!” yelled Nick +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_233'></a>233</span> +Jasniff in return. “Keep back, or it will be the +worse for you!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Jasniff, you had better surrender!” cried +Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll be sure to get you sooner or later!” +added Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You’ll never catch me!” answered the other. +“Now keep back, or maybe somebody will get +shot.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you think he’ll shoot?” asked Captain +Sanders, in some alarm, while Giles Borden stopped +short. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Possibly,” answered Dave. “But I am going +after him anyway,” he added sturdily. “I came +here to catch those rascals and I am going to do +it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And I am with you,” said Phil, promptly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Scare ’em with your gun, Dave,” suggested +the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I will,” was our hero’s reply, and he brought +the weapon to the front. “I’ve got a gun, Jasniff!” +he called out. “You had better stop! +And you had better stop too, Merwell!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Don’t yo-you shoot at us!” screamed Link +Merwell, in sudden terror. And then he ran with +all speed for the nearest trees and dove out of +sight. The next instant Jasniff disappeared, likewise. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave was now thoroughly aroused, and he resolved to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_234'></a>234</span> +do his best to run the rascals down and +corner them. Shifting his shotgun once more to +his back, he ran on in the direction the pair had +taken, and Roger, Phil, and the captain and the +Englishman followed. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Listening occasionally, they could hear Jasniff +and Merwell crashing through the undergrowth +and at the same time calling to each other. Evidently +they had become separated and were trying +to get together again. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +As they advanced into the forest, Dave caught +sight of Merwell. He was behind a low fringe +of bushes and an instant later disappeared. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Stop, Merwell!” he called out. “It won’t +do you any good to run. We are bound to catch +you, sooner or later.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yo-you let me alone, Dave Porter!” spluttered +Merwell. He was almost out of breath, so +violent had been his exertions. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave kept on and soon reached the low bushes. +Then he saw Merwell again, this time leaping for +some brushwood between two tall rocks. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ve got you now!” he said, sharply. “You +may as well give in!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, Porter, please let me——” commenced +Link Merwell, and then Dave’s hand caught him +by the shoulder and whirled him about. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +As this happened something else occurred that +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_235'></a>235</span> +filled both pursued and pursuer with alarm. The +grass and brushwood under their feet began to give +way. Then of a sudden Link Merwell sank from +sight, and Dave disappeared after him! +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In the meanwhile Phil and the others kept on in +the direction Nick Jasniff had taken. Twice they +caught sight of the former bully of Oak Hall, but +each time he was further away than before. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You’ll not catch me!” cried Jasniff. “You +might as well give up trying.” Then he dove into +another section of the forest and they saw no +more of him. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What has become of Dave?” asked Phil, +when he and Roger came together, a little +later. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I thought he was with you, Phil.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And I thought he was with you.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“He went after that other chap,” put in Captain +Sanders. “Perhaps he caught him. They +were over in that direction,” and the captain +pointed with his hand. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All proceeded in the direction indicated. But +they did not catch sight of either Dave or Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, this is strange, to say the least,” remarked +Phil, after they had called out several +times. “What do you make of it, Roger?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’m sure I don’t know, Phil. They can’t +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_236'></a>236</span> +have gotten so far away but what they could hear +us call.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe they fell into one of the caves,” suggested +Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If they have, we had better hunt for Dave at +once,” returned Roger. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_237'></a>237</span><a name='chXXV' id='chXXV'></a>CHAPTER XXV—LINK MERWELL’S STORY</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Down and down and still down went Dave, +with Link Merwell in front of him. Daylight +was left behind with a suddenness that was appalling. +The brushwood scratched our hero’s +face and he could not repress a cry of alarm. +Merwell screamed loud and long and an echo +came back that was weird and ghostlike. Then +came a mighty splash, and both boys went into +the water over their heads. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave was a good swimmer, and as soon as he +entered the water he struck out to save himself. +He came up in almost utter darkness, so he had +to go it blindly, not knowing in what direction to +turn. Then he heard a wild spluttering and knew +the sounds came from his enemy. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Merwell!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, Porter! Sa-save me, please!” gasped +Link Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why don’t you swim?—that is what I am +doing.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I—I—struck my head on a rock! Oh, save +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_238'></a>238</span> +me!” And then came a gasp, and the scamp disappeared +under the surface. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave was close by and knew the direction by +the noise. Taking a few strokes, he bumped into +Merwell, who promptly tried to catch his would-be +rescuer by the throat. But our hero was on +guard and turned him around. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Keep quiet, or I’ll let go!” he ordered, as he +began to tread water. As Merwell obeyed, Dave +struck out to where he saw a faint streak of light. +He made out a shelving rock, and after some difficulty, +reached this. Here the water was only up +to his waist, and he waded along, half carrying +his enemy, until they reached another series of +rocks, where both crawled up to a spot that was +dry. From somewhere overhead came a faint +streak of light, testifying to the fact that there was +an opening beyond, even if it could not be +seen. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, my head!” murmured Link Merwell, +and put up one hand to a lump that was rising on +his forehead. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I got struck myself,” said Dave. “But it +didn’t amount to much. I told you to stop. If +you had done so, we wouldn’t have gotten into this +pickle.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Whe-where are we?” asked Merwell, and +there was a shiver in his tone. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Down at the bottom of that hole.” Dave +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_239'></a>239</span> +tried to pierce the darkness. “Looks like some +underground river to me.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The water is salt.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then this place must connect with the ocean.” +Dave drew a deep breath. “Merwell, tell me +truthfully, what did you do with those jewels?” +he questioned, eagerly. Even in that time of peril +he could not forget the mission that had brought +him to Cave Island. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Who—who said I had the jewels?” faltered +the other. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I know you and Jasniff took them—it is useless +for you to deny it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How do you know that?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Never mind now. Answer my question. +Have you the jewels, or did you give them to +Jasniff?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I didn’t give Nick anything.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then you have them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How do you know?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am not here to answer questions, Link Merwell. +I want to know what you did with the +jewels.” Dave’s voice grew stern. “Answer me +at once!” And he caught Merwell by the arm. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Don’t—don’t shove me into the water!” +cried the scamp, in alarm, although Dave had no +intention of doing as he imagined. “I—I—we—er—we +divided the jewels between us. But Nick +got the best of them.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_240'></a>240</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And what did you do with your share?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll—er—I’ll tell you when we get out of this +hole.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You’ll tell me right now, Merwell!” And +again Dave caught the culprit by the arm. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I—I put my share of the jewels in my money-belt,” +he faltered. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Have you it on now?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. But Nick has the best of the jewels—I +got only the little ones,” went on Link Merwell, +half-angrily. It was easy to surmise that he and +Jasniff had not gotten along well together. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How is it Jasniff got the best of them?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“He had the jewel-case when we were about +to leave the bark during the storm. Everybody +was excited, and he said we couldn’t carry the case—that +it wouldn’t be safe, for we might drop it +and all of the jewels would be lost. He said we +had better divide them and put them in our belts. +We had bought belts for that purpose in Jacksonville. +So we took the jewels out of the case and +threw the box away. I thought I had my share, +but after we got to this island, and I had a chance +to look, I saw he had the lion’s share, about three-quarters, +in fact, and all the big ones.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And he has them now?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes,—that is, he did have them just before +we saw you.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did you sell or pawn any of the jewels?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_241'></a>241</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Only a few small ones. We were afraid to +offer the big ones, so soon after the—well, you +know,” and Link Merwell stopped short, looking +everything but happy. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You mean so soon after the robbery,” said +Dave, bluntly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Link, whatever—but never mind that now,” +continued our hero, hastily. “Hand over the +money-belt.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What, now?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, at once. I’ll not trust you to carry those +jewels a minute longer.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can’t you wait till we get out of this wretched +hole?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I might, but I am not going to. Hand it over +and be careful that none of the jewels are +lost. Your father may have to pay for the +others.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +With fingers that trembled from fear and chilliness, +Link Merwell slipped his hands under the +light clothing he wore and took off the money-belt +that encircled his waist. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There is some money there that belongs to +me,” he began, hesitatingly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You’ll get back what is yours, never fear,” +answered Dave, and took the belt. He saw to it +that it was tightly closed, then fastened it around +his own waist. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_242'></a>242</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Remember, Nick has the best of the jewels,” +went on Merwell, rather spitefully. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am not likely to forget it,” answered Dave, +grimly. “Now, the sooner we get out of this +hole the better.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Merwell was just as anxious to see daylight, +even if he was to be held a prisoner, and together +the boys hunted around for some exit from the +underground watercourse. But the only way out +seemed to be far overhead, and to climb up the +smooth, sloping rocks proved impossible. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, what shall we do?” groaned Merwell, +after they had attempted to climb up and +had failed. “We are caught like rats in a +trap!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps we’ll have to swim for it,” answered +Dave. “This water is very salt, which proves +it comes from the ocean. Moreover, it is gradually +going down, showing it is affected by the +tide. Let us follow the stream for a short distance +and see where it leads to.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Merwell demurred, but he did not want to remain +behind alone in the semi-darkness, so he +followed Dave, and both waded and swam a +distance of several hundred feet. Here the underground +river made a turn around the rocks, and +both boys were delighted to see a streak of sunlight +resting on the water. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“An opening of some sort!” cried our hero. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_243'></a>243</span> +“Come on!” And he swam on boldly and Merwell +followed as quickly as he could. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Soon the pair reached a break in the cave. On +either side were walls of rocks, uneven and covered +with scanty bushes and immense trailing vines. +The opening was about a hundred feet in length, +and beyond it the stream of salty water plunged +into another cavern, undoubtedly on its way to +the ocean. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, we are out of the cave in one way but +not in another,” observed Dave, as he stood on +the dry rocks and gazed about. “It’s going to +be a stiff climb to get out of here.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Ca-can’t you wait till I—I get my breath,” +panted Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, for I want to get my own breath back. +Perhaps we’ll have to go through that next cave +to get out,” he continued, after a pause. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, I hope not! I hate it underground!” +And Merwell shivered. “Besides, it’s cold,” he +went on, to cover up the tremor in his +voice. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, it is cold,” returned Dave, shortly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +He sat down to rest, and Merwell followed suit. +On all sides were the rocky walls and trailing +vines, while at their feet ran the silent, mysterious +stream of salty water. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave looked at the walls and the stream, and +then looked at Merwell. The face of the other +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_244'></a>244</span> +youth was a study. He was downcast to the last +degree. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Link, what made you do it?” he asked, in +a voice that was not unkindly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I didn’t do it—that is, it wasn’t my plan!” +burst out the culprit, passionately. “Oh, I know +they’ll hold me for it, just the same as they’ll +hold Nick, if they catch him! But I’ll tell you +honestly, Dave, it wasn’t any of my planning. +I’m bad, and I know it, but I am not as bad as +that. It was Nick who got the whole thing up. +You know how mad he has been at you ever since +he had to leave Oak Hall. Well, it was his plan +to make you a prisoner first and then make it look +as if you had robbed the jewelry works. You ask +Doctor Montgomery if that isn’t so. Well, the +first part of the plan fell through, for you got +away. Then he got me to go to Crumville, and +found out where we could get the dynamite. I +got scared then and wanted to back out, but he +said if I did he’d throw all the blame on me, and +so I stuck to him. I wish I hadn’t done it,” concluded +Merwell, bitterly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did you go direct to Jacksonville after the +robbery?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, we went to Washington first and there +we pawned one diamond for sixty dollars. Then +we went to Jacksonville. There we met Luke +Watson, and both of us got scared to death. We +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_245'></a>245</span> +had paid for our passage on the <em>Emma Brower</em>, +and we kept out of sight till the bark sailed. +After the storm we landed here with those four +sailors, and were waiting to sight some passing +ship when you and your crowd turned up.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What were you going to do at Barbados?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Keep quiet until this affair blew over and then +take some English vessel for England. There, +Jasniff said, he could get a certain pawnbroker to +take the jewels and give us a good price for them. +You’ll remember, he was in England some time.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, I met him there. But, Link, didn’t you +realize what a crime you were committing?” went +on Dave, earnestly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I did—after it was too late. Many a time +I wanted to back out, but Nick wouldn’t let me. +We had a quarrel in Washington, and another in +Jacksonville, and on the ship I came close to exposing +him to the captain. I think I should have +done it, only the hurricane came up, and then we +had to hustle to save our lives.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +A silence followed, for each of the boys was +busy with his thoughts. Dave felt sorry for his +former schoolmate, but he knew Merwell thoroughly, +and knew that the fellow was more sorry +because he was caught than because he had committed +a great wrong. He belonged to the class +of persons who are willing to repent when it is +too late. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_246'></a>246</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The day was drawing to a close, and already the +sunlight had disappeared beyond the high rocks. +With a deep sigh Dave arose to his feet and +stretched himself, and Merwell followed suit. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What are you going to do?” asked the former +bully of Oak Hall. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am going to try to climb up those rocks.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They are terribly steep!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I know it, but those vines look strong and we +can use them as ropes, Link. But you need not +try it, if you don’t want to.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, if you try, so will I, Dave.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +After that but little was said, both lads saving +their breath for the task before them. Dave went +up first, testing each vine with care as he advanced. +Twice he slipped back, and once Merwell +came to his aid and held him. It was a little +thing to do, but it pleased our hero, and his face +showed it. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At last they were out of the hollow and each +threw himself on the ground to rest. Then Dave +walked to a near-by hill and gazed in every direction. +Not a human being was in sight anywhere. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, we’ve got to find them somehow,” he +said to Merwell. “Come ahead.” And side by +side they set off through the forest in the fast-gathering +darkness. +</p> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i006' id='i006'></a> +<img src="images/i006.jpg" alt="Dave went up first, testing each vine with care." title=""/><br /> +<span class='caption'>Dave went up first, testing each vine with care.</span> +</div> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_247'></a>247</span><a name='chXXVI' id='chXXVI'></a>CHAPTER XXVI—THE COLUMN OF SMOKE</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, we are lost, that is all there is to it. +And I am so dead tired I can’t walk another step.” +And thus speaking, Link Merwell sank down on +a tree-root to rest. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +He and Dave had been plunging along through +the forest and across several clearings for the +larger part of an hour. They had found what +looked to be a trail, but it had suddenly come to +an end in front of a small cave that looked to be +the lair of some wild animal, and they had gone +on once more. Now the darkness of the tropics +shut out the surrounding landscape. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Link Merwell certainly looked the picture of +misery. His clothing was much tattered and still +wet, and his forehead was swollen from contact +with the rocks. One of his shoes was so cut that +his bare foot was exposed. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It looks as if we were lost,” replied Dave. +“In this darkness it will be difficult to go much +further. But I had hoped, by keeping in a +straight line, that, sooner or later, we’d reach the +shore of the island.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_248'></a>248</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I reckon we didn’t walk in a straight line—most +folks that get lost in a woods don’t.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You are right in that, but I kept as straight as +I could, Link. However, that is neither here nor +there. If we have got to stay here all night we +may as well try to make ourselves comfortable. +But I wish the others knew I was safe.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can’t you fire your gun? It ought to be dry +by now.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll try it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave sat down and commenced to work over +the fowling-piece. In a few minutes he tried it. +Bang! went the gun, the shot echoing far and wide +through the forest and among the rocks. Then +both boys listened for a reply. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Nothing doing,” muttered Merwell, after a +minute of utter silence. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am sure the others would fire a shot in return +if they heard that,” said Dave. “We must +be further from them than I expected. Well, I +don’t see what we can do excepting to try to make +ourselves comfortable. We might climb one of +these tall palms and take a look around.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, that’s it!” exclaimed the other youth, +eagerly. “Why didn’t we think of that before? +But it will be hard work climbing one of those +trees,” went on Merwell, gazing up at the straight +trunk with the first of the limbs many feet above +their heads. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_249'></a>249</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll do it native fashion,” answered Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +He had seen the natives of the South Sea Islands +climb tall trees by means of a vine-rope cast about +the waist and the tree-trunk. Selecting several +strong vines, he twisted them into a rope, and then +passed the same around a tree-trunk and to the +back of his waist. Then he took off his shoes and +stockings and placed his bare feet against the tree. +By “hiking” the rope a few inches at a time, he +was able to “walk up the tree” with comparative +ease. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +As soon as the branches were reached, Dave +discarded the rope and went up as far as the +strength of the tree would permit. He was now +close enough to the top to get a good look around, +and he cast his eyes about eagerly, hoping to catch +sight of some of his friends, or their campfire. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“See anything?” called up Merwell, eagerly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not yet,” answered Dave, and then he turned +around in the tree-top. He now made out the rolling +sea. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I see a light!” he cried. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“A campfire?” queried the youth below. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, it is on the water. I think it must be a +light on a ship.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What kind of a ship?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“A sailing vessel of some sort,” answered Dave, +and he wondered if it could be the <em>Golden Eagle</em>, +coming back after the storm. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_250'></a>250</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe it’s the ship that was coming back for +those Englishmen,” went on Merwell, for Dave +had told him about the men. He heaved a mountainous +sigh as he realized how affairs had turned +against him. For a moment he thought of running +away and trying to find Jasniff, but then the +darkness and loneliness of the forest appalled him. +He felt that he would rather be a prisoner than +be alone in such a spot. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave watched the waving light for some time, +as it rose and fell on the bosom of the ocean, +but could learn nothing concerning the craft that +showed it. Then he continued to look around the +island. No campfire was to be located, and finally +he rejoined Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The light on that ship was all I saw,” he said. +“Perhaps it might pay to walk down to the shore +in that direction. But it is a long distance, and +in the darkness we might fall into another of the +caves.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us stay here,” answered Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It will probably be as well. We can build +a campfire and dry our clothing and then go to +bed.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Wish I had something to eat,” grumbled the +lad who had been caught. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So do I, Link. But we haven’t anything, so +we’ll have to make the best of it. Try to find +some firewood. Luckily I have a waterproof +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_251'></a>251</span> +matchsafe along and it is full of matches,” added +our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Fate was kinder to them than they had expected, +for in hunting for firewood, Merwell found +a hole containing what they took to be native +hares. He killed two of the creatures, and at +once set to work to clean and skin them. Then, +when Dave had started the fire, the game +was broiled while the boys had their clothing +drying. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not much of a meal, but better than nothing,” +said Merwell, and our hero agreed with him. +They found some water in a hollow of the rocks, +left there by the hurricane, and had a drink, after +which both lay down to rest. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Don’t you think we ought to stand guard?” +asked the big youth. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, I don’t know,” replied Dave. “I am +dead tired and so are you, and I don’t think anybody +will come to harm us,—and there are no +large wild beasts on the island. I guess we can +take a chance,” and as soon as their clothing was +dry, both turned in, on beds of vines and moss. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In the morning Merwell was the first to stir, +and when Dave awoke he found the campfire +burning merrily. The big youth was nowhere +to be seen. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can he have run away?” mused our hero, and +quickly felt to learn if the money-belt with the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_252'></a>252</span> +jewels was safe. It was still in its place and he +breathed a sigh of relief. Then he gave a call. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Coming!” came from a distance, and in a +few minutes Merwell put in an appearance, bringing +with him some berries and fruits. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“One of those sailors who came ashore with +me told me about these,” he said. “The berries +we can eat raw and they are very good. The fruit +we can slice up and toast. They make a pretty +decent meal,” and so it proved, and both youths +ate their fill. Then Dave announced his intention +of climbing the tree again and having another look +around. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That ship is at the south end of the island,” +he announced. “It is not the <em>Golden Eagle</em>, but a +much smaller craft. Most likely it is the vessel +the Englishmen engaged. If it is, those three +rascals will have a chance to get away before Giles +Borden can catch them and make them give up +the money they took from him.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, Dave, do you think——” And then +Merwell stopped short. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What were you going to say, Link?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I was thinking if it would be possible for +Nick to go away with those Englishmen.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why, yes, if he chanced to meet them, and +they were willing to have him. But would he go +and leave you behind?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“He might, especially if he found out I was +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_253'></a>253</span> +captured, or that I had let you have what jewels +I was carrying.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If he went with those Englishmen he would +be foolish to let them know about the jewels, for +they would rob him, just as they robbed Giles +Borden,” continued our hero, and then he realized +that here was a new peril to face. If the Englishmen +got their hands on the jewels it might be +next to impossible to recover the gems, especially +if the rascals managed to get away from Cave +Island. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Presently our hero saw a column of smoke arising +in another portion of the island. He watched +it for several minutes and then gave a cry of +satisfaction. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I know where they are!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You mean your crowd?” queried Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. Phil is signaling to me, by means of +a column of smoke such as some Indians out west +use. We learned the trick when we were at Star +Ranch. Come on, we’ll soon be with them. It +isn’t very far.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave had come down from his high perch in a +hurry, and in a very short time was ready to +leave the spot. Merwell gave a deep sigh, for +he did not relish confronting his former schoolmates. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s tough luck, but I suppose I’ve got to stand +it,” he murmured, as he followed Dave, after +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_254'></a>254</span> +the fire had been extinguished. “When a fellow +makes a fool of himself he’s got to take the consequences.” +And this remark was so true that +Dave did not dispute it. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +On they went through the forest and then over +a rocky hill. Three times they came close to falling +into the treacherous holes in which the island +abounded, and the last time poor Merwell got +a fall that almost sprained his ankle. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll rest a bit and you can bathe the ankle,” +said Dave, kindly, and got some water from a +nearby pool. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t wonder nobody is living on this +island,” grumbled the injured one. “I suppose +the natives around here are too afraid of falling +into some of those holes.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They are afraid of the caves and also afraid +of volcanoes,” answered Dave. “The mate of +the <em>Golden Eagle</em> told me that. Sometimes the +volcanoes break out here without warning and +cover the rocks with hot ashes.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Is that so? Well, I hope no volcano breaks +out while I am here.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At last the boys reached a small rise of ground +and at a distance saw the column of smoke, plainly. +Dave put on extra speed and soon saw Phil, Giles +Borden, and several sailors—the survivors from +the ill-fated <em>Emma Brower</em>. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_255'></a>255</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Phil!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave! At last!” cried the shipowner’s son, +joyfully. “Are you hurt?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not a bit of it. How are you?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right, although I had several tumbles +while hunting for you. You disappeared in the +strangest fashion.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I fell into a cave,—went down with Link +Merwell.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh!” Phil gave a start. “Who is that in +the bushes? Merwell, as sure as I’m alive!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, Phil. And what do you think? I’ve +got part of the jewels—Link had them in his +money-belt.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Good enough! I was so afraid they had been +lost out of that jewel-case. Did you make Merwell +a prisoner?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, in a way. He might have run away a +dozen times, but I guess he didn’t want to be alone. +Besides, he has quarreled with Jasniff. I’ll tell +you all about it later,” went on Dave, in a lower +tone. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Merwell had halted and now he came shuffling +into the temporary camp. He nodded sheepishly +to the shipowner’s son and to the sailors. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Got ye, did they?” said one of the tars, with +a sneer. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes,” answered the culprit, meekly. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_256'></a>256</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Humph! You’re a fine Dick to run away and +steal jewels!” muttered the sailor, and turned +his back on the youth. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where are Roger and Captain Sanders and the +others?” questioned Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Gone after you, and after Jasniff and those +three rascally Englishmen,” answered Phil. “I +said I’d stay here and try that trick with a column +of smoke. I thought you might remember and +look for it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It was a good thing to do, Phil,” answered our +hero, “for it brought us straight to this spot.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_257'></a>257</span><a name='chXXVII' id='chXXVII'></a>CHAPTER XXVII—BEHIND THE CURTAIN OF VINES</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +An hour went by and during that time Dave +drew Phil to one side and related the particulars +concerning the doings of Merwell and Jasniff, according +to the story told by the former of the two +evil-disposed youths. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think Link feels pretty sore,” he continued. +“So there won’t be any use in rubbing it in.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What do you intend to do with him, Dave?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know yet. We’ll talk it over later on. +The thing to do now is to locate Jasniff and get +the rest of the jewels. Don’t forget that he has +the finest of the diamonds. That is one thing that +made Link sore—Jasniff taking the lion’s share.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, that was the way Jasniff always did, +even at school. Now you’ve got back I’m willing +to start the search for him any time you say,” continued +the shipowner’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll wait a while and see if Roger and Captain +Sanders return,” answered our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +He was glad to rest, and threw himself on a +bed of moss the sailors had collected. Merwell +sat against a tree, tired out, but too much worried +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_258'></a>258</span> +to sleep. Evidently he was trying to decide on +what to do next and wondering how he was to get +out of the awful situation in which he found himself. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Presently a shout was heard, and Roger burst +into view, followed an instant later by Billy Dill. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hello, Dave!” cried the senator’s son. “Got +back, have you?” And then he stared at Merwell. +“Oh, are you here, too?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes,” returned the big youth, and that was all +he could say. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave, did you get the jewels Merwell had?” +went on Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. But, Roger, how did you know——” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There is no time to talk it over now, Dave,” +interrupted the senator’s son, quickly. “We have +got to act, and that at once! That is, if you +want to get back the rest of the jewels.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why, what do you mean?” demanded Dave +and Phil in a breath, and even Merwell was all +attention. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you remember those Englishmen, the fellows +who robbed Mr. Borden? Well, we traced +them to their camp, and what do you think? They +met Jasniff in some way, and he is friendly with +them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did he tell them about the jewels?” demanded +our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, he was cute enough to keep the story of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_259'></a>259</span> +the jewels to himself,—that is, we didn’t hear him +tell them anything about the gems. But he said +he wanted to get away from the island as quickly +as possible, and without being seen by any of us, +and he offered the Englishmen a thousand dollars +in diamonds if they’d help him. They agreed to +it, and all hands are waiting for some ship to come +here and take them off.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The ship I saw last night!” cried Dave, and +told of the light on the ocean. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It must be that ship!” exclaimed Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They’ll get away sure, unless you can stop +’em,” put in Merwell, and he seemed to be almost +as interested as anybody. It galled him exceedingly +to think that his companion in crime +might escape. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Roger, how did you learn this?” asked +Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“In a queer kind of a way. Billy Dill got on +the trail of the three Englishmen first and we followed +them to one of the caves. Then one of +the Englishmen went away and after a while he +came back with Jasniff, and all hands went to another +cave, close to the shore. We got into one +part of the cave and overheard what the crowd +said, through a crack in the rocks. We might have +confronted Jasniff and demanded the jewels, but +we saw that the Englishmen were all armed and +they looked to be in an ugly mood, and Captain +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_260'></a>260</span> +Sanders wanted no bloodshed if it could be avoided. +So then Billy Dill and I said we would come back +here and get Phil and the sailors.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I should think you’d do your best to capture +Jasniff,” said Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you want him captured?” asked Roger, +sharply. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why not? He didn’t treat me fairly—and +he planned the robbery in the first place.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, if you want him taken you had better +help us,” put in Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Say, Dave, if I help you catch Jasniff and get +the rest of the jewels back, will you—er—will you +let me go?” faltered Link Merwell, anxiously. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know—I’ll see about it, Link,” answered +Dave, and that was as far as he would +commit himself, for he remembered that this case +was for Mr. Wadsworth and the authorities to +settle. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll help you all I can—just to get square with +Nick!” muttered the big youth. “I’ll show him +that he isn’t the only frog in the puddle.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The sooner we go the better,” went on the +senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am ready now,” returned Dave. “I’ll not +rest easy until Jasniff is caught and the rest of +those jewels are recovered.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +A few words more were exchanged, and then it +was decided that the whole party should follow +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_261'></a>261</span> +Roger and Billy Dill to the spot from whence they +had come. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Borden is very anxious to have the three Englishmen +held,” said the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I suppose he wants to get back his money,” +returned Dave. “I don’t blame him.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The path was through the forest and then along +a rocky ridge. Here walking was very uncertain, +and Roger warned the others to be careful. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“An’ if ye ain’t careful ye’ll go into a hole to +Kingdom Come!” put in Billy Dill. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +When the ridge was left behind they came to +another patch of timber, and then walked through +a small cave with a large opening at either end. +In the center of this cave was a hole, at the bottom +of which flowed an underground river. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If ever an island was rightly named, this is the +one,” observed Phil. “It is caves from one end +to the other.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Listen! I thought I heard voices!” exclaimed +Dave, suddenly, and held up his hand for +silence. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All listened closely and heard a faint murmur, +coming from a distance. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Sounds to me as if it was underground,” whispered +Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, but from what direction?” asked Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think it comes from over yonder,” answered +Dave. “Let us go there and make sure.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_262'></a>262</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They walked on, soon coming to a spot where +a place between the rocks was covered with a matting +of long vines, much intertwined. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Keep quiet!” suddenly exclaimed our hero. +“I know where they are—behind those vines. +There must be a cave there, and the vines make +a curtain for the entrance.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Who is it?” asked Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know yet. Wait, all of you remain +here, behind the rocks, while I investigate.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +As silently as possible, Dave crawled forward, +keeping close to the rocks on one side of the cave’s +entrance. Soon he was up to the curtain of vines, +and cautiously he thrust his hand forward, making +a small opening. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At first our hero could see little, but as his eyes +became accustomed to the gloom, he made out +two forms lying on couches of vines, smoking. +The forms were those of the two Englishmen, +Pardell and Rumney. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, Geswick ought to be coming back,” +Dave heard Rumney say. “He said he wouldn’t +waste any time.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Maybe he had some trouble with that young +fellow,” returned Pardell. “Say, do you know +he’s a queer stick? Where did he get those diamonds +he offered for his passage?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know, but I rather think he stole +them.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_263'></a>263</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then perhaps he has more of the jewels.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Just what I was thinking—and Geswick +thought the same.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If he has many of them——” The man +paused suggestively. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We might relieve him, eh?” returned the +other. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why not? We cleaned out Borden. Two +jobs of that sort are no worse than one.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +There was a period of silence, and Dave moved +back as quietly as possible to where he had left +his companions. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Rumney and Pardell are there, in a long cave,” +he whispered. “They are waiting for Geswick +and, I think, Jasniff.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“But where are Captain Sanders and Smiley?” +asked the shipowner’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know. Perhaps they are watching +Jasniff and Geswick—or maybe they have captured +those rascals.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, let me get at Pardell and Rumney!” +cried Giles Borden. “I’ll teach them to rob me!” +And he started forward, flourishing a heavy stick +he had picked up. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Wait! wait!” returned Dave, and caught him +by the arm. “Don’t go yet. Let us lie low until +Geswick comes, and maybe Jasniff. We may be +able to capture all of them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can we handle so many?” asked Roger. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_264'></a>264</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think so. Anyway we can try. Remember, +Captain Sanders and Smiley may be following +Geswick and Jasniff, and if they are, they’ll come +to our aid.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll wait, but it’s a hard thing to do, don’t you +know,” grumbled the Englishman who had been +robbed. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We had better set a guard, so that we are not +surprised,” advised Phil. “Supposing we scatter +around the rocks and in the vines?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +This was agreed upon, and it was also agreed +that Dave should give a whistle when he wanted +an attack made. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +After this came a long period of waiting. All +remained silent, until, of a sudden, everybody was +startled by a distant cannon shot. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What in the world can that mean?” cried +Phil, who lay close to our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s a shot from a ship’s cannon, and it came +from the direction of the shore!” returned Dave. +“It may be some sort of a signal.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you suppose it’s a summons to Pardell and +Rumney?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It may be. Wait, I’ll look into the cave again +and see what they are doing.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Losing no time, our hero crawled forward once +more to the position he had before occupied. Then +he pushed the vines aside and looked into the long +cave. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_265'></a>265</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +He could not suppress a cry of consternation. +The two Englishmen had vanished! +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They are gone!” he called to his companions. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Gone!” repeated Phil and Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Don’t tell me that!” fairly shrieked Giles +Borden. “I must catch them and get back my +money!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where did they go to?” asked Billy Dill, as +he pushed through the curtain of vines. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They must have left the cave by some other +opening,” answered Dave. “Come on, we’ll soon +find out!” And into the cave he rushed, his chums +and the others in the crowd following. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I see another opening!” cried Merwell, a +minute later. “Look!” And he pointed down a +passageway to the right. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s the way they must have gone!” exclaimed +Giles Borden. “After them, all of you! +If I get back my money, I’ll reward you well!” +And on he sped, with Merwell close at his heels +and the others following. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know if we are on the right track or +not,” said Dave, to Phil and Roger. “This cave +may have other openings.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Hardly had he spoken when there came a yell +from Giles Borden, followed by a cry from Link +Merwell. Both had fallen into a small hole that +was filled with water. Each was much shaken up, +but unhurt. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_266'></a>266</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s a broken neck somebody will get if we are +not careful,” said one of the sailors. “I’d rather +be on the deck of a ship any day than on an island +like this.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Soon they were out in the open once more. +They were on a rise of ground, and not a great distance +away they could see the shore and the rolling +ocean. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“A ship!” cried Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“But not the <em>Golden Eagle</em>!” returned Dave. +“It must be the vessel that was to stop for the +Englishmen.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It is! It is!” bawled Giles Borden. “And +look, there they are on the shore, ready to embark, +all of them!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, and Jasniff is with them!” added Dave, +Phil, and Roger in a breath. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_267'></a>267</span><a name='chXXVIII' id='chXXVIII'></a>CHAPTER XXVIII—IN WHICH THE ENEMY SAILS AWAY</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was a startling discovery, and for the moment +Dave and the others did not know what to +do. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you see anything of Captain Sanders, or +Smiley?” questioned our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not a thing,” returned the senator’s son. +“It’s strange, too.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, cannot we stop them in some manner?” +pleaded Giles Borden. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Come on—we’ll do what we can!” cried +Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s the talk!” put in old Billy Dill. “Oh, +for a gatling gun that we might train on ’em!” +he added. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All were calculating the distance to the shore. +Between them and the water was a slight hollow, +overgrown with brushwood and vines. How long +would it take to find a path through that hollow? +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No use in staying here,” was Dave’s comment. +“We’ll get there somehow. But keep out of +sight, if you can. We don’t want them to discover +us until the last minute.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_268'></a>268</span> +All moved forward toward the hollow. By +walking well over to the left they managed to +keep a distant row of palms between themselves +and those who were at the water’s edge. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +But progress was slow, as all soon discovered. +The hollow was a treacherous one, full of soft +spots and pitfalls. Less than a hundred feet had +been covered when two of the sailors went down +up to their waists, and a second later Roger followed. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hold on, Roger! I’ll help you!” cried Dave, +and he and Phil ran to their chum’s assistance. +They did not dare to go near the soft spot and so +all they could do was to throw the senator’s son +a stout vine for use as a rope, and then haul him +out by sheer strength. In the meantime the others +went to the rescue of the two sailors, and they +were hauled out in similar fashion. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“This island certainly is the limit!” gasped +Roger, when he was on firm ground once more. +“I wouldn’t live here if they made me a present +of the whole thing!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s right,” returned Phil. “Because, if +you lived here, you might some day find yourself +buried before your time!” And this quaint +way of expressing it made all of the boys grin in +spite of their excitement. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Beyond the hollow another difficulty confronted +them. Here were some sharp rocks, with +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_269'></a>269</span> +deep cuts between. They had to climb over the +rocks with extreme care and do not a little jumping, +all of which consumed much valuable +time. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They’ll be off before we can reach them!” +groaned Dave. “Oh, do hurry, fellows!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’m coming as fast as I can!” answered Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So am I,” added Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You ought to shoot at them, if they won’t +stop,” put in Merwell. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll do what I can,” answered our hero. He +was wondering how far the present situation would +justify the use of firearms. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At last the rocks were left behind, and the crowd +found themselves in the fringe of palm trees lining +the sandy shore. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you see them?” queried Phil, who was +getting winded from his exertions. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, I don’t,” returned Dave. He had looked +up and down the sandy strip in vain for a sight of +the Englishmen and Jasniff. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Beyond the beach was the reef with the ever-present +breakers and far beyond this the ship they, +had before sighted. The schooner lay-to with all +sails lowered. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There they are!” suddenly shouted Billy +Dill. “Too late, boys, too late!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where? where?” came in a shout from the +lads and from Giles Borden. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_270'></a>270</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Look out there, by the reef. Don’t you see +the small boat in the breakers?” went on the old +sailor, pointing with his bronzed hand. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All gazed in the direction he indicated, and +Dave and Giles Borden could not repress a groan +of dismay. For, riding the swells of the ocean, +could be seen a small boat, manned by two sailors. +In the boat sat four passengers. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s Jasniff, I am sure of it!” cried Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And those three men are the fellows who +robbed me!” muttered Giles Borden. “Oh, what +luck! Ten minutes too late!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Can’t we follow them in some way?” asked +Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t see how,” answered Dave. “Our rowboat +is on the other side of the island. Besides, +even if we had a boat, I don’t believe we could +catch them before the schooner got underway. +Oh, isn’t it a shame!” And Dave fairly ground +his teeth in helpless dismay. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If we had a cannon!” murmured old Billy +Dill. “A shot across the bow o’ that craft would +make the cap’n take warnin’, I’m thinkin’!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do you suppose any other boat is handy?” +asked the Englishman. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We might look,” returned the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All were about to run out on the beach when +Dave suddenly called a halt. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Don’t do it,” he said. “If we can’t follow +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_271'></a>271</span> +them, it will be best for the present not to show +ourselves.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How’s that?” demanded Giles Borden. +“It’s a bloody shame to let them go in this fashion.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If they see us, they’ll know we are after them +and they’ll sail away as fast as possible,” went on +our hero. “If they don’t see us, they may take +their time in getting away, and that will give us +so much better chance to catch them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave is right!” cried the senator’s son. And +the others agreed with him, and all kept concealed +behind the row of palms and the brushwood +and rocks. From that point they watched +the small boat gradually approach the schooner +until it was alongside. Then a rope ladder was +lowered and the passengers mounted to the deck, +after which the rowboat was drawn up on the +davits. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What ship is that?” asked Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“She is named the <em>Aurora</em>,” answered Giles +Borden. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The <em>Aurora</em>!” exclaimed Billy Dill. “Do +ye mean the <em>Aurora</em>, Cap’n Jack Hunker?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, that’s the captain’s name.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why, I know him!” went on the old tar. +“Sailed with him once, in the <em>Peter Cass</em>,—afore +he took command o’ the <em>Aurora</em>. Say, Dave, he +used to be a putty good man. I can’t see how he +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_272'></a>272</span> +would stand in with sech fellers as Jasniff an’ them +thievin’ Britishers.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps he doesn’t know what scoundrels they +are,” returned our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, they haven’t told him the truth, depend +upon that,” said Giles Borden. “They have fixed +up some story to pull the wool over his eyes. +Most likely they’ll tell him that I am the rascal +of the party and that is why I am to be left behind.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If the captain of the <em>Aurora</em> is all right, it +may pay to signal to him,” mused Dave. “I +wish I had known of this before.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“See! see! they are hoisting the sails!” cried +Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If you are going to signal to the schooner, +you had better do it pretty quick,” advised +Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think I will. It can’t hurt much—they +are going to sail away, anyhow. Come on.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +All ran out on the sandy beach, and Dave discharged +his shotgun twice as a signal. The others +waved tree-branches and brushwood, and Phil even +lit some of the latter, to make a smudge. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +But if the signals were seen, no attention was +paid to them. Those on the schooner continued +to hoist the sails, and presently the <em>Aurora</em> turned +away, leaving Cave Island behind. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +As the schooner moved off Dave’s heart sank +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_273'></a>273</span> +within him. On board of the craft was Jasniff, +and the rascal had the larger portion of the Carwith +jewels in his possession. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s a shame!” burst out Phil. “Oh, why +didn’t we get hold of Jasniff when you collared +Link!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where is your own ship?” asked Merwell. +“Why don’t you find her and follow that crowd?” +He felt as sour as ever over the thought that he +had been captured while his companion in crime +had escaped. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I wish the <em>Golden Eagle</em> would come in,” +answered Dave. “I can’t understand what is +keeping her, unless she suffered from that storm +and had to lay to for repairs.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And where do you suppose Captain Sanders +and Smiley are?” put in Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know. They may have fallen into +one of the caves, or they may have been made +prisoners by those who have sailed away.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Prisoners? I never thought of that!” exclaimed +Giles Borden. “Yes, it would be just +like Geswick and those other scoundrels to treat +them in that fashion.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, it won’t do us any good to remain +here,” went on our hero. “We may as well scatter +and see if we can’t locate the captain and the +others.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +This was considered good advice and tired +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_274'></a>274</span> +as the crowd was, all went on the hunt, some +up the shore and some down, and the others +inland. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave and Roger walked down the shore, why +neither could exactly tell. They passed the palms +and brushwood, and leaving the sand, commenced +to climb over some rocks. Then Dave began to +shout. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At first no reply came to his calls, but presently +he heard a groan, coming from behind the rocks. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let us see what it means!” he exclaimed to +the senator’s son, and they hurried in the direction +of the sound with all speed. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Back of the rocks was a grove of plantains, +and in the center was the remains of a thatched +hut, evidently built by natives years before. On +the ground in front of this hut lay Captain Sanders +and the sailor, Smiley. Each had his head +bound up and each was nursing a bruised ankle. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Captain Sanders!” cried Dave, in astonishment. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave Porter!” returned the commander of +the <em>Golden Eagle</em>, joyfully. “My, but I am glad +you have come!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You are hurt?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. Those scoundrels attacked us from behind +and knocked us senseless.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You mean those three Englishmen?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_275'></a>275</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, and that fellow Jasniff was with +them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“But your ankles are hurt, too?” went on +Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We hurt them when we fell into one of the +beastly caves, or holes. We were following Jasniff +and the Englishmen, and also looking for +you and the others. Then those rascals got behind +us in some way, and the first thing I knew +I got a whack behind the ear that knocked me unconscious.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And I got the same,” said Smiley. “Oh, I +wish I had my hands on those villains!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They have sailed away,” said Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Away!” cried the captain. “How?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In a few brief words our hero and his chum +told of the advance to the beach and of what they +and the others had witnessed. Captain Sanders +shook his head, soberly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That’s too bad,” he said. “They’ve got a +good start and it will be hard to follow them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How can we follow them, when the <em>Golden +Eagle</em> isn’t here?” said Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“But she is here—on the other side of the +island.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, are you sure?” cried our hero. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. I saw her coming in,—when we were on +one of the hills. She was minus her foretopmast, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_276'></a>276</span> +which shows she must have suffered some in that +hurricane.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If that’s the case, let us get to her with all +possible speed, go aboard, and follow the <em>Aurora</em>,” +returned Dave. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_277'></a>277</span><a name='chXXIX' id='chXXIX'></a>CHAPTER XXIX—A CHASE ON THE OCEAN</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It took the best part of the afternoon and +evening to get the whole party together again, +and send word to the mate of the <em>Golden Eagle</em> +to bring the vessel around to that side of Cave +Island. And while this was being done the hurts +Captain Sanders and Smiley had received were +cared for as well as the means at hand permitted. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The captain and the wounded sailor had a +long story to tell, of how they had followed the +three rascally Englishmen and Nick Jasniff, and +how the latter had made a compact with the others, +so that they would take him with them when they +left the island. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“The Englishmen were a bit afraid of the +captain of the <em>Aurora</em>,” said Captain Sanders, +“and we overheard them discuss the situation. +They knew the captain would want to know what +had become of the fourth man he had left here. +At last they resolved to try a trick, but they weren’t +sure it would work. But evidently it did, for the +schooner has sailed.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What was that trick?” asked Dave. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_278'></a>278</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It seems that when Mr. Borden was on the +<em>Aurora</em> he had a headache from the sun and wore +smoked glasses. Is that right, sir?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It is,” answered Giles Borden. “The glare +on the waves was beastly, and I wore the smoked +glasses all day long.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, the rascals planned to have Jasniff impersonate +Mr. Borden. One of them, Geswick, +exchanged coats and caps with him, and lent him +a pair of smoked glasses, and he was to tie up +his cheeks and pretend to be suffering from toothache, +and keep to his stateroom as much as possible +during the trip.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, what a thing to do—impersonate me!” +roared Giles Borden, in a rage. “Just wait till +I confront him!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, you’ll have to wait,” put in Phil, dryly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did you find out where they were going to +sail to?” asked Dave, eagerly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“To San Juan, on the island of Porto Rico. +But they may make some stops on the way.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“San Juan,” mused Roger. “That’s a good +many miles from here. Perhaps the <em>Golden +Eagle</em> can catch the <em>Aurora</em> before she gets there.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If they went to San Juan direct I’d advise +waiting till they got in that harbor before I’d do +anything,” said Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Why?” asked the boys. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Because it is one thing to stop them on the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_279'></a>279</span> +high seas and another to stop them in United +States waters. Remember, Porto Rico is now a +part of Uncle Sam’s domain.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, I’d rather go at them there than on the +high seas,” answered Dave. “But they mustn’t +get away again, no matter where we have to tackle +them,” he added, determinedly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It was impossible to transfer those ashore to the +<em>Golden Eagle</em> during the darkness, because of the +danger in the breakers, so they had to wait until +daylight before departing. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Among those to go were, of course, the sailors +who had come ashore from the wreck of the +<em>Emma Brower</em>. Captain Sanders told them they +could remain on the island if they wished, but they +set up an immediate protest. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s not a fit place for any man,” said one +of the tars. “There is very little game and not +much fruit, and one is continually in danger of +falling into a hole or a cave. I’ll go to Porto +Rico gladly, and so will my mates, and we’ll work +our passage, if you’re willing.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right,” said Captain Sanders. “But you’ll +not have much to do, as we have about all the +hands we need.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +When aboard the ship, the captain and the +boys listened to the story the mate had to tell. +Then they learned that the storm had blown the +<em>Golden Eagle</em> many miles from Cave Island, and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_280'></a>280</span> +in trying to avoid some of the keys of another +island, the vessel had lost the top of one of the +masts and the rudder had been damaged. This +had necessitated much delay, which accounted for +the non-appearance of the vessel when expected. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +While making repairs, the vessel had been +passed by a tramp steamer bound for Trinidad. +The captain of the steamer had asked if he could +be of assistance, and after being told no, had given +the information that he had picked up three rowboat +loads of passengers and crew from the ill-fated +<em>Emma Brower</em>. It may be mentioned here +that another boat load from the same vessel managed +to reach another island in that vicinity, and +in the end it was learned that the going down of +the bark was unattended with the loss of a single +life. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +With so many on board, the accommodations on +the <em>Golden Eagle</em> were somewhat crowded. The +sailors went with Billy Dill into the forecastle, +while Giles Borden was asked to share Captain +Sanders’ stateroom. What to do with Link Merwell +became a question. In one sense he was a +prisoner, yet Dave hated to treat him as such. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There is the extra pantry,” said Captain Sanders. +“We can clean that out and put in a cot, +and he can use that,” and so it was arranged, +much to the relief of all of the boys. The pantry +had a grating, opening on the main passageway, so it +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_281'></a>281</span> +made a fairly comfortable stateroom, +although rather hot. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Well, I suppose I’ve got to take my medicine, +when we get back,” grumbled Link Merwell, when +given his quarters. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What else could you expect?” returned Dave. +“If this was my affair alone, Link, I might let +you go, now you have given up the jewels. But +what is to be done is for Mr. Wadsworth and the +authorities to say.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Merwell had confessed that he and Jasniff had +taken the skates and other things at Squirrel Island, +and told where they had been left, in a barn along +the river, and how they might be recovered. He +had also admitted impersonating Dave on several +occasions and ordering goods in our hero’s name, +and doing other mean things of which he had +been suspected, and said he was heartily sorry for +his actions. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Soon the <em>Golden Eagle</em> was ready for the departure +from Cave Island. As the sails were +hoisted the boys gathered on deck to take a last +look at the remarkable spot. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It is really and truly Cave Island,” declared +Dave. “I don’t believe any other place in the +world is so full of caves and holes!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am glad the volcanoes didn’t get busy while +we were there,” remarked the shipowner’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“So am I,” added Roger. “The caves and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_282'></a>282</span> +holes were bad enough, without adding other +perils.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave, do you think we’ll catch that +schooner?” went on Phil, after a pause, during +which the boys watched the ship drawing away +from the island. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I sincerely hope so,” was the serious reply. +“If we don’t, and Jasniff gets away, this mission +down here will have proved almost a failure.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then you think Jasniff has the most of the +jewels?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. If you’ll remember, the jewels that were +taken were valued at about seventy-five thousand +dollars. Well, I have looked at the jewels I got +from Link, and so has Mr. Borden, who knows +something about gems, and we have come to the +conclusion that those Link turned over to me are +not worth over fifteen thousand dollars. That +means that Jasniff has about sixty thousand +dollars’ worth.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Isn’t that like Jasniff!” cried the senator’s +son. “Always wanted the big end of everything! +It’s a wonder he and Link didn’t quarrel before.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They did quarrel, and Link wanted to leave +him several times, but didn’t dare, for Jasniff +threatened to expose him. In one way, I am +sorry for Link,—but, of course, he had no right to +commit such a deed.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +After Cave Island was left in the distance, Captain +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_283'></a>283</span> +Sanders had a long conference with Giles Borden +concerning the Englishmen who had robbed +him. Later a general talk took place between the +pair and the boys. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am afraid we’ll have to trust to luck to catch +the <em>Aurora</em> or locate her,” said the captain, finally. +“She may go to San Juan and she may go elsewhere.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If we pass any other vessels, can’t we ask if +they saw the schooner?” ventured Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Certainly.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The day went by and also the next. Link +Merwell kept to himself, only speaking when addressed. +He felt his position keenly, and would +no doubt have given a great deal if he could have +cleared himself. He was learning that the way +of the transgressor is hard. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +On the third day, early in the morning, they +passed a big barkentine bound for South American +ports. Greetings were exchanged, and Captain +Sanders asked concerning the <em>Aurora</em>. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, we met her,” was the reply. “Yesterday, +about two bells in the afternoon watch.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Did she say where she was bound?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Bound for San Juan, Porto Rico.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Direct?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes. She was going to stop elsewhere, but +the captain allowed he’d make straight for San +Juan,” added the captain of the barkentine, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_284'></a>284</span> +through the megaphone he was using. Then, after +a few words more, the two vessels separated. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It’s San Juan sure!” cried Dave. “From +what Mr. Borden and Billy Dill say of Captain +Hunker he would not tell a falsehood. I guess +the best thing we can do is to sail for that +port.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think so myself,” returned Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The chase was now a definite one, and Dave +felt much relieved. He wondered if they would be +able to overtake the <em>Aurora</em> before Porto Rico +was reached. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We can do that with ease,” answered Captain +Sanders when questioned. “But even so, she may +not stick to just the course we take, and we may +pass her in the night. So don’t worry if we don’t +see or hear anything before San Juan is reached.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll try not to worry,” answered our hero. +Yet he could not help it, for so much depended on +the successful outcome of his mission. He knew +that those at home must be in deep distress, and +he could picture the anxiety of Mr. Wadsworth +and his wife and Jessie, and also the anxiety of +his own folks. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, we’ve got to catch Jasniff and get back +those jewels!” he told himself. “We’ve simply +got to do it! I won’t give up, if I have to follow +him around the world!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +It had been warm, but now the weather changed +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_285'></a>285</span> +and a strong breeze made living far more comfortable. +The breeze was favorable to sailing, and +the <em>Golden Eagle</em> plowed the deep at a good rate +of speed. Many of the islands of the Lesser Antilles +were passed, and some truly dangerous reefs, +and then the course was straight for the harbor of +San Juan, on the northeastern coast of Porto +Rico. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +They had seen nothing so far of the <em>Aurora</em>, +but on the afternoon of the last day out they were +passed by a freight steamer from the south and +received word that the schooner was not far away +and making for San Juan. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I guess we had better go right in and get the +authorities to take hold,” said Captain Sanders. +“This is no matter for us to handle, now we are +in United States waters once more.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave agreed; and as soon as possible they entered +the harbor and went ashore. It was an easy +matter to notify the harbor police, and inside of +two hours half a dozen officers of the law were +detailed to make the necessary arrests. Dave and +Giles Borden and Captain Sanders went with +them, leaving Phil, Roger, and the others aboard +the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The patrol boat of the harbor police had to +remain on the watch all night and half the next +morning before the <em>Aurora</em> was sighted. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There she is!” cried Dave, at last, and Giles +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_286'></a>286</span> +Borden echoed the words. Then the patrol boat +lost no time in steaming alongside of the schooner. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Hello, what’s wanted?” demanded Captain +Hunker, as he saw the officers of the law. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We’ll come aboard, captain,” said the officer +in charge. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What’s the matter?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We are after four of your passengers.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At that moment somebody appeared near the +rail, to learn what the shouting meant. It was +Nick Jasniff. He gazed at the officers of the law +and then at Dave. As he recognized our hero his +face fell and he looked totally dumfounded. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_287'></a>287</span><a name='chXXX' id='chXXX'></a>CHAPTER XXX—HOMEWARD BOUND—CONCLUSION</h2> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Jasniff, I want to see you!” shouted Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What do you want of me, Dave Porter?” +returned the big youth, as boldly as he could. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You know well enough.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Humph! You think you’ve got me, don’t +you?” sneered Nick Jasniff, and then he left the +rail of the vessel and disappeared down a companionway. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +By this time the officers of the law were boarding +the <em>Aurora</em>, accompanied by Giles Borden and +Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where are those bloody rascals who robbed +me?” exclaimed the Englishman, excitedly. +“Just let me get my hands on them!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t understand this!” returned the captain +of the schooner, in surprise. “You’ll have to +explain.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You have three Englishmen aboard here—fellows +you took to Cave Island when I was with +them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Say, you’re that fourth man!” gasped Captain +Hunker. “But that other chap,—the fellow with +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_288'></a>288</span> +smoked glasses, who had his face tied up——” +He did not know how to go on. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“He impersonated me, the villain! But I am +after the others, for they robbed me of over a +thousand pounds, don’t you know!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Where are your passengers?” demanded the +officer in charge of those from the patrol boat, +sternly. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If they are not on deck they must be below,—they +had no chance to leave the ship,” answered +Captain Hunker. “This gets me!” he went on, +weakly. “I thought they acted rather strange, +but I supposed they were nothing but a crowd of +weak-minded critters hunting for pirates’ gold.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +At that moment Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney +came on deck, having heard the tramping of feet +overhead and wondering what it meant. Almost +before he could speak, Giles Borden had Geswick +by the throat and was shaking him violently. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Will rob me, and leave me a prisoner in that +cave!” he roared. “I’ll teach you a lesson! Give +me my money, you bloody scoundrel!” And then +he banged Andrew Geswick’s head against a +mast. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Ho, let up!” yelled the criminal. “Let up, +I say!” And he tried to squirm away. But it +was useless, and in a minute more one of the officers +of the law handcuffed him, and Pardell and +Rumney were also secured. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_289'></a>289</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Now I want my money!” stormed Giles Borden. +“Every shilling of it!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I haven’t any of it,” replied Rumney. “Geswick +and Pardell have it all.” Rumney had had a +quarrel with his fellows, just as Merwell had quarreled +with Jasniff. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Just you wait, Rumney; we’ll fix you for going +back on us,” growled Andrew Geswick. But this +threat did him little good. In the end he and +Pardell had to hand over every penny taken from +Giles Borden, and then they were marched off to +jail, to await a hearing before the authorities. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In the meantime Dave had run across the deck +and followed Jasniff down the companionway. +He was afraid that the evil-minded youth might +hide the stolen jewels or throw them overboard. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +When he got below he looked around, but could +see nothing of the other boy. He ran along a +passageway, peering into one stateroom after another, +and also into the cabin and the pantry. +Then he heard something like a cover drop near +by and hurried in that direction. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Jasniff was in a corner stateroom on his hands +and knees. Beside him was a flat steamer trunk, +which was closed. It was the lid of this trunk +that Dave had heard drop. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Jasniff, come out of that!” ordered Dave, +sternly. “Come right out and hand over those +jewels.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_290'></a>290</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Say, Dave Porter, you think you are smart, +don’t you?” sneered the big youth, as he got up +on his feet. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Never mind what I think. I want those +jewels, every one of them, and I am going to +have them.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I haven’t any jewels.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I know better.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right then, you can search me if you want +to—and search my baggage, too,” went on Jasniff, +and held out his arms as if willing to have the investigation +begin on the spot. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If you haven’t the jewels on your person, you +have hidden them,” went on Dave. “Bring them +out, right away.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not much, Porter, I am not that kind of a +fool.” Jasniff lowered his voice to a whisper. +“To outsiders I won’t acknowledge I have the +jewels, but if you’ll fix it so I go clear, I’ll see to it +that old Wadsworth gets the gems back.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll fix nothing, Jasniff, and you’ll hand over +every jewel, and do it right now!” cried Dave, and +now he was so angry that he leaped on the criminal +and threw him backward over the trunk. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +But if Dave was strong, so was Jasniff, and, as +of old, the rascal thought nothing of playing a +foul trick. Around and around the stateroom +went both boys, with first Dave on top and then +his opponent. Then suddenly Jasniff pulled himself +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_291'></a>291</span> +away and caught up a water pitcher that was +on a stand. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll fix you!” he roared, in the same tone of +voice he had employed when he had once attacked +Dave in the Oak Hall gymnasium, and he brought +the heavy pitcher down straight for Dave’s head. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Had the blow landed as intended, our hero +would have been knocked senseless and perhaps +seriously hurt. But quick as the bully was, Dave +was quicker, and leaped to one side. Then he +let out with his fist, landing on Jasniff’s jaw,—a +blow that sent the fellow crashing over into a +corner. As Jasniff came up, Dave hit him again, +and this time he went down all but knocked out. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave!” called a voice from the doorway at +that moment, and Captain Sanders appeared. +“Having a tussle, eh? Want any help?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“May be,” panted our hero. “He attacked +me with the water-pitcher!” And he pointed to +the fragments of chinaware that lay on the floor. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Do-don’t h-hit me again!” spluttered Nick +Jasniff. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Will you hand over the jewels and behave +yourself?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I—I haven’t got the jewels,” and now Jasniff +arose unsteadily to his feet. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Perhaps he’s hidden them,” suggested the +captain of the <em>Golden Eagle</em>. “It would be like +him to do it.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_292'></a>292</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I’ll search him first and then look around the +room. Where are those officers?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“They have their hands full just now with +those Englishmen. But I’ll call them if you wish +it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No, just see that he doesn’t get away,” answered +Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +A rapid search of Jasniff’s clothing told our +hero that the rascal did not have the gems on his +person. Then Dave looked into the steamer +trunk. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Are they there?” inquired Captain Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“No.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You’ll never get them from me,” growled +Jasniff, and gave Dave a look that was full of the +keenest hatred. “I’ll go to prison for life before +I’ll give them up, now!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Watch him carefully,” said Dave to the captain, +and got down on his hands and knees in +front of the berth in the room. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Nothing under there!” cried Jasniff, but his +voice had a trace of anxiety in it. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave felt around, but found nothing unusual. +Then he lit a match and continued his search. +Soon he saw where a board of the side wall had +been pried loose and then shoved back into place. +He pulled on the board and it came out, revealing +a small compartment between two upright posts. +In the compartment was something wrapped in a +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_293'></a>293</span> +bandanna handkerchief. He pulled it out and +crawled from under the berth. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I think I’ve found it,” he said, in a voice he +tried in vain to steady. Then he untied the handkerchief +and brought to light a money belt, exactly +like that taken from Link Merwell. He +placed it on the steamer trunk and opened it with +care. The sight that met his gaze was a dazzling +one. The money-belt contained all that Jasniff +had carried of the Carwith jewels. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“My, but that’s a sight!” murmured Captain +Sanders. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Going to return them, I suppose,” sneered +Nick Jasniff. “You’re a big fool to do it! I’d +keep them, and have a good time on the proceeds.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I am not built that way,” answered Dave, +shortly. “I’ll put this around my waist, with the +other,” he added, and lost no time in adjusting +the second money-belt. It wasn’t particularly comfortable +to wear those two belts, yet Dave felt +a tremendous satisfaction in so doing. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Jasniff was made to march on deck, and there +he was handcuffed like the other prisoners. He +no longer pretended to have a toothache, but he +did have a jaw-ache, from Dave’s blow. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The most surprised man was Captain Hunker, +and he readily told his story of how the Englishmen +had hired him to take them to Cave Island +and then call for them later. When Jasniff had +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_294'></a>294</span> +appeared, with the smoked glasses and the bandage +on his face, he had pitied the fellow but had +not paid much attention to him. When Dave had +fired his gun from the shore, Geswick had explained +that other fortune hunters were on the +island but that they wanted nothing to do with the +crowd, so the master of the <em>Aurora</em> had gone off +without investigating. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Inside of an hour all of the interested parties +had gone ashore, and the three rascally Englishmen +and Nick Jasniff were marched off by the +officers of the law. Roger and Phil appeared and +wanted to know the particulars of the capture. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And what are you going to do next, Dave?” +asked the senator’s son. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Get back to Crumville with the jewels, just +as soon as I can get away. But I’ve got to arrange +it with the police first.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Aren’t you going to send word ahead?” asked +Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Of course. I’ll send a cablegram to-day.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Won’t they be surprised and glad to get it!” +murmured Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And maybe I’m not glad to be able to take +the jewels back with me!” answered Dave, his +eyes glistening. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +An officer had been sent to take charge of Link +Merwell, who had been left on board the <em>Golden +Eagle</em>. An hour later came word that Merwell +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_295'></a>295</span> +could not be found. He had left the vessel in +some mysterious manner, dressing himself in one +of Dave’s best suits before going. A little later +Dave learned that Merwell had left San Juan for +the interior of Porto Rico. The officers of the +law said they would look for him. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The cablegram to Mr. Wadsworth was sent, and +soon a reply came back. Then came nearly a week +of waiting for a steamer that would take the boys +to New York. In the meantime matters were arranged +with the authorities so that they could get +away, and take the jewels with them. A detective +accompanied them, to make certain that the +jewels would be properly delivered, for the whole +case was now in the hands of the law. Giles Borden +remained in San Juan, to press his charge +against his fellow countrymen. Captain Sanders +remained in the harbor, to await orders from Phil’s +father. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Sorry to part with you boys,” said the captain, +as he shook hands. “Hope you’ll sail with +me again some day.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“An’ sail with me, too,” put in old Billy Dill, +who was present, and as much interested as anybody. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“But not on such a mission as this has been,” +returned Dave. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Nor to such a place as Cave Island,” added +Roger. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_296'></a>296</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“For caves and pitfalls that island certainly +was the limit,” was Phil’s comment. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +The voyage to New York proved to be uneventful, +and all of the lads were glad when it was +over. Arriving in the metropolis, they lost no +time in getting a train for Crumville, the detective +going with them, and Dave carrying the precious +jewels. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +And then what a home-coming followed! All +the Wadsworths and the Porters were at the depot +to meet them, and everybody was brimming over +with good feeling. Mrs. Wadsworth fairly +hugged Dave, and Laura kissed him over and +over again, and even Jessie could not resist the +temptation to rush into his arms. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, Dave, to think you really got the jewels!” +said Jessie. “Oh, I’m so glad! What a hero +you are!” And she gave him a look that touched +him to the bottom of the heart. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +And then came Mr. Wadsworth, his voice shaking +with emotion, and then Dave’s father, and +Uncle Dunston. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“One lad out of a million!” murmured the +manufacturer. “Mr. Porter, you can well be +proud of Dave!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And I am proud of him,” replied the parent, +heartily. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We are all proud,” added Dunston Porter. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +In the excitement it must not be supposed that +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_297'></a>297</span> +Phil and Roger were forgotten. While Dave related +his story to the men, and delivered the jewels +to Mr. Wadsworth, his chums had to tell about all +that had occurred, to Mrs. Wadsworth and the +girls. And the questions that were asked and answered +would fill a chapter and more. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And what will they do to Jasniff?” asked +Laura. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Undoubtedly put him in prison for a number +of years,” answered the senator’s son. “And he +deserves it.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“What a misspent life!” sighed Mrs. Wadsworth. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And what about Link Merwell?” asked +Jessie. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“I don’t know what they’ll do to him. Perhaps +they won’t catch him,” said Phil. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If they don’t, I hope he turns over a new leaf +and makes a real man of himself,” said Laura. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +Dave had gone to the jewelry works with the +men, and soon Phil and Roger followed. Here +the jewels were examined with care, being checked +off on a list,—the duplicate of a receipt Oliver +Wadsworth had given to the owner of the +gems. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Four stones are missing,” announced the manufacturer. +“And they are worth less than a thousand +dollars. Dave, you certainly did well.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“We can get back at least two of those stones,” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_298'></a>298</span> +answered Dave. “The pawnbrokers will have to +give them up.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then the loss will be less than five hundred +dollars—a mere trifle alongside of what it might +have been. Dave, I’ll not offer you a reward, for +I know you won’t take it. But I thank you, my +boy, I thank you most heartily!” And Mr. Wadsworth +caught Dave by both hands, while tears of +emotion stood in his eyes. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“It saved us all from a tight place, if not ruin,” +added Dunston Porter. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“How is that old watchman?” asked our hero, +to change the subject. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“You mean the man who was hurt?” asked his +father. “He is about as well as ever.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And have you heard from Hooker Montgomery?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Not a word, and we sha’n’t need to, now.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Any word from Oak Hall?” asked Roger. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, the place opened again last week.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Then I suppose we’ll have to get back once +more,” said Phil. “Well, we’ve had a long enough +vacation,—if you can call it such,” he added, with +a grin. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“And such adventures!” murmured Roger. +“We’ll never see such strenuous times again, eh, +Dave?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“There is no telling, we may,” answered Dave. +There were still many adventures ahead, and what +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_299'></a>299</span> +they were will be related in the next volume of +this series, to be entitled, “Dave Porter and the +Runaways; or, Last Days at Oak Hall,” in which +we shall meet our hero and his chums and enemies +once more. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“If we are to go back to Oak Hall so soon, let +us have all the fun we can,” said Dave, after the +matter of the jewels had been settled; and the next +day he and his chums and the girls went out for +a grand sleighride, for it was still winter at home, +even though it had been like summer on Cave +Island. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Dave, are you glad to be back?” asked Jessie, +while they were gliding over the snow. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Yes, I am,” he answered. “And doubly glad +to be here, at your side,” he added, in a lower +voice. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, Dave, I was so afraid while you were +away!” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Of what?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“That those bad boys would harm you! Oh, +please be careful in the future, for my sake.” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“All right, Jessie, I’ll be careful,” he answered, +and then, under the big robe, he gave her little +hand a tight squeeze, and I don’t know but that +Jessie gave him a squeeze in return. To her Dave +was the finest boy in all the world. +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Let’s have a song!” cried out Phil, from the +seat in front. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_300'></a>300</span> +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Right you are!” returned Dave. “What +shall it be?” +</p> +<p style='margin-right: 2em;'> +“Oh, anything!” came from the girls in concert; +and then they started to sing one familiar +song after another; and while they are singing let +us say good-by and take our leave. +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p> </p> +<p>THE END</p> +</div> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Dave Porter on Cave Island, by Edward Stratemeyer + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 36377-h.htm or 36377-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/7/36377/ + +Produced by Roger Frank, David Edwards and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/36377-h/images/i001.jpg b/36377-h/images/i001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3e886ef --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h/images/i001.jpg diff --git a/36377-h/images/i002.jpg b/36377-h/images/i002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..53d8689 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h/images/i002.jpg diff --git a/36377-h/images/i003.jpg b/36377-h/images/i003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b2493e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h/images/i003.jpg diff --git a/36377-h/images/i004.jpg b/36377-h/images/i004.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a175491 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h/images/i004.jpg diff --git a/36377-h/images/i005.jpg b/36377-h/images/i005.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e79614 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h/images/i005.jpg diff --git a/36377-h/images/i006.jpg b/36377-h/images/i006.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..357861a --- /dev/null +++ b/36377-h/images/i006.jpg diff --git a/36377.txt b/36377.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf81c72 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8770 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Dave Porter on Cave Island, by Edward Stratemeyer + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Dave Porter on Cave Island + A Schoolboy's Mysterious Mission + +Author: Edward Stratemeyer + +Illustrator: Richard Boehm + +Release Date: July 3, 2011 [EBook #36377] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank, David Edwards and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + + +[Illustration: "Empty!" murmured Dave sadly. "Empty!"--_Page 217._] + + + + + Dave Porter Series + + DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND + + OR + + A SCHOOLBOY'S MYSTERIOUS MISSION + + BY + + EDWARD STRATEMEYER + + Author of "Dave Porter at Oak Hall," "Dave Porter in the South Seas," + "The Gun Club Boys of Lakeport," "Old Glory Series," + "Pan-American Series," etc. + + _ILLUSTRATED BY H. RICHARD BOEHM_ + + + BOSTON + LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. + + + + + Published, March, 1912 + Copyright, 1912, by Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co. + + _All Rights Reserved_ + + Dave Porter on Cave Island + + Norwood Press + Berwick and Smith Co. + Norwood, Mass. + U. S. A. + + + + + PREFACE + +"Dave Porter on Cave Island" is a complete story in itself but forms the +eighth volume in a line issued under the general title of "Dave Porter +Series." + +The opening tale of this series, called "Dave Porter at Oak Hall," +related the adventures of a wide-awake lad at a typical boarding school +of to-day. This was followed by "Dave Porter in the South Seas," whither +our hero had gone to find his father, and then by "Dave Porter's Return +to School." + +From Oak Hall, Dave journeyed to Norway, as related in "Dave Porter in +the Far North." On his return to this country he once more attended +school, as told of in "Dave Porter and His Classmates." Dave made a host +of friends and likewise a few enemies, and some of the latter plotted to +do him much harm. + +When vacation came once more, Dave received an invitation to visit a +home in the far west, and what he did on that trip has been set forth in +"Dave Porter at Star Ranch." Then, when vacation days were at an end, he +came back to Oak Hall, as related in the seventh volume of this series, +entitled, "Dave Porter and His Rivals." + +In the present book we find Dave again at school. But the Christmas +holidays are at hand and the lad returns home. Here a most mysterious +and unlooked-for happening occurs, and Dave's great benefactor, Mr. +Wadsworth, is on the verge of ruin because of it. Dave gets a clew to +the mystery, and, with his chums, resolves to investigate. He takes a +long journey and has a number of stirring adventures, the particulars of +which are given in the pages that follow. + +When I started this line of books I trusted that Dave might please the +boys, but I did not imagine that so many thousands of boys and girls all +over the land would clamor as they have for more concerning the doings +of my hero. I thank all for their appreciation of my efforts to please +them, and I sincerely trust that the reading of this new volume will be +a benefit to them. + + Edward Stratemeyer. + _February_ 1, 1912. + + + + + CONTENTS + + CHAPTER PAGE + I. The Schoolboy Chums 1 + II. A Glimpse at the Past 16 + III. What Dave Had to Tell 18 + IV. The Schoolboy Hunters 28 + V. A Tramp Through the Snow 38 + VI. Good-by to Oak Hall 48 + VII. Nat Poole's Revelation 58 + VIII. A Merry Christmas 63 + IX. Nat Poole Gets Caught 78 + X. What Happened at the Jewelry Works 88 + XI. Looking for the Robbers 98 + XII. The Telltale Cigarette Box 108 + XIII. Dark Days 118 + XIV. Off for the South 128 + XV. Something About White Mice 138 + XVI. Picking up the Trail 147 + XVII. Meeting Old Friends 157 + XVIII. Off for Barbados 167 + XIX. The Missing Ship 177 + XX. Landing on Cave Island 187 + XXI. Into a Cave and Out 197 + XXII. The Hurricane 207 + XXIII. A Strange Discovery 217 + XXIV. Jasniff and Merwell 227 + XXV. Link Merwell's Story 237 + XXVI. The Column of Smoke 247 + XXVII. Behind the Curtain of Vines 257 + XXVIII. In Which the Enemy Sails Away 267 + XXIX. A Chase on the Ocean 277 + XXX. Homeward Bound--Conclusion 287 + + + + +DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND + + + + +CHAPTER I--THE SCHOOLBOY CHUMS + + +"Come on, fellows, if you are going! It's a good six-mile skate to +Squirrel Island, and we've got to hustle if we want to get there in time +for lunch." + +"Wait till I fix my right skate, Dave," returned Phil Lawrence. "I don't +want to lose it on the way." + +"Say, that puts me in mind of a story," came from another of the group +of schoolboys who were adjusting their skates. "Once a man asked for a +pair of skates for----" + +"Stow it, Shadow!" interrupted Dave Porter. "We haven't any time now to +listen to stories. You can tell them while we are resting up at the +island." + +"Shadow can tell stories while we put away the lunch," observed Roger +Morr, with a grin. + +"Not much!" cried the lad mentioned. "I guess that skate will make me as +hungry as anybody--and the stories will keep." + +"I thought Ben Basswood was going, too?" came from another of the +schoolboys. + +"Here he comes, Lazy," answered Dave, and as he spoke he pointed to a +path across the snow-covered campus, along which another boy was +hurrying, skates in hand. + +"Co-couldn't get here an-any so-sooner!" panted Ben, as he dropped on a +bench to adjust his skates. "Old Haskers made me do some extra work in +Latin! Wow, but don't I love that man!" + +"We all do," answered Phil. "We are going to get up a testimonial to +him. A silver-mounted----" + +"Slice of punk, with an ancient lemon on top," finished Dave. "It's just +what he's been waiting for." And at this sally there was a general +laugh. + +"Well, I'm ready," went on Phil, as he arose from the bench. "Say, but +isn't it just a glorious day for the outing?" he added, casting his eyes +around and drawing in a deep breath of the pure, cold air. + +"It couldn't be better, Phil," answered Dave. "And we ought to have a +fine time at the island, bringing down rabbits and squirrels. Old Jerry +Lusk told me that hunting was never better." + +"What's the matter with having some of the rabbits and squirrels for +lunch?" asked Sam Day. + +"Perhaps we can cook them, Sam," returned Dave. "But we had better +depend on the lunch hamper for something to eat. By the way, we'll have +to take turns carrying the hamper. It is rather heavy." + +"Chip Macklin and I are going to carry it first," said a tall, strong +youth named Gus Plum. "It's not so very heavy, although it is filled +with good things." + +"Don't lose it, on your life!" cried Phil. + +"Lose it!" echoed Roger Morr. "Banish the thought! We'll form a guard +around Gus and Chip, so they can't get away with it on the sly." + +"Not so much as a doughnut must be eaten until we reach the island and +start a campfire," said Dave. "Those are orders from headquarters," he +added, with a grand flourish. + +"Orders accepted, admiral!" cried Gus, and made a bow so profound that +his skates went from under him, sending him to his knees. This caused a +wild laugh, and the powerfully-built youth got up in a hurry, looking +rather sheepish. + +"I'm ready now," said Ben, as he left the bench and settled his skating +cap on his head. "Come on, let's get away before old Haskers calls us +back for something or other. He just loves to spoil a fellow's outing." + +"There he is at one of the windows!" cried Roger, pointing back to the +school building. "I really believe he is beckoning to us!" + +"Don't look," cautioned Dave. "He'll want us to go back, to put away +some books, or clean our desks, or something. Doctor Clay said we could +take this outing, and I'm not going to let any teacher spoil it. +Forward!" and away from the shore he skated, with his chums around him. +They had scarcely covered a distance of a dozen yards when a window was +thrown up hastily, and Job Haskers thrust his head through the opening. + +"Boys! boys!" called out the Oak Hall teacher. "Wait a minute! I want to +know where you are going, and if all of you have finished studying." + +"Don't look back, and don't answer!" said Roger, in a hoarse whisper. + +"Give the school yell!" suggested Phil. + +"Just the thing!" returned Sam Day. "Now then, all together!" And an +instant later through the clear, wintry air, rang the well-known Oak +Hall slogan: + + "Baseball! + Football! + Oak Hall + Has the call! + Biff! Boom! Bang! Whoop!" + +Three times the boys gave the cry, and by that time they had skated far +up the river and out of sight of the window at which the teacher was +standing. Job Haskers looked after them glumly, and then closed the +window with a bang. + +"They must have heard me--I don't see how they could help it," he +muttered to himself. "Such disrespect! I'll make them toe the mark for +it when they get back! Bah! Doctor Clay is altogether too easy with the +boys. If I were running this school I'd make them mind!" And the teacher +shut his teeth grimly. He was a man who thought that the boys ought to +spend all their time in studying. The hours devoted to outdoor exercise +he considered practically wasted. He was too short-sighted to realize +that, in order to have a perfectly sound mind, one must likewise have a +sound body. + +"He'll have it in for us when we get back," murmured Chip Macklin. "My! +how he does love to stop a fellow's fun!" + +"Don't worry," chimed in Roger. "Sufficient unto the hour is the lecture +thereof. Let us enjoy this outing while it lasts, and let come what will +when we get back." + +"Which puts me in mind of another story," broke in Shadow Hamilton. "A +fellow used to eat too much, and he had to take his medicine regularly, +to keep from getting indigestion. So once--wow!" And Shadow broke off +short, for Phil had suddenly put out his foot, sending the story-teller +of Oak Hall sprawling. + +"So he had to take his medicine," repeated Dave, gravely. + +"Did the medicine agree with him?" asked Roger, innocently. + +"He took it lying down, didn't he?" questioned Gus. + +"I'll 'medicine' you!" roared Shadow, as he scrambled to his feet. Then +he made a wild dash after the youth who had tripped him up, but Phil had +skated on ahead and he took good care that Shadow did not catch him. "I +won't tell you another story for a year!" the story-teller growled, +after the chase was at an end. + +"Phew! Shadow says he is going to reform!" murmured Ben. + +"Let it pass, Shadow!" cried Dave, not wishing the story-teller to take +the matter too seriously. "You can tell all the stories you please +around the campfire. But just now let us push on as fast as we can. I +want a chance to do some rabbit and squirrel hunting, and you know we've +got to be back on time, or we'll have trouble with Doctor Clay as well +as with old Haskers." + +"Yes, and I want to take some pictures before it gets too dark," said +Sam, who had his camera along. + +"Do you know what Horsehair told me?" came from Roger. "He said we were +fixing for another snowstorm." + +"It doesn't look so now," returned Dave. "But Horsehair generally hits +it on the weather, so maybe we'll catch it before we get back." + +"Wonder if we'll meet any of the Rockville cadets?" remarked Phil, as he +and Dave forged to the front, they knowing the way up the river better +than did some of the others. + +"It is possible, Phil. All of them have guns, and I should think they +would like to go hunting." + +"I guess most of their firearms are rifles, not fowling-pieces." + +"Not more than half--I learned that from Mallory, when we played hockey. +He said they had some shotguns just for hunting and camping out +purposes." + +"Well, those chaps have a holiday to-day, the same as we have, so some +of them may be up around Squirrel Island. But I'd rather not meet them," +and Dave's face became serious. + +"Humph! If those military academy fellows try to play any tricks on us I +reckon we can give 'em as good as they send," growled Phil. + +"To be sure we can, Phil. But I'd rather keep out of trouble to-day and +have some good, clean sport. I haven't been hunting this season and I'm +just itching to draw a bead on a fat bunny, or squirrel, or some +partridges. You know, I used to go hunting in the woods around +Crumville, when I was home." + +"Why, of course! Didn't Roger and I go along once? But we didn't get +much that trip, although we did get into a lively row with Nat Poole." + +"Oh, yes, I remember now. I wish----" And then Dave Porter came to a +sudden silence. + +"What is it, Dave?" and Phil looked closely at his chum. + +"Oh, not much," was the evasive answer. + +"But I know something is worrying you," insisted the shipowner's son. +"I've noticed it for several days, and Roger noticed it, too." + +"Roger?" + +"Yes. He came to me yesterday and said that he was sure you had +something on your mind. Now, maybe it is none of our business, Dave. But +if I and Roger can help you in any way, you know we'll be only too glad +to do it." Phil spoke in a low but earnest voice. + +"Hi, what's doing in the front rank?" cried a cheery voice at this +juncture, and Roger Morr skated swiftly up beside Dave and Phil. + +"I'm glad you came," said Phil, and he looked at the senator's son in a +peculiar fashion. "I was just speaking to Dave about how we had noticed +something was wrong, and how we were willing to help him, if he needed +us." + +"Sure, we'll help you every time, Dave; you know that," returned Roger, +quickly. + +"I don't know that I need any help," answered Dave, slowly. "The fact of +the matter is, I don't know what can be done." + +"Then something is wrong?" cried both of his chums. + +"Yes, if you must know. I was going to keep it to myself, for I didn't +think it would do any good to tell about it. I'll tell you, but I don't +want it to go any further, unless it becomes necessary to speak." + +"Before you tell us, let me make a guess about this," said Phil. "Some +of your old enemies are trying to make trouble for you, is that right?" + +"Yes." + +"And those enemies are Link Merwell and Nick Jasniff," cried Roger. + +"Yes, again," answered Dave. + +"What are they up to now, Dave?" The eager question came from Phil. + +"They are up to a number of things," was the grave response of Dave +Porter. "They are evidently going to do their best to disgrace my family +and myself, and ruin us." + + + + +CHAPTER II--A GLIMPSE AT THE PAST + + +"Disgrace you and ruin you!" cried Roger, in amazement. + +"That is what it looks like," answered Dave. "I can account for their +actions in no other way." + +"Tell us just what is going on," urged Phil. "You know you can trust us +to keep it a secret." + +"I will tell you everything," answered Dave. "But first let us skate up +a little faster, so that the others won't catch a word of what is said." +And with that he struck out more rapidly than ever, and his two chums +did likewise. + +To those who have read the former volumes of this series, Dave Porter +will need no introduction. For the benefit of others let me state that +my hero had had a varied career, starting when he was but a child of a +few years. At that time he had been found wandering along the railroad +tracks near the town of Crumville. As nobody claimed him, he was placed +in a local poorhouse and later bound out to a broken-down college +professor, Caspar Potts, who had taken up farming for his health. + +Professor Potts was in the grasp of a miserly money-lender of Crumville +named Aaron Poole, who had a son Nat, who could not get along at all +with Dave. Mr. Poole was about to foreclose a mortgage on the +professor's place and sell him out when something occurred that was the +means of changing the whole course of the professor's own life and that +of the youth who lived with him. + +On the outskirts of Crumville lived Mr. Oliver Wadsworth, a wealthy +manufacturer, with his wife and daughter Jessie. One day the gasoline +tank of an automobile took fire and little Jessie was in danger of being +burned to death. Dave rushed to her assistance and beat out the flames, +and thus saved her. For this Mr. Wadsworth was very grateful. He made +some inquiries concerning Caspar Potts and Dave, and learning that +Professor Potts had been one of his former college instructors, he made +the old gentleman come and live with him. + +"Dave shall go to boarding school and get a good education," said Mr. +Wadsworth. And how Dave went has been told in detail in the first volume +of this series, entitled "Dave Porter at Oak Hall." With Dave went Ben +Basswood, his one boy friend in Crumville. + +At Oak Hall, a fine seat of learning, located on the Leming River, in +one of our eastern states, Dave made a number of warm friends, including +Phil Lawrence, the son of a rich shipowner; Roger Morr, whose father was +a United States senator; Maurice Hamilton, usually called Shadow, who +was noted for his sleep-walking and the stories he loved to tell; Sam +Day, known throughout the school as Lazy, why nobody could tell, since +Sam at times was unusually active, and a score of others, some of whom +have already been introduced. He also made, in those days, one enemy, +Gus Plum. But Gus had since reformed, and was now as good a friend as +any of the rest. + +What troubled Dave most of all in those days was the question of his +identity. How he started to find out who he was has been related in my +second volume, called "Dave Porter in the South Seas." There he did not +meet his father, as he had hoped, but he did meet his uncle, Dunston +Porter, and learned much concerning his father, David Breslow Porter, +and also his sister Laura, then traveling in Europe. + +When Dave came back to Oak Hall, as related in "Dave Porter's Return to +School," he met many of his friends and succeeded in making himself more +popular than ever. But some lads were jealous of our hero's success, and +two of them, Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell, did what they could to get +Dave into trouble, being aided in part by Nat Poole, the son of the +miserly money-lender, who had followed Dave to the school. The plots +against Dave were exposed, and in sheer fright Nick Jasniff ran away and +went to Europe. + +Dave had been expecting right along to meet his father and his sister, +and when they did not return to this country, and did not send word, he +grew anxious, and started out to find them, as related in detail in +"Dave Porter in the Far North." It was in Norway that Dave first saw his +parent, a meeting as strange as it was affecting. + +After his trip to the Land of the Midnight Sun, our hero returned once +again to school, as related in "Dave Porter and His Classmates." Jasniff +had not returned, but Link Merwell was still at hand, and likewise the +lordly Nat Poole, and they did what they could to make our hero's life +miserable. In the end Merwell did something that was particularly +despicable and this caused Dave to take the law into his own hands and +he gave the bully the thrashing that he well deserved. Merwell wanted to +retaliate in some manner, but in the midst of his plotting, word of his +wrongdoings reached the head of the school and he was ordered to pack up +and leave, which he did in great rage. + +While Dave was off hunting for his father and his sister, Laura Porter +had been visiting her friend, Belle Endicott, at Mr. Endicott's ranch in +the far west. Belle was anxious to meet her girl chum's newly-found +brother, and this led to a visit to the ranch, as told of in "Dave +Porter at Star Ranch." Here Dave again met Link Merwell, and proved that +the latter had been aiding some horse-thieves in their wicked work. Mr. +Merwell had to settle a heavy bill because of his son's actions, and +then, for a short space of time, Link disappeared. + +With the coming of fall, Dave and his chums returned to Oak Hall, as +related in the volume preceding this, called "Dave Porter and His +Rivals." As his chief enemies had left the school, he did not anticipate +much trouble, yet trouble came in a manner somewhat out of the ordinary. +Nat Poole joined a group of students who had come to Oak Hall from +another school, and the crowd did what it could to get Dave and his +friends off the football eleven. Then, when Dave had once more fought +his way to the front, came word that Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell were +again "after his scalp," as Roger expressed it. Jasniff and Merwell were +then attending a rival institution of learning known as Rockville +Military Academy. + +"Be careful, or they'll play you some dirty trick, Dave," said Phil, +warningly. + +"I've got my eyes open," replied Dave. + +In a rather unusual manner Dave had become acquainted with a man named +Hooker Montgomery, a fake doctor, who traveled around the country +selling medicines that he made himself. This man asked Dave to call on +him, and when the youth did so he was suddenly seized from behind, made +a prisoner, and carried off in a sleigh and then in an automobile. At +first he did not know what to make of it, but at last learned that he +was being held, for some purpose, by Merwell, Jasniff, Montgomery, and +the fourth man, a mere tool. He watched his chance, and, at length, +escaped, much to his enemies' chagrin. + +"Have them all arrested," was the advice of Dave's chums, but this was +not easy, since all of the evil-doers had disappeared. Then, one day, +while on a sleigh-ride to a distant town, the boys fell in with Hooker +Montgomery. The fake doctor was practically "down and out," as he +himself expressed it, and said he would do anything for Dave, provided +he was not prosecuted. + +"It was all a plot gotten up by those two, Jasniff and Merwell," said +Hooker Montgomery. "They promised me some money if I would help them, +but I never got a cent." Then he said that Jasniff and Merwell were in +town. + +"We'll locate them," said Dave, but this was not accomplished until +later, when the pair of rascals were encountered at a railroad office. +Our hero and his chums tried to stop Jasniff and Merwell, but the +rascals rushed through a crowd and got aboard a train; and that was the +last seen of them for the time being. The boys might have gone after the +pair, but they had an important hockey game to play, and when they +administered a stinging defeat to Oak Hall's ancient rival, Rockville +Academy, Dave, for the time being, forgot that he had an enemy in the +world. + +"Two weeks more of the grind, boys!" cried Dave, on the following +Monday. "And then home for the holidays." + +"Right you are," answered Phil. "But, oh, those two weeks!" + +On Wednesday one of Dave's chums celebrated his birthday, and among the +presents received was a very fine double-barreled shotgun. This lad +immediately wanted to go hunting; and the result was that the boys +applied to Doctor Clay for permission to go to Squirrel Island, up the +river, on a hunting expedition, the following Saturday. There was just +sufficient snow on the ground to make rabbit and squirrel tracking good, +and the boys were told that they might remain away all day. Six of them +had guns and two had revolvers, and they carried in addition a +good-sized hamper of provisions for lunch. + +"Now, boys, be careful and don't shoot yourselves or anybody else," said +Doctor Clay, with a smile, when Dave, Roger, and Phil left the school +building. "Don't fire at anything until you are certain of what it is. +Every hunting season somebody is killed through the sheer carelessness +of somebody else." + +"We'll be careful," answered Dave. + +"Do you think you'll get any game?" And the doctor continued to smile. + +"I hope to bring you at least a brace of rabbits or squirrels, Doctor." + +"Well, I wish you luck. And don't stay too late," returned the head of +the school, and then with a pleasant nod he dismissed them. + +Dave, Roger, and Phil were the first at the place of meeting, but they +were quickly joined by all the others except Ben. + +"I'll tell you what, Phil," said the senator's son, when he had a chance +to talk to Phil alone. "Something is wrong with Dave. He isn't himself +at all. Can't you see it?" + +"Of course I can, Roger," was the reply of the shipowner's son. "If I +get a chance to speak to him about it, I am going to do so. But I've got +to be careful--I don't want to hurt his feelings." + +"When you do speak, give me the sign, so I can hear what he has to say, +too," went on Roger, and to this Phil agreed. Then came the start up the +river, and a little later Phil broached the subject, and Dave made the +dismaying announcement that Jasniff and Merwell were doing their best to +bring disgrace to himself and his family and ruin them. + + + + +CHAPTER III--WHAT DAVE HAD TO TELL + + +"It's rather a long story, and I scarcely know how to begin," said Dave, +after he, Phil, and Roger had skated ahead and to the right, where the +others were not likely to overhear the conversation. "But, to begin +with, Jasniff and Merwell have been to Crumville since they left here in +such a hurry, and--I have some reason to believe--they have been here in +town, too." + +"Here!" cried the shipowner's son. + +"Yes." + +"Why didn't you tell us of this before?" asked Roger. + +"I didn't know of it until lately, and I didn't want to worry you over +my private affairs." + +"But what have they done?" demanded Phil, impatiently. + +"As I said before, Phil, I hardly know how to begin to tell you. But to +plunge right in. In the first place, when they were in Crumville they +followed my sister Laura and Jessie Wadsworth to a concert by a college +glee club. They forced their attentions on the two girls, and gave +outsiders an impression that they had come as escorts. The girls were so +upset over it that Laura wrote me that Jessie was actually sick. Two +days after that, when the girls were out walking one evening, Jasniff +and Merwell followed them, and right on the main street, near the +post-office, they came up and commenced to talk and Merwell said to +Laura, loud enough for half a dozen folks to hear: 'You've got to keep +your word--you can't go back on us like that.' And Jasniff added: 'Yes, +you girls were glad enough to let us give you a good time before, down +at the Rainbow.' The Rainbow is a ten-cent moving-picture place, and a +low one at that. Of course there wasn't a word of truth in it, but +Merwell and Jasniff gave folks the impression that Laura and Jessie had +been going out with them, and you know how such reports spread in a +small town like Crumville." + +"The hounds!" exclaimed the senator's son, wrathfully. "They should have +been run out of town!" + +"Why didn't the girls tell your folks?" asked Phil. + +"They did, as soon as they got home, and my father, Uncle Dunston, and +Mr. Wadsworth went out to look for Merwell and Jasniff, but they were +not to be found. But that was only the beginning. The next day an old +lady came to the house with a letter she had picked up in the +post-office. It was addressed to Link Merwell and had my sister's name +signed to it, and stated that she was sorry they had quarreled and +wouldn't he please forgive her and take her to the dance as promised? Of +course the whole thing was a forgery, and it was dropped in the +post-office just to make talk. I suppose Merwell thought some chatterbox +would pick it up and spread the news." + +"But what is his game?" queried the shipowner's son. "I don't see how he +is going to gain anything by such actions." + +"He wants to ruin our reputations, just as he and Jasniff have ruined +their own. But I haven't told you all yet. A day later my father heard +of another letter being found, in which Laura and Jessie promised to go +off on a joy-ride in an auto with Merwell and Jasniff. Then Merwell and +Jasniff appeared in Crumville with a stunning touring car, and they had +two girls with them, loudly dressed and heavily veiled, and the whole +four tooted horns, and sang, and behaved in anything but a becoming +fashion. A good many folks thought the veiled girls must be Laura and +Jessie, and you can imagine how my sister and her friend felt when they +heard of it." + +"Those chaps ought to be arrested," murmured Phil. + +"And tarred and feathered," added the senator's son. + +"After that, my father and Mr. Wadsworth got after them so sharply that +they left Crumville. That was only a few days ago. The very next day +came a lot of goods to the house, delivered by a large city department +store. The folks hadn't ordered the goods and didn't know what to make +of it. They investigated, and learned that a young woman calling herself +Laura Porter had selected the things and had them sent out. Then came +other goods for Mr. Wadsworth, said to have been bought by Jessie. It +was an awful mix-up, and it hasn't been straightened out yet." + +"It's the limit!" muttered the senator's son. "I'll wager your dad and +Mr. Wadsworth would like to wring those chaps' necks!" + +"Wait, you haven't heard it all yet," went on Dave, with a sickly smile. +"Yesterday I received a notice from the express company here to call for +a package on which eighteen dollars was due. I was expecting some things +that I am going to take home for Christmas presents, although they were +to come to fifteen dollars and a half. I paid for the package, thinking +I had made a mistake in footing up my purchases, and when I got it home +I found out it wasn't what I had bought at all, but a lot of junk nobody +can use. Then my own package came in by the next express, and, of +course, I had to pay again. I sent a telegram to the city about the +first package and they answered that David Porter had purchased the same +and had it sent C. O. D. Then two other packages came, one calling for +six dollars and the other for twenty-four dollars. But I refused to have +anything to do with them, and said I could easily prove that I hadn't +been to the city to order them. But it is going to cause a lot of +trouble." + +"I believe you," returned the senator's son. + +"Anything more, Dave?" queried Phil. + +"Yes. Last night, if you will remember, an old man came to see me. He +said that two young men had sent him to me, saying that we wanted a man +in Crumville to take care of a certain young lady who was slightly out +of her mind. He said he had once worked in an asylum and knew he could +give satisfaction, even if he was getting old. It was another of Merwell +and Jasniff's mean tricks, and I had quite a time explaining to the old +man and getting him to go away. He said he had spent two dollars and a +quarter in car-fare to come to see me, and I felt so sorry for him that +I gave him five dollars to help him along." + +"Dave, where is this going to end?" cried Roger. + +"That is just what I want to know," returned Dave. "Perhaps by the time +we get back to Oak Hall there will be more packages waiting for me--or +potatoes, or a horse, or something like that." + +"You could have Merwell and Jasniff arrested for this," was Phil's +comment. + +"Yes, if I could catch them. But they know enough to keep shady. But +that isn't all. Yesterday I got a letter, or rather a note. It was +postmarked from Rocky Run, about fifteen miles from here. Inside of the +envelope was a card on which was written: 'We'll never let up until we +have ruined you.'" + +"Was it signed?" asked the senator's son. + +"Oh, no. But I am sure it came from Merwell and Jasniff." + +"They are certainly sore," was Phil's comment. + +"Traveling around must cost them money. Where do they get the cash?" +asked Roger. + +"From Mr. Merwell most likely," answered Dave. "He got a good price when +he sold his ranch, and he seldom denies Link anything." + +"Have you any idea who the girls were who were in the auto in +Crumville?" + +"Not exactly, but I think they must have been some of the girls Nat +Poole goes with. When Jasniff and Merwell were there with Nat, I saw the +whole crowd out with some girls from the cotton mills. They were nice +enough girls in their way, but they were very boisterous and not the +kind Laura and Jessie care to pick for company. I suppose those girls +played their part thinking it was nothing but a good joke. One had a hat +on with feathers such as Jessie wears and the other wore a coat and veil +like Laura's. I guess a good many who saw them riding in the auto and +cutting up like wild Indians thought they were Laura and Jessie." And +Dave heaved a deep sigh. + +"And what are you going to do, Dave?" asked Phil, after a short silence, +during which the three chums continued to skate in advance of their +friends. + +"What can I do? We are trying to locate the rascals, and when we do +we'll make them stop. But in the meantime----" + +"They may cause you no end of trouble," finished the senator's son. + +"I don't care so much for myself as I do for Laura and Jessie, and for +Mr. and Mrs. Wadsworth. I hate to see them suffer because of my trouble +with those rascals. I don't see why Merwell and Jasniff can't fight it +out with me alone." + +"You forget one thing, Dave," returned Phil. "Merwell was once sweet on +your sister. I suppose it made him furious to be turned down by her." + +"Well, then, why does he annoy Jessie? She never harmed him, or Jasniff +either." + +"Huh! As if you didn't know why!" replied Roger, with something like a +chuckle. "Don't they both know that Jessie is the very apple of your +eye, and that anything that brings trouble to her will cut you to the +heart? Of course they know that, Dave, and you can rest assured that +they will try to hurt you quite as much through Jessie as they'll try to +hurt you direct." + +"Perhaps, Roger. If I was sure----" + +"Low bridge!" shouted Phil at that instant, as a bend of the river was +gained, and then the whole crowd of students swept under the lowhanging +branches of a number of trees. Those ahead had to go slowly and pick the +way with care. + +"How much farther have we to go?" called out Sam Day. + +"Only a couple of miles," replied Dave. He turned to Phil and Roger. +"That's about all," he whispered. "Keep it to yourselves." + +"We will," they replied. + +"Somebody else going to carry this hamper?" cried Chip Macklin. "It's +getting rather heavy." + +"I'll carry one end," said Ben Basswood. + +"And I'll take the other," added Phil. "Dave, you and Roger go ahead and +bring down a couple of deer, and a bear, and one or two tigers, or +something like that," he continued, with a grin, for he wanted to get +Dave's mind off of his troubles. + +"Nothing but an elephant for mine," answered Dave, with a forced laugh. +"I don't want to waste my powder." + +"As the society belle said when she left the mark of her cheek on the +gent's shoulder," remarked Buster Beggs, the fat lad of the group. + +"Say, that puts me in mind of another story," came from Shadow. "Once on +a time a Dutchman heard that a certain lady was a society belle. He +wanted to tell his friend about it, but he couldn't think of the right +word. 'Ach, she is von great lady,' he said. 'She is a society +ding-dong!'" + +"Wow!" + +"There's a ringer for Shadow!" + +"Shadow, you want to frame that joke and hang it in the woodshed." + +"Put it down in moth-balls until next summer, Shadow." + +"Oh, say, speaking about moth-balls puts me in mind of another story. A +man----" + +"Was it a young man, Shadow?" asked Dave, calmly. + +"Maybe it was a very old man," suggested Phil. + +"Was he clean-shaven or did he have a beard?" queried Roger. + +"Never mind if he was young or old, or clean-shaven or not," cried the +story-teller. "This man----" + +"Was he an American or a foreigner?" demanded Gus Plum. "That is +something we have simply got to know." + +"And if he was knock-kneed," put in Sam. "I hate love stories about +knock-kneed men. They aren't a bit romantic." + +"Who said anything about a love story about a knock-kneed man?" burst +out Shadow. "I said----" + +But what Shadow was going to say was drowned out in the sudden report of +a shotgun,--a report so close at hand that it made nearly every student +present stop in alarm. + + + + +CHAPTER IV--THE SCHOOLBOY HUNTERS + + +"Dave, what did you shoot at?" + +It was Phil who asked the question, for he had been the only one to see +Dave raise his shotgun, take quick aim, and fire into the brushwood +lining the river at that point. + +"I shot at a rabbit, and I think I hit him," was the reply. "I'll soon +know." And Dave skated toward the shore, less than twenty yards away. He +poked into the bushes with the barrel of his gun and soon brought forth +a fat, white rabbit which he held up with satisfaction. + +"Hurrah!" cried the senator's son. "First prize goes to Dave! He's a +fine one, too," he added, as the students gathered around to inspect the +game. + +"Thought you said you wouldn't shoot anything less than an elephant," +grunted Buster. + +"The elephant will come later," answered Dave, with a smile. + +"I'd like to get a couple like that," said Gus Plum, wistfully. + +"Maybe that will be the total for the day," was Sam's comment. He had +gone wild-turkey shooting once and gotten a shot at the start and then +nothing more, so he was inclined to be skeptical. + +"Oh, we'll get more, if we are careful and keep our eyes open," declared +Dave. "I saw the track of the rabbit in the snow yonder and that made me +look for him." + +Dave's success put all the students on the alert, and they spread out on +either side of the stream, eager to sight more game. + +Less than two minutes later came the crack of Gus Plum's shotgun, +followed almost immediately by a shot from Buster Beggs' pistol. Then a +gray rabbit went scampering across the river in front of the boys and +several fired simultaneously. + +"I got him! I got him!" shouted Gus, and ran to the shore, to bring out +a medium-sized rabbit. + +"And we've got another!" cried Sam. "But I don't know whether Shadow, +Ben, or I killed him." + +"I guess we all had a hand in it," said Ben. "We all fired at about the +same time." + +"What did you get, Buster?" questioned Chip Macklin. + +"I--I guess I didn't get anything," faltered the fat youth. "I thought I +saw a squirrel, but I see now that it is only a tree root sticking out +of the snow." + +"Great Scott, Buster! Don't shoot down the trees!" cried Phil, in mock +dismay. "They might fall on us, you know!" And a laugh arose at the +would-be hunter's expense. + +On the students skated, and before long reached a point where the river +was parted by a long, narrow strip of land known as Squirrel Island, +because squirrels were supposed to abound there. + +As they reached the lower end of the island Dave held up his hand as a +warning. + +"I think I saw some partridges ahead," he said, in a low voice. "If they +are there we don't want to disturb them. Put down the hamper and take +off your skates, and we'll try to bag them." + +His chums were not slow in complying with his commands, and soon the +crowd was making its way toward the center of the island, where grew a +dense clump of cedars. They had to work their way through the brushwood. + +"Ouch!" exclaimed Shadow, presently. + +"What's the trouble?" whispered Roger. + +"Scratched my hand on a bramble bush," was the reply. "But it isn't +much." + +"Be careful of your guns," cautioned Dave. "Don't let a trigger get +caught in a bush or you may have an accident." + +"There they are!" cried Ben, in a strained voice. "My, what a lot of +'em!" + +He pointed ahead, and to one side of the tall cedars they saw a covey of +partridges, at least twenty in number, resting on the ground. + +"All together!" said Dave, in a low, steady voice. "Fire as you stand, +those on the right to the right, those on the left to the left, and +those in the center for the middle of the flock. I'll count. Ready? One, +two, three!" + +Crack! bang! crack! bang! went the shotguns and pistols. Then came a +rushing, rattling, roaring sound, and up into the air went what was left +of the covey, one partridge, being badly wounded, flying in a circle and +then directly for Roger's head. He struck it with his gun barrel and +then caught it in his hands, quickly putting it out of its misery. The +other boys continued to bang away, but soon the escaping game was beyond +their reach. + +"A pretty good haul!" cried Dave, as he and his chums moved forward. +"Three here and the one Roger has makes four. Boys, we won't go back +empty-handed." + +"Who hit and who missed?" questioned Sam. + +"That would be a hard question to answer," returned Phil. "Better let +the credit go to the whole crowd," and so it was decided. + +"Well, there isn't much use in looking for any more game around here," +said Dave. "Those volleys of shots will make them lay low for some +time." + +"Let's go into camp and get lunch," suggested Buster. "I'm as hungry as +a bear." + +"Were you ever anything else?" questioned Ben, with a grin, for the +stout youth's constant desire to eat was well known. + +They tramped to the south shore of the island, and there, in a nook that +was sheltered from the north wind, they went into temporary camp, +cutting down some brushwood and heavier fuel and building a fire. Over +the flames they arranged a stick, from which they hung a kettle filled +with water obtained by chopping a hole through the ice of the river. + +"Now, when the water boils, we can have some coffee," said Roger, who +was getting out the tin cups. "And we can roast those potatoes while the +water boils," he added. + +"What about some rabbit pot-pie, or roast partridge?" asked Buster. + +"Oh, let us take all the game back to the school!" exclaimed Ben. "Just +to show the fellows what we got, you know." + +"That's the talk!" cried Gus. "If we don't, maybe they won't believe we +were so lucky." + +"Yes, let us take it all back," chimed in Chip Macklin. + +All but Buster were willing to keep the game. He heaved a deep sigh. + +"All right, if we must," he said mournfully. "But it makes my mouth +water, just the same!" And he eyed the plump rabbits and fat partridges +wistfully. + +Inside of half an hour the lunch was under way. Around the roaring +campfire sat the students, some on convenient rocks and others on a +fallen tree that chanced to be handy. They had brought with them several +kinds of sandwiches, besides hard-boiled eggs, crackers, cheese, some +cake, and the coffee, with a small bottle of cream and some sugar. They +also had some potatoes for roasting, and though these got partly burned, +all declared them "fine" or "elegant,"--which shows what outdoor air will +do for one's appetite. + +They took their time, and during the meal Shadow was allowed to tell as +many stories as he pleased, much to his satisfaction. It was Dave who +was the first to get up. + +"Might as well be moving," he said, after consulting his watch. "We'll +have to start on the return inside of two hours, and that won't give us +much time for hunting." + +"Wait, I want just one more picture!" cried Sam, who had been busy +before with his camera. "Now all look as happy as if to-morrow were +Christmas!" And as the others grinned over the joke, click! went the +shutter of the box, and the picture was snapped. + +"Now, Sam, let me take you, with a gun in one hand and the partridges in +the other!" cried Dave. "If it turns out well, we can have it enlarged +for our dormitory." And a minute later another picture was added to the +roll of films. + +"Why not leave the things here and come back for them?" suggested Roger. +"No use in toting the hamper and game everywhere." + +"We can hang the game in a tree," added Ben. + +All agreed to this, and so the hamper and the game were hung up on the +limbs of a near-by walnut tree along with their skates and some other +things. Then the fire was kicked out, so that it might not start a +conflagration in the woods, and the students prepared to continue their +hunt. + +"I guess we may as well tramp to the upper end of the island first," +said Dave, in answer to a question from his companions. "Then, if we +have time, we can beat up one shore and then the other. By that time it +will be getting dark and time to turn back to the Hall." + +"Say, wait a minute!" cried Ben, suddenly. + +"What's wrong, Ben?" asked several. + +"Why, I--er--I thought I saw somebody over in the woods yonder, looking at +us," and the Crumville lad pointed to the trees in question. All gazed +steadily in the direction but saw nothing unusual. + +"Maybe it was a rabbit, or a bear, or something like that," suggested +Buster. "If it's a bear we had better look out," he added, nervously. + +"We'll soon find out," said Dave. "Come on," and he walked forward +toward the woods. But he found nothing and soon rejoined his companions. + +"I must have been mistaken," said Ben. "Come on, if we are to do any +hunting." And off he stalked, and one by one the others followed. + +Evidently the shots at the partridges had scared much of the game away, +for at the upper end of the island they started up nothing but two +squirrels and a few wild pigeons. Then they came down the north shore +and there bagged two rabbits. They also saw a wild turkey, but it got +away before anybody could take aim at it. + +"See, it has started to snow!" cried the senator's son, presently, and +he was right. At first the flakes were few, but inside of five minutes +it was snowing steadily. + +"We may as well start for the Hall," said Dave. "This storm looks as if +it might last for some time." + +They left the shore and soon reached the edge of the island. By this +time the snowflakes were coming down so thickly that the boys could see +but little around them. The sky was now growing quite dark. + +"I don't like this," was Phil's comment. "We'll have no fun of it +getting back to school, especially if the snow gets so deep that we +can't skate on the ice." + +"Say, this puts me in mind of a story," commenced Shadow. "Once two boys +were caught in a storm and----" + +"We haven't any time for yarns now, Shadow!" cried Dave. "It's back to +the camping place as fast as we can get there, and then off for school, +unless we want to be snowed in along the route!" + +All started across the island, which, at that point, was not over +seventy-five yards wide. They came out at a spot just above where they +had stopped for lunch. Soon all of them stood close to where lay the +remains of the campfire, now covered with the fast-falling snow. + +"Hello! What does this mean?" + +"Where is the hamper?" + +"Where is the game?" + +"What has become of the skates?" + +"Where is that overcoat I left on the tree?" + +These and several other questions were asked in rapid succession. Then +the Oak Hall students looked at each other in blank dismay. + +And not without good reason. For everything left at the camping spot +when they had continued the hunt--game, hamper, skates, an overcoat, a +sweater, and some other things of lesser importance--all had disappeared! + + + + +CHAPTER V--A TRAMP THROUGH THE SNOW + + +"What do you make of this, Dave?" + +"I don't know what to make of it, Roger--excepting that somebody has +taken our things." + +"Do you think it's a joke, or just plain stealing?" demanded Ben. + +"That remains to be found out," replied Ben. "One thing is certain, the +things didn't walk off by themselves." + +"Footprints of two persons!" exclaimed Gus, who had been scanning the +snow-covered ground in the vicinity of the trees and bushes. + +"Where do they lead to?" asked Dave, eagerly. + +"Here they are--you can follow them as easily as I can," was the reply, +and the heavy-set youth pointed out the tracks in the snow. They led all +around the trees and bushes and then in the direction of the river. Here +there were a jumble of tracks and further on the marks of skate runners. + +"Stopped to put on their skates," remarked the senator's son. + +"And they have skated off with all our things!" grumbled Buster Beggs. +"What are we going to do?" + +"Say, that puts me in mind of a story," came quickly from Shadow. "Once +two boys were out skating and----" + +"For the sake of the mummies of Egypt, let up on the story-telling, +Shadow!" burst out Phil. "Don't you realize what this loss means to us? +It's bad enough to lose the hamper and clothing, but what are we to do +in this snowstorm, with night coming on, and so far from Oak Hall +without skates?" + +"Humph! I guess we'll have to walk," grumbled the story-teller of the +school. "But that will take time, and if this storm keeps up----" + +"We'll be snowed under!" finished Chip Macklin. + +"Well, no use in staying here," came from two of the students. + +"That is just what I say," said Dave. "Those skate marks lead down the +river and that is the way we want to go. By following them we'll be +getting nearer to the Hall and at the same time closer to the fellows +who took our things." + +"We'll never catch those fellows," grumbled Ben. "They can skate five +times as fast as we can walk." + +"Never mind, we'll go after 'em anyway," replied Gus. "And if we catch +'em----" He did not finish in words but brought his right fist down hard +into his left palm, which left no doubt as to how he intended to treat +the thieves. + +"Maybe it's a trick, of some of the Rockville cadets," suggested Buster, +when the crowd were on their way down the river. + +"Say, don't you remember my saying I thought I saw somebody near the +camp, just before we went away?" burst out Ben. "You all thought I was +mistaken." + +"Well, I reckon you were not mistaken," answered Dave. "It's a great +pity we didn't investigate more before leaving." + +"No use in crying over spilt milk," said Sam. + +"Which puts me in mind of a sto----" commenced Shadow, and then suddenly +stopped talking and commenced to whistle to himself. + +"Say, boys, if anybody should ask you, you can tell him it is snowing +some," puffed Buster, who was struggling to keep up with those in front. +"If it wasn't that we were on the river, it would be easy to lose our +way." + +"That's true," replied Dave. "The snow seems to be coming down heavier +every minute." + +"Yes, and the wind is coming up," added Roger. "We'll have a hard time +of it reaching the Hall. We'll never do it by supper-time." + +"Then where are we going to get something to eat?" demanded Buster. "I'm +not going without my supper just because I can't get back." + +"Perhaps we can get something at some farmhouse," suggested Phil. + +"I've got an idea!" cried Dave. "Why can't we get some farmer to hook up +a carriage or a sleigh and take us to the Hall that way?" + +"Hurrah, just the cheese!" cried Ben, who did not relish walking such a +distance. "The thing is, though, to find the farmer," he continued +soberly. + +"Keep your eyes open for lights," suggested Dave, and this was done. + +A quarter of a mile more was covered, the students hugging the north +shore of the stream, as that afforded the most shelter from the rising +wind. Then Roger gave a cry. + +"I think I saw a light through the snow! Just look that way, fellows, +and see if I am right." + +All gazed in the direction indicated, and presently three of the boys +made out a glimmer, as if it came from a lantern being swung to and fro. +Then the light disappeared. + +"Perhaps it's some farmer going out to care for his cattle," said Dave. +"Let us walk over and see," and this was done. + +Dave was correct in his surmise, and soon the boys approached a big +cow-shed, through a window of which they saw the faint rays of a +lantern. Just as they did this they heard a voice cry out in wonder. + +"What be you fellers a-doin' in my cow-shed?" + +"Oh, we just came in to rest out of the storm," was the answer, in a +voice that sounded strangely familiar to Dave. "We are not going to hurt +your shed any, or the cattle either." + +"It's Mallory, of Rockville!" whispered Dave to his fellow students, +naming the cadet who was the star hockey player of the military academy +team. + +"And Bazen and Holt are with him," added Phil, gazing through a +partly-open doorway, and naming two other Rockville cadets. + +"Hello, who's out there?" cried the owner of the cow-shed, and, lantern +in hand, he turned to survey the newcomers. + +"Why, it's Mr. Opper!" cried Sam. "Don't you remember me? I called last +summer, to see some of your young lady boarders." + +"Oh, yes, I remember you," replied Homer Opper. "You hired my dappled +mare for a ride." + +"That's it, Mr. Opper. Say, that mare could go." + +"Go? Ain't no hossflesh in these parts kin beat her," cried the farmer +proudly. "She won the prize at the last county fair, she did! But wot +brung ye here, sech a night as this?" added Homer Opper curiously. + +"Hello, Porter, old man!" cried Mallory, rising from a box on which he +had been seated and shaking hands. "Caught in the storm, too, eh?" + +"Yes," answered Dave. He gazed curiously at the Rockville cadet and his +companions. "Been up the river?" + +"Not any further than this." + +"Hunting?" + +"No, skating. We would be going back, only Holt broke one of his skates +and that delayed us. Been out hunting, eh? Any luck?" + +"Some--good and bad. We shot some rabbits, squirrels, and partridges, and +we likewise had our hamper, our skates, an overcoat, and some other +things stolen." + +"Stolen!" cried Homer Opper. "By gum, thet's tough luck! Who tuk the +things?" + +"That is what we want to find out," and as Dave spoke he looked sharply +at Mallory and the other Rockville cadets. + +"Not guilty," came promptly from Bazen. "Honest Injun, Porter, if you +think we touched your things, you are on the wrong track; isn't that so, +fellows?" + +"It is," came promptly from Mallory and Holt. Then suddenly the star +hockey player of Rockville Academy let out a long, low whistle of +surprise. + +"You know something?" demanded Dave. + +"Maybe I do," was Mallory's slow answer. "Yes, I am sure I do," he +added. "You can put the puzzle together yourself if you wish, +Porter--because, you see, I hate to accuse anybody." + +"What do you know?" + +"I know this: Less than an hour ago we met two fellows on the river, one +with a hamper and the other with a bundle that looked as if it was done +up in an overcoat turned inside out. We came on the fellows rather +suddenly, at a turn where there were some bushes." + +"Our stuff, as sure as you're a foot high!" cried Phil. + +"Who were the fellows, do you know?" demanded the senator's son. + +At this question Mallory looked at Holt and Bazen. + +"I wasn't exactly sure, but----" He hesitated to go on. + +"I was sure enough," chimed in Holt. "They were those chaps who came to +our school from Oak Hall and then ran away--Jasniff and Merwell. How +about it, Tom?" + +"I think they were Jasniff and Merwell," answered Tom Bazen. "To be +sure, as soon as they saw us, they skated away as fast as they could, +and kept their faces hidden. But if they weren't Jasniff and Merwell +they were pretty good doubles." + +"Jasniff and Merwell," murmured Dave, and his heart sank a little. Here +was more underhanded work of his old enemies. + +The farmer and the Rockville cadets were anxious to hear the particulars +of the happening, and the Oak Hall lads told of what had occurred. + +"I know those chaps," said Homer Opper. "They stayed here one night last +summer. But they cut up so the boarders didn't like it, so my wife told +'em she didn't have no room for 'em, an' they left. They ought to be +locked up." + +"They will be locked up, if we can lay hands on them," replied Phil. + +"They must have followed us to Squirrel Island, and spied on us," said +Shadow. "Ben, you were right about seeing somebody. It must have been +either Merwell or Jasniff." + +"Have you any idea where they went?" asked the shipowner's son. + +"No, they skated away behind an island and that's the last we saw of +them," answered Mallory. + +"Yes, and I reckon it's the last we'll hear of our things," returned +Buster, mournfully. "But come on, let us see about getting back," he +continued. "It's 'most time for supper now." + +"Mr. Opper, can you take us back to Oak Hall?" asked Dave. "We'll pay +you for your trouble." + +The farmer looked at the students and rubbed his chin reflectively. Then +he gazed out at the storm and the snow-covered ground. + +"Might hook up my big sleigh and do it," he said. "But it would be quite +a job." + +"What would it be worth?" asked Ben. + +"Oh, I dunno--three or four dollars, at least. It's a tough night to be +out in--an' I'd have to drive back, or put up at the town all night." + +"Supposing we gave you fifty cents apiece," suggested Roger. + +"And we'll go along--as far as Rockville, at the same price--if you'll +have us," added Mallory, quickly. + +"Why, yes, Mallory, and welcome," answered Dave cordially. "That is, if +the turnout will hold us all." + +"Sure it will," answered Homer Opper. "An' if ye all go an' pay fifty +cents each,"--he counted them mentally as he spoke--"I'll hook up my four +hosses an' git ye there in jig time." + +"Then it's a go," answered Dave, after his chums and the Rockville +cadets had nodded their approval. + +"And do hurry," called out Buster, as the farmer moved away to prepare +for the journey. "We don't want to miss our suppers." + +"Ye ain't goin' to miss nuthin'," called the farmer. + +Inside of fifteen minutes he came around to the cow-shed with a big, low +sleigh, to which were attached four fine-looking horses. The sleigh +contained two lanterns and a quantity of wraps and robes. + +"Don't want ye to catch cold, when we're a-drivin' fast," chuckled Homer +Opper. "Now pile right in, an' we'll be movin'." + +The boys needed no second invitation, and soon all were aboard--Dave and +Roger on the front seat with the driver and the others behind, including +the Rockville cadets. Then came a crack of the whip, and away through +the swirling snow moved the big sleigh, bound for the two schools. + + + + +CHAPTER VI--GOOD-BY TO OAK HALL + + +"Where in the world have you boys been? Why didn't you come back in time +for supper? Don't you know it is against the rules to stay away like +this?" + +Thus it was that Job Haskers, the second assistant teacher of Oak Hall, +greeted Dave and his chums as they came in, after leaving the big sleigh +and settling with Homer Opper. + +"We are sorry that we couldn't get here before, Mr. Haskers," answered +Dave. "But something unusual happened and we were delayed." + +"I'll not accept any excuses!" snapped the teacher, who had not +forgotten how the boys had hurried away without listening to his call +from the window. "I think I'll send you to bed supperless. It is no more +than you deserve." + +"Supperless!" gasped Buster, in dismay. "Oh, Mr. Haskers, we don't +deserve such treatment, really we don't!" + +"We have been robbed--that is what delayed us," declared Phil. "I guess +we had better report to Doctor Clay, or Mr. Dale," he went on, +significantly. + +"You can report to me," answered Job Haskers, with increased severity. +"There is no need to bother the doctor, and Mr. Dale has gone away for +over Sunday." + +"Well, boys, back again!" cried a cheery voice from an upper landing, +and then Doctor Clay came down, wearing his gown and slippers. "A wild +storm to be out in. I am glad you got back safely." + +"They are late--and you said you gave them no permission to be out after +hours," said Job Haskers, tartly. + +"Hum! Did I?" mused the kindly head of the school. "Well, when it storms +like this it, of course, makes some difference." + +"We would have been back in time only we were robbed of our skates and +some other things," answered Dave. "We had to walk a long distance +through the storm, and we'd not be here yet if we hadn't managed to hire +a farmer to bring us in his sleigh." + +"Robbed!" echoed Doctor Clay, catching at the word. "How was that?" And +he listened with keen interest to what the boys had to tell. Even Job +Haskers became curious, and said no more about penalizing them for being +late. + +"And you are sure the fellows were Merwell and Jasniff?" asked the +assistant teacher. + +"All I know on that point is what Mallory and his chums had to say," +answered Dave. + +"I think it would be like that pair to follow you up," said Doctor Clay, +with a grave shake of his head. "They are two very bad boys,--worse, +Porter, than you can imagine," and he looked knowingly at Job Haskers as +he spoke. "Now go in to supper, and after that, you, Porter, Morr, and +Lawrence, may come to my study and talk the matter over further." + +Wondering what else had happened to upset the head of the school, Dave +followed his chums to the dining-hall. Here a late supper awaited the +crowd, to which, it is perhaps needless to state, all did full justice. + +"Do you think we can track Jasniff and Merwell?" asked the senator's +son, during the course of the repast. + +"I don't," answered Dave frankly. "For they will do their best to keep +out of our way." + +A little later found Dave, Phil, and Roger in the doctor's private +study, a sort of library connected with his regular office. The head of +Oak Hall was reading a German historical work, but laid the volume down +as they filed in. + +"Sit down, boys," said Doctor Clay, pleasantly, and when they were +seated, he added: "Now kindly tell me all you know about Merwell and +Jasniff." + +"Do you want to know everything, Doctor?" asked Dave, in some surprise. + +"Yes,--and later on, I'll tell you why." + +"All right," answered the youth from Crumville, and he told of the many +things that had happened, both at the school and at home--not forgetting +about the auto ride in which Laura and Jessie were supposed to have +participated. + +"It all fits in!" cried Doctor Clay, drawing a deep sigh. He tapped the +table with the tips of his fingers. "I wonder where it will end?" he +mused, half to himself. + +"You said that Merwell and Jasniff were worse than we imagined," +suggested Dave, to draw the doctor out. + +"So I did, Porter. I will tell you boys something, but please do not let +it go any further. Since Jasniff and Merwell became pupils at Rockville +Military Academy and since they ran away from that institution they have +been doing everything they could think of to annoy me. They have sent +farmers here with produce that I never ordered, and have had publishers +send me schoolbooks that I did not want. Worse than that, they have +circulated reports to my scholars' parents that this school was running +down, that it was in debt, and that some pupils were getting sick +because the sewerage system was out of order. Some of the parents have +written to me, and two were on the point of taking their boys away, +thinking the reports were true. Fortunately I was able to prove the +reports false, and the boys remained here. But I do not know how far +these slanders are being circulated and what the effect will be in the +future." + +"And you are sure they come from Merwell and Jasniff?" questioned Phil. + +"I am sure at least one letter was written by Merwell, and one farmer +who brought a load of cabbages here said they were ordered by two young +men who looked like Merwell and Jasniff." + +"Oh, nobody else would do it!" cried Roger. "Merwell and Jasniff are +guilty, not the least doubt of it! The question is: How can we catch +them?" + +"Yes, that is the question," said Doctor Clay. "I have notified the +local authorities to be on the watch for them, and now I think I shall +hire a private detective." + +"Do it, Doctor," said Dave eagerly. "I will pay half the expense. I know +that my father will approve of such a course." And so the matter rested. +The private detective came to Oak Hall two days later, and after +interviewing the doctor and the boys, said he would do his best to run +down Link Merwell and Nick Jasniff. + +It snowed hard for a day and a night and when it cleared off the boys +had considerable fun snowballing each other and in coasting down a long +hill leading to the river. Pop Swingly, the janitor, came in for his +full share of the snow-balling and so did Jackson Lemond, usually called +Horsehair, the Hall carryall driver. Horsehair was caught coming from +the barn, and half a dozen snowballs hit him at the same time. + +"Hi, you, stop!" he spluttered, as one snowball took him in the chin and +another in the ear. "Want to smother me? Let up, I say!" And he tried to +run away. + +"These are early Christmas presents, Horsehair!" sang out Ben, merrily, +and let the driver have another, this time in the cap. + +"And something to remember us by, when we are gone," added Gus, hitting +him in the arm. Then the driver escaped. He felt sore, and vowed he +would square up. + +"Maybe he'll report us," said Ben, after the excitement was over. + +"Not he," declared Gus. "He's not that kind. But he'll lay for us,--just +you wait and see." And Gus was right. About half an hour later he and +Ben were told that somebody wanted to see them at the boathouse. They +started for the building, walking past the gymnasium, and as they did +so, down on their heads came a perfect avalanche of snow, sent from the +sloping roof above. When they clawed their way out of the mass and +looked up they saw Horsehair standing on the roof, snow-shovel in hand, +grinning at them. + +"Thought I'd give ye some more snow fer snowballs," he chuckled. "Here +ye are!" And down came another avalanche, sending the boys flat a second +time. When they scrambled up they ran off with all speed, the merry +laughter of the carryall driver ringing in their ears. + +At last came the final session of the school, with the usual exercises, +in which Dave and his chums participated. Nearly all of the boys were +going home for the holidays, including Dave, Phil, Roger, and Ben. Dave +and Ben were, of course, going direct to Crumville, and it was arranged +that Phil and the senator's son should come there later, to visit our +hero and his family and the Wadsworths. Nat Poole was also going home, +and would be on the same train with Dave and Ben. + +"I wish he wasn't going with us," said Ben. "I'm getting so I can't bear +Nat at all." + +"Well, he isn't quite as bad as he was when he chummed with Merwell and +Jasniff," answered our hero. "I think their badness rather scared Nat. +He is mean and all that, but he isn't a criminal." + +"Well, I think some meanness is a crime," retorted Ben. + +The boys had purchased gifts for Doctor Clay, Mr. Dale, and some of the +others, and even Job Haskers had been remembered. Some of the students +had wanted to ignore the tyrannical teacher, but Dave and his chums had +voted down this proposition. + +"Let us treat them all alike," said Dave. "Perhaps Mr. Haskers thinks he +is doing right." + +"Yes, and if we leave him out in the cold he may be more hard-hearted +than ever," added Gus, with a certain amount of worldly wisdom. + +Dave carried a suit-case and also a big bundle, the latter filled with +Christmas presents for the folks at home. Ben was similarly loaded down, +and so were the others. + +"Good-by, everybody!" cried our hero, as he entered the carryall sleigh. +"Take good care of the school until we come back!" + +"Good-by!" was the answer. "Don't eat too much turkey while you are +gone!" And then, as the sleigh rolled away from the school grounds, the +lads to leave commenced to sing the favorite school song, sung to the +tune of "Auld Lang Syne": + + "Oak Hall we never shall forget, + No matter where we roam; + It is the very best of schools, + To us it's just like home! + Then give three cheers, and let them ring + Throughout this world so wide, + To let the people know that we + Elect to here abide!" + +"That's the stuff!" cried Roger, and then commenced to toot loudly on a +tin horn he carried, and many others made a din. + +At the depot the boys had to wait a little while. But presently the +train came along and they got aboard. Dave and Ben found a seat near the +middle of the car and Nat Poole sat close by them. He acted as if he +wanted to talk, but the others gave him little encouragement. + +"Nat has something on his mind, I'll wager a cookie," whispered Ben to +Dave. + +"Well, if he has, he need not bother us with it," was Dave's reply. "I +am done with him--I told him that some time ago." + +The train rolled on and when near the Junction, where the boys had to +change to the main line, a couple in front of Ben and Dave got up, +leaving the seat vacant. At once Nat Poole took the seat, at first, +however, turning it over, so that he might face the other Oak Hall +students. + +"I want to talk to you, Dave Porter," he said, in a low and somewhat +ugly voice. "I want you to give an account of yourself." + +"Give an account of myself?" queried Dave, in some astonishment, for he +had not expected such an opening from Nat. "What do you mean?" + +"You know well enough what I mean," cried the other boy, and now it was +plainly to be seen that his anger was rising. "You can blacken your own +character all you please but I won't have you blackening mine! If you +don't confess to what you've done, and straighten matters out, as soon +as we get to Crumville, I am going to ask my father to have you +arrested!" + + + + +CHAPTER VII--NAT POOLE'S REVELATION + + +Both Dave and Ben stared in astonishment at the son of the money-lender +of Crumville. Nat was highly indignant, but the reason for this was a +complete mystery to the other lads. + +"Blacken your character?" repeated Dave. "Nat, what are you talking +about?" + +"You know well enough." + +"I do not." + +"And I say you do!" blustered the bully. "You can't crawl out of it. +I've followed the thing up and I've got the evidence against you, and +against Roger Morr, too. I was going to speak to Doctor Clay about it, +but I know he'd side with you and smooth it over--he always does. But if +I tell my father, you'll find you have a different man to deal with!" + +Nat spoke in a high-pitched voice that drew the attention of half a +dozen men and women in the car. Ben was greatly annoyed. + +"Say, Nat, don't make a public exhibition of yourself," he said, in a +low tone. "If you've got anything against Dave, why don't you wait until +we are alone?" + +"I don't have to wait," answered Nat, as loudly as ever. "I am going to +settle this thing right now." + +Fortunately the train rolled up to the Junction depot at this moment and +everybody, including the boys, left the car. Several gazed curiously at +Dave and Nat, and, seeing this, Ben led the others to the end of the +platform. Here there was a freight room, just then deserted. + +"Come on in here, and then, Nat, you can spout all you please," said +Ben. + +"You ain't going to catch me in a corner!" cried the bully, in some +alarm. + +"It isn't that, Nat. I don't want you to make a fool of yourself in +front of the whole crowd. See how everybody is staring at you." + +"Humph! Let them stare," muttered the bully; yet he followed Ben and +Dave into the freight room, and Ben stood at the doorway, so that no +outsiders might come in. One boy tried to get in, thinking possibly to +see a fight, but Ben told him to "fly on, son," and the lad promptly +disappeared. + +"Now then, Nat, tell me what you are driving at," said Dave, as calmly +as he could, for he saw that the money-lender's son was growing more +enraged every minute. + +"I don't have to tell you, Dave Porter; you know all about it." + +"I tell you I don't--I haven't the least idea what you are driving at." + +"Maybe you'll deny that you were at Leesburgh last week." + +"Leesburgh?" + +"Yes, Leesburgh, at Sampson's Hotel, and at the Arcade moving-picture +and vaudeville show," and as he uttered the words Nat fairly glared into +the face of our hero. + +"I haven't been near Leesburgh for several months--not since a crowd of +us went there to a football game." + +"Humph! You expect me to believe that?" + +"Believe it or not, it is true." + +"You can't pull the wool over my eyes, Dave Porter! I know you were at +Leesburgh last week Wednesday, you and Roger Morr. And I know you went +to Sampson's Hotel and registered in my name and then cut up like a +rowdy there, in the pool-room, and got thrown out, and I know you and +Roger Morr went to the Arcade and made a fuss there, and got thrown out +again, but not until you had given my name and the name of Gus Plum. Gus +may forgive you for it, and think it only a joke. But I'll not do it, I +can tell you that! You have got to write a letter to the owner of that +hotel and to the theater manager and explain things, and you and Roger +Morr have got to beg my pardon. And if you don't, as I said before, I'll +tell my father and get him to have you arrested." And now Nat was so +excited he moved from one foot to the other and shook his fist in the +air. + +To the bully's surprise Dave did not get excited. On the contrary, our +hero's face showed something that was akin to a faint smile. Ben saw it +and wondered at it. + +"Say, you needn't laugh at me!" howled Nat, noting the look. "Before I +get through with you, you'll find it no laughing matter." + +"I am not laughing at you, Nat." + +"Well, do you admit that what I've said is true?" + +"No; on the contrary, I say it is false, every word of it. Did you say +this happened last Wednesday?" + +"I did." + +"Both Roger Morr and I were at the school all day Wednesday. During the +day I attended all my classes, and after school I went to my room, along +with Polly Vane, Luke Watson, and Sam Day, and the three of us wrote on +the essays we had to hand in Thursday. After supper we went down to the +gym for about half an hour, and then went back to our dormitory. And, +come to think of it, you saw us there," added Dave suddenly. + +"I saw you?" + +"You certainly did. You came to the door and asked Luke Watson for a +Latin book; don't you remember? Luke got it out of his bureau. We were +all at the big table. Sam Day flipped a button at you and it hit you in +the chin." + +At these unexpected words the face of the money-lender's son fell. + +"Was that--er--was that Wednesday?" he faltered. + +"It certainly was, for we had to hand the essays in Thursday and we were +all working like beavers on them." + +"Nat, what Dave says is absolutely true--I know he wasn't near Leesburgh +last week, for I was with him every day and every evening," said Ben. + +"But I got the word from some fellows in Leesburgh. They followed you +from the hotel to the show and talked to you afterwards, and they said +you told them your name was Porter, and the other chap said his name was +Morr. They said you gave the names of Poole and Plum just to keep your +real identity hidden." + +"Well, I am not guilty, Nat; I give you my word of honor on it." + +"But--but--if you aren't guilty how is it those fellows got your name and +that of Morr?" asked the money-lender's son, not knowing what else to +say. + +"I think I can explain it, Nat. The same fellows who did that are +annoying me in other ways. But I'll not explain unless you will give me +your word of honor to keep it a secret, at least for the present." + +"A secret, why?" + +"Because I don't want the thing talked about in public. The more you +talk about such things the worse off you are. Let me tell you that I +have suffered more than you have, and other folks have suffered too." + +"Do you mean to say that some other fellows did this and gave my name +and Plum's first and yours and Morr's afterwards?" asked Nat, curiously. + +"Exactly." + +"Why?" + +"For a twofold reason; first to blacken your character and that of Plum, +and, secondly, to cause trouble between all of us." + +"What fellows would be mean enough to do that?" + +"Two fellows who used to be your friends, but who have had to run away, +to keep from being arrested." + +"Say, you don't mean Link Merwell and Nick Jasniff!" burst out the +money-lender's son. + +"Those are the chaps I do mean, Nat." + +"But I thought they had left these parts. They were in Crumville, I +know," and now the bully looked knowingly at our hero. + +"You have heard the reports from home then?" asked Dave, and he felt his +face burn. + +"Sure." + +"Nat, those reports are all false--as false as this report of your doings +at Leesburgh. They are gotten up by Jasniff and Merwell solely to injure +my friends and my family and me. My sister and Jessie Wadsworth would +refuse to even recognize those fellows, much less go auto-riding with +them. Let me tell you something." And in as few words as possible our +hero related how things had been sent to him and his friends without +being ordered by them, and of the other trouble Jasniff and Merwell were +causing. The money-lender's son was incredulous at first, but gradually +his face relaxed. + +"And is all that really so?" he asked, at last. + +"Every word is absolutely true," answered Dave. + +"Then Nick and Link ought to be in jail!" burst out Nat. "It's an +outrage to let them do such things. Why don't you have 'em locked +up--that is what I'd do!" + +"We've got to catch them first." + +"Do you mean to say you are trying to do that?" + +"We are." + +"Well, you catch 'em, and if you want me to appear against 'em, I'll do +it--and I'll catch 'em myself if I can." + +There was a pause, and Nat started for the doorway of the freight room. +But Ben still barred the way. + +"Nat, don't you think you were rather hasty in accusing Dave?" he asked, +bluntly. + +"Well--er--maybe I was," answered the money-lender's son, growing a bit +red. + +"Oh, let it pass," said Dave. "I might have been worked up myself, if I +had been in Nat's place." + +"Here comes the train--we don't want to miss it," cried the +money-lender's son, and he showed that he was glad to close the +interview. "Remember, if you catch those fellows, I'll testify against +'em!" he called over his shoulder as he pushed through the doorway. + +"The same old Nat, never willing to acknowledge himself in the wrong," +was Ben's comment, as he and Dave ran for the car steps. The other boy +had lost himself in the waiting crowd and got into another car, and they +did not see him again until Crumville was reached, and even then he did +not speak to them. + +The snow was coming down lightly when Dave and Ben alighted, baggage and +bundles in hand, for they had not risked checking anything in such a +crowd. Ben's father was on hand to greet him, and close at hand stood +the Wadsworth family sleigh, with Laura and Jessie on the rear seat. The +driver came to take the suit-case and Dave's bundle, grinning a welcome +as he did so. + +"There's Dave!" cried Jessie, as soon as he appeared. "Isn't he growing +tall!" she added. + +"Yes," answered the sister. "Dave!" she called. + +"Here we are again!" he cried with a bright smile, and shook hands. "I +brought you a snowstorm for a change." + +"I like snow for Christmas," answered Jessie. She was blushing, for Dave +had given her hand an extra tight squeeze. + +"How are the folks?" + +"All very well," answered Laura. "What have you in that big bundle?" + +"Oh, that's a secret, sis," he returned. + +"Christmas presents!" cried the sister. "Jessie, let us open the bundle +right away." And she made a playful reach for it. + +"Not to-day--that belongs to Santa Claus!" cried the brother, holding the +bundle out of reach. "My, but this town looks good to me!" he added, as +he looked around and waved his hand to Mr. Basswood. Then Ben took a +moment to run up and greet the girls. + +"You must come over, Ben," said Laura. + +"Why, yes, by all means," added Jessie, and Ben said he would. Then he +rejoined his father, and Dave got into the sleigh, being careful to keep +his big bundle on his lap, where the girls could not "poke a hole into +it to peek," as he put it. There was a flourish of the whip, and the +elegant turnout, with its well-matched black horses, started in the +direction of the Wadsworth mansion. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII--A MERRY CHRISTMAS + + +As my old readers know, the Wadsworth family and the Porters all lived +together, for when Dave found his folks and brought them to Crumville, +the rich jewelry manufacturer and his wife could not bear to think of +separating from the boy who had saved their daughter from being burned +to death. They loved Dave almost as a son, and it was their proposal +that the Porters make the big mansion their home. As Dave's father was a +widower and his brother Dunston was a bachelor, they readily agreed to +this, provided they were allowed to share the expenses. With the two +families was old Caspar Potts, who spent most of his time in the +library, cataloguing the books, keeping track of the magazines, and +writing a volume on South American history. + +With a merry jingling of the bells, the family sleigh drove into the +spacious grounds. As it rounded the driveway and came to a halt at the +front piazza the door opened and Dave's father came out, followed by +Dunston Porter. + +"Hello, Dad!" cried the son, joyously, and made a flying leap from the +sleigh. "How are you?" And then he shook hands with his parent and with +his uncle--that same uncle whom he so strongly resembled,--a resemblance +that had been the means of bringing the pair together. + +"Dave, my son!" said Mr. Porter, as he smiled a welcome. + +"Getting bigger every day, Davy!" was Uncle Dunston's comment. "Before +you know it, you'll be taller than I am!" And he gave his nephew a +hand-clasp that made Dave wince. + +"Oh, he's getting awfully tall, I said so as soon as I saw him," +remarked Jessie, as she, too, alighted, followed by Laura. By this time +Dave was in the hallway, giving Mrs. Wadsworth a big hug and a kiss. +When he had first known her, Dave had been a little afraid of Mrs. +Wadsworth, she was such a lady, but now this was past and he treated her +as she loved to be treated, just as if he were her son. + +"Aren't you glad I've returned to torment you?" he said, as he gave her +another squeeze. + +"Very glad, Dave, very glad indeed!" she answered, beaming on him. "I +don't mind the way you torment me in the least," and then she hurried +off, to make sure that the dinner ordered in honor of Dave's home-coming +should be properly served. + +In the library doorway stood Caspar Potts, his hair now as white as +snow. He came forward and laid two trembling white hands in those of +Dave. + +"Dave, my boy Dave!" he murmured, and his watery eyes fairly glistened. + +"Yes, Professor, your boy, always your boy!" answered Dave, readily, for +he loved the old instructor from the bottom of his heart. "And how is +the history getting on?" + +"Fairly well, Dave. I have nine chapters finished." + +"Good! Some day, when it is finished, I'll find a publisher for you; and +then you'll be famous." + +"I don't know about that, Dave. But I like to write on the book--and the +research work is very pleasant, especially in such pleasant +surroundings," murmured the old gentleman. + +Mr. Wadsworth was away at his office, but presently he came back, and +greeted Dave warmly, and asked about the school and his chums. Then, as +the girls went off to get ready for dinner, the men folks and Dave went +into the library. + +"Have you heard anything more of those two young rascals, Merwell and +Jasniff?" questioned Mr. Porter. + +"Yes, but not in the way I'd like," answered Dave, and told of what Nat +Poole had had to say and of what had occurred at Squirrel Island. "Have +you heard anything here?" he added. + +"Did the girls tell you anything?" asked his father. + +"Not a word--they didn't have a chance, for we didn't want to talk before +Peter." Peter was the driver of the sleigh. + +"I see." Mr. Porter mused for a moment and looked at Mr. Wadsworth. + +"Those good-for-nothing boys have done a number of mean things," said +the jewelry manufacturer. "They have circulated many reports, about you +and your family, and about me and my family. They must be very bitter, +to act in such a fashion. If I could catch them, I'd like to wring their +necks!" And Oliver Wadsworth showed his excitement by pacing up and down +the library. + +"Did you get your affairs with the department stores fixed up?" + +"Yes, but not without considerable trouble." + +"Have Jasniff and Merwell shown themselves in Crumville lately?" + +"Yes, three days ago they followed your sister Laura and Jessie to a +church fair the girls attended. They acted in such a rude fashion that +both of the girls ran all the way home. All of us went out to look for +them, but we didn't find them." + +"Oh, if I had only been at that fair!" murmured Dave. + +"What could you have done against two of them?" asked his uncle. + +"I don't know, but I would have made it warm for them--and maybe handed +them over to the police." + +"I have cautioned the girls to be on their guard," said David Porter. +"And you must be on your guard, Dave. It is not wise to take chances +with such fellows as Jasniff and Merwell." + +"I'll keep my eyes open for them," answered the son. + +Dave ran up to his room, and put his big bundle away in a corner of the +clothing closet. Then he dressed for dinner. As he came out he met +Jessie, who stood on the landing with a white carnation in her hand. + +"It's for your buttonhole," she said. "It's the largest in the +conservatory." And she adjusted it skillfully. He watched her in +silence, and when she had finished he caught her by both hands. + +"Jessie, I'm so glad to be back--so glad to be with you again!" he half +whispered. + +"Are you really, Dave?" she returned, and her eyes were shining like +stars. + +"You know I am; don't you?" he pleaded. + +"Yes," she answered, in a low voice. And then, as Laura appeared, she +added hastily, but tenderly, "I'm glad, too!" + +It was a large and happy gathering around the dining-room table, with +Mr. Wadsworth at the head, and Jessie on one side of Dave and Laura on +the other. Professor Potts asked the blessing, and then followed an hour +of good cheer. In honor of Dave's home-coming the meal was an elaborate +one, and everybody enjoyed it thoroughly. As nobody wished to put a +damper on the occasion, nothing was said about their enemies. Dave told +some funny stories about Oak Hall happenings, and had the girls +shrieking with laughter, and Dunston Porter related a tale or two about +his travels, for he still loved to roam as of yore. + +The next day--the day before Christmas--it snowed heavily. But the young +folks did not mind this and went out several times, to do the last of +their shopping. Late in the afternoon, Peter brought in some holly +wreaths and a little Christmas tree. The wreaths were placed in the +windows, each with a big bow of red ribbon attached, and the tree was +decorated with candies and candles and placed on the table in the +living-room. + +All the young folks had surprises for their parents and for Professor +Potts. There was a set of South American maps for the old professor, a +new rifle for Dunston Porter, a set of cyclopedias for Mr. Wadsworth, a +cane for Dave's father, and a beautiful chocolate urn for the lady of +the house. + +"Merry Christmas!" was the cry that went the rounds the next morning, +and then such a handshaking and such a gift-giving and receiving! Dave +had a new pocketbook for Laura, with her monogram in silver, and a +cardcase for Mrs. Wadsworth. For Jessie he had a string of pearls, and +numerous gifts for the others in the mansion. From Laura he received a +fine book on hunting and camping out, something he had long desired, +while Mrs. Wadsworth gave him some silk handkerchiefs. From his father +came a new suit-case, one with a traveler's outfit included, and from +his uncle he received some pictures, to hang in his den. Mr. Wadsworth +gave him a beautiful stickpin, one he said had been made at his own +works. + +But the gift Dave prized most of all was a little locket that Jessie +gave him for his watchchain. It was of gold, set with tiny diamonds, and +his monogram was on the back. The locket opened and had a place in it +for two pictures. + +"You must put Laura's picture in there," said Jessie, "Laura's and your +father's." + +"No, I have them already--in my watch case," he answered, and then, as +nobody was near, he went on in a whisper, "I want your picture in this, +Jessie." + +"Oh!" she murmured. + +"Your picture on one side, and a lock of your hair on the other. Without +those I won't consider the gift complete." + +"Oh, Dave, don't be silly!" + +"I'm not silly--I mean it, Jessie. You'll give them to me, won't you, +before I go back to Oak Hall?" + +"Maybe. I'll see how you behave!" was the answer, and then just as Dave +started to catch her by the arm, she ran away to join Laura. But she +threw him a smile from over her shoulder that meant a great deal to him. + +In the afternoon, Ben came over, with his young lady cousin, and all the +young folks went sleigh-riding. The evening was spent at the Wadsworth +mansion in playing games and in singing favorite songs. Altogether it +was a Christmas to be long remembered. + +During the fall Mr. Wadsworth had been busy, building an addition to his +jewelry works, and on the day after Christmas Dave went over to the +place with his uncle, to look around. The addition covered a plot nearly +a hundred feet square and was two stories high. + +"It will give us a new office and several new departments," said the +rich manufacturer, as he showed them around. "When everything is +finished I shall have one of the most up-to-date jewelry works in this +part of the country." + +"Are you going to move the old office furniture into this new place?" +asked Dave, noticing some old chairs and desks. + +"For the present we'll have to. The new furniture won't be here until +early in January." + +"What about your safes?" asked Dave. He remembered the big but +old-fashioned safes that had adorned the old office. + +"We are to have new ones in about sixty days. I wanted them at once, but +the safe company was too busy to rush the order. I wish now that I had +those safes," went on the manufacturer, in a lower voice, so that even +the clerks near by might not hear. + +"Why, anything unusual?" questioned Dunston Porter, curiously. + +"I took that order to reset the Carwith diamonds, that's all." + +"Oh, then you got it, didn't you?" went on Dave's uncle. "Were they +willing to pay the price?" + +"I told them they would have to or I wouldn't touch the job." + +"What do you suppose the diamonds are worth?" + +"They were bought for sixty thousand dollars. At the present value of +such gems, I should say at least seventy-five thousand dollars." + +"Phew! And the settings are to cost eight thousand dollars. That makes a +pretty valuable lot of jewelry, I'm thinking," was Dunston Porter's +comment. + +"You are right, and that is why I wish I had those new safes," added +Oliver Wadsworth. + +"Can't you keep the diamonds in some safe deposit vault?" + +"There is no very good safe deposit place in Crumville. Besides, I must +have the gems here, if my workmen are to set them properly. Of course, +I'll keep them in the old safes when they are not in the workshop." + +"I should think you'd want a watchman around with such diamonds in the +place," remarked Dave. + +"I have a watchman--old Tony Wells, who is as honest as they make 'em. +But, Dave, I don't want you to mention the diamonds to anybody. The fact +that I have this order is being kept a secret," went on Mr. Wadsworth, +anxiously. + +"I'll not say a word to anybody," answered our hero. + +"Don't do it--for I am anxious enough about the jewels as it is. I shall +be glad when the order is finished and the gems are out of my keeping. I +don't want any outsider to know I have them." + + + + +CHAPTER IX--NAT POOLE GETS CAUGHT + + +In the middle of the week came Phil and Roger, in the midst of another +snowstorm that was so heavy it threatened to stall the train in which +they arrived. Dave went to the station to meet them. + +"Say, what do you think?" burst out Phil, while shaking hands. + +"We saw Jasniff and Merwell!" finished the senator's son. + +"You did!" ejaculated Dave. "Where?" + +"On our train. We walked through the cars at Melton, to see if we knew +anybody aboard, and there were the pair in the smoker, smoking +cigarettes, as big as life." + +"Did you speak to them?" + +"Didn't get the chance. The car was crowded, and before we could get to +Jasniff and Merwell they saw us, ran down the aisle the other way, and +got off." + +"Is that so? Evidently they must know we are on their track," said Dave, +shaking his head gravely. + +"I wish we could have collared 'em," went on the shipowner's son. "I'd +like to punch their heads." + +"Don't do it, Phil. If you ever catch them, call an officer and have +them locked up. A thrashing is wasted on such rascals." + +"Do you know some more about them?" questioned Roger, quickly. + +"I do." And then Dave related what Nat Poole had had to say, and also +told about how Laura and Jessie had been scared when attending the +church fair. + +"You are right, they ought to be locked up," was Roger's comment. + +"By the way, did you hear the news from Oak Hall?" went on Phil, as they +drove off towards the Wadsworth mansion. + +"What news?" + +"Somehow or other, the storm lifted off two of the skylights from the +roof of the main building and the snow got in the garret and there the +heat from the chimney must have melted it, for it ran down--the water +did--through the floor and loosened the plaster in several of the +dormitories, including ours. I understand all of the plaster has got to +come down." + +"What a muss!" + +"Yes, and it is going to take several weeks to fix it up--they couldn't +get any masons right away." + +"Then where will we sleep when we go back?" + +"I don't know. I understand from Shadow that the doctor was thinking of +keeping the school closed until about the first of February." + +"Say, that will give us quite a holiday!" exclaimed Dave. + +"For which all of us will be profoundly sorry," responded Phil, making a +sober face and winking one eye. + +The girls greeted the newcomers with sincere pleasure. + +"What a pity Belle Endicott isn't here," sighed Laura. + +"So it is," answered Jessie. "We'll have to do what we can to make up +for her absence." + +Two days later it cleared off, and the young folks enjoyed a long +sleigh-ride. Then they went skating, and on New Year's Eve attended a +party given at Ben Basswood's house. Besides our friends, Ben had +invited Sam Day and Buster Beggs, and also a number of girls; and all +enjoyed themselves hugely until after midnight. When the clock struck +twelve, the boys and girls went outside and tooted horns and rang a big +dinner-bell, and wished each other and everybody else "A Happy New +Year!" + +The celebration on the front piazza was at its height when suddenly came +a shower of snowballs from a near street corner. One snowball hit Dave +in the shoulder and another landed directly on Jessie's neck, causing +the girl to cry out in mingled pain and alarm. + +"Hi! who's throwing snowballs!" exclaimed Roger, and then came another +volley, and he was hit, and also Laura and one of the other girls. At +once the girls fled into the house. + +"Some rowdies, I suppose," said Phil. "I've half a mind to go after +them." + +"We can't without our hats and coats," answered Dave. + +Just then came another shower of snowballs and Dave was hit again. This +was too much for him, and despite the fact that he was bare-headed and +wore a fine party suit, he leaped down on the sidewalk and started for +the corner. Phil and Roger came after him. Ben rushed into the hallway, +to catch up two of his father's canes and his chums' hats, and then he +followed. + +Those who had thrown the snowballs had not dreamed of being attacked, +and it was not until Dave was almost on them that they started to run. +There were three boys--two rather rough-looking characters. The third was +well dressed, in a fur cap and overcoat lined with fur. + +"Nat Poole!" cried Dave, when he got close to the well-dressed youth. +"So this is your game, eh? Because Ben didn't see fit to invite you to +his party, you think it smart to throw snowballs at the girls!" + +As he spoke Dave ran closer and suddenly gave the money-lender's son a +shove that sent him backwards in the snow. + +"Hi, you let me alone!" burst out Nat, in alarm. "It ain't fair to knock +me down!" + +By this time Dave's chums had reached the scene, and seeing Nat down +they gave their attention to the two others. They saw that they were +roughs who hung around the railroad station and the saloons of +Crumville. Without waiting, Ben threw a cane to Roger and sailed in, and +the senator's son followed. Both of the roughs received several severe +blows and were then glad enough to slink away in the darkness. + +When Nat got up he was thoroughly angry. He had hired the roughs to help +him and now they had deserted the cause. He glared at Dave. + +"You let me alone, Dave Porter!" he cried. + +"Not just yet, Nat," replied our hero, and catching up a handful of +loose snow, he forced it down inside of the other's collar. Then the +other lads pitched in, too, and soon Nat found himself down once more +and all but covered with snow, which got down his neck, in his ears and +nose, and even into his mouth. + +"Now then, don't you dare to throw snowballs at the girls again!" said +Dave sternly. "It was a cowardly thing to do, and you know it." + +"If you do it again, we'll land on you ten times harder than we did just +now," added Ben. + +"And don't you get any more of those roughs to take a hand," continued +Dave. "If you do, they'll find themselves in the lock-up, and you'll be +there to keep them company." + +"You just wait!" muttered Nat, wrathfully. "I'll fix you yet--you see if +I don't!" And then he turned and hurried away, but not in the direction +his companions had taken. He wanted to escape them if possible, for he +had promised each a dollar for aiding him and he was now in no humor to +hand over the money. But at another corner the roughs caught up to him +and made him pay up, and this added to his disgust. + +When Dave and the others got back to the house they were considerably +"roughed up," as Roger expressed it. But they had vanquished the enemy +and were correspondingly happy. They found that the girls had not been +much hurt, for which everybody was thankful. + +"Maybe they'll lay for you when you go home," whispered Ben to Dave, +when he got the chance. + +"I don't think they will," answered Dave. "But we'll be on our guard." + +"Why not take a cane or two with you?" + +"We can do that." + +When it came time to go home the girls were somewhat timid, and Jessie +said she could telephone for the sleigh. But, as it was a bright, starry +night, the boys said they would rather walk, and Laura said the same. + +In spite of their watchfulness, the boys were full of fun, and soon had +the girls laughing. And if, under those bright stars, Dave said some +rather sentimental things to Jessie, for whom he had such a tender +regard, who can blame him? + +On the day following New Year's came word from Oak Hall that the school +would not open for its next term until the first Monday in February. + +"Say, that suits me down to the ground!" cried Phil. + +"Well, I'm not shedding any tears," answered Roger. "I know what I'd +like to do--take a trip somewhere." + +"I don't know where you'd go in this winter weather," said Dave. + +"Oh, some warm climate--Bermuda, or some place like that." + +Another day slipped by, and Dave was asked by his father to go to one of +the near-by cities on an errand of importance. He had to go to a +lawyer's office and to several banks, and the errand took all day. For +company he took Roger with him, and the boys did not get back to +Crumville until about eleven o'clock at night. + +"Guess they thought we weren't coming at all," said Dave, when he found +no sleigh awaiting him. "Well, we can walk." + +"Of course we can walk," answered the senator's son. "I'll be glad to +stretch my legs after such a long ride." + +"Let us take a short cut," went on Dave, as they left the depot. "I know +a path that leads almost directly to our place." + +"All right, if the snow isn't too deep, Dave." + +"It can't be deep on the path, for many of the men who work at the +Wadsworth jewelry place use it. It runs right past the Wadsworth works." + +"Go ahead then." + +They took to the path, which led past the freight depot and then along a +high board fence. They turned a corner of the fence, and crossed a +vacant lot, and then came up to one corner of the jewelry works, at a +point where the new addition was located. + +"Now, here we are at the works," said Dave. "It's not very much further +to the house." + +"Pretty quiet around here, this time of night," remarked Roger, as he +paused to catch his breath, for they had been walking fast. "There +doesn't seem to be a soul in sight." + +"There is usually a watchman around, old Tony Wells, an army veteran. I +suppose he is inside somewhere." + +"There's his lantern!" cried the senator's son, as a flash of light +shone from one of the windows. Hardly had he spoken when the light +disappeared, leaving the building as black as before. + +"It must be a lonely job, guarding such a place," said our hero, as he +and his chum resumed their walk. "But I suppose it suits Tony Wells, and +he is glad to get the money it brings in." + +"They must have a lot of valuable jewelry there, Dave." + +"Oh, yes, they have. But it is all locked up in the safes at night." +Dave thought of the Carwith diamonds, but remembered his promise not to +mention them to anybody. + +As the boys turned another corner they came face to face with a fat man, +who was struggling along through the snow carrying two heavy bundles. + +"Hello!" cried Dave. "How are you, Mr. Rowell?" + +"Bless me if it isn't Dave Porter!" cried Amos Rowell, who was a local +druggist. "Out rather late, aren't you?" + +"Yes." + +"So am I. Had to visit some sick folks and I'm carrying home some of +their washing. Goodnight!" and the druggist turned down one road and +Dave and Roger took the other. + +Inside of five minutes more our hero and his chum were at the entrance +to the Wadsworth mansion. Just as they were mounting the steps, and Dave +was feeling in his pocket for his key, a strange rumble reached their +ears. + +"What was that?" asked the senator's son. + +"I don't know," returned Dave, in some alarm. "It sounded to me as if it +came from the direction of the jewelry works!" + + + + +CHAPTER X--WHAT HAPPENED AT THE JEWELRY WORKS + + +"The jewelry works?" repeated Roger. + +"Yes. What did it sound like to you?" + +"Why, like a blast of some kind. Maybe it was at the railroad." + +"They don't work on the railroad at night--especially in this cold +weather, Roger. No, it was something else." + +Both boys halted on the piazza and listened. But not another sound out +of the ordinary reached their ears. + +"Might as well go in--it's getting pretty cold," said the senator's son. + +Dave unlocked the door and they entered the mansion. A dim light was +burning in the hallway. While they were taking off their caps and coats +Dave's father appeared at the head of the stairs. + +"Got back safely, did you?" he questioned. + +"Yes, dad; and everything in the city was all right," answered the son. +"I'll bring the package up to you." + +"Never mind--I'll come down and put it in the safe," answered Mr. Porter. +"By the way," he went on, "what was that strange noise I just heard?" + +"That is what we were wondering," said Roger. "It sounded like a blast +of dynamite to me." + +"Maybe something blew up at the powder works at Fenwood," suggested +Dave. The works in question were fifteen miles away. + +"If it did, we'll hear about it in the morning," returned Mr. Porter, as +he took the package Dave gave him and disappeared into the library, +turning on the electric light as he did so. + +The boys went upstairs and started to undress. Phil had been asleep, but +roused up at their entrance. The boys occupied a large chamber, with two +double beds in it, for they loved to be together, as at school. + +"Listen to that!" cried Dave, as he was unlacing a shoe. + +"It's the telephone downstairs!" cried Phil. "My, but it's ringing to +beat the band!" he added, as the bell continued to sound its call. + +The boys heard Mr. Porter leave the library and go to the telephone, +which was on a table in an alcove. He took down the receiver. + +"Yes! yes!" the boys heard him say. Then followed a pause. "You don't +mean it! When, just now? Was that the noise we heard? Where did they go +to? Wait, I'll call Mr. Wadsworth. What's that? Hurry!" Then followed +another pause. "Cut off!" they heard Mr. Porter mutter. + +"Something is wrong!" murmured Dave. + +Mr. Porter came bounding up the stairs two steps at a time. Dave and the +other boys met him in the hallway. + +"What is it, Dad?" asked the son. + +"Robbers--at the jewelry works!" panted David Porter. "I must notify Mr. +Wadsworth!" And he ran to a near-by door and pounded on it. + +"What is it?" came sleepily from the rich manufacturer. He had heard +nothing of the telephone call, being down deep in the covers because of +the cold. + +"Mr. Wadsworth, get up, get up instantly!" cried Mr. Porter. "You are +wanted at the jewelry works. I just got something of a message from your +watchman. Some robbers have blown open your safes and they attacked the +man, but he got away long enough to telephone. But then they attacked +him again, while he was talking to me! We'll have to get down there at +once!" + +"Roger, did you hear that?" gasped Dave. "That's the noise we heard!" + +"Yes, and they attacked the watchman," responded the senator's son. + +"I'm going back there," went on Dave. "The others will have to stop and +dress. Maybe we can catch those rascals." + +"Yes, and save the watchman, Dave!" + +By this time Mr. Wadsworth had appeared, in a bath-robe, and Dunston +Porter also showed himself. Dave slipped on his shoe again and fairly +threw himself into his coat, and Roger also rearranged his toilet. + +"Wait--I'll go with you!" cried Phil. + +"Can't wait, Phil--every second is precious!" answered our hero. "You can +follow with the men." + +"Take the gun, or a pistol--you may need it," urged the shipowner's son, +as he started to dress. + +In a corner stood Dave's double-barreled shotgun, loaded. He took it up. +Roger looked around the room, saw a baseball bat in another corner, and +took that. Then the boys ran out into the hallway, where the electric +lights were now turned on full. The whole house was in a hubbub. + +"We are dressed and we'll go right down to the works," said Dave. "I +heard what father said, Mr. Wadsworth. We'll help Tony Wells, if we +can." And before anybody could stop him, he was out of the house, with +Roger at his heels. + +"Be careful, Dave!" shouted his uncle after him. "Those robbers may be +desperate characters." + +"All right, Uncle Dunston, I'll watch out." + +"If you chance to see a policeman, take him along. I'll come as soon as +I can get some clothing on." + +Tired though they were, the two boys ran all the distance to the jewelry +works. When they got there they found everything as dark and as silent +as before. They had met nobody. + +"How are you going to get in?" asked Roger, as they came to a halt +before the main door. + +Dave tried the door, to find it locked. "Let us walk around. The thieves +may be in hiding somewhere," he suggested. + +They made the circuit of the works, once falling into a hole filled with +snow. Nothing unusual met their eyes, and each gazed questioningly at +the other. + +"It can't be a joke, can it?" suggested Roger. "Nat Poole might----" + +"No, I'm sure it was no joke," broke in our hero. "Wait, I'll try that +little side-door. I think that is the one the watchman generally uses." + +He ran to the door in question and pushed upon it. It gave way, and with +caution he entered the building. All was so dark he could see absolutely +nothing. + +"I guess we'll have to make a light," he said, as his chum followed him. +"Wait till I see if I have some matches." + +"Here are some," answered Roger. "Wait, I'll strike a light. You keep +hold of that gun--and be ready to use it, if you have to!" + +The senator's son struck one of the matches and held it aloft. By its +faint rays the boys were able to see some distance into the workshop +into which the doorway opened. Only machines and work-benches met their +gaze. On a nail hung a lantern. + +"We'll light this," said Dave, taking the lantern down. "You can carry +it, and I'll keep the gun handy." + +With lantern and gun held out before them, and with their hearts beating +wildly, the two youths walked cautiously through the workshop. They had +to pass through two rooms before they reached the entrance to the +offices. The light cast curious shadows on the walls and the machinery, +and more than once the lads fancied they saw something moving. But each +alarm proved false. + +"Why not call the watchman?" suggested Roger, just before entering the +offices. + +They raised their voices and then raised them again. But no answer came +back. + +"Would he telephone from the office?" asked the senator's son. + +"I suppose so--although there is another 'phone in the shipping-room." + +The boys had now entered one of the new offices. Just beyond was the old +office, with the two old safes, standing side by side. + +"Look!" cried Roger, in dismay. + +There was no need to utter the cry, for Dave was himself staring at the +scene before him. The old office was in dire confusion, chairs and desks +being cast in various directions. All of the windows were broken out and +through these the chill night air was entering. + +But what interested the boys most of all was the appearance of the two +old safes. The door to each had been blown asunder and lay in a twisted +mass on the floor. On top of the doors lay a number of boxes and drawers +that belonged in the safes. Mingling with the wreckage were pieces of +gold and silver plate, and also gold and silver knives, forks, and +spoons. + +"Here is where that explosion came from," said Dave. "What a pity it +didn't happen when we were in front of the works! We might have caught +the rascals red-handed!" + +"Listen! I hear somebody now!" exclaimed Roger. "Maybe they are coming +back." + +"No, that is my father who is calling!" replied our hero. "I'll let him +in." + +He ran to the office door, and finding a key in the lock, opened it. +Roger swung the lantern, and soon Dave's father and his uncle came up, +followed by Mr. Wadsworth, who, being somewhat portly, could not run so +fast, and had to be assisted by Phil. + +"What have they done?" gasped the manufacturer. "Tell me quickly! Did +they blow open the safes?" He was so agitated that he could scarcely +speak. + +The boys did not reply, for there was no need. Mr. Wadsworth gave one +look and then sank down on a desk, too overcome to make another move. + +"Did you see anything of the robbers, Dave?" asked his father. + +"Not a thing." + +"And where is the watchman?" + +"I don't know." + +"Strange, he must be somewhere around. He told me of the robbery and +then he said that they were coming after him. Then the message was +suddenly cut off." + +"It looks like foul play to me," said Dunston Porter, seriously. "We had +better light up and investigate thoroughly." + +He walked to a switchboard on the wall and began to experiment. +Presently the electric lights in the offices flashed up and then some of +those in the workshops were turned on. + +By this time Oliver Wadsworth was in front of one of the shattered +safes. An inner door, somewhat bent, was swung shut. With trembling +fingers the manufacturer pulled the door open and felt into the +compartment beyond. + +"Gone! gone!" the others heard him mutter hoarsely. "Gone!" + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Porter. + +"The casket--the Carwith casket is gone!" And Mr. Wadsworth looked ready +to faint as he spoke. + +"Were the jewels in it?" questioned Mr. Porter. + +"Yes! yes!" + +"All of them?" queried Dave. + +"Yes, every one. I placed them in the casket myself before we locked up +for the day." + +"Maybe the casket is on the floor, under the doors," suggested Dave; but +he had little hope of such being the case. + +All started a search, lasting for several minutes. But it was useless, +the casket with its precious jewelry had disappeared. Oliver Wadsworth +tottered to a chair that Phil placed for him and sank heavily upon it. + +[Illustration: "THE CASKET--THE CARWITH CASKET IS GONE!"--Page 96.] + +"Gone!" he muttered, in a strained voice. "Gone! And if I cannot recover +it, I shall be ruined!" + + + + +CHAPTER XI--LOOKING FOR THE ROBBERS + + +All in the offices listened with interest to Oliver Wadsworth's words. + +"The jewels were probably what the rascals were after," was Mr. Porter's +comment. "Evidently they did not touch any of the gold plate or +silverware." + +"That shows they must have known the jewels were here," said Dunston +Porter. + +"Couldn't they find out about them from the workmen?" questioned Dave. + +"I suppose so--although it is a rule of the works for the men to keep +silent regarding precious stones. No one but myself and the general +manager are supposed to know just what we have on hand." + +"We must get busy and see if we cannot follow the robbers!" cried David +Porter. "No use in wasting time here now. Let us scatter in all +directions. One can go to the railroad station and the others to the +roads leading out of town. We may pick up some clew." + +"The police, we'll have to notify them!" said Roger. + +"Yes! yes! Call the police up on the telephone!" ejaculated Mr. +Wadsworth, starting to his feet. + +Dave ran to the end of the office, where a telephone rested on a stand. +The shock of the explosion had severed the wires. + +"It's out of commission," he said. "I'll have to use the one in the +shipping-room." + +He left the offices, and made his way through two of the workrooms. Phil +went with him and so did Roger. + +"This will be a terrible blow for Mr. Wadsworth," was the comment of the +shipowner's son. + +"He said if he didn't get the jewels back it would ruin him," added +Roger. + +"Oh, we must get them back!" cried Dave. "Why, they are worth a +fortune!" + +In the shipping-room all was dark, and the boys had to first light a +match and then turn on the electric illumination. The telephone was near +by. + +"Ruined!" cried our hero, as he beheld the wrenched-away receiver and +transmitter. + +"Here is where they must have caught the watchman while he was +telephoning to Mr. Wadsworth!" said Phil. + +"That must be it, Phil. We'll have to go to the police station, or find +another telephone." + +The boys rushed back to the offices and told of what they had +discovered. Then Phil and Roger volunteered to run to the police +station, over a quarter of a mile away. + +"If you'll do that, I'll go to the railroad station," said Dave. "I may +be able to pick up some clew. The twelve-fifteen train is almost due and +those rascals may try to board it. If I see anybody that looks +suspicious, I'll have him detained." + +"Don't get into trouble!" called his father after him. + +"I'll try to take care of myself, Dad," he answered. + +Dave ran the whole distance to the depot. As he went along he kept his +eyes wide open for a possible appearance of the robbers, peering down +side-streets and alleyways, and into vacant lots. But he saw nobody +until close to the station and then he received a sudden hail from in +front of a coal office. + +"Hi, you! Where are you going in such a hurry?" And a man in a dark blue +uniform stepped into view, night-stick in hand. + +"Just the man I want to see!" cried our hero. "I guess you know me, Mr. +Anderson. Come on down to the depot, quick! We must get there before the +train comes in!" + +"Why, it's Dave Porter!" exclaimed the policeman. "What's the row, +Dave?" + +"Mr. Wadsworth's jewelry works has been robbed. They have just gone to +notify headquarters. I thought maybe the robbers might try to get away +on the train. We want to stop any suspicious characters." + +"The jewelry works robbed? You don't say! All right, I'll go right +along. Hope we can catch 'em!" And Officer Anderson swung up beside +Dave, and both continued on a dog-trot to the depot. + +Nobody but the station master was in sight. Dave and the policeman +thought it best to keep out of sight. + +"You stay at one end and I'll stay at the other," said the officer. "If +you see anybody suspicious, whistle twice and I'll come on the +double-quick." + +At last they heard the train coming. Nobody had appeared, but presently +Dave caught sight of a burly figure sneaking beside several empty +freight cars on a side-track. He gave the signal for aid and then +sneaked after the man. By this time the train had rolled into the little +station. + +Only a well-known young man of Crumville alighted, accompanied by an +elderly lady, his mother. There were no passengers to get aboard, and +the conductor swung his lantern for the engineer to go ahead again. + +At that moment the burly fellow near the freight cars made a dive for +the trucks of a baggage car, with the evident intention of stealing a +ride. He had almost reached the trucks when Dave came up behind him and +hauled him back. + +"Not so fast!" said our hero, firmly. "I want to talk to you." + +"Hey, you let me alone!" growled the burly fellow. He was ragged and +unshaven and evidently a tramp. + +"Where did you come from?" went on Dave, and he continued to hold the +man, while the train moved off. + +"Wot business is that o' yours?" was the sulky return. "Wot did yer make +me miss that train for?" + +"You'll find out in a minute or two," answered our hero, and just then +Officer Anderson came running up. + +"Got somebody, have you?" he panted. + +"I guess he is only a tramp," was Dave's reply. "But we may as well hold +him and see what he has got to say." + +"It's Applejack Joe," said the policeman, as he eyed the prisoner. "We +warned him out of town this morning. What was he going to do, steal a +ride?" + +"I think so. I caught him making for the trucks of a baggage car." + +"That's Joe's favorite way of riding," chuckled the policeman. + +"I can't see why that young feller had to stop me," growled the tramp. +"You folks wants me to git out, an' when I start yer hold me back." + +"Why didn't you go this morning, if you were told to go?" asked Dave. + +"Say, I don't move as swift as some folks. Wot's the use? Take yer time, +is my motter." + +"Where have you been for the last three or four hours?" asked the +policeman. + +"Where have I been? It won't do you no good to know, cap'n." + +"Well, you tell us, just the same," said Dave. "I want to know if you +have seen any other men sneaking around town to-night. If you have, it +may pay you to tell me about it." + +"Provided we can land on those other chaps," put in the officer. + +"Oh, I see; somethin' wrong, hey?" And the tramp leered unpleasantly. +"Want to pull me into it, mebbe." + +"You are pulled in already," answered Officer Anderson. + +"Oh, don't arrest me, an' I'll tell you everything I know!" pleaded +Applejack Joe. He had once been in the Crumville jail in winter and +found it very cold and uninviting, and he wanted no more of it. + +"What do you know?" questioned Dave. "Answer quick. There has been a big +robbery here, and if you can help us to catch the men maybe you'll get a +reward." + +"Reward? Say, I'm your huckleberry, young man. Wot do I know?" The tramp +rubbed his unshaven chin. "Yes, that's them, I'm sure of it," he +murmured, half to himself. + +"Who?" demanded Dave, impatiently. + +"Them two fellers I see down at Casterbury's stock-farm this afternoon. +They had a bag wot looked suspicious to me, an', say; did they use +dynamite, or somethin' like that?" + +"They did!" + +"Then that's them! Cos why? Cos when they walked past where I was +hidin', I heard one of 'em say, 'Be careful o' that, we don't want it to +go off an' git blowed up.'" + +"Two men?" came from the policeman. "Did you know them?" + +The tramp shook his head. + +"Never set eyes on 'em before. But I see 'em after that, down back of +that jewelry works over there," and he threw up his hand in the +direction of Mr. Wadsworth's place. "Say, is that the place they +robbed?" he continued, with some show of interest. + +"Yes," answered Dave. "Now tell me how those fellows looked." + +"I can't tell yer that, exactly, fer my eyesight ain't none too good, I +git so much smoke an' cinders in 'em from the railroad. But they was +kinder young fellers, I think, and putty good educated--not common +fellers like me. Somethin' like yerself. An' they was dressed putty +good, long overcoats, and soft hats wot was pulled down over their +faces." + +"Did you hear them speak any names?" asked Officer Anderson. + +"Nary a name." + +"Have you seen the two men during the last hour or so?" asked Dave. + +"No, ain't see 'em since I spotted 'em back of the jewelry factory. That +was about seven, or maybe eight o'clock." + +"Did they go into the works then?" + +"No, they just stood by the back fence talkin'. I thought they had +somethin' to do with that new buildin' going up there, so I didn't think +nuthin' more about it." + +"I see. Well, Joe, I guess you had better come with us for the present," +went on Dave. "We'll want your testimony." + +"It ain't fair to arrest me!" whined the tramp. + +"We won't call it arrest," went on Dave, before the policeman could +speak. "You'll be detained, that's all, and I'll see that you don't lose +anything by it." + +"All right then, if that's the way you're goin' to put it," answered +Applejack Joe resignedly. "But I hope you'll see to it that I gits +something to eat an' a warm place to sleep." + +"I'll remember," returned our hero. + +There seemed nothing now to do but to return to the jewelry works and +this Dave did, taking the tramp and the officer with him. When they +arrived they found the chief of police there, with two officers. The +chief was questioning Mr. Wadsworth and the distracted manufacturer was +telling what he knew about the crime that had been committed. + +The arrival of those from the depot, and what the tramp had to tell, put +a new face on the matter. One of the officers said he had seen the two +strangers with the tool-bag, but had put them down for traveling +salesmen visiting Crumville on business. + +"They are undoubtedly the guilty parties," said the chief. "The only +question is: Where did they go to?" + +"Well, they didn't take that twelve-fifteen train," answered Dave. + +"Then they either got out of town by the use of a horse or an auto, or +else they are here yet," said Mr. Wadsworth. "Oh, catch them! Catch them +if you can! I must get those jewels back! I'll give a big reward for +their safe return." + +"Have you heard from Phil or Roger yet?" + +"No, Dave." + +"They may bring in some word." + +"Let us hope so," groaned the manufacturer. + +"What became of the watchman?" + +"That is a mystery. Perhaps they carried him off and threw him into the +river, or something like that!" + +"Oh, they wouldn't be as rascally as all that!" returned Dave, in +horror. + +"Perhaps. Some robbers are very desperate characters." + +At that moment came a cry from one of the workrooms, where one of the +officers had gone to take a look around. + +"What is it, Carr?" called the chief of police. + +"Here's poor Tony Wells," was the answer. "He's in bad shape. Better +somebody run for a doctor at once!" + + + + +CHAPTER XII--THE TELLTALE CIGARETTE BOX + + +The watchman was indeed in bad shape. He had been found thrown under a +workbench, and just returning to consciousness. He had a cut over his +left ear and another on his forehead, from which the blood had flowed +freely. + +"Must have struck him with a club, or an iron bar," was the opinion of +the chief, as the injured man was carried into the office and placed on +some chair cushions. Here his wounds were washed and bound up, while one +officer ran to get a doctor who lived not a great distance off. + +It was some little time before Tony Wells, who was nearly seventy years +of age, opened his eyes to stare around him. + +"Don't--don't hit me again!" he murmured. "I--I didn't touch you!" + +"It's all right, Tony!" said the chief. "Those fellows are gone. You're +among friends." + +"They--knocked me down!" gasped the old watchman. "I--I--tried to +telephone--after the explosion, but--but----" He could not go on, and +suddenly relapsed again into unconsciousness. + +"Poor fellow!" said Mr. Wadsworth, tenderly. "We must do what we can for +him." + +"Is anything missing besides the jewels?" asked Dave, while they were +waiting for the doctor to come, and waiting to hear from the others who +had gone out. + +"No, Dave. But that is enough. If they are not recovered, I shall be +ruined." + +"Can they hold you responsible for the loss?" + +"Yes, for when I took the jewels to re-set I guaranteed the safe return +of each jewel. I had to do that because they were afraid some workmen +might try to substitute other jewels not so good--which is sometimes +done." + +"And you said they were worth seventy-five thousand dollars?" + +"All of that." + +"Those robbers certainly made a haul." + +"It drives me crazy to think about it," groaned Oliver Wadsworth. + +"Perhaps the others who went out will catch them," answered our hero, +hopefully. + +Soon the doctor arrived and took charge of old Tony Wells, whom he knew +well. As Wells was a widower, living alone, the doctor said he would +take the old man to his own home, where he could have constant +attention. + +"He is already in a fever," said the physician. "We had better not try +to question him at present. It will only excite him the more." And a +little later the sufferer was placed on a litter and carried to the +doctor's residence. + +By this time the news was circulating that the Wadsworth jewelry works +had been robbed, and many persons spent the rest of the night looking +for the two young men who were supposed to be guilty of the crime. +Oliver Wadsworth and an officer remained at the offices, guarding the +wrecked place and looking for clews of the evildoers. But nothing in the +way of evidence against the robbers was brought to light, excepting that +they had used several drills and some dynamite on the two old safes, +probably blowing them up simultaneously. They had taken the tool-bag +with its contents with them and also another small valise, belonging to +one of Mr. Wadsworth's traveling salesmen. + +"I can't understand why Tony Wells didn't discover them when they first +came in," said Dave. + +"Maybe he did and they made him a prisoner," suggested Mr. Wadsworth. +"Tony was very faithful--the best watchman I ever had." + +Daylight came at last and still the search for the two robbers was kept +up. In the meantime, telegrams and telephone messages had been sent in +all directions. To stimulate the searchers Mr. Wadsworth offered a +reward of one thousand dollars for the recovery of the jewels and this +reward was later on increased to five thousand dollars. + +When Tony Wells was well enough to tell his story he said he had been +going the rounds of the works when he suddenly found himself confronted +by two masked men. He had started to cry out and run for help when the +men had seized him and thrown him down and bound him fast to a +work-bench. Then the men had gone to the offices, and later on had come +the explosion. He knew they were blowing open the safes and did what he +could to free himself. At last he managed to get free, but found himself +too weak to run for help. He had dragged himself to the telephone in the +shipping-room and was sending his message to Mr. Wadsworth when the +masked men had again appeared and knocked him down. That was all he +remembered until the time he was found, as already described. + +"You did not see the faces of the two men?" asked Oliver Wadsworth. + +"No, sir, they were all covered with black masks. But I think the +fellows was rather young-like," answered the old watchman. "Both of 'em +was about the size of Dave Porter,--but neither of 'em was Dave,--I know +that by the voices," he went on, hastily. + +"No, Dave was at home with me," said Oliver Wadsworth. "But he and one +of his friends passed the works just before the explosion." + +The news of the robbery had upset the Wadsworth household completely. +Mrs. Wadsworth was as much distressed as her husband, and Jessie was as +pale as if seriously ill. + +"Oh, Dave, supposing the jewels are not recovered!" said Jessie, when +they met in the hallway. "It will ruin father,--I heard him tell mamma +so!" + +"We are going to get them back--we've simply got to do it," Dave replied. + +"But how? Nobody seems to know what has become of the robbers." + +"Oh, just wait, Jessie. We are sure to get some trace of them sooner or +later." + +"What makes you so hopeful, Dave?" and now the girl suddenly clutched +his arm. "Have you a clew?" + +"I think so, but I am not sure. I am going to talk to your father about +it, and then I am going to take another look around Crumville and around +the offices." + +Dave's father and his Uncle Dunston had been out all day, and so had +Phil and Roger and Ben, and a score of others, including the officers of +the law. But nothing had been seen or heard of the mysterious men with +the tool-bag. Another tramp had been rounded up, but he knew absolutely +nothing of the crime and was let go again. + +Oliver Wadsworth's face was white and drawn and he looked as if he had +suddenly grown five years older. He had a long, private conversation +with Dave's father and Dunston Porter, and all three men looked very +grave when the conference came to an end. + +There was good cause for this seriousness. The new addition to the +jewelry works had placed Mr. Wadsworth in debt. The Porters had lent him +twenty thousand dollars, and, just then, could lend him no more, having +a number of obligations of their own to meet. + +The Carwith jewels were the property of Mr. and Mrs. Ridgeway Osgood +Carwith, of Fifth Avenue, New York City. The Carwiths were now on a trip +around the world, but were expected home some time in the spring. Mr. +Wadsworth had agreed to re-set the jewels according to designs already +accepted by the millionaire and his wife, and had guaranteed the safe +return of the jewels, re-set as specified, not later than the first of +the following May. As the millionaire was a strict business man he had +demanded a bond for the safe return of his property, and this bond had +been given by Mr. Wadsworth, indorsed by David Breslow Porter and +Dunston Porter. + +Thus it will readily be seen that the millionaire and his wife were +amply secured. If they did not get the jewels back they would demand the +payment of the bond, worth seventy-five thousand dollars, and Mr. +Wadsworth and the Porters would have to make good. + +On the second day after the robbery, Dave, Roger, and Phil went down to +the jewelry works and began a close investigation on their own account. +Dave had mentioned something to his chums that had caused them to open +their eyes in astonishment. + +An hour was spent around the offices, and then Phil picked up an empty +cigarette case. He took it to Dave and Roger and both looked at it with +keen interest. + +"I guess that is another clew," said our hero. "Let us look around some +more." + +"I'm going for the train now," said the senator's son, a little later. +"And as soon as I find Hooker Montgomery I'll let you know." + +"Yes, and make him come here, whether he wants to or not," cried Dave. + +"You leave that to me," answered Roger, grimly. + +Oliver Wadsworth had been interviewing a private detective, and soon the +man left, stating he thought he could lay his hands on the guilty +parties. + +"I'll look for Tom Basnett," said the detective. "This looks like one of +his jobs." + +"I don't care whose job it is--I want the jewels back," said Mr. +Wadsworth, wearily. He had not slept since the crime had been committed. + +"Mr. Wadsworth, Phil and I would like to talk to you in private," said +Dave, when he could get the chance. + +"You have some clew, Dave?" + +"Well, I want to tell you something, and then you can judge for +yourself." + +"Very well, come with me," answered the manufacturer, and led the way to +a little side-room, used by the salesmen for exhibiting wares to +possible customers. + +"I want to tell you all about something that happened early in the +winter, while I was at Oak Hall," said Dave. And then he told of how he +had called on the fake doctor, Hooker Montgomery, and how he had been +attacked from behind and made a prisoner, and carried off to a house in +the woods, the particulars of which have already been set down in "Dave +Porter and His Rivals." + +"The fellows who carried me off were the doctor and the driver, who was +only a tool, and two fellows who have caused me a lot of trouble in the +past, Nick Jasniff and Link Merwell," went on our hero. "When I got away +I tried to follow up Jasniff and Merwell, but they got away from me, and +so did the driver get away. But one day I found Hooker Montgomery, and +by threatening to have him arrested I made him confess to the truth, +which was that Jasniff and Merwell had hired him to help get me in their +power. At first they told Montgomery it was only a schoolboy trick, and +he said he believed them, but, later on, it leaked out that Jasniff and +Merwell had another motive in making me a prisoner." + +"And that motive----?" began Oliver Wadsworth, with deep interest. + +"Doctor Montgomery said that Jasniff and Merwell had in mind to drug me +and take me to some place a good distance from Oak Hall. He said he also +heard them speak of robbing a jewelry works, and I was to be drugged and +left in the factory,--to make it appear as if I had done the deed and as +if the blowing up of a safe had stunned me." + +"Dave, is this possible!" exclaimed the manufacturer. + +"It is true, Mr. Wadsworth," said Phil. "I was along and so was Roger at +the time. Montgomery couldn't give many details, but he said he thought +Jasniff and Merwell were cold-blooded villains and he wanted nothing +more to do with them." + +"This looks as if those rascals, Jasniff and Merwell, had come here." + +"I believe they did come," went on Dave. "And here is one clew we have +already picked up against them." And he held up the empty cigarette box. + +"What is that? Only a cigarette box. How can that be a clew?" + +"I will tell you. Both Jasniff and Merwell are inveterate cigarette +smokers. I have seen them smoking many times. They smoke a Turkish brand +of cigarettes, having a peculiar blue and gold band around the box. This +is the same kind of a box, and I am convinced that this box was emptied +and thrown away in your offices by Jasniff or Merwell." + + + + +CHAPTER XIII--DARK DAYS + + +Oliver Wadsworth listened to Dave's words with deep interest. Then he +shrugged his shoulders. + +"That sounds pretty good, Dave, were it not for one thing. Do you +imagine that two masked fellows, bent on blowing open safes, would stop +to light and smoke cigarettes?" + +"I think Merwell and Jasniff would, Merwell especially. When Link is +nervous the first thing he does is to take out a cigarette and light it. +It's an almost unconscious habit with him." + +"This story about what that doctor said interests me most of all," went +on the manufacturer. "I think we ought to have a talk with him. For all +we know, he may be one of the guilty parties." + +"No, I don't think he is that kind. Besides, he was very angry at +Merwell and Jasniff and wanted nothing more to do with them." + +"The detective who was here thought he had a clew against a professional +bank burglar. Personally, I think this looks more like the work of +professionals than fellows just out of school," said the manufacturer; +and there, for the time being, the matter rested. + +During the day two more detectives appeared and went over the ground, as +the other officials had done. One thought he saw in the robbery the hand +of a criminal known as Red Andrews. + +"This is just the way Red Andrews would go at a job," said the +detective. "He was sent up for robbing a private banker some years ago, +and he got out two months ago. He was in New York--I saw him on Fifth +Avenue, not far from the Carwith mansion. He may have heard about the +jewels there. I am going to look for him." And he departed on a hunt for +Red Andrews. + +It was not until two days later that Roger came back to Crumville. His +face showed his disappointment. + +"Such mean luck!" he exclaimed, when he met Dave, Phil, and Ben. "I went +to four towns, looking for Hooker Montgomery, and at last I found out +that he had left the east several days ago." + +"Where did he go to?" questioned our hero. + +"The folks I met couldn't tell exactly, but they thought to visit a rich +aunt in the far west." + +This was a great disappointment, for they had hoped to learn much more +concerning the plans of Jasniff and Merwell, from the fake doctor. + +"We might send him a letter, to his last residence. Maybe the +post-office authorities will forward it," suggested Phil. + +"I did that," answered the senator's son. "I told him that I wanted to +hear from him at once, and that it would be money in his pocket to write +or to telegraph to me. I didn't mention your name, Dave, for I thought +he might hear of this robbery and get suspicious." + +It was ideal weather for skating and sleighing, but none of the young +folks at the Wadsworth mansion felt like going out for fun. All could +see that the older folks were much worried, and consequently, they were +worried, too. + +"Oh, Dave, what if those jewels are never recovered?" said Laura to her +brother, when they were alone. "It will just about ruin Mr. Wadsworth, +Uncle Dunston says." + +"Let us hope for the best, Laura." + +"I heard you and the other boys talking about Nick Jasniff and Link +Merwell." + +"Yes?" + +"Do you really imagine they had something to do with it?" + +"Yes, I think so, and so do Phil, Ben, and Roger. But the detectives and +Mr. Wadsworth think the work was done by professionals. They don't think +that fellows like Nick and Link would be equal to the job." + +"But if you think Merwell and Jasniff guilty, why don't you go after +them and find out?" + +"We don't know where they are." + +"Aren't they with their folks?" + +"No." + +"Are you sure?" + +"Yes. The Jasniffs are traveling aboard and Mr. Merwell is in +Philadelphia. We sent to Mr. Merwell--through an outsider--and learned +that he didn't know where Link was just now, said he had written that he +was going on a tour south for the winter. My private opinion is that Mr. +Merwell finds Link hard to manage and is glad to get rid of him." + +"Do you suppose he did go south?" + +"He might--after this affair here." + +"They didn't say what part of the south he went to?" + +"They said Florida. But Florida is pretty big, you know," and Dave +smiled faintly. + +"Jessie is awfully downcast over this, and so is Mrs. Wadsworth--in fact, +we all are." + +"I know it, Laura." Dave drew a long breath. "It's awfully hard to sit +still and do nothing. I imagine Mr. Wadsworth can't sleep for thinking +of the affair." + +"I heard Mrs. Wadsworth talking last night to him. I didn't mean to +listen, Dave, but before I could get away I heard her say that if it was +necessary she would give up this house to live in and move to a smaller +place! Think of it! Why, her very heart is set on this house and these +fine grounds! And Jessie thinks the world of them, too!" + +"It would be awfully hard if they did have to give them up, Laura." + +"Dave, can't father or Uncle Dunston help them, if they need help?" + +"They have helped Mr. Wadsworth already--loaned him twenty thousand +dollars so that he could put that new addition to the works. They also +indorsed his note covering the safe return of the jewels. If those +jewels aren't gotten back, and Mr. Wadsworth can't make good on that +note, father and Uncle Dunston will have to pay the money." + +"All of it?" + +"As much as Mr. Wadsworth can't pay. And the worst of the whole matter +is, Laura, just at present father and Uncle Dunston have their ready +money tied up in such a manner that they can't get hold of it excepting +at a great loss. Oh, it certainly is a terrible state of affairs!" And +Dave shook his head, gravely. + +During that week Ben had Shadow Hamilton and Buster Beggs visit him. Of +course, the new arrivals had to hear all about the robbery, and they +came over with Ben to call on the other boys, and on the girls. + +"This is fierce!" was Buster's comment. "And Ben says you rather suspect +Merwell and Jasniff," he added, in a whisper. + +"We do, but don't say anything to any outsiders about it," answered +Dave. + +"Say, that puts me in mind of a story," said Shadow. "A little girl +once----" + +"Wow! Cut it out, Shadow!" burst out Phil. + +"Stories don't go with robberies," supplemented Roger. + +"Let him tell it," put in Dave, with a faint smile. "It will relieve his +mind, and I guess I need a little fun to brace me up--I've been so +depressed lately." + +"This isn't so very much of a story," went on Shadow, as all looked at +him. "Dave telling Buster not to let outsiders know put me in mind of +it. Once the mother of a little girl told her that her uncle had been +naughty and had been put in prison for it. Said the mother, 'Now, Lucy, +don't tell anybody.' So Lucy went out to play and pretty soon, when she +had all her companions around her she said, 'What do you think my ma +said? She said that when anybody has an uncle in prison, like my uncle +is, you mustn't tell anybody. So I'm not going to tell a single +person!'" + +"Well, I guess the boys know what I mean," said Dave, after a short +laugh. "I want you to keep this to yourselves. Don't spread it any +further. It may be that I am mistaken, and if so, and Merwell and +Jasniff heard of what I have said, they would come down on me like a ton +of bricks--and I'd not blame them." + +In the afternoon, urged by Mrs. Wadsworth, the boys went skating, taking +the girls with them. On the ice they met Nat Poole, but the +money-lender's son did not speak to them, indeed he did his best to keep +out of their way. + +"He hasn't forgotten New Year's Eve," said Ben. "He had better keep his +distance, unless he wants to get into more trouble." + +"Wonder what he thinks of the robbery?" mused Dave. + +"We might get Buster to pump him," suggested Phil. "He is on pretty good +terms with Nat,--that is, they are not open enemies." + +Buster was appealed to and he readily agreed to do the "pumping," +provided the money-lender's son had anything to say. He skated off by +himself and then threw himself in Nat's way, and was gone the best part +of half an hour. + +"Well, did you learn anything?" queried Roger, when the stout youth +returned. + +"I guess I did!" cried Buster. "Say, I think Nat Poole is about as mean +as they make 'em!" he burst out. "And he hasn't a grain of good, hard +common-sense!" + +"What did he say?" demanded Phil. + +"Oh, he said a lot of things, about the robbery, and about the +Wadsworths and the Porters. First he said he didn't believe the jewels +were nearly as valuable as Mr. Wadsworth represented them to be, and the +manufacturer was kicking up a big fuss just as a sort of advertisement. +Then he said there was a report that Dave had been seen in front of the +works just a few minutes before the explosion, and that that looked +mighty suspicious to him." + +"The mean fellow!" muttered Roger. + +"I told him that you and Roger were going to the Wadsworth house at the +time, and were home when the watchman telephoned, but he only tossed his +head as if he didn't believe a word of it, and said he guessed Dave +could tell something if he was of a mind to talk." + +"If that isn't Poole to a T!" cried Phil. + +"If I were you, Dave, I'd punch his head for him," was Shadow's advice. + +"That wouldn't do any good," said Ben. "You can't stop Nat from talking +any more than you can stop water from running out of a sieve." + +"Which puts me in mind of another story," burst out Shadow, eagerly. +"Once two men----" + +"Oh, Shadow, another?" cried Buster, reproachfully. + +"I know that story--it's moss-covered with age," announced Roger. + +"What is it?" demanded the story-teller of Oak Hall. + +"Two men--bet--carry water in a sieve--bet taken--water frozen. Ha! ha! +Shadow, I got you that time." + +"Well, it's a good story anyway," answered Shadow, ruefully. + +"I shan't attempt to stop Nat unless he makes some direct accusation," +said Dave, calmly. "What would be the use? It would only make matters +worse." + +"If you took notice of what he says, some folks would begin to think +there was something in it," said Phil. "Yes, better drop Nat. He isn't +worth bothering about, anyway. Just the same, it is mean for him to +speak in this fashion." + +"He wouldn't be Nat Poole if he didn't," retorted Roger. + +Despite this incident, the boys and girls managed to have a good time on +the ice, and for an hour or two Dave forgot his troubles and those of +his friends. + +"What are you going to do for the rest of the vacation, Dave?" said +Roger, that evening. "You know you promised to come to my home." + +"Yes, and you promised to visit me, too," added Phil. "You haven't been +to our house in a long time." + +"To tell the truth, I haven't the heart to go anywhere," answered Dave, +soberly. "I guess I had better stay here and see if something doesn't +turn up." + +"Well, I can't blame you," said the senator's son, and Phil said the +same. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV--OFF FOR THE SOUTH + + +Two days later, when Roger was packing up, getting ready to return home, +he received a letter from Luke Watson that filled him with interest. +Luke had gone to St. Augustine, Florida, to join his folks, who were +spending the winter there. + +"Here's news!" burst out the senator's son, as he came rushing to Dave +and Phil with the epistle. "This letter is from Luke Watson, you know +his folks are in Florida. Well, on his way to St. Augustine, Luke +stopped for a day at Jacksonville. Listen to what he says: + +"'I was walking down one of the main streets of Jacksonville, looking +into the shop windows, when what do you think? I saw Link Merwell and +Nick Jasniff. You could have knocked me over with a feather, for I +hadn't imagined that they were anywhere near. They were nattily dressed +and each carried a small valise, and they were buying caps and some +other things for a sea voyage. I went into the shop and called to them, +and my! both of them jumped as if they were shot, and Merwell got so +pale I thought he was going to faint. I said "Hello," but they didn't +answer to that, and Jasniff at once wanted to know if I was alone. When +I told him I was he seemed mightily relieved, and Merwell looked +relieved, too. They wanted to know what I was doing there and I told +them. Then I asked what they were doing, but I couldn't get any straight +answer. Merwell started to say something about going to sea, but Jasniff +stopped him short, and said they guessed they would go back to New York, +where they had come from. + +"'It was awful funny--they positively looked scared to death, and while +they were talking to me they looked over my shoulders, as if on their +guard against somebody. I asked them what they had been doing since they +left Rockville, and they said not much of anything, just traveling +around. They seemed to have plenty of money, for just as I went into the +shop I saw Merwell pay for something from a big roll of greenbacks. + +"'After I left them, I got a bit curious about the pair, and so I +watched them come from the shop and walk down to one of the docks and go +aboard a big four-masted schooner. I hung around a little and pretty +soon they came from the schooner and went up to one of the big hotels, +and there I lost sight of them. Each had his little valise with him, but +they weren't big enough for much clothing. My, but they were scared! I +fancy they thought I might pitch into them for the mean things they did +in the past. But I didn't want to start any row.'" + +"Is that all he says?" demanded Dave, after the senator's son had +finished. + +"That's all he says about Merwell and Jasniff and their doings." + +"Doesn't he mention the name of that schooner, or the hotel?" asked +Phil. + +"No." + +"Did you say Luke was going to Jacksonville?" asked our hero. + +"Yes, his whole family are down there." + +"Then I could telegraph to him and he could give me the name of the +hotel, and of the schooner." + +"Dave, what do you make out of this?" demanded the senator's son. + +"I make out of it that Merwell and Jasniff are guilty!" burst out Dave. +"They went from here to Florida, and now they have either gone to sea, +or are going, as soon as that schooner sails. Do you notice what Luke +says about their being scared almost to death when they saw him? They +evidently thought some of us, or the officers of the law, were with +him." + +"And the little valises!" burst out the shipowner's son. "Perhaps they +contain the jewels!" + +"Would they be foolish enough to carry them around like that?" +questioned Roger. "Wouldn't they hide them?" + +"They may be looking for some good hiding-place, or some place where +they can sell them," answered Dave. "Remember, Jasniff and Merwell are +green at this business--they wouldn't go at it like professionals. If +they were professionals, they wouldn't have acted so scared." + +"That is true. What will you do, tell Mr. Wadsworth of this?" + +"I think I'll tell my father and my Uncle Dunston first. Mr. Wadsworth +doesn't place much credit in the story of Merwell and Jasniff's guilt. +He thinks the detectives are on the right track." + +"Well, possibly they are," admitted Phil. "But I must say, this looks +mighty suspicious to me." + +"I have half a mind to take matters in my own hands and run down to +Jacksonville," went on our hero. "Who knows but what I might find +Merwell and Jasniff? If I did, I could stop them and make them give an +account of themselves by making that old charge of abduction against +them, and that charge of having used my name." + +"Say, that's an idea!" cried Roger. "And say, I'd like to go with you." + +"So would I," added Phil. "We might go down in one of my father's +ships." + +"Too slow, Phil--the limited express for this trip," answered Dave. "But +I must talk it over with dad first," he added. + +"We have got over three weeks before school opens again," pursued the +senator's son. "We could go down to Florida and back easily in that +time." + +Dave's father had gone to New York on business, but came home that +evening. In the meantime a telegram was sent to Luke Watson, asking for +the name of the hotel, at which Merwell and Jasniff had stopped, and of +the schooner. + +Dave's father and his uncle listened closely to what he had to tell, and +to the reading of the letter from Luke Watson. They talked the affair +over for an hour with the boys. + +"You may be right, boys," said Mr. Porter, at last. "And it may be a +good plan to follow those rascals up. But I don't think I would bother +Mr. Wadsworth about it. He received a telegram from one of the +detectives, and the officer is more sure than ever that he is on the +right track. He caught Red Andrews pawning a fair-sized diamond, and he +thinks the gem is from the Carwith collection." + +"Can't he make Red Andrews confess?" asked Dave. + +"Unfortunately the rascal got away when on the way to the +police-station. But the detective feels he can soon round him up again." + +Dave looked thoughtfully out of the window and tapped the table with his +fingers. + +"You still think Merwell and Jasniff guilty?" remarked his uncle, with a +smile. + +"Yes, Uncle Dunston. After what Hooker Montgomery said, I'll think them +guilty until somebody proves otherwise." + +"Then I tell you what I'll do, boys," said Dunston Porter. "I'll take a +trip down to Florida with you and look into this matter. I'd rather be +on the move than sitting still waiting for something to turn up." + +"Will you go?" cried Dave, eagerly. + +"I will." + +"When?" + +"As soon as you wish, and we can get train accommodations." + +"Hadn't we better wait until we hear from Luke?" suggested Roger. + +"No, let us get off at once!" exclaimed Dave. "If he sends word after we +are gone, it can be forwarded to us." And so it was arranged. + +Great was the surprise of the Wadsworths and of Laura when the boys and +Dunston Porter announced that they were going to start for Florida the +next morning. + +"Why, Dave?" asked Jessie. "Why are you going in such a hurry?" + +"Oh, I hardly care to tell, Jessie," he answered. "It may prove only a +wild goose chase." + +"It is about the missing jewels?" + +"Yes." + +"Then you are after Merwell and Jasniff." + +"Yes, but please don't tell any outsiders." + +"Oh, Dave, don't get into any trouble!" cried the girl, as she clung to +him. "They are such bad fellows! You know what they have done to you in +the past!" + +"I am not afraid of them." + +"Oh, I know how brave you are, Dave! But--but don't let them harm you--for +my sake, please!" And then the tears came into her eyes and she hid her +face on his arm. + +"There! there! don't worry!" he said, as he bent over her, and then he +kissed her forehead. "We'll be back before long," and he gave her a +little hug. Then the others came in. + +Laura was also worried, but glad that her uncle would be along. She +helped Dave to pack his suit-case. Phil and Roger also packed up, and +sent word home regarding the proposed trip. As my old readers know, all +the boys were well-to-do, so the expenses did not bother them. + +At breakfast time the following morning came a telegram from Luke +Watson. It read as follows: + +"The hotel was the Castor. Think schooner was the _Emma Brown_, or +_Black_, or _Jones_. Common name." + +"Well, that isn't very definite, but it is something to work on," +remarked Dunston Porter. + +Soon the party of four were ready to start. There was a general +hand-shaking and also a few kisses. + +"Well, have a good time, even if you don't catch those fellows," said +Mrs. Wadsworth. + +"Keep out of trouble," warned Laura. + +"Yes, yes, don't let them harm you," pleaded timid Jessie. + +"And let us hear from you often," said Mr. Porter. + +"I don't know what to say about this," said Oliver Wadsworth, shaking +his head, slowly. "But if you do get on the track of those jewels, leave +no stone unturned to get them." + +"Leave that to me, Mr. Wadsworth," said Dunston Porter. "If we find +those young men have the gems--or had them--we'll get them back, never +fear." And he spoke in a tone that showed he meant what he said. + +They went to the depot in the family sleigh. Ben had heard of their +going away and was there to see them off. Soon the train rolled in that +was to carry the travelers to New York City. + +"Good-by!" cried the boys, as they clambered aboard the car. + +"Good-by!" called Ben. "I wish you luck." And then the girls waved their +hands, and the train moved off, slowly at first and then faster and +faster, until Crumville was left behind. + +"It's a great trip they are taking," said Ben, to Laura and Jessie. +"Wish I was going along." + +"Why didn't you go?" questioned Laura. + +"Oh, I've got some things to do at home," answered Ben. He did not care +to add that his father did not wish to stand the extra expense. Mr. +Basswood was fairly well-to-do, but thought he was spending enough on +his son by sending him to boarding-school. + +The sleigh was about to drive off when the station agent came running +out, waving a yellow envelope. + +"Is Mr. Wadsworth here?" he questioned, of Jessie. + +"No, Mr. Mack, my father went to business. What is it, a telegram?" + +"Yes,--something very important too." + +"Then give it to me and I will take it to him at once." + +"I could send it, but----" + +"Never mind. Here, I will sign for it," and Jessie did so. Then the whip +cracked and the horses started for the jewelry works on a gallop. + +When Jessie handed the telegram to her father he opened it and read the +contents eagerly. His face lit up. + +"This is good news!" he cried. "Good news! I must go to Boston at once." + +"Have they found the jewels?" questioned his daughter. + +"The detective thinks he has located them. Yes, I must go at once." And +Mr. Wadsworth hurried off to prepare for the journey. + + + + +CHAPTER XV--SOMETHING ABOUT WHITE MICE + + +Dunston Porter and the boys were to go to New York City and there +transfer to Jersey City for the train bound South. All had comfortable +seats together. + +"It's going to be quite a trip," said Roger, as he settled back to gaze +at the swiftly-moving panorama of fields covered with snow. + +"Yes, and we are going to journey from winter into summer," added Phil. +"It's good we remembered that when we packed our suit-cases. At first I +was going to put in nothing but heavy clothing." + +"I am glad we heard from Luke," said Dave. "That gives us a little to +work on. I hope the _Emma Brown_, or whatever her name may be, hasn't +sailed yet." + +"Won't Merwell and Jasniff be surprised if we do locate them?" said the +senator's son. "I suppose they think we are at home." + +The car was only half-filled with passengers, so the boys and Dunston +Porter had plenty of room, and they moved around from one seat to +another. So the time passed quickly enough, until they rolled into the +Grand Central Station, in New York. + +"Well, little old New York looks as busy as ever," was Phil's comment, +as they stepped out on the street. "Are we to transfer to Jersey City at +once?" + +"Yes," answered Dunston Porter. "We'll take the subway and the river +tube, and get there in no time." + +Riding through the tube under the Hudson River was a new experience for +the lads and they rather enjoyed it. The train of steel cars rushed +along at a good rate of speed, and almost before they knew it, they were +in New Jersey and being hoisted up in an elevator to the train-shed. + +"Coast Line Express!" was the cry at one of the numerous gates to the +tracks, and thither the party hurried. Willing porters took their +baggage, and a minute later they found themselves in an elegant Pullman +car. Dunston Porter had telegraphed ahead for sleeping accommodations, +and they had two double seats opposite each other, directly in the +middle of the car. + +"All aboard!" sang out the conductor, about ten minutes later, and then +the long train rolled slowly from the big train-shed, and the trip to +Florida could be said to have fairly begun. + +"Do we go by the way of Philadelphia and Washington?" asked Phil, who +had not taken the time to study the route. + +"Yes," answered Dunston Porter. "Here is a time-table. That will show +you the whole route and tell you just when we get to each place." + +"Will we have to make any changes?" asked Roger. + +"None whatever." + +Soon the train had left Jersey City behind and a little later it stopped +at Newark, and then sped on towards Philadelphia. By this time it had +grown too dark to see the landscape and the boys and Dunston Porter +retired. + +On and on through the long night rolled the train, keeping fairly close +to the Atlantic sea-coast. With nothing to do, the boys did not arise +until late in the morning. They found Dave's uncle in the lavatory ahead +of them, indulging in the luxury of a shave with a safety razor. + +"Well, how are you feeling?" asked Dunston Porter. + +"Fine!" cried Dave. + +"Couldn't feel better," added the senator's son. + +"Ready for a big breakfast?" + +"I am," answered Phil, promptly. "Gracious, but traveling makes me +hungry!" + +They had to wait a little before they could get seats together in the +dining-car and they amused themselves by gazing at the settlements +through which they were passing. Here and there were numerous cabins, +with hordes of colored children playing about. + +"This is the Southland, true enough," observed Dave. "Just see how happy +those pickaninnies seem to be!" + +"Yes, one would almost envy their care-free dispositions," answered +Dunston Porter. "Their manner shows that it doesn't take money to make +one happy." + +They had passed through Richmond and were now on their way to Emporia. +It was growing steadily warmer, and by noon all were glad enough to +leave the car and go out on the observation platform at the end of the +train. + +The next stop was at Fayetteville and after that came Charleston. Long +before this the snow had disappeared and the fields looked as green as +in the fall at home. + +"We'll be at Jacksonville when you wake up in the morning," said Dunston +Porter, as they turned into their berths the second night on the train. + +"Good! We can't get there any too quick for me!" answered Dave. + +"You mustn't expect too much, Dave. You may be bitterly disappointed," +remarked his uncle, gravely. + +"Oh, we've just got to catch Merwell and Jasniff, Uncle Dunston!" + +"Yes, but they may not be guilty. You'll have to go slow about accusing +them." + +"Well, I want to catch them and question them anyway. I can have them +detained on the old charge, you know--that is, if they try to get away +from me." + +Dave and Phil slept on one side of the car, with Dunston Porter and +Roger on the other. As the steam heat was still turned on, it was +uncomfortably warm, and as a consequence Dave was rather restless. He +tumbled and tossed in his berth, which was the upper one, and wished +that the night were over and that they were in Jacksonville. + +"Oh, pshaw! I really must get some sleep!" he told himself. "If I don't, +I'll be as sleepy as an owl to-morrow and not fit to hunt up those +rascals. Yes, I must go to sleep," and he did what he could to settle +himself. + +He had just closed his eyes when a peculiar noise below him made him +start up. Phil was thrashing around wildly. + +"What's the matter, Phil?" he asked, in a low tone. + +"Something is in my berth, some animal, or something!" answered the +shipowner's son. "I can't go to sleep for it. Every time I lie down it +begins to move." + +"Maybe it's a rat." + +"Whoever heard of a rat in a sleeping-car?" snorted Phil. + +"Perhaps you were dreaming. I didn't hear anything," went on Dave. + +"No, I wasn't dreaming--I heard it as plain as day." + +"Better go to bed and forget it, Phil," and then Dave lay down again. +The shipowner's son grumbled a little under his breath, then turned off +his electric light, and sank on his pillow once more. + +Dave remained quiet for several minutes and then sat bolt upright and +gave a low cry. There was no mistake about it, something had moved over +his feet and given him a slight nip in the toe. + +"Phil!" he called, softly. "Did you do that? Come, no fooling now. This +is no place for jokes." + +"Do what?" + +"Pinch me in the toe." + +"I haven't touched your toe. How can I from the lower berth?" + +"Well, something nipped me." + +"Maybe it's you who are dreaming this trip, Dave," returned the +shipowner's son, with pardonable sarcasm. + +Dave did not reply, for just then he felt something moving in the +blanket. He made a clutch for it. A little squeak followed. + +"I've got it, Phil!" + +"What is it?" + +"I don't know yet--it's in the blanket." + +"Oh, what a noise!" came from the berth beyond. "Cannot you young men be +quiet?" It was a woman who was speaking. She was an elderly person and +Dave had noticed, during the day, that she was rather sour-looking. + +"Sorry, madam, but I've just caught something in my berth," answered +Dave. "I'll turn up the light and see what it is," he added, as he held +on to the object in the blanket with one hand and turned on the electric +illumination with the other. + +The cries and talking had awakened half a dozen people and the sleepy +porter came down the aisle to find out what was wrong. + +"It's a mouse--a white mouse!" cried Dave, as the little creature was +uncovered. + +"Wot's dat, a mouse!" exclaimed the porter. "Nebber heard of sech a +t'ing! How did he git yeah?" + +"Don't ask me," replied Dave. "Ugh! he nipped me in the toe, too!" + +"Here's another one!" roared Phil. "Ran right across my arm! Take that, +you little imp!" he added, and bang! one of his shoes hit the woodwork +of the car. + +"A mouse!" shrieked the elderly woman. "Did you say a mouse, young man?" + +"I did--and there is more than one, too," answered Dave, for he had felt +another movement at his feet. He lost no time in scrambling up, and Phil +followed. + +By this time the whole sleeping-car was in an uproar. Everybody who +heard the word "mouse" felt certain one of the creatures must be in his +or her berth. + +"Porter! porter! save me!" screamed the elderly lady. "Oh, mice, just +think of it!" And wrapping her dressing-gown around her, she leaped from +her berth and sped for the ladies' room. Others also got up, including +Dunston Porter and Roger. + +"What am I going to do with this fellow?" asked Dave, as he held the +mouse up in his vest. + +"Better throw it out of a window," suggested his uncle. "Mice in a +sleeper! This is certainly the limit!" he muttered. "The railroad +company better get a new system of cleaning." + +"Mice!" screamed a young lady. "Oh, I shall die!" she shrieked, and +looked ready to faint. + +"Shoot 'em, why don't you?" suggested a fat man, who came forth from his +berth wearing a blanket, Indian fashion. + +By this time Phil had caught one of the creatures. Both he and Dave +started for the rear of the car, to throw the mice off the train. + +"Stop! stop! I beg of you, don't kill those mice!" came suddenly from a +tall, thin young man who had been sleeping in a berth at the end of the +car. Dave had noticed him during the day and had put him down as a +preacher or actor. + +"Why not?" asked our hero. + +"They are mine, that's why," said the man. "I would not have them killed +for a thousand dollars!" + +"Say, wot yo'-all talkin' about?" demanded the porter. "Dem mice yours?" + +"Yes! yes! Oh, please do not kill them!" pleaded the tall, thin man. +"They won't hurt anybody, really they won't." + +"Say, are them white mice educated?" demanded the fat man. + +"Indeed they are--I educated them myself," answered the other man. "I +spent months in doing it, too. They are the best-educated white mice in +the United States," he added, proudly. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI--PICKING UP THE TRAIL + + +The announcement that the mice that had been caught in the car were +educated filled the boys with interest, but it did not lessen their +indignation nor that of the other passengers. + +"The idea of mice on the train, even if they are educated!" shrilled the +elderly lady. + +"It's outrageous!" stormed another lady. "I never heard of such a thing +in all my life!" + +"Say, you must take this for a cattle train!" remarked the fat man, +bluntly. "If you do, you've got another guess coming." + +"Oh, my dear, sweet mice," said the tall, slim man, as he took the +animal from Dave and also the one that Phil was holding. "That is King +Hal and this one is President Tom! They are both highly educated. They +can----" + +"Say, howsoeber did yo'-all git dem trash in dis cah!" demanded the +porter. + +"I--er--I had them in a cage in my--er--in my suit-case," the owner of the +mice answered, and now his voice faltered. "I really didn't think they +would get out." + +"We don't allow no mice in de sleepin'-cahs!" stormed the porter. "Dogs, +an' cats, an' parrots, an' mice goes in de baggage-cah." + +"Are there any more of them loose?" asked one of the ladies. + +"I will see!" cried the tall, slim man. "I forgot about that! Oh, I hope +they are safe! If they are not, what shall I do? I have an engagement in +Jacksonville, and another in St. Augustine, to fill." + +"Do you show 'em on the stage?" snorted the fat man. + +"To be sure. Haven't you heard of me, Professor Richard De Haven, the +world-famous trainer of mice, rats, and cats? I have exhibited my mice +in all the countries of the world, and----" + +"Never mind that just now," interrupted Dunston Porter. "Go and see if +the others are safe, otherwise we'll have to round up your live-stock +before we go to sleep again." + +"Oh, I shall never sleep another wink in this car!" sighed a lady. + +"I shall!" snorted the fat man, "or else get the price of my berth out +of that chap, or the railroad company!" + +Professor De Haven ran to his berth and dragged forth a dress-suit-case. +A moment later he uttered a genuine howl of dismay. + +"They are all gone!" + +"How many?" queried Dave, who had followed him. + +"Sixteen of them, not counting the two I have here now! O dear, what +shall I do?" And the professor wrung his hands in despair. + +"Sixteen mice at large!" shrieked one of the ladies. "Oh, stop the +train! I want to get off!" + +"Can't stop no train now," answered the porter. "We'se got to jest catch +dem mice somehow, but I dunno how it's gwine to be done," he went on, +scratching his woolly head in perplexity. + +"I've got a shotgun along," suggested the fat man. "Might go gunning +with that." + +"I'll get my cane," said another man. + +"I guess the ladies better retire to the next car," suggested a third +passenger. + +"Yes, yes, let us go, at once!" cried the elderly lady. "Porter, can I +get a berth there?" + +"Sorry, missus, but I dun reckon all de berths on dis yeah train am +tooken." + +"See here!" cried Dave, to Professor De Haven. "If the mice are +educated, can't you call them to you in some way?" + +"To be sure!" cried the professor, struck by the idea. "Why did I not +think of that myself? I was too upset to think of anything. Yes, I can +whistle for them." + +"Whistle for 'em?" snorted the fat man. + +"Yes, yes! I always whistle when I feed them. Please be quiet. I shall +have to whistle loudly, for the train makes such a noise and it may be +some of my dear pets may not hear me!" + +"Humph! Then you better whistle for all you're worth!" returned the man +of weight. + +Walking slowly up and down the sleeping-car Professor De Haven commenced +to whistle in a clear, steady trill. He kept this up for fully a minute +and by that time several white mice had shown themselves. They were +somewhat scared, but gradually they came to him and ran up on his +shoulders. + +"Well, doesn't that beat the Dutch!" whispered Roger, half in +admiration. + +"I shouldn't have been so scared if I had known they were educated," +returned Phil. + +"Hush!" said Dave. "Give him a chance to gather them all in." + +Placing the captured mice in their cage, the professor moved up and down +the car once more, opening the berth curtains as he did so. He continued +to emit that same clear trill, and soon his shoulders were full of the +white mice. + +"Only one is missing, little General Pinky," he announced. + +"Spit, spat, spow! Where did Pinky go?" murmured Phil. + +"Ha! I have him! Dear little Pinky!" cried the professor, as the mouse +dropped onto his shoulder from an upper berth. "Now I have them all, +ladies and gentlemen," he announced. "You can go to sleep without alarm. +I shall take good care that they do not get away again." + +"I dun reckon I'se gwine to take care of dat!" put in the porter. "Dem +mice am gwine into de baggage-cah dis minit!" + +"But, my dear fellow----" broke in the professor. + +"I ain't a-gwine to argy de question, mistah. Da is gwine in de +baggage-cah!" And the porter reached out and caught hold of the cage +containing the mice. + +"Then I shall go with them," answered the professor, resignedly. + +"Suit yo' self, sah." + +"But they wouldn't hurt a flea!" + +"Can't help it, sah, it's de baggage-cah fo' dis collection of wild +animals," answered the porter, striding off with the cage in his hands, +while the professor followed. + +"Talk about something happening!" burst out Roger, when the excitement +was over. "This was the funniest experience I ever had." + +"I am sure I don't see anything funny about it!" snapped the elderly +lady, who overheard the remark. "I think that man ought to be +prosecuted!" + +"He didn't expect his mice to get loose," said Dunston Porter. "Just the +same, he had no right to bring them in here. As the porter said, all +animals must go in the baggage-car." + +"Wonder if he'll come back," mused Phil. + +"I doubt it," answered Dave. "Well, now I'm going to try to get a little +sleep," he added, as he climbed back into his berth. The others followed +suit, and presently one after another dropped into slumber. It may be +added here that Professor De Haven did not show himself again while on +the train, he being afraid of the indignation of those who had been +disturbed by his educated mice. + +Early the following morning found our friends in the city of +Jacksonville, which, as my readers must know, is located on the St. +John's River. They did not wait for breakfast but hurried at once in the +direction of the Hotel Castor, once a leading hostelry of the city, but +which had seen its best day. + +"Quite a town," remarked the senator's son, as they passed along. + +"Jacksonville is now the main city of Florida," replied Dunston Porter. +"It is a great shipping center, and is also well-known as a winter +resort." + +"How balmy the weather is!" was Phil's comment. "Just like spring at +home!" + +Dave's uncle had been in Jacksonville several times and knew the way +well. Soon they reached the hotel, and with his heart beating loudly, +Dave hurried up to the desk and asked the clerk if Link Merwell and Nick +Jasniff were stopping there. + +"Never heard of them," replied the clerk, after thinking a moment. + +"I have photographs, perhaps you can tell them from that," went on Dave, +and he drew from his pocket two photographs, taken at different times at +Oak Hall. Each showed a group of students, and in one group was Merwell +and in the other Jasniff. + +The clerk looked at the pictures closely. + +"What is this, some joke?" he asked, suspiciously. + +"No, it is a matter of great importance," answered Dave. "We must find +those two young men if we possibly can." + +"Well, if they are the pair who were here some days ago, you are too +late. But their names weren't what you said." + +"What did they call themselves?" asked Dunston Porter. + +"John Leeds and Samuel Cross," answered the clerk. "They had Room 87, +and were here two days." + +"Do you know where they went to?" asked Phil. + +"I do not." + +"Can you tell me anything at all about them?" went on Dave. "It is very +important, indeed." + +"I might as well tell you," put in Mr. Porter, in a low voice. "They +were a pair of criminals." + +"You don't say! Well, do you know, I didn't much like their looks," +returned the clerk. "And come to think of it, one acted rather +scared-like, the fellow calling himself Leeds--this one," and he pointed +to the picture of Link Merwell. + +"And you haven't any idea where they went to?" + +"Not the slightest. They simply paid their bill and went away." + +"Did they have any trunks sent off?" asked Roger. "We might find the +expressman," he explained, to the others. + +"No, they had nothing but hand baggage." + +"What--can you remember that?" questioned Dave. + +"Yes, each had a suit-case and a small valise,--kind of a tool-bag +affair." + +"Better look for that schooner, Dave," said his uncle, in a low voice, +and in a few minutes more they left the hotel, telling the clerk that +they might be back. + +"Shall we get breakfast now?" questioned the senator's son. He was +beginning to grow hungry. + +"You can get something to eat if you wish, Roger," answered Dave. "I am +going to try to locate that schooner first." + +"No, I'll wait too, then," said Roger. + +The shipping along the St. John's River at Jacksonville is rather +extensive. But Dunston Porter knew his business and went direct to one +of the offices where he knew he could find out all about the ships going +out under charter and otherwise. + +"We want to find out about a schooner named the _Emma Brown_, or +_Black_, or _Jones_, or some common name like that," said Dave's uncle, +to the elderly man in charge. "She was in this harbor several days ago. +I don't know if she has sailed or not." + +"_Emma Brown_, eh?" mused the shipping-clerk. "Never heard of such a +schooner." + +"Maybe she was the _Emma Black_, or _Emma Jones_," suggested Dave. + +"No schooner by that name here,--at least not for the past month or two. +We had an _Emma Blackney_ here about six weeks ago. But she sailed for +Nova Scotia." + +"Well, try to think of some ship that might be named something like what +we said," pleaded Dave. "This is very important." + +"A ship that might have sailed from here in the past two or three days," +added Roger. + +The elderly shipping-clerk leaned back in his chair and ran his hand +through his hair, thoughtfully. + +"Maybe you're looking for the _Emma Brower_," he said. "But she isn't a +schooner, she's a bark. She left this port yesterday morning." + +"Bound for where?" asked Dave, eagerly. + +"Bound for Barbados." + +"Where is that?" questioned Phil. "I've heard of the place, but I can't +just locate it." + +"It's an island of the British West Indies," answered Dunston Porter. +"It lies about five hundred miles southeast of Porto Rico." + +"If that's the case, then good-by to Merwell and Jasniff," murmured +Phil. "We'll never catch them in the wide world." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII--MEETING OLD FRIENDS + + +"They may have gone on some other vessel," remarked Roger, after a +pause. "Let us find out what other ships have left here during the past +few days." + +"Say," said Phil, to the elderly shipping-clerk. "Maybe you know my +father or some of the captains working for him. His name is Lawrence, of +the Lawrence Lines." + +"Indeed!" cried the shipping-clerk. "Well, of course I know him! Are you +Phil Lawrence?" he questioned, eagerly. + +"I am." + +"Now isn't that strange!" The man put out his hand. "I don't suppose you +know me. My name is Sam Castner. I was once a supercargo for your +father, on the _Arvinus_. You took a trip in her with your mother, when +you were about ten years old,--down to Tampa and back, from +Philadelphia." + +"That's right, so I did!" cried the shipowner's son. "I remember you +now. We went fishing together." + +"So we did, Mr. Lawrence. My, how you've grown since then!" added the +former supercargo, as he gazed at Phil's tall and well-built form. + +"Mr. Castner, we are in a hurry, and maybe you can help us a good deal," +went on Phil. "We are after two fellows who we think sailed in that +schooner, or bark, or some vessel that left here within the past two +days. They were young fellows, not much older than us boys. Will you aid +us in getting on their track?" + +"Sure I will," was the ready answer. "What do you know about 'em?" + +"All we know is that they went under the names of Leeds and Cross," +answered Dave. "But those are not their right names." + +"And that they are supposed to have sailed on the ship known by a common +name--_Emma_ something or other," put in Roger. + +"I can soon find out who sailed on the _Emma Brower_" answered Sam +Castner. "Come with me to the next shipping office." + +He called another clerk to take charge, and accompanied the party to the +next shipping office. On the way he was introduced to Dave and the +others. + +"One of your father's vessels is in this harbor now," he said to Phil. + +"What ship is that?" + +"The _Golden Eagle_, Captain Sanders." + +"Captain Sanders!" cried Dave. "Do you mean Bob Sanders, who used to +sail on the _Stormy Petrel_ with Captain Marshall?" + +"The same, Mr. Porter. Then you know him?" + +"Indeed I do!" returned Dave. "Why, I sailed with him in the South +Seas!" + +"Well, he's here." + +"We'll have to try to see him before we leave," said Phil. "He was a +nice fellow." + +At the second shipping office further inquiries were made concerning the +sailing of the _Emma Brower_. It was learned that the bark had carried +not more than half a cargo for Barbados and eight passengers. The names +of Merwell, Jasniff, Leeds, or Cross did not appear on the passenger +list. + +"Did anybody here see those passengers?" asked Dunston Porter. + +"I did," returned a young clerk. "I was aboard just before she sailed, +and I saw all of them." + +"Were there two young fellows, chums?" asked Dave. + +"There were, two tall chaps, a bit older than you." + +"Did they look like these fellows?" and now our hero brought out the +photographs he had used before. + +"They certainly did!" cried the clerk. "I remember this fellow +distinctly," and he pointed to Jasniff's picture, taken just before that +individual had run away from Oak Hall. + +"Then they sailed, just as we feared!" returned Dave, and there was +something like a groan in his voice. + +"Wonder if they took the jewels," murmured Roger. + +"Most likely, Roger," answered Dunston Porter. + +"But what would they do with them in such an out-of-the-way place as +Barbados?" + +"I rather imagine their plan is to keep quiet for a while, until this +affair blows over. Then they'll either return to the United States, or +take a British vessel for England. Barbados is an English possession, +you must remember, and a regular line of steamers sail from there to +England." + +"I wonder if we couldn't charter a steam tug and go after the bark?" +mused Dave. + +"It might be done," returned his uncle. "But I doubt if we could catch +the bark, or even locate her. She has too much of a start." + +"Was the bark going to stop at any ports along the way?" asked Phil. + +"She was not," answered the young shipping-clerk. + +"Then there is nothing to do but to sail for Barbados after them!" cried +Dave. + +"Sail after them--that far!" ejaculated the senator's son. + +"Yes, Roger. Of course you haven't got to go, or Phil either. But I +think my uncle and I ought to go after 'em. Don't you think so, Uncle +Dunston?" + +"I don't know--perhaps," was the slow reply. "We had better make a few +more inquiries first, Dave." + +"Oh, yes, let us find out all we can about Merwell and Jasniff." + +They left the shipping office and walked back to the hotel. Here they +had a late breakfast and then commenced to make diligent inquiries +concerning all the movements of Merwell and Jasniff. They soon learned +that the pair had had plenty of money to spend, and that they had bought +many things for the trip to Barbados, even taking along an extra supply +of the Turkish cigarettes that came in the boxes with bands of blue and +gold. + +"I think that that proves my clew of the cigarette box is correct," said +Dave. + +They visited the local pawnbrokers, and from one of them learned that +Merwell had pawned two diamonds for two hundred and fifty dollars. The +rascal had told the pawnbroker that the gems were the property of a rich +lady who was awaiting a remittance from France. + +"Do these diamonds belong to the Carwith collection?" asked Roger. + +"That remains to be found out," answered Dunston Porter, and then he +told the pawnbroker to be sure and not let the gems go out of his +possession until a further investigation could be made. The man grumbled +somewhat, but when Dave's uncle spoke about calling in the officers of +the law, he subsided. + +"Very well, I'll keep them," he said. "And if anything is wrong, I'll do +what the law requires, even if I lose by it." + +"Let us visit the _Golden Eagle_ and see Bob Sanders," said Phil, late +in the afternoon. "Perhaps he knows something about the _Emma Brower_, +and her trip." + +The others were willing, and sundown found them aboard the vessel +belonging to Phil's father. Hardly had they stepped on deck when a +grizzled old tar, with white hair, rushed up to Dave. + +"If it ain't Dave Porter!" he burst out. "Yes, sir, Dave, wot I haven't +seen in a year o' Sundays! How be you, my boy?" And he caught the youth +by both hands. + +"Billy Dill!" exclaimed our hero, as his face lit up with pleasure. +"Where in the world did you drop from? I thought you had given up the +sea." + +Billy Dill, as my old readers will remember, was the tar who aided Dave +in locating his Uncle Dunston. As related in "Dave Porter in the South +Seas," Billy Dill had traveled with our hero to that portion of the +globe, in the _Stormy Petrel_, of which Bob Sanders was, at the time, +second mate. On returning home, the old tar had been placed in a +sanitarium and then a sailors' home, and Dave had imagined he was still +in the latter retreat. + +"Couldn't give up the sea, Dave," replied the old sailor. "I tried my +best, but it wasn't no use. So I goes to Phil's old man, an' I says, +says I, 'Give me a berth an' anything I'm wuth,' an' he says, says he, +'How would ye like to sail with Cap'n Sanders, wot sailed with you to +the South Seas?' 'Fust-rate,' says I; an' here I be, an' likes it very +much." + +"Well, I'm glad to see you looking so well," answered Dave. + +"It's the sea air done it, lad. When I was ashore I jest knowed I wanted +sea air. No more homes ashore fer Billy Dill, not much!" And the old tar +shook his head with conviction. + +A few minutes later, while the old sailor was shaking hands with the +others, and asking and answering questions, the captain of the ship came +up. + +"Very glad indeed to see you again," said Captain Sanders, with a broad +smile. He looked closely at the boys. "Grown some since I saw you last." + +"And you have advanced, too," answered Dave, with a grin. "Let me +congratulate you on becoming a captain, Mr. Sanders." + +"It's all through the kindness of Mr. Lawrence and Captain Marshall. If +it wasn't for them, I shouldn't be in this berth." + +"How is Captain Marshall?" asked our hero. The man mentioned was the +commander of the ship in which Dave had sailed to the South Seas. + +"First-rate, the last I heard of him. He sailed from San Francisco to +Manila ten days ago." + +"Captain Sanders, what port are you bound for next?" questioned Phil, +after greetings had been exchanged all around and a number of other +questions had been asked. + +"No port as yet, Phil. I'm waiting for orders." + +"Have you any idea where you may go to?" + +"Something was said about a cargo for Porto Rico. But nothing was +settled. I'll know in a couple of days, I think." + +"Do any of our ships ever sail to Barbados?" + +"Not very often. I could have had a cargo for that port from here, but +the firm didn't take it, and it went to the _Emma Brower_." + +"The very ship we are after!" murmured Dave. + +"Could you get another cargo for Barbados, do you think?" + +"I don't know--maybe. Why?" + +"We want to go there!" + +"You do! That isn't much of a place." + +"But we have a reason for wanting to go," went on Phil. And then, +knowing he could trust Captain Sanders, he told the story of the stolen +gems and the search for Merwell and Jasniff. + +"Humph! that's a queer yarn," mused the captain of the _Golden Eagle_. +"Supposing I got a cargo for that port--you'd go along?" + +"I would," answered the shipowner's son, promptly. "That is, if dad +would let me--and I'm sure he would." + +"So would I go," added Dave. + +"I'd have to go--to look after the others," said Dunston Porter, with a +smile. + +"Well, you can't leave me in the cold," came from Roger. "If the rest +went, I'd go too." + +"Come down to the cabin and talk it over," said Captain Sanders, and led +the way across the deck and down the companionway. + +Once below they were invited to remain to supper and did so. While at +the meal the boys and Dunston Porter told all they knew concerning the +case against Merwell and Jasniff, and the captain told what he knew +about the _Emma Brower_ and her commander. + +"I am going to telegraph to my father about this," said Phil, a little +later. "If this vessel can get a cargo for Barbados she might as well +sail for that port as anywhere." + +"Well, I'm willing," answered Captain Sanders. "When will you send word +to him?" + +"Right away--I'll send him a telegram at once." + +"I hope it turns out all right," said Dave. "I feel it is my duty to get +after Merwell and Jasniff, and do it as soon as possible." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII--OFF FOR BARBADOS + + +The next three days were busy ones for the boys and Dunston Porter. +Telegrams were sent back and forth between Phil and his father, and also +between Dave and Mr. Wadsworth. + +"Here is news!" cried our hero, after receiving one of the messages. +"Just listen to this." And he read the following, from the jewelry +manufacturer: + + "Clew in Boston proved to be false, also clew in New York. Hope you + are on the right track and get gems. Spare no expense if you feel + you are right." + +"And here is a telegram from my dad," said Phil. "He tells us--Captain +Sanders and myself--to use our own judgment." + +"Can you get a cargo for Barbados, Phil?" asked Roger. + +"We can get a half-cargo." + +"At once?" + +"Yes, that is, inside of two days." + +"Then by all means take it, Phil!" cried Dave. "I know Mr. Wadsworth +will stand the extra expense. And if he won't, I know my father will." + +"Where is your Uncle Dunston?" questioned the shipowner's son. + +"He's out on a little business trip. He got a telegram from New York +that upset him somewhat. I hope it isn't anything serious," added +Dave, soberly. + +The boys rushed off to talk the matter over with Captain Sanders. They +found the master of the vessel at the shipping office, talking over +the matter of a cargo for Barbados. + +"Four men want to take passage with us, if we go," said the captain. +"That will help pay for the trip, since they are willing to pay good +passage money." + +"We want you to take that half-cargo," said Phil, and explained +matters. + +"All right, if you say so," answered Captain Sanders. "But you had +better speak to Mr. Porter about it first." + +Half an hour later Dunston Porter came driving up in a cab. He was +plainly excited. + +"I've got to go to New York at once," he said. "I must look after some +valuable investments in Wall Street. Do you think you boys can get +along alone?" + +"I think we can, Uncle Dunston," answered Dave. "You know we are used +to taking care of ourselves," and he smiled faintly. + +"Then go ahead and do as you think best." + +"We want Captain Sanders to start for Barbados as soon as he can," +went on our hero, and told of the telegrams received. + +A general talk followed, lasting until Dunston Porter had to ride away +to catch the train for New York. + +"You must be right, and Merwell and Jasniff must be guilty," he said. +"And if they are, spare no expense in catching them. I think the +quicker you start for Barbados the better. And as soon as you arrive +do your best to locate the rascals and have the authorities arrest +them. And above all things, keep your eyes open for the jewels, for we +need them much more than we need to catch Merwell and Jasniff. To +catch the rascals and miss the gems will do us no good." + +"I understand, Uncle Dunston," answered Dave. "And if the jewels are +anywhere around we'll locate them." + +"Then good-by and good luck!" finished Dunston Porter, and in a minute +more he was off. + +As soon as he was gone the boys and Captain Sanders commenced +preparations for the trip to Barbados. An extra number of longshoremen +were engaged, so that the half-cargo to be taken along could be gotten +aboard quickly, and the boys spent their time in buying such things as +they needed for the trip. + +"They tell me it is pretty warm down there," said Roger. "So we had +better buy some thin suits." + +"And we had better go armed," added Phil. "No telling what trouble we +may run into, in trying to corner Merwell and Jasniff. Merwell is no +great fighter, but Jasniff is a brute." + +"Yes, I'll take no chances with Jasniff," answered Dave. He had not +forgotten his quarrel at Oak Hall with that bully, and how Jasniff had +attacked him with an Indian club, as related in detail in "Dave +Porter's Return to School." + +At last all was in readiness for the trip, and the boys and the other +passengers, four burly Englishmen, went aboard. Fortunately, the +_Golden Eagle_ was well provided with staterooms, so there was but +little crowding. Dave had a small room to himself and next to him were +his chums, with Captain Sanders and the first mate opposite. Billy +Dill was, of course, in the forecastle with the other sailors. + +"It's grand to have you along ag'in," he said, to Dave and Phil. +"Seems like old times, when we sailed the Pacific." + +"So it does," answered our hero. + +"Only ye ain't a-lookin' for no uncle this trip, be you?" And the old +tar chuckled. + +"No, Billy, we are looking for somebody quite different--two rascals +who ran away with a lot of diamonds." + +"Mackerel an' codfish! Ye don't tell me, Dave! Your diamonds?" + +"No, but some diamonds that were left with a close friend of mine. If +they are not recovered, my friend will be almost ruined." + +"Jumpin' dogfish! Then I hope you catch them lubbers! If so be I can +help ye any, don't be afeered to call on me," added the old sailor, +earnestly. + +"All right; I'll remember that," replied Dave. + +Early the next day the _Golden Eagle_ slipped down the St. John's +River and past the jetties and the lighthouse into the Atlantic Ocean. +It was warm and clear, with a good wind blowing from the west, an +ideal day for the departure. The boys remained on deck, watching the +scenery of the winding stream and then the fading shoreline, and then +went below to arrange their belongings, for the trip to Barbados would +occupy some time. + +"I hope we don't get seasick," remarked the senator's son. + +"Well, if we do, we'll have to stand it," replied Phil. "But don't +let's think about it." + +"What I am wishing, is that we'll have good weather and a quick +passage," remarked Dave. "We can't get to Barbados any too quick for +me." + +"I was looking up the place in the shipping-guide," went on Roger. +"It's not much of an island, only twenty-one miles long by fifteen +wide. The whole population is only about two hundred thousand, mostly +English." + +"The smaller the population the easier it will be to find Merwell and +Jasniff," was the comment of the shipowner's son. + +"Well, there may be a good many hiding-places on an island twenty-one +miles long by fifteen miles wide," added Dave, with a grin. + +"Oh, we'll rake the island with a fine-tooth comb, if we have to," +cried Roger. + +"Roger, was your father quite willing to let you go on the trip?" + +"Yes. He and mother are now in Washington, you know, and as the school +is closed, I'd either have to go to the Capital, or stay with you. And +I told him I'd much rather be with you and Phil." + +"And we are glad to have you with us!" cried Phil, and Dave nodded, to +show that he felt the same way about it. + +"What do you think about the other passengers?" asked Phil, in a lower +voice, so that nobody else might hear. + +"I don't think I'll like them very much," replied the senator's son. +"That man named Geswick is very loud and dictatorial." + +"Yes, and the chap named Pardell is little better," returned Dave. + +"What line are they in, Phil, did you hear?" + +"Oh, they are traveling, that's all. They came to this country from +London, and they are going back by the way of Barbados." + +"They seem to have some money." + +"Yes, but Captain Sanders told me that they hang on to it pretty +well--more so than he at first expected they would." + +The first day passed rapidly and the _Golden Eagle_ made good headway. +The boys spent most of the time on deck, amusing themselves as best +they could. They talked to Captain Sanders and his mate, and also +visited with Billy Dill. Occasionally they conversed with the four +Englishmen, but they noticed that the Britishers were inclined to keep +to themselves. + +"I guess it is just as well, too," said Dave to his chums. "They are +not our sort at all." + +"Unless I miss my guess, they have had some sort of quarrel among +themselves," remarked Phil. "They were disputing over something early +this morning and again just before dinner." + +Several days passed, and the boys commenced to feel quite at home on +the ship. None of them had been seasick, for which all were thankful. + +"The weather has been in our favor," said Captain Sanders. "If it +keeps on like this, we'll make Barbados in record time." + +"Billy Dill said he smelt a storm," returned Dave. + +"Hum! Is that so?" mused the captain. "Well, he's a pretty good +weather-sharp, I must confess. I'll take another look at the glass," +and he walked off to do so. + +The storm came up during the night, and Dave was awakened to find +himself rolling from one side of his berth to the other. He arose, and +as he did so he heard an exclamation from Roger. + +"What is it, Roger?" he called out. + +"I--I guess I'm seasick!" answered the senator's son. "Gracious, how +this old tub rolls!" + +"Don't call the _Golden Eagle_ a tub!" returned Phil. "Say, can I do +anything for you?" he went on sympathetically. + +"Yes, tell Captain Sanders to keep the boat from rocking." + +"Better lie down again, Roger," said Dave, entering the stateroom. +"It's a little better than standing up." + +"Oh, I--I guess I'm not so very ba-badly off," gasped the sufferer. +"But I do wish the storm was over." + +"We all wish that." + +But, instead of clearing away, the storm increased in violence, and by +nine o'clock in the morning the wind was blowing close to a gale. Both +the captain and the mate were on deck, and the former advised the boys +and the other passengers to remain below. Two of the Englishmen were +very seasick and found all manner of fault because of the storm. + +"I'd never have come on this treasure hunt had I known I was to be so +sick!" groaned one. + +"What bloody luck!" said the other sick man. "All the pirates' gold in +the world is not worth it!" + +"Stow it!" cried the man named Geswick. "You know you weren't to +mention what we were after." + +"Nobody can hear us, in this storm," replied the first man who had +spoken. + +"Those boys might hear," put in the fellow named Pardell. + +"Oh, well, they are only boys. Besides, they'd not dare to follow us +up to Cave Island----" + +"Hush, I tell you!" cried Geswick, savagely. "Do learn to keep your +tongue quiet." And then the men continued to talk in whispers. + +Dave had been passing the staterooms of the Englishmen during this +conversation and he could not help but hear what was said. When he +rejoined his chums he told them of the talk. + +"They must be on the hunt after pirates' gold," said Phil. "Well, they +are not the first to do that kind of searching. Party after party has +sailed down here for the same purpose." + +"Yes, and each party has been unsuccessful, so far as I know," +answered Dave. + +"Perhaps they have some extra-good clew," suggested Roger, trying to +forget his seasickness. + +"Perhaps," returned Dave. "Well, if they can find any pirates' gold on +any of these islands they are welcome to it, so far as I am concerned. +All I want to get hold of are the Carwith jewels." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX--THE MISSING SHIP + + +"How much longer do you think this storm will last?" + +It was Dave who asked this question, of Captain Sanders, when the +latter came down to get a bite for breakfast. To get a regular meal, +with the vessel pitching and tossing wildly, was out of the question. + +"I don't know, Dave," was the grave answer. "I am hoping the wind will +die down by sunset. But the storm may last several days." + +"Are we in any danger?" questioned Phil. + +"There is always danger during a storm," answered the master of the +_Golden Eagle_. "But I hope to weather this blow without much +trouble." + +"Can we be of any assistance?" went on our hero. + +"No, boys. There is nothing you can do but keep yourselves from +falling overboard. How is Roger?" + +"A little better." + +"I heard that two of those Englishmen are pretty sick," went on +Captain Sanders, with a faint smile. + +"They are." + +"It's queer to me that they sailed with us. It's not such a pleasant +voyage." + +"I overheard a little of their talk," answered Dave, and, knowing he +could trust the captain, he related what had been said. + +"Pirates' gold, eh?" muttered the master of the ship. "Most of those +yarns are fairy-stories. I've known expedition after expedition to be +fitted out, to search for treasures said to be hidden by the old-time +buccaneers, but I never saw a man yet who got even a smell of a +treasure. Where were they going for it, Dave?" + +"I don't know. I think one of them mentioned Cave Island. Is there +such a place?" + +"There may be, although I never heard of it. Many of the islands in +this part of the globe, being of volcanic origin, contain caves." + +"They must expect to get to Cave Island from Barbados." + +"More than likely," answered the captain, and then hurried on deck +again. + +The storm continued for the remainder of the day, but by nightfall the +wind commenced to die down, and by midnight the clouds had passed and +the stars were shining brightly. In the morning the big sun came out +of the sea to the east like a globe of fire. + +"Now we are going to have some warm weather," remarked Billy Dill, and +the old tar was right. As the sun mounted in the heavens it grew +positively hot, until the boys had to go to their staterooms and don +thinner clothing. With the departure of the storm, Roger's seasickness +left him, but the two Englishmen remained slightly unwell for some +time longer. + +"Phew! how warm it is!" remarked Phil. "And just think of it!--up at +home they are having snow and ice!" + +With the passing of the storm, the boys settled down as before. They +saw but little of the Englishmen, especially of the pair who were +sick. But one day something happened which came close to causing a +crisis. + +The boys were seated on the rear deck, talking over matters in +general, when a strong puff of wind caused a sheet of paper to blow +from somewhere ahead towards Dave. He reached out and caught the sheet +just as it was about to go overboard. + +"Hello, what's this?" he cried, as he looked the sheet over. "Must be +some sort of a chart." + +"It is," answered Roger, gazing at the paper. "See, here is a spot +marked Barbados, and another marked Cave Island, a little to the +eastward." + +"Why, look what it says, up here!" cried Phil. "'_Map of the Don +Amorandos Treasure, buried in 1715_.' Say, do you think those +Englishmen----" + +"Hi, you! Give me that map!" bawled a voice from near by, and with a +very red face, the Englishman named Geswick bore down on the boys. +"How dare you look at this?" he went on, as he snatched the sheet out +of their hands and folded it up. + +"We wanted to see what it was and whom it belonged to," answered Dave, +as calmly as he could. + +"You had no right to look at it," stormed Andrew Geswick. "That is +private property." + +"Then why did you let it fall in our hands?" asked Phil. + +"If it hadn't been for Dave, it would have gone overboard," put in +Roger. + +"Humph!" The man fell back a little. "Well, I am thankful for that. +But you boys had no right to look at it," he grumbled. + +"Why, it's only a chart, isn't it?" asked the senator's son, +curiously. + +"Never mind what it is!" answered Andrew Geswick, sharply. "Did you +read what was on it?" he demanded, an instant later. + +"We saw it was a chart," answered Dave, and looked knowingly at his +chums, to make them keep silent. + +"It--er--it belongs to Mr. Pardell and he is very particular about it," +went on the Englishman. And then without another word he walked away. + +"My, isn't he sweet!" muttered Phil. + +"Just as sweet as a can of sour milk," answered the senator's son. +"Dave, I guess you wish you had allowed that map to blow overboard." + +"Not exactly that, Roger. But he might have been a little more +thankful for saving something that he thinks so valuable." + +"Do you think there is anything in this treasure idea?" questioned +Phil, after a pause. + +"No, Phil. That is, there may be some lost treasure, secreted by the +pirates and buccaneers of old, but I doubt if anybody will ever find +it--excepting by accident." + +"If there was a treasure on this Cave Island, we might hunt for it," +went on the shipowner's son. + +"Phil, don't let that bee get into your bonnet!" cried Roger. "Many a +man has gone crazy looking for pirates' gold. Better drop it, and +think of how we are to round up Merwell and Jasniff." + +"Well, I'd like to go to Cave Island anyway," said Phil. "We might----" +And then he stopped short, as he saw Geswick and Pardell near by. The +Englishmen had been listening to part of the conversation. + +"So you'd like to go to Cave Island, would you?" cried Andrew Geswick, +his face red with rage. "You take my advice and keep away from that +place!" + +"Say, do you own that island?" demanded Phil, getting angry because of +the other's dictatorial manner. + +"No, we don't own the island. But we----" Andrew Geswick stopped short +as his companion plucked him by the sleeve. "Never mind, you keep away +from it, that's all," he growled. + +"We'll go there if we want to," called out Phil. + +"If you do you may get into trouble," called back Pardell. Then he and +his companion disappeared in the direction of the cabin. + +"They are touchy enough," was Roger's comment. "Phil, you had better +drop Cave Island after this." + +"I'll talk about it as much as I please," grumbled the shipowner's +son. "Those fellows make me tired. They act as if they owned the +earth!" + +Sunday was a quiet day on shipboard. The Englishmen did not show +themselves excepting at meals, and the boys were content to leave them +severely alone. They told Captain Sanders of the chart and of the talk +that had occurred. + +"Let them alone, lads," said the commander of the _Golden Eagle_. +"I'll venture to say that sooner or later they'll find out they are on +a wild goose chase." + +"The only one that seems to be anyway nice is the fellow named Giles +Borden," said Dave. "He is rather quiet. The other fellow, Rumney, is +almost as bad as Geswick and Pardell." + +"So I've noticed, Dave. And the queer part of it is, Borden paid for +the passages. He appears to be the only one with money." + +"Maybe he is backing the expedition," suggested Roger. + +"I'm sorry for him if he is," answered the captain. + +The Bahama Islands had been passed, and now they were in the vicinity +of Porto Rico. Then commenced the trip southward, through the Lesser +Antilles. + +"This is the spot for active volcanoes," observed Phil. "Don't you +remember how the Island of Martinique suffered?" + +"Oh, don't speak of volcanoes!" cried Roger. "I have no use for +them--or for earthquakes either." + +"There must be hundreds of islands around here," observed Dave. "The +charts are full of them." + +"That must make navigation difficult," came from Phil. + +"Oh, I reckon Captain Sanders knows what he is about." + +"Wonder how soon we'll run into the harbor at Bridgetown?" mused the +shipowner's son, the place he mentioned being the main seaport of +Barbados. + +"Inside of three days, I hope, Phil," answered our hero. + +"Merwell and Jasniff must be there by this time." + +"It's more than likely--unless something happened to delay them," +returned Dave. + +At last came the day when they sighted Barbados and ran into the +harbor of Bridgetown. The place was a picturesque one, but the boys +had just then no time to view the scenery or the shipping. As soon as +it could be accomplished, they went ashore, and Captain Sanders went +with them, leaving his vessel in charge of the first mate. + +"You may have trouble with those two rascals, if you find them," said +the commander of the _Golden Eagle_. "I'll be on deck to help you all +I can." + +"Shall we go to the hotel first?" questioned Roger. + +"Might as well," answered Phil. "They'd strike for the hotel first +thing, after a sea trip like that. Maybe they were both seasick." + +"I hope they were--it would serve them right," growled the senator's +son. + +Dave and the captain were willing, and a little later walked into the +Royal George Hotel. Here the boys looked at the register, but found no +names that they could recognize. Then Dave brought out his photographs +of Merwell and Jasniff and showed them to the hotel proprietor and his +clerk. + +"Nobody here that looks like either of them," said the proprietor, +while his clerk also shook his head. + +"They came in on the _Emma Brower_," said Captain Sanders. + +"The _Emma Brower_!" cried the hotel man. "Is she in?" + +"Why, I suppose so," and now the commander of the _Golden Eagle_ +showed his surprise. + +"She wasn't in last night, and the agents were a bit worried about +her. I know the agents personally, you see." + +"Then maybe she isn't in yet!" cried Dave. "Let us go down to the +docks and find out about this." + +They lost no time in visiting the docks and the shipping offices. +There they learned that nothing had been heard of the _Emma Brower_ +since the vessel had left Jacksonville. + +"We must have passed her on the way!" cried Dave, to Captain Sanders. +"Could we do that?" + +"Perhaps, since we only had half a cargo, Dave. Besides, maybe that +vessel was damaged by the storm." + +"I wonder how soon she will get in?" mused Roger. + +At this the captain shrugged his shoulders. + +"It is impossible to say. I've known a ship to be a week and sometimes +nearly a month overdue. And I've known a ship to drop out altogether," +he added, soberly. + +"Oh, don't say you think she has gone down!" cried Dave, in alarm. + +"Let us hope not, Dave." + +The day passed, and also the next and the next. The cargo of the +_Golden Eagle_ was unloaded, and the Englishmen, who had been +passengers, left for parts unknown. As each day slipped by, Dave grew +more serious. What if the _Emma Brower_ had gone down, carrying +Merwell, Jasniff, and the Carwith jewels with her? + + + + +CHAPTER XX--LANDING ON CAVE ISLAND + + +At the end of a week Dave was more worried than ever. Each day he and +his chums went down to the shipping offices and each day returned to +the hotel disappointed. Not a word had been heard concerning the +missing vessel and those on board. + +The _Golden Eagle_ was all ready to sail on her return trip to the +United States, but Phil told Captain Sanders to wait. + +"Perhaps we'll hear to-day," he said, and this was repeated day after +day. + +It was very warm and the boys were glad they had brought along some +thin clothing. They scarcely knew what to do with themselves, and Dave +was particularly sober. + +"I suppose Mr. Wadsworth and the rest are waiting to hear from me," he +said to his chums. "But what is the use of sending a message when I +haven't anything to say?" + +Another Sunday passed, and on Monday the boys visited the _Golden +Eagle_, and then went with Captain Sanders to the nearest shipping +office. + +"Something is going on!" cried the senator's son, as he noticed an +unusual crowd congregated. "Must be news of some sort." + +"Let us find out what it is!" returned our hero, quickly. + +"The _Emma Brower_ has been heard from," said a man, standing near. +"That's the vessel that was missing, don't you know," he added. + +"What of her?" asked Dave. + +"Went down in that terrible storm we had about ten days ago." + +"Down!" gasped all of the boys, while Captain Sanders looked the +concern he felt. + +"So they say. I do not know the particulars," went on the man as he +walked away. + +It did not take the boys and the captain long to get into the shipping +office and there they learned as many of the particulars as were +known. A tramp steamer from Porto Rico had come in bringing word that +she had sighted portions of a wreck while out at sea, and an +investigation proved the same to belong to the _Emma Brower_. A +portion of a small boat had been picked up, but nothing had been seen +of sailors or passengers. + +"Where was this?" questioned Dave, when he could get the chance. + +"The captain of the steamer says about two miles west of Cave Island." + +"Cave Island!" cried Phil. "Why, that is where those Englishmen were +going to hunt for that pirates' treasure." + +"Two miles from Cave Island," mused our hero. "If the _Emma Brower_ +went down, perhaps those in some of the small boats got to that +place." + +"Perhaps," answered Captain Sanders. + +The boys and the captain remained at the shipping office for an hour, +getting all the details possible concerning the wreck, including the +exact latitude and longitude where the vessel was supposed to have +gone down. + +"Let us sail for that spot and see if we can discover anything," +suggested Dave, as the party came away. "We may find some of those in +the small boats." + +"Just what I was going to suggest," said Phil. + +"Well, it's up to you, Phil, to say what we shall do," answered +Captain Sanders. "Your father sent me word that I was to look to you +for orders--that is, within reasonable limits,--and I know you won't be +unreasonable." + +"Well, we want to get back to the United States, anyway," said Roger. +"And this would be on our way." + +"How soon can you get ready for the trip?" asked our hero, of the +master of the _Golden Eagle_. + +"We are all provisioned, so it won't take but a few hours," was the +reply. + +"Then let us sail to-day." + +"You don't want to wait for more word?" asked Roger. + +"No, Roger; I don't think it will do any good," answered our hero. + +The matter was discussed at the hotel, and a little later the boys +paid their bill and had their baggage taken to the ship. In the +meantime Captain Sanders had prepared for the trip, and two hours +later the _Golden Eagle_ was moving out of the harbor of Bridgetown. + +"How long will it take us to run to that spot where they think the +ship went down?" asked Phil. + +"Not more than a day and a half--it depends somewhat on the wind," +answered Captain Sanders. + +The boys tried to settle themselves, but this was impossible. Dave +could not keep still, and paced the deck by the hour, or scanned the +bosom of the ocean with the marine glasses Captain Sanders loaned him. + +Only once came a thrill of excitement. A bit of wreckage was sighted +and the ship sailed toward it. It was a yardarm, and to it were lashed +a cask and several boxes, one of the latter bearing the name _Emma +Brower_. Not a sign of a human being could be seen. + +"If a man was on that wreckage the storm tore him loose," said Captain +Sanders. + +"How terrible!" whispered Roger. + +"And think of it, it may have been Merwell, or Jasniff, or both of +them!" returned Phil. + +On the following day they reached the latitude and longitude as given +by the captain of the tramp steamer. In that vicinity they saw some +smaller wreckage, but nothing of importance. + +"Cave Island is two miles east of here," said Captain Sanders. + +"Any other islands around?" asked Dave. + +"Nothing within fifteen or twenty miles." + +"Then, if the crew and passengers took to the small boats, wouldn't +they be likely to steer for Cave Island?" + +"I think so,--that is, if the storm let 'em do so. It might be the wind +would force 'em the other way. But I think it would be a wise move to +sail for Cave Island and take a look around. The one trouble is, so I +learned at Barbados, the island hasn't any sort of harbor. We'll have +to lay-to outside and go ashore in a small boat." + +"Perhaps it won't be necessary to go ashore," said Roger. + +"Oh, it can be done easily enough." + +The bow of the _Golden Eagle_ was turned eastward. They ran slowly, +all hands keeping their eyes open for more signs of the wreck. + +Presently they came in sight of the reef outside of Cave Island. It +formed a large horseshoe, and beyond was the island itself, long, low, +and irregular, the shore fringed with tropical trees and bushes and +the center rocky and barren. + +"This ain't no easy place to land," said Billy Dill to Dave, as the +sails were lowered and the ship was brought about. "If them critters +from the wreck got here in their small boats in the dark they must +have had a fierce time o' it!" + +"I don't see a sign of a boat anywhere," said Dave, as he swept the +reef and the shore with the glasses. "And not a sign of a human being +either," he added, with a sinking heart. + +"That's queer, too, lad, if they came here. Fust thing I'd think +about, if I was wrecked, would be to put up a signal o' distress." + +It was growing dark, yet Dave and his chums were anxious to go ashore, +to see if they could discover anything concerning those who had been +wrecked, so Captain Sanders ordered out the largest of the small +boats. + +"I'll go with you," he said. "And we can take Billy Dill and Smiley." + +"We had better take some things along--in case we remain ashore all +night," said Dave. + +"To be sure. And we'll go armed, lad--no telling what may turn up." + +"Any wild animals here?" questioned the senator's son. + +"I don't know, but I don't think so--that is, not large ones. You'll +find rabbits maybe, and any number of birds." + +Soon the small boat was ready to go ashore. Billy Dill and the other +sailor, Smiley, were at the oars, while Captain Sanders was in the +stern, to steer and give directions. + +"If it starts to blow better move off a bit," said the captain to the +mate. "No use in taking chances around these reefs." + +"I'll watch out," was the answer. "I know just what a blow down here +means, and I'll keep her off." + +"Do you think we'll have another storm?" asked Dave. + +"Can't tell about that, lad. Sometimes a storm comes up pretty quick +in these parts." + +Soon the small boat was close to the breakers. The water boiled and +foamed on every side, and it must be confessed that Roger was somewhat +scared. Dave and Phil did not mind, although wishing it was over. + +"To starboard, hard!" shouted the captain, when the first of the +breakers was encountered. "Now ease off, lads! Lively now, and hard! +Starboard again! Keep it up! There, straight ahead! Bend to it, bend I +tell you! A little more to starboard--not too much! There, now we are +out of it!" And in a moment more the small boat was out of the +breakers and riding into a tiny cove, where there was a stretch of +sand, dotted with palms. The two sailors were all but exhausted and +glad enough to rest up and allow the boat to drift ashore. + +"So this is Cave Island?" remarked Dave, as he hopped out on the sand, +followed by his chums. "Well, it doesn't look much different from the +other islands in this portion of the globe." + +After everybody had alighted, the small boat was pulled up on the sand +and tied to a palm tree. + +"What's to do next?" asked the shipowner's son, as he looked +inquiringly at Dave. "This is your expedition, Dave." + +"How big around do you suppose this island is, Captain?" asked our +hero. + +"Four or five miles at least." + +"Then we could walk completely around it in a couple of hours, that +is, if we found it wasn't too rough in spots." + +"You won't find it smooth like this all around, lad." + +[Illustration: "TO STARBOARD, HARD!" SHOUTED THE CAPTAIN.] + +"Some of us might walk in one direction and some in the other," +suggested Roger. "Then, if either party discovered anything, it could +signal to the other by firing a pistol or a gun." For both sorts of +weapons had been brought along. + +"Whatever you wish to do to-day must be done quickly," said Captain +Sanders. "It will soon be night, and, as you know, darkness comes on +quickly in this part of the world." + +The matter was discussed for a few minutes, and then it was decided to +leave the sailors in charge of the boat, while Captain Sanders and +Phil walked up the shore and Dave and Roger traveled in the opposite +direction. + +For fully a quarter of a mile Dave and the senator's son found it an +easy matter to push along, for the sandy shore was smooth and offered +no barrier to their advance. But then they came to a series of rocks, +jutting out into the ocean, and here progress was more difficult. + +"We'll not get around this island to-night," remarked the senator's +son, after climbing over a particularly sharp line of rocks. "This +takes a fellow's wind." + +"Look!" cried our hero, as he pointed to a spot between the rocks. +"What do you make that out to be, Roger?" + +"It's the wreck of a rowboat!" cried the other. + +"Just what I thought. Let us go down and look it over." + +With care, so as not to sprain an ankle, the two chums climbed down to +the split in the rocks. By this time it was growing dark, and in the +hollow they could not see clearly. + +It was the remains of a rowboat which they had discovered. The small +craft was split from end to end, so as to be utterly useless. Near it +lay a broken oar and a broken-open box that had contained provisions +of some sort. + +"That boat is from the _Emma Brower_!" cried Dave, after an +investigation. "And that proves that some of the people from the +wrecked ship came to this island!" + +"Yes, but are they alive, Dave, or were they drowned?" questioned +Roger. + +"That remains to be found out, Roger. I sincerely hope they are +alive." + + + + +CHAPTER XXI--INTO A CAVE AND OUT + + +"Let us look around for footprints, Roger," said Dave, as the pair +scrambled up the rocks once more. "If any persons landed from that +smashed rowboat they'd have to walk in some direction, and the ground +is soft back of here." + +"The trouble is, it is growing so dark," returned the senator's son. +"In a little while we won't be able to find our way back. We should +have brought a lantern along." + +"I've got something almost as good," answered our hero, and took from +his pocket a little electric flashlight--one of the kind that emits a +tiny flash of light when the button at the end is pressed. + +"Good enough! That's first-rate!" + +The pair were soon down from the rocks. Under the palm trees it was +now dark, and Dave used the electric flashlight to advantage. + +"Here are footprints!" he cried, presently. "Six pairs! That shows +that at least a half dozen persons came ashore in that boat. Those six +may have been carrying others." + +"Shall we set up a shout?" + +"I don't know, Roger. If Merwell and Jasniff were around I'd like to +surprise them. If they discovered us first, and they had the jewels, +they'd surely hide the gems and then say they didn't have them." + +"I believe that, Dave. Well, let us follow the footsteps and see where +they lead to." + +"Another thing. Do you remember those Englishmen? They may be on this +island, and if so, I'd rather steer clear of them." + +"So would I, they were so disagreeable--all but that one chap, Borden." + +The trail led among the palm trees and then up a rise of ground where +grew a number of bushes. Here the boys had to proceed more slowly, for +fear of missing the way. + +"It's queer that they should call this spot Cave Island," observed the +senator's son. "We haven't seen anything that looks like a cave." + +"The caves may be on the other side of the island," answered Dave. +"Look out, Roger, there is a split in the rocks! Let us jump over to +yonder bushes." + +Dave placed the flashlight in his pocket and made the leap he had +mentioned, and his chum came after him. + +A most astonishing thing followed. The bushes where they landed gave +way, and down they rolled on some smooth rocks. They tried to stay +their progress, but this was impossible, and they continued to roll +for several minutes. Then Dave bumped into some sort of barrier and +Roger landed beside him. + +"For gracious sake, what's this?" gasped Roger, when he felt able to +speak. The breath had been all but knocked out of him. + +"I guess we have found one of the caves," answered Dave, grimly. +"Phew, but that was some roll, wasn't it!" + +"We must be down near the center of the earth," murmured the senator's +son. + +"Not quite as bad as that. But we came down some distance, I admit." + +"Flash that light around, Dave, and let us see where we are." + +"I will if the light hasn't been smashed," replied our hero. "I rolled +over it half a dozen times." + +He brought out the little flashlight and tried it. Fortunately, it was +still in working order. As the rays fell around the lads, they stared +at each other, blankly. + +"What do you make of this, Dave?" + +"Looks as if it was cut out of the solid rock, Roger." + +"It certainly is some cave. Wonder where it leads to?" + +"We might follow the opening and find out." + +"Excuse me, I'd rather climb out the way we came in." + +"It certainly doesn't look very inviting." + +The two boys found themselves in an irregular opening of the rocks, +fifty feet wide and perhaps twice that in length. On one side was the +smooth slope down which they had come; on the other a dark hole that +looked as if it might lead to some bottomless pit. A jagged rock in +the center of the underground chamber had been the means of stopping +them from dropping to the unknown depths below them. + +"We were lucky to hit this rock," said Dave, with something like a +shiver. "If we hadn't----" He did not finish. + +"Let us get out. It gives me the creeps to stay here," returned his +chum. + +"All right, Roger, I'm willing. But it is going to be hard work +crawling back, those rocks are so smooth." + +"We've got to get back!" + +"I can't hold the light and climb too. And if I place it on the rocks +it may roll away and go down into that hole," went on our hero. + +"Oh, put it in your pocket again and we'll try to climb back in the +dark. We know the direction." + +Dave did as his chum suggested, and then commenced a climb that +neither of the lads ever forgot. The rocks were so smooth in spots +that at times to get a foothold was next to impossible. Once Roger +slid back several feet and would have gone to the bottom had not Dave +caught and held him. + +"Take it slowly, Roger," was our hero's advice. "If you go to the +bottom, you may be killed!" + +"I'll hang--on!" gasped the other. "But I wi-wish I was +out--of--th-this!" + +"Well, I wish the same." + +It took fully a quarter of an hour longer to get out of the rocky +cave, and when the boys reached the surface of the earth they were so +exhausted they could do little but sit on the ground and pant for +breath. + +"It's Cave Island right enough," was the comment of the senator's son. +"But excuse me from tumbling into any more such openings!" + +"I guess the best thing we can do is to go back to the boat," said +Dave. "We can't discover much in this darkness. We can start out again +early in the morning." + +"All right, back to the boat it is," and the pair set out on the +return along the sandy shore. + +"I see a light!" cried Dave, after about half the distance to where +the rowboat had been left was covered. And he pointed to a spot +inland, among the trees. + +"Maybe it's a camp of some sort," replied Roger. "It seems to be quite +a distance away." + +"Shall we go and see what it is?" + +"Hadn't we better get the others first, Dave?" + +"All right, if you think best." + +So they continued on the way to where the rowboat had been left. They +came up to find that Captain Sanders and Phil had not yet returned. +Smiley was snoring on the sand, while Billy Dill sat near by on guard. + +"Find anybody?" queried the old tar, eagerly. + +"We found one of the caves, and we saw a light at a distance," +answered Dave. "We want to investigate that light, as soon as the +others get back." + +Dave and Roger sat down, to rest and to wait, and thus another +half-hour went by. With nothing else to do, Billy Dill took a nap, and +the boys allowed the old sailor to slumber on. + +"It's queer the captain and Phil don't return," remarked Roger, +presently. "They must have gone much further than we did." + +"Maybe they fell into one of those caves, Roger." + +"Oh, I trust not!" + +Another half-hour went by and still the others did not put in an +appearance. By this time Dave was getting worried. + +"Let us take a walk along the shore and look for them," he said, and +Roger agreed, and they started off. + +They had covered less than a quarter of a mile when they came in sight +of a campfire, well-hidden between the rough rocks back from the +water's edge. Around the campfire were huddled the forms of several +men, evidently sailors. + +"Perhaps those men are from the _Emma Brower_," said Dave, in a low +tone. + +"I don't see anything of Captain Sanders and Phil," remarked the +senator's son. + +"No. And yet they must have seen this campfire, if they came this way. +What can it mean, Dave?" + +"I don't know." + +"Shall we go up to the campfire and talk to those fellows?" + +"I don't see why not. I am not afraid of them." + +"Do you see anybody that looks like Jasniff or Merwell?" + +"No, those fellows are all plain sailors, by their outfits." + +Dave continued to advance and Roger followed, and neither halted until +he was within the glow of the campfire. Then Dave called out: + +"Hello, messmates!" + +At this cry the four sailors around the fire sprang to their feet. At +a glance Dave and Roger saw that they were in tatters, and that they +looked hungry and careworn. + +"Hello, yourself!" answered one of the tars, stepping towards the +boys. "Who are you?" + +"Passengers from the _Golden Eagle_," answered Dave. + +"Oh, some more of that crowd, eh?" cried the tar. + +"Then you've seen the others,--the captain and a young fellow like +ourselves?" queried Roger. + +"Yes, they were here only a short while ago." + +"They said they'd be back, and take us aboard an' git us something to +eat," put in a second of the sailors. + +"An' we need that grub putty bad, we do," added a third. + +"Ain't had no decent meal since we got wrecked," came from the fourth. +"A few fish an' birds, an' that's all." + +"You are from the _Emma Brower_?" questioned Dave, eagerly. + +"You've struck it, messmate. She went down in the storm an' we come +putty nigh goin' down with her." + +"Well, you shall have all you want to eat in a little while. Tell me +where the others of our crowd went." + +"They went after the two chaps as ran away." + +"Ran away?" cried Dave. "From where?" + +"From here." + +"They must have been Jasniff and Merwell!" murmured Roger. + +"Who were those fellows?" asked our hero. + +"Two passengers from the bark. They came ashore with us, and they +stayed with us until your captain and the other young fellow come +along. Then they up anchors and away like the old Nick was after 'em," +explained the tar who had first spoken. + +"Were they young fellows like ourselves?" + +"Yes,--a bit older, maybe. Named Ford and Smith." + +"They must have been Jasniff and Merwell," said Dave, to his chum. + +"I wonder if they managed to save the jewels," whispered the senator's +son. + +"Did they have any baggage?" asked Dave of the sailors. + +"Baggage? Not much! We didn't have no time for baggage when the ship +went down. It was every man fer himself. The cap'n got off in one boat +with some o' the passengers, an' the mate got off with some of the +crew in another boat, an' we got off by ourselves. It was blowin' big +guns, I can tell ye, an' it looks like we would be swamped most every +minit. I knowed about this island an' I steered in this direction as +well as I could, an' by sheer good luck we struck the shore--an' here +we are." + +"What became of the other boats?" + +"Ain't seen nuthin' of 'em yet." + +"Is that your boat was split in two, between the rocks in that +direction?" and Dave pointed to where such a craft had been found by +him and Roger. + +"That's her, messmate. Putty badly used up, eh?" + +"And you are quite sure those two passengers had no baggage?" went on +our hero, after a pause. + +"Nary a thing, messmate, excepting wot they wore. It wasn't no time to +think o' baggage, it was a time to think o' what to do to save your +life!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXII--THE HURRICANE + + +"What direction did those fellows who ran away take?" asked Dave. + +"That's the way they went," answered one of the sailors, pointing to +some heavy undergrowth behind the camping-out spot. + +"Where does that lead to, do you know?" asked the senator's son. + +"Leads to a spring o' fresh water an' half a dozen big caves," was the +reply. + +"Caves?" queried Dave. "Then perhaps the fellows, who ran away, took +to one of the caves." + +"Like as not, messmate. Them two chaps have been explorin' them caves +ever since we came ashore." + +"Let us walk back and have a look," suggested our hero. "We may be +able to give Phil and Captain Sanders some assistance." + +Without further delay, the two boys left the camp of the castaways and +hurried along a small trail through the bushes. They soon came to a +rocky depression in the midst of which was a tiny spring. + +"That water looks good," exclaimed Dave. "Let us get a drink." + +"Perhaps it is poisonous, Dave." + +"If it was, I think those sailors would have warned us." + +They found the water fairly cold and of a good flavor, and each drank +his fill. Then Dave flashed the electric light around. Ahead they made +out a series of rocks, with here and there a gloomy opening, leading +to unknown depths. + +"This is Cave Island and no mistake," was our hero's comment. "The +place seems to be fairly honeycombed." + +"Be careful that you don't go into a hole and drop out of sight," +warned his chum. + +They walked to the entrance of one of the caves and peered in. All was +dark and silent. Then they went to the next cave. Here they caught a +glimmer of light. + +"Somebody is moving in here!" exclaimed Dave. "A man with a torch!" + +They waited, and presently saw that two persons were approaching +slowly, having to pick their way over the uneven rocks. + +"They are the captain and Phil," cried Roger, and set up a faint call. + +"Hello! Who is that?" answered the captain of the _Golden Eagle_. + +"Dave and Roger!" cried Phil. "Oh, say," he added, eagerly, "we've +seen Jasniff and Merwell!" + +"So we suspected," answered Dave. "But you didn't catch them?" + +"No, they got away from us," returned Captain Sanders. + +"In this cave?" queried Roger. + +"Yes." + +"But if they are in here, we can get them sooner or later," put in +Dave. + +"No, my lad. There are several openings to these caves. We found one +at the far end, and I reckon those rascals got away through it." + +"Did you speak to them at all?" asked our hero. + +"Didn't get time," answered Phil. "The minute they saw us they ran +like frightened deer." + +"Did they have any baggage, Phil?" + +"Not that I could see. I rather fancied Jasniff had a small bundle +under his coat, but I may have been mistaken." + +"The sailors said they came ashore without baggage. Perhaps the jewels +went down with the bark." + +"Oh, I think they'd make an effort to save such costly gems--anybody +would." + +"Not if they were thoroughly scared," broke in Captain Sanders. "A +person who is thoroughly scared forgets everything but to save his +life." + +"Then you haven't any idea where they went to?" + +"No, lad. But I don't think they'll get off this island in a hurry." + +There was nothing to do but to return to where the four sailors were +encamped. Then the whole party proceeded to where Billy Dill and +Smiley had been left. + +"I don't think it will be safe to try to get through those breakers in +the darkness," said Captain Sanders. "We may as well make ourselves +comfortable until morning. We have plenty of grub on hand, so you +fellows shall have your fill," he went on, to the castaways. + +The sailors were glad enough to build another campfire, close to the +landing-place, and here they were served with all the food and drink +they wanted, which put them in good humor. They related the +particulars of how the _Emma Brower_ had gone down, and of how one +boat after another had put off in the storm. It had been a time of +great excitement, such as none of them were liable to ever forget. + +The boys were worn out from their exertions and willing enough to +rest. They fixed up some beds of boughs and were soon in the land of +dreams. The sailors rested also, each, however, taking an hour at +watching, by orders of Captain Sanders. + +It was about five o'clock in the morning when Dave awoke, to find the +wind blowing furiously. Two of the sailors were busy stamping out the +campfire, for the burning brands were flying in all directions, +threatening to set fire to the undergrowth. + +"What's this?" he asked of Captain Sanders. + +"No telling, lad," was the grave reply. "Looks like a pretty big +blow." + +"More like a hurricane!" snorted old Billy Dill. "The wind is growin' +wuss each minit!" + +"Draw that boat up into the bushes and fasten it well," ordered the +captain. "We don't want to have it stove in or floated off by the +breakers." And the rowboat was carried to a place of safety. + +"Where is the ship?" asked Roger. + +"Slipped away when the blow came up," answered the captain. "An' I +hope the mate knows enough to keep away," he added, gravely. + +Soon it started to rain, first a few scattering drops and then a +perfect deluge. The castaways spoke of a cave that was near by, and +all hurried in that direction, taking the stores from the boat with +them. + +"How long will this last, do you think?" asked Phil, of the master of +the _Golden Eagle_. + +"No telling. Maybe only to-day, maybe several days." + +"If it last several days, we'll have a time of it getting food," broke +in the senator's son. + +"We'll watch out for fish and turtles," said Billy Dill. "Nothin' like +turtles when you are good an' hungry." + +"That's true," answered Dave. He had not forgotten the big turtle the +old tar had managed to catch down on one of the islands in the South +Seas. + +Soon it was raining so hard that but little could be seen beyond the +entrance to the cave. The wind moaned and shrieked throughout the +cavern, which happened to have several entrances. Once it became so +strong that it almost lifted the boys from their feet. The rain drove +in at times, and they had to get into a split in the rocks to keep +dry. + +"Hark! what was that?" cried Roger, during a lull in the wind. + +"I heard thunder; that's all," answered Phil. + +"I think a tree must have been struck by lightning," answered Captain +Sanders. "The lightning is getting pretty fierce," he added, as a +brilliant illumination filled the cavern. + +"Wonder where Jasniff and Merwell are?" whispered Phil, to his chums, +"I'll wager this storm scares 'em half to death." + +"Yes, and those four Englishmen," added Dave. "Don't forget that they +were coming to this island." + +Slowly the hours of the morning dragged by. There was no let-up in the +hurricane, for such it really proved to be. The wind blew strongly all +the time, but occasionally would come a heavy blast that fairly made +the island tremble. The lightning had died away somewhat, but now and +then would come a great flash, followed by a crash and rumble that +would echo and recho among the rocks. + +"Just look at the ocean!" cried Dave, as he and his chums walked to +one corner of the entrance to gaze out. + +"The waves seem to be mountain-high," returned Phil. "You wouldn't +think it possible a ship could live on such a sea." + +"Well, it is mighty dangerous, Phil; you know that as well as I do." + +"I hope the _Golden Eagle_ weathers the storm." + +"We all hope that." + +Dinner was a rather scanty meal, cooked with great difficulty in a +hollow of the rocks. The smoke from the fire rolled and swirled in all +directions, nearly blinding everybody. But the repast was better than +nothing, and nobody grumbled. + +By nightfall the rain ceased. But the wind was almost as strong as +ever, and when those in the cave ventured outside they had to be on +guard, for fear a flying tree-branch would come down on their heads. + +Captain Sanders was much worried over the safety of his vessel, but he +did not let on to the boys, since it would have done no good. But the +lads understood, and they, too, were more or less alarmed, remembering +the fate that had overtaken the _Emma Brower_ in a storm that had been +no worse than the present one. + +With so much rain driving in, the cave was a damp place, and the boys +were glad enough to go outside. They looked for wood that might be +easily dried, and after much difficulty, succeeded in starting up a +new campfire, around which the whole crowd gathered. + +"I'm goin' to try my luck along shore," said Billy Dill, and started +off with Dave, Phil, and Roger, to see if any fish or turtles could be +located. They found the shore strewn with wreckage. + +"Oh, Billy, can this be from our ship?" exclaimed Phil, in alarm. + +"I don't think so, lad. Looks to me like it had been in the water some +days. I reckon it's from the _Emma Brower_, or some other craft." + +In the wreckage they found the remains of several boxes and barrels. +But the contents had become water-soaked or had sunk to the bottom of +the sea; so there was nothing in the shape of food for them. They also +came across the mainmast of the bark, with some of the stays still +dragging around it. + +"That will do for a pole, in case we wish to hoist a flag," suggested +the senator's son. + +They found neither fish nor turtles, and at last had to return to the +campfire disappointed. There was next to nothing to eat for supper. + +"Well, better luck in the morning," said Captain Sanders, with an air +of cheerfulness he did not feel. "As soon as this wind dies down our +ship will come back, and then we'll have all we want to eat." + +It was a long, dreary night that followed, and the boys were glad to +behold the sun come up brightly in the morning. Dave was the first up, +but his chums quickly followed, and all went down to the beach, to +look for fish and also to see if the _Golden Eagle_ was anywhere in +sight. + +This time they had better luck, so far as food was concerned. In a +hollow they found over a score of fish that had been cast from the +ocean by the breakers, and they also found a fine turtle that was +pinned down by a fallen tree. + +"That's a new way to catch a turtle," remarked Dave. "It's a regular +trap." + +"Turtle soup, yum! yum!" murmured Phil. + +"And broiled fish,--all you want, too!" added Roger, smacking his lips. + +When they got back to the camp they found that the fire had been +renewed, and soon the appetizing odor of broiling fish filled the air. +Then Captain Sanders and one of the castaway sailors came in from a +walk in another direction, carrying an airtight canister, which, on +being opened, was found to contain fancy crackers. + +"There is a good deal of wreckage down on the beach," said the +captain. "We'll inspect it after breakfast." + +Having eaten their fill of the fish and the crackers, and leaving +Billy Dill and some of the others busy making turtle soup, the boys +and Captain Sanders took another walk along the beach, to look over +the wreckage and also see if they could sight the _Golden Eagle_, or +locate Jasniff or Merwell. + +"I hope we can find those two fellows," said Dave. "I can stand this +suspense no longer. I must know what has become of those jewels!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII--A STRANGE DISCOVERY + + +A half-mile was covered when, on turning a point of rocks, the boys +and the captain came to a sandy cove. Here was more of the wreckage, +and the whole party ran down to the beach to investigate. + +Boxes, barrels, and bits of timber were strewn from one end of the +cove to the other, and in the mass were a number of things of more or +less value--timber, food, and some clothing. There was also a trunk, +but it was open and empty. + +"Look!" cried Dave, suddenly, and pointed to a small, black leather +case, that rested on some of the wreckage. + +"What is it?" queried Phil and Roger, in a breath. + +Dave did not reply, for he was crawling over the wreckage with care. +Soon he reached the spot where the black leather case rested, caught +on a nail, and he picked it up. The clasp was undone and the case fell +open, revealing the interior, which was lined with white plush. + +"Empty!" murmured Dave, sadly. "Empty!" There was a groan in his voice +as he uttered the word. + +"What is it, Dave?" asked the senator's son, although he and Phil +guessed the truth. + +"It's the Carwith jewel-case," was the answer. "The very case that Mr. +Carwith left with Mr. Wadsworth!" + +"Are you certain?" demanded Phil. + +"Yes, for here is the name, 'Ridgewood Osgood Carwith,' stamped in +gold on the top." + +"And empty," murmured the captain. "This looks bad," and he shook his +head, thoughtfully. + +"Maybe Jasniff and Merwell took the jewels from the case," suggested +Roger, hopefully. + +"It is possible, Roger. But--but--I am afraid the jewels are at the +bottom of the ocean," answered Dave, and his face showed how downcast +he felt. + +"They might have taken the jewels and divided them between +themselves," said Phil. "Maybe they put them in money-belts, or +something like that. They might think that the sailors would rob them, +if they saw the case." + +"It's possible, Phil, and I hope you are right," answered our hero. +But in his heart he was still afraid that the gems had gone to the +bottom of the Atlantic. + +"I think we had better climb to the top of yonder rise and take a look +around the island," said the captain. "For all we know, the _Golden +Eagle_ may be on the other side. I sincerely hope she has weathered +the storm." + +Placing the jewel-case in a safe place between the rocks, the party +commenced to climb the rise of ground the captain had pointed out. +This was no easy task, since the rocks were rough and there were many +openings, leading to the caves below. + +"We don't want another tumble," remarked Roger to Dave. + +"Hardly, Roger; once was enough." + +The sun had come out strongly, consequently the water was drying away +rapidly. It was very warm, and the boys were glad that they had donned +thin clothing on leaving the ship. + +At last they reached the top of the rise and from that elevation were +able to see all but the southern end of Cave Island, which was hidden +by a growth of palms. + +Not a ship of any kind was in sight, much to the captain's +disappointment. + +"Must have had to sail away a good many miles," said Dave. + +"Either that, lad, or else the storm caused more or less trouble." + +From the elevation, all took a good look at every part of the island +that could be seen. They saw several other rocky elevations and the +entrances to caves innumerable. + +"Tell you one thing," remarked Phil. "If there was any truth in that +story of a pirates' treasure, the pirates would have plenty of places +where to hide the hoard." + +"Humph! I don't believe in the treasure and never will," returned +Roger. "If the treasure was ever here, you can make up your mind that +somebody got hold of it long before this." + +"If those Englishmen came here, it is queer that we don't see some +trace of them," said Captain Sanders. + +"Maybe they are like Jasniff and Merwell, keeping out of sight," +ventured Dave. + +"That may be true." + +"I think I see some figures moving down near the shore over there," +continued Roger, after another look around. "But they are so far off I +am not sure. They may be animals." + +"They look like two men to me," exclaimed Dave, after a long look. +"What if they should be Jasniff and Merwell! Oh, let us walk there and +make sure!" + +"That's a good, stiff walk," answered Captain Sanders. "We can't go +from here very well--unless we want to climb over some rough rocks. It +would be better to go down and follow the shore." + +"Then let us do that. It won't do us any good to go back to where we +left the others, now the ship isn't in sight." + +But the captain demurred, and finally it was agreed to return to camp +and start out for the other side of the island directly after dinner. + +"Turtle soup for all hands!" announced Billy Dill, proudly. "Best ever +made, too." + +"It certainly smells good," answered Dave. + +The turtle soup proved both palatable and nourishing, and, eaten with +crackers, made a good meal. + +"We'll take some crackers and fish along," said the captain, to the +boys, when they were preparing to leave the camp again. "For there is +no telling how soon we'll get back. It may take us longer than we +think to reach the other side of this island." + +"I've got a knapsack," said one of the castaway sailors. "You can take +that along, filled," and so it was arranged. Dave carried his gun and +the captain had a pistol. + +"If there is any game, we'll have a try for it," said Dave. "Even a +few plump birds would make fine eating." + +"Yes, or a rabbit or hare," added Roger. + +The party walked along the shore as far as they could go and then, +coming to what appeared to be an old trail, took to that. + +"What do you make of this path?" said Dave. "I had an idea the island +was uninhabited." + +"It is supposed to be," answered Captain Sanders. "But there is no +reason why somebody shouldn't live here." + +Presently they came to a fine spring of water. Near by lay an old +rusty cup, and a little further on a broken bucket. + +"Somebody has been here and that recently," was Dave's comment. "I +hope we are on the trail of Merwell and Jasniff." + +They walked on a little further and then, of a sudden, Captain Sanders +halted the boys and pointed up into one of the trees. + +"Wild pigeons!" exclaimed Dave. "And hundreds of them! Shall I give +them a couple of barrels, captain?" + +"Might as well, lad. Wild pigeons are good eating, especially when you +are hungry. Get as many of 'em as you can." + +Dave approached a little closer and took aim with care. Bang! went the +shotgun, and a wild fluttering and flying followed. Bang! went the +second barrel of the weapon, and then, as the smoke cleared away, the +boys and the captain saw seven of the pigeons come down to the ground. +Several others fluttered around and Phil caught one and wrung its +neck, and Roger laid another low with a stick he had picked up. + +"Fine shots, both of them," declared Captain Sanders. "Now load up +again, Dave, so as to be ready for anything else that shows up." + +"I am afraid I have scared the rest of the game," declared our hero, +and so it proved, for after that they saw nothing but some small +birds. + +They passed through a thick woods and then came rather unexpectedly to +a wall of rocks, all of a hundred feet in height. At the base of the +wall was an opening leading into a broad cave. Near the entrance was +the remains of a campfire. + +"Somebody has been here and that recently!" cried Phil, as he examined +the embers. + +"Must be Merwell and Jasniff!" cried Dave. "For if they were strangers +they would come out and see what the shooting meant." + +"Shall we go into the cave, or continue on the way to the shore?" +questioned the senator's son. + +"Oh, let us take a peep into the cave first," cried Phil. "It looks as +if it was inhabited." + +The others were willing, and lighting a firebrand that was handy, they +entered the cavern. In front they found the opening to be broad and +low, but in the rear the ceiling was much higher and there were +several passageways leading in as many different directions. + +"What an island!" murmured Roger. "Why, one could spend a year in +visiting all the caves!" + +"It's like a great, big sponge!" returned Phil. "Holes everywhere!" + +"Take care that you don't slip down into some opening!" warned Captain +Sanders. + +In one of the passages they came across the remains of a meal and also +some empty bottles. Then Dave saw some bits of paper strewn over the +rocky floor. + +"What are they, Phil?" he asked, and then both commenced to pick the +pieces up. Roger helped, while the captain held the firebrand. + +"Well, of all things!" cried the shipowner's son. "Now what do you +make of this?" + +"The chart!" cried Dave. + +"Yes!" + +"What chart?" queried the master of the _Golden Eagle_. + +"The treasure chart those four Englishmen had," answered Dave. "Now +what made them come here with it and tear it to pieces?" + +"Hum!" mused the captain. "One of two things would make 'em do that, +lad. Either they got the treasure and had no further use for the map, +or else they found the whole thing was a fake and in their rage they +tore the map to shreds." + +"They must have gotten the gold!" murmured Roger and Phil. + +"No, I think they got fooled," said Dave. + +"The question is, if those Britishers were here, where did they go +to?" asked the captain. + +"Let us call," suggested Dave. "They may be in some part of this cave +where they couldn't hear the shots from my gun." + +All called out several times, and listened intently for a reply. + +"Hark! I hear something!" cried Roger. "Listen!" + +They strained their ears, and from what appeared to be a great +distance they heard a human voice. But what was said they could not +make out. + +"Too many echoes here," declared the captain. "A fellow can't tell +where the cry comes from." + +"Well, let us investigate," said our hero. + +They moved forward and backward, up one passageway and down another, +calling and listening. At times the voice seemed to be quite close, +then it sounded further off than ever. + +"This sure is a mystery!" declared Phil. "What do you make of it, +Dave?" + +"I am beginning to think the call came from somewhere overhead," +answered our hero. "Captain, see if you can flash a light on those +rocks to the left of our heads." + +Captain Sanders did as requested, and presently all in the party saw +another passageway, leading up from a series of rocks that formed +something of a natural stairway. Up this they went, Dave leading the +van. Then they came to a small opening between two rocks. + +"Help! help!" came in a half-smothered voice. "Help, please. Don't +leave me here in the dark any longer!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV--JASNIFF AND MERWELL + + +"It's a man!" + +"One of the Englishmen!" + +"You are right, lads," came from Captain Sanders. "And see, he is +bound hands and feet to the rocks!" + +What the master of the _Golden Eagle_ said was true, and as the +firebrand was flashed on the scene, the chums could do little but +stare in astonishment. + +Lying on his back between the rocks was the Englishman named Giles +Borden. Hands and feet were bound with a strong cord, which ran around +a projection of the rocks in such a manner that the prisoner could +scarcely move. + +"Who tied you up?" questioned Dave, as he and Phil set to work to +liberate the prisoner. + +"Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney," groaned the prisoner. "Oh, if only I +had my hands on them!" + +"Why did they do it?" asked Captain Sanders. + +"They wanted to rob me--and they did rob me!" answered Giles Borden. +"Oh, help me out of this wretched hole and give me a drink of water! I +am dying from thirst!" + +Not without difficulty the man was freed of the rope and helped to get +out from between the rocks. Then Dave and Roger half carried him down +to the cave proper. The crowd had a canteen of water and the man +drank, eagerly. + +"So your friends robbed you?" said Captain Sanders, curiously. + +"Do not call them friends of mine!" returned Giles Borden. "They are +not friends--they are vipers, wolves! Oh, if ever I meet them again at +home I'll soon have them in prison, or know the reason why!" + +"Hadn't you better tell us all about it?" went on the master of the +_Golden Eagle_. + +"Wait a minute!" cried Dave. "Do you suppose those men are anywhere +near here?" + +"I don't know. They said they would be back, but they did not come." + +"They may have seen us and skipped out," ventured the senator's son. + +"More than likely," groaned Giles Borden. "Now that they have my money +they won't want to stay here. They'll take passage on that ship as +soon as she comes in and leave me to shift for myself." + +"Tell us your story, so we can understand what you are talking about," +said Captain Sanders. + +In a disconnected manner the Englishman related his tale, pausing +occasionally to take another drink of water. He said he was from +London and had met Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney less than six months +before. They had come to him with the story of a wonderful pirates' +treasure said to be hidden on Cave Island, and had asked him to +finance an expedition in search of it. + +"I had just fallen heir to five thousand pounds through the death of +my father," he went on, "and I was anxious to get the treasure, so I +consented to pay the expenses of the trip, taking the three men along. +They had the chart that you saw on shipboard and some other +particulars, and they made me bring along a thousand pounds extra, +stating that we might have to pay some natives well to get them to +show us where the particular cave we were seeking was located." + +Then had followed the trip to Florida and the one to Barbados. At the +latter island a schooner had been chartered to take them to Cave +Island, where they were landed on the eastern shore. The schooner was +to come back for the Englishmen a week later. + +"As soon as the treasure hunt began I suspected that I was being +hoaxed," continued Giles Borden. "For all I knew, we were alone on the +island. We found several huts, but they were all deserted. We visited +a score of caves, but saw nothing that looked like a treasure. Then, +one afternoon, Geswick asked me about the extra thousand pounds I was +carrying. I grew suspicious and tried to hide the money between the +rocks. The three caught me at it and pounced on the money like a pack +of wolves. Then, when I remonstrated, they laughed at me, and told me +to keep quiet, that they were going to run matters to suit +themselves." + +"They must have intended to rob you from the start," said Dave. + +"You are right, and I was a fool to trust them. As soon as they had my +money, one of them, Rumney, tore up the chart and threw the pieces in +my face. That angered me so greatly that I struck him with my fist, +knocking him down. Then the three leaped on me and made me a prisoner, +binding me with the rope. I tried my best to get away, but could not. +That was at night. In the morning they went off, saying they would +come back later and give me something to eat. But that is the last I +have seen or heard of them." + +"If we hadn't found you, you might have starved to death," murmured +Captain Sanders. "They ought to be punished heavily for this--and for +robbing you!" + +The Englishman was glad enough to get something to eat, and then said +he felt much stronger. + +"But what brings you to this island?" he questioned, while partaking +of the food. + +"We are after a pair of criminals," answered Dave, as the others +looked at him, not knowing what to say. "Two young fellows who ran +away with some valuable jewels. I suppose you saw nothing of them." + +"No, as I said before, we saw nobody." + +"They are on this island." + +"Then I hope you catch them. And I hope you'll aid me in catching +those other scamps." + +"We'll certainly do that," answered Captain Sanders. + +A little later the whole party left the cave, and Giles Borden pointed +out a number of other caves he had visited. + +"The island is full of them," declared the Englishman. "And one has to +be careful, for fear of falling into a hole at every step." + +The middle of the afternoon found the party once more at the water's +edge. They had seen no trace of Jasniff and Merwell, or of the +rascally Englishmen. All were tired out and content to rest for a +little while. + +"Looks like a wild goose chase, doesn't it, Dave?" remarked Roger. + +"Oh, you mustn't grow discouraged so quickly, Roger," was Dave's +answer. "Unless Jasniff and Merwell have a chance to leave this island +we'll be sure to locate them, sooner or later. What I am worried about +mostly is the question: Have they the jewels or did the gems go to the +bottom of the ocean?" + +"Yes, that's the most important question of all." + +"It will be poor consolation to catch Jasniff and Merwell and not get +the jewels," put in Phil. "I reckon, Dave, you'd rather have it the +other way around--get the jewels and miss Jasniff and Merwell." + +"Indeed, yes, Phil." + +"In case we don't----" began the senator's son, and then stopped short. +He had seen Captain Sanders leap up and start inland. + +"What did you see, Captain?" asked Dave. + +"I saw somebody looking at us, from behind yonder trees!" cried the +master of the _Golden Eagle_. + +"One of the Englishmen?" queried Phil. + +"No, it was somebody younger--looked a little like that picture of Link +Merwell!" + +"Come on--after them!" cried Dave, and started on a run in the +direction the captain indicated. + +All were soon on the way, climbing over some rough rocks at first and +then crashing through the heavy undergrowth. Then they entered a +forest of tropical trees and vines. + +"I see them!" exclaimed Dave, after several hundred feet had been +covered. "Jasniff and Merwell as sure as you live! Stop! Stop, I tell +you!" he called out. + +"You keep back, Dave Porter!" yelled Nick Jasniff in return. "Keep +back, or it will be the worse for you!" + +"Jasniff, you had better surrender!" cried Roger. + +"We'll be sure to get you sooner or later!" added Phil. + +"You'll never catch me!" answered the other. "Now keep back, or maybe +somebody will get shot." + +"Do you think he'll shoot?" asked Captain Sanders, in some alarm, +while Giles Borden stopped short. + +"Possibly," answered Dave. "But I am going after him anyway," he added +sturdily. "I came here to catch those rascals and I am going to do +it." + +"And I am with you," said Phil, promptly. + +"Scare 'em with your gun, Dave," suggested the senator's son. + +"I will," was our hero's reply, and he brought the weapon to the +front. "I've got a gun, Jasniff!" he called out. "You had better stop! +And you had better stop too, Merwell!" + +"Don't yo-you shoot at us!" screamed Link Merwell, in sudden terror. +And then he ran with all speed for the nearest trees and dove out of +sight. The next instant Jasniff disappeared, likewise. + +Dave was now thoroughly aroused, and he resolved to do his best to run +the rascals down and corner them. Shifting his shotgun once more to +his back, he ran on in the direction the pair had taken, and Roger, +Phil, and the captain and the Englishman followed. + +Listening occasionally, they could hear Jasniff and Merwell crashing +through the undergrowth and at the same time calling to each other. +Evidently they had become separated and were trying to get together +again. + +As they advanced into the forest, Dave caught sight of Merwell. He was +behind a low fringe of bushes and an instant later disappeared. + +"Stop, Merwell!" he called out. "It won't do you any good to run. We +are bound to catch you, sooner or later." + +"Yo-you let me alone, Dave Porter!" spluttered Merwell. He was almost +out of breath, so violent had been his exertions. + +Dave kept on and soon reached the low bushes. Then he saw Merwell +again, this time leaping for some brushwood between two tall rocks. + +"I've got you now!" he said, sharply. "You may as well give in!" + +"Oh, Porter, please let me----" commenced Link Merwell, and then Dave's +hand caught him by the shoulder and whirled him about. + +As this happened something else occurred that filled both pursued and +pursuer with alarm. The grass and brushwood under their feet began to +give way. Then of a sudden Link Merwell sank from sight, and Dave +disappeared after him! + +In the meanwhile Phil and the others kept on in the direction Nick +Jasniff had taken. Twice they caught sight of the former bully of Oak +Hall, but each time he was further away than before. + +"You'll not catch me!" cried Jasniff. "You might as well give up +trying." Then he dove into another section of the forest and they saw +no more of him. + +"What has become of Dave?" asked Phil, when he and Roger came +together, a little later. + +"I thought he was with you, Phil." + +"And I thought he was with you." + +"He went after that other chap," put in Captain Sanders. "Perhaps he +caught him. They were over in that direction," and the captain pointed +with his hand. + +All proceeded in the direction indicated. But they did not catch sight +of either Dave or Merwell. + +"Well, this is strange, to say the least," remarked Phil, after they +had called out several times. "What do you make of it, Roger?" + +"I'm sure I don't know, Phil. They can't have gotten so far away but +what they could hear us call." + +"Maybe they fell into one of the caves," suggested Captain Sanders. + +"If they have, we had better hunt for Dave at once," returned Roger. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV--LINK MERWELL'S STORY + + +Down and down and still down went Dave, with Link Merwell in front of +him. Daylight was left behind with a suddenness that was appalling. +The brushwood scratched our hero's face and he could not repress a cry +of alarm. Merwell screamed loud and long and an echo came back that +was weird and ghostlike. Then came a mighty splash, and both boys went +into the water over their heads. + +Dave was a good swimmer, and as soon as he entered the water he struck +out to save himself. He came up in almost utter darkness, so he had to +go it blindly, not knowing in what direction to turn. Then he heard a +wild spluttering and knew the sounds came from his enemy. + +"Merwell!" + +"Oh, Porter! Sa-save me, please!" gasped Link Merwell. + +"Why don't you swim?--that is what I am doing." + +"I--I--struck my head on a rock! Oh, save me!" And then came a gasp, and +the scamp disappeared under the surface. + +Dave was close by and knew the direction by the noise. Taking a few +strokes, he bumped into Merwell, who promptly tried to catch his +would-be rescuer by the throat. But our hero was on guard and turned +him around. + +"Keep quiet, or I'll let go!" he ordered, as he began to tread water. +As Merwell obeyed, Dave struck out to where he saw a faint streak of +light. He made out a shelving rock, and after some difficulty, reached +this. Here the water was only up to his waist, and he waded along, +half carrying his enemy, until they reached another series of rocks, +where both crawled up to a spot that was dry. From somewhere overhead +came a faint streak of light, testifying to the fact that there was an +opening beyond, even if it could not be seen. + +"Oh, my head!" murmured Link Merwell, and put up one hand to a lump +that was rising on his forehead. + +"I got struck myself," said Dave. "But it didn't amount to much. I +told you to stop. If you had done so, we wouldn't have gotten into +this pickle." + +"Whe-where are we?" asked Merwell, and there was a shiver in his tone. + +"Down at the bottom of that hole." Dave tried to pierce the darkness. +"Looks like some underground river to me." + +"The water is salt." + +"Then this place must connect with the ocean." Dave drew a deep +breath. "Merwell, tell me truthfully, what did you do with those +jewels?" he questioned, eagerly. Even in that time of peril he could +not forget the mission that had brought him to Cave Island. + +"Who--who said I had the jewels?" faltered the other. + +"I know you and Jasniff took them--it is useless for you to deny it." + +"How do you know that?" + +"Never mind now. Answer my question. Have you the jewels, or did you +give them to Jasniff?" + +"I didn't give Nick anything." + +"Then you have them." + +"How do you know?" + +"I am not here to answer questions, Link Merwell. I want to know what +you did with the jewels." Dave's voice grew stern. "Answer me at +once!" And he caught Merwell by the arm. + +"Don't--don't shove me into the water!" cried the scamp, in alarm, +although Dave had no intention of doing as he imagined. "I--I--we--er--we +divided the jewels between us. But Nick got the best of them." + +"And what did you do with your share?" + +"I'll--er--I'll tell you when we get out of this hole." + +"You'll tell me right now, Merwell!" And again Dave caught the culprit +by the arm. + +"I--I put my share of the jewels in my money-belt," he faltered. + +"Have you it on now?" + +"Yes. But Nick has the best of the jewels--I got only the little ones," +went on Link Merwell, half-angrily. It was easy to surmise that he and +Jasniff had not gotten along well together. + +"How is it Jasniff got the best of them?" + +"He had the jewel-case when we were about to leave the bark during the +storm. Everybody was excited, and he said we couldn't carry the +case--that it wouldn't be safe, for we might drop it and all of the +jewels would be lost. He said we had better divide them and put them +in our belts. We had bought belts for that purpose in Jacksonville. So +we took the jewels out of the case and threw the box away. I thought I +had my share, but after we got to this island, and I had a chance to +look, I saw he had the lion's share, about three-quarters, in fact, +and all the big ones." + +"And he has them now?" + +"Yes,--that is, he did have them just before we saw you." + +"Did you sell or pawn any of the jewels?" + +"Only a few small ones. We were afraid to offer the big ones, so soon +after the--well, you know," and Link Merwell stopped short, looking +everything but happy. + +"You mean so soon after the robbery," said Dave, bluntly. + +"Yes." + +"Link, whatever--but never mind that now," continued our hero, hastily. +"Hand over the money-belt." + +"What, now?" + +"Yes, at once. I'll not trust you to carry those jewels a minute +longer." + +"Can't you wait till we get out of this wretched hole?" + +"I might, but I am not going to. Hand it over and be careful that none +of the jewels are lost. Your father may have to pay for the others." + +With fingers that trembled from fear and chilliness, Link Merwell +slipped his hands under the light clothing he wore and took off the +money-belt that encircled his waist. + +"There is some money there that belongs to me," he began, +hesitatingly. + +"You'll get back what is yours, never fear," answered Dave, and took +the belt. He saw to it that it was tightly closed, then fastened it +around his own waist. + +"Remember, Nick has the best of the jewels," went on Merwell, rather +spitefully. + +"I am not likely to forget it," answered Dave, grimly. "Now, the +sooner we get out of this hole the better." + +Merwell was just as anxious to see daylight, even if he was to be held +a prisoner, and together the boys hunted around for some exit from the +underground watercourse. But the only way out seemed to be far +overhead, and to climb up the smooth, sloping rocks proved impossible. + +"Oh, what shall we do?" groaned Merwell, after they had attempted to +climb up and had failed. "We are caught like rats in a trap!" + +"Perhaps we'll have to swim for it," answered Dave. "This water is +very salt, which proves it comes from the ocean. Moreover, it is +gradually going down, showing it is affected by the tide. Let us +follow the stream for a short distance and see where it leads to." + +Merwell demurred, but he did not want to remain behind alone in the +semi-darkness, so he followed Dave, and both waded and swam a distance +of several hundred feet. Here the underground river made a turn around +the rocks, and both boys were delighted to see a streak of sunlight +resting on the water. + +"An opening of some sort!" cried our hero. "Come on!" And he swam on +boldly and Merwell followed as quickly as he could. + +Soon the pair reached a break in the cave. On either side were walls +of rocks, uneven and covered with scanty bushes and immense trailing +vines. The opening was about a hundred feet in length, and beyond it +the stream of salty water plunged into another cavern, undoubtedly on +its way to the ocean. + +"Well, we are out of the cave in one way but not in another," observed +Dave, as he stood on the dry rocks and gazed about. "It's going to be +a stiff climb to get out of here." + +"Ca-can't you wait till I--I get my breath," panted Merwell. + +"Yes, for I want to get my own breath back. Perhaps we'll have to go +through that next cave to get out," he continued, after a pause. + +"Oh, I hope not! I hate it underground!" And Merwell shivered. +"Besides, it's cold," he went on, to cover up the tremor in his voice. + +"Yes, it is cold," returned Dave, shortly. + +He sat down to rest, and Merwell followed suit. On all sides were the +rocky walls and trailing vines, while at their feet ran the silent, +mysterious stream of salty water. + +Dave looked at the walls and the stream, and then looked at Merwell. +The face of the other youth was a study. He was downcast to the last +degree. + +"Link, what made you do it?" he asked, in a voice that was not +unkindly. + +"I didn't do it--that is, it wasn't my plan!" burst out the culprit, +passionately. "Oh, I know they'll hold me for it, just the same as +they'll hold Nick, if they catch him! But I'll tell you honestly, +Dave, it wasn't any of my planning. I'm bad, and I know it, but I am +not as bad as that. It was Nick who got the whole thing up. You know +how mad he has been at you ever since he had to leave Oak Hall. Well, +it was his plan to make you a prisoner first and then make it look as +if you had robbed the jewelry works. You ask Doctor Montgomery if that +isn't so. Well, the first part of the plan fell through, for you got +away. Then he got me to go to Crumville, and found out where we could +get the dynamite. I got scared then and wanted to back out, but he +said if I did he'd throw all the blame on me, and so I stuck to him. I +wish I hadn't done it," concluded Merwell, bitterly. + +"Did you go direct to Jacksonville after the robbery?" + +"No, we went to Washington first and there we pawned one diamond for +sixty dollars. Then we went to Jacksonville. There we met Luke Watson, +and both of us got scared to death. We had paid for our passage on the +_Emma Brower_, and we kept out of sight till the bark sailed. After +the storm we landed here with those four sailors, and were waiting to +sight some passing ship when you and your crowd turned up." + +"What were you going to do at Barbados?" + +"Keep quiet until this affair blew over and then take some English +vessel for England. There, Jasniff said, he could get a certain +pawnbroker to take the jewels and give us a good price for them. +You'll remember, he was in England some time." + +"Yes, I met him there. But, Link, didn't you realize what a crime you +were committing?" went on Dave, earnestly. + +"I did--after it was too late. Many a time I wanted to back out, but +Nick wouldn't let me. We had a quarrel in Washington, and another in +Jacksonville, and on the ship I came close to exposing him to the +captain. I think I should have done it, only the hurricane came up, +and then we had to hustle to save our lives." + +A silence followed, for each of the boys was busy with his thoughts. +Dave felt sorry for his former schoolmate, but he knew Merwell +thoroughly, and knew that the fellow was more sorry because he was +caught than because he had committed a great wrong. He belonged to the +class of persons who are willing to repent when it is too late. + +The day was drawing to a close, and already the sunlight had +disappeared beyond the high rocks. With a deep sigh Dave arose to his +feet and stretched himself, and Merwell followed suit. + +"What are you going to do?" asked the former bully of Oak Hall. + +"I am going to try to climb up those rocks." + +"They are terribly steep!" + +"I know it, but those vines look strong and we can use them as ropes, +Link. But you need not try it, if you don't want to." + +"Oh, if you try, so will I, Dave." + +After that but little was said, both lads saving their breath for the +task before them. Dave went up first, testing each vine with care as +he advanced. Twice he slipped back, and once Merwell came to his aid +and held him. It was a little thing to do, but it pleased our hero, +and his face showed it. + +At last they were out of the hollow and each threw himself on the +ground to rest. Then Dave walked to a near-by hill and gazed in every +direction. Not a human being was in sight anywhere. + +"Well, we've got to find them somehow," he said to Merwell. "Come +ahead." And side by side they set off through the forest in the +fast-gathering darkness. + +[Illustration: Dave went up first, testing each vine with care.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI--THE COLUMN OF SMOKE + + +"Well, we are lost, that is all there is to it. And I am so dead tired +I can't walk another step." And thus speaking, Link Merwell sank down +on a tree-root to rest. + +He and Dave had been plunging along through the forest and across +several clearings for the larger part of an hour. They had found what +looked to be a trail, but it had suddenly come to an end in front of a +small cave that looked to be the lair of some wild animal, and they +had gone on once more. Now the darkness of the tropics shut out the +surrounding landscape. + +Link Merwell certainly looked the picture of misery. His clothing was +much tattered and still wet, and his forehead was swollen from contact +with the rocks. One of his shoes was so cut that his bare foot was +exposed. + +"It looks as if we were lost," replied Dave. "In this darkness it will +be difficult to go much further. But I had hoped, by keeping in a +straight line, that, sooner or later, we'd reach the shore of the +island." + +"I reckon we didn't walk in a straight line--most folks that get lost +in a woods don't." + +"You are right in that, but I kept as straight as I could, Link. +However, that is neither here nor there. If we have got to stay here +all night we may as well try to make ourselves comfortable. But I wish +the others knew I was safe." + +"Can't you fire your gun? It ought to be dry by now." + +"I'll try it." + +Dave sat down and commenced to work over the fowling-piece. In a few +minutes he tried it. Bang! went the gun, the shot echoing far and wide +through the forest and among the rocks. Then both boys listened for a +reply. + +"Nothing doing," muttered Merwell, after a minute of utter silence. + +"I am sure the others would fire a shot in return if they heard that," +said Dave. "We must be further from them than I expected. Well, I +don't see what we can do excepting to try to make ourselves +comfortable. We might climb one of these tall palms and take a look +around." + +"Yes, that's it!" exclaimed the other youth, eagerly. "Why didn't we +think of that before? But it will be hard work climbing one of those +trees," went on Merwell, gazing up at the straight trunk with the +first of the limbs many feet above their heads. + +"I'll do it native fashion," answered Dave. + +He had seen the natives of the South Sea Islands climb tall trees by +means of a vine-rope cast about the waist and the tree-trunk. +Selecting several strong vines, he twisted them into a rope, and then +passed the same around a tree-trunk and to the back of his waist. Then +he took off his shoes and stockings and placed his bare feet against +the tree. By "hiking" the rope a few inches at a time, he was able to +"walk up the tree" with comparative ease. + +As soon as the branches were reached, Dave discarded the rope and went +up as far as the strength of the tree would permit. He was now close +enough to the top to get a good look around, and he cast his eyes +about eagerly, hoping to catch sight of some of his friends, or their +campfire. + +"See anything?" called up Merwell, eagerly. + +"Not yet," answered Dave, and then he turned around in the tree-top. +He now made out the rolling sea. + +"I see a light!" he cried. + +"A campfire?" queried the youth below. + +"No, it is on the water. I think it must be a light on a ship." + +"What kind of a ship?" + +"A sailing vessel of some sort," answered Dave, and he wondered if it +could be the _Golden Eagle_, coming back after the storm. + +"Maybe it's the ship that was coming back for those Englishmen," went +on Merwell, for Dave had told him about the men. He heaved a +mountainous sigh as he realized how affairs had turned against him. +For a moment he thought of running away and trying to find Jasniff, +but then the darkness and loneliness of the forest appalled him. He +felt that he would rather be a prisoner than be alone in such a spot. + +Dave watched the waving light for some time, as it rose and fell on +the bosom of the ocean, but could learn nothing concerning the craft +that showed it. Then he continued to look around the island. No +campfire was to be located, and finally he rejoined Merwell. + +"The light on that ship was all I saw," he said. "Perhaps it might pay +to walk down to the shore in that direction. But it is a long +distance, and in the darkness we might fall into another of the +caves." + +"Let us stay here," answered Merwell. + +"It will probably be as well. We can build a campfire and dry our +clothing and then go to bed." + +"Wish I had something to eat," grumbled the lad who had been caught. + +"So do I, Link. But we haven't anything, so we'll have to make the +best of it. Try to find some firewood. Luckily I have a waterproof +matchsafe along and it is full of matches," added our hero. + +Fate was kinder to them than they had expected, for in hunting for +firewood, Merwell found a hole containing what they took to be native +hares. He killed two of the creatures, and at once set to work to +clean and skin them. Then, when Dave had started the fire, the game +was broiled while the boys had their clothing drying. + +"Not much of a meal, but better than nothing," said Merwell, and our +hero agreed with him. They found some water in a hollow of the rocks, +left there by the hurricane, and had a drink, after which both lay +down to rest. + +"Don't you think we ought to stand guard?" asked the big youth. + +"Oh, I don't know," replied Dave. "I am dead tired and so are you, and +I don't think anybody will come to harm us,--and there are no large +wild beasts on the island. I guess we can take a chance," and as soon +as their clothing was dry, both turned in, on beds of vines and moss. + +In the morning Merwell was the first to stir, and when Dave awoke he +found the campfire burning merrily. The big youth was nowhere to be +seen. + +"Can he have run away?" mused our hero, and quickly felt to learn if +the money-belt with the jewels was safe. It was still in its place and +he breathed a sigh of relief. Then he gave a call. + +"Coming!" came from a distance, and in a few minutes Merwell put in an +appearance, bringing with him some berries and fruits. + +"One of those sailors who came ashore with me told me about these," he +said. "The berries we can eat raw and they are very good. The fruit we +can slice up and toast. They make a pretty decent meal," and so it +proved, and both youths ate their fill. Then Dave announced his +intention of climbing the tree again and having another look around. + +"That ship is at the south end of the island," he announced. "It is +not the _Golden Eagle_, but a much smaller craft. Most likely it is +the vessel the Englishmen engaged. If it is, those three rascals will +have a chance to get away before Giles Borden can catch them and make +them give up the money they took from him." + +"Oh, Dave, do you think----" And then Merwell stopped short. + +"What were you going to say, Link?" + +"I was thinking if it would be possible for Nick to go away with those +Englishmen." + +"Why, yes, if he chanced to meet them, and they were willing to have +him. But would he go and leave you behind?" + +"He might, especially if he found out I was captured, or that I had +let you have what jewels I was carrying." + +"If he went with those Englishmen he would be foolish to let them know +about the jewels, for they would rob him, just as they robbed Giles +Borden," continued our hero, and then he realized that here was a new +peril to face. If the Englishmen got their hands on the jewels it +might be next to impossible to recover the gems, especially if the +rascals managed to get away from Cave Island. + +Presently our hero saw a column of smoke arising in another portion of +the island. He watched it for several minutes and then gave a cry of +satisfaction. + +"I know where they are!" + +"You mean your crowd?" queried Merwell. + +"Yes. Phil is signaling to me, by means of a column of smoke such as +some Indians out west use. We learned the trick when we were at Star +Ranch. Come on, we'll soon be with them. It isn't very far." + +Dave had come down from his high perch in a hurry, and in a very short +time was ready to leave the spot. Merwell gave a deep sigh, for he did +not relish confronting his former schoolmates. + +"It's tough luck, but I suppose I've got to stand it," he murmured, as +he followed Dave, after the fire had been extinguished. "When a fellow +makes a fool of himself he's got to take the consequences." And this +remark was so true that Dave did not dispute it. + +On they went through the forest and then over a rocky hill. Three +times they came close to falling into the treacherous holes in which +the island abounded, and the last time poor Merwell got a fall that +almost sprained his ankle. + +"We'll rest a bit and you can bathe the ankle," said Dave, kindly, and +got some water from a nearby pool. + +"I don't wonder nobody is living on this island," grumbled the injured +one. "I suppose the natives around here are too afraid of falling into +some of those holes." + +"They are afraid of the caves and also afraid of volcanoes," answered +Dave. "The mate of the _Golden Eagle_ told me that. Sometimes the +volcanoes break out here without warning and cover the rocks with hot +ashes." + +"Is that so? Well, I hope no volcano breaks out while I am here." + +At last the boys reached a small rise of ground and at a distance saw +the column of smoke, plainly. Dave put on extra speed and soon saw +Phil, Giles Borden, and several sailors--the survivors from the +ill-fated _Emma Brower_. + +"Phil!" + +"Dave! At last!" cried the shipowner's son, joyfully. "Are you hurt?" + +"Not a bit of it. How are you?" + +"All right, although I had several tumbles while hunting for you. You +disappeared in the strangest fashion." + +"I fell into a cave,--went down with Link Merwell." + +"Oh!" Phil gave a start. "Who is that in the bushes? Merwell, as sure +as I'm alive!" + +"Yes, Phil. And what do you think? I've got part of the jewels--Link +had them in his money-belt." + +"Good enough! I was so afraid they had been lost out of that +jewel-case. Did you make Merwell a prisoner?" + +"Well, in a way. He might have run away a dozen times, but I guess he +didn't want to be alone. Besides, he has quarreled with Jasniff. I'll +tell you all about it later," went on Dave, in a lower tone. + +Merwell had halted and now he came shuffling into the temporary camp. +He nodded sheepishly to the shipowner's son and to the sailors. + +"Got ye, did they?" said one of the tars, with a sneer. + +"Yes," answered the culprit, meekly. + +"Humph! You're a fine Dick to run away and steal jewels!" muttered the +sailor, and turned his back on the youth. + +"Where are Roger and Captain Sanders and the others?" questioned Dave. + +"Gone after you, and after Jasniff and those three rascally +Englishmen," answered Phil. "I said I'd stay here and try that trick +with a column of smoke. I thought you might remember and look for it." + +"It was a good thing to do, Phil," answered our hero, "for it brought +us straight to this spot." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII--BEHIND THE CURTAIN OF VINES + + +An hour went by and during that time Dave drew Phil to one side and +related the particulars concerning the doings of Merwell and Jasniff, +according to the story told by the former of the two evil-disposed +youths. + +"I think Link feels pretty sore," he continued. "So there won't be any +use in rubbing it in." + +"What do you intend to do with him, Dave?" + +"I don't know yet. We'll talk it over later on. The thing to do now is +to locate Jasniff and get the rest of the jewels. Don't forget that he +has the finest of the diamonds. That is one thing that made Link +sore--Jasniff taking the lion's share." + +"Well, that was the way Jasniff always did, even at school. Now you've +got back I'm willing to start the search for him any time you say," +continued the shipowner's son. + +"We'll wait a while and see if Roger and Captain Sanders return," +answered our hero. + +He was glad to rest, and threw himself on a bed of moss the sailors +had collected. Merwell sat against a tree, tired out, but too much +worried to sleep. Evidently he was trying to decide on what to do next +and wondering how he was to get out of the awful situation in which he +found himself. + +Presently a shout was heard, and Roger burst into view, followed an +instant later by Billy Dill. + +"Hello, Dave!" cried the senator's son. "Got back, have you?" And then +he stared at Merwell. "Oh, are you here, too?" + +"Yes," returned the big youth, and that was all he could say. + +"Dave, did you get the jewels Merwell had?" went on Roger. + +"Yes. But, Roger, how did you know----" + +"There is no time to talk it over now, Dave," interrupted the +senator's son, quickly. "We have got to act, and that at once! That +is, if you want to get back the rest of the jewels." + +"Why, what do you mean?" demanded Dave and Phil in a breath, and even +Merwell was all attention. + +"Do you remember those Englishmen, the fellows who robbed Mr. Borden? +Well, we traced them to their camp, and what do you think? They met +Jasniff in some way, and he is friendly with them." + +"Did he tell them about the jewels?" demanded our hero. + +"No, he was cute enough to keep the story of the jewels to +himself,--that is, we didn't hear him tell them anything about the +gems. But he said he wanted to get away from the island as quickly as +possible, and without being seen by any of us, and he offered the +Englishmen a thousand dollars in diamonds if they'd help him. They +agreed to it, and all hands are waiting for some ship to come here and +take them off." + +"The ship I saw last night!" cried Dave, and told of the light on the +ocean. + +"It must be that ship!" exclaimed Phil. + +"They'll get away sure, unless you can stop 'em," put in Merwell, and +he seemed to be almost as interested as anybody. It galled him +exceedingly to think that his companion in crime might escape. + +"Roger, how did you learn this?" asked Dave. + +"In a queer kind of a way. Billy Dill got on the trail of the three +Englishmen first and we followed them to one of the caves. Then one of +the Englishmen went away and after a while he came back with Jasniff, +and all hands went to another cave, close to the shore. We got into +one part of the cave and overheard what the crowd said, through a +crack in the rocks. We might have confronted Jasniff and demanded the +jewels, but we saw that the Englishmen were all armed and they looked +to be in an ugly mood, and Captain Sanders wanted no bloodshed if it +could be avoided. So then Billy Dill and I said we would come back +here and get Phil and the sailors." + +"I should think you'd do your best to capture Jasniff," said Merwell. + +"Do you want him captured?" asked Roger, sharply. + +"Why not? He didn't treat me fairly--and he planned the robbery in the +first place." + +"Well, if you want him taken you had better help us," put in Phil. + +"Say, Dave, if I help you catch Jasniff and get the rest of the jewels +back, will you--er--will you let me go?" faltered Link Merwell, +anxiously. + +"I don't know--I'll see about it, Link," answered Dave, and that was as +far as he would commit himself, for he remembered that this case was +for Mr. Wadsworth and the authorities to settle. + +"I'll help you all I can--just to get square with Nick!" muttered the +big youth. "I'll show him that he isn't the only frog in the puddle." + +"The sooner we go the better," went on the senator's son. + +"I am ready now," returned Dave. "I'll not rest easy until Jasniff is +caught and the rest of those jewels are recovered." + +A few words more were exchanged, and then it was decided that the +whole party should follow Roger and Billy Dill to the spot from whence +they had come. + +"Borden is very anxious to have the three Englishmen held," said the +senator's son. + +"I suppose he wants to get back his money," returned Dave. "I don't +blame him." + +The path was through the forest and then along a rocky ridge. Here +walking was very uncertain, and Roger warned the others to be careful. + +"An' if ye ain't careful ye'll go into a hole to Kingdom Come!" put in +Billy Dill. + +When the ridge was left behind they came to another patch of timber, +and then walked through a small cave with a large opening at either +end. In the center of this cave was a hole, at the bottom of which +flowed an underground river. + +"If ever an island was rightly named, this is the one," observed Phil. +"It is caves from one end to the other." + +"Listen! I thought I heard voices!" exclaimed Dave, suddenly, and held +up his hand for silence. + +All listened closely and heard a faint murmur, coming from a distance. + +"Sounds to me as if it was underground," whispered Phil. + +"Yes, but from what direction?" asked Roger. + +"I think it comes from over yonder," answered Dave. "Let us go there +and make sure." + +They walked on, soon coming to a spot where a place between the rocks +was covered with a matting of long vines, much intertwined. + +"Keep quiet!" suddenly exclaimed our hero. "I know where they +are--behind those vines. There must be a cave there, and the vines make +a curtain for the entrance." + +"Who is it?" asked Merwell. + +"I don't know yet. Wait, all of you remain here, behind the rocks, +while I investigate." + +As silently as possible, Dave crawled forward, keeping close to the +rocks on one side of the cave's entrance. Soon he was up to the +curtain of vines, and cautiously he thrust his hand forward, making a +small opening. + +At first our hero could see little, but as his eyes became accustomed +to the gloom, he made out two forms lying on couches of vines, +smoking. The forms were those of the two Englishmen, Pardell and +Rumney. + +"Well, Geswick ought to be coming back," Dave heard Rumney say. "He +said he wouldn't waste any time." + +"Maybe he had some trouble with that young fellow," returned Pardell. +"Say, do you know he's a queer stick? Where did he get those diamonds +he offered for his passage?" + +"I don't know, but I rather think he stole them." + +"Then perhaps he has more of the jewels." + +"Just what I was thinking--and Geswick thought the same." + +"If he has many of them----" The man paused suggestively. + +"We might relieve him, eh?" returned the other. + +"Why not? We cleaned out Borden. Two jobs of that sort are no worse +than one." + +There was a period of silence, and Dave moved back as quietly as +possible to where he had left his companions. + +"Rumney and Pardell are there, in a long cave," he whispered. "They +are waiting for Geswick and, I think, Jasniff." + +"But where are Captain Sanders and Smiley?" asked the shipowner's son. + +"I don't know. Perhaps they are watching Jasniff and Geswick--or maybe +they have captured those rascals." + +"Oh, let me get at Pardell and Rumney!" cried Giles Borden. "I'll +teach them to rob me!" And he started forward, flourishing a heavy +stick he had picked up. + +"Wait! wait!" returned Dave, and caught him by the arm. "Don't go yet. +Let us lie low until Geswick comes, and maybe Jasniff. We may be able +to capture all of them." + +"Can we handle so many?" asked Roger. + +"I think so. Anyway we can try. Remember, Captain Sanders and Smiley +may be following Geswick and Jasniff, and if they are, they'll come to +our aid." + +"I'll wait, but it's a hard thing to do, don't you know," grumbled the +Englishman who had been robbed. + +"We had better set a guard, so that we are not surprised," advised +Phil. "Supposing we scatter around the rocks and in the vines?" + +This was agreed upon, and it was also agreed that Dave should give a +whistle when he wanted an attack made. + +After this came a long period of waiting. All remained silent, until, +of a sudden, everybody was startled by a distant cannon shot. + +"What in the world can that mean?" cried Phil, who lay close to our +hero. + +"It's a shot from a ship's cannon, and it came from the direction of +the shore!" returned Dave. "It may be some sort of a signal." + +"Do you suppose it's a summons to Pardell and Rumney?" + +"It may be. Wait, I'll look into the cave again and see what they are +doing." + +Losing no time, our hero crawled forward once more to the position he +had before occupied. Then he pushed the vines aside and looked into +the long cave. + +He could not suppress a cry of consternation. The two Englishmen had +vanished! + +"They are gone!" he called to his companions. + +"Gone!" repeated Phil and Roger. + +"Don't tell me that!" fairly shrieked Giles Borden. "I must catch them +and get back my money!" + +"Where did they go to?" asked Billy Dill, as he pushed through the +curtain of vines. + +"They must have left the cave by some other opening," answered Dave. +"Come on, we'll soon find out!" And into the cave he rushed, his chums +and the others in the crowd following. + +"I see another opening!" cried Merwell, a minute later. "Look!" And he +pointed down a passageway to the right. + +"That's the way they must have gone!" exclaimed Giles Borden. "After +them, all of you! If I get back my money, I'll reward you well!" And +on he sped, with Merwell close at his heels and the others following. + +"I don't know if we are on the right track or not," said Dave, to Phil +and Roger. "This cave may have other openings." + +Hardly had he spoken when there came a yell from Giles Borden, +followed by a cry from Link Merwell. Both had fallen into a small hole +that was filled with water. Each was much shaken up, but unhurt. + +"It's a broken neck somebody will get if we are not careful," said one +of the sailors. "I'd rather be on the deck of a ship any day than on +an island like this." + +Soon they were out in the open once more. They were on a rise of +ground, and not a great distance away they could see the shore and the +rolling ocean. + +"A ship!" cried Roger. + +"But not the _Golden Eagle_!" returned Dave. "It must be the vessel +that was to stop for the Englishmen." + +"It is! It is!" bawled Giles Borden. "And look, there they are on the +shore, ready to embark, all of them!" + +"Yes, and Jasniff is with them!" added Dave, Phil, and Roger in a +breath. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII--IN WHICH THE ENEMY SAILS AWAY + + +It was a startling discovery, and for the moment Dave and the others +did not know what to do. + +"Do you see anything of Captain Sanders, or Smiley?" questioned our +hero. + +"Not a thing," returned the senator's son. "It's strange, too." + +"Oh, cannot we stop them in some manner?" pleaded Giles Borden. + +"Come on--we'll do what we can!" cried Phil. + +"That's the talk!" put in old Billy Dill. "Oh, for a gatling gun that +we might train on 'em!" he added. + +All were calculating the distance to the shore. Between them and the +water was a slight hollow, overgrown with brushwood and vines. How +long would it take to find a path through that hollow? + +"No use in staying here," was Dave's comment. "We'll get there +somehow. But keep out of sight, if you can. We don't want them to +discover us until the last minute." All moved forward toward the +hollow. By walking well over to the left they managed to keep a +distant row of palms between themselves and those who were at the +water's edge. + +But progress was slow, as all soon discovered. The hollow was a +treacherous one, full of soft spots and pitfalls. Less than a hundred +feet had been covered when two of the sailors went down up to their +waists, and a second later Roger followed. + +"Hold on, Roger! I'll help you!" cried Dave, and he and Phil ran to +their chum's assistance. They did not dare to go near the soft spot +and so all they could do was to throw the senator's son a stout vine +for use as a rope, and then haul him out by sheer strength. In the +meantime the others went to the rescue of the two sailors, and they +were hauled out in similar fashion. + +"This island certainly is the limit!" gasped Roger, when he was on +firm ground once more. "I wouldn't live here if they made me a present +of the whole thing!" + +"That's right," returned Phil. "Because, if you lived here, you might +some day find yourself buried before your time!" And this quaint way +of expressing it made all of the boys grin in spite of their +excitement. + +Beyond the hollow another difficulty confronted them. Here were some +sharp rocks, with deep cuts between. They had to climb over the rocks +with extreme care and do not a little jumping, all of which consumed +much valuable time. + +"They'll be off before we can reach them!" groaned Dave. "Oh, do +hurry, fellows!" + +"I'm coming as fast as I can!" answered Phil. + +"So am I," added Roger. + +"You ought to shoot at them, if they won't stop," put in Merwell. + +"I'll do what I can," answered our hero. He was wondering how far the +present situation would justify the use of firearms. + +At last the rocks were left behind, and the crowd found themselves in +the fringe of palm trees lining the sandy shore. + +"Do you see them?" queried Phil, who was getting winded from his +exertions. + +"No, I don't," returned Dave. He had looked up and down the sandy +strip in vain for a sight of the Englishmen and Jasniff. + +Beyond the beach was the reef with the ever-present breakers and far +beyond this the ship they, had before sighted. The schooner lay-to +with all sails lowered. + +"There they are!" suddenly shouted Billy Dill. "Too late, boys, too +late!" + +"Where? where?" came in a shout from the lads and from Giles Borden. + +"Look out there, by the reef. Don't you see the small boat in the +breakers?" went on the old sailor, pointing with his bronzed hand. + +All gazed in the direction he indicated, and Dave and Giles Borden +could not repress a groan of dismay. For, riding the swells of the +ocean, could be seen a small boat, manned by two sailors. In the boat +sat four passengers. + +"That's Jasniff, I am sure of it!" cried Phil. + +"And those three men are the fellows who robbed me!" muttered Giles +Borden. "Oh, what luck! Ten minutes too late!" + +"Can't we follow them in some way?" asked Roger. + +"I don't see how," answered Dave. "Our rowboat is on the other side of +the island. Besides, even if we had a boat, I don't believe we could +catch them before the schooner got underway. Oh, isn't it a shame!" +And Dave fairly ground his teeth in helpless dismay. + +"If we had a cannon!" murmured old Billy Dill. "A shot across the bow +o' that craft would make the cap'n take warnin', I'm thinkin'!" + +"Do you suppose any other boat is handy?" asked the Englishman. + +"We might look," returned the senator's son. + +All were about to run out on the beach when Dave suddenly called a +halt. + +"Don't do it," he said. "If we can't follow them, it will be best for +the present not to show ourselves." + +"How's that?" demanded Giles Borden. "It's a bloody shame to let them +go in this fashion." + +"If they see us, they'll know we are after them and they'll sail away +as fast as possible," went on our hero. "If they don't see us, they +may take their time in getting away, and that will give us so much +better chance to catch them." + +"Dave is right!" cried the senator's son. And the others agreed with +him, and all kept concealed behind the row of palms and the brushwood +and rocks. From that point they watched the small boat gradually +approach the schooner until it was alongside. Then a rope ladder was +lowered and the passengers mounted to the deck, after which the +rowboat was drawn up on the davits. + +"What ship is that?" asked Phil. + +"She is named the _Aurora_," answered Giles Borden. + +"The _Aurora_!" exclaimed Billy Dill. "Do ye mean the _Aurora_, Cap'n +Jack Hunker?" + +"Yes, that's the captain's name." + +"Why, I know him!" went on the old tar. "Sailed with him once, in the +_Peter Cass_,--afore he took command o' the _Aurora_. Say, Dave, he +used to be a putty good man. I can't see how he would stand in with +sech fellers as Jasniff an' them thievin' Britishers." + +"Perhaps he doesn't know what scoundrels they are," returned our hero. + +"Oh, they haven't told him the truth, depend upon that," said Giles +Borden. "They have fixed up some story to pull the wool over his eyes. +Most likely they'll tell him that I am the rascal of the party and +that is why I am to be left behind." + +"If the captain of the _Aurora_ is all right, it may pay to signal to +him," mused Dave. "I wish I had known of this before." + +"See! see! they are hoisting the sails!" cried Phil. + +"If you are going to signal to the schooner, you had better do it +pretty quick," advised Roger. + +"I think I will. It can't hurt much--they are going to sail away, +anyhow. Come on." + +All ran out on the sandy beach, and Dave discharged his shotgun twice +as a signal. The others waved tree-branches and brushwood, and Phil +even lit some of the latter, to make a smudge. + +But if the signals were seen, no attention was paid to them. Those on +the schooner continued to hoist the sails, and presently the _Aurora_ +turned away, leaving Cave Island behind. + +As the schooner moved off Dave's heart sank within him. On board of +the craft was Jasniff, and the rascal had the larger portion of the +Carwith jewels in his possession. + +"It's a shame!" burst out Phil. "Oh, why didn't we get hold of Jasniff +when you collared Link!" + +"Where is your own ship?" asked Merwell. "Why don't you find her and +follow that crowd?" He felt as sour as ever over the thought that he +had been captured while his companion in crime had escaped. + +"I wish the _Golden Eagle_ would come in," answered Dave. "I can't +understand what is keeping her, unless she suffered from that storm +and had to lay to for repairs." + +"And where do you suppose Captain Sanders and Smiley are?" put in +Roger. + +"I don't know. They may have fallen into one of the caves, or they may +have been made prisoners by those who have sailed away." + +"Prisoners? I never thought of that!" exclaimed Giles Borden. "Yes, it +would be just like Geswick and those other scoundrels to treat them in +that fashion." + +"Well, it won't do us any good to remain here," went on our hero. "We +may as well scatter and see if we can't locate the captain and the +others." + +This was considered good advice and tired as the crowd was, all went +on the hunt, some up the shore and some down, and the others inland. + +Dave and Roger walked down the shore, why neither could exactly tell. +They passed the palms and brushwood, and leaving the sand, commenced +to climb over some rocks. Then Dave began to shout. + +At first no reply came to his calls, but presently he heard a groan, +coming from behind the rocks. + +"Let us see what it means!" he exclaimed to the senator's son, and +they hurried in the direction of the sound with all speed. + +Back of the rocks was a grove of plantains, and in the center was the +remains of a thatched hut, evidently built by natives years before. On +the ground in front of this hut lay Captain Sanders and the sailor, +Smiley. Each had his head bound up and each was nursing a bruised +ankle. + +"Captain Sanders!" cried Dave, in astonishment. + +"Dave Porter!" returned the commander of the _Golden Eagle_, joyfully. +"My, but I am glad you have come!" + +"You are hurt?" + +"Yes. Those scoundrels attacked us from behind and knocked us +senseless." + +"You mean those three Englishmen?" + +"Yes, and that fellow Jasniff was with them." + +"But your ankles are hurt, too?" went on Dave. + +"We hurt them when we fell into one of the beastly caves, or holes. We +were following Jasniff and the Englishmen, and also looking for you +and the others. Then those rascals got behind us in some way, and the +first thing I knew I got a whack behind the ear that knocked me +unconscious." + +"And I got the same," said Smiley. "Oh, I wish I had my hands on those +villains!" + +"They have sailed away," said Roger. + +"Away!" cried the captain. "How?" + +In a few brief words our hero and his chum told of the advance to the +beach and of what they and the others had witnessed. Captain Sanders +shook his head, soberly. + +"That's too bad," he said. "They've got a good start and it will be +hard to follow them." + +"How can we follow them, when the _Golden Eagle_ isn't here?" said +Dave. + +"But she is here--on the other side of the island." + +"Oh, are you sure?" cried our hero. + +"Yes. I saw her coming in,--when we were on one of the hills. She was +minus her foretopmast, which shows she must have suffered some in that +hurricane." + +"If that's the case, let us get to her with all possible speed, go +aboard, and follow the _Aurora_," returned Dave. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX--A CHASE ON THE OCEAN + + +It took the best part of the afternoon and evening to get the whole +party together again, and send word to the mate of the _Golden Eagle_ +to bring the vessel around to that side of Cave Island. And while this +was being done the hurts Captain Sanders and Smiley had received were +cared for as well as the means at hand permitted. + +The captain and the wounded sailor had a long story to tell, of how +they had followed the three rascally Englishmen and Nick Jasniff, and +how the latter had made a compact with the others, so that they would +take him with them when they left the island. + +"The Englishmen were a bit afraid of the captain of the _Aurora_," +said Captain Sanders, "and we overheard them discuss the situation. +They knew the captain would want to know what had become of the fourth +man he had left here. At last they resolved to try a trick, but they +weren't sure it would work. But evidently it did, for the schooner has +sailed." + +"What was that trick?" asked Dave. + +"It seems that when Mr. Borden was on the _Aurora_ he had a headache +from the sun and wore smoked glasses. Is that right, sir?" + +"It is," answered Giles Borden. "The glare on the waves was beastly, +and I wore the smoked glasses all day long." + +"Well, the rascals planned to have Jasniff impersonate Mr. Borden. One +of them, Geswick, exchanged coats and caps with him, and lent him a +pair of smoked glasses, and he was to tie up his cheeks and pretend to +be suffering from toothache, and keep to his stateroom as much as +possible during the trip." + +"Oh, what a thing to do--impersonate me!" roared Giles Borden, in a +rage. "Just wait till I confront him!" + +"Yes, you'll have to wait," put in Phil, dryly. + +"Did you find out where they were going to sail to?" asked Dave, +eagerly. + +"To San Juan, on the island of Porto Rico. But they may make some +stops on the way." + +"San Juan," mused Roger. "That's a good many miles from here. Perhaps +the _Golden Eagle_ can catch the _Aurora_ before she gets there." + +"If they went to San Juan direct I'd advise waiting till they got in +that harbor before I'd do anything," said Captain Sanders. + +"Why?" asked the boys. + +"Because it is one thing to stop them on the high seas and another to +stop them in United States waters. Remember, Porto Rico is now a part +of Uncle Sam's domain." + +"Yes, I'd rather go at them there than on the high seas," answered +Dave. "But they mustn't get away again, no matter where we have to +tackle them," he added, determinedly. + +It was impossible to transfer those ashore to the _Golden Eagle_ +during the darkness, because of the danger in the breakers, so they +had to wait until daylight before departing. + +Among those to go were, of course, the sailors who had come ashore +from the wreck of the _Emma Brower_. Captain Sanders told them they +could remain on the island if they wished, but they set up an +immediate protest. + +"It's not a fit place for any man," said one of the tars. "There is +very little game and not much fruit, and one is continually in danger +of falling into a hole or a cave. I'll go to Porto Rico gladly, and so +will my mates, and we'll work our passage, if you're willing." + +"All right," said Captain Sanders. "But you'll not have much to do, as +we have about all the hands we need." + +When aboard the ship, the captain and the boys listened to the story +the mate had to tell. Then they learned that the storm had blown the +_Golden Eagle_ many miles from Cave Island, and in trying to avoid +some of the keys of another island, the vessel had lost the top of one +of the masts and the rudder had been damaged. This had necessitated +much delay, which accounted for the non-appearance of the vessel when +expected. + +While making repairs, the vessel had been passed by a tramp steamer +bound for Trinidad. The captain of the steamer had asked if he could +be of assistance, and after being told no, had given the information +that he had picked up three rowboat loads of passengers and crew from +the ill-fated _Emma Brower_. It may be mentioned here that another +boat load from the same vessel managed to reach another island in that +vicinity, and in the end it was learned that the going down of the +bark was unattended with the loss of a single life. + +With so many on board, the accommodations on the _Golden Eagle_ were +somewhat crowded. The sailors went with Billy Dill into the +forecastle, while Giles Borden was asked to share Captain Sanders' +stateroom. What to do with Link Merwell became a question. In one +sense he was a prisoner, yet Dave hated to treat him as such. + +"There is the extra pantry," said Captain Sanders. "We can clean that +out and put in a cot, and he can use that," and so it was arranged, +much to the relief of all of the boys. The pantry had a grating, +opening on the main passageway, so it made a fairly comfortable +stateroom, although rather hot. + +"Well, I suppose I've got to take my medicine, when we get back," +grumbled Link Merwell, when given his quarters. + +"What else could you expect?" returned Dave. "If this was my affair +alone, Link, I might let you go, now you have given up the jewels. But +what is to be done is for Mr. Wadsworth and the authorities to say." + +Merwell had confessed that he and Jasniff had taken the skates and +other things at Squirrel Island, and told where they had been left, in +a barn along the river, and how they might be recovered. He had also +admitted impersonating Dave on several occasions and ordering goods in +our hero's name, and doing other mean things of which he had been +suspected, and said he was heartily sorry for his actions. + +Soon the _Golden Eagle_ was ready for the departure from Cave Island. +As the sails were hoisted the boys gathered on deck to take a last +look at the remarkable spot. + +"It is really and truly Cave Island," declared Dave. "I don't believe +any other place in the world is so full of caves and holes!" + +"I am glad the volcanoes didn't get busy while we were there," +remarked the shipowner's son. + +"So am I," added Roger. "The caves and holes were bad enough, without +adding other perils." + +"Dave, do you think we'll catch that schooner?" went on Phil, after a +pause, during which the boys watched the ship drawing away from the +island. + +"I sincerely hope so," was the serious reply. "If we don't, and +Jasniff gets away, this mission down here will have proved almost a +failure." + +"Then you think Jasniff has the most of the jewels?" + +"Yes. If you'll remember, the jewels that were taken were valued at +about seventy-five thousand dollars. Well, I have looked at the jewels +I got from Link, and so has Mr. Borden, who knows something about +gems, and we have come to the conclusion that those Link turned over +to me are not worth over fifteen thousand dollars. That means that +Jasniff has about sixty thousand dollars' worth." + +"Isn't that like Jasniff!" cried the senator's son. "Always wanted the +big end of everything! It's a wonder he and Link didn't quarrel +before." + +"They did quarrel, and Link wanted to leave him several times, but +didn't dare, for Jasniff threatened to expose him. In one way, I am +sorry for Link,--but, of course, he had no right to commit such a +deed." + +After Cave Island was left in the distance, Captain Sanders had a long +conference with Giles Borden concerning the Englishmen who had robbed +him. Later a general talk took place between the pair and the boys. + +"I am afraid we'll have to trust to luck to catch the _Aurora_ or +locate her," said the captain, finally. "She may go to San Juan and +she may go elsewhere." + +"If we pass any other vessels, can't we ask if they saw the schooner?" +ventured Dave. + +"Certainly." + +The day went by and also the next. Link Merwell kept to himself, only +speaking when addressed. He felt his position keenly, and would no +doubt have given a great deal if he could have cleared himself. He was +learning that the way of the transgressor is hard. + +On the third day, early in the morning, they passed a big barkentine +bound for South American ports. Greetings were exchanged, and Captain +Sanders asked concerning the _Aurora_. + +"Yes, we met her," was the reply. "Yesterday, about two bells in the +afternoon watch." + +"Did she say where she was bound?" + +"Bound for San Juan, Porto Rico." + +"Direct?" + +"Yes. She was going to stop elsewhere, but the captain allowed he'd +make straight for San Juan," added the captain of the barkentine, +through the megaphone he was using. Then, after a few words more, the +two vessels separated. + +"It's San Juan sure!" cried Dave. "From what Mr. Borden and Billy Dill +say of Captain Hunker he would not tell a falsehood. I guess the best +thing we can do is to sail for that port." + +"I think so myself," returned Captain Sanders. + +The chase was now a definite one, and Dave felt much relieved. He +wondered if they would be able to overtake the _Aurora_ before Porto +Rico was reached. + +"We can do that with ease," answered Captain Sanders when questioned. +"But even so, she may not stick to just the course we take, and we may +pass her in the night. So don't worry if we don't see or hear anything +before San Juan is reached." + +"I'll try not to worry," answered our hero. Yet he could not help it, +for so much depended on the successful outcome of his mission. He knew +that those at home must be in deep distress, and he could picture the +anxiety of Mr. Wadsworth and his wife and Jessie, and also the anxiety +of his own folks. + +"Oh, we've got to catch Jasniff and get back those jewels!" he told +himself. "We've simply got to do it! I won't give up, if I have to +follow him around the world!" + +It had been warm, but now the weather changed and a strong breeze made +living far more comfortable. The breeze was favorable to sailing, and +the _Golden Eagle_ plowed the deep at a good rate of speed. Many of +the islands of the Lesser Antilles were passed, and some truly +dangerous reefs, and then the course was straight for the harbor of +San Juan, on the northeastern coast of Porto Rico. + +They had seen nothing so far of the _Aurora_, but on the afternoon of +the last day out they were passed by a freight steamer from the south +and received word that the schooner was not far away and making for +San Juan. + +"I guess we had better go right in and get the authorities to take +hold," said Captain Sanders. "This is no matter for us to handle, now +we are in United States waters once more." + +Dave agreed; and as soon as possible they entered the harbor and went +ashore. It was an easy matter to notify the harbor police, and inside +of two hours half a dozen officers of the law were detailed to make +the necessary arrests. Dave and Giles Borden and Captain Sanders went +with them, leaving Phil, Roger, and the others aboard the _Golden +Eagle_. + +The patrol boat of the harbor police had to remain on the watch all +night and half the next morning before the _Aurora_ was sighted. + +"There she is!" cried Dave, at last, and Giles Borden echoed the +words. Then the patrol boat lost no time in steaming alongside of the +schooner. + +"Hello, what's wanted?" demanded Captain Hunker, as he saw the +officers of the law. + +"We'll come aboard, captain," said the officer in charge. + +"What's the matter?" + +"We are after four of your passengers." + +At that moment somebody appeared near the rail, to learn what the +shouting meant. It was Nick Jasniff. He gazed at the officers of the +law and then at Dave. As he recognized our hero his face fell and he +looked totally dumfounded. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX--HOMEWARD BOUND--CONCLUSION + + +"Jasniff, I want to see you!" shouted Dave. + +"What do you want of me, Dave Porter?" returned the big youth, as +boldly as he could. + +"You know well enough." + +"Humph! You think you've got me, don't you?" sneered Nick Jasniff, and +then he left the rail of the vessel and disappeared down a +companionway. + +By this time the officers of the law were boarding the _Aurora_, +accompanied by Giles Borden and Captain Sanders. + +"Where are those bloody rascals who robbed me?" exclaimed the +Englishman, excitedly. "Just let me get my hands on them!" + +"I don't understand this!" returned the captain of the schooner, in +surprise. "You'll have to explain." + +"You have three Englishmen aboard here--fellows you took to Cave Island +when I was with them." + +"Say, you're that fourth man!" gasped Captain Hunker. "But that other +chap,--the fellow with smoked glasses, who had his face tied up----" He +did not know how to go on. + +"He impersonated me, the villain! But I am after the others, for they +robbed me of over a thousand pounds, don't you know!" + +"Where are your passengers?" demanded the officer in charge of those +from the patrol boat, sternly. + +"If they are not on deck they must be below,--they had no chance to +leave the ship," answered Captain Hunker. "This gets me!" he went on, +weakly. "I thought they acted rather strange, but I supposed they were +nothing but a crowd of weak-minded critters hunting for pirates' +gold." + +At that moment Geswick, Pardell, and Rumney came on deck, having heard +the tramping of feet overhead and wondering what it meant. Almost +before he could speak, Giles Borden had Geswick by the throat and was +shaking him violently. + +"Will rob me, and leave me a prisoner in that cave!" he roared. "I'll +teach you a lesson! Give me my money, you bloody scoundrel!" And then +he banged Andrew Geswick's head against a mast. + +"Ho, let up!" yelled the criminal. "Let up, I say!" And he tried to +squirm away. But it was useless, and in a minute more one of the +officers of the law handcuffed him, and Pardell and Rumney were also +secured. + +"Now I want my money!" stormed Giles Borden. "Every shilling of it!" + +"I haven't any of it," replied Rumney. "Geswick and Pardell have it +all." Rumney had had a quarrel with his fellows, just as Merwell had +quarreled with Jasniff. + +"Just you wait, Rumney; we'll fix you for going back on us," growled +Andrew Geswick. But this threat did him little good. In the end he and +Pardell had to hand over every penny taken from Giles Borden, and then +they were marched off to jail, to await a hearing before the +authorities. + +In the meantime Dave had run across the deck and followed Jasniff down +the companionway. He was afraid that the evil-minded youth might hide +the stolen jewels or throw them overboard. + +When he got below he looked around, but could see nothing of the other +boy. He ran along a passageway, peering into one stateroom after +another, and also into the cabin and the pantry. Then he heard +something like a cover drop near by and hurried in that direction. + +Jasniff was in a corner stateroom on his hands and knees. Beside him +was a flat steamer trunk, which was closed. It was the lid of this +trunk that Dave had heard drop. + +"Jasniff, come out of that!" ordered Dave, sternly. "Come right out +and hand over those jewels." + +"Say, Dave Porter, you think you are smart, don't you?" sneered the +big youth, as he got up on his feet. + +"Never mind what I think. I want those jewels, every one of them, and +I am going to have them." + +"I haven't any jewels." + +"I know better." + +"All right then, you can search me if you want to--and search my +baggage, too," went on Jasniff, and held out his arms as if willing to +have the investigation begin on the spot. + +"If you haven't the jewels on your person, you have hidden them," went +on Dave. "Bring them out, right away." + +"Not much, Porter, I am not that kind of a fool." Jasniff lowered his +voice to a whisper. "To outsiders I won't acknowledge I have the +jewels, but if you'll fix it so I go clear, I'll see to it that old +Wadsworth gets the gems back." + +"I'll fix nothing, Jasniff, and you'll hand over every jewel, and do +it right now!" cried Dave, and now he was so angry that he leaped on +the criminal and threw him backward over the trunk. + +But if Dave was strong, so was Jasniff, and, as of old, the rascal +thought nothing of playing a foul trick. Around and around the +stateroom went both boys, with first Dave on top and then his +opponent. Then suddenly Jasniff pulled himself away and caught up a +water pitcher that was on a stand. + +"I'll fix you!" he roared, in the same tone of voice he had employed +when he had once attacked Dave in the Oak Hall gymnasium, and he +brought the heavy pitcher down straight for Dave's head. + +Had the blow landed as intended, our hero would have been knocked +senseless and perhaps seriously hurt. But quick as the bully was, Dave +was quicker, and leaped to one side. Then he let out with his fist, +landing on Jasniff's jaw,--a blow that sent the fellow crashing over +into a corner. As Jasniff came up, Dave hit him again, and this time +he went down all but knocked out. + +"Dave!" called a voice from the doorway at that moment, and Captain +Sanders appeared. "Having a tussle, eh? Want any help?" + +"May be," panted our hero. "He attacked me with the water-pitcher!" +And he pointed to the fragments of chinaware that lay on the floor. + +"Do-don't h-hit me again!" spluttered Nick Jasniff. + +"Will you hand over the jewels and behave yourself?" + +"I--I haven't got the jewels," and now Jasniff arose unsteadily to his +feet. + +"Perhaps he's hidden them," suggested the captain of the _Golden +Eagle_. "It would be like him to do it." + +"I'll search him first and then look around the room. Where are those +officers?" + +"They have their hands full just now with those Englishmen. But I'll +call them if you wish it." + +"No, just see that he doesn't get away," answered Dave. + +A rapid search of Jasniff's clothing told our hero that the rascal did +not have the gems on his person. Then Dave looked into the steamer +trunk. + +"Are they there?" inquired Captain Sanders. + +"No." + +"You'll never get them from me," growled Jasniff, and gave Dave a look +that was full of the keenest hatred. "I'll go to prison for life +before I'll give them up, now!" + +"Watch him carefully," said Dave to the captain, and got down on his +hands and knees in front of the berth in the room. + +"Nothing under there!" cried Jasniff, but his voice had a trace of +anxiety in it. + +Dave felt around, but found nothing unusual. Then he lit a match and +continued his search. Soon he saw where a board of the side wall had +been pried loose and then shoved back into place. He pulled on the +board and it came out, revealing a small compartment between two +upright posts. In the compartment was something wrapped in a bandanna +handkerchief. He pulled it out and crawled from under the berth. + +"I think I've found it," he said, in a voice he tried in vain to +steady. Then he untied the handkerchief and brought to light a money +belt, exactly like that taken from Link Merwell. He placed it on the +steamer trunk and opened it with care. The sight that met his gaze was +a dazzling one. The money-belt contained all that Jasniff had carried +of the Carwith jewels. + +"My, but that's a sight!" murmured Captain Sanders. + +"Going to return them, I suppose," sneered Nick Jasniff. "You're a big +fool to do it! I'd keep them, and have a good time on the proceeds." + +"I am not built that way," answered Dave, shortly. "I'll put this +around my waist, with the other," he added, and lost no time in +adjusting the second money-belt. It wasn't particularly comfortable to +wear those two belts, yet Dave felt a tremendous satisfaction in so +doing. + +Jasniff was made to march on deck, and there he was handcuffed like +the other prisoners. He no longer pretended to have a toothache, but +he did have a jaw-ache, from Dave's blow. + +The most surprised man was Captain Hunker, and he readily told his +story of how the Englishmen had hired him to take them to Cave Island +and then call for them later. When Jasniff had appeared, with the +smoked glasses and the bandage on his face, he had pitied the fellow +but had not paid much attention to him. When Dave had fired his gun +from the shore, Geswick had explained that other fortune hunters were +on the island but that they wanted nothing to do with the crowd, so +the master of the _Aurora_ had gone off without investigating. + +Inside of an hour all of the interested parties had gone ashore, and +the three rascally Englishmen and Nick Jasniff were marched off by the +officers of the law. Roger and Phil appeared and wanted to know the +particulars of the capture. + +"And what are you going to do next, Dave?" asked the senator's son. + +"Get back to Crumville with the jewels, just as soon as I can get +away. But I've got to arrange it with the police first." + +"Aren't you going to send word ahead?" asked Phil. + +"Of course. I'll send a cablegram to-day." + +"Won't they be surprised and glad to get it!" murmured Roger. + +"And maybe I'm not glad to be able to take the jewels back with me!" +answered Dave, his eyes glistening. + +An officer had been sent to take charge of Link Merwell, who had been +left on board the _Golden Eagle_. An hour later came word that Merwell +could not be found. He had left the vessel in some mysterious manner, +dressing himself in one of Dave's best suits before going. A little +later Dave learned that Merwell had left San Juan for the interior of +Porto Rico. The officers of the law said they would look for him. + +The cablegram to Mr. Wadsworth was sent, and soon a reply came back. +Then came nearly a week of waiting for a steamer that would take the +boys to New York. In the meantime matters were arranged with the +authorities so that they could get away, and take the jewels with +them. A detective accompanied them, to make certain that the jewels +would be properly delivered, for the whole case was now in the hands +of the law. Giles Borden remained in San Juan, to press his charge +against his fellow countrymen. Captain Sanders remained in the harbor, +to await orders from Phil's father. + +"Sorry to part with you boys," said the captain, as he shook hands. +"Hope you'll sail with me again some day." + +"An' sail with me, too," put in old Billy Dill, who was present, and +as much interested as anybody. + +"But not on such a mission as this has been," returned Dave. + +"Nor to such a place as Cave Island," added Roger. + +"For caves and pitfalls that island certainly was the limit," was +Phil's comment. + +The voyage to New York proved to be uneventful, and all of the lads +were glad when it was over. Arriving in the metropolis, they lost no +time in getting a train for Crumville, the detective going with them, +and Dave carrying the precious jewels. + +And then what a home-coming followed! All the Wadsworths and the +Porters were at the depot to meet them, and everybody was brimming +over with good feeling. Mrs. Wadsworth fairly hugged Dave, and Laura +kissed him over and over again, and even Jessie could not resist the +temptation to rush into his arms. + +"Oh, Dave, to think you really got the jewels!" said Jessie. "Oh, I'm +so glad! What a hero you are!" And she gave him a look that touched +him to the bottom of the heart. + +And then came Mr. Wadsworth, his voice shaking with emotion, and then +Dave's father, and Uncle Dunston. + +"One lad out of a million!" murmured the manufacturer. "Mr. Porter, +you can well be proud of Dave!" + +"And I am proud of him," replied the parent, heartily. + +"We are all proud," added Dunston Porter. + +In the excitement it must not be supposed that Phil and Roger were +forgotten. While Dave related his story to the men, and delivered the +jewels to Mr. Wadsworth, his chums had to tell about all that had +occurred, to Mrs. Wadsworth and the girls. And the questions that were +asked and answered would fill a chapter and more. + +"And what will they do to Jasniff?" asked Laura. + +"Undoubtedly put him in prison for a number of years," answered the +senator's son. "And he deserves it." + +"What a misspent life!" sighed Mrs. Wadsworth. + +"And what about Link Merwell?" asked Jessie. + +"I don't know what they'll do to him. Perhaps they won't catch him," +said Phil. + +"If they don't, I hope he turns over a new leaf and makes a real man +of himself," said Laura. + +Dave had gone to the jewelry works with the men, and soon Phil and +Roger followed. Here the jewels were examined with care, being checked +off on a list,--the duplicate of a receipt Oliver Wadsworth had given +to the owner of the gems. + +"Four stones are missing," announced the manufacturer. "And they are +worth less than a thousand dollars. Dave, you certainly did well." + +"We can get back at least two of those stones," answered Dave. "The +pawnbrokers will have to give them up." + +"Then the loss will be less than five hundred dollars--a mere trifle +alongside of what it might have been. Dave, I'll not offer you a +reward, for I know you won't take it. But I thank you, my boy, I thank +you most heartily!" And Mr. Wadsworth caught Dave by both hands, while +tears of emotion stood in his eyes. + +"It saved us all from a tight place, if not ruin," added Dunston +Porter. + +"How is that old watchman?" asked our hero, to change the subject. + +"You mean the man who was hurt?" asked his father. "He is about as +well as ever." + +"And have you heard from Hooker Montgomery?" + +"Not a word, and we sha'n't need to, now." + +"Any word from Oak Hall?" asked Roger. + +"Yes, the place opened again last week." + +"Then I suppose we'll have to get back once more," said Phil. "Well, +we've had a long enough vacation,--if you can call it such," he added, +with a grin. + +"And such adventures!" murmured Roger. "We'll never see such strenuous +times again, eh, Dave?" + +"There is no telling, we may," answered Dave. There were still many +adventures ahead, and what they were will be related in the next +volume of this series, to be entitled, "Dave Porter and the Runaways; +or, Last Days at Oak Hall," in which we shall meet our hero and his +chums and enemies once more. + +"If we are to go back to Oak Hall so soon, let us have all the fun we +can," said Dave, after the matter of the jewels had been settled; and +the next day he and his chums and the girls went out for a grand +sleighride, for it was still winter at home, even though it had been +like summer on Cave Island. + +"Dave, are you glad to be back?" asked Jessie, while they were gliding +over the snow. + +"Yes, I am," he answered. "And doubly glad to be here, at your side," +he added, in a lower voice. + +"Oh, Dave, I was so afraid while you were away!" + +"Of what?" + +"That those bad boys would harm you! Oh, please be careful in the +future, for my sake." + +"All right, Jessie, I'll be careful," he answered, and then, under the +big robe, he gave her little hand a tight squeeze, and I don't know +but that Jessie gave him a squeeze in return. To her Dave was the +finest boy in all the world. + +"Let's have a song!" cried out Phil, from the seat in front. + +"Right you are!" returned Dave. "What shall it be?" + +"Oh, anything!" came from the girls in concert; and then they started +to sing one familiar song after another; and while they are singing +let us say good-by and take our leave. + + + THE END + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Dave Porter on Cave Island, by Edward Stratemeyer + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DAVE PORTER ON CAVE ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 36377.txt or 36377.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/7/36377/ + +Produced by Roger Frank, David Edwards and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/36377.zip b/36377.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c088697 --- /dev/null +++ b/36377.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84aca19 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #36377 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/36377) |
